Volume 4 - LINE PROCEDURESassets.lapdonline.org/assets/pdf/volume4.pdf · Volume 4 - LINE...

Volume 4 - LINE PROCEDURES

2005 Manual of the Los Angeles Police Department 273

VOLUME 4

COMMUNICATIONS

105. DEPARTMENTCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM.105.10 RESTRICTED USE OFDEPARTMENTAL COMMUNICATIONSYSTEM. The Departmental communicationssystem consists of the Emergency CommandControl Communications System (ECCCS)Division, radio, microwave, closed-circuittelevision, telephone, gamewell, mail,computer, and messenger service.

The Department's communication system shallbe used only for official policecommunications. Employees shall not use thesystem for transmitting messages of a personalnature, disseminating commercial advertising,or for the purpose of promoting anycommercial or business interests.

105.15 AUTHORIZED USE OFELECTRONIC MAIL (E-MAIL). The use ofE-mail involves the creation or receipt ofelectronic communications over theDepartment's Wide Area Computer Network(WAN). E-mail is available to Departmentemployees to facilitate communication andassist them in their work-related duties. It isoffered as a tool to enable employees to workmore efficiently in advancing the Department'smission.

Employees shall use E-mail only for officialpolice communication. E-mail shall not beused for transmitting messages of a personalnature, for playing computer games, or forunprofessional communications such asdisseminating material or messages which aredefamatory, sexually oriented, threatening,hateful or bigoted, or for the purpose ofpromoting any political, religious, or non-Departmental business interest. Employeesshall not attempt to gain unauthorized access toanother person's E-mail, copy the E-mail ofother employees, or send E-mail masqueradingas another employee. The Department reservesthe right to monitor E-mail correspondence toprevent abuse. The Department also reservesall rights to read, copy, or remove files fromany drive or directory, or to revoke, suspend,or limit an employee's access to the WAN.

Audit Division, Consent Decree Bureau’sResponsibility. Audit Division, ConsentDecree Bureau, shall be responsible forauditing activity on the electronic mail (E-mail) network Department-wide.

105.20 MONITORING DEPARTMENTRADIO FREQUENCIES. CommunicationsDivision shall monitor Department radiofrequencies and shall publish a quarterly reporton radio frequency abuse. Specific violationsshall be brought to the attention of concernedcommanding officers.

Note: Administrative Unit, Detective SupportDivision, shall also monitor tacticalfrequencies and shall report any frequencyabuse to the Commanding Officer,Communications Division.

110. RADIO UNIT DESIGNATIONS.110.10 STAFF UNIT DESIGNATIONS.Staff radio designations are not reflective ofstaff succession of command. Staff units shallbe identified as follows:*Executive 1: Mayor.*Executive 1A: Deputy Mayor.*Executive 1B: Executive Assistant to the Mayor.*Commissioner 1: President, Board of Police

Commissioners.*Commissioner 2: Vice President, Board of Police

Commissioners.*Commissioner 3,4, Members, Board of

or 5 Police Commissioners.*Commission Staff 1: Executive Director, Police Commission.*Commission Staff 2: Inspector General, Police Commission.*Staff 1: Chief of Police.*Staff Security 1A: Chief's Security Detail.*Staff Security 1B: Chief's Security Detail.*Staff Security 1C: Chief's Security Detail (Alternate).*Staff 1D: Chief of Staff.*Staff 1E: Commanding Officer, Public Information

Office. *Staff 1F: Commanding Officer, Employee

Relations Group.*Staff 1G: Commanding Officer, Professional

Standards Bureau.*Staff 1I Commanding Officer, Internal Affairs

Group.*Staff 1J: Commanding Officer, Counter Terrorism

and Criminal Intelligence Bureau.*Staff 1K: Assistant Commanding Officer, Counter

Terrorism and Criminal IntelligenceBureau.

*Staff 1L: Commanding Officer, Consent DecreeBureau.

*Staff 1M: Commanding Officer, Risk ManagementGroup.

*Staff 2: Director, Office of Operations.*Staff 2A: Assistant to the Director, Office of

Operations.*Staff 2B: Commanding Officer, Detective Bureau.*Staff 2C: Assistant Commanding Officer,

Detective Bureau.*Staff 2D: Commanding Officer, Special Operations

Bureau.*Staff 2E: Assistant Commanding Officer, Special

Operations Bureau.*Staff 3: Director, Office of Support Services.*Staff 3A: Executive Officer, Office of Support

Services.*Staff 3B: Commanding Officer, TEAMS II

Development Bureau.*Staff 3C: Commanding Officer, Administrative

and Technical Services Bureau.*Staff 3D: Assistant Commanding Officer,

Administrative and TechnicalServices Bureau.

*Staff 3E: Commanding Officer, Information andCommunications Services Bureau.

*Staff 3F: Assistant Commanding Officer,Information and CommunicationsServices Bureau.

*Staff 3G: Commanding Officer, Personnel Group.*Staff 3H: Commanding Officer, Training Group.*Staff 3I: Commanding Officer, Police Training

and Education.*Staff 3J: Commanding Officer, Behavioral

Science Services*Staff 4: Commanding Officer,

Operations-Central Bureau.*Staff 4A: Assistant Commanding Officer,

Operations-Central Bureau.*Staff 5: Commanding Officer,

Operations-South Bureau.*Staff 5A: Assistant Commanding Officer,

Operations-South Bureau.*Staff 6: Commanding Officer,

Operations-West Bureau.*Staff 6A: Assistant Commanding Officer,

Operations-West Bureau.*Staff 7: Commanding Officer,

Operations-Valley Bureau.*Staff 7A: Assistant Commanding Officer,

Operations-Valley Bureau.

110.20 NONGEOGRAPHIC DIVISIONUNIT DESIGNATIONS. Divisioncommanding officer units shall be identified bythe word “Commander” followed by the

number and/or letter(s) of the respectivedivision. All other personnel shall beidentified by the number and/or letter(s) of therespective division followed by the numericaldesignation assigned by the CommandingOfficer.*Chief of Staff7H: Use of Force Review Division

*Assistant to the Director, Office of Operations1H: Jail Division

*Detective Bureau5D: Investigative Analysis Unit/Detective Bureau

Administrative Staff8K: Juvenile Division1K: Detective Support Division4K: Robbery-Homicide Division7Y: Narcotics Division8Y: Narcotics Division9Y: Narcotics Division4I: Vice Division5I: Vice Division2K: Commercial Crimes Division

*Special Operations BureauR: Metropolitan Division2D: Air Support Division1D: Traffic Coordination Section6D: Special Operations Support Division4D: Personnel Assigned to Special Operations Bureau

*Consent Decree Bureau15I: Risk Management Group10I: Civil Rights Integrity Division19I: Audit Division

*Counter Terrorism and Criminal Intelligence Bureau3D: Emergency Services Division3DK9: LAX Explosives Detection K-9 Unit6K: Major Crimes Division10Y: Personnel Assigned to Counter Terrorism and Criminal

Intelligence Bureau

*Employee Relations Group6H: Employee Relations Section17H: Personnel Assigned to Employee Relations Group

*Training Group18H: Training Division13H: Personnel Assigned to Training Group

*Personnel Group5H: Personnel Division20H: Personnel Assigned to Personnel Group21H: Volunteer Services Section22H: Officer Representation Section23H: Hiring and Evaluation Section24H: Recruitment Section

*Information and Communications Services Bureau3H: Information Technology Division10H: Communications Division12H: Records and Identification Division16H: Emergency Command Control Communications System

Division28H: Crime Analysis Section25H: Personnel Assigned to Information and Communications

Services Bureau

*Administrative and Technical Services Bureau2H: Scientific Investigation Division4H: Motor Transport Division8H: Fiscal Operations Division9H: Property Division11H: Facilities Management Division26H: Assistant C/O, Administrative and Technical Services

Bureau27 H: Personnel Assigned to Administrative and Technical

Services Bureau

*Professional Standards Bureau 15I: Personnel Assigned to the Professional Standards Bureau

*Ombuds Office16I: Wellness Coordinator17I: Women’s Coordinator18I: Personnel Assigned to Ombuds Office

*Internal Affairs Group3I: Personnel Assigned to Internal Affairs Group

*Executive Officer, Office of Support Services7I: Planning and Research Division21I: Personnel Assigned to Executive Officer

*Governmental Liaison Section22I: Liaison Section23I: Personnel Assigned to Governmental Liaison Section

*Public Information Office9I: Media Relations Section



11I: Public Communications Section12I: Personnel Assigned to Public Information Office

*Chief of Police8I: Chief’s Operations Duty Officer24I: Personnel Assigned to Chief of Police

*Police Commission1N: Commission Investigation Division

110.30 GEOGRAPHIC COMMANDINGOFFICER UNIT DESIGNATIONS.Commands Within Geographic Areas.Commanding officers within geographic Areasshall be identified by the word "Commander"followed by the number of the Area and theletter "A" "B" or “C.” The letter "A" shallindicate Area Commanding Officer, "B" shallindicate the Patrol Division CommandingOfficer, and “C” shall indicate the AreaDetective Division Commanding Officer.

Geographic Bureaus. Personnel assigned tothe Sexual Assault Detail at the geographicbureaus shall be identified by the followingdesignations:

∗ 20W: Operations-Central Bureau∗ 21W: Operations-South Bureau∗ 22W: Operations-West Bureau∗ 23W: Operations-Valley Bureau

Traffic Divisions. Line traffic divisioncommanding officer units shall be identified bythe word "Commander" followed by thenumber and/or letters of their respectivedivisions of assignment:

∗ 24T: Central Traffic Division∗ 25T: South Traffic Division∗ 27T: West Traffic Division∗ 26T: Valley Traffic Division

110.40 FIELD UNIT DESIGNATIONS.Unit designations shall be stated by all units atthe beginning of each transmission:

∗ Patrol Unit Designations. Patrol units shallbe identified by the number of thecommunity police station with theapplicable service letter (Manual Section4/110.50), and a unit number correspondingto one of the numbered reporting districtsassociated with the command.

∗ Traffic Unit Designations. Traffic unitsshall be identified by the number of thetraffic division of assignment with theapplicable service letter (Manual Section4/110.50), and unit numbers assigned inconsecutive order beginning with thenumber "1."

∗ Non-geographic Division UnitDesignations. Non-geographic divisionunits shall be identified by the numberand/or letter of the division (Manual Section4/110.20) and the unit numbers assigned bythe concerned commanding officer.

∗ Watch Commanders. Watch commandersshall be assigned the unit number "10."

∗ Community Relations Officer. Thecommunity police station communityrelations officer shall be assigned the unitnumber "80."

∗ Air Support Unit Designations. Regularair flights shall be designated by the word"Air," followed by the correspondingcommunity police station number to whichthe flight is primarily committed (e.g., Air3 would be assigned to an air flight withprimary commitment in Southwest Area).

Special air flights will be designated "Air20" through "Air 100" by the CommandingOfficer, Air Support Division.

Note: The Air Support Division station wagon,when assigned to a command post, shall bedesignated "2D100."

∗ Metropolitan Division Units. MetropolitanDivision units shall be identified by theletter "R" and unit numbers assigned inconsecutive order beginning with thenumber "1."

∗ Base Stations. Base stations shall beidentified by the number of the division orcommunity police station, the applicableservice letter (Manual Section 4/110.50), ateam number, if applicable, and the unitnumber "90."

Exception: Pacific Community Police Stationairport substation shall be known as "AirportBase."

∗ Portable Radio Unit Designations.Officers using portable radio equipmentshall use a designation consistent with theirdivision of assignment unless otherdesignations are authorized by thecommanding officer.

∗ Supervisors. Supervisors, other than thoseassigned to a community police station,shall be assigned a unit number ending in"zero" exclusive of the numbers "10" and"90."

∗ Watch Supervisor. Watch supervisoryunits shall be identified by the number ofthe respective community police station, theletter "L," and a two digit number ending in"zero." The number "10" shall designate theWatch Commander.

∗ Detective Units. Detective units shall beidentified by the number of the communitypolice station/division, the letter "W," andthe unit's numerical designation. DetectiveDivision supervisory units shall be assignednumbers ending in "zero."

110.50 SERVICE IDENTIFICATIONLETTERS. The following letters indicate thetype of service to which mobile radio units areassigned:*A: Basic Car unit.*Air: Air patrol unit.*B: Two-Officer patrol wagon.*C: Bicycle detail.*E: Traffic enforcement automobile unit.*F: Special unit.*G: Bureau Gang Coordinator or Area Gang Impact

Team, Gang Enforcement Detail.*FB: Uniformed foot-beat patrol.*J: Juvenile unit.*JW: Juvenile female police officer unit.*L: One-Officer unit. ( "X" or "T" units shall use the

letter "L" following the regular service letter whenapplicable.) Also used as the geographic fieldservices division base station designation.

*M: Traffic enforcement motorcycle unit.*N: Unit assigned to Commission Investigation Division.*OP: Observation post assignment during special event or

unusual occurrence.*Q: Special event or unusual occurrence unit.

Note: The activation of the designation and thecoordination of assigning specific identificationnumbers shall be through CommunicationsDivision.

*R: Metropolitan Division unit.*RA: Fire Department rescue ambulance unit.*T: Collision investigation unit.*U: Report-taking unit.*V: Area vice unit.*W: Geographic detective unit.*X: Additional patrol unit in an assignment district.*Y: A unit assigned to a division in the Counter

Terrorism and Criminal Intelligence Bureau.*Z: Geographic uniformed unit assigned to a special

detail, or a Career Criminal Detail.

110.60 MOBILE COMMAND FLEETUNIT DESIGNATIONS. The mobilecommand fleet shall be identified as follows:Mobile One: Command post truck.Mobile Two: Logistics vehicle.Mobile Three: Communications unit.Mobile Four: Personnel and field transportation office.Mobile Five: Has generator for electrical power and a trailer

to serve as the command point at the fieldcommand post location.

Mobile Seven: Tactical operations center.Sound One: Truck with high-volume public address

system.Sound Two: Same as Sound 1.Light One: High-intensity illumination truck.Light Two: Same as Light 1.Mobile Canteen Used to prepare and serve food to officers at

the command post.

110.70 COMMAND POSTDESIGNATIONS.Department Operations Center. TheDepartment Operations Center, or any otherlocation or facility activated for overallDepartment control during an emergency, shallbe identified as Department Command.

Field Command Post. A field command postshall be identified as "Command Post." If morethan one post is needed, the numericaldesignations shall be established by"Department Command."

110.80 OUTSIDE AGENCY UNITDESIGNATIONS. Units operated by outsideagencies shall be identified as follows:

Federal Bureau of Investigation Units.Numbers in the "400" and "500" series.

University of California at Los AngelesCampus Units. "8UC" and unit numbers in the"50" series.

Military Police Units. "Special Agent 51" and"Special Agent 52."

Traffic Signal Repair Units. "TSR" and unitnumbers assigned in consecutive orderbeginning with the number "1."

120. RADIO TERMINOLOGY,CODES AND CRIME BROADCASTS.120.10 RADIO CALL LETTERS. The callletters, "KJC-625," shall be used by theDepartment's fixed radio stations.

120.20 USE OF RADIO CALLLETTERS.By All Radio Operators. Radio operatorsshall not call either a fixed station or a mobileunit by its’ call letters. The unit designationshall be used when addressing a fixed station.

By Controls. All controls shall broadcast thestation-call letters once each fifteen minutes.They need not do so at the end of eachtransmission.



120.30 ASSOCIATION OF PUBLICSAFETY COMMUNICATION OFFICERS(APCO) CODE WORD LIST. The followingcode words shall be used, when applicable, inlocal radio transmissions:A Adam H Henry O Ocean V VictorB Boy I Ida P Paul W WilliamC Charles J John Q Queen X X-rayD David K King R Robert Y YoungE Edward L Lincoln S Sam Z ZebraF Frank M Mary T TomG George N Nora U Union

120.40 RADIO CODES ANDPROCEDURES. The following codes andphrases shall be used, when applicable, in localradio transmissions:

∗ Officer Needs Help. This emergency callshall be broadcast when immediate aid isrequired by an officer. The officerrequesting shall include the location,followed, if possible, by the unitidentification and all other pertinentinformation. A specific unit shall bedispatched "Code Three" and otheravailable units in the vicinity shall respond"Code Two." An "Officer Needs Help" callshall not be broadcast when "assistance"only is needed. The Department willprovide assistance and respond to "OfficerNeeds Help" calls within the City whenrequested by the CHP. The senior officer ofthe agency requesting emergency assistanceshall be in charge of the incident unless theincident involves a situation which is theresponsibility of the other agency, in whichcase the senior officer of the responsibleagency will be in charge.

∗ Firefighter Needs Help. This emergencycall shall be broadcast when immediatepolice assistance is required becausefirefighters are being attacked, attack isimminent, or other emergency exists. Aspecific unit shall be dispatched "CodeThree" and other available units in thevicinity shall respond "Code Two."

∗ Officer Needs Assistance. This call shall bebroadcast when additional aid is required byan officer. The officer requesting shallinclude the location, followed by the unitidentification and all other pertinentinformation, including the reason forrequest. A specific unit shall be dispatched"Code Two" and other available units in thevicinity shall respond when practicable.

∗ Firefighter Needs Assistance. This callshall be broadcast when police assistance isrequired due to hostile crowd action or otherincident. A specific unit shall be dispatched"Code Two" and other available units in thevicinity shall respond, when practicable.

∗ Back-up Unit Request. This call shall bebroadcast when an additional unit isrequired by an officer. The officerrequesting shall include the location,followed by the unit identification and allother pertinent information. Only thespecific unit dispatched shall respond. Therequest shall be canceled when, prior to thearrival of the assigned back-up unit, it is

determined that an additional unit will notbe needed.

∗ "Pursuit" Procedure. A unit announcinga "Pursuit" shall begin the message bystating that the unit is in "Pursuit" andgiving the location, followed, if possible, bythe unit identification, description ofpursued vehicle, and/or suspects, directiontaken, and reason for pursuit. The pursuingunit shall give frequent and comprehensiveprogress reports as conditions permit. Anyunit having information regarding the"Pursuit" may transmit. CommunicationsDivision will broadcast advisoryinformation concerning pursuits by the CHPwithin the City. Department personnel shallnot become involved in CHP pursuits on thefreeways unless for serious feloniescommitted within the City of Los Angeles.

∗ Code One. When the control operator failsto receive an acknowledgment of acommunication, a "Code One" shall begiven. The unit to which a "Code One" isdirected shall acknowledge immediatelyupon hearing a "Code One."

∗ Code Two. A radio call accompanied by a"Code Two" designation is an urgent calland shall be answered immediately. The redlight and siren shall not be used, and alltraffic laws shall be observed.

Note. Officers responding to a "Code Two"radio call shall only interrupt the CodeTwo call to perform police work of majorimportance (Manual Section 0/030).

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers whointerrupt their response to a Code Two calldue to police work of major importance orother exigent circumstances shallimmediately notify CommunicationsDivision. Officers who interrupt theirresponse to a Code Two call for morethan a brief delay to evaluate thecomparative urgency of an interveningincident shall also request CommunicationsDivision to reassign the call and shallimmediately notify a concernedDepartment supervisor. No notification isrequired when a Code Two call isinterrupted at the direction of eitherCommunications Division or a Departmentsupervisor. Officers shall document thereason for the interruption with anappropriate log entry on their Daily FieldActivities Report (DFAR), Form 15.52.0 or15.52.1.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Concernedsupervisors shall ensure that eachinterrupted response which resulted inreassignment of a Code Two call isevaluated for appropriateness. In makingthis evaluation, the concerned supervisorshould consider monitoring the divisionalradio frequency, reviewing relevant logentries, responding to the scene of theinterruption, or other appropriate action.

∗ Code Three. A radio call accompanied bya "Code Three" designation is an

emergency call. It shall be answeredimmediately, but in a manner which willenable the unit to reach the scene as quicklyas possible with safety. Exemption fromprovisions of the Vehicle Code (Division11) is granted only when officers sound asiren as reasonably necessary and theofficers’ vehicle displays a lighted red lampvisible from the front.

Any call may justify a "Code Three" if anyof the following elements are present:

∗ A serious public hazard.∗ The preservation of life.∗ A crime of violence in progress.∗ The prevention of a crime of violence.∗ An immediate pursuit.∗ A unit at the scene requests another unit

"Code Three."

The final decision for the use of "CodeThree," other than in response to a directedradio call, shall be made by the vehicleoperator.

An officer shall immediately broadcast hisintention to proceed "Code Three" whenthe decision is based on other than adirected police radio call. The "CodeThree" broadcast shall include the natureand location of the activity and, whenknown, the starting point, route of travel,and destination.

Exception: Whenever officers activatetheir Code Three equipment in conjunctionwith mobile field tactics at the scene of ariotous incident, a "Code Three"notification to Communications Division isnot required.

Note: Officers traveling to the scene of ariotous incident in a mobile field forceconfiguration with their Code Threeequipment activated shall still notifyCommunications Division that they aretraveling Code Three.

When the "Code Three" has beenterminated, the officer shall notifyCommunications Division as soon aspracticable.

When more than one unit is "Code Three"in the same general area, they shall benotified by Communications Division thatother units are "Code Three" in thevicinity.

∗ Code Four. When additional assistance isnot needed at the scene of an "All Units"call, a "Code Four," followed by thelocation of the call, shall be broadcast.Radio units which are not assigned to thecall and which are not at the scene shallreturn to their assigned patrol area when a"Code Four" is broadcast.

∗ Code Four Adam. When additionalassistance is not needed at the scene of an"All Units," call but the suspect is still inthe vicinity, a "Code Four Adam," followedby the location of the call, shall be



broadcast. This should then be followed bya description of the suspect. Radio unitswhich are not assigned to the call but whichare on the way to the scene shall, when a"Code Four Adam" is broadcast, patrol orpost themselves at strategic locations nearthe scene.

∗ Code Five. A unit intending to "stakeout"shall notify the control operator of thelocation and request a "Code Five." Thecontrol operator, upon receipt of themessage, shall immediately broadcast thatthere is a "Code Five" at the particularlocation. All units shall avoid the vicinityexcept in an emergency or in response to acall.

∗ Clearing Code Five. When the need for a"Code Five" no longer exists, theoriginating unit, or the last unit to leave thescene, shall request the control operator toclear the "Code Five" at the particularlocation.

∗ Code Five Edward. A "Code Five Edward"shall be used to notify Air Support Division(ASD) personnel of an explosive hazard tolow-altitude aircraft. All units shall avoidthe vicinity except in an emergency or in aresponse to a call for service.

Officer’s Responsibility. An officerdetermining that an explosive hazard exists tolow-altitude aircraft shall immediately notifyCommunications Division of a "Code FiveEdward" via telephone or radio.

Note: Radio or Mobil Data Terminal (MDT)communications may detonate an explosivedevice. All radio or MDT communicationsshould be made approximately one block (500feet) away from the "Code Five Edward"location.

The officer shall inform CommunicationsDivision of the "Code Five Edward" location,and the area of the established perimeter (asmeasured in feet) around the bombdevice/explosive hazard.

Note: If personnel from the Hazardous DevicesSection, Emergency Services Division,determine that the established perimeter isinsufficient for the potential hazard renderedfrom a suspected explosive device, they shallimmediately notify Communications Divisionof the expanded perimeter as measured in feet.

A "Code Five Edward" notification shall bemade in addition to all the other Departmentrequirements for investigations involvingexplosives (Manual Section 4/212.50), whenthe following circumstances exist:

∗ Incident involving an explosive devicewhich is in an exposed (open air) area orwill be moved to an exposed area;

∗ Incident where the Hazardous DevicesSection intends to "render-safe" anyexplosive item in an exposed area; and,

∗ Incidents involving any explosives (indoorsor outdoors) where the explosion couldresult in blast pressures that may behazardous to aircraft operations.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. The concernedsupervisor shall ensure that CommunicationsDivision is notified of any perimeteradjustment. When the need for a "Code FiveEdward" no longer exists, the concernedsupervisor shall ensure that CommunicationsDivision is notified to clear the "Code FiveEdward."

Communication Division’s Responsibility.Upon receiving notification of a "Code FiveEdward," the Radio Telephone Operator(RTO) shall immediately broadcast the "CodeFive Edward" notification and the location.

The Watch Commander, CommunicationsDivision, shall ensure that the WatchCommander, ASD, is notified of the "CodeFive Edward" broadcast and any adjustedperimeter throughout the incident.

Watch Commander, ASD’s Responsibility.Upon notification of the "Code Five Edward"location, the Watch commander, ASD, shallensure that deployed Department aircraft arenotified of the "Code Five Edward" locationand any adjusted perimeter throughout theincident. The Watch Commander, ASD, shallfurther ensure that similar broadcasts areprovided to media aircraft in the area.

Note: Department pilots shall determine a safealtitude for any Department aircraft respondingto a "Code Five Edward" location uponnotification of any perimeter adjustment.

∗ Code Six. When a unit is conducting a fieldinvestigation and no assistance isanticipated, a "Code Six,” followed by thelocation, shall be broadcast. A unit shall notgo "Code Six" until it arrives at the scene ofa call.

Units on "Code Six" status shall remainavailable for reassignment to priority callsby monitoring their radio frequencies. Aunit on "Code Six" status may indicate tothe dispatcher additional circumstanceswhich will make the unit unavailable forassignment to a priority call. Thesecircumstances may include:

∗ Suspect in custody;∗ Primary unit at a crime scene; and/or,∗ Required at a back-up, assistance, or help

location.

Note: The unit shall notify the dispatcheras soon as it is again available for radiocalls.

∗ Code Six Adam. When an officer may needassistance in conducting an investigation,the officer should broadcast "Code SixAdam" with his or her location. Other radiounits in the vicinity should then patrol in thegeneral direction of the given location.Officers should not ordinarily leave theirassigned districts but should deploy to anadvantageous position in the event thatassistance is later requested. When a unitbroadcasts "Code Six Adam" and later findsthat assistance will not be needed, a "Code

Four" and the location shall be givenwithout delay.

∗ Code Six Charles. When a one-officer unitreceives a "Code Six Charles" in answer toa request for information on a suspect, theofficer shall place himself or herself in aposition of advantage over the suspect whileawaiting arrival of assistance. When controlis obtained, the one-officer unit may requestand receive the want/warrant informationfrom the Radio Telephone Operator (RTO).When a "Code Six Charles" is received bya two-officer unit, the officers shallimmediately place themselves in positionsof advantage over the suspect. When controlis obtained, the unit shall request thewant/warrant information from the RTO.

∗ Code Six George. When an officer mayneed assistance in conducting aninvestigation concerning possible gangactivity, the officer should broadcast "CodeSix George" and the location. An availableGang Enforcement Detail Unit shouldrespond, while other radio units in thevicinity should then patrol in the generaldirection of the location given. Officersshould not ordinarily leave their assigneddistricts but should deploy to anadvantageous position in the event thatassistance is later requested. When a unitbroadcasts "Code Six George" and laterfinds that assistance will not be needed, a"Code Four" and the location shall be givenwithout delay.

∗ Code Six Mary. When an officer may needassistance in conducting an investigationconcerning possible militant activity, he/sheshould broadcast "Code Six Mary" with hisor her location. Other radio units in thevicinity should then patrol in the generaldirection of the given location. Officersshould not ordinarily leave their assigneddistricts but should deploy to anadvantageous position in the event thatassistance is later requested. When a unitbroadcasts "Code Six Mary" and later findsthat assistance will not be needed, a "CodeFour" and the location shall be givenwithout delay.

∗ Code Seven. When a unit desires to go outof service for free time, a request for "CodeSeven," accompanied by the location his/herassigned vehicle will be parked, shall betransmitted to the control. The controloperator shall instruct the unit to "Stand By"until it can be determined whether therequest can be immediately granted. If therequest cannot be granted, the controloperator shall instruct the unit to "ContinuePatrol." If the request is granted, the controloperator shall inform the unit "OK forSeven."

∗ Code Eight. This call is broadcast forgeneral information when a fire has beenreported at a specific location where there isa high fire hazard or a threat of personaldanger to firefighters from hostile groups.Units in the vicinity should respond to thecall but remain on the air available for callsunless it is necessary to assist or investigate.



"Code Six" shall be used when it isnecessary to go off the air.

∗ Code Eight Adam. This call is broadcastwhen Communications Division hasreceived notification from the FireDepartment confirming an active, verifiedfire at a specific location and the seniorofficer at the scene has requested additionalfire units. A specific police unit shall beassigned the call to assist with traffic orcrowd control.

∗ Code Ten. This call is broadcast when aclear frequency is required to check asuspect for wants and/or warrants. When anofficer desires a clear frequency to check asuspect for wants and/or warrants, he/sheshall:

∗ Determine that the frequency is not inuse;

∗ Identify himself/herself with his or herunit number;

∗ Request "Code Ten," and state thenumber of suspects to be checked; and,

∗ Indicate whether suspects are juveniles.

Note: A "Code Ten" designation shall notbe used to request a clear frequency forcrime information broadcasts or any otherinformation, except as specified above.

∗ Code Twelve. An officer who responds toa "Code Thirty," "Code Thirty Adam,""Code Thirty-Ringer," "Code ThirtyVictor," or a 211 silent, and determines thatthere is no evidence of a burglary orrobbery, and it appears that the false alarmwas caused by equipment malfunction orsubscriber error, shall broadcast "CodeTwelve," the address, and firm name, if any.

Note: A "Code Twelve" shall be broadcast,in addition to any crime information, whena 211 silent alarm is used to summon thepolice for reasons other than a robbery.

∗ Code Twenty. When a traffic collision orother event being investigated is of such aspectacular nature or is sufficiently unusualthat accounts of it would stimulate generalpublic interest, the phrase "Code Twenty,"accompanied by the location of the accidentor event, shall be transmitted to the control.

∗ Code Thirty. This call is broadcast forgeneral information when a silent burglaralarm has been reported by an alarmcompany or by an automatic tape message.Units in the vicinity should respond to thecall but remain available for calls unless itis necessary to go "Code Six" for thepurpose of assistance or investigation.

Note: Watch Commanders and supervisorsshould encourage officers to respond tounverified burglar alarm calls in their BasicCar Area whenever possible, or when anavailable unit is in the area of an unverifiedburglar alarm call.

∗ Code Thirty Adam. This call is broadcastwhen a silent burglar alarm has been

reported by an alarm company and thelocation is being monitored audibly. Unitsin the vicinity should respond to the call butremain available for calls unless it isnecessary to go "Code Six" for the purposeof assistance or investigation.

Note: If the location appears to be secure,officers shall ascertain, via Communications,whether the alarm company is monitoring anyactivity within the location.

∗ Code Thirty-Ringer. This call is broadcastwhen a Communications dispatcher receivesinformation that a ringing burglar alarm hasbeen activated. Units in the vicinity shouldrespond to the call but remain available forcalls unless it is necessary to go "Code Six"for the purpose of assistance orinvestigation.

∗ Code Thirty Victor. This call is broadcastwhen a visual verification alarm has beenactivated. Upon receipt of the alarmactivation and the display of photographsdepicting an intruder, the alarm companywill notify Communications Division. Aunit shall be dispatched to respond to thecall immediately. Officers responding shallonly be interrupted to perform police workof major importance or to respond to ahigher priority radio call.

Note: If the location appears to be secure,officers shall ascertain, viaCommunications, whether the alarmcompany is monitoring any activity withinthe location.

∗ Code Thirty-Seven. CommunicationsDivision Radio Telephone Operatorsrunning want/warrant information for fieldpersonnel shall broadcast a "CodeThirty-Seven" when stolen vehicleinformation is returned on vehicle licensenumbers. Field personnel shall employappropriate defensive tactics and/or reportpertinent information such as location,direction of travel, vehicle description, untilcontrol is assured.

When the suspect(s) are under the completecontrol of SWORN PERSONNEL oradditional assistance is not required, fieldemployees shall broadcast a "Code Four"in response to a "Code Thirty-Seven."

Note: Communications Division shallcontinue to broadcast "Code Six Charles"in cases of vehicle license numbersconnected with high risk suspects orvehicles, such as armed and dangerous,felony want or warrant. For example, if avehicle license number is associated with astolen vehicle used in connection with anarmed robbery, a "Code Six Charles" willbe broadcast, NOT "Code Thirty-Seven."

∗ Code Robert. When an employee needs anUrban Police Rifle (UPR) or Shotgun SlugAmmunition (SSA), the employee shallbroadcast the unit designation, location, and“Code Robert-UPR” or “Code Robert-Slug.”

∗ Code Tom. When an employee needs aTASER, the employee shall broadcast theunit designation, location and "Code Tom."

∗ Code 100. This code shall be broadcast bya field unit to notify other units that apossible escape route of a suspect from acrime scene is under temporarysurveillance. The term "Code 100" shall bebroadcast in the following sequence: Unitidentification; "Code 100;" and, thelocation.

* Radio Communication Terms:

* AC: Aircraft crash.* FB: Fallen Balloon.* QT: Secrecy required regarding location.* 211: Robbery.* 311: Indecent exposure.* 390: Drunk male.* 390W: Drunk female.* 415: Disturbance.* 459: Burglary.* 484: Theft.* 484PS: Purse Snatching.* 502: Under-the-influence driver.* 507: Minor disturbance.* 507FC: Firecrackers.* 586: Illegal parking.* 586E: Car parked in driveway.* Roger: Message received; will comply.* Come In: You are being called.* Stand By: Wait until a suitable answer is

determined-or do not transmit.* Go Ahead: Proceed with your message.* Repeat: Repeat your message.* Out: Out of service; not available for call

(used when no other specific codeapplies and shall be followed by thereason).

* Clear: No calls outstanding against unit;available for call.

Note: When reporting on-duty, unitsequipped with two-way radios andengaged in either uniformed orplainclothes patrol shall report “Clear”and indicate the watch to which they areassigned.

* Want: Determine whether a vehicle is wantedor is to be held.

* No Want: No want or hold on subject or vehicle ofinquiry.

* Warrant: Vehicle warrant information.* DMV: Information regarding vehicle

registration.* Juvenile Check: Determine whether there is want, hold, or criminal record for juvenile

subject.* End of Watch: Unit has completed tour of duty.

Note: When a unit goes off-duty, thecontrol operator shall be notified of thelocation and that the unit is "End ofWatch." When a unit has workedbeyond the normal tour of duty, thewatch to which the unit is assigned shallalso be reported.

120.41 INITIAL BROADCASTS OFCRIME DESCRIPTION. The first officers toarrive at the scene of a crime shall conduct abrief interview with the victim or witnesses.Information, when applicable, shall betransmitted in the following sequence to thecommunications operator, without delay:

∗ Type of Crime;∗ Occurred Minutes Ago;∗ Location;∗ Vehicle Used (or left on foot);∗ Direction Taken;∗ Number, Sex, Descent of Suspects;∗ Outstanding Features;∗ Weapon; and,∗ General Type of Property taken.

120.42 SUPPLEMENTAL BROADCASTOF CRIME DESCRIPTION. As soon aspracticable after the initial brief informationconcerning the occurrence of a crime has beenrelayed to a communications operator forbroadcast (Manual Section 4/120.41),supplemental information, including a detaileddescription of the suspect, shall be relayed tothe operator. These suspects' descriptions shall



follow the sequence as outlined in the relatedcrime report.

120.60 REPORTING OUT OF SERVICE.When it is necessary for a unit to go out ofservice for any reason, except in response to anassignment given to them by a controloperator, the reason and the location shall betransmitted to the control operator.

Note: If practicable, a unit remaining out ofservice shall notify the control operator of thereason and the location (once each hour) that itis out of service. This shall be done eventhough the unit may be working beyond thenormal tour of duty.

120.70 AVAILABILITY WHILE ONNON-PRIORITY CALLS. Field unitsassigned non-priority calls, as well as units on"Code Six" status, shall remain available forreassignment to priority calls by monitoringtheir radio frequencies.

Units reassigned to a priority call shall beresponsible for the completion of theirnon-priority call(s). Officers shall explain theirchange in status to the reporting person.Communications Division shall be notifiedwhen officers are prepared to resume thehandling of their non-priority call(s). Officersunable to resume the handling of their non-priority call(s) shall notify CommunicationsDivision.

If officers assigned to a non-priority calldetermine that additional circumstances existwhich preclude their reassignment to a prioritycall, they shall broadcast a "Code Six"indicating the circumstances.

Note: A priority call is a call for service whichis of an emergency or urgent nature causing aunit to respond "Code 3" or "Code 2,"respectively. Non-priority calls are all othercalls for routine service.

120.75 ASSIGNMENT OF PRIORITYCALLS-NO AVAILABLE UNITS.Communications Division shall handle prioritycalls in the following manner whenever thereare no units available in the Area ofoccurrence:

∗ The call shall be broadcast for "anyavailable unit," with the nature of the call,the address, and the code;

∗ If no units respond to the "any availableunit" broadcast, the dispatcher shallbroadcast one long electronic tone signal onthe concerned Area's radio frequency. Thetone signal alerts units assigned non-prioritycalls to stand by for possible reassignmentto a priority call; and,

∗ The dispatcher shall assign the priority callto the appropriate unit.

120.77 INCIDENTS MOTIVATED BYHATRED OR PREJUDICE.Communications Division shall dispatch a unitwhenever a call for service involves anyincident motivated by hatred or prejudice.

120.79 ASSIGNMENT OF UNITS TOALARM CALLS. Communications Divisionpersonnel who receive a call from an alarmcompany or private person, generated by theactivation of a robbery or burglary alarm, shall:

∗ Determine the type of alarm being reported;∗ Request the Board of Police Commissioners

(BOPC) permit number from the caller; and,∗ Dispatch a unit to the alarm location.

Note: If the caller was unable to provide avalid BOPC permit number, CommunicationsDivision shall notify Commission InvestigationDivision.

120.80 REQUESTING BICYCLEINFORMATION. When requestinginformation about a bicycle, the followinginformation, when known, shall be given:

∗ Frame number of bicycle;∗ License number;∗ Expiration date of license; and,∗ Make of bicycle.

130. RADIO MESSAGE PRIORITY.Emergency Radio Messages. Thisclassification has priority over all othermessages and consists of requests for "Help,"information regarding "Pursuits," and messagesnecessary for the preservation of life.

Special Radio Messages. This classificationhas priority over "Routine" radio messages andconsists of:

∗ Immediate field broadcasts of descriptionsof suspects and/or vehicles involved incrimes when the time element is important;

∗ Reporting fires;∗ Requesting ambulances; and/or,∗ Any other message requiring immediate

attention.

A unit with a "Special" message shall begintransmission by notifying the control operatorthat the unit has a "Special" message. The unitmay precede the message with a request for aclear frequency for a "Special" message. Whenthe concerned frequency is on "Stand By" fora "Special" message, only broadcasts regardingthe "Special" message shall be transmitted,except an "Emergency" message or another"Special" message.

Note: Upon receiving a “Special” message, thecontrol operator shall immediately place theconcerned frequencies on "Stand By," whennecessary, and handle the messages in theorder of their priority. The control operatorshall immediately clear concerned frequencieswhen the “Special” message is completed.

"Routine" Message Procedures. A unit witha "Routine" message may broadcast only whenthe concerned frequency is clear. Thisclassification consists of normal radiomessages and has no priority.

130.30 CLEAR FREQUENCYPROCEDURE. Before transmitting a lengthymessage, such as a report of a major crime, a

unit shall contact the control, request a clearfrequency, and state the reason for the request.

Exception: When an officer desires a clearfrequency to check a suspect for wants and/orwarrants, he/she shall request "Code Ten."

The control operator, upon receipt of therequest, shall advise all other units on the samefrequency to "Stand By" and instruct theconcerned unit to "Go Ahead." Uponcompletion of the message, the controloperator shall announce to all units that thefrequency is clear. Units advised to "Stand By"shall not attempt to transmit unless theirmessage is of higher priority than the messagebeing transmitted (Manual Section 4/130).

Note: A clear frequency shall not be requestedin order to obtain a "Want" or a "DMV" on avehicle.

150. TELETYPES-GENERAL.150.05 REQUESTS FOR TELETYPEMESSAGES. A request for a teletype messageshall indicate the coverage desired byincluding the specific point(s) for a directedmessage or the specific section for a broadcastbulletin.

When proper names are included in teletypemessages, they shall be transmitted as follows:

"SURNAME, FIRST NAME, (and) MIDDLENAME (or) INITIAL."

150.08 CANCELLATIONS,CORRECTIONS, OR SUPPLEMENTS TOBROADCASTS. When cancellation,correction, or supplement to broadcast isrequested, the message request given to theteletype operator shall include the following:

∗ Date, time, message number, and call letterof the original and all subsequent relatedmessages;

∗ Title of the original message;∗ Names of persons who were the subject of

the original message;∗ All available reference numbers;∗ Any "special attentions" included in

previous related broadcasts; and,∗ The property or vehicles mentioned in

previous messages, with a brief descriptionand current status.

150.10 CLASSIFICATION. Teletypemessages shall be classified as:

∗ Directed Messages. Directed messages arethose addressed to one or more specificpoints throughout the State network(CLETS) or nationally (NLETS) throughthe California Department of Justice.

∗ Broadcast Bulletins. Broadcast bulletinsare messages addressed to one of thefollowing specific sections within thenetwork facilities available to theDepartment:

∗ Local (Citywide);∗ Local and Sheriff's Local (Countywide);



∗ Area (directed to either one or more ofthe six broadcast areas into whichCalifornia is divided); and,

∗ All Points Bulletin (directed to allparticipating enforcement agencies inCalifornia). Extended coverage to allother states, except Alaska and Hawaii,is accomplished by direction of theoriginating agency.

150.12 ALL POINTS BULLETINS-ACCEPTANCE OF MESSAGES. Prior torequesting the transmittal of an All PointsBulletin (APB) broadcast via NECS, officersshall verify that the agencies which themessages are addressed to are participants ofthe APB system. Area/division records unitsshall maintain a list of current APB systemsubscribers. For broadcasts within Los AngelesCounty to non-subscribing agencies, a messageshould be directed to the Los Angeles CountySheriff's local broadcast system. Out-of-countymessages to a non-subscribing agency shouldbe sent directly to that agency.

To qualify for rebroadcast on the StateTeletype System, a message must meet thefollowing requirements:

Robbery Teletypes.

∗ Suspects used or simulated a gun; OR,∗ There is reason to believe the suspects are

operating in more than one county; OR,∗ The modus operandi is distinctive or similar

to that previously reported in otherjurisdictions; OR,

∗ The property taken is valued in excess of$5,000.

Burglary Teletypes.

∗ A large amount of distinctive propertywhich could connect a suspect with thecrime is stolen. (Do not itemize. Give onlythe general type of property taken and thenote "is/is not" identifiable); OR,

∗ A safe is attacked; OR,∗ The modus operandi is distinctive or similar

to that previously reported in otherjurisdictions, AND there is reason to believethe suspect may be operating in more thanone county; OR,

∗ A large amount of property is taken, part orall of which is identifiable: (Do not itemize.Give only the general type of property takenand the note "is identifiable.")

Felony Suspect Wanted Teletypes.

∗ There is reason to believe the suspect maybe traveling outside the local area; AND afelony warrant has been issued for his/herarrest, excluding violation of parole orprobation unless wanted for an additionalfelony; OR,

∗ There is reasonable cause to believe thesuspect committed a felony.

Note: Unless a warrant has been issued, theteletype must contain sufficient information toestablish in the mind of the receiving officerreasonable cause to believe the suspect

committed a felony.

In Custody Teletypes.

∗ The suspect has been operating for a longperiod of time, AND there is reason tobelieve the suspect committed a crimeoutside the local jurisdiction.

Property Under Observation Teletypes.

∗ A large amount of identifiable property hasbeen located, AND there is reason tobelieve it has been stolen outside the localjurisdiction.

Crime Warning Teletypes.

∗ When circumstances are such that it may bepossible to prevent crime by alertingagencies outside the local jurisdiction; OR,

∗ When checks or checkwriters have beenstolen, AND it is probable that an attemptwill be made to cash the checks outside thelocal jurisdiction.

Missing Person Teletype.

∗ When the circumstances indicate that themissing person, either adult or juvenile, isthe victim of a serious crime or emergencyconditions exist, such as senility, suspectedfoul play, or when the missing person is ata very young age.

Note: Teletyping of a missing person areabroadcast does not fulfill the four-hournotification requirement to the National CrimeInformation Center (NCIC) when a juvenileunder 16 years of age is reported missing or themissing person is the subject of exceptionalcircumstances (i.e., missing under suspiciouscircumstances, or persons mentally orphysically handicapped).

155. TELETYPES-VEHICLEREGISTRATION AND DRIVER'SLICENSE INFORMATION.

155.05 REQUESTS FOR VEHICLEREGISTRATION INFORMATION. Ateletype requesting vehicle registrationinformation from DMV shall be sent in thefollowing form:

∗ IV; and,∗ Information code, vehicle license number or

vehicle identification number.

A request for out-of-state vehicle informationshall include:

∗ Motor Vehicle Bureau (city and state);∗ Year for which the information is desired;∗ Complete record request (including

registered owner and legal owner); and,∗ License number (including all dashes, as it

appears on the plate)

Note: All other vehicle teletypes shall beprepared and sent by the concerned Arearecords unit.

155.15 REQUESTS FOR DRIVERLICENSE INFORMATION. A teletype

requesting driver license information fromDMV may be sent, using either the driverlicense number or the full name of the licensee.When using the driver license number, theteletype shall be sent in the following form:

∗ ID; and,∗ Information code, driver license number.

When using the licensee's name only, theteletype shall be sent in the following form:

∗ IN; and,∗ Information code, name (last, first, middle).

Note: A separate teletype shall be sent for eachperson.

155.20 TELETYPES-BICYCLEINFORMATION. A teletype requestinginformation from the Automated PropertySystem (APS) shall be sent as provided in theCJIS Manual.

165. TELETYPES - JAILPROCEDURES.165.02 ARREST BOOKINGINFORMATION. The following proceduresshall be used in the transmission of arrestbooking information:

All Areas/divisions shall teletype juvenilearrest booking information to the JuvenileRecords Unit, Records and IdentificationDivision, Detective Support Division, and theresponsible investigative unit within thirtyminutes after obtaining the booking numbers,when DABIS processing is not used to book ajuvenile or a person 18 years of age or olderarrested and booked for a crime committedwhen the arrestee was a juvenile. Theinformation contained in the first nine lines ofthe Booking and Identification Records, Form5.1, shall be used as a format for the teletype.

In addition, all Areas/divisions shall includethe following additional information on thejuvenile arrest booking information teletype:

∗ Juvenile's parents and/or legal guardian;∗ J number; and,∗ DR number.

The last line of the teletype shall contain theinformation in the box labeled "JuvenileDetained At."

Note: When a juvenile arrested for an offensewhich will be investigated by NarcoticsDivision is to be released immediately afterbooking, the arresting officer shall cause thedate and time the subject is to be cited to returnfor further investigation and disposition to beincluded in the booking teletype.

Booking Areas/divisions with LivescanNetwork capability shall send adult andjuvenile arrest booking information to Recordsand Identification Division within thirtyminutes after obtaining booking numbers,when DABIS processing is not used to book ajuvenile or a person 18 years of age or older



arrested and booked for a crime committedwhen the arrestee was a juvenile.

Booking divisions shall transmit requiredbooking documents to the Inmate ReceptionCenter, County Central Jail.

165.03 ARRESTEES BOOKED INTOCOUNTY CUSTODY. Teletype abstractscontaining booking information shall not besent on adult arrestees booked directly into LosAngeles County jail facilities.

Exception: Teletype abstracts containing thebooking information contained in the first ninelines of the Booking and Identification Record,Form 5.1, shall be sent on adult arresteesbooked directly into the Jail Ward of the LosAngeles County-USC Medical Center.

An officer booking an adult arrestee directlyinto a Los Angeles County jail facility shallcomplete the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1, in the normal manner. Inaddition, the booking officer shall:

∗ Telephonically obtain an LAPD generatedbooking number from Records andIdentification Division; AND,

∗ Request to be transferred to the Supervisorof the Booking Records Update Unit,Records and Identification Division; AND,

∗ Give the booking information contained inthe first nine lines of the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.1, to thesupervisor. Record that person's name, andtitle in the narrative portion of the arrestreport.

Note: The above notification to the supervisorof the Criminal Information Unit, Records andIdentification Division, is not necessary whenbooking arrestees directly into Los AngelesCounty Jail.

165.04 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGETELETYPES. A Supplemental ChargeTeletype shall be sent without delay to LosAngeles County Jail when the arrestee is anadult female, in the following sequence:

∗ Prisoner's booking number and name,original charge, SUPP CHG, and datecharge placed; and,

∗ NEW CHG: List supplemental charge.When the supplemental charge is a warrant,the information shall include the System IDnumber, warrant number, court, and bailincluding penalty assessment.

Note: When a felony complaint against anarrestee is rejected and a related misdemeanorwarrant is obtained, the words "ReductionBooking" shall be placed in the heading of theteletype.

When the supplemental charge is placed as theresult of a court order for the delay of a felonyarraignment (Manual Section 4/750.20), thefollowing information shall be included:

∗ The warrant information;∗ The date and time of the court order;∗ The court issuing the order;

∗ The concerned investigative unit; and,∗ The statement, "Court ordered prisoner held

until his physical condition permits hisarraignment."

165.06 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGEAUTHORIZATION TELETYPES-VIOLATION OF PROBATION ORPAROLE. A teletype abstract authorizing asupplemental charge for violation of probationor parole against a person in the custody of theDepartment shall be sent to the division ofcustody in the following sequence:

∗ ATTN JAILER OR LASD;∗ State parole charge authority and date;∗ Booking number, name, and prison number;∗ "THIS IS AUTHORIZATION FOR

DETAINING AGENCY LASD AND ANYPEACE OFFICER IN THE STATE OFCALIFORNIA TO ARREST AND BOOKPER (charge)AND TRANSPORT TO LOSANGELES MAIN COUNTY JAIL;" and,

∗ AUTH: Name and title of officerauthorizing the supplemental charge.

165.15 REQUEST FOR BAILINFORMATION TELETYPE. A Requestfor Bail Information Teletype is used to requestinformation regarding the release on bail of amisdemeanor prisoner in the custody of theLos Angeles County Sheriff's Department. Theteletype shall be sent to the custodial detentionofficer and shall contain the prisoner's bookingnumber, name, and "REQ. FOR BAIL INFO."

165.20 BAIL INFORMATIONTELETYPE. Information regarding a prisonereligible for release on bail shall be sent by thecustodial detention officer in the followingsequence:

∗ Prisoner's booking number, name, andBAIL INFO;

∗ Each charge (code section and title), listedseparately, followed by the amount of bail,plus penalty assessment;

Note: Name on each additional charge, ifdifferent than original booking name, shallprecede the charge or warrant number.

∗ Each warrant number or court case number,if any, and issuing court, listed separately,followed by the amount of bail, plus penaltyassessment;

∗ Time, day of week, date, court, and streetaddress of court appearance for eachcharge; and,

∗ Arrest location, arresting agency, divisionand unit, and arresting officer's name andserial number.

165.26 FELONY BOOKINGDISPOSITION AND SUPPLEMENTALCHARGE TELETYPE. A Felony BookingDisposition and Supplemental Charge Teletypedirecting a custodial detention officer to recordthe release of a charge against a prisoner and toplace a supplemental charge shall be sent in thefollowing sequence:

∗ Prisoner's booking number, name, FELDISPO/ SUPP CHG, and date of felonydisposition;

∗ Charge released and AUTH: Felonybooking disposition as indicated in theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10;

∗ NEW CHG: Supplemental charge. Whenthe supplemental charge is a warrant, anabstract of the warrant shall be included inthe teletype;

∗ Prisoner's name on supplemental charge ifdifferent from that on the original booking;and,

∗ Division, name, and serial number ofauthorizing officer.

Note: When the prisoner is in a Los AngelesCounty jail facility, other than Los AngelesCounty Jail, a Felony Booking Disposition andSupplemental Charge Teletype shall also besent to the Sheriff's Warrant Detainer Section.

165.30 ORDER TO RELEASEPRISONER TELETYPE. An Order toRelease Prisoner Teletype is used to direct acustodial detention officer to release a prisonerfrom the custody of the Department, or todirect another agency to release from custodya prisoner detained for this Department. Thisteletype shall be sent in the followingsequence:

∗ ATTN JAILER;∗ Prisoner's booking number and name, and

ORDER TO RELEASE; and,∗ The charge released and AUTH: Reason for

release.

Note: Name on each additional charge, ifdifferent than original booking name, shallprecede the charge or warrant number.

∗ Details:

∗ When the charge released is a felony,include the booking disposition indicatedon the Investigator's Final Report, Form5.10;

∗ When the reason for release is bailposted, include the amount of cash bailposted or an identification of the suretybond;

∗ The time, day of week, date, and streetaddress of court appearance for eachcharge; and,

Note: When the arrestee was intoxicatedat the time of arrest, a teletype directing anO.R. release shall include "O.R. when ableto care for self."

∗ Division, name, and serial number ofofficer ordering release.

165.31 ORDER TO RELEASEJUVENILE TELETYPE. An Order toRelease Juvenile Teletype is used to direct acustodial detention officer to release a detainedjuvenile from the custody of the Department.This teletype shall be sent in the followingsequence:



∗ Juvenile's booking number and name, andORDER TO RELEASE;

∗ Charge released and AUTH: Reason forrelease (i.e., Exonerated, Court Order,602-626 WIC, etc.);

∗ Release to: (Relationship and full name);∗ Location detained; and,∗ Division, name, and serial number of officer

ordering the release.

165.32 NOTIFICATION OF PRISONERRELEASE TELETYPE. A computergenerated message reporting the release of aprisoner from LAPD custody shall be sentimmediately to the Automated JusticeInformation System (AJIS) via the NetworkCommunication System (NECS) RL13 format.The message, when appropriate, shall also bedirected to:

∗ The concerned division or Sheriff's stationwhen the release is the result of an Order toRelease Prisoner Teletype; and,

∗ Detective Support Division and theconcerned investigating officer when eitheran adult arrestee was booked on a felonycharge or the arrestee is a juvenile.

Notification of Prisoner Release messages sentto locations other than AJIS shall contain thefollowing information:

∗ Prisoner's booking number;∗ Prisoner's last name, first name, middle

initial;∗ Date of birth;∗ Booking location;∗ Reason for release;∗ Originating agency;∗ Name of officer releasing prisoner; and,∗ Serial number of officer releasing prisoner.

Note: When a prisoner is released to the LosAngeles County Sheriff's Department'stransportation unit, a notification to AJIS shallbe sent via the Network CommunicationSystem (NECS).

165.33 NOTIFICATION OF WRIT OFHABEAS CORPUS OR FIXED-BAILRELEASE OF FELONY PRISONERTELETYPE. A teletype announcing therelease of a felony prisoner when fixed-bail isposted or on a Writ of Habeas Corpus shall, inaddition to a teletype to the AJIS file, be sentto:

∗ Detective Support Division; and,∗ The concerned probable investigating unit

listed on the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1.

Notification of Writ of Habeas Corpus orFixed-Bail Release of Felony PrisonerTeletype shall be sent in the followingsequence:

∗ Release information as sent to AJIS (i.e.,booking number, last name, first name,middle initial, birth date, numerical code ofbooking location);

∗ Date released;

∗ Booking charge;∗ Amount of cash bail posted or an

identification of the surety bond;∗ Citing instructions for court appearance;

and,∗ Division, name, and serial number of officer

releasing the prisoner.

165.34 NOTIFICATION OFAVAILABILITY FOR RELEASETELETYPE. When an arrestee is booked ona foreign California adult misdemeanorwarrant and is not wanted on a local charge,the custodial detention officer shall send aNotification of Availability for ReleaseTeletype to the demanding jurisdiction in thefollowing sequence:

∗ ATTENTION WARRANT DETAIL; ∗ Name of arrestee (first, middle, last) and

booking number;∗ ARRESTED (date arrested) ON YOUR

WARRANT (warrant number, issuing courtcharge, and code). ADVISE BY RETURNTELETYPE DATE AND TIME YOUWILL ACCEPT CUSTODY.NOTIFICATION WILL BE MADE OFANY CHANGE IN CUSTODY STATUS;AND,

∗ Division of detention, address, officer'sname, and serial number.

165.35 NOTIFICATION OFFORWARDED WARRANT TELETYPES.When warrants or warrant informationteletypes have been forwarded with a prisonerto other than the originating agency, the Cityjail facility having custody of the arrestee shallsend a teletype notification to the originatingagency in the following sequence:

∗ ATTENTION: Agency, warrant number,and charge;

∗ Name of prisoner (first name first) andbooking number;

∗ RELEASED TO (Agency prisoner releasedto), date, and time; and,

∗ YOUR WARRANTS (or warrantinformation teletypes) HAVE BEENFORWARDED WITH PRISONER.CONTACT agency DIRECTLY FORFURTHER INFORMATION.

Note: When warrants or warrant informationteletypes from two or more agencies areforwarded, a joint teletype format shall beused.

165.60 PRISONER ESCAPETELETYPES. A Prisoner Escape Teletypeshall be sent as LOCAL BC AND SHERIFF'SLOCAL in the following sequence:

∗ NOTICE OF PRISONER ESCAPE;∗ Name of escapee;∗ Booking number, charge, and LA number;∗ Description of suspect and clothing;∗ Location of escape; and,∗ Fingerprint classification (available at

Records and Identification Division).

Note: Supplemental teletypes may be sent at

the discretion of investigating officersresponsible for apprehension.

165.70 ORDER TO PICK-UP. RegularOrder to Pick-Up Teletypes shall be sent oneach court day not later than:

∗ 0430 hours for morning court; and,∗ 0900 hours for afternoon court.

Teletypes shall be sent to the Los AngelesSheriff's Department, Bureau of Transportationas in the following examples:

∗ Hollywood has four male and one femalearrestees for Division 59, and two femalearrestees for Division 51; and,

∗ Harbor Area has two male and three femalearrestees for Division 61.

165.80 IMPERATIVE RELEASEMESSAGE TELETYPE. The ImperativeRelease Message is a daily teletype notificationgenerated by the Automated JusticeInformation System (AJIS) to all Areas of theDepartment and Metropolitan Jail Section, 77thStreet Jail Section, Van Nuys Jail Section, andOperations Jail Section with the names of thosepersons who must soon be arraigned orreleased from Department custody inaccordance with 825 P.C.

170. TELETYPES-INVESTIGATIVEPROCEDURES.170.04 TELETYPE NOTIFICATION OF"SHOW-UP" APPEARANCE. A teletypenotification regarding a suspect appearing in a"show-up" shall be sent in the following form:

FOLLOWING SUSPECT WILL BE INSHOW-UP: (location); (date and time); (nameand description of suspect); (modus operandi,including any information which may aid inconnecting suspect with a crime); (name, serialnumber, and detail of investigating officer)

170.08 TELETYPE NOTIFICATION OF"SHOW-UP" RESULTS.

Suspect Identified. A teletype regardingidentification of a suspect in a "show-up" shallbe sent in the following sequence:

∗ "Show-up" number of identified suspect;∗ Name of suspect identified;∗ Offense for which suspect was booked;∗ Crime with which suspect was identified;∗ Name of person who made identification;∗ DR number of report of crime with which

suspect was identified;∗ Name of the concerned law enforcement

agency and the case number, when suspectidentified with a crime committed inanother jurisdiction;

∗ Names of victims and witnesses attendingthe "show-up;"

∗ Names of suspect's defense attorneys anddeputy district attorneys attending the"show-up;"

∗ Name and serial number of the officer whoselected the participants for the "show-up;"



∗ Unusual actions which the investigatingofficer requested the suspect to performduring the "show-up;" and,

∗ Name, serial number, and detail of officerconducting the "show-up."

Suspect Not Identified. When no suspects areidentified in a "show-up," the teletypenotification shall contain the following:

∗ NO SUSPECTS IDENTIFIED;∗ (Names of victims and witnesses attending

the "show-up"); and,∗ (Name, serial number, and detail of officer

conducting the "show-up".)

170.45 PROPERTY RELEASETELETYPES. A teletype authorizing releaseof property shall be sent in the following form:

∗ THIS IS YOUR AUTHORITY TORELEASE THE BELOW LISTEDPROPERTY BOOKED UNDER DR(number) TO (name of person to whomproperty is booked) ON (date of booking)TO (name and address of person to whomproperty is to be released). (List of property,including item numbers). RELEASEAUTHORIZED BY (name and serialnumber of authorizing officer), (date andtime release authorization).

170.55 REQUEST FOR CERTIFIEDCOPY OF LASD FINGERPRINT CARDSTELETYPE. The following format shall beused to obtain certified copies of Los AngelesSheriff’s Department fingerprint cards from theBureau of Identification:

∗ BI;∗ SUPERVISOR, FINGERPRINT SECTION;∗ REQUEST CERTIFIED COPY OF THE

FINGERPRINT CARD OF:∗ NAME AND ANY AKA USED AT TIME

OF BOOKING;∗ DATE OF BIRTH;∗ CII NO.;∗ LA NO. AND LASD NO.;∗ DATE OF ARREST;∗ CHARGE; and,∗ DIRECT REPLY TO

LAPD_________DIVISION_________ATTN:__________

175. TELETYPES-SUPERVISORYPROCEDURES.175.10 SUBPOENA TELETYPES. Ateletype notifying an officer of the existence ofa subpoena shall be sent in the following form:

∗ WATCH COMMANDER, (division/Area ofassignment). THE FOLLOWINGOFFICERS ARE SUBPOENAED:(officer's name), (serial number),DIVISION OR DEPARTMENT (number),(place of address), (date), (time),(defendant's full name), DR (number).

175.14 DECLARATION FORCONTINUANCE TELETYPES. ADeclaration for Continuance teletype shall besent in the following form:

∗ DECLARATION FOR CONTINUANCE:(defendant's last name), (court divisionnumber), (case number), (Officer's nameand serial number), (date of trial), (to whatofficer can testify), (reason for inability toappear), (date officer will be able toappear).

175.70 WEATHER FORECASTTELETYPES. A teletype regarding theweather forecast shall be sent in the followingsequence:

∗ METROPOLITAN-COAST AREA-temperature, precipitation.

∗ VALLEY AREA-temperature,precipitation.

180. MESSENGER SERVICE ANDMAILING INSTRUCTIONS.180.10 DEPARTMENT MAIL TO BEFORWARDED BY MESSENGERSERVICES. Mail to be forwarded toDepartment offices, all City offices, and allLos Angeles County offices by messengerservice shall be enclosed in Multi-useInteroffice Correspondence Envelopes, FormGeneral 100B. When the Form General 100Bis used to forward mail to a City office otherthan a Police Department office, the addressshall include the correspondence "stop"number for the concerned office.

Exception: When the use of the Multi-useInteroffice Correspondence Envelope isinappropriate to the subject matter to beforwarded or the material to be forwarded is ofa confidential nature, the correspondence shallbe enclosed in a plain manila envelope.

180.20 UNITED STATES MAILDELIVERY. All correspondence to bedelivered by United States mail shall be placedin appropriate containers. When practicable,white envelopes shall be used. TheDepartment's return address, "Box 30158, LosAngeles, 90030," shall be typed or printed inthe upper left corner. The correspondencereference number shall be included with thereturn address. The sender's name may besubstituted when necessary for securityreasons. When mail is to be registered orcertified, "Los Angeles Police Department"shall be included with the return address andcorrespondence reference number.

When reference is made regarding the returnaddress of the Department within anycorrespondence to other government agenciesor the general public, the above return addressshall be shown.

180.30 DELIVERY OF PERSONALMAIL. The address of the Department or anyof its offices shall not be used by employeesfor the purpose of receiving personal mail ormerchandise.

190. TELEPHONES, USE OFDEPARTMENT.190.10 ANSWERING DEPARTMENTTELEPHONES An employee answering apublic Department telephone (usually thoseconnected to the City Centrex System) shallstate the following:

∗ "Good morning," "Good afternoon" or"Good evening," as applicable;

∗ His/her office, group, bureau, division,section, unit or, Community OutreachCenter or if the location is a communitypolice station, the name of the geographiccommand followed by the phrase"Community Police Station," i.e., "RampartCommunity Police Station."

∗ His/her rank or title, and last name, and,∗ "May I help you?"

When answering other Department telephones(outside, private or non-Centrex), the employeemay answer by giving the number of thetelephone only. However, a commandingofficer may authorize some other response fornon-public telephones, which are used forundercover operations.

To ensure continuous and quality service to thehearing-impaired community, Areacommanding officers shall:

∗ Ensure that Area TelecommunicationDevices for the Deaf (TDD) telephonesystems are properly serviced andmaintained;

∗ Ensure that sufficient personnel at eachArea station are trained in the proper use ofthe TDD telephone system;

∗ Cause Area training coordinators to assumeresponsibility for training of personnel inthe use of the TDD telephone system; and,

∗ Add TDD telephone numbers to the nextand all subsequent printings of Areabusiness cards.

190.20 ANSWERING COMPLAINTBOARD OR RECORDS ANDIDENTIFICATION DIVISIONTELEPHONES. Employees answeringcomplaint board telephones or Records andIdentification Division telephones subject toextremely heavy use may answer with anapproved shortened identification as directedby the division commanding officer.190.30 TELEPHONE CALLS-IMMEDIATE SERVICE REQUIRED.Employees who receive a telephonic reportwhich demands immediate police action shall:

∗ Obtain the location of occurrence and otherpertinent information; and,

∗ Relay the information to the concerned unit,if available; or,

∗ Relay the information to the complaintboard.

Employees relaying the information to thecomplaint board shall:



∗ Give their name and division of assignment;∗ Give the location where service is

requested;∗ State the nature of the complaint;∗ Obtain the name and telephone number of

the caller;∗ Inform caller that his/her call will be

returned, as soon as practicable; ∗ Obtain the information desired; and,∗ Return the call.

If the persons are calling from a pay telephone,they shall be advised to remain at that stationto await the return call.

190.50 TRANSFERRING TELEPHONECALLS. When an employee receives atelephone call which should be handled bysome other unit, or which has beenmisdirected, he/she shall:

∗ Ascertain the nature of the call;∗ Advise the caller as to the Department unit,

or person to whom he/she should speak;and,

∗ Transfer the call.

If the caller does not wish to have his/her calltransferred, or is calling from within theCENTREX system, he/she shall be given thetelephone number and name of the unit to callfor service.

190.60 TELEPHONIC REQUESTS FORREPORT INFORMATION. When anemployee receives a telephonic request forinformation contained in police reports, he/sheshall handle the request as prescribed inManual Sections 3/406, 3/407, 3/408 and3/410.

190.70 REFERRAL TO THECALIFORNIA HIGHWAY PATROL.

Metropolitan Area and Harbor, Venice, andWest Los Angeles Divisions. Calls forservices of an emergency nature within thearea of the California Highway Patrolresponsibility shall be transferred by land lineto the California Highway Patrol dispatcherwhen practicable. When the line is in use, theemployee receiving the call shall obtain thenecessary information and relay it to theCalifornia Highway Patrol Dispatcher.

San Fernando Valley Area. The employeereceiving a call for service of an emergencynature within the area of the CaliforniaHighway Patrol responsibility shall obtain thenecessary information and relay it to theCalifornia Highway Patrol Dispatcher.

Note: Persons requesting non-emergencyservice or information shall be advised to callthe California Highway Patrol.

192. LONG-DISTANCE, LOCAL,AND EXTENDED-AREA TELEPHONECALLS.192.10 LONG-DISTANCE CALLS-DEFINED. All calls to any point outside Area

Code 213, 310, 323, and 818 are long-distancecalls.

192.20 LOCAL-AREA CALLS-DEFINED. A local call is any call which isnot a multi-message-unit call.

192.30 EXTENDED-AREA CALLS-DEFINED. All toll calls to any point withinArea Code 213 that must be placed through aCity Hall operator are extended area calls.

Note: These calls are calls that cannot bedialed using a dial code shown on the GuideFor Placing Business Calls (marked with * onthe guide).

192.40 LONG-DISTANCE TELEPHONECALLS, OUT-GOING.Employee's Responsibility. All City-businesslong-distance calls shall be placed through theCity Long-Distance Communications Facility(TELCODE) System. An employee placing along-distance call shall:

∗ Utilize the five digit confidential authoritynumber issued to each sworn employee anddesignated civilian employee; and,

∗ Place the call following the instructionsincluded with the TELCODE Long-Distance Identity Card.

Note: Employees will be responsible for allcalls placed with their assigned TELCODEnumber. If the TELCODE card is lost or stolen,employees shall report the loss immediately tothe Department Telephone Coordinator atFacilities Management Division.

Commanding Officer's Responsibility. Allcalls placed through TELCODE will berecorded on a detailed printout which will beprovided to commanding officers for review.Calls of long duration and repeated calls to thesame number will be subject to a computerscan and subsequent investigation.Commanding officers shall review and auditthe TELCODE printouts to ensure thatemployees conform to City telephone callguidelines.

192.50 LONG-DISTANCE TELEPHONECALLS, INCOMING. When an employeereceives a long-distance call that is not for theemployee, the employee shall:

∗ If the call is paid, transfer it to theconcerned person or unit; or,

∗ If the call is directed to the Departmentonly, or to the Chief of Police, transfer it toDetective Support Division.

192.60 COLLECT TELEPHONECALLS, INCOMING. Department employeesmay accept collect calls for emergencyservices and for matters of importance to theCity of Los Angeles and to the Department.After receiving an incoming, collect telephonecall, the person accepting the call shallimmediately notify the Administrative Unit,Detective Support Division and provide thefollowing information:

∗ The origin of the call;∗ The name of the caller;∗ The name of the person who accepted the

call; ∗ The extension on which the call was

received; and,∗ The time the call was accepted.

Note: Department employees shall not acceptpersonal, collect telephone calls except incases of emergency.

192.70 PLACING LOCAL-AREACALLS. Prior to placing an outside businesscall, an employee shall determine whether thecall is a local call by referring to the City ofLos Angeles telephone directory. If the call islocal, it may be placed over an outside line. Ifno outside line is provided, the employee shalluse the appropriate City Hall trunk line asshown on the Guide for Placing City BusinessCalls.

192.80 EXTENDED-AREATELEPHONE CALLS. An employee placinga call over a Department telephone into theextended area shall:

∗ Obtain approval from his/her divisioncommanding officer or watch commanderbefore or after placing a call, ascircumstances of the case may dictate; and,

∗ Place the call over the appropriate City Halltrunk line.

192.90 TELEPHONIC NOTIFICATIONTO FAMILY WHEN WORKINGOVERTIME. When a duty assignmentrequires an employee to work unexpectedovertime, the employee may notify his/herfamily over a Department telephone. Such callsshall be considered police business and shall bemade in the same manner as any other businesscall.

195. RESIDENCE TELEPHONEREQUIREMENT. All sworn personnel andeach civilian employee designated by his/hercommanding officer as subject to recall duringoff-duty hours shall have a telephone at theirresidence and keep the Department advised ofthe number.

195.10 INSTALLATION OFRESIDENCE TELEPHONE. When officersor civilian employees subject to recall changetheir place of residence, they shall apply,without delay, to the telephone company fortelephone service. If priority is needed, theyshould submit an Employee's Report, Form15.7, to their watch commander, including thefollowing:

∗ Extent of delay indicated by the telephonecompany;

∗ Officer's address where telephone service isrequested;

∗ Name and address of telephone companywhere service was requested; and,

∗ Date service was requested.

This report shall be forwarded to theCommanding Officer, Personnel Division, by



the requesting officer's commanding officer.

FIELD ACTIVITIES

201. NOTIFICATIONS TOINVESTIGATING OFFICERS.Officer's Responsibility. The senior officer atthe scene shall immediately notify the watchcommander of the Area of occurrence of thefollowing:

∗ A homicide or suspected homicide;∗ A crime of violence where the victim is

likely to die;∗ An extortion or extortion threat;∗ A kidnapping;∗ Any crime which has the potential for

attracting major press coverage;∗ Any crime where the facts indicate a

connection to a Citywide problem; or,∗ Any information regarding a crime, wanted

person, or arrest which requires animmediate follow-up investigation.

Note: If possible, these notifications shall bemade either by telephone or mobile digitalterminal.

Watch Commander's Responsibility. Whennotified of any of the above, the watchcommander shall assess the information andimmediately make the appropriate notificationsas follows:

∗ The Commanding Officer, Robbery-Homicide Division, when there is akidnapping with the potential for seriousbodily injury or death;

∗ The commanding officer of the concernedArea Detective Division;

∗ The commanding officer of the divisionresponsible for investigating the crime; or,

∗ Detective Support Division when theconcerned investigating division is closed.

Area Detective Division, CommandingOfficer's Responsibility. The Area DetectiveDivision commanding officer, after consultingwith the Area commanding officer, shall beresponsible for contacting the appropriatespecialized detective division commandingofficer to discuss responsibility for theinvestigation of a crime when:

∗ The investigation may exceed the personnelresources or expertise available within thedivision;

∗ The crime may attract major press coverage;or,

∗ The circumstances indicate a connection toa major Citywide problem.

201.30 IMMEDIATE FOLLOW-UPINVESTIGATION. The concernedinvestigating division shall be notifiedimmediately if information regarding a crime,wanted person, or arrest requires an immediatefollow-up investigation. When a telephonicnotification should be made to an investigativeunit and that unit is not available, the

notification shall be made to Detective Support Division.

201.35 ARREST NOTIFICATION. Theinvestigating supervisor advising a felonybooking shall, without unnecessary delay,notify the responsible investigative unit of suchbooking by telephone or teletype unless:

∗ The arrest report is completed in thedivision where the responsible investigativeunit is located; OR,

∗ The booking is advised by an investigatingsupervisor assigned to the responsibleinvestigative unit.

201.37 NOTIFICATION TO PAROLEAGENCY AND REQUEST FOR HOLD.

Notification. When a parolee is to be bookedon a felony charge, the arrestee's parole officeror, if unavailable, parole agency shall bepromptly notified by the watch commanderapproving the booking.

Note: Notification to California YouthAuthority is necessary only when a hold isrequested.

When it is discovered after booking that afelony arrestee is on parole, the jail supervisorshall immediately notify the first availableofficer in the following sequence, who shall beresponsible for the notification:

∗ The investigating officer;∗ The investigating officer's supervisor; and,∗ The watch commander of the arresting

officer's Area/division.

Detective Support Division shall, whennotified by the Los Angeles Sheriff'sDepartment that a prisoner arrested by LAPDis on parole, notify one of the above officers inthe proper sequence.

Request for Hold. Any information whichwould tend to justify the placing of a hold shallbe relayed to the parole officer at the time ofnotification.

Reports. The officer responsible fornotification shall cause the parole status,notification, and the hold information to berecorded on the Arrest Report, Form 5.2, or ona Follow-up Report, Form 3.14, if the arrestreport has been distributed.

Subsequent Request for Parole Hold. Whena request for parole hold is initially denied bythe parole agency, additional requests may bemade based on additional information. Suchrequests shall be recorded on a Follow-upReport, Form 3.14.

201.60 DISTRIBUTION OF ARRESTAND EVIDENCE REPORTS-NARCOTICSINVOLVED. When an arrest or seizure ofevidence resulting from a narcotics-involvedinvestigation is made by officers outside theirbureau of assignment, they shall cause a copyof the arrest and/or evidence reports to bedelivered to the respective Narcotics Division,

Field Enforcement Section based in theOperations Bureau of their assignment.

201.65 PROPERTY SEIZED SUBJECTTO FORFEITURE. Officers who seizeproperty for forfeiture in accordance withSection 11470 of the Health and Safety Codeshall notify the Asset Forfeiture Coordinator,Narcotics Division.

Currency Seized Subject to Forfeiture-$1,000 or more. Officers seizing $1,000 ormore in U.S. currency that is narcotics-relatedshall:

∗ Immediately contact the Asset ForfeitureInvestigative Unit, Narcotics Division, foradvice on the hold that may be placed onsuch currency once it has been booked;

Note: If the Asset Forfeiture Investigative Unitis closed, employees from the Asset ForfeitureInvestigative Unit can be contacted throughDetective Support Division.

∗ Ensure that a Receipt for Property TakenInto Custody, Form 10.10, is issued to thearrestee or the person who had control ofthe property if no arrest is made;

Note: If the currency is seized by an AssetForfeiture Investigative Unit employee, theForm 10.10 shall be issued by, and bear thename and serial number of, that employee.Additionally, a Property Report must becompleted for all currency taken intoDepartment custody.

∗ Include the name and serial number of theAsset Forfeiture Investigative Unitemployee contacted for advice on allreports; and,

∗ Book as advised by the Asset ForfeitureInvestigative Unit employee.

Less than $1,000. In the event an officerrecovers less than $1,000 during anarcotics-related incident and has a question asto whether or not to place a hold on thecurrency, the officer may telephonicallycontact the Asset Forfeiture Investigative Unitfor advice.

Note: If the Asset Forfeiture Investigative Unitis closed, employees from the Asset ForfeitureInvestigative Unit can be contacted throughDetective Support Division.

201.70 COMPLAINTS MADE AGAINSTARMED FORCES PERSONNEL. Acomplaint against a member of the ArmedForces shall be reported on an Employee'sReport, Form 15.7, except when the complaintresults in an arrest or crime report. TheEmployee's Report shall be forwarded to theLiaison Officer, Detective Support Division.

201.73 REPORTING THE ATTEMPTSUICIDE, DEATH OR SERIOUSILLNESS/INJURY OF ARMED FORCESPERSONNEL. When a deceased or seriouslyill or injured person requiring hospitalization isidentified as a member of the Armed Forces ofthe United States (Manual Section 4/615.10),



or when a member of the Armed Forces of theUnited States attempts suicide, a telephonicnotification shall be made to the DepartmentCommand Post, Communications Division, bythe officer reporting. The notification shall,when practicable, include:

∗ Division reporting;∗ Reporting officer's name and serial number;∗ Location where reports were made;∗ Name, rank, and serial number of the

service member;∗ Branch of service;∗ Name and location of service member's

organization;∗ Location, date, and time of death, illness, or

injury;∗ Whether wearing civilian clothes or

uniform; and,∗ Location to which service member was

removed.

The foregoing information shall also beincluded, when practicable, in the DeathReport, Form 3.11.

201.75 ARMED FORCES PERSONNELNOT BOOKED-RELEASED TO ARMEDFORCES POLICE UNITS. When officersrelease Armed Forces personnel directly toArmed Forces police units without making abooking, a telephonic notification shall bemade to the Department Command Post,Communications Division, giving the reasonfor detention and release, the Armed Forcespolice unit receiving, and the servicemember's:

∗ Name, rank, and serial number;∗ Branch of service;∗ Organizational unit and location;∗ Dress (uniform or civilian clothes); and,∗ Duty status (on pass, on order, AWOL,

deserter).

201.80 LAW ENFORCEMENTOFFICERS VISITING FROM OTHERJURISDICTIONS. Officers of thisDepartment shall telephonically notify theDepartment Command Post, CommunicationsDivision, when they become aware that a lawenforcement officer in one of the belowcategories is conducting police business withinthe City:

∗ Law enforcement officers assigned tojurisdictions outside the State who areconducting police business within the City;and,

∗ Law enforcement officers assigned tojurisdictions within the State, but outside ofLos Angeles County, who will beconducting police business within the Cityin excess of 24 hours.

The following information concerning anofficer from another jurisdiction shall befurnished to the Department Command Post,Communications Division:

∗ Officer's name, agency, and detail;∗ Officer's local address and phone number;

∗ Officer's business address and phonenumber;

∗ Los Angeles Police Department officer'sname, unit of assignment, and extension;

∗ Purpose of officer's visit; and,∗ Estimated date and time of officer's

departure.

Note: Recordation of an officer's information,does not fulfill the requirement ofout-of-jurisdiction officers who requestauthority to act as peace officers within theCity (Manual Section 4/215).

202. FIELD INTERROGATION.202.01 FIELD INTERVIEWS. When anofficer questions a person in the field, he/shemay record the details of that interview on aField Interview Report, Form 15.43. Specificfacts which tend to indicate criminal activityshall be indicated on the report.

A Field Interview Report shall be completedfor all arrested persons.

Exception: When persons are arrested forplain drunk, begging, or a misdemeanor trafficwarrant, a Field Interview Report need not becompleted, unless there are indications ofpossible involvement in other criminalactivities.

Note: Detailed birthplace information (toinclude city, county, state, and country) shallbe recorded on the Form 15.43 prior tobooking all arrestees.

202.02 FIELD DATAREPORTS/COMPLETION ANDTRACKING.

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers shallcomplete a Field Data Report (FDR), Form15.43.01 for every person who meets therequired criteria. (See Manual Section5/15.43.01.) Officers shall also provide theperson with an official Department businesscard in accordance with Manual Section4/296.01. The business card shall include thedate and time of the stop and the last fourdigits of the related incident number. Anotation shall be made on the back of thebusiness card that an FDR was completedrelative to the stop.

Note: Employees who are issued a DepartmentPersonal Data Assistant (PDA) shall completethe reports electronically in lieu of completinga written Field Data Report.

Recording FDRs on Field Activity Logs.Officers shall record each stop, the number ofpersons contacted during the stop and thenumber of completed FDRs associated with thestop in the Daily Field Activity Report(DFAR), Form 18.31, or appropriate log usedby specialized divisions to record fieldactivities. Each stop and associated contact andFDR information shall be recorded separatelyon the log.

Note: Abbreviated notation “C-#” shall beused to record the number of persons contacted

during the stop and “F-#” to record the numberof FDRs completed. Example, a notation of“C-3/F-2” would indicate that three personswere contacted during the stop but only twomet the criteria for completion of an FDR.

Recording FDRs on Arrest/InvestigativeReports. Officers who complete an FDR inassociation with an Arrest or PreliminaryInvestigation Report, shall include the FDRnumber on the face sheet of the report in thebox designated “Connecting Reports.”

Recording FDRs on Field InterviewReports. When an FI is completed on aperson in association with a stop, whichrequires the completion of an FDR, thenotation “FDR” and its reference number shallbe written in the narrative portion of the FI.

Submitting FDRs for Supervisory Review.Completed FDRs shall be attached to theDFAR or other appropriate log and submittedat the end of watch. In instances where a log isnot completed, the FDRs shall be submitteddaily to a supervisor designated by thecommanding officer.

Voiding an FDR. If there is an error on anFDR, the FDR must be voided and areplacement completed. However, ifinformation was omitted and the FDR can becorrected by filling in missing information, novoid is necessary. Voided FDRs shall have“VOID” written in uppercase letters acrossboth the original and goldenrod copies. Theofficer’s initials, serial number and the dateshall be placed on the voided form. Theoriginal (white copy) of the voided FDR shallbe attached to the DFAR or other appropriatelog and submitted at the end of watch. Thegoldenrod copy shall remain in the FDR book.

Note: If a new FDR is completed, the FDRreference number of the new FDR shall bewritten on the back of the voided FDR, bothwhite copy and goldenrod copy.

Personnel Assigned Entry of Voids. VoidedFDR numbers shall be entered into the “STOP”application, via the LAN, by employee(s)within five working days from when they weresubmitted. When an FDR is submitted as“VOID,” it shall be forwarded, viaintradepartmental mail to InformationTechnology Division (ITD), for filing withouta batch cover sheet.

Note: As a reminder, officers shall completeall FDRs, and voids, in blue or black ink. Nosubstance shall be applied to FDRs (i.e.,correction fluid or tape).

Correcting Errors. Officers shall check the“STOP” Application for errors on a daily basis.If errors are present, officers shall immediatelymake the necessary corrections. A Manualentitled “STOP” Application Manual isavailable to guide employees through thecorrection process and is available from ITD oron the LAN, located under the “STOP”Application icon.



Returning FDR Books. Completed FDRbooks shall be submitted to a supervisor forapproval. When an officer transfers to anothercommand, all FDR books in his/her possessionshall be submitted to a supervisor in thecommand from which the books were obtained.

Note: Officers shall not share their assignedFDR books with other officers. The FDRbooks shall be issued, turned-in, andmaintained only at the officer’s permanentdivision of assignment. An officer on loan to adivision shall use an FDR book issued fromhis/her division of assignment.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Supervisorsreviewing completed FDRs shall:

∗ Ensure that each FDR is properly completedin accordance with the “STOP” ApplicationManual;

∗ After reviewing the FDR, place his/herserial number in the space provided at thebottom of the form;

Note: Care shall be taken when writing theserial number to not exceed the provided spaceand interfere with bubbles above.

∗ Check completed FDR books and accountfor the goldenrod copy of each completedFDR;

∗ Forward reviewed FDRs and completedFDR books to the FDR Coordinator; and,

∗ Ensure that officers check the “STOP”Application on a daily basis and makecorrections immediately.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Watchcommanders are responsible for ensuring thatall employees on their watch adhere to theprovisions of the “STOP” Application Manualand shall:

∗ Use the supervisor’s reports in the “STOP”Application to monitor the most commonmistakes and the time taken to correct them;and,

Note: The “STOP” Application Manualcontains instructions for accessing and printingthe supervisor’s reports.

∗ Conduct accuracy audits for propercompletion of FDRs by officers and theappropriate review by supervisors.

Field Data Report Coordinator. Eachgeographic Area and each specialized divisionshall have an employee designated as the FieldData Report Coordinator. Watch commandersor assistant watch commanders shall not bedesignated as FDR coordinators.

Field Data Report CoordinatorResponsibility. The Field Data ReportCoordinator shall:

∗ Issue FDR books to all officers;∗ Maintain an adequate supply of FDR books;∗ Prepare completed FDR books for records

retention and storage per DepartmentManual Sections 2/332.20 and 5/050.08;

∗ Maintain and update the Record of FieldData Report Books, Form 15.43.02;

∗ Train new personnel in the propercompletion of the FDR form and use of the“STOP” Application;

∗ Update the FDR book database in the“STOP” Application by entering the booknumbers when books are issued, completedand returned or when reissued;

Note: If any FDRs in the returned books areunused, the number of unused FDRs shall berecorded on the front cover of the book, inbrackets, next to the “Supervisor Approving”line, prior to reissue.

∗ Record the FDR book number of each FDRbook received from the Department ofGeneral Services, Distribution Center;

∗ Conduct random audits to ensure that FDRsare being properly completed;

∗ Count and batch approved FDRs with acover sheet available in the “STOP”Application;

Note: Care shall be taken that the FDRs arecounted correctly when making a batch. Thereis no minimum number required to make abatch; however, a batch cannot exceed 75FDRs.

∗ Forward FDR batches daily, via interofficemail, to:

Information Technology Division (ITD)Attn: Data Entry Section, Field DataReports207 S. Broadway, Room 300Los Angeles, CA 90012Mail Stop 447

Note: When the FDR Coordinator is on regulardays off, the batches can be forwarded to ITDupon his/her return. If the absence is in excessof five days, the commanding officer shallappoint another employee to perform theCoordinator’s duties.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility.Commanding officers are responsible forensuring that all employees in their commandadhere to established guidelines for FDRs, andshall:

∗ Appoint an employee as the Area ordivision FDR Coordinator;

∗ Ensure each officer under his/her commandis issued an FDR book;

∗ Establish appropriate controls for theissuance, maintenance and storage of FDRbooks; and,

∗ Retain completed FDR books in accordancewith the Department’s Records RetentionProgram.

Information Technology DivisionResponsibility. The ITD shall:

∗ Send out batches of FDRs to an outsidesource for scanning;

∗ Track and reconcile the FDRs sent out andthose received from the outside source; and,

∗ Process and maintain FDR data in anappropriate electronic database.

Commanding Officer, InformationTechnology Division’s Responsibility. TheCommanding Officer, ITD, shall maintain adatabase of Field Data Report information andensure that Field Data Reports are processedand maintained in an appropriate file.

202.07 FEDERAL PRIVACY ACT-SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERDISCLOSURE STATEMENT DURINGFIELD DETENTION. When the SocialSecurity number is requested in fieldsituations, the following disclosure statementshall be made to the subject:

Federal law requires that you be informed,when asked for your Social Security number,that it must be provided for use inidentification. Authority for requiring thisinformation is based upon field interviewprocedures operational prior to January 1,1975.

Note: If impractical to give before, thisstatement may be given after the SocialSecurity number has been obtained.

Exception: In release-from-custody (RFC)situations, the statement is not required. (It ispreprinted on the arrestee's copy.)

202.10 INTERROGATION OFSUSPECTS-ADMONITION OF MIRANDARIGHTS. When a person in custody is to beinterrogated regarding his/her possibleparticipation in the commission of a criminaloffense, or in any other instance where aMiranda Admonition is required (e.g.,employee administrative investigation), theMiranda Admonition shall be read verbatim tohim/her. The Miranda Admonition andresponse shall be included in the appropriatereports.

English. If the person speaks and understandsEnglish, the following Miranda Admonitionshall be read verbatim:

∗ You have the right to remain silent.Do you understand?

∗ Anything you say may be used against youin court.Do you understand?

∗ You have the right to the presence of anattorney before and during any questioning.Do you understand?

∗ If you cannot afford an attorney, one will beappointed for you, free of charge, beforeany questioning, if you want.Do you understand?

If a waiver is desired, the following questionshall be asked:

Do you want to talk about what happened?

Spanish. If the person speaks and understandsSpanish only, the following MirandaAdmonition shall be read verbatim by aDepartment employee who is fluent in Spanish:



∗ Usted tiene el derecho de permanecercallado.Entiende?

∗ Caulquier cosa que usted diga puede serusada en su contra en una corte de justicia.Entiende?

∗ Usted tiene el derecho de la presencia de unabogado antes y durante caulquierinterrogatorio.Entiende?

∗ Si usted no tiene dinero para pagar unabogado, se nombrará uno para usted, sincosto alguno, antes de cualquierinterrogatorio, si así lo quiere usted.Entiende?

If a waiver is desired, the following questionshall be asked:

Quiere usted hablar sobre lo que occurió?

Other languages. When it is necessary toadvise a person of his/her Miranda rights in alanguage other than English or Spanish, theexisting procedure shall be followed todetermine that person’s language (ManualSection 1/240.25). If a waiver is sought andobtained, the employee must then be preparedto interpret any subsequentquestions/responses. Consequently, it ispreferred that a sworn employee interpret theMiranda Admonition, as they are also trainedin interrogation techniques.

Juveniles. All persons under 18 years of age,described in Sections 601 and 602, Welfareand Institutions Code, shall be advised of theirMiranda rights upon being taken into custody,regardless of whether they are to beinterrogated. Responses as to whether thejuvenile understands each of his/her Mirandarights shall be documented. However, a waivershall not be sought unless the juvenile is to beinterrogated.

The Miranda Admonition and the questionsthat follow shall be read verbatim as presentedon the Officer's Notebook, Form 15.3.

The following information shall be included inany resulting report or other recording of theinterview:

∗ The Admonition of Miranda rights in itsentirety;

∗ Statements indicating the person’sunderstanding of his/her Miranda rights;and,

∗ Any statements made by the person.

Note: When the Short Arrest Report, Form5.2.1, is used to report a suspect being takeninto custody, the Miranda Admonition need notbe included in the report.

Courtroom testimony shall reflect that theMiranda Admonition was read verbatim tothe suspect.

202.60 IDENTIFICATION NECESSARYTO OBTAIN RECORDS ANDIDENTIFICATION INFORMATION. Anofficer requesting information from Records

and Identification Division by telephone shallidentify himself by name and serial numberand shall obtain the name of the person towhom he/she speaks.

202.64 WANT, RECORD, ANDVEHICLE REGISTRATIONINFORMATION. The following words shallbe used in requesting information concerningsuspects and vehicles:

Want (Suspect):

To determine any want or hold on thesuspect.

Record:

To determine any want, hold, or criminalrecord on the suspect.

Want (Vehicle):

To determine whether a vehicle has beenstolen, impounded, or is wanted by thepolice for any reason.

DMV (Department of Motor Vehicles):

To obtain information regarding theregistration of the vehicle.

202.80 DUE DILIGENCEREQUIREMENT.Arresting Officer's Responsibility. Whenevera suspect is arrested, it shall be theresponsibility of the arresting officer, prior tobooking, to verify whether the arrestee is thesubject of an arrest warrant.

Exception: It shall be the responsibility of thepersonnel at the concerned jail facility to checkarrestees for warrants, subsequent to booking,when an arrestee is:

∗ Booked at a field jail unit; or,∗ Transported to Metropolitan Jail Section via

a "B" wagon and booked 647f P.C. (PlainDrunk).

Arresting officers shall determine whether theinformation given to the detention officer by anarrestee is the same information used by thearresting officer who checked the arrestee forwarrants. When any discrepancy is noted, thearresting officer shall use the new informationto recheck the arrestee for warrants (ManualSection 4/725.09).

202.90 CHECKING DOCUMENTSTHROUGH THE AUTOMATEDWORTHLESS DOCUMENT INDEX ANDTHE AUTOMATED PROPERTYSYSTEM. When it is discovered, during thecourse of a police investigation, that a personis in possession of a credit card, identificationcard, check or other numbered documentbearing a name other than that of the personinterviewed, and the circumstances of theinterview indicate a possibility of criminalactivity, the document shall be checkedthrough the Automated Worthless DocumentIndex (TANGO) and the Automated PropertySystem.

When an identification card, credit card, checkor any other numbered document is booked asevidence, a copy of the related report(s) shallbe forwarded to Commercial Crimes Division.

203. PRELIMINARY FIELDINVESTIGATION AND REPORTS.203.05 CRIME SCENE LOG. This form isused to record information regarding allpersons entering or assigned to a major crimescene. The form will be initiated by the firstunit at the scene and continued by the unithandling the call.

Upon completion, the form shall be given tothe concerned investigating officer.

203.10 POLICE CUSTODY ADVICEFOR SERIOUSLY ILL OR INJUREDFELONY SUSPECTS WHO AREHOSPITALIZED AT A LOCATIONOTHER THAN LAC-USC MEDICALCENTER. When a felony suspect ishospitalized and his condition prevents atransfer to the Jail Ward of the LAC-USCMedical Center, the investigating officers shallimmediately conduct a preliminaryinvestigation to determine whether it isimperative that the arrestee be placed in policecustody. If police custody is determined to benecessary, the investigative watch commandershall be notified for the purpose of ensuringthat such custody is provided. An additionalnotification to the Department Command Postshall be made for the purpose of completingthe 24-Hour Occurrence Log.

Note: When the investigating officers are notavailable, the investigative watch commandershall cause the preliminary investigation anddetermination to be made. (See also ManualSection 4/602.10)

203.12 CITY ATTORNEYDISCLOSURE STATEMENT. Officers shallcomplete a City Attorney DisclosureStatement, Form 5.02.9, for every adult felonyand misdemeanor arrest report completed.

Exception: Officers involved in aninvestigation resulting in the completion of ajuvenile arrest report or a homicide arrestreport are exempt from these requirements. Acceptable exemptions are limited to:

∗ Threats or possible danger to the safety of avictim or witness;

∗ Possible loss or destruction of evidence; or,∗ Possible compromise of other investigations

by law enforcement.

Officers’ Responsibility. Only officerscompleting felony or misdemeanor arrestreports shall read and sign the City AttorneyDisclosure Statement, Form 5.02.9. Otherofficers involved in the arrest shall be listedunder part five of the Form 5.02.9.

Note: Mere presence at the scene of anincident does not require the listing of anofficer's name. An involved officer is one whocan offer substantive testimony regarding the



matters specified in the Disclosure Statement.If there is any doubt as to whether or not anofficer or any other witness should be listed,they should always be listed.

The Disclosure Statement shall be attached(not stapled) to the arrest report; however, itshall not be a page of the arrest report.

Officers completing the Disclosure Statementshall not alter or modify the form in any way.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Supervisors shallensure that a City Attorney DisclosureStatement is signed and attached (not stapled)to all arrest reports, and that the DisclosureStatement has not been altered or modified inany way.

Detectives’ Responsibility. When detectivesreceive a felony arrest report, they shall keepthe Disclosure Statement in the Detective'sCase Envelope, Form 15.15, or otherappropriate case envelope.

Note: The City Attorney Disclosure Statementshall not be included in reports presented to theDistrict Attorney for felony filings.

If the arrest is for a felony, but at the time offiling the District Attorney refers the case tothe City Attorney or the case is otherwisereduced to misdemeanor status, the detectiveshall remove the Disclosure Statement from thecase envelope and submit it with the arrestreport to the City Attorney for filing.

203.15 COMBINED REPORTING. Anemployee conducting a preliminaryinvestigation may combine the followingreports, as appropriate:

∗ Combined Crime and Arrest Report(Manual Section 4/216.14);

∗ Combined Evidence and Arrest Report(Manual Section 4/216.15); and/or,

∗ Combined Evidence and PreliminaryInvestigation Report (PIR) when up to threeitems of evidence are booked, the reportingemployee shall:

∗ Check the "Combined Evidence"checkbox at the top of the PIR;

∗ Complete the "Combined EvidenceReport" section on the face of the report;

∗ Enter details relating to the evidence inthe narrative of the PIR; and,

∗ Forward a copy of the PIR face sheetwith the evidence.

∗ Combined Evidence and PreliminaryInvestigation Report (PIR) when a firearmor more than three items of evidence arebooked, the reporting employee shall:

∗ Check the "Combined Evidence"checkbox at the top of the PIR;

∗ Complete the shaded areas of theProperty Report, including details andlisting of the evidence;

∗ Number the Property Report as the lastpage of the PIR; and,

∗ Forward a copy of the Property Report,stapled to the PIR face sheet, with theevidence.

Exceptions: A Combined Evidence andPIR shall not be used when:

∗ The Evidence is related to previouslybooked evidence.

Note: In this case, a separate PropertyReport shall be completed in its entirety.The original DR number shall be used, andthe items shall be numbered starting withthe next sequential item number.

∗ The evidence is booked to other than theprimary victim of the PIR (i.e., thevictim listed at the top of the PIR.);

∗ Reporting additional license plates.

Note: One plate, or set of plates, may bereported using the combined procedure.Each additional plate, or set of plates,requires a separate report with a separateDR number. (Manual Section 5/040.56)

∗ The booking employee's supervisordetermines that the use of a separatecomplete Property Report would be amore expedient means of booking theevidence under the given circumstances.

203.20 INVESTIGATION BY FIELDUNITS. Field units assigned to calls ordiscovering incidents requiring reports, exceptas prescribed in Manual Section 4/203.30, areresponsible for the preliminary investigationand the preparation of all necessary reports. Inthose instances where concerned investigatingofficers or specialized units respond to thescene and desire to conduct the preliminaryinvestigation, they shall notify the assignedunit that they are taking over at that time andwill prepare all necessary reports. The unit thusrelieved shall then:

∗ Give the investigative unit all pertinentevidence or information in their possession;

∗ Assist the investigating officers wherenecessary or requested;

∗ Assist in the preparation of the reports whennecessary to maintain continuity ofevidence, or, when requested by theinvestigating officers, to assure completeand accurate reporting;

∗ Make appropriate entries on the Daily FieldActivities Report, Form 15.52, as to thedisposition of the call and the identity of theinvestigative unit relieving them; and,

∗ Return to their prior assignment when nofurther assistance is required by theinvestigative unit.

Note: Dead-body calls (except traffic) shall behandled as prescribed in Manual Sections4/238.40 and 4/238.83. Abortioninvestigation-calls shall be handled asprescribed in Manual Section 4/212.12.

203.22 PRELIMINARY CASESCREENING. An employee conducting apreliminary investigation of an incident

reportable on a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR), Form 3.1, shall check applicableboxes under the Preliminary Case ScreeningSection of the report. If all of the factors arepresent (all of the boxes are checked),"Short-Form" reporting applies.

A Short Form PIR may be taken when all ofthe following conditions exist:

∗ Suspect/vehicle was not seen;∗ Prints or other evidence were not present;∗ MO was not distinct;∗ Property lost was less than $5000;∗ There was no serious injury to the victim;

and,∗ There was only one victim.

If any of these conditions are not present, thePIR shall be completed in its entirety.

203.25 REPORTING INCIDENTSMOTIVATED BY HATRED ORPREJUDICE.Hate Crime-Defined. A hate crime is anycriminal act or attempt directed against aperson(s), public agency or private institutionbased on the victim’s actual or perceived race,nationality, religion, sexual orientation,disability, gender or because the agency orinstitution is identified or associated with aperson or group of an identifiable race,nationality, religion, sexual orientation,disability or gender. A hate crime includes anact which results in injury, however slight; averbal threat of violence which apparently canbe carried out; an act which results in propertydamage; and, property damage or othercriminal act(s) directed against a public orprivate agency.

Hatred Incident-Defined. A hatred incident isany non-criminal act including words directedagainst a person(s) based on that person’sactual or perceived race, nationality, religion,sexual orientation, disability or gender. Hatredincidents include, but are not limited to,epithets, distribution of hate material in publicplaces, posting of hate material that does notresult in property damage, and the display ofoffensive material on one’s own property.

Employee’s Responsibility. A Departmentemployee who becomes aware of a crime orincident motivated by hatred or prejudice shall:

∗ Investigate the crime or incident in a timelymanner;

∗ Notify the watch commander, Area ofoccurrence;

∗ Notify the Department Command Post(DCP), Communications Division, forinclusion of the crime or incident in theChief of Police 24-Hour Occurrence Logand document the notification in the relatedreport; and,

∗ Complete the appropriate crime or arrestreport(s) and check the “MOTIVATED BYHATRED/PREJUDICE” box. If theincident does not constitute a specific crime,the PIR shall be titled “Hate Incident.”



The unwillingness of a victim to sign a reportor the absence of the victim does not exemptan officer from the requirement to complete aPIR.

Investigation by Field Units. Field unitsassigned to calls or discovering incidentsmotivated by hatred or prejudice shall:

∗ Investigate the incident and take appropriateaction;

∗ Telephonically notify the DepartmentCommand Post, Communications Division,of the incident; and,

∗ Complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR) and/or Arrest Report on allincidents motivated by hatred or prejudiceand write "Motivated by Hatred orPrejudice" in the MO portion of the report.

If the circumstances of an incident do notprovide the corpus delicti of a specific crime,a short form PIR shall be completed and titled"Hatred Incident." In cases where there is nospecific crime, do not list persons possiblyresponsible for the incident as suspects; suchpersons shall be listed in the "InvolvedPersons" section of the PIR.

Note: A PIR shall be completed whenever anofficer becomes aware of any incident, whethercriminal or non-criminal, which meets thecriteria of an incident motivated by hatred orprejudice. The unwillingness of the victim ofan incident motivated by hatred or prejudice tosign a report, or the absence of a victim to theincident, does not exempt officers from therequirement to complete a PIR of the incident.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Uponnotification that a crime or incident motivatedby hatred or prejudice has occurred, the WatchCommander shall:

∗ Review all reports for completeness,including the notification to DCP and causethe reports to be distributed as soon aspossible, but no later than the end of watch;

∗ Make an entry regarding the matter in theWatch Commander’s Daily Report, Form15.80;

∗ Forward a copy of the Watch Commander’sDaily Report entry along with a copy of theSergeant’s log, documenting the contactwith the victim to the Community PoliceStation (CPS) Hate Crime Coordinator; and,

∗ Direct a sergeant to immediately respond tothe scene of a major crime or incidentmotivated by hatred such as major propertydamage involved, injury to victim, orvandalism to a house of worship.

Records Unit’s Responsibility. Upon receiptof a crime or incident motivated by hatredor prejudice report, records unit personnelshall:

∗ Enter the information into the ConsolidatedCrime Analysis Database (CCAD),including the “crime or incident motivatedby hatred or prejudice” code; and,

∗ Distribute the report(s) as soon as possible,but no later than 24 hours after the report is

taken. In addition to the establisheddistribution, an extra copy of the PIR andArrest report shall be distributed to:∗ 1 – Detective Bureau∗ 1 – Criminal Conspiracy Section, Major

Crimes Division∗ 1 – Community Relations Section,

OCOP∗ 1 – Information Technology Division

Community Police Station Hate CrimeCoordinator’s Responsibility. TheCommanding Officer, Area Detective Division,is the Hate Crime Coordinator for his or hercommand and shall:

∗ Assign a specific detective supervisor tocoordinate the investigation of all hatecrimes and incidents;

∗ Ensure that a specific detective is assignedto investigate each crime or incident andthat an appropriate response is provided toeach victim including, but not limited to,compliance with the mandated ten dayfollow-up;

∗ Ensure that each crime or incident is enteredinto CCAD properly; and,

∗ Cause a monthly summary of all hatecrimes and incidents to be prepared andforwarded to the bureau commandingofficer through the Area commandingofficer within two business days of thefollowing month.

Detective’s Responsibility. A detectiveassigned to investigate a crime or incidentmotivated by hatred or prejudice shall:

∗ Contact the victim within ten calendar daysof the crime or incident and reassure thevictim of the Department’s commitment toidentifying the suspect and obtain follow-upinformation;

∗ Document any additional information on aFollow-up Investigation, Form 3.14;

∗ Present all felony hate crime investigationsin which the suspect is identified to theDistrict Attorney Hate Crime SuppressionUnit and, as appropriate, to the Office of theUnited States Attorney, Civil Rights Liaisonfor filing consideration;

∗ Present all misdemeanor hate crimeinvestigations in which the suspect isidentified to the Special EnforcementSection, Office of the City Attorney, and asappropriate, to the Office of the UnitedStates Attorney, Civil Rights Liaison; and,

∗ Provide the command’s Hate CrimeCoordinator with a copy of all reportsrelated to the incident.

Note: Upon receipt of a Form 3.14 indicatingthat a previously reported incident wasdetermined in fact not to have been motivatedby hatred or prejudice, that incident shall notbe included in the statistics.

Area Commanding Officer’s Responsibility.The Area commanding officer shall:

∗ Use all available resources in responding tocommunity needs in combating hate crimesand incidents; and,

∗ Review and forward the monthly summaryof hate crimes or incidents to the bureaucommanding officer within two businessdays of receiving the monthly summary.

Bureau Commanding Officer’sResponsibility. The bureau commandingofficer shall:

∗ Review each subordinate command’smonthly summary of hate crimes orincidents;

∗ Forward a copy of the monthly summariesto Detective Bureau (DB), InformationTechnology Division (ITD), and CriminalConspiracy Section (CCS) within twobusiness days of receiving the reports; and,

∗ Initiate a semi-annual audit to verify theaccuracy of each monthly hate crimesummary submitted by subordinatecommands and forward a copy of the auditto DB.

Training Group’s Responsibility. TrainingGroup is responsible for providing Departmentpersonnel with training pertaining to the properhandling of crimes or incidents motivated byhatred or prejudice.

203.30 REPORT UNITS. Report units shallbe requested and dispatched when practical:

∗ On report calls at contract hospitals; and,∗ Upon the request of a radio unit assigned an

A.D.W. report or 211 report call after theassigned radio unit has made thedetermination that a report only is requiredand that a report unit is available to take theappropriate report. The assigned radio unitshall cause any required initial broadcast ofthe crime to be made.

Radio units shall not request a report unit tocomplete the appropriate report when:

∗ The perpetrator is apprehended; OR,∗ The robbery victim is a bank; OR,∗ It is impractical for the victim to remain at

the scene for a report unit.

203.33 NOTIFICATION TO VICTIMSOF CRIMINAL ACTIVITY.Officer’s Responsibility. When officersbecome aware of a threat or informationaffecting the safety of a witness or victim whois to testify in a criminal prosecution, theyshall immediately:

∗ Notify the investigating officer who isassigned to the case, or the investigatingofficer's immediate supervisor or, in theirabsence, the Area watch commander; and,

∗ Complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR), Form 3.1 titled "Dissuading aWitness," containing the followinginformation:

∗ Date and time the information wasreceived;



∗ Name, address, and telephone number ofthe witness or victim being threatened;

∗ Identity of the defendant in the case; and,∗ Identity of the person making the threat,

and the nature of the threat, if known.

When the threat or information involves awitness or victim who is to testify in a criminalprosecution for which no investigating officeris assigned, officers shall immediately:

∗ Ensure that the witness or victim isinformed of the threat to his/her safety assoon as possible;

∗ Document the threat on a PIR containing therelevant information; and,

∗ Document the date and time that the witnessor victim was notified on a PIR or a Follow-up Investigation, Form 3.14.

Note: The identity of the person(s) from whomthe information was received shall not be notedon the PIR if, in the opinion of the officer, aserious threat to their safety could ensue. Theidentity of the person(s) providing theinformation, and other relevant facts notincluded on the PIR shall be documented on anEmployee's Report, Form 15.07, stamped"Confidential" and forwarded with the PIR.This does not preclude officers from disclosingto their commanding officer the identities ofinformants from whom the officers havereceived information, in accordance withManual Section 4/733.10.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Wheninvestigating officers become aware of a threat,or information relating to the safety of awitness or victim who is to testify in a criminalprosecution, they shall immediately:

∗ Ensure that the witness or victim is notifiedof the threat or information relating tohis/her safety;

∗ Inform the witness or victim of the DistrictAttorney's Witness Protection/RelocationProgram; and,

Note: The witness or victim shall not beadvised of his/her eligibility for the program.The Bureau of Investigative Services, LosAngeles County District Attorney's Office,determines eligibility. If the witness or victimdoes not meet the eligibility requirements setforth by the Bureau of Investigative Services,the investigating officer shall contact theDepartment's Witness Protection ProgramCoordinator (the Commanding Officer,Detective Bureau) for advice and assistance.

∗ Document the notification and otherrelevant information on a Follow-upInvestigation or other appropriate report.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Whenan Area watch commander is advised of threatsor information relating to the safety of awitness or victim who is to testify in a criminalprosecution, he/she shall immediately:

∗ Ensure that the assigned investigatingofficer or the investigating officer'simmediate supervisor is notified;

∗ Ensure that the witness or victim ispromptly notified of the potential threat tohis/her safety; and,

∗ Ensure that the incident, including time ofnotification of the affected witness orvictim, is properly documented on a PIR.

203.35 NOTIFICATION TO VICTIMSOF VIOLENT CRIMES. When a person is avictim of a violent crime (1), the report officershall:

∗ Issue the victim or member of the victim'sfamily a completed Victim's Report Memo,Form 3.17, advising the victim, or familymember, of the indemnification program,and of the City and District Attorney'sVictim-Witness Assistance Programs; and,

Note: Department employees providingindemnification information to victims or theirfamilies shall only inform them of theprogram's existence and refer them to theappropriate agencies. Employees shall notadvise victims regarding their eligibility for theprogram.

∗ Enter in the narrative portion of the report,the date and time the notification was madeand the name, address, and relationship ofthe person notified.

Note: When the notification is not made, thereasons shall be included in the narrative of thereport with any information which may aid aninvestigating officer in making thisnotification.

When a crime or traffic report indicates thatthe indemnification notification has not beenmade, the investigating officer shall:

∗ Ensure that the victim or a member of thevictim's family is issued a completed copyof the appropriate Victim's Report Memo;and,

∗ Enter in the narrative portion of theFollow-up Report, Form 3.14, or the TrafficCollision-Status Report, Form 4.16, thedate, time, place, name, address, andrelationship of the person notified.

[(1)The term "Crime of Violence" shallmean any crime committed by the use offorce or fear OR any death or injuryresulting from the operation of a motorvehicle, aircraft or water craft when suchdeath or injury is:

∗ Intentionally inflicted upon another, OR∗ Sustained by another as a result of a

driver in violation of 20001 V.C., 23152V.C., or 23153 V.C.]

203.36 DOMESTICVIOLENCE/VICTIM INFORMATIONNOTIFICATION EVERYDAY (DVV)PAMPHLET.Officer’s Responsibility. Officers shall issuea DVV pamphlet to victims of violent crimesand all victims of domestic violence.

When an arrest is made for a violent ordomestic violence crime, the arrestingofficer(s) shall advise the victim of thefollowing:

∗ The DVV information regarding thearrestee(s) will not be accessible until thearrestee(s) is booked into the AutomatedJustice Information System (AJIS);

∗ Utilization of the DVV program by thevictim is voluntary;

∗ Not to depend solely upon the DVVprogram for their safety; and,

∗ The arrestee’s booking number as soon aspossible when the arrestee has a commonname.

Exception: If an arrestee is released withoutbooking, the arresting officer shall notify thevictim of the release immediately.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility.

Report Narratives. When reviewing violentcrime-related arrest reports and/or domesticviolence reports, watch commanders shallensure that the arresting/reporting officer(s)documents that a DVV pamphlet was providedto the victim, under the heading of “AdditionalInformation” or indicated by marking theappropriate check box (e.g., DomesticViolence Supplemental Report).

Release from Custody. When an arrestee iseligible for release from custody, either bybail, bond, citation, 825 PC, 849(b)(1) PC, ora Notice to Appear/Release from Custody, thewatch commander shall ensure the arrestee’sstatus is processed electronically through theAJIS prior to the arrestee’s physical release.

Release Prior to Booking. When an arresteeof a violent crime is released without booking,the watch commander shall ensure the arrestingofficer(s) notifies the victim immediately.

Assistant Commanding Officer,Administrative and Technical ServicesBureau’s (ATSB), Responsibility. TheAssistant Commanding Officer, ATSB, shallensure that when any jail facility detentionofficer prepares a release from custody,whether it be via bail, bond, citation, 825 PC,849(b)(1) PC, or a Notice to Appear/Releasefrom Custody, the arrestee’s release isprocessed electronically through AJIS, prior tothe arrestee’s physical release.

203.37 REQUESTING A SIGNLANGUAGE INTERPRETER. Whencoming in contact with a deaf or hard ofhearing person, Department employees arerequired to provide effective communication.The length, importance, and complexity of thecommunication must be considered indetermining how to achieve effectivecommunication in a given situation. Use of penand paper or gestures may suffice inestablishing communication. When pen andpaper or gestures is not effective, employeesshould request a professional Sign LanguageInterpreter (SLI). The City has contracted withan outside provider to furnish qualified



professional SLIs who will usually respondwithin 45 minutes of a request.

Employee’s Responsibility.

∗ Minor Incident. An employee coming intocontact with a deaf or hard of hearingperson when the contact is of a minor nature(e.g., traffic stop, completion of a basiccrime report, etc.) should attempt tocommunicate effectively with the deaf orhard of hearing person by using a pen orpaper, gestures, or by requesting a SLI viaCommunications Division.

Note: Generally, family members or friends ofthe deaf or hard of hearing person should notbe used as an interpreter except in incidentsthat present a clear and immediate threat to theemployee or public safety.

∗ Serious/Complex Incident. An employeeinvestigating a serious incident (e.g., acomplex investigation, investigationrequiring Miranda admonition, testmeasuring alcohol consumption, arrest, etc.)involving a deaf or hard of hearing personshould request a professional SLI viaCommunications Division to ensureeffective communication.

Note: An SLI is not needed to effect an arrest.However, if an SLI is determined to benecessary to communicate effectively, aprofessional SLI shall be requested to thescene, or to a follow-up location (e.g., policestation, Jail Division).

∗ Mandatory Use. Regardless of thecomplexity of the incident, officers shallrequest a professional SLI viaCommunications Division when one of thefollowing conditions exist:

∗ Efforts fail to establish effectivecommunication; or,

∗ The deaf or hard of hearing personrequests a professional SLI.

∗ Scheduled Events. For scheduled events,employees may request a professional SLIvia the City’s Department on Disability, 72hours prior to the event.

∗ Sign Language InterpreterResponse/Arrest Advisement. Anytime anemployee requests a professional SLI, therequesting employee should complete andissue the Deaf/Hard of HearingCommunication Card advising the deaf orhard of hearing person that an SLI isresponding to assist with communication.

When an officer arrests a deaf or hard ofhearing person, and the arresting officerrequests a professional SLI, the officer shouldcomplete and issue the Deaf/Hard of HearingCommunication Card advising the deaf or hardof hearing person that they are under arrest andbeing transported, and that an SLI has beenrequested.

Employees shall document the issuance of theDeaf/Hard of Hearing Card on their Daily

Field Activities Report, Form 15.52.0 orequivalent, and any related report(s).

Communication Division’s Responsibility.Upon receiving a request for a sign languagecommunicator, Communications Divisionpersonnel shall notify a Department contractedSLI.

Professional SLI Requested. Upon receivinga request for a professional SLI,Communications Division shall contact theoutside provider, who will cause a qualifiedprofessional SLI to respond to the locationdesignated by the requesting employee.

203.38 HUMAN SERVICESREFERRAL. The Information and ReferralFederation of Los Angeles County (INFOLINE) is an independent, nonprofit corporationthat provides a one-source referral for personsin need of human services. These servicesinclude food, shelter, counseling, hotlines andhealth services. Info Line does not providethese services directly. It is a telephone bankstaffed on a 24-hour basis by personnelfamiliar with the capabilities of private,governmental, and charitable agencies withinLos Angeles County.

Employees coming in contact with persons inneed of human services information shall:

∗ Obtain human services information via theACC service directory command (SD;ICSHELTERS); or,

∗ Obtain human services information bytelephonically contacting CommunicationsDivision.

In addition, employees shall provide persons inneed of human services with the telephonenumbers to the INFO LINE.

Note: Employees who come into contact witha homeless person seeking shelter, who issuspected of being mentally ill, shall contactthe Mental Evaluation Unit, Detective SupportDivision, for advice (Manual Section4/260.20).

Cold Weather Emergency ShelterNotifications. During the activation of coldweather emergency shelters CommunicationsDivision shall:

∗ Maintain liaison with Los AngelesHomeless Services Authority (LAHSA);

∗ Provide the Winter Shelter Hot Linetelephone number(s) and locations to Areawatch commanders; and,

∗ Disseminate cold weather emergencyshelter information to Departmentemployees via a Departmentwide broadcast,teletype, and through the ACC.

203.40 SUBMITTING REPORTS FORAPPROVAL. An officer who completes anyof the following reports shall submit the reportto a supervisor for approval, as soon aspracticable:

∗ Crime reports, other than robbery, rape orstolen vehicle reports;

∗ Death report;∗ Recovered bicycle report;∗ Worthless document report;∗ Injury report;∗ Formal missing person report;∗ Discharge of firearm report;∗ Lost report;∗ Investigator's Final Report, Form 5.10;∗ Follow-up Report, Form 3.14, relating to

any of the above; and/or,∗ Domestic Violence report.

A Preliminary Investigation Report of arobbery or rape, Form 3.1, shall be deliveredwithout delay to the approving supervisor(Manual Section 4/262.90).

An officer completing a Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180, shall immediately obtain a DRnumber and shall submit the report forapproval at the end of watch or on the nextroutine trip to the station (Manual Section4/220.40).

Field Interview Reports and Field Data Reportsshall be completed and turned in at the end ofwatch with the Daily Field Activities Report.Officers who do not complete a Daily FieldActivities Report shall submit Field InterviewReports and Field Data Reports to a supervisordesignated by their commanding officer.

Gang Member Arrests. An officer submittinga report to a supervisor for approval, whichinvolves the arrest of "verified" gang members,shall ensure that the face sheet of each report(i.e., Arrest, Follow-up, 5.10's, Property, etc.)is stamped "GANG MEMBER ARREST" inred ink.

Note: An arrestee is a verified gang memberwhen the arrestee is listed in Department gangfiles. Verification shall be obtained through therespective bureau's Special Enforcement Unitoffice. During off hours, verification can beobtained through Special Operations SupportDivision (SOSD).

The stamp may also be used on reports whenthe arrestee has been approved for inclusioninto the gang file, but has not been added to thefile at the time of inquiry.

Note: Replacement stamps may be reorderedthrough Supply Section, Fiscal OperationsDivision, using the Requisition Form, Form15.11.

Narcotics Arrests. Officers completingnarcotics related reports (e.g., Arrest Reports,Evidence Reports, Preliminary InvestigationReports) shall write in the left margin of thefirst page, “distribute one copy to Area NED”on the report.

Area Records Unit’s Responsibility. Arearecord units shall distribute copies of narcoticsrelated reports as follows:

∗ One copy to the Narcotics EnforcementDivision (NED) of the Area of occurrence;and,

∗ One copy to be stored in their Area files.



203.50 IDENTIFICATION OFSUSPECTS IN THE FIELD. A suspect maybe transported to a victim or witness for thepurpose of identification when:

∗ An officer is conducting a preliminaryinvestigation and a field confrontation isnecessary to determine if the suspect is theperpetrator of the offense; and,

∗ Probable cause exists to arrest the suspectfor the offense; or,

∗ Exigent circumstances exist that make itunreasonable for the victim or witness to betransported to the suspect; or,

∗ The officer obtains the free and voluntaryconsent of the suspect.

An officer who intends to conduct a fieldconfrontation shall inform the victim orwitness that:

∗ The person is in temporary custody as apossible suspect only; and,

∗ The fact the person is in police custody doesnot indicate his/her guilt or innocence; and,

∗ The purpose of the confrontation is either toeliminate or identify the person as theperpetrator.

203.60 ALARM NOTIFICATION.VERIFIED BURGLAR ALARM -DEFINED. A verified burglar alarm is analarm activation where an unauthorized entryor attempted unauthorized entry upon thepremises, building, or structure protected bythe system, has been independently verified.Verification shall be accomplished by aconfirmation by the alarm system user or otherperson at or near the scene of the activation, aprivate guard responder or alarm companyoperator. Verification shall be based on aphysical observation or inspection of thepremises, or by remote visual inspection of thepremises.

Note: An open door, broken window, or otheractivity consistent with a burglary isconsidered a verified activation.

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers dispatchedto a burglar alarm call shall conduct aninvestigation in accordance with currentDepartment procedures outlined in thisSection. If the alarm is false or the officer’sinvestigation determines that the alarm waserroneously reported as a verified alarm orfirearms business, the officer shall record thatinformation on his/her Daily Field ActivitiesReport, Form 15.52, Mobile Digital Terminaland Alarm Notification Card, Form 2.90, andinform Communications Division of theirfindings. The officer shall verify that a validBOPC permit number is on file. The officershall place a check in the box on the reverseside of the Alarm Notification Card whenthe location does not have a permit. Thecompleted Alarm Notification card shall beissued to the subscriber/owner or otherresponsible person at the location.

Note: Officers can obtain the BOPC permitnumber via the Mobile Data Terminal (MDT),listed under the Incident's Comments.

Officers not required to maintain a DFAR shallrecord the name of the person to whom thecompleted Form 2.90 was issued in the RadioCall Incident Comments by using their MobileData Terminal (MDT) or through the Radio-Telephone Operator (RTO).

Closed Business or Unoccupied Residence.When an Officer has responded to a false alarmat a closed business or unoccupied residence,the officer shall verify that a valid BOPCpermit number is on file, and leave the AlarmNotification at the premises. The notificationshall be left in such a manner that it isconspicuous to the subscriber/owner, butconcealed from passersby. The officer shallrecord on the DFAR that a completed AlarmNotification was left at the scene.

Note: Officers not required to maintain aDFAR shall record the issuance of Form 2.90in the Radio Call Incident Comments by usingtheir MDT or through the RTO.

203.70 BOARD-UP PROCEDURE -COMMERCIAL LOCATIONS. The board-up procedure applies only to a commerciallocation when an officer finds the locationunoccupied and unsecured.Officer’s Responsibility. When an officerfinds a commercial location unoccupied andunsecured, the officer shall attempt to contacta responsible party (R/P) to assumeresponsibility for safeguarding the premises. Ifthe officer is unable to locate an R/P’stelephone number on or within the premises orfrom an alarm company, City Business TaxRegistration Certificate, the watchcommander’s office, or some other availableresource, the officer shall request thatCommunications Division attempt to obtain anemergency telephone number from the FireDepartment. The officer shall maintain arecord of these efforts, usually in the officer’sField Officer’s Notebook.

After an hour of attempting to contact an R/Por if an R/P is contacted but cannot respondwithin an hour, the officer shall contact asupervisor to determine if a board-up vendorshould be requested. With supervisor approval,the officer shall:

∗ Request that Communications Divisioncontact and dispatch a board-up vendor;

∗ In addition to any crime or arrest reports,complete the Board-Up Report, Form16.29.05, and document on that report alleffort to contact an R/P or, if an R/P wascontacted, the R/P’s delay in responding;

∗ Ensure the board-up vendor completes theirportion of the Board-Up Report;

∗ Obtain a supervisor’s signature on the formand provide the supervisor with the originaland one copy of the form; and,

∗ Leave the victim’s copy of the Board-UpReport in a conspicuous place inside thelocation.

Officers SHALL NOT offer board-up serviceto an R/P who is already at the scene. Officersmay refer the R/P to the local telephone bookfor a board-up company. Officers shall notifythe R/P that once an officer makes a request toCommunications Division and the vendorbegins to respond, the business will be assessedthe surcharge imposed by the City, and may becharged some or all of the board-up fees, evenif the R/P arrives at the scene prior to thevendor and cancels the vendor’s response.

Officers shall remain at the scene until theboard-up service has secured the location.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. A supervisorshall respond to the location where a board-upservice request is being considered todetermine if a board-up services should berequested. If the supervisor determines thatboard-up is appropriate, the supervisor shallapprove the request and direct the officer torequest board-up response fromCommunications Division. Additionally, thesupervisor shall:

∗ Review and approve the Board-Up Reportat the scene, so the victim’s copy of theform can be left inside the location;

∗ Summarize the incident in the Sergeant’sDaily Report, Form 15.48, and include thetotal amount of standby time provided bythe Department; and,

∗ Submit the original and Area copy of theBoard-Up Report to the watch commanderalong with the copies of the followingdocuments:

∗ Sergeant’s Daily Report with all otherunrelated entries redacted (removed)from the log;

∗ Completed Incident History printout forthe call;

∗ Any crime and/or arrest report; and,∗ Any other related reports or documents

which may assist during an appealhearing.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Uponreceiving the original and Area copy of theBoard-Up Report, the watch commander shall:

∗ Review the form and attachments forcompleteness;

∗ Forward the original Board-Up Coordinator,Commission Investigation Division (CID);and,

∗ Submit the Area copy and attachments tothe Area Office for review and retention.

Note: All Board-Up Reports and attachmentsshall be maintained in the Area for no less thanthree years, and shall be submitted to theBoard-Up Coordinator within 10 days ofrequest.

203.75 BOARD-UP PROCEDURES –RESIDENTIAL LOCATIONS. The



following procedure applies to securing aresidential location.

Officer’s Responsibility. An officerresponding to an incident involving anunoccupied and unsecured residential locationshall attempt to locate or telephonically contactan R/P. If all attempts to contact an R/P areunsuccessful, the officer shall notify asupervisor and be guided by the supervisor’sadvice.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. When notified,a supervisor shall respond to the location andensure that reasonable attempts have beenmade to locate someone to assumeresponsibility for the residence.

When all options have been exhausted, thesupervisor shall determine if a unit shouldremain at scene or if minor repairs will securethe location. If minor repairs are appropriate,and material/tools are not available at thelocation, the supervisor may:

∗ Dispatch a unit to Property Division (ParkerCenter or Van Nuys Division) to retrievethe appropriate supplies (i.e., plywood,nails, hammer, and saw);

∗ Ensure that officers have made thenecessary repairs to secure the location andreturned the supplies to Property Division;and,

∗ Document the incident on the Sergeant’sDaily Report.

203.80 BOARD-UP PROCEDURE -ADMINISTRATIVE APPEAL HEARING.The Board-Up Ordinance allows a businessowner or representative to appeal a board-up todetermine if the board-up was necessary and/orif the officer(s) adhered to the board-upprocedure. The request for appeal must occurwithin ten calendar days of the board-upservice.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. TheAdministrative hearing for a board-up serviceshall be heard by a watch commander from theArea of occurrence. Whenever practical, thehearing should be adjudicated by the watchcommander on duty at the time of the incident;however, the hearing shall not be held by thesupervisor who approved the board-up. Thewatch commander conducting the hearingshall:

∗ Schedule a hearing date preferably withintwo days of the request (excludingweekends and holidays), but in no eventlater than seven calendar days after therequest is made;

∗ Notify CID of the appeal request and thedate and time of the hearing;

∗ Collect and review all documentation forthe incident;

∗ Conduct the board-up appeal hearing todetermine if the officers followed theprocedure outlined in Manual Section4/203.70 and inform the R/P of thedecision;

∗ Summarize the facts of the incident and thehearing in an Employee’s Report, Form15.07, including the reason for the appeal,the reason for any extension beyond the twoday hearing requirement, and the rationalefor the decision; and,

∗ Forward the Employee’s Report, along witha copy of related reports (e.g., CrimeReport, Supervisor’s Daily Report, andIncident History) to the Area commandingofficer.

If an appeal is successful, the appellant doesnot need to pay the board-up fee. CommissionInvestigation Division will notify the CityClerk’s Office. A successful appeal results in awaiver of the board-up cost for the businessrequiring the City to pay the cost.

Note: Any issue regarding the proper identityof the person billed (owner, landlord, tenant,etc.) shall be referred to CID.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Whenthe Area commanding officer receives a board-up appeal report, the commanding officer shallreview the report for completeness and forwardthe original report to CID. The Area shallretain a copy of the appeal report in its files.

204. CASES INVOLVING ANIMALS.204.20 DEAD ANIMALS. When deadanimals are found in the street, the DeadAnimal Dispatcher of the nearest section of theRefuse Collection Division, Department ofPublic Works, shall be notified. Field unitsmay make such notification by radio to thecommunications control operator.

204.40 ANIMAL BITES. When a fowl oran animal (except reptiles) bites a person, atelephonic report shall be made to the RabiesControl Division, County Health Department.If the office is closed, the emergency operatorat the Hall of Justice will connect the officerwith the proper person to be notified, who shallbe given the following information:

∗ Name, address, telephone number, and ageof the victim;

∗ Name, address, and telephone number of theowner of the animal;

∗ Description of the animal (breed, color, andsex);

∗ Circumstances of the attack;∗ Nature of treatment, when, and by whom

given;∗ Location of wound on the body; and,∗ Date the bite occurred.

204.60 SICK OR INJURED ANIMALS.When a sick or an injured animal is found onthe street, the nearest shelter of the Departmentof Animal Services shall be notifiedimmediately. Units in the field may make thisnotification by means of radio to thecommunications control operator.

204.65 RESPONSIBILITY OF THEDEPARTMENT OF ANIMAL SERVICES.The Department of Animal Services (DAS) hasprimary responsibility for the report

completion, investigation, and subsequentcriminal filing of crimes against animals.Department of Animal Services, AnimalControl Officers have powers of arrest asspecified in Section 836 of the Penal Code, andin the course and scope of their employmentare authorized to carry loaded firearms on theirperson or in City vehicles.

Exception: The Police Department willcontinue to be responsible for:

∗ Completion of reports, investigations, andarrests of criminal assaults against dogs andhorses assigned to the Department's K-9 ormounted units; and,

∗ Investigation of crimes involving cruelty toanimals when committed in connection withcrimes that are the investigativeresponsibility of the Department.

Officer’s Responsibility. When officersrespond to an incident involving cruelty toanimals or animal sacrifice, the DAS shall benotified immediately. Field units shall makethe notification through CommunicationsDivision and shall confirm that DAS personnelare available and responding to the location.Field units shall await the response of DASpersonnel and:

∗ Establish the elements of the crime;∗ Protect the scene and locate items which

could identify the suspect or show how thecrime was committed; and,

∗ Locate and identify witnesses and requestthem to remain for questioning.

Upon arrival, DAS personnel will assumeresponsibility for the investigation and reportcompletion. In the event DAS personnel aredelayed or cannot respond, officers shall:

∗ Conduct the preliminary investigation;∗ Cause photographs to be taken of the crime

scene by Area personnel, or by a ScientificInvestigation Division (SID) photographer,depending upon availability.

Note: In accordance with existing proceduresfor processing crime scene photographs takenby SID Photographic Section, the reportingofficer shall enter the photographer's name andserial number in the "Notifications" box, andthe SID Photographic Section Control Number("C" number) in the "Connected Reports" boxof the Preliminary Investigation Report. Oncea DR number has been obtained, the reportingofficer shall advise SID Photographic Sectionof the DR number so that it may be referencedon the photo negatives.

∗ Complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR), Form 3.1, and enter "DAS" inthe investigative division box;

∗ Notify the Bureau of Sanitation, RefuseCollection, through CommunicationsDivision, to respond and dispose of animalcarcasses discovered during aninvestigation;

∗ Indicate in the narrative portion of the PIRthe name of the responding Refuse



Collection employee and the carcassdisposition;

∗ Indicate in the left margin of the PIR thatextra copy of the report shall be forwardedto the Department of Animal Services; and,

∗ Ensure that related crime scene photographstaken by Area personnel are attached to thePIR and submitted to the concerned Arearecords unit.

Note: Crimes involving cruelty to animals fallunder the legal category of crimes againstproperty. Cruelty to animals is covered byPenal Code Section 597, which generallymakes such conduct a misdemeanor. However,it can be a felony to maliciously maim, wound,torture, or mutilate a living animal whichbelongs to another person.

When officers make an arrest for cruelty toanimals or animal sacrifice, they shall:

∗ Obtain booking advice from the AreaDetective Division;

∗ Obtain booking approval from the Areawatch commander and book the arrestee;

∗ Complete the Arrest Report, Form 5.2, inthe usual manner; and,

∗ Indicate in the left margin of the ArrestReport that an extra copy of the report shallbe forwarded to the Department of AnimalServices.

Area Records Unit’s Responsibility. Whenreceiving a crime report titled "Cruelty toAnimals" or "Animal Sacrifice," Area RecordsUnit personnel shall:

∗ Process the report using the new crime classcode of 943 for reports titled "Cruelty toAnimals" and the new modus operandi codeof 0909, if the crime involves "AnimalSacrifice;" and,

∗ Forward a copy of each crime report, orcombined crime and arrest report, to:

The Department of AnimalServices Administration419 S. Spring Street, Room 1400Los Angeles, CA 90013(MAIL STOP 105)

204.70 LOST ANIMALS. A personrequesting that a report be taken of a lostanimal shall be referred to the nearest Cityanimal shelter.

204.75 FOUND ANIMALS. An officerreceiving information regarding a found animalshall, without delay, notify the nearest Cityanimal shelter. The notification shall include,when practicable, the name and address of theperson who has possession of the animal.

204.80 DESTROYING ANIMALS. Undercertain circumstances officers are authorized touse a firearm to destroy an animal when a localDepartment of Animal Services representativeis not readily available.

Critically Injured Animals. Officers may usea firearm to destroy a critically injured animal

when a delay in destroying the animal wouldbe inhumane.

Note: The owner’s consent shall be obtainedprior to destroying a critically injured animal,when practical.

Vicious or Rabid Animal. Officers may use afirearm to destroy a vicious, potentiallydangerous, or rabid animal when a delay wouldexpose persons to danger.

Note: Animals suspected of being rabid shouldnot be shot in the head except in anemergency.

Predatory Animals. Provisions for destroyingpredatory animals attacking people, domesticanimals or livestock, under certaincircumstances, are outlined in the CaliforniaFood and Agriculture Code, and the CaliforniaFish and Game Code.

Venomous/Poisonous Animals. Officers mayuse a firearm to destroy venomous orpoisonous animals, which pose an immediatedanger.

Note: The use of a firearm should beconsidered only if other methods areimpractical (e.g., use of a shovel, hoe or othertool).

Reporting Requirements, Animal Shootings.When one of these incidents occurs involvingon-duty officers, Force Investigation Division(FID) shall conduct an investigation inaccordance with Department Manual Section2/255.05. However, when the officer is off-duty, the following procedure shall apply:

Officer’s Responsibility. An off-duty officerwho discharges any firearm in order to destroyan animal, except legally destroying an animalwhile hunting, shall promptly:

∗ Contact the local law enforcement agencyhaving jurisdiction and inform them of thecircumstances surrounding the incident andrequest a report;

∗ Notify the watch commander or asupervisor at his/her Area/division ofassignment. If closed, notify the DepartmentCommand Post (DCP) and his/herArea/division as soon as it opens; and,

∗ Obtain a copy of the report, log entry orother documentation completed by the locallaw enforcement agency, if one wascompleted.

On the officer’s next scheduled working day,but no later than seven days after the incident,the officer shall complete and submit anEmployee’s Report, Form 15.7, to his/hercommanding officer. The Employee’s Reportshall include:

∗ The circumstances of the incident;∗ Whether the weapon used was City or

privately owned;∗ The date and time of the notification to the

local law enforcement agency, and thename of the person notified;

∗ The date, time and name of the supervisornotified at the officer’s Area/division ofassignment or the person notified at theDCP;

∗ The names and contact information of anywitnesses; and,

∗ An attached copy of the local lawenforcement agency report or otherdocumentation.

Watch Commander or Officer in ChargeResponsibility. A watch commander or officerin charge who is notified that an officer hasbeen involved in the off-duty discharge of anyfirearm for purposes of destroying an animal,other than while hunting, shall promptly:

∗ Notify the DCP;∗ Contact the FID on-call representative and

be guided by their advice; and,∗ If directed by the concerned Area/division

commanding officer, dispatch a supervisorto the location of occurrence.

Department Command Post Responsibility.When the DCP is notified of this type ofincident, they shall include it in the Chief ofPolice 24-hour Occurrence Log. Additionally,if the employee’s Area/division of assignmentis closed, the DCP shall:

∗ Notify the FID on-call team and be guidedby their advice;

∗ Notify the involved employee’scommanding officer; and,

∗ If directed by the involved employee’scommanding officer, dispatch a supervisorfrom the nearest geographical Area to thelocation of occurrence.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. When it isdetermined that FID will not respond to thescene of an off-duty animal shooting, theconcerned Area/division commanding officerwill determine if a supervisor shall respond.

The supervisor responding to the scene ofoccurrence shall:

∗ Ensure the incident is being handled inaccordance to the reporting proceduresoutlined in Department Manual Section4/204.80; and,

∗ Record the response to the scene and his/herobservations in the Sergeant’s Daily Report,Form 15.48.

Note: Issues relating to personnel performanceor misconduct shall not be recorded on theSergeant’s Daily Report. In those instanceswhen performance or misconduct issues arise,the supervisor shall follow the appropriatereporting procedures.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Thecommanding officer of the involved officershall:

∗ Determine whether a supervisor shallrespond to the location of the occurrence;and,

Note: Extreme distance to the location of the



occurrence shall be considered in determiningsupervisory response.

∗ Forward the involved officer’s Employee’Report, the investigation conducted by thelocal law enforcement agency and a copy ofthe responding supervisor’s Sergeant’sDaily Report to FID within 14 days of theoccurrence.

Force Investigation Division’sResponsibility. When notified of this type ofincident, FID shall evaluate the incident todetermine if an immediate follow-upinvestigation by FID is required. If theinformation indicated the incident solelyinvolves a critically injured, vicious, rabid orvenomous/poisonous animal, FID shall reviewthe documents received from the involvedofficer’s commanding officer, assign a FIDinvestigative control number, create a FID fileretaining all original documents and forward acopy of all materials to the Chair of the Use ofForce Review Board. The Chair, Use of ForceReview Board will determine furtherDepartment administrative review.

Note: When it is determined that FID will notinvestigate an off-duty animal shooting, theinvolved officer’s Employee’s Report, a copyof the investigation from the outside lawenforcement agency and a copy of theresponding supervisor’s Sergeant’s DailyReport will serve as the administrativeinvestigation into the incident.

204.85 CARE OF ANIMALS, OWNERARRESTED. When a person having an animalin his/her possession is arrested, the arrestingofficer shall, if unable to make any otherarrangements for its care:

∗ Deliver the animal to the nearestDepartment of Animal Services shelter andobtain a completed copy of the AnimalRelinquishment and Impound Record, Form30, from the shelter employee; and,

Note: When an animal is to be held asevidence, the shelter employee shall be notifiedand an entry to that effect will be made on theForm 30.

∗ Place the copy of the AnimalRelinquishment and Impound Record, Form30, with the arrestee's personal property.

205. VEHICLE PURSUITPROCEDURES.205.01 NOTIFYINGCOMMUNICATIONS DIVISION. When aunit goes in pursuit, it shall adviseCommunications Division that it is "in pursuit"and give the unit's identification, location, adescription of the pursued vehicle and/orsuspects, directions taken, and reason forpursuit. The unit shall request an air unit and aback-up unit. The pursuing unit shall givefrequent and comprehensive progress reports.

Any unit having pertinent informationregarding the pursuit may adviseCommunications Division. The secondary unit

shall also notify Communications Division, assoon as possible, of the secondary unit'sinvolvement in the pursuit by stating that it is"in pursuit" and its unit identification andlocation. The supervisor monitoring a pursuitshall continually evaluate the necessity tocontinue the pursuit.

Unmarked Units. Unmarked units withoutemergency equipment shall not engage in apursuit. However, officers in unmarked unitswithout emergency equipment may becomeinvolved in emergency activities involving aserious crime or a life-endangering situation. Inthose rare instances, it may be necessary tofollow a suspect vehicle while summoningassistance from a black-and-white, four-wheeled unit equipped with external roof-mounted emergency lights. Officers in anunmarked unit without emergency equipmentshall not violate the rules of the road as definedin Division 11 of the California Vehicle Code.

When officers in an unmarked unit withoutemergency equipment become aware that aunit with emergency equipment has arrived andwill attempt to stop the suspect vehicle, theunmarked unit shall disengage.

Note: A hybrid unit is a marked, emergency-equipped vehicle and may engage in vehicularpursuit. However, a hybrid is bound by thesame restrictions as a motorcycle unit or adual-purpose unit.

205.10 CONTROL OF A VEHICLEPURSUIT.General Guidelines. The initial pursuingpolice unit (primary unit) and the back-up unit(secondary unit) shall be the only units topursue the suspect vehicle "Code Three."However, the senior officer of the primary unitmay request an additional unit(s) to join thepursuit if it appears certain that the officers inthe two vehicles involved would not besufficient to safely effect the arrest of thesuspect. Officers in all other units shall stayclear of the pursuit, but remain alert to itsprogress and location.

Note: When available, any unit in a pursuitshould be a two-officer unit. Tactically, twoofficers (driver and passenger) are better ableto evaluate and control activities in a pursuit.

If the unit initiating the pursuit cannot continueas the primary unit, the secondary unit shallbecome the primary unit. The secondary unitshall advise Communications Division that it isthe primary unit. Another unit may then enterthe pursuit and shall advise CommunicationsDivision that it is the secondary unit.

In the event a pursuit is initiated by an officeron a motorcycle or in a hybrid or dual purposevehicle, the pursuing motor officer or driver ofthe hybrid or dual purpose vehicle shallrelinquish the role as the primary unit when afour-wheeled, black-and-white unit equippedwith external roof-mounted emergency lightshas joined the pursuit. Absent exigentcircumstances, officers on a motorcycle or in a

hybrid or dual purpose vehicle shall notbecome a secondary unit after they becomeaware of the arrival of a secondary black-and-white, four-wheeled unit equipped withexternal roof-mounted emergency lights.

Primary Unit’s Responsibilities. Theresponsibility of the officers in the primary unitis the apprehension of the suspect withoutunreasonably endangering themselves orothers. The senior officer in the primary unitshall be responsible for controlling pursuittactics and maintaining pursuit discipline untilhe or she is relieved by the assignedsupervisor.

The senior officer’s responsibilities alsoinclude the decision to become involved in apursuit, whether more than two units shouldjoin the pursuit, and whether the pursuit shouldbe terminated.

Secondary Unit’s Responsibility. Thesecondary unit shall be responsible for backingup the primary unit and broadcasting pertinentinformation at the termination of the pursuit.

Assigned Supervisory Responsibilities. Forpurposes of continuity, management control ofa pursuit shall remain with the assignedsupervisor unless directed otherwise by thewatch commander of the primary unit’scommand. The assigned supervisor shall retainthese responsibilities until the pursuit isterminated (if no arrest) or a suspect is bookedor released and all related reports arecompleted. The assigned supervisor shallimmediately advise Communications Divisionwhen on-scene with the primary and secondaryunits.

The assigned supervisor shall monitor thepursuit and continuously assess the situationand ensure that the pursuit is conducted withinDepartment guidelines. If necessary, thesupervisor shall assert control by directingspecific units out of the pursuit, reassigning theprimary or secondary units, assigning anavailable air unit, or terminating the pursuit.Code Three vehicle operation is authorized forthe supervisor, at the supervisor's discretion, toproperly monitor and direct the pursuit.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Thewatch commander of the primary unit only hasauthority to assume incident command ortransfer command of a pursuit at any time. Ifthat watch commander transfers command of apursuit (e.g., to another Area watchcommander, the California Highway Patrol,etc.), he/she shall cause the immediatenotification of Communications Division, otherinvolved units, and any on-scene air unit of thetransfer of command.

Communication Division’s Responsibility.As soon as practicable, CommunicationsDivision shall ensure that an air unit, back-up(secondary) unit, and any available uniformedsupervisor in close proximity to the pursuit areassigned to a pursuit.



205.15 TRACKING A PURSUIT. The useof an air unit to track a suspect vehicle is avaluable law enforcement tool intended toenhance public and officer safety byencouraging a fleeing suspect(s) to operatehis/her vehicle with greater care and/orterminate the pursuit.Whenever possible, air units shall assumeresponsibility for tracking a suspect vehicle. Inthe absence of exigent circumstances (e.g.,armed suspect, murder suspect, hostagesituation, etc.), which may require pursuingunits to remain close behind the suspect’svehicle, authorized ground units shall continuetheir Code Three response, but should reducetheir speed and make every effort to remain outof the suspect’s line of sight.

To assist the primary unit or assignedsupervisor in controlling the pursuit, the airunit shall:

∗ Assume pursuit broadcast responsibilitiesduring the tracking mode;

∗ Advise the primary unit or assignedsupervisor regarding suspect actions andapplicable tactical considerations;

∗ Identify all law enforcement vehiclesinvolved in the pursuit and record thecorresponding shop numbers (or vehicledescriptions when shop numbers are notavailable); and,

∗ Respond, as practicable, to any otherrequests from the supervisor responsible formanagement control of the pursuit.

Note: An air unit assigned to the pursuit shall,if necessary, advise non-Department aircraftmonitoring the pursuit that the Department’sair unit is in tracking mode.

Should the situation dictate the air unit’sdiscontinuance of the tracking mode, (e.g.,visibility, restricted air space, aircraftmechanical issues, etc.), the air unit shallnotify Communications Division and theprimary unit or the assigned supervisor of thecircumstances.

205.20 VEHICLE PURSUIT DRIVINGTACTICS. During the course of the pursuit,officers shall continuously assess the roadconditions and the actions of the suspect.Primary responsibility for pursuit activitiesshall be restricted to the primary unit,secondary unit, and assigned supervisor. Allother units shall remain clear of the pursuit,but shall remain alert to the location andprogress of the pursuit. Units remaining clearof the pursuit shall follow the rules of the roadand shall not drive Code Three. Units otherthan the primary unit, secondary unit, orassigned supervisor shall not become involvedin the pursuit unless requested by officers inthe primary unit or directed by a supervisor.

Paralleling. Units shall not parallel nor passunits engaged in the pursuit and shall followthe rules of the road as required by Section21052 V.C. for purposes of this order,paralleling is defined as any law enforcementvehicle positioned alongside a pursued or

pursuing vehicle, or along an adjacent street soas to be parallel to the suspect’s or pursuingvehicle’s position.

Tactics employed to stop a pursued suspect,such as establishing a physical barricade (roadblock), boxing in, heading off, ramming, ordriving alongside the pursued vehicle arestrongly discouraged. These tactics areextremely hazardous and should only beconsidered in those rare instances whenwarranted to save a life, and then only as a lastresort.

Wrong-way Traffic. Generally, officers shallnot pursue a vehicle the wrong way on afreeway, nor shall officers pursue the wrongway on a one-way street. In the event apursued suspect enters the freeway the wrongway, the following options should beconsidered:

∗ The Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) of theair unit;

∗ Maintaining visual contact with the suspectvehicle by driving on the correct side of thefreeway;

∗ Requesting other units to observe the exitsavailable to the suspect vehicle; and,

∗ Notifying the California Highway Patroland other police agencies as appropriate.

In the event a pursued suspect enters thefreeway the wrong way, the following optionsshould be considered:

∗ Requesting an air unit to assist andcoordinate field activities;

∗ Maintaining visual contact with the suspectvehicle by paralleling it on the correct sideof the freeway;

∗ Requesting other units to observe the exitsavailable to the suspect vehicle; and,

∗ Notifying the California Highway Patroland other police agencies as appropriate.

205.25 PURSUITS REQUIRINGOUTSIDE RESPONSE. When a pursuitleaves the primary unit's Area of assignment,the primary unit shall:

∗ Notify Communications Division that thepursuit is entering another geographic Area;This assists Communications Division inbroadcasting pursuit information on theappropriate radio frequencies; and,

∗ Notify Communications Division when thepursuit is entering another city. This assistsCommunications Division in contacting theappropriate agency to coordinate theexchange of information between involvedagencies.

The primary unit shall notify CommunicationsDivision of the presence of other lawenforcement agencies and relay any request forassistance from or to another law enforcementagency unit through Communications Division.

205.30 HOSTAGE-INVOLVEDVEHICLE PURSUIT. It must be emphasizedthat the safety of the hostage must be theprimary consideration in determining the

tactics that will be employed to effect therelease of the hostage and apprehend thesuspect(s).

Initial Notification. When a member of theDepartment becomes aware that a hostage is,or may be, in a pursued vehicle,Communications Division shall be advisedimmediately. All available information shall bereported, including a physical description ofthe hostage, manner of dress, and the exactlocation of the hostage within the vehicle(when known).

Communications Division’s Responsibility.Communications Division shall ensure allhostage-related information is immediatelybroadcast. The fact that a hostage may beinvolved in a pursuit shall be periodicallytransmitted during the subsequent pursuitstatus broadcasts. In instances where the takingof a hostage has not been confirmed,Communications Division shall attempt toobtain additional information from the originalreporting person via telephone. If a callbacknumber is not available, or the reporting personcannot be contacted, Communications Divisionshall assign a specific unit to respond to thescene of the initial occurrence to verify thetaking of a hostage.

Primary Unit’s Responsibility. The primaryunit shall broadcast any known informationregarding the hostage's position within thevehicle, a description of the hostage, suspectinformation, and information regarding thesuspect's weaponry. The presence of a hostagein the pursuit magnifies the importance of theprimary unit maintaining maximum controland ensuring that nonessential units do notbecome involved in the pursuit.

205.35 LOSS OF PURSUED VEHICLE.When a pursued vehicle is lost, officers in theprimary unit shall immediately broadcast thenecessary information to CommunicationsDivision. The primary unit shall broadcastsupplemental information on the appropriatetactical frequency and coordinate the search asneeded. When a helicopter unit is assisting,descriptive and directional information shall bespecifically broadcast to the air unit.

205.40 VEHICLE PURSUITS BYOTHER LAW ENFORCEMENTAGENCIES. When a pursuit initiated byanother law enforcement agency occurs in theCity, the initiating unit and jurisdiction shall beresponsible for the progress of the pursuit. TheLos Angeles Police Department (LAPD) unitsshall not attempt to assist with the pursuitunless specifically requested to do so by thepursuing agency or unless it is clearlydemonstrated that assistance from thisDepartment is required. In the event an LAPDunit becomes involved in another agency’spursuit, this Department’s vehicle pursuitpolicy shall apply.

Generally, it is a poor practice to co-mingleground units from different agencies during apursuit. Therefore, when the Department



accepts responsibility for a pursuit initiated byanother agency, the other agency should bedirected to completely disengage from thepursuit. Similarly, when a Department pursuitis turned over to another agency, LAPD groundunits should completely disengage. Trailing aDepartment-initiated pursuit which has beenturned over to another agency is a decision tobe made by the LAPD supervisor responsiblefor oversight of the pursuit and is usually basedupon the necessity for the Department toaccept custody of the offender at termination.However, distance from the City is a factor tobe considered in the decision to trail.

205.45 DISCONTINUING THEPURSUIT. Officers involved in a pursuit shallcontinually evaluate the necessity forcontinuing the pursuit. Officers must determinewhether the seriousness of the initial violationor any subsequent violations reasonablywarrants continuance of the pursuit. Thefollowing factors should be considered whenassessing whether to continue or terminate apursuit:

∗ Whether there is an unreasonable risk ofinjury to the public or to the pursuingofficers;

∗ Whether speeds dangerously exceed thenormal flow of traffic;

∗ Whether vehicular and/or pedestrian trafficsafety is unreasonably compromised;

∗ Whether the suspects can be apprehended ata later time;

∗ If the weather conditions such as rain, fog,snow, etc., create an unreasonable risk ofinjury to the public or the pursuing officers;

∗ The suspect is not responding to theemergency equipment, e.g., siren and redlights of the police vehicle; is notaccelerating to get away from the officer;and the only known reason for initiating apursuit is a minor traffic infraction;

∗ The seriousness of the crime and itsrelationship to community safety;

∗ The traffic conditions: Volume of vehiculartraffic, volume of pedestrian traffic and roadconditions;

∗ Nature of the area of the pursuit:Residential, commercial, or rural;

∗ Whether the lack or quality ofcommunication between the primary unitand Communications Division or theprimary unit and a supervisor causes anunreasonable risk to the public; and,

∗ The familiarity of the primary pursuingofficer with the area.

All officers involved in a vehicle pursuit willbe held accountable for the continuation of apursuit when circumstances indicate it shouldhave been discontinued. Since driver officersare usually concentrating on the safe operationof the police vehicle, passenger officers areparticularly responsible for advising driverswhen they feel the pursuit is exceedingreasonable limits.

205.50 POST-PURSUIT DISCIPLINE.Safety is critical at the termination of a pursuit,

therefore, the need for decisive action,self-control, and strict personal discipline isessential. The responsibility for maintainingcontrol and directing activities at thetermination point of a vehicle pursuit mustremain with the senior officer in the primaryunit unless relieved by a supervisor. Theofficers in the secondary unit shall beresponsible for backing up the primary unit andbroadcasting pertinent information at thetermination of the pursuit. Unless summoned tothe scene, officers in all other units shallremain clear of the pursuit termination point.

Note: Responding plainclothes personnel shallensure that they are readily identifiable aspolice officers by affixing proper identificationon their outer garment.

When the pursuit is terminated and thesuspect(s) flees on foot, the air unit, wheninvolved, shall broadcast any informationwhich may assist in the deployment of groundunits.

When Communications Division broadcaststhe location and other information indicatingthat the vehicle pursuit is terminated, involvedunits shall temporarily switch their radios tothe appropriate tactical frequency. The tacticalfrequency shall be used to coordinate thesearch for a suspect(s) fleeing on foot.

205.55 SUPERVISOR'SRESPONSIBILITY AT TERMINATIONOF PURSUIT. When a supervisor from thepursuing officer's Area or division ofassignment has not responded to thetermination point of the pursuit,Communications Division shall dispatch asupervisor from the primary unit's Area ordivision of assignment to the location. Uponarrival at the termination point, the supervisorshall immediately assume responsibility forcontrolling police action at the scene andensuring adherence to Departmental policies.The supervisor shall retain theseresponsibilities until the suspect is booked orreleased and all reports are completed. Thesupervisor shall also submit a Vehicle PursuitReport, Form 1.14, and a California HighwayPatrol Pursuit Report, Form CHP 187, to theinvolved officer's commanding officer.

All Vehicle Pursuit Reports require a DRnumber. If a pursuit results in the completionof other related reports the DR number for therelated reports shall also be used for theVehicle Pursuit Report. Copies of all relatedreports shall be distributed with the VehiclePursuit Report. If a pursuit is terminatedwithout police action that requires otherreports, a miscellaneous DR number shall beobtained for the Vehicle Pursuit Report. OnlySection I of the Form CHP 187 shall becompleted by a supervisor. The DR numbershall be placed in the lower box in the upperright hand corner of the Form.

A supervisor from the Area in which thepursuit terminates, or a supervisor from theclosest Area if the termination point is outside

the City, shall respond immediately to thescene and remain in charge until relieved by asupervisor from the pursuing officers' Area ordivision of assignment. When a supervisorfrom the pursuing officers' Area or division isunable to respond, the supervisor-in-charge atthe scene shall assume all the prescribedresponsibilities.

Supervisory personnel shall take appropriateaction when they become aware of violationsof the Department's pursuit policy. Thesupervisor-in-charge shall contact Air SupportDivision (ASD) to identify all vehicles in thepursuit. The name of the ASD officer contactedand the identity of all officers in the pursuitshall be included in the Vehicle Pursuit Report,Form 1.14. When it is determined thatunauthorized units are involved, correctiveaction shall be recommended in the Form 1.14.

205.60 REQUIRED ADMINISTRATIVENOTIFICATION OF PURSUIT. Onlyvehicle pursuits amounting to an UnusualIncident, as outlined in Manual Section4/214.50, require an administrative notificationto Communications Division, DepartmentCommand Post.

205.65 VEHICLE PURSUIT -REPORTING.Supervisor’s Responsibility. The supervisorcompleting the Vehicle Pursuit Report shallinclude an attached narrative using thefollowing headings:

∗ Incident Overview;∗ Circumstances of Pursuit Termination;∗ Additional Units in Pursuit;∗ Hostage Information;∗ General Route of Pursuit;∗ Outside Areas/Agencies Involved;∗ Injuries/Medical Treatment (to include how

the injuries were sustained); and,∗ Arrest Information.

The supervisor conducting the investigationshall not include an opinion or a policyrecommendation in the Vehicle Pursuit Report.

Watch Commander/Officer in Charge’sResponsibility. The involved officer’s watchcommander/officer in charge shall include hisor her insight and a policy recommendation atthe end of the supervisor’s narrative under aseparate heading of “Watch Commander/OICEvaluation and Insight.”

205.70 DOCUMENTATIONREQUIREMENTS. In an effort to accuratelyassess the potential impact of the proposedchanges to our pursuit policy, Departmentpersonnel shall document their findings in thefollowing manner:

Loss of Pursued Vehicle. An assignedsupervisor handling a lost pursued vehicleshall, when completing a Vehicle PursuitReport, Form 1.14.0, include any insight intowhat caused the Department to lose the suspect(e.g., distance too great between patrol and



suspect vehicle, etc.) under theIncident/Overview heading.

Failures to Yield. If a unit attempts to stop avehicle for an infraction, misdemeanorevading, or reckless driving in response toenforcement action taken by Departmentpersonnel, and the driver fails to yield, apursuit shall not be initiated.

Instead, officers shall generate an incidentnumber and complete a PreliminaryInvestigation Report (PIR), Form 3.1, titled,Failure to Yield, listing the City of LosAngeles as the victim and the involvedofficer(s) as a witness. Additionally, officersshall indicate under the “MO” section of thePIR what served as the basis of their decisionnot to pursue (i.e., infraction, misdemeanorevading, or reckless driving in response toenforcement action taken by Departmentpersonnel).

Note: Officers may, with supervisory approval,conduct a limited follow-up investigation (e.g.,to the registered owner’s residence).

205.75 COMMANDING OFFICER,CONCERNED BUREAU TRAFFICDIVISION, RESPONSIBILITY. All Failureto Yield reports shall be forwarded to andinvestigated by the Bureau Traffic Division,Area of occurrence. Commanding officers shallensure that each Failure to Yield case isinvestigated with due diligence.

205.80 AREA RECORDS PERSONNELRESPONSIBILITY. Failure to Yield reportsshall be processed and investigated similar toMisdemeanor Hit and Run reports, but with anassigned class code of 890. Additionally, Arearecords personnel shall review the MO sectionof the report and assign the appropriate code toeach report, as follows:

MO Code∗ Infraction 1315∗ Misdemeanor Evading 1316∗ Reckless Driving 1317

205.85 PURSUITS BY OTHER LAWENFORCEMENT AGENCIES. When avehicle pursuit is initiated by another lawenforcement agency in the City, that agencyshall be responsible for the progress of thepursuit. Officers shall not assist the pursuitunless specifically requested to do so by thepursuing agency or unless it is clearlydemonstrated that assistance from ourDepartment is required. Officers shall seekapproval from their watch commander prior tobecoming involved in another agency’s pursuit.205.90 VEHICLE PURSUIT SAFETYINSPECTION. Officers involved in a vehiclepursuit shall notify the appropriate MotorTransport Division facility for a requiredvehicle inspection after the pursuit. Theprimary vehicle involved in the pursuit shall betaken out of service until such an inspectionhas been performed.

206. AIRCRAFT INVOLVED INACCIDENT.206.05 AIRCRAFT ACCIDENTNOTIFICATION. The officer receiving theinitial call to the scene of an aircraft accidentshall, without delay, request a supervisor, andnotify the Watch Commander at DetectiveSupport Division, of the following information:

∗ Time and location of the accident;∗ Identification number of the aircraft;∗ Type and class of the aircraft;∗ Owner of the aircraft;∗ Name and address of the pilot;∗ Whether United States mail was being

carried;∗ Extent of damage to the aircraft or other

property;∗ Number of casualties;∗ Circumstances of the accident; and,∗ The unit and officer reporting.

When an aircraft accident involvesDEPARTMENT aircraft the Aircraft MishapInvestigation Team (AMIT), Air SupportDivision, shall be notified.

Upon notification of a DEPARTMENT aircraftaccident, the AMIT shall:

∗ Respond to the scene and conduct aninvestigation to determine the causes andfactors contributing to the accident; and,

∗ Prepare a report of the investigationtogether with any other required reports fordeath, injury, or City property damaged,which shall be forwarded through channelsto the Chief of Police.

Note: The National Transportation SafetyBoard (NTSB) and the Federal AviationAdministration (FAA) have the statutoryresponsibility for investigating all civil aviationaccidents.

When the concerned investigating follow-upunit is closed, a notification shall be made toAdministrative Unit, Detective SupportDivision.

206.10 INVESTIGATING ANDREPORTING AIRCRAFT ACCIDENTS.Officers directed to an aircraft accident withinthe City shall protect the scene until relievedby the appropriate entity responsible forinvestigating the aircraft accident.

Note: Officers shall conduct a preliminaryinvestigation and take appropriate action(Manual Section 4/206.18) whenever a pilot issuspected of operating an aircraft while underthe influence of alcohol, drugs, or anycombination thereof.

When Department aircraft are not involved,officers assigned to the accident scene shallcomplete required reports for City propertydamaged.

Damaged City property (other than aircraft)and the pilot, if possible, shall be identified inan Employee's Report, Form 15.7. One copy ofthe Department report detailing City property

involved (CPI) shall be forwarded to the "CityAttorney-Civil Liability Section."

Note: The collision between conveyances andan aircraft crashing onto a highway is notclassified as a traffic collision. However, oncean accident has stabilized, any subsequentcollision of a conveyance into the wreckagewould constitute a traffic collision and aTraffic Collision Report would be required.

206.15 VIOLATION INVOLVED INAIRCRAFT ACCIDENT. When an aircraftaccident appears to have been caused by aviolation of law, the investigating officer shallinclude the elements of the offense in therequired report (Manual Section 4/206.10).

206.18 OPERATING AIRCRAFTUNDER-THE-INFLUENCE (OAUI)ARRESTS. Persons arrested for operating anaircraft while under-the-influence of alcohol ordrugs, or any combination thereof, are requiredby the California Public Utilities Code tosubmit to and complete a chemical test of theirblood, breath, or urine. TheDriving-Under-the-Influence (DUI) ArrestReport (Continuation), Form 5.2.5, shall beused to document the arrest. When using theForm 5.2.5, officers shall:

∗ Delete all references to driving and insert"Operating an Aircraft" on the Form 5.2.5;and,

∗ Delete paragraph three, Chemical TestAdmonition (23157 VC) and substitute thefollowing admonition:

"Failure to submit to or complete therequired chemical testing, or conviction ofoperating an aircraft while under theinfluence of alcohol, drugs, or anycombination thereof, may result in theCalifornia Public Utilities Commissionprohibiting you from operating an aircraftin this State for up to one year."

Note: The report narrative shall includethis admonition verbatim and the name ofthe officer admonishing the arrestee.

All procedures pertaining toUnder-the-Influence Drivers (Manual Section4/343), with the exception of those specificallyoutlined in this Section, shall be completed foreach OAUI arrest. A copy of every reportinvolving the improper operation of a FederalAviation Administration (FAA) regulatedaircraft shall be sent to Air Support Division.The filing of criminal charges involving theoperation of an aircraft whileunder-the-influence shall be handled the sameas vehicle DUI filings.

206.20 VIOLATIONS OF AIRCRAFTLAWS, REPORTING. An officer whoreceives a report of, or observes, the reckless orunsafe operation of an aircraft shall completea Preliminary Investigation Report (PIR), Form3.1, and forward a copy to Air SupportDivision. The PIR shall be titled "Reckless" or"Unsafe Operation of an Aircraft." The reportshall include:



∗ The "N" number which appears on theunder side of the aircraft;

∗ The color and markings of the aircraft;∗ The general type of the aircraft, such as

single-engine, multi-engine, high-wing, orlow-wing;

∗ An estimate of the altitude of the aircraftabove the ground;

∗ A description of the manner in which theaircraft was being operated, such asclimbing, diving, acrobatics, or racingmotor;

∗ Names, addresses, and telephone numbersof witnesses;

∗ Exact time of occurrence; and,∗ Location of occurrence.

When an aircraft is involved in a situationwhich could cause an immediate danger to thepublic, the officer should notify the nearest airunit or Air Support Division.

Air Support Division’s Responsibility. Uponreceipt of any report involving the reckless orunsafe operation of an aircraft, or the arrest ofany person operating an aircraft while underthe influence of alcohol or drugs, orcombination thereof, Air Support Divisionshall:

∗ Review the report for completeness;∗ Conduct a follow-up investigation when the

report received is a PIR;∗ Telephonically notify the Federal Aviation

Administration (FAA) of the reportedviolation; and,

∗ Forward a copy of the appropriate report(s)to:

Federal Aviation AdministrationFlight Standards District Office5885 West Imperial HighwayLos Angeles, CA 90045

208. INVESTIGATION OFHAZARDOUS CONDITIONS.208.10 ISOLATION OF SCENE OFHAZARD. If a hazardous condition isobserved which endangers life or property, orwhich might create a civil liability to the City,the scene shall be isolated.

Police Vehicle. A police vehicle shall not beillegally parked to protect the scene of ahazard.

208.20 EMERGENCY STREETREPAIRS. Requests for emergency streetservice and/or barricades shall be made for thefollowing hazards:

∗ Damaged street and sidewalks;∗ Broken guard rails;∗ Oil spills, glass, or other debris constituting

a hazard in the street;∗ Landslides on the street;∗ Fallen trees on the street; or,∗ Any other hazard on the street which might

create a civil liability to the City.

Requests for emergency street service shall be

made to the branch of the Street MaintenanceDivision, Department of Public Works, locatednearest the hazard, or by radio through thecommunications control operator. Requests forthis service shall state:

∗ The type of hazard; and,∗ The specific location of the hazard,

including the side of the street.

208.30 RESPONSIBILITY FORREMOVING DEBRIS. Debris in the streetwhich constitutes a hazard shall be removedby:

∗ The person responsible (1);∗ Requesting the services of the Street

Maintenance Division, Department ofPublic Works;

∗ Requesting the services of the FireDepartment for removal of spilled gasoline,oil, or other liquids which create a firehazard; or,

∗ The officer.

[(1) Los Angeles Municipal Code Section62.130.]

208.40 SEWER MANHOLE OR STORMDRAIN. Requests for emergency service shallbe made when:

∗ Gas is escaping from a manhole or a draininlet;

∗ The manhole cover is missing from a sewermanhole; or,

∗ An explosion occurs in a sewer manhole ora storm drain.

Requests for the emergency service shall bemade by telephone to the Fire Department(when fire or fire hazard exists); the SewerMaintenance Division, Department of PublicWorks; or by radio to the communicationscontrol operator. If the Sewer MaintenanceDivision is closed, the name and telephonenumber of the employee of the SewerMaintenance Division then on-duty shall beobtained from the City Hall telephoneswitchboard operator. Officers shall telephonethe responsible person and inform them of thecondition.

The Administrative Unit, Detective SupportDivision, shall be notified in each caseinvolving a gas leak, break, or explosion.

208.45 METRO RED, BLUE, GOLDAND GREEN LINES-ELECTROCUTIONHAZARD. Due to the extreme risk ofelectrocution, absent exigent circumstances,personnel who have not completed the RailSafety Course shall not enter the Los AnglesCounty Metropolitan Transit Authority(LACMTA) Metro Red line track-way beyondthe passenger platforms. Personnel, whethertrained or not in the Rail Safety Course, shallnot, under any circumstances, climb on theroofs of the rail cars of the LACMTA MetroBlue, Gold and Green Lines. There is anextreme risk of electrocution from overheadpower sources with these rail cars.

208.50 TREES OBSTRUCTINGMOTORIST'S VIEW. A tree or shrub thatobstructs a motorist's view of an intersection ortraffic control device shall be reportedtelephonically to the Bureau of StreetMaintenance. This activity, along with thename of the person notified, shall be recordedon the employee's Daily Field ActivitiesReport, Form 15.52.

208.60 POLICE RADIO TOWERS. Iflight replacements are needed on a police radiotower, the Monitor Control shall be notified.

208.70 EXCAVATIONS ON PRIVATEPROPERTY. When a dangerous andunprotected excavation on private property isobserved, the condition shall be reported bytelephone to one of the following:

∗ The Grading Division, Department ofBuilding and Safety, if the excavation is inany manner connected with construction ordemolition; or,

∗ The General Services Division, Bureau ofEnvironmental Sanitation, County HealthDepartment, when the hazard is notassociated with construction or demolition.

When possible, notification shall be made onweekdays during normal business hours. Whenimmediate notification is necessary at a timewhen the Grading Division is closed, the CityHall switchboard operator shall be requested tocontact the duty inspector. If the GeneralServices Division is closed, the Countyswitchboard operator shall be contacted.

208.80 BROKEN POWER ORTRANSMISSION LINES. A power ortransmission line which is broken or creates ahazardous condition shall be reported to theagency responsible for correcting thecondition. The agencies are:

∗ Department of Water and Power;∗ Wire and Signal Division, Department of

General Services;∗ Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transit

Authority;∗ Pacific Bell Telephone; and,∗ Southern California Edison Company.

If the agency responsible for correcting thecondition is unknown, the Transmission andTrouble Section, Department of Water andPower, shall be notified.

208.85 BROKEN WATER FACILITIES.Any public water distribution conduit or outletwhich is broken or creates a hazardouscondition shall be reported by:

∗ Telephone to the Water Trouble Section,Department of Water and Power; OR,

∗ Radio to the communications controloperator.

208.90 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE’SRESPONSIBILITY. Department employeesmay use Department of Water and Power(DWP) facilities on a temporary basis as abooking or processing center, or for



surveillance purposes. Requests for temporaryuse of DWP facilities shall be made by a staffofficer (Commander or higher). Requests forDWP services or assistance on matters notrelated to surveillance, investigation, arrests, orrelated law enforcement activities shall behandled in a manner similar to requests forDWP services from any other City agency.These requests are subject to availability ofDWP personnel and equipment. Departmentemployees using DWP facilities or equipmentare prohibited from:

∗ Wearing uniforms, or other articles ofclothing which would identify them asDWP employees while actively engaged insurveillance, investigation, arrest, or relatedlaw enforcement activities;

∗ Using DWP identified equipment, orvehicles, while actively engaged insurveillance, investigation, arrest, or relatedlaw enforcement activities; and,

∗ Allowing DWP employees to activelyparticipate in any surveillance,investigation, arrest, or related lawenforcement activities.

Staff Officer’s Responsibility. Staff officersshall be responsible for preparingcorrespondence and approving requests for thetemporary use of DWP facilities or installationof surveillance, monitoring, andcommunication equipment, or other devices onDWP poles. All requests for the temporary useof DWP facilities must be submitted onDepartment letterhead to the concerned DWPDivision Head. All requests for installation ofdevices on DWP poles shall be submitted to aDWP System Head or his/her designee.

In cases of extreme emergency, whereimmediate assistance is requested and it is notpossible to secure advanced written approval,a telephonic request may be made to thehighest ranking senior-level DWP manageravailable. A written follow-up, acknowledgingapproval of the telephonic request, shall besubmitted to DWP in a timely manner.

Note: Use of electronic surveillance equipmentshall be in compliance with DepartmentManual Sections 3/568.10 and 3/568.15.

208.95 "SIG-ALERT" BROADCASTS.Officers detecting disasters or emergencieswhich will involve a large segment of thepopulation or cause them majorinconveniences shall:

∗ Make a reconnaissance of the area;∗ Determine the nature, extent, and possible

duration of the disaster or emergency; and,∗ Telephone or transmit to the

Communications Division all pertinent dataand request a "Sig-Alert" message.

Note: The officer in command at the scenewhen the emergency condition no longer existsshall be responsible for forwarding the"All-clear."

Except in emergency situations, the CHP willbe responsible for the initiation and

cancellation of Sig-Alerts on the freewaysystem.

209. ELDER ABUSE.209.01 ELDER/DEPENDENT ADULTPHYSICAL AND FIDUCIARY ABUSE-DEFINITIONS.

∗ Elder. Any person 65 years of age or older;∗ Dependent Adult – Any person between

the ages of 18 and 64 years, who hasphysical or mental limitations that restricthis or her ability to carry out normalactivities or to protect his or her rightsincluding, but not limited to, persons whohave physical or developmental disabilitiesor whose physical or mental abilities havediminished because of age. A “dependentadult” includes any person who has beenadmitted as an in-patient to a 24-hour healthcare facility, as defined in Section 1250,1250.2, and 1250.3 of the Health and SafetyCode;

∗ Caretaker – Any person who has the care,custody, control of, or who stands in aposition of trust, with an elder or adependent adult;

∗ Elder/Dependent Adult Physical Abuse –When a caretaker of an elder/dependentadult willfully inflicts upon thatelder/dependent adult any cruel or inhumancorporal punishment or injury. Physicalabuse includes, but is not limited to, directbeatings, sexual assault, unreasonablephysical constraint, or prolongeddeprivation of food or water; and,

∗ Elder/Dependent Adult Fiduciary Abuse– When any person violates any provisionof law prohibiting theft or embezzlement ofany property that they know, or shouldknow, belongs to an elder/dependent adult.

209.05 SUSPECTEDELDER/DEPENDENT ADULT,PHYSICAL OR FIDUCIARY ABUSEREPORTED BY DEPARTMENTEMPLOYEES.Officer’s Responsibility. Officers whoencounter or are informed of cases ofsuspected elder/dependent adult physical orfiduciary abuse shall:

∗ Conduct a preliminary investigation;∗ Immediately notify Adult Protective

Services (APS), Elder Abuse Hotline, of theincident;

Note: Current telephone numbers can beobtained through Detective Support Division.

∗ Complete a State of California 341 (SOC341) Department of Social Services,“Report of Suspected DependentAdult/Elder Abuse Form;”

∗ Complete the required Department report(e.g., a Preliminary Investigation Report,Form 3.1; Arrest Report, Form 5.2; and/orInjury Investigation, Form 3.15);

∗ Document that a SOC 341 Form wascompleted in the narrative of all reports;

Note: Investigative responsibility of an on-going elder abuse crime is usually determinedby the location of the victim’s residence.

∗ Assist APS staff in gaining access to apossible victim if there is probable cause tosuspect the victim’s life is endangered;

∗ Ensure that victims have transportation toan appropriate emergency shelter and/orreferral information to the appropriateservice agencies; and,

∗ Initiate commitment of victims pursuant toSection 5150 of the Welfare and InstitutionsCode, when necessary.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Prior toapproving any report of possibleelder/dependent adult abuse supervisors shallensure:

∗ Completion of State of California 341Form;

∗ State of California 341 Form was sent viafacsimile to APS, and to the Area DetectiveSection or the responsible law enforcementagency within two working days; and,

∗ Adult Protective Services wastelephonically notified of the incident.

Officer in Charge, Area Detective Division,Responsibility. The Officer in Charge, AreaDetective Division, shall ensure that:

∗ Major Assault Crimes (MAC) Coordinator,Family Violence Detail, providesconsultation and booking advice forphysical abuse cases and establishes liaisonwith the APS office(s) serving its respectiveArea;

∗ State of California 341 Forms are reviewedby the MAC coordinator, and a criminalinvestigation is conducted when necessary;

∗ Copies of completed SOC 341 Forms areforwarded to APS within two workingdays and a copy is retained by the MACcoordinator for a minimum of three years;

∗ The Burglary Coordinator provides caseassignment and booking advice on fiduciaryabuse cases;

∗ Roll call training and training materials areprovided to Area personnel; and,

∗ When available, a representative from APS,Public Guardian, and the Los Angeles Cityand District Attorneys’ Offices attend rollcall training associated withelder/dependent abuse.

Detective Support Division’s (DSD)-Responsibility. Detective Support Divisionshall maintain a current list of APS area officelocations and phone numbers.

Records Unit’s Responsibility. Records unitemployees, upon receipt of a report of elderabuse, shall forward one copy of all relatedreports to the DPSS (Manual Section5/030.66.)

Chief Statistical AnalystDPSS Research and Statistical

Services Section225 East Broadway Street



Glendale, California 91205

Area Records Supervisor’s Responsibility.Each Area records supervisor shall:

∗ Ensure that SOC 341 Forms are forwardedto the appropriate Area Detective Divisioninvestigative unit or outside lawenforcement agency;

∗ Enter code “1202” into the ConsolidatedCrime Analysis Database data entry screennext to “Modus Operandi” for trackingpurposes;

∗ Transmit a facsimile of the SOC 341 Formto APS within two working days;

∗ Transmit a facsimile of the SOC 341 Formto the appropriate Area Detective Divisionor outside Law Enforcement Agencyresponsible for investigating the case; and,

∗ Ensure records unit employees, upon receiptof a report of elder abuse, forward one copyof all related reports to the DPSS (ManualSection 5/030.66.)

Commercial Crimes Division’sResponsibility. Commercial Crimes Division(CCD), shall:

∗ Provide advice and assistance to AreaDetective Division personnel withelder/dependent abuse investigations;

∗ Act as the Department liaison forelder/dependent adult fiduciary abuse withother law enforcement agencies,government agencies, and communitygroups;

∗ Maintain information on current andproposed elder fiduciary abuse legislation;

∗ Provide elder fiduciary abuse trainingmaterials to Area Elder Fiduciary AbuseCoordinators to assist in training; and,

∗ Investigate complex elder/dependentfiduciary crimes that have resulted in asubstantial monetary loss of the victim’sentire estate.

Note: The Commanding Officer, DetectiveBureau, has the responsibility for determiningwhich complex elder fiduciary abuse crimeswill be investigated by CCD.

209.10 SUSPECTED ELDER PHYSICALABUSE REPORTED BY PRIVATEPERSONS.Department Employee’s Responsibility.Department employees, upon telephonicnotification of a suspected case of elderphysical abuse, shall handle the call as arequest for service according to establishedprocedures.

Department employees, upon receipt of aReport of Suspected Elder Physical Abuse,DPSS Form PA1980, from a private personshall forward the form to the concerned AreaDetective Division.

If the Area of occurrence is outside of theCity's jurisdiction, the form shall be forwardedto the appropriate law enforcement agency.

Note: The Report of Suspected Elder PhysicalAbuse, Department of Public Social Services(DPSS) Form PA1980, is used by privatepersons to report cases of elder abuse to anelder protective agency.

Area Detective Division’s Responsibility.The Area Detective Division, upon receipt ofDPSS Form PA1980 completed by a privateperson, shall conduct a follow-up investigationand forward the form to the DPSS. If theinvestigation discloses that a crime hasoccurred, the concerned detective shallcomplete the appropriate crime report.

Note: When no crime report is required, theconcerned detective shall so note on the DPSSForm PA1980 and maintain a copy in thedetective work folder. Automated records ofalleged elder abuse are maintained by DPSSand will be made available to the concerneddetective upon request by contacting the ElderAbuse Section, DPSS.

209.15 CONFIDENTIALITY OFPERSONS WHO REPORT ELDERABUSE. All requests for release of elder abusereport information shall be referred to Recordsand Identification Division. Employeesreleasing confidential information shall do soin accordance with Department ManualSections 3/406, 3/406.10, and 3/406.20.

210. ILL AND INJURED PERSONS.210.05 PERSONS IN DEPARTMENTCUSTODY USING PERSONALMEDICATION. When persons to be bookedand detained in Department custody haveprescription medication in their possession,officers shall transport them to theMetropolitan Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Valley Jail Section dispensary formedical evaluation prior to completing thebooking process.

Exception: When persons in Departmentcustody are to be booked and immediatelyreleased, a medical evaluation is not necessary.

At no time shall arrestees be allowed toadminister the prescription medication tothemselves. After receiving proper medicaltreatment, the arrestees shall be booked asadvised by the evaluating physician.

Note: If the medical evaluation determines thatthe arrestee will require periodic dispensing ofmedication, the arrestee shall be booked atMetropolitan Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Valley Jail Section.

210.10 MEDICAL TREATMENTBEFORE BOOKING. Officers havingcustody of an unbooked prisoner who is, orbecomes, ill or injured, or complains of illnessor injury, shall follow the procedure as setforth in Manual Section 4/648.10.

210.22 REQUESTING AMBULANCESERVICE. Ambulance service shall berequested by:

∗ Notifying Communications Division byradio; or,

∗ Telephoning the appropriate FireDepartment Signal Office.

210.23 HANDLING UNCONSCIOUSPERSONS. When an officer encounters anunconscious person who cannot be revived, theofficer shall immediately request anambulance. Unconscious includes a personwho reacts only momentarily to a paincompliance stimulus or ammonia inhalant, oris unable to remain awake without repeatedcoaxing. If such a person is intoxicated,medical treatment shall be obtained prior toreleasing the person to a detoxification facilityfor evaluation and treatment.

The officer shall obtain a copy of the LosAngeles Fire Department Rescue Report, Form902M, from the ambulance paramedics andrecord the serialized number from the Form902M on the Daily Field Activities Report(DFAR). If the Form 902M is not retained byanother entity, it shall be attached to andremain with the Daily Field Activities Report(DFAR).

210.24 TRANSPORTATION AND/ORTREATMENT OF ILL OR INJUREDPERSONS BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT.When a conflict arises between the personnelof the Fire and Police Departments regardingtransportation or treatment of an ill or injuredperson, an Emergency Medical Service (EMS)supervisor and a Department supervisor shallbe requested via police radio.

The supervisors shall determine the course ofaction to be taken, taking into account that FireDepartment personnel have the authority tomake the final determination whether or not totransport or treat an ill or injured person.

Note: EMS supervisors are deployed 24-hoursa day Citywide.

Officers shall obtain the serialized number ofthe Fire Department Rescue Report, Form902M, from the ambulance paramedics andrecord this serialized number on the DailyField Activities Report (DFAR). When theForm 902M is not retained by another entity, acopy shall be attached to and remain with theDFAR.

The EMS supervisor and unit designation shallbe recorded on the DFAR and the concernedSergeant's Daily Report, Form 15.48.

210.25 OFFICERS INJURED ON DUTY.An officer injured on duty and in need ofemergency treatment shall be transported by aRescue Ambulance to the nearest qualifiedemergency facility. Upon the request of theinjured officer, the ambulance crew willtransport the officer to another reasonablylocated qualified emergency facility when theofficer's welfare will not be impaired by sodoing.



Note: A qualified emergency facility includesany Class I or Class II hospital and the CentralReceiving Clinic.

210.28 INJURY OR DEATH DUE TOPOLICE ACTION. When any person dies, isseriously injured, or receives a gunshot wounddue to action by a member of this Department,the officer involved, when practicable, shall:

∗ Request that a supervisor be dispatched tothe scene; and,

∗ Notify, or cause to be notified, the WatchCommander, and Detective SupportDivision, giving him the details of theincident.

Note: Supervisors assigned to these calls shallverify the making of appropriate notifications.When a person is admitted into the LosAngeles County-USC Medical Center due toan injury occurring at the time of arrestresulting from action by a member of theDepartment, the injury shall be consideredserious; and Detective Support Division shallbe notified as soon as practicable.

210.30 RELIGIOUS ASSISTANCE. Whena person suffering from an injury or illnessrequests the services of a clergy member, thecommunications control operator shall benotified immediately. The communicationscontrol operator shall be notified whether theclergy member is to be directed to the scene ofthe incident or to a particular hospital or clinic.If investigation reveals that a seriously ill orinjured person is a Catholic but, because ofphysical condition, is unable to request a priest,the communications control operator shall benotified as though a request had been made.

When the injured person is an employee of thisDepartment, information regarding a specificclergy member to be notified may be obtainedfrom Detective Support Division.

210.32 CLERGYMEMBERS ANDDOCTORS. Clergy members and doctorsshall be permitted to approach dead or dyingpersons. They shall be cautioned to avoiddestroying any evidence.

210.34 NON-CUSTODIALINDIVIDUALS CLAIMING INJURY DUETO DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEEACTIONS. When circumstances indicate thata non-custodial individual may have been, orclaims to have been, injured by a Departmentemployee, the investigating supervisor shallensure that the individual receives a medicalexamination or evaluation.

Note: In the case of any medical emergencyinvolving a non-custodial individual, theinvestigating supervisor shall ensure that arescue ambulance has been requested.

A medical evaluation for evidentiary purposesshall be obtained at one of the followingmedical facilities. The following precedencelist has been established, and facilities shall beused in descending order:

∗ Department Jail Dispensary;

∗ Los Angeles County Medical Centers; or,∗ If the above are impracticable, at one of the

Department’s contract hospitals.

Investigating Supervisor’s Responsibility. Itshall be the responsibility of the investigatingsupervisor to ensure that a non-custodialindividual who claims to have been injured bya Department employee is examined for anysigns of injury by a licensed physician and theappropriate documentation is completed. Theinvestigating supervisor shall cause the non-custodial individual to be taken to a medicalfacility as delineated on the precedence list. Ifthe evidentiary examination cannot becompleted at the first medical facility theindividual is brought to, the supervisor maytransport the individual to a secondary medicalfacility as listed on the precedence list forcompletion of the evidentiary exam. Theexamining physician can provide assessment,recommendation for additional medicaltreatment, and documentation of anyobservable trauma or injuries.

Regardless of which medical facility isutilized, the individual shall only receive anevidentiary examination. An investigatingsupervisor shall not authorize or approvemedical treatment such as sutures, surgery,tetanus shots, medication, lab work,intravenous injections (IV), etc. If medicalpersonnel determine that immediate treatmentis required, the evidentiary examination shallbe concluded. The supervisor shall informmedical personnel that any further treatmentshall be considered as if the individual werebrought in by City paramedics or had been awalk-in patient to the hospital. Additionally,investigating supervisors shall not utilize theservices of non-contract hospitals forevidentiary examinations involving non-custodial individuals.

If applicable, the supervisor shall request theindividual to submit to photographs depictinginjury, or lack of injury, and other pertinentdetails when:

∗ Photographs would be of evidential value;or,

∗ The injury is claimed to be the result of aDepartment employee action.

210.35 MEDICAL EXAMINATION FORVICTIMS OF SEXUAL ASSAULT. Victimsof sexual assault shall be transported to anappropriate contract hospital for medical careand the collection of related medical evidenceas soon as possible after the crime. Officersconducting a preliminary investigation of rapecases should routinely transport the victim in ablack and white police vehicle. However, if thevictim shows any apprehension about riding ina black and white vehicle, or requeststransportation in a plain vehicle, officers shallmake a reasonable effort to transport the victimin a plain vehicle.

210.36 SEXUAL ASSAULT VICTIM’SRIGHT TO AN ADVOCATE ANDSUPPORT PERSON. An officer conducting

a preliminary investigation involving a sexualassault shall advise the victim of his/her rightto have a victim’s advocate and at least oneother support person of the victim’s choosingpresent during the interview. This notificationneed only be made during the initial interview.If a victim should invoke his/her right to anadvocate or support person mid-interview orduring a subsequent follow-up interview, anofficer shall honor that request.

If a victim is too young to comprehend theadmonition, the officer may contact theparent/guardian to determine if an advocateand/or support person would be appropriate. Ifthere is no parent/guardian available, or if theirinvolvement could be detrimental to theinvestigation, the officer shall determine if anadvocate and/or support person would beappropriate. If one is needed, the officer shallcontact the Area Juvenile Coordinator or MajorAssault Crimes Coordinator for furtherassistance.

Note: An officer seeking to obtain initialinformation at a crime scene to determinewhether a crime has been committed and/or theidentity of the suspect(s) for an initial crimebroadcast, is not required to make thisnotification at that time.

Exception: An officer may exclude anyindividual from being present during aninterview as an advocate or support personwhen the officer determines that the personmay be detrimental to the investigation, suchas a potential suspect and/or percipient witness.However, an officer shall proceed with cautionand sensitivity toward the victim when denyinga victim their choice of an advocate and/orsupport person.

210.37 GENDER PREFERENCE IN ASEXUAL ASSAULT INVESTIGATION. Anofficer conducting the preliminaryinvestigation of a sexual assault shalldetermine whether the victim prefers to beinterviewed by an officer of the same gender.When the victim prefers to be interviewed byan officer of the same gender, the officer shallhave an officer of that gender conduct theinterview. However, the primary unit shallretain responsibility for completing theremainder of the preliminary investigationincluding completion of a crime report andarranging for medical treatment.

210.38 RAPE VICTIM COUNSELINGCENTER NOTIFICATION. Whenever avictim of sexual assault is transported to ahospital for examination, the local rape victimcounseling center shall be immediately notifiedby the responding officer upon the victim'sapproval. If there is more than one counselingcenter in the local area, the victim shall begiven the opportunity to select the center to benotified. If the victim is unable or unwilling tomake a choice the responding officer shallinform the follow-up investigators, who shallattempt to obtain the victim's approval for anotification at a future time.



The Preliminary Investigation Report (PIR),Form 3.1, shall include the date and time thecounseling center was notified, the name of thecounseling center, and the name of theemployee who made the notification.

210.39 DISTRIBUTION OF THE"TAKING ACTION: WHAT TO DO IFYOU ARE RAPED" BOOKLET.Employee’s Responsibility. A "TakingAction" booklet shall be provided to eachsexual assault victim at the time of thepreliminary investigation. If it is determinedthat a sexual assault victim did not receive abooklet, one shall be provided to the victimduring the follow-up investigation. ThePreliminary Investigation Report (PIR), Form3.1, or the appropriate follow-up report, whennecessary, shall include a statement that a"Taking Action" booklet was provided to thevictim.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility.Commanding officers shall ensure that asupply of the "Taking Action" booklets ismaintained in a secured area of the division orconcerned investigative unit. Appropriateinventory controls shall be implemented toensure that the distribution of the booklets islimited to employees who conduct, or maypossibly conduct, preliminary or follow-upinvestigations of sexual assault crimes.

210.40 TUBERCULARS. Tuberculars shallnot be arrested for violation of an isolation ofquarantine order except on a warrant chargingsuch violation.

When no warrant exists, an officer havingcause to suspect a person, other than a prisoner,of being an active tubercular shall complete anEmployee's Report, Form 15.7. This reportshall be submitted to the officer's commandingofficer. It shall include:

∗ The name, address, and age of the suspectedtubercular;

∗ The date, time, and location of the contact;and,

∗ The circumstances which caused the officerto suspect the tubercular condition.

Exception: When any employee is exposed toa tubercular, they shall report the incident incompliance with Manual Section 3/712.05.

The commanding officer receiving the reportshall forward it to the Tubercular ControlDivision, County Health Department.

210.44 ADDRESS OF INJUREDPERSON UNKNOWN. When the address ofan injured person is not available, the addressof a friend through whom the patient mightlater be reached shall be obtained, if possible,for entry in the Injury Investigation, Form3.15.

210.46 INCORPORATING NAME ANDADDRESS OF RELATIVE IN INJURYREPORT. When it appears that an injuredperson may die, the name and address of the

injured person's nearest relative shall beobtained, when possible, for entry in the bodyof the Injury Investigation, Form 3.15. In thesecases, the concerned investigating officers shallbe notified immediately (Manual Section4/201.30).

210.50 PHOTOGRAPHING INJURYSCENE, CITY PROPERTY INVOLVED.Photographs of the scene of an injury shall betaken, in addition to making an InjuryInvestigation, Form 3.15, when:

∗ The injured person indicates that a conditionof City property might have caused theinjury; or,

∗ There are indications that the condition ofCity property might have caused the injury.

Note: No circumstances of the foregoingcauses shall be discussed with unauthorizedpersons.

The name, serial number, and division ofassignment of the officer from whomphotographic service was requested shall beincluded in the Injury Investigation, Form 3.15.Photographic service shall be requested fromthe Photographic Section, ScientificInvestigation Division (Manual Section4/212.54).

Photographs need not be taken when the injuryis the result of a condition of properties of theBoard of Education or the Housing Authority.Photographing of traffic collisions is notaffected by this section and shall be carried outin accordance with standard procedure(Manual Section 4/430.45).

210.65 CANCELLATION OFAMBULANCE. When a unit answers a call inwhich an ambulance has been dispatched, andit is determined that no ambulance is needed,the communications control operator shall beinformed immediately.

210.70 MATERNITY SERVICE. If noother maternity service is available, emergencyambulance service shall be requested throughthe communications control operator by radioor by notifying the appropriate FireDepartment Signal Office by telephone when:

∗ A woman's water has broken, or there isbleeding, accompanied with labor pains;

∗ A woman has not had a previous child andher labor pains are three to five minutesapart and lasting thirty to sixty seconds; or,

∗ A woman has had a previous normal birthand her labor pains are five to eight minutesapart.

210.75 EMERGENCY MEDICALTRANSPORTATION. Suspects, arrestees, orothers requiring emergency medical attentionshall only be transported via a RescueAmbulance (RA). It shall be the responsibilityof all Department employees to request aRescue Ambulance for a suspect, arrestee, orany other person requesting emergencymedical treatment or when it is apparent thatthey are in need of such assistance and are

unable to request.

Note: Individuals requiring emergency medicalattention shall only be transported in a policevehicle during an unusual occurrence ortactical situation when it is necessary toremove the individual from a position ofimmediate threat to their safety. In suchsituations, an RA shall be requested and theindividual shall be moved only the distancerequired to reach a safe location.

When a suspect or arrestee requires onlyroutine medical treatment, such as pre-bookingmedical treatment or other non-emergencycare, the person may be transported in a policevehicle to one of the following medicalfacilities:

∗ Department Jail Dispensary; ∗ Los Angeles County Medical Centers; or,∗ Department’s contract hospitals.

Note: A current list of hospitals under contractwith the City can be obtained from DetectiveSupport Division.

Blood or Medical Supplies. Emergencytransportation of blood or medical suppliesmay be provided when necessary for thepreservation of life. Approval for suchtransportation shall be obtained from theCommanding Officer, Detective SupportDivision.

210.80 FOOD POISONING. Cases of foodpoisoning shall be reported by telephone to theOffice of the Registrar, County HealthDepartment, without delay. If the office isclosed, the emergency operator at the Hall ofJustice will connect the officer with the properperson to be notified, who shall be given allavailable information regarding the foodpoisoning.

210.82 NOTIFICATION TO HEALTHDEPARTMENT OF ABUSE ORNEGLECT AT NURSING HOMES. Anofficer who receives information that a patienthas been physically neglected or abused in ahealth facility, nursing home, etc., (as definedin Section 1250 of the Health and Safety Code)shall telephonically notify the Health FacilitiesDivision, County Health Department, as soonas practicable. The name of the HealthDepartment employee notified shall beincluded on the appropriate Department report.

210.85 INJURIES IN BUILDINGS.Accidents wherein persons are seriouslyinjured or die as a result of suspecteddeficiencies in buildings or mechanicalequipment located therein shall be reported bytelephone to the Investigation Division,Department of Building and Safety. When thatoffice is closed, the concerned watchcommander shall be notified. The watchcommander shall cause the notification to bemade as soon as practicable during the nextnormal business day. Types of accidents instructures requiring notification could includeserious injury or death due to:



∗ Asphyxiation.∗ Building collapse.∗ Electrocution.∗ Explosion.∗ Mechanical equipment failure.

210.90 NOTIFICATION OF DEADLYWEAPON INJURY. An officer who receivesinformation concerning a wanted suspect whopossibly has an injury inflicted by a deadlyweapon, or information that a person has beentreated at a medical facility for an injurypossibly inflicted by a deadly weapon, shall, inaddition to any other notification, telephoneDetective Support Division and supply thefollowing information:

∗ Name of the wounded person (if known);∗ Physical description of the wounded person;∗ Description of injury and type of weapon

used;∗ Crime involved (if known);∗ Date, time, and location injury occurred;∗ Description of wounded person's vehicle (if

known);∗ DR number of crime or injury report;∗ Reporting officer's name, serial number, and

division; and,∗ Name, address, and business phone of the

person treating the injured person when theinformation pertains to medical treatment.

212. REQUESTING AID IN THEFIELD.212.10 ASSISTANCE BYINVESTIGATING OFFICERS. When aradio patrol unit answers a call involving amajor crime, and the circumstances indicatethe need of immediate investigation byinvestigating officers, the concernedinvestigating officers shall be notified withoutdelay (Manual Section 4/201.30). Whenpractical, requests for investigating officersshall be made by telephone. If the request ismade by radio, an officer shall, whenpracticable, remain by the radio until he/she isinformed that the requested unit has beendispatched or is not available.

212.12 INVESTIGATION OFABORTIONS. The Abortion Detail,Robbery-Homicide Division, shall beresponsible for all preliminary and follow-upabortion investigations. When an employeereceives information concerning the victim ofan illegal abortion, or any known or suspectedillegal abortion activity, he/she shallimmediately telephone all availableinformation to Robbery-Homicide Division.When Robbery-Homicide Division is closed,notification shall be made to Detective SupportDivision.

212.14 INVESTIGATION OFCOMPUTER-RELATED CRIMES. TheFraud Section, Commercial Crimes Division,shall be responsible for the preliminary andfollow-up investigations of any crimecommitted through the use of computer-storedinformation or sabotage to computer-storedinformation and for completing the necessary

reports. An officer who receives suchinformation shall immediately notifyCommercial Crimes Division. WhenCommercial Crimes Division is closed, thenotification shall be made to Detective SupportDivision, which shall determine the necessityfor immediate notification to CommercialCrimes Division.

212.15 ASSISTANCE BY SCIENTIFICINVESTIGATION DIVISION. The officersinvestigating the scene of a crime shalldetermine whether a specialist from ScientificInvestigation Division shall be summoned tothe scene (Manual Section 4/212.44). If acrime is such that latent or microscopicevidence, or hazardous chemicals may bepresent, the assistance of the concernedspecialist from Scientific InvestigationDivision shall be requested. Officers requestinga field investigation by a unit of ScientificInvestigation Division shall make the requestby telephone whenever possible. Whennecessary, and a telephone is not available, therequest may be made by radio. In accordancewith Manual Section 4/201.30, when atelephonic notification should be made to aninvestigative unit, and the unit is not available,the notification shall be made to DetectiveSupport Division.

212.20 RADIO REQUESTS FORSCIENTIFIC INVESTIGATIONDIVISION UNITS. When a radio request forScientific Investigation Division units is made(Manual Section 4/212.15), it shall be made byobtaining a clear frequency and supplying thefollowing applicable items of information:

∗ Unit making the request;∗ Unit requested;∗ Type of crime or incident to be investigated;∗ Type of assistance required (lifting

fingerprints, obtaining plaster casts, takingphotographs, etc.);

∗ Location where service is requested; and,∗ All other pertinent information.

The request shall be made by radio only whenthe situation demands immediate scientificinvestigation, and a telephone is not available.

212.25 TELEPHONIC REQUESTS FORSCIENTIFIC INVESTIGATIONDIVISION UNITS. A telephonic request shallbe made by calling the desired unit directly andsupplying the following information:

∗ The DR number;∗ Unit making the request;∗ Type of crime or incident to be investigated;∗ Type of assistance required;∗ Location where service is requested; and∗ All other pertinent information.

212.30 OBTAINING DR NUMBERS.Prior to making a telephonic request for a unitof Scientific Investigation Division, a DRnumber shall be secured for the concernedreport(s).

212.35 FORWARDING REQUESTINFORMATION. An employee receiving aradio request for a unit of ScientificInvestigation Division shall immediately relaythe information to the unit requested.

212.40 RESPONSIBILITY FORPROTECTING EVIDENCE. Officersrequesting the assistance of a specialist fromScientific Investigation Division shall beresponsible for the protection of evidence untilrelieved by the specialist.

212.44 FINGERPRINTINVESTIGATION. Each Area commandingofficer shall assign available latent print fieldkits to police units as needed to mosteffectively conduct fingerprint investigationsin a geographic Area.

Officers assigned to police units with latentprint field kits shall normally be responsiblefor fingerprint investigations that are not theresponsibility of the Latent Print Section,Scientific Investigation Division. Withapproval of the Latent Print Section, officersmay conduct fingerprint investigations that arenormally the responsibility of ScientificInvestigation Division.

Requests for fingerprint investigations whichare the responsibility of Scientific InvestigationDivision shall be made to the Latent PrintSection, Scientific Investigation Division(Manual Section 4/201.30).

Exception: In the Valley areas, requests forfingerprint investigations shall be made to theValley Section, Scientific InvestigationDivision.

When assistance of a fingerprint section isrequested, the requesting officers shall cautionpersons about the premises to touch nothingwhich might bear fingerprints. Requests for aninvestigation of possible fingerprints on aporous substance shall be made without delay.

Note: The Department shall provide requiredfingerprint investigations within the City whenrequested by the:

∗ California Highway Patrol;∗ Los Angeles Community Colleges Police;∗ Los Angeles Department of General

Services Security Division;∗ Los Angeles Harbor Department Port

Warden;∗ Los Angeles Housing Authority Patrol

Division;∗ Los Angeles Unified School District Police

Department; and,∗ University of Southern California Security

Department.

Qualified officers of these outside agenciesmay conduct their own latent printinvestigations.

212.45 INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVINGBOMB THREATS AT SCHOOLS. Anemployee receiving information regarding abomb threat at a school or college shall notify



the Area Detective Division watch commander,Area of occurrence, without delay. The AreaDetective Division watch commander shallnotify the geographic Area Patrol Divisionwatch commander of the bomb threat ANDdispatch an investigating officer to the scene toconduct the preliminary investigation. Whenan investigating officer is not available, theArea Detective Division watch commandershall request that the Area Patrol Divisionwatch commander dispatch a patrol unit.

Note: When the Area Detective Division isclosed, the notification shall be made directlyto the geographic Area Patrol Division watchcommander, who shall cause a patrol unit torespond.

The watch commander dispatching personnelto the scene of a school bomb threat shallnotify the security officer or person in chargeof the school and request that a security officeror school official respond to the scene.

The decision to evacuate a school or to searcha school during school hours rests with theschool official in charge.

If investigation reveals that dangerousexplosives may be involved, CriminalConspiracy Section, Major Crimes Division,and the Hazardous Devices Section,Emergency Services Division, shall beimmediately notified (Manual Section4/212.50).

Notification concerning bomb threats atschools shall be made by telephone whenpossible. Department personnel shall avoidtransmitting the information by means likely toresult in its becoming generally known.

Notification of the incident shall be made tothe Department Command Post,Communications Division.

212.46 MARKS OR TRACKS. Requestsfor the taking of plaster casts of marks ortracks shall be made to the Latent PrintSection, Scientific Investigation Division(Manual Section 4/201.30). When photographsof tracks or marks may be necessary, theassistance of the Photographic Section,Scientific Investigation Division, shall berequested (Manual Section 4/201.30).

212.48 INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVINGPOISONS. When it is suspected that a majorcrime involves the use of poison, theCriminalistics Laboratory, ScientificInvestigation Division, shall be notifiedimmediately (Manual Section 4/201.30).

212.49 INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVINGHAZARDOUS MATERIALS.Definition. The term "hazardous material"shall mean any chemical or mixture ofchemicals which is toxic, corrosive, volatile,explosive, or flammable that has the capacityof inducing great bodily injury or illness orwhich has been determined to be capable ofposing an unreasonable risk to health, safety,or property.

Notification. An employee becoming aware ofthe actual or suspected presence of a hazardousmaterial which has been seized as a result of apolice action shall immediately notify theCriminalistics Laboratory, ScientificInvestigation Division (SID), and request theassistance of the Fire Department. When SIDis closed, notification shall be made to theDepartment Command Post, CommunicationsDivision.

Note: Procedures governing hazardoussubstances which become a police problem asa result of a traffic collision are not affected(Manual Section 4/430.10).

Preliminary Investigations of IllicitLaboratories. Officers conducting apreliminary investigation of an illicitlaboratory shall immediately secure theperimeter of the location, evacuate adjacentinhabited dwellings, request that a fieldsupervisor respond to the scene, and make thefollowing notifications:

∗ Illicit Lab Squad, Narcotics Division;∗ Hazardous Chemical Team, SID; and,

Note: If either division is closed, contact theDepartment Command Post, CommunicationsDivision for on-call personnel.

∗ Fire Department.

Note: An officer shall be designated to meetFire Department personnel at least a half milefrom the location and have them standby torespond in the event of an emergency.

Officers shall not enter an illicit laboratory toapprehend suspects or to prevent thedestruction of evidence, absent theauthorization of the Illicit Lab Squad,Narcotics Division, or Hazardous ChemicalTeam, SID.

When entry is made into a location notpreviously known to contain an illicitlaboratory and such a laboratory is discovered,officers shall immediately vacate the location,secure the perimeter of the site, evacuateadjacent inhabited dwellings, request asupervisor, and make appropriate notifications.

Handling. When notified of a seizure of asuspected hazardous material, a specialist fromSID shall respond to the scene and:

∗ Determine the hazard posed by the material;∗ Implement safeguards appropriate for the

handling of the chemical;

Note: No attempt shall be made to neutralize,move, or transport any hazardous materialexcept under the direction of an SID specialist.

∗ When conditions permit, obtain a sample(normally one pint) and photograph thegross amount of the material;

∗ Arrange for the disposal of any quantity ofthe material which cannot be safely storedin available facilities; and,

∗ Arrange for the destruction of any quantityof hazardous material controlled substance

mixture authorized for destruction which aChief Forensic Chemist has determinedcannot be safely stored in availablefacilities.

Booking: Employees booking a sample of ahazardous material shall include in theProperty Report, Form 10.1, the gross amountand disposition of the chemical seized.

212.50 INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVINGEXPLOSIVES. The initial employee whoencounters any explosive material orpyrotechnic device shall contact a specialistfrom the Hazardous Devices Section,Emergency Services Division, prior tohandling the item(s). This contact should bemade telephonically either directly to theHazardous Devices Section during regularbusiness hours or through the DepartmentCommand Post, Communications Division atother times.

Note: A pyrotechnic device is any combinationof materials which is activated by fire toproduce an audible, visual, mechanical orthermal effect. A pyrotechnic device containsexplosive material and should be consideredhazardous until a determination is made by theHazardous Devices Section.

The Hazardous Devices Section specialist willspeak directly to the officer or supervisor whohas physical custody of the explosive materialor pyrotechnic device prior to providingdirection on its handling and/or booking. Employees shall follow the specialist’sdirection on handling and booking the item(s).

Note: A "Code Five Edward" (Manual Section4/120.40) shall be used to notify Air SupportDivision (ASD) personnel of an explosivehazard to low-altitude aircraft.

Notification of the incident shall be made tothe Administrative Unit, Detective SupportDivision.

Los Angeles International Airport. TheHazardous Devices Section, EmergencyServices Division, shall direct all searches ofaircraft or facilities at the Los AngelesInternational Airport.

Note: In the event a specialist takes custody ofexplosive material, the officer completing theProperty Report (Manual Section 4/510.20)shall include this information in the report.

212.52 CRIME SCENE MAPS. If adetailed drawing of the scene of a crime isdesired, the Police Surveyor, ScientificInvestigation Division, shall be requested(Manual Section 4/201.30). The particularobjects and the specific place to be surveyedshall be clearly stated.

212.54 PHOTOGRAPHS. Requests forphotographic services, other than traffic,training, public relations activity, orfingerprints, shall be directed to thePhotographic Section, Scientific InvestigationDivision (Manual Section 4/201.30).



212.56 DEVELOPING BOOKED FILM.When booked film needs to be developed, theinvestigating officer (I/O) shall:

∗ Request the Property DispositionCoordinator (PDC) “Release” (in APIMS)the film to the I/O;

Note: The PDC shall enter “To be developed”in the additional comments field.

∗ Obtain the film from Property Division andtransport it to the Photo Lab, SID fordevelopment; and,

∗ Complete a supplemental Property Report,Form 10.1, listing the photographs ornegatives as the next sequential itemnumber from the most recent PropertyReport; or,

∗ Complete a Follow-up Investigation, Form3.14, if the photographs or negatives are tobe retained at the Photo Lab, SID; and,

∗ Include the Photo Lab PC number on theProperty Report.

212.60 UNDERWATER SEARCH. Whenan underwater search is deemed necessary,investigating officers shall notify theircommanding officer. When a search isnecessary, the commanding officer shall:

∗ Notify the Department Command Post,Communications Division;

∗ Advise on the urgency of the search; and,∗ Give exact location where searching team

shall meet;

The Department Command Post,Communication Division, shall:

∗ Notify the Officer in Charge, UnderwaterDive Unit. The Officer in Charge willdetermine if the request for search orrecovery is in furtherance of Departmentobjectives and in keeping with Departmentpolicies;

∗ Select officers from the Underwater SearchRoster maintained by the DepartmentCommand Post, Communications Division;

∗ Notify the duty watch commanders of theselected officers' units of assignment, of thelocation and time of search; and,

∗ After selection of officers has been verified,notify the requesting unit of time and placeofficers shall meet.

The duty watch commanders of the selectedofficers shall:

∗ Determine selected officers' availability;∗ Inform officers of the location of search and

reporting time; and,∗ Notify the Department Command Post,

Communications Division, of officers'availability and time notified.

212.70 CANINE (K-9) PLATOON. Theservices of the Canine Platoon, MetropolitanDivision, are available on a 24 hour-a-daybasis. When Department personnel determinethere is a need for the services of the CaninePlatoon, requests shall be made throughCommunications Division or by telephonically

contacting Metropolitan Division.

212.72 CRISIS NEGOTIATION TEAM.When the Incident Commander at an incidentdetermines that a Crisis Negotiation Team maybe of assistance, the Incident Commander shallcontact the Metropolitan Division watchcommander telephonically, when practicable,or through Communications Division via radio.

212.74 MOUNTED PLATOON.Commanding officers of Areas/divisionswishing to have the Mounted Platoon deployedshall make the request by forwarding anIntradepartmental Correspondence, Form 15.2,to the Commanding Officer, MetropolitanDivision. The Commanding Officer,Metropolitan Division, has the responsibilityfor evaluating requests and deploying the unitas appropriate. Requests of an emergencynature may be made telephonically.

212.76 SPECIAL WEAPONS ANDTACTICS (SWAT). When the IncidentCommander determines that a SWAT teammay be of assistance, the Incident Commandershall contact the Metropolitan Division WatchCommander telephonically, when practicable,or through Communications Division via radio.When requesting SWAT, the IncidentCommander should be prepared to give adetailed briefing of the situation.

If SWAT expertise is anticipated to be requiredat a planned event, such as the service of ahigh-risk warrant, and time permits, thecommanding officer of the requesting entityshall submit a request via IntradepartmentalCorrespondence, Form 15.2, to theCommanding Officer, Metropolitan Division.

212.77 Rapid Extraction and Dismantling(RED) Team. The mission of the RED Teamis to provide support to field personnel who arepresented with a civil disturbance that isbeyond the capabilities of field personnel. TheRED Team is responsible for:

∗ Responding upon the request of the IncidentCommander with specially trained andequipped personnel to defeat man-madeobstacles used to enhance acts of civildisobedience; and,

∗ Overcoming unlawful deployment ofsubjects or obstacles through the use oftechnical rope operations and/or mechanicaldismantling techniques.

The Incident Commander at a civildisobedience incident shall request the REDTeam, through the Metropolitan DivisionWatch Commander or CommunicationsDivision, when the following criteria are met:

∗ Subject is engaged in a crime;∗ Subject refuses to submit to arrest; and,∗ Subject has positioned himself/herself in

such a manner or location that defeatsconventional methods and means to affecthis/her removal and arrest.

213. NONTRAFFIC NOTICE TOAPPEAR BOOKLETS.213.10 RESPONSIBILITY FORISSUING NONTRAFFIC NOTICE TOAPPEAR BOOKLETS. All Areacommanding officers shall maintain supplies ofNontraffic Notice to Appear booklets forissuance to officers.

213.15 ISSUANCE OF NONTRAFFICNOTICE TO APPEAR BOOKLETS.Concerned commanding officers shall cause aRecord of Citation Books, Form 4.15, to bemaintained, recording the issuance and returnof Nontraffic Notice to Appear booklets.

When practicable, officers shall drawNontraffic Notice to Appear booklets from theplace of issuance which normally serves theirArea or division.

213.20 OFFICERS RECEIVINGNONTRAFFIC NOTICE TO APPEARBOOKLETS. Upon receiving a NontrafficNotice to Appear booklet, the officer shallprint in ink his or her name and serial numberon the front cover. No notation of any kindshall be made on any citation prior to use.

213.25 DISPOSITION OF COMPLETEDNONTRAFFIC NOTICE TO APPEARBOOKLETS. When all citations in aNontraffic Notice to Appear booklet have beenused, it shall be submitted to a supervisor in theofficer's division or Area of assignment. Afterreview, the booklet shall be returned to thewatch commander at the location of issuance.The date of return shall be recorded on theRecord of Citation Books, Form 4.15. Thebooklet shall be filed by book number in thedivision or Area. Booklets may be destroyedsix months after the date of the last citation.

213.30 DISPOSITION OFTRANSFERRED OFFICERS'NONTRAFFIC NOTICE TO APPEARBOOKLETS. An officer transferred to a unit,division, or Area in another section of the Cityshall return any Nontraffic Notice to Appearbooklet to the location of issuance after reviewby a supervisor in the division or Area fromwhich the officer is transferring.

The date of return of the booklet and thenumber of unused citations shall be recordedon the Record of Citation Books, Form 4.15.The booklet shall then be available forreissuance.

213.35 LOST OR DAMAGEDNONTRAFFIC NOTICE TO APPEARBOOKLETS. When a Nontraffic Notice toAppear booklet is lost or damaged, anEmployee's Report, Form 15.7, shall becompleted. It shall specify the numbers of thecitations which were not issued. After theEmployee's Report has been approved by theemployee's supervisor, it shall be forwarded tothe location of issuance, where the informationshall be recorded on the Record of CitationBooks, Form 4.15. A damaged booklet, or abooklet found after an Employee's Report has



been completed, shall be returned to thelocation of issuance and stored as a completedbooklet. The found or damaged booklet shallnot be reissued.

213.45 ERRORS OR OMISSIONS ONNOTICE TO APPEAR CITATION. Tocorrect errors or omissions on the NontrafficNotice to Appear, the following proceduresshall apply:

∗ Defendant’s Copy Available. When anerror is noted on the Nontraffic Notice toAppear and the defendant’s copy isavailable, the issuing officer shall draw asingle line through the error and legiblyprint the correct information as near aspossible to the error on the original and allcopies of the Nontraffic Notice to Appear.The officer shall write the words"Defendant’s Copy Corrected" followed bythe officer's initials, in the top margin of theform on all copies of the Nontraffic Noticeto Appear.

∗ Defendant’s Copy Not Available. When anerror or omission is noted on the NontrafficNotice to Appear and the defendant’s copyis not available, the correct informationshall be reported on a Notice of Correctionand Proof of Service, Form 4.07. The pink(defendant’s) copy of the completed Form4.07 must be mailed to the defendant in allcases. When the error or omission willimpact a follow-up investigation, theFollow-Up Investigation, Form 3.14, shallalso be completed.

213.50 CANCELLATION OFNONTRAFFIC NOTICE TO APPEAR,FORM 5.2.2. A Nontraffic Notice to Appearmay be canceled only when approved by thefirst available officer in the followingsequence:

∗ Officer in Charge; or,∗ Watch Commander.

Note: If the defendant’s copy has been issuedand is not available, or the Nontraffic Notice toAppear has been distributed, the Follow-UpInvestigation, Form 3.14, shall be used toreport the cancellation.

∗ The officer requesting the cancellationshall:

∗ Write the word "VOID" across theNontraffic Notice to Appear;

∗ Write the reason for the cancellation onthe book copy (pink); and,

∗ Cancel the DR number if one has beenobtained.

∗ The approving officer shall:

∗ Date and sign the book copy; and,∗ Destroy the original (white) and

defendant’s copy (blue).

213.55 DESCRIPTION OF DEFENDANTON NONTRAFFIC NOTICE TO APPEAR.In addition to specific descriptors required ona Nontraffic Notice to Appear, Form 5.2.2, the

officer completing the citation shall list visible,obvious tattoos, scars, birthmarks, missingextremities and/or deformities in the "OtherDescription" field.

214. UNUSUAL INCIDENTS.214.15 INCIDENTS INVOLVING ABARRICADED SUSPECT/HOSTAGE. TheIncident Commander at a barricadedsuspect/hostage incident shall request theSpecial Weapons and Tactics Team (SWAT)when all of the following criteria are met:

∗ The suspect is probably armed;∗ The suspect is believed to have been

involved in a criminal act or is a significantthreat to the lives and safety of citizensand/or police;

∗ The suspect is in a position of advantage,affording cover and concealment; or, iscontained in an open area and the presenceor approach of police officers couldprecipitate an adverse reaction by thesuspect; and,

∗ The suspect refuses to submit to arrest.

214.20 IMMEDIATE ACTION/RAPIDDEPLOYMENT. Immediate Action/RapidDeployment is the swift and immediatedeployment of law enforcement resources toon-going, life threatening situations wheredelay could otherwise result in death or greatbodily injury to innocent persons. ImmediateAction/Rapid Deployment will generallyrequire the immediate configuration ofresponding resources into Contact and RescueTeams. The overall objective of a Contactand/or Rescue Team is to save as many lives aspossible through a coordinated effort.

The primary mission of a Contact Team is tolimit the movement of a suspect(s), stop thedeadly behavior, prevent escape, and providea preliminary assessment of the incident.

The mission of a Rescue Team is to rescue andrecover victim(s), move them to a safe area,and obtain medical treatment if necessary.Accomplishment of this mission requirescoordinated actions with the team leader of theContact Team. Generally, these teamscomprise a minimum of four officers each.

214.25 INCIDENTS REQUIRINGHANDLING OF RADIOACTIVEMATERIALS. Officers investigating anincident in which radioactive materials may bepresent shall:

∗ Keep all persons and conveyances at a safedistance from radioactive materials or liquidrun-off; and,

∗ Immediately notify the DepartmentCommand Post, Communications Division,of the incident. If a criminal or trafficinvestigation is required at the scene,officers shall request a Departmentradiological monitoring officer. The requestshall include the name of the owner of thematerial (if known); location, type, andquantity of material involved; requests forbarricades or other special traffic control

devices; and the phone number where therequesting officer may be reached, ifpracticable.

Note: Radioactive materials in transit may beidentified by its symbol. This symbol is atrifoliate design with a purplish red (magenta)center and yellow leaves.

214.45 SIGNIFICANT INFORMATIONIMPACTING CITY GOVERNMENTNOTIFICATION. When an employeereceives information which may have asignificant impact on the operations of Citygovernment or when the news value of suchinformation may have a similar impact, theemployee shall:

∗ Immediately notify the Director, Office ofOperations; or,

∗ When that office is closed, immediatelynotify the Watch Commander, theDepartment Command Post,Communications Division, who shall in turnnotify the Director, Office of Operations.

Note: Employees are also responsible formaking notifications of significant informationto their immediate supervisor.

214.50 DEPARTMENT COMMANDPOST (DCP) NOTIFICATION. Thefollowing incidents require notification to theDCP:

Categorical Use of Force Incidents.

∗ All officer-involved shootings;∗ All uses of an upper body control hold by a

Department employee, including the use ofa modified carotid, full carotid or lockedcarotid hold;

∗ All deaths while the arrestee or detainee isin custodial care of the Department (alsoknown as In-Custody Death or ICD);

∗ A use of force incident resulting in death;and,

∗ A use of force incident resulting in an injuryrequiring hospitalization.

Note: The term “hospitalization” as used inthis Section, requires the individual to beadmitted to a hospital for treatment orobservation, Manual Section 3/794.02.

Other Incidents Investigated by ForceInvestigation Division (FID).

∗ An incident in which a member of thepublic is bitten by a Department canine andhospitalization is required;

∗ Negligent discharge of a firearm;∗ Animal shootings; and,∗ Incidents where the Department has agreed

to conduct similar critical incidentinvestigations for a non-Department entity,such as a Los Angeles Fire DepartmentArson Unit tactical officer-involvedshooting incident.

Patrol Related Incidents.

∗ Barricaded suspect or SWAT call-out;∗ Bomb Squad call-out;



∗ CARE/AMBER Alerts;∗ All homicides;∗ Missing juvenile investigations involving

searches;∗ Pursuits that travel out of the County, are

prolonged, involve a City Property Involvedcollision, or are newsworthy;

∗ Shootings in which two or more victims arewounded; and,

∗ Incidents motivated by hatred (DR Numberis required prior to notification).

Unusual/Major Occurrences.

∗ Major demonstrations or mass arrests;∗ Disasters including chemical spills, gas

main leaks or breaks, major fires ordisturbances, aircraft accidents;

∗ Department Operations Center (DOC)activation or deactivation;

∗ City Emergency Operations Center (EOC)activation or deactivation;

∗ Incident Command Post activation at thescene of a noteworthy or newsworthyincident;

∗ Incidents involvinghazardous/toxic/radioactive materials;

∗ Citywide Tactical Alerts; and,∗ A change in the Federal terrorism threat

level (up or down).

Incidents Involving Department Personnel.

∗ Alleged serious misconduct or arrest ofDepartment employee(s); and,

∗ Death or hospitalization of Departmentemployee(s).

Other Notable Incidents.

∗ Extensive damage to Departmentequipment;

∗ Newsworthy incident involving theDepartment in any way; or,

∗ Other incident that an Officer in Charge orWatch Commander feels should be broughtto the attention of the Department.

Note: All personnel are encouraged to call theDCP at any time they are in doubt as towhether or not an incident requiresnotification.

Officer’s Responsibility. The senior officer atthe scene of an incident requiring DCPnotification shall request a supervisor torespond to the scene.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. The firstsupervisor to respond to an incident requiringDCP notification shall ensure their watchcommander and the DCP have been apprisedof the incident as soon as practical anddocument the incident in a Sergeant’s DailyReport, Form 15.48.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Uponlearning of a reportable incident, the watchcommander or officer in charge shall ensurethat the DCP has been notified and documentthe incident in a Watch Commander’s DailyReport, Form 15.80.

214.60 CRISIS RESPONSE TEAM-NOTIFICATION. When an unusualoccurrence, local emergency, disaster, or otherincident occurs where involved Departmentemployees may be psychologicallytraumatized, the commanding officer of theArea of occurrence, or the incident commanderin the event of a wide spread occurrence, shallnotify the Crisis Response Team (CRT)immediately. Notification shall be made toBehavioral Science Services during businesshours and to the Department Command Post,Communications Division after hours and onweekends. Commanding officers shall ensurethat employees exposed to a traumatic disasterscene attend a debriefing conducted by CRTpersonnel as soon as practicable.

Note: Membership in the Crisis ResponseTeam is a primary duty assignment when theCRT is activated. Employees who are membersof the CRT shall be allowed to immediatelyrespond to any request for assistance whendirected to do so by their CRT team leader.

215. AUTHORIZATION TO ACT ASPEACE OFFICER.215.10 OUTSIDE AGENCY IN THECITY. An officer of another jurisdictionrequesting authority to act as a peace officerwithin the City of Los Angeles, who lacks suchauthority as granted under Section 830.1 (a)and (2) P.C., shall be referred to the Office ofthe Chief of Police. When the Office of theChief of Police is closed, requests shall bereferred to Detective Support Division.

215.20 ON-DUTY ACTIVITY INOUTSIDE JURISDICTION.

Officer’s Responsibility. On-duty officersshall obtain approval from their watchcommander or officer in charge before takingpolice action outside the Los Angeles Citylimits.

Exception: When officers are in "hot pursuit"or exigent circumstances exist, such as officersafety, which would preclude obtaining priorapproval, officers shall inform their watchcommander or officer in charge as soon aspractical.

Officers shall be guided by DepartmentManual Sections 1/230.05 and 1/230.10 whentaking on-duty police action outside the LosAngeles City limits.

Watch Commander/Officer In Charge’sResponsibility. The concerned watchcommander or officer in charge shall be guidedby Penal Code Section 830.1 when grantingapproval to proceed outside the City limits totake police action.

Note: Officers taking police action outside theCity limits have no peace officer status, and areacting as private persons, if the criteriaoutlined in Penal Code Section 830.1 is notmet.

When approval is granted, the concerned watchcommander or officer in charge shall reviewthe circumstances and, if appropriate, ensurethat the watch commander of the concernedoutside agency has prior notification of thepending police action. If prior notification isdeemed inappropriate, notification shall bemade as soon as practical after the policeaction is taken.

Note: Taking into consideration the tacticalsituation and desired results of theinvestigation, every effort should be made toinform the outside agency before action istaken on:

∗ The serving of search or arrest warrants;∗ Making an arrest; or∗ Conducting surveillance.

216. TAKING PERSONS INTOCUSTODY.Inspection and Interview. All personsdetained or arrested and transported to aDepartment facility shall be brought before awatch commander for an inspection andinterview. At a minimum, the watchcommander shall ask the suspect the followingthree questions:

∗ Do you understand why you weredetained/arrested?

∗ Are you sick, ill, or injured?∗ Do you have any questions or concerns?

The watch commander shall take appropriateaction based upon the results of the inspectionand responses to these questions.

Exception: In those rare cases whencircumstances preclude an inspection andinterview by a watch commander (e.g.,medical/absentee bookings), the watchcommander shall ensure that the suspect isinspected and interviewed by a Departmentsupervisor who did not assist or participate inthe person’s arrest or detention. The assignedsupervisor shall document the inspection andinterview in his/her Sergeant’s Daily Report,Form 15.48. Additionally, the watchcommander shall document the reason for theexception, including the name and serialnumber of the supervisor assigned to conductthe inspection and interview, in his/her WatchCommander’s Daily Report, Form 15.80.

Area Station. Any officer, from anycommand, that arrives at a Community PoliceStation with a person detained or arrested shallimmediately ensure that the person is visuallyinspected and interviewed by the WatchCommander.

Specialized Divisions. All specialized divisionarrestees shall be inspected and questioned byone of the 19 Area watch commanders or theWatch Commander, Metropolitan Jail Section,Jail Division, before being booked.

216.01 ADVICE/APPROVAL ONFELONY BOOKINGS.



Booking Advice – Defined. Booking advice isthe recommendation given to the watchcommander regarding what charge(s) anarrestee should be booked for based on thecircumstances of the arrest.

Booking Approval – Defined. Bookingapproval is the final authority given to anofficer to incarcerate an arrestee into a jailfacility on a given charge(s).

Booking Advice Procedure. Prior to bookingan arrestee on a felony charge at any jailfacility, a watch commander shall ensure thatbooking advice is obtained from an on-dutyinvestigative supervisor from the investigativeentity responsible for the follow-upinvestigation. The investigative supervisorgiving the booking advice shall sign his/hersignature in the “ADVISINGINVESTIGATIVE SUPERVISOR” section ofthe Booking Approval, Form 12.31.

When available, or in complex arrestsrequiring additional review, the investigativesupervisor giving booking advice shall reviewall related reports for required content andplace his/her initials and serial number at theconclusion of the narrative portion of eachreport. This change does not affect otherDepartment procedure associated with bookingapproval and booking advice.

Exception: Officers are not required to obtainbooking advice on narcotic arrests when nofollow-up investigation will be conducted.

Booking advice is not required if theinvestigative entity responsible for the follow-up investigation is off-duty.

Exception: Detective Information Desk,Detective Support Division, will continue toprovide booking advice, counseling, andassistance to officers making felony arrestswhen the responsible specialized detectivedivision of Office of Operations is closed andthe suspect is to be booked (Manual Section2/470.35).

Telephonic Booking Advice. When it isimpractical to obtain a signature from the on-duty investigative supervisor responsible forproviding booking advice, the watchcommander giving booking approval shallobtain such advice telephonically.

In these cases, the approving watchcommander shall write the name of theadvising investigative supervisor followed bythe watch commander’s initials, and place acheck in the box titled “Telephonic Advice” onthe Booking Approval, Form 12.31.

Note: Generally, booking advice is notrequired when the investigative entityresponsible for the follow-up investigation isoff-duty. However, an off-duty investigativesupervisor may be contacted telephonically foradvice only when the situation involves aserious felony crime, an extraordinarycircumstance, or the off-duty investigativesupervisor is being compensated for on-call

status (e.g., Area homicide call-out team,Officer-Involved Shooting Team, CriminalConspiracy Section, etc.).

Booking Advice – Final Authority. Thewatch commander approving booking has thefinal authority as to the booking charge. In theevent the investigative supervisor’s advicediffers from that of the approving watchcommander, the watch commander shall ensurehis/her rationale is properly documented in theWatch Commander’s Daily Report, Form15.80.

Booking Approval Procedure. Bookingapproval for any arrest shall only be obtainedfrom an Area watch commander or the WatchCommander, Metropolitan Jail Section, JailDivision. When providing booking approval,the watch commander shall review each arrestfor appropriateness, legality, and conformancewith Department policy and procedure. Whenbooking is approved, the watch commandershall complete the Booking Approval, Form12.31, and sign his/her name and serial numberin the “APPROVING WATCHCOMMANDER” section of the form.

Note: Officers shall not sign or otherwisewrite any name for a supervisor in anyDepartment report or form requiring anapproving supervisor’s signature.

Officers or detectives assigned to Areas (Vice,Detective Divisions, Gang Enforcement Detail,Patrol, etc.) shall obtain booking approval fromtheir respective Area watch commander beforebooking any arrestee into any jail facility.

Officers or detectives assigned to specializeddivisions shall obtain booking approval fromone of the 19 Area watch commanders or theWatch Commander, Metropolitan Jail Section,Jail Division, before booking any arrestee intoany jail facility.

The watch commander of any Department jailshall have the final responsibility for allarrestees booked at that jail. When a JailDivision watch commander questions abooking approved by an Area watchcommander, the Jail Division watchcommander shall contact the approving Areawatch commander.

When a difference of opinion remains, thewatch commander in charge of the jail facilityshall make the final determination.

Adult Felony Traffic Arrests. Booking advicefor adult felony traffic arrests shall be obtainedfrom a supervisor in the concerned bureautraffic division.

The detective or supervisor providing bookingadvice shall:

∗ Provide the requesting officer with acompleted Booking Approval, Form 12.31,listing the appropriate Justice InformationSystem Booking Charge Table, whenapplicable; and,

∗ Review all related reports for requiredcontent and place initials and serial number

at the conclusion of the narrative portion ofeach report.

The reviewed reports shall be submitted forapproval to the arresting officer's supervisor inthe Area of arrest.

Fugitive Bookings. When a person is arrestedon a local charge, and is also wanted by anout-of-state jurisdiction, the Area watchcommander or the Watch Commander,Metropolitan Jail Section, Jail Division, shallprovide booking advice/approval on the localcharge. Upon approval, the Fugitive WarrantSection shall be telephoned without delay, orwhen closed, Detective Support Division,Administrative Desk, for booking advice onthe fugitive charge. Once the booking advicehas been obtained, the Area watch commanderor the Watch Commander, Metropolitan JailSection, Jail Division, shall provide thebooking approval on the local charge, with thefugitive charge placed supplementary. FugitiveWarrant Section has the final authority onbooking charges for out-of-state issues.

Fraud-Forgery Bookings. When the arrestinvolves an offense over which CommercialCrimes Division has jurisdiction, and theconcerned investigating officers are notavailable, the suspect shall be interviewed byDetective Support Division. If the arrest ismade in an Area and the concernedinvestigating officers are not available, thesuspect shall be interviewed by the concernedwatch commander, or OIC. The concernedsupervisor may, before booking or release of afelony suspect, telephone Detective SupportDivision for advice.

Valley Forgery Bookings. When the arrest isfor an offense over which Valley Forgeryinvestigating officers have jurisdiction and theconcerned investigating officers are notavailable, the suspect shall be interviewed bya Van Nuys Area supervisor.

Advice for Felony Narcotic Bookings.Booking approval for adults arrested for felonynarcotic or dangerous drug violations shall beprovided by the Area watch commander or theWatch Commander, Metropolitan Jail Section,Jail Division. When booking advice is requiredfrom a court-qualified narcotics expert, theconcerned Area watch commander shall notifyNarcotics Division.

Field Enforcement Sections, NarcoticsDivision, are responsible for providingcourt-qualified narcotics experts to concernedOperations Bureau Patrol Divisions for 11550H&S (hype) schematic diagrams, whenrequested, between 0800 and 2000 hours,Monday through Friday.

Note: When concerned bureau, NarcoticsDivision, Field Enforcement Section personnelare not available, pre-booking processing shallbe performed by a court-qualified narcoticsexpert deployed in a geographic patroldivision. The following guidelines shall beadhered to when securing a court-qualified



narcotics expert in the absence of FieldEnforcement Section personnel.

∗ Area personnel who are court-qualifiednarcotics experts may be utilized in theabsence of Field Enforcement Sectionexperts.

∗ If no court-qualified narcotics expert isdeployed within an Area, the concernedwatch commander shall request acourt-qualified officer from an adjoiningArea within the concerned geographicOperations Bureau.

∗ In instances in which no court-qualifiednarcotics expert is available, the concernedwatch commander shall ensure that FieldEnforcement Section personnel, responsiblefor enforcement in that Operations Bureau,are notified of the arrest by 0900 hours ontheir next regular working day.

∗ When the magnitude of an investigationdictates the immediate attention of anarcotics investigator, the concerned watchcommander shall contact the AdministrativeUnit, Detective Support Division, to locatean available narcotics expert.

When the investigative supervisor is givingbooking advice for felony narcotics violations,he/she may complete a preliminary chemicaltest on the suspected narcotic or dangerousdrug, if any. When booking advice is for amisdemeanor narcotic or dangerous drugviolation, a preliminary chemical test shall becompleted. Instructions for the completion ofthe test are contained on the testing equipment.

Note: The watch commander in charge of anyDepartment jail facility shall have the finalresponsibility for all arrestees booked at thatjail. When he/she questions a booking approvalby another supervisor, he/she shall contact theapproving supervisor. When a difference ofopinion remains, the watch commander of thejail facility shall make the final determination.

Arrest Reports. Consistent with currentprocedure, the watch commander or asupervisor designated by the watch commandershall review all reports related to the arrest forappropriateness, legality, and conformancewith Department policy and procedure takinginto account the booking recommendation.Additionally, the watch commander orsupervisor shall examine the reports forauthenticity by ensuring that the reports do notcontain any “canned” language, inconsistentinformation, or fail to articulate the legal basisfor the action, or any indication that theinformation in the report(s) is not authentic orcorrect. Subsequent to review, the watchcommander or his/her designee shall indicateapproval by signing (including serial number)the report(s).

216.02 ADVICE/APPROVAL ONMISDEMEANOR BOOKINGS.

Booking Advice – Defined. Booking advice isthe recommendation given to the watchcommander regarding what charge(s) an

arrestee should be booked for based on thecircumstances of the arrest.

Booking Approval – Defined. Bookingapproval is the final authority given to anofficer to incarcerate an arrestee into a jailfacility on a given charge(s).

Booking Advice Procedure. Prior to bookingan arrestee on a misdemeanor charge at any jailfacility, booking advice may be obtained fromthe on-duty investigative entity responsible forthe follow up investigation.

When available, or in complex arrestsrequiring additional review, the investigativesupervisor giving booking advice shall reviewall related reports for required content andplace his/her initials and serial number at theconclusion of the narrative portion of eachreport. This change does not affect otherDepartment procedure associated with bookingapproval and booking advice.

Advice for a juvenile booking shall be obtainedfrom the on-duty Area Detective Division.When the detective division is closed, bookingadvice shall be obtained from the Area watchcommander assigned to patrol.

Telephonic Booking Advice. When it isimpractical to obtain a signature from the on-duty investigative supervisor responsible forproviding booking advice, the watchcommander giving booking approval mayobtain such advice telephonically.

In these cases, the approving watchcommander shall write the name of theadvising investigative supervisor followed bythe watch commander’s initials, and place acheck in the box titled “TELEPHONICADVICE” on the Booking Approval, Form12.31.

Booking Approval Procedure. Bookingapproval for any arrest, shall only be obtainedfrom the Area watch commander or the WatchCommander, Metropolitan Jail Section, JailDivision.

When providing approval, the watchcommander shall review each arrest forappropriateness, legality, and conformancewith Department policy and procedure. Whenbooking is approved, the watch commandershall complete the Booking Approval, Form12.31, and sign his/her name and serial numberin the “APPROVING WATCHCOMMANDER” section of the form.

Note: Officers shall not sign or otherwise writeany name for a supervisor in any Departmentreport or form requiring an approvingsupervisor’s signature.

Officers or detectives assigned to Areas (Vice,Area Detective Division, Special EnforcementUnit, Patrol, etc.) shall obtain bookingapproval from their respective Area watchcommander before booking any arrestee intoany jail facility.

Officers or detectives assigned to specializeddivisions shall obtain booking approval fromone of the 19 Area watch commanders or theWatch Commander, Metropolitan Jail Section,Jail Division, before booking any arrestee intoany jail facility.

The watch commander approving the bookingof an arrestee on a misdemeanor charge shallstrictly adhere to the provisions for mandatoryrelease of misdemeanor arrestees (ManualSection 4/216.65).

In addition, the watch commander shall alsoverify that:

∗ The appropriate booking charge is listedexactly as depicted in the Automated JusticeInformation System Booking Charge Table;

∗ The specific reason for continued custody isindicated on the form; and,

∗ A person arrested for two or fewer warrantsfor failure to appear on a citation for aparking offense or traffic infraction, hasbeen informed of the right to immediatecash bailout (Manual Section 4/682.15).

Note: Detention officers shall not accept anarrestee from a Department employee unlessthere is a completed Booking Approval, Form12.31, or a Short Arrest Report, Form 5.2.1, forthe arrestee. The name and serial number of theapproving watch commander shall be placedon the Los Angeles Consolidated BookingForm in the lower left portion of the Propertybox and in the narrative portion of the arrestreport when one is required.

The watch commander of any Department jailfacility shall have the final responsibility forall arrestees booked at that jail. When a JailDivision watch commander questions abooking approved by an Area watchcommander, the Jail Division watchcommander shall contact the approving Areawatch commander.

When a difference of opinion remains, thewatch commander in charge of the jail facilityshall make the final determination.

Arrest Reports. Consistent with currentprocedure, the watch commander or asupervisor designated by the watch commandershall review all reports related to the arrest forappropriateness, legality, and conformancewith Department policy and procedure takinginto account the booking recommendation.Additionally, the watch commander orsupervisor shall examine the reports forauthenticity by ensuring that the reports do notcontain any “canned” language, inconsistentinformation, or fail to articulate the legal basisfor the action, or any indication that theinformation in the report is not authentic orcorrect. Subsequent to review, the watchcommander or his/her designee shall indicateapproval by signing (including serial number)the reports.



216.03 RESTRAINING ORDERS.Restraining Orders (RO) and TemporaryRestraining Orders (TRO) include, but are notlimited to, Domestic Violence RestrainingOrders (DVRO), Emergency Protective Orders(EPO), Orders After Hearing (OAH), JuvenileOrders (JUV), Criminal Protective Orders(CPO), and Temporary Workplace HarassmentOrders (WHO). Some of these orders areissued by a criminal court (criminal order),while others are from civil court (civil order).A civil order is as enforceable as a criminalorder. If a victim possesses both a criminal andcivil order, the criminal order takesprecedence over the civil order.

Multiple Orders – Enforcement. If there ismore than one civil order involving the sameparties, the officer shall enforce the last orderissued. If there are both civil and criminalorders involving the same parties, the officershall enforce the most recently issued criminalorder.

Complainant in Possession of a RestrainingOrder. When officers are presented with aRestraining Order in the field or at the Areadesk, they shall:

∗ Verify that the order has been certified bythe issuing court;

Note: A certified copy of an order will bear anink stamp signed by the deputy clerk of thecourt documenting authenticity.

∗ Ensure that the order has not expired;∗ Review the proof of service to ensure it was

properly served upon the restrainedparty/respondent;

∗ Ensure that the Domestic ViolenceRestraining Order-Law EnforcementInformation Form (Information Form)supplied by the court is completed. If anInformation Form has not been completed,the officer shall give a form to the plaintifffor completion. The Information Form shallthen be attached to the order; and,

Note: When an order is received in the mailand the Information Form has not beencompleted, the Subpoena Control Officer shalltelephonically contact the plaintiff and obtainthe necessary information for completion of theform.

∗ Forward the Information Form and the proofof service to the Area Subpoena ControlOfficer.

Note: Officers' responsibilities at the scene ofa domestic disturbance remain unchanged.

When the Department Does Not Have aCopy of the Restraining Order. Whenofficers discover that this Department does notpossess an order that was presented in the field,they shall determine whether the complainanthas an extra copy of the order. If so, officersshall request one and deliver it to the Areadesk.

Note: Area desk personnel are responsible forensuring that a DR number is obtained and anentry is completed on the Restraining OrderControl Log, Form 15.40.

Should no additional copy be available, andphotocopying is impractical, officers shallpromptly notify the Area desk and provide thefollowing information:

∗ Name of complainant;∗ Address restrained from (if indicated);∗ Date of issuance;∗ Date of expiration; and,∗ Court case number.

Area desk personnel receiving the aboveinformation shall record the information in theRestraining Order Control Log.

When unable to obtain a copy of the order,officers shall request the complainant to delivera copy to the Area desk (or provide one to bephotocopied) as soon as possible.

Note: No enforcement action may be taken asa result of the information contained on theRestraining Order Control Log. TheRestraining Order Control Log is used to assistofficers in locating the order within theDepartment. If an officer cannot locate theorder and the complainant does not have acopy of the order, no enforcement action maybe initiated by officers pursuant to Penal CodeSection 273.6 (Willful and knowing violationsof orders to domestic violence), or Penal CodeSection 166 (Criminal Contempt). If thecomplainant insists upon making a citizen'sarrest, officers shall be guided by ManualSections 4/216.31, 4/216.32, 4/216.33, and4/216.34 of the Department Manual.

Proof of Service. An order shall be acceptedfrom the complainant whether or not the proofof service has been completed. Thecomplainant shall be advised that personalservice of the order is required beforeenforcement can be taken against therespondent. If a person named in an order hasnot been served personally with the order, buthas received actual notice of the existence andsubstance of the order through personalappearance in court to hear the terms of theorder from the court, no additional proof ofservice is required for enforcement of theorder.

When Proof of Service is not attached to anotherwise valid order presented to officers inthe field, the officers shall contact the Areadesk to determine whether other officers of thisDepartment accomplished the proof of service.If prior proof of service cannot be established,officers shall advise the restrainedparty/respondent that a valid order is in effectand state its conditions to the respondent. If thecomplainant has an extra copy of the order,officers shall give it to the respondent.

Officers shall complete the proof of servicewhen:

∗ The complainant is in possession of anincomplete proof of service; and,

∗ The officers advised the respondent of theconditions of the order.

If the respondent is present at the scene,officers shall document how the service of theorder was accomplished in the narrative of anycrime, arrest, or Domestic Violence IncidentReport completed, pursuant to Penal CodeSection 13730.

Complainant Not in Possession of an Order.Officers at the scene of a dispute where a validorder is alleged to exist, but the complainingperson does not possess a copy of the order,shall attempt to telephonically verify theexistence of the order through the Area deskand Automated DR Issuance System (ADRIS),and the Department of Justice DVRO Registry.The Registry can be checked through the ordersystem located in the Area’s California LawEnforcement Telecommunications System(CLETS).

Note: If an officer cannot locate the order, noenforcement action may be initiated by theofficers.

If the officer determines that an order has beenissued, but not served, the officer shallimmediately notify the respondent of the termsof the order. Verbal notice of the terms of theorder is sufficient notice.

The verbal notice shall be documented in therelated crime, arrest or Domestic ViolenceIncident Report. If no report is required, notethe verbal notice in the Daily Field ActivitiesReport (DFAR), Form 15.52. The officer shallalso include the name and assignment of theofficer notifying the respondent and the casenumber of the order. Additionally, the officershall advise the respondent to go to the court toobtain a copy of the complete order.

Failure to Comply. When, after notification ofthe conditions of the order, the respondent failsto comply, officers shall:

∗ Arrest the restrained party; and,∗ Book for 273.6 P.C. (Willful and knowing

violation of orders relating to domesticviolence), or 166 P.C. (Criminal Contempt).

If a violation of the order did not occur in thepresence of the officers and proof of servicecan be established, officers shall:

∗ Proceed with a private person's arrest for273.6 P.C. or 166 P.C.; or,

∗ Complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport, Form 3.1 entitled "Contempt ofCourt," if the suspect left the scene prior tothe officers arrival.

The narrative section of related crime andarrest reports shall contain the followinginformation:

∗ Court case number;∗ Expiration date;∗ Manner in which the proof of service was

accomplished and by whom; and,



∗ Verbatim listing of the conditions of theorder.

Note: The DR number obtained upon initialreceipt and filing of an order shall not beassigned to any related crime/arrest report. Anew DR number must be obtained pursuant toany enforcement action.

Notifications. Officers, as soon as practical,shall notify the Area desk (or Mail Unit,Records and Identification Division, whenapplicable) maintaining the order of whatenforcement action was taken, (i.e., fieldinterview, crime report, physical arrest).Department employees receiving thenotification shall attach a brief narrativesummary to the file copy of the order. Thesummary should also include:

∗ DR/Booking numbers;∗ Date and time of the incident;∗ Name, serial number and unit designation of

the responding officers; and,∗ Initials and serial number of the employee

recording the information.

When proof of service was effected in thefield, the officers should include the followinginformation in their notification:

∗ Name of the respondent;∗ Manner that proof of service was

accomplished;∗ Date and time served; and,∗ Name, serial number and unit designation of

the officer accomplishing service.

Desk officers receiving notification of an ordernot on file with this Department shall recordthe information on the Restraining OrderControl Log. The initials and serial number ofthe officer completing the log shall be includedunder "additional." Proof of service andenforcement actions taken pursuant to the ordershall also be recorded on the log until a filecopy of the order can be obtained.

Note: Officers at the scene of a labor disputeshall be guided by the provisions of ManualSection 1/460.30 and shall contact LaborLiaison Section before taking any enforcementaction on an order.

Recording the Issuance of a RestrainingOrder on a Report. If a report has beencompleted and the notification of the existenceof an order has been communicated to therespondent, the officer shall record how theservice of the order was accomplished in thenarrative of the report.

If no report is required, the officer shallprovide the name and assignment of the officernotifying the respondent and the case numberof the order on the DFAR.

Upon service of the order outside of the court,the officer shall advise the respondent to go tothe local court to obtain a copy of the ordercontaining the full terms and conditions of theorder.

Peace Officers Named as Respondents.When a Subpoena Control Officer receives aRestraining Order that identifies the respondentas a member of a law enforcement agency, thesubpoena control officer shall notify his or hercommanding officer. The commanding officershall ensure that a copy of the order is sent tothe Chief of Police of the involved agency. Ifthe respondent is a member of the Department,the commanding officer shall forward a copyof the order to the Commanding Officer,Internal Affairs Group.

216.04 RESTRAINING ORDERSISSUED BY JURISDICTION.

Within the State of California. If a partyalleges an order exists in an outside jurisdictionwithin California, officers shall contact thatlaw enforcement agency and verify theinformation before taking enforcement action.Statewide agencies Foreign jurisdictionsmaking inquiries to this Department regardingRestraining Orders shall be directed to theconcerned Area desk.

Out-of-State Restraining Orders. When anout-of-state Restraining Order is presented tothe officer, the officer shall review it forcompleteness. If the out-of-state RestrainingOrder is complete, then it is considered valid inthe State of California. If it is deficient, anEPO should be sought and the EPO guidelinesshould be followed.

216.05 ADVICE ON MISDEMEANORWARRANT BOOKINGS. Watchcommanders approving the booking of anarrestee on a computer-generated misdemeanorwarrant shall place their name and serialnumber on each warrant information teletypeafter ascertaining that the information on thearrestee and the descriptors on the warrantmatch.

When the identity of the arrestee is notobvious, the advising supervisor shall cause anArrest Report, Form 5.2, to be completed,which documents the evidence identifying thearrestee as the warrant suspect.

Note: When it is determined that a suspect incustody is not the person on the warrantabstract, the watch commander shall cause thewarrant to be reactivated by the concerned jailunit (Manual Section 4/611). A warrant shallnot be reactivated unless it has been positivelyascertained that an arrestee is not bookedpursuant to the authority of the warrant inquestion.

216.06 DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROLOF RESTRAINING ORDERS.Distribution of Restraining Orders. TheWarrant Teletype Unit (WTU), Records andIdentification Division (R&I), upon receivinga restraining order from the issuing court clerk,shall input the restraining order informationinto the Department of Justice DomesticViolence Restraining Order System (DVROS)when the restraining order is one of the specific

types for which such entry is required underFamily Code Section 6830.

Area Subpoena Control Officer'sResponsibility. Upon receipt of a restrainingorder, proof of service, and DVRO-LawEnforcement Information Form, AreaSubpoena Control Officers shall:

∗ Obtain a DR number and record thatnumber in the upper right corner of allpages of the order;

∗ Maintain a Restraining Order Control Log,Form 15.40, of valid orders on file;

∗ Establish a file of restraining orders in alocation accessible to uniformed deskpersonnel;

∗ Periodically purge expired restrainingorders from the active file; and,

∗ Forward the order, proof of service, and theLaw Enforcement Information Form toArea records personnel for entry ofrestraining order information into the DOJDVRO database.

Note: Restraining orders shall be retained bythe respective Area or the Restraining OrderSystem, Records and Identification Division,for two years beyond the date of expiration.

216.07 SEIZURE OF FIREARMS ATDOMESTIC VIOLENCE INCIDENTS.When an officer seizes a firearm at the scene ofa domestic violence incident involving a threatto human life or a physical assault, the officershall seize the firearm in accordance withManual Section 4/560.35 and Penal CodeSection 12028.5.

216.08 DOMESTIC VIOLENCERESTRAINING ORDER SYSTEM. TheDepartment of Justice, with the authority ofSection 6380 of the Family Code, mandatesthat law enforcement agencies enterinformation from the following restrainingorders into the Department of Justice DomesticViolence Restraining Order System (DVROS):

∗ Emergency Protective Orders;∗ Order to Show Cause and Temporary

Restraining Orders that pertain to domesticviolence;

∗ Restraining Orders After Hearings thatpertain to domestic violence;

∗ Restraining Orders that are issued by thejuvenile court that pertain to domesticviolence;

∗ Order to Show Cause and TemporaryRestraining Orders that prohibit harassment;

∗ Order After Hearing on Petition forInjunction Prohibiting Harassment;

∗ Protective Orders in Criminal Proceedings;∗ Out-of-State Domestic Violence Protective

Orders which have been registered inCalifornia with the Superior Court; and,

∗ Workplace Harassment Orders.

The Warrant Teletype Unit (WTU), Recordsand Identification Division, upon receiving arestraining order from the issuing court clerk,shall input the restraining order informationinto the Department of Justice Domestic



Violence Restraining Order System when therestraining order is one of the specific types forwhich such entry is required under FamilyCode Section 6830.

Area records personnel who receive arestraining order which requires entry into theDVROS, shall continue to input the restrainingorder information into the DVROS.

216.12 RECORDING OF BOOKINGAPPROVAL.Felonies. The name and serial number of thewatch commander giving a felony bookingapproval shall be placed in the narrativeportion of the arrest report.

All arrest reports shall be approved and signedby a Department supervisor and checked forprobable cause, propriety, essentialinformation, clarity, and legibility.

When available, or in complex arrestsrequiring additional review, the investigativesupervisor giving booking advice shall reviewall related reports for required content andplace his/her initials and serial number at theconclusion of the narrative portion of eachreport.

Misdemeanors. The name and serial numberof the watch commander giving a misdemeanorbooking approval shall be placed in the lowerleft portion of the "Property" box on theBooking and Identification Record and in thenarrative portion of the arrest report, when oneis completed.

Note: Officers shall not sign or otherwise writeany name for a supervisor in any Departmentreport or form requiring an approvingsupervisor’s signature.

216.14 CRIME REPORTED ONARREST REPORT. The "Crime Report"Section of the Arrest Report may be used inlieu of a Preliminary Investigation Report(PIR), Form 3.1, when:

∗ All suspects identified as the perpetratorsare in custody;

∗ All the property is recovered;∗ Only one crime is involved; AND,∗ The procedure is approved by the watch

commander or investigating supervisoradvising the booking.

Use of Form, DR Numbers and Number ofReports Required. Procedures relating to thePIR apply to the Combined Crime and ArrestReport.

Completion. An officer using a CombinedCrime and Arrest Report shall:

∗ Mark the "Crime Report" checkbox at thetop of the Arrest Report, enter the name ofthe victim in the space immediately underthis checkbox, and complete the "CombinedCrime Report" Section;

Note: If multiple arrestees, follow the abovedirection on one face sheet only. If applicable,

use the face sheet of the arrestee most likely tobe filed on.

∗ Obtain a DR number and enter it in bothspaces provided at the top of the report.

∗ Enter complete victim information under"Involved Persons";

∗ Use the standard arrest narrative sequence;(i.e., Co-arrestees, Source of Activity,Observations, Arrest, Booking, and SpecificHeadings). Include a listing and dispositionof all property taken, unless this informationis contained on an Evidence Continuationpage; and,

∗ Include the incident number, if generatedprior to arrest, in the "Source of Activity"section of the report.

216.15 EVIDENCE REPORTCOMBINED WITH ARREST REPORT.Evidence booked in conjunction with an arrestmay be reported as follows:

∗ If only one arrestee, no firearm booked, andno more than three items of evidence, theface sheet of the Arrest Report is theevidence report. In this instance, thereporting officer shall:

∗ Check the "Evidence" checkbox at top ofthe report;

∗ Complete the "Combined EvidenceReport" Section on the report;

∗ Enter details relating to the evidence inthe narrative; and,

∗ Forward a copy of the arrest face sheetwith the evidence.

∗ If more than one arrestee, a firearm isbooked, or more than three items ofevidence, the Property Report stapled to thearrest face sheet is the evidence report. Inthis instance, the reporting officer shall:

∗ Check the "Combined Evidence"checkbox at the top of the arrest facesheet;

Note: On multiple arrests, this checkbox ischecked on all face sheets, and the name ofthe arrestee to whom the evidence isbooked is entered immediately below thatcheckbox on all face sheets.

∗ Complete the shaded areas of theProperty Report, including details andlisting of the evidence;

∗ Number the Property Report as the lastpage of the Arrest Report; and,

Exception: On juvenile arrests, theJuvenile Arrest Supplemental Report, Form5.2.6, followed by the Juvenile AutomatedIndex printout are the last two numberedpages of the Arrest Report (Manual Section4/218.60).

∗ Forward a copy of the Property Report,stapled to the arrest face sheet, with theevidence.

Exceptions: A Property Report shall not becombined with an Arrest Report when:

∗ The evidence is related to previouslybooked evidence. In this instance, theevidence shall be booked to the same person(or firm) as on the original Property Reportand under the original DR number. Theitem numbering shall start with the nextsequential number from the original report;

∗ Reporting additional license plates. Oneplate, or set of plates, may be reported usingthe combined procedure. Additional platesrequire separate Property Reports withseparate DR numbers (Manual Section5/040.56); and,

∗ The booking employee's supervisordetermines that use of a separate completeProperty Report would be a more expedientmeans of booking the evidence under thegiven circumstances.

DR Number. A DR number is required for anArrest Report on which booked evidence islisted.

Completion-Private Person's Arrest. Whenevidence is booked under the combinedprocedure, and the arrest is by a private person,the name, serial number, division and detail ofthe officer booking the evidence shall beentered in the space provided on the arrest facesheet; i.e., the second line of "ReportingOfficer(s)."

216.17 CLEARANCE OF CRIMEREPORTS. Misdemeanor crimes reported oncombined crime and arrest reports (ManualSection 4/216.14) are cleared automatically byInformation Technology Division. AFollow-Up Investigation, Form 3.14, isrequired to clear other misdemeanor crime andfelony crime reports.

216.20 ARREST OF ARMED FORCESPERSONNEL. An officer arresting a memberof the Armed Forces shall include in the ArrestReport, Form 5.2, the arrestee's:

∗ Rank and serial number;∗ Branch of service;∗ Organizational unit and its location;∗ Dress (uniform or civilian clothes);∗ Duty status (on pass, on orders, AWOL,

deserter); and,∗ The word "MILITARY" shall be printed in

the upper left margin.

216.22 CRIMES AGAINST POLICEOFFICER CASES INVOLVING LOSANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENTOFFICERS. When an on-duty Los Angelespolice officer or firefighter is the victim of anassault, misdemeanor battery, or interferingand booking is recommended, the arrestingofficer shall process the arrestee and the relatedcrime and arrest reports in the same mannerthat all other misdemeanor crimes areprocessed.



216.23 ARRESTS FOR INTERFERING,RESISTING ARREST, OR ASSAULT ONAN OFFICER.Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Whena person is charged with, or additional filing isrequested for, the California Penal Code (PC)sections listed below, the watch commandershall conduct a pre-booking evaluation todetermine whether issues or concernsregarding training, policy, or tactics need to beaddressed.

∗ 69PC Obstructing or resisting peace officersby threats or violence;

∗ 148(a)(1)PC Resisting, delaying, orobstructing a peace officer;

∗ 148(b)PC Removing or taking a weapon,other than a firearm, from a peace officer;

∗ 148(c)PC Removing or taking a firearmfrom a peace officer;

∗ 148(d)PC Attempting to remove or take afirearm from a peace officer;

∗ 241(b)PC Assault against a peace officer;∗ 243(b) & (c)PC Battery against a peace

officer or custodial officer, respectively;∗ 244.5(c)PC Assault on a peace officer with

a stungun or taser;∗ 245(c)PC Assault with a deadly weapon,

other than a firearm, on a peace officer; and,∗ 245(d)PC Assault with a firearm, machine

gun, or assault weapon on a peace officer.

Additionally, the watch commander shall:

∗ Document that an evaluation was completedon the Watch Commander’s Daily Report,Form 15.80;

∗ Take appropriate action when the results ofthe evaluation raise issues or concernsregarding training, policy, or tactics; and,

∗ Reference all forms used for documentingthe results of the pre-booking evaluation onthe Watch Commander’s Daily Report.

Note: The use of the Watch Commander’sDaily Report to document personnel issuesassociated with evaluations compromises theconfidentiality of employee files. Therefore,the watch commander shall document positiveand negative duty performance, training needs,and any counseling associated with theevaluation on an Employee Comment Sheet,Form 1.77.

When the result of the evaluation isdocumented on a separate report, it is notnecessary to duplicate the evaluation onanother report.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Thecommanding officer shall ensure watchcommanders:

∗ Complete a pre-booking evaluation wherethe primary charge or requested additionalcharge(s) against an arrestee is an offenselisted in this section; and,

∗ Complete the required documentation forthat evaluation.

216.25 MARIJUANA ARRESTPROCEDURES.Possession of Marijuana-Sole Offense.

∗ One Ounce or Less (Weight, NotVolume). An adult arrested for 11357(b)H&S (Possession of One Ounce or Less ofMarijuana) or 11360(b) H&S (Transportingor Giving Away One Ounce or Less ofMarijuana) shall be released from custodyand not booked unless he/she:

∗ Cannot satisfactorily identify himself;OR,

∗ Demands to be booked; OR,∗ Refuses to sign the Nontraffic Notice to

Appear, Form 5.02.2.

Note: Other reasons for non-release ofmisdemeanor arrestees, as outlined inSection 853.6(j) PC, do not apply when thearrest is for 11357(b) or 11360(b) H&S.

∗ More Than One Ounce (Weight, NotVolume). An adult arrested for 11357 (c)H&S (Possession of More Than One Ounceof Marijuana) shall be booked and thenevaluated for release in accordance withSection 853.6 PC.

Possession of Marijuana-AdditionalOffenses. An adult arrested for an offense inaddition to 11357(b), 11357(c), or 11360(b)H&S shall be booked for the non-marijuanaoffense. (For example, an adult arrested forBattery who is also in possession of one ounceor less of marijuana shall be booked forBattery. The elements of all offensescommitted by the arrestee shall be included inthe Arrest Report).

Exception: When an adult is arrested for amisdemeanor warrant and 11357(b) or11360(b) H&S and can be satisfactorilyidentified, a Nontraffic Notice to Appear, Form5.02.2, and an RFC Report Continuation, Form5.02.8, shall be completed for the marijuanaoffense, and the arrestee shall be booked forthe warrant. The booking number for thewarrant booking shall be entered on the RFCReport.

Determining Charge. When the quantityand/or composition of the substance possessedby the arrestee raises doubt concerning theoffense to be charged, the arresting officershall transport the arrestee to the station, wherethe evidence shall be weighed and tested.

Note: Scales to weigh marijuana in the fieldare possessed by field supervisors and Areanarcotics investigators.

Arrest Report-Completion. The ArrestReport shall contain the following information:

∗ Prima facie case for all offenses committedby the arrestee;

∗ The quantity of marijuana possessed by thearrestee, as determined by the laboratoryscales at the station; and,

∗ The results of the preliminary drug test onthe marijuana, if applicable.

Misdemeanor Marijuana Arrests-BookingLocation. When an arrestee is to be booked for11357(b), 11357(c), or 11360(b) H&S, thelocation of booking shall be the same as forother misdemeanor arrestees.

Combined Marijuana/Traffic ArrestProcedures. When an adult has committed acitable traffic violation and is then found to bein possession of marijuana constituting amisdemeanor, the officer shall, if the trafficoffense is to be charged, proceed as follows:

∗ Possession, Transporting, or Giving AwayOne Ounce or Less, AND Eligible forRelease From Custody. When the offense isa violation of 11357(b) or 11360(b) H&S,the officer shall:

∗ Complete an RFC Continuation Report,charging the marijuana offense;

Exception: When the driver of the vehicleis in possession of marijuana whichconstitutes a misdemeanor, the officer mayopt to cite the driver under Vehicle CodeSection 23222(b). The officer shall thencomplete a Traffic Notice to Appear, Form4.50.0, (Citation), for 23222(b) VC and alladditional Vehicle Code violations. Theofficer shall include in the narrativeportion of the Traffic Notice to Appear, theprobable cause for the traffic stop, andwhere the marijuana was subsequentlylocated. The officer shall utilize aContinuation of Notice to Appear, Form4.50.5, when necessary to include allrequired information and violations.

Note: An RFC shall not be issued to thedriver for the Health and Safety Codeviolation if cited for 23222(b) VC.

∗ Include the details of the traffic violationin the narrative portion of the RFCReport;

∗ Request filing of the traffic violationunder the heading "AdditionalInformation";

∗ Cite the arrestee to the appropriate courtfor combined marijuana/traffic offenses;and,

∗ Complete a Citation CancellationRequest, Form 4.45, if a Traffic Noticeto Appear has been issued for the trafficviolation.

∗ Possession of More Than One Ounce ORIneligible for Release. When the trafficviolator is in violation of 11357(c) H&S, oris ineligible for release, the officer shall:

∗ Book the arrestee;

Note: An officer booking an arrestee in themetropolitan Areas, or at a County bookingfacility, shall inform the booking employeethat a traffic violation is also beingcharged. The booking employee shallensure that the arrestee is cited to appearin, or is transported to, the appropriatecourt.



∗ Include the details of the traffic violationin the narrative portion of the ArrestReport;

∗ Request filing of the traffic violationunder the heading "AdditionalInformation"; and,

∗ Complete a Citation CancellationRequest, Form 4.45, Traffic Notice toAppear has been issued for the trafficviolation.

216.27 PCP ARREST PROCEDURES.Arresting Officer's Responsibility. When anarrest is made for 11550(b) H&S (PCP), thearresting officer shall:

∗ Obtain medical treatment prior to bookingas outlined in Manual Section 4/648.10;

∗ Request a Drug Recognition Expert (DRE)or, if none available, a Narcotics Expert;

∗ If an on-duty DRE or Narcotics Expert isnot available within the concerned bureau,the arresting officer shall request theexamining physician to include an opinionregarding objective symptoms and possibledrug ingestion; and,

∗ When applicable, include the DrugInfluence Evaluation Form and theAdmonishment for Urine Test, Form 8.40.1,as pages of the Arrest Report.

Drug Recognition Expert (DRE)/NarcoticsExpert’s Responsibility. A DRE or NarcoticsExpert is responsible for evaluating andrendering an opinion of the drug influence of11550(b) H&S (PCP) arrestees. As part of theexamination, the expert shall:

∗ Admonish the arrestee as per theAdmonition For Urine Test, obtain a urinesample, and complete that form;

∗ Advise the arresting officer of anyadditional tests required;

∗ Complete the Drug Influence Evaluation,Form 8.40.2; and,

∗ Enter a brief description of the findings andthe examining officer's name and serialnumber in the Remarks Section of theBooking Approval, Form 12.31.

Note: If during a drug evaluation, the expertdetermines that he/she is not qualified to renderan opinion, the watch commander responsiblefor approving the booking shall determine ifanother expert should be called.

216.30 PRIVATE PERSON'S ARREST.Private persons desiring to make a lawful arrestfor a misdemeanor not committed in anofficer's presence shall be advised that theymay:

∗ Make a physical arrest; or,∗ Make a crime report and proceed through

the City Attorney's Office.

216.31 PRIVATE PERSON'S LEGALARREST-RESPONSIBILITY. If anindividual makes a private person’s arrest andrequests that an officer take a person intocustody, the officer shall do so if there isprobable cause to believe a criminal offense

has been committed or an arrest warrant hasbeen issued for the person being arrested.

Note: Officers are not precluded fromcompleting a Preliminary Investigation Report,Form 3.1, for filing of a criminal complaintinstead of arrest, if the arresting person agrees.

216.32 PRIVATE PERSON'S ARREST,ILLEGAL. When a private person's arrest isor appears to be illegal, the individualrequesting police action shall be advised of theprovisions of Section 847 PC. If the individualinsists on the arrest, he or she shall be referredto the Office of the City Attorney.Additionally, the officers shall:

∗ Not take custody of the person;∗ Complete a Field Interview Report, Form

15.43 on all of the involved parties;∗ Notify a supervisor of the circumstances of

the incident; and,∗ Complete an Employee's Report, Form 15.7,

documenting the circumstances of theincident.

216.33 RECEIVING ARRESTEDPERSON. All persons involved in a privateperson's arrest shall be advised that officers arenot making the arrest, but are merely receivingthe arrested person. After receiving an arrestedperson, officers shall verify the identify of theperson making the arrest and shall complete aForm 5.02.10 and ensure that the arrestingperson reads, understands and signs the form.Officers shall also determine the arrestee'seligibility for release from custody.

Note: Officers are no longer required to causethe arresting person to write the statement "Ihave arrested this person" or sign their fullname, address, and telephone at the bottom ofthe Arrest Report, Form 5.2.

Arrestee Eligible for Release From Custody.If it is determined that the arrestee is eligiblefor release from custody, the proceduresoutlined in Manual Section 4/216.65 shall befollowed.

Arrestee Ineligible for Release FromCustody. When it is determined that thearrestee is ineligible for release from custody,officers shall:

∗ Request the arresting person to accompanythe officers to the station;

∗ Assist the arresting person in completing theArrest Report, Form 5.2. The officers'names and serial numbers shall appear onlyin the narrative portion of the report as"Transporting Officers" or as "OfficersReceiving the Arrested Person;"

∗ Cause the arresting person to sign his/herfull name, address, and telephone numberon the Private Persons Arrest form;

∗ Obtain copies of any and all written reportscompleted by the arresting private person,or statements of guilt signed by the arrestee;

Note: If the arresting private person cannot orwill not provide written documents pertaining

to the arrest, a detailed statement explainingthe circumstances shall be included in thearrest or RFC report.

∗ Record the appropriate booking and DRnumbers on the upper right corner of thedocuments;

∗ Number the documents as separate pagesof the arrest or RFC reports in sequence,following the last page of the narrativeportion of the report.

Note: When using the Property Report,Form 10.1, in combined reporting, theProperty Report shall be the last page.

∗ Book the arrestee to the arresting privateperson; and,

∗ Complete other necessary reports.

Note: The arresting private person need notaccompany the officers to the station when:

∗ The arrest is for petty theft or misdemeanorforgery; and,

∗ The crime occurred at a regularlyestablished place of business; and,

∗ All the elements of the offense are presentand there appears to be probable cause forthe arrest; and,

∗ The telephonic approval of the officer'swatch commander has been obtained forthis action.

216.34 AID FOR ARRESTINGPRIVATE PERSON. Officers shall, upondemand, go to the aid of an arresting privateperson whose lawful arrest is being resisted(839 P.C.).

216.40 NON-RESIDENT WITNESSES INMISDEMEANOR CASES. When a witnessin a misdemeanor case resides outside of theCounty of Los Angeles, all facts to whichhe/she can testify shall be incorporated in theArrest Report, Form 5.2, or Nontraffic Noticeto Appear, Form 5.02.2, and an RFC ReportContinuation, Form 5.02.8.

216.50 STAKEOUT PROCEDURES.Officers on stakeout duty shall post themselvesat the most advantageous location.

Visual Signals. If they are in a position to doso, witnesses shall be requested to offer visualsignals to the stakeout officers. These signalsshall be so arranged, and of such a nature, thatthey will not result in any danger to witnesses.

216.52 WEARING OF BODY ARMORDURING TACTICAL OPERATIONS. Theofficer in charge of any police operation listedbelow shall ensure that all officers involved inthe actual field operation wear body armor:

∗ Any pre-planned tactical operation at alocation where officers have reason tobelieve an individual(s) may use a firearmto resist.

∗ Serving a felony arrest warrant on a suspectnot in custody.

Based on tactical considerations, the officer incharge shall specify which officers shall wear



concealable body armor and which officers, ifany, shall wear external bullet-proof vests.

216.54 WEARING OF BODY ARMORDURING WARRANT SERVICE. TheCoordinating Supervisor (Sergeant, a DetectiveII or higher) at a search warrant location shallensure that all personnel wear body armor.

216.60 ARRESTS OF POSTALEMPLOYEES. When a postal employeedriving a vehicle carrying mail is arrested fora felony, or a misdemeanor of whichintoxication is an element, officers, in additionto the regular arrest procedure, shall:

∗ Cause a telephonic report to be made,without delay, to the Supervisor of the PostOffice Garage, United States Postal Service;and,

∗ Make an Employee's Report, Form 15.7,containing the details of the arrest. A copyof this report shall be forwarded to theSuperintendent of Motor Vehicles, UnitedStates Postal Service.

Note: Arresting officers shall be responsiblefor the safety of the vehicle and its contentsuntil a Postal Service representative has arrivedat the scene and taken charge of the vehicleand its contents.

When a postal employee driving a vehiclecarrying mail is detained for a misdemeanoroffense not involving the element ofintoxication, officers, in lieu of making aphysical arrest, shall:

∗ Complete a misdemeanor traffic citation; or,∗ Complete the appropriate misdemeanor

crime report.

216.62 ENFORCEMENT OF THENOISE ORDINANCE. An officer mayinitiate enforcement action without acomplaining party when a violation of theNoise Ordinance (Chapter XI of the LosAngeles Municipal Code) is committed in hispresence.

When it has been determined that thedefendant does not possess a PoliceCommission permit to deviate from theprovisions of the Noise Ordinance, thedefendant shall be arrested and released after aNontraffic Notice to Appear, Form 5.02.2, andan RFC Report Continuation, Form 5.02.8,have been completed.

Exceptions: The only exceptions to the aboveenforcement method shall be the following:

∗ A physical arrest shall be made when one ormore of the exceptions listed in Section4/216.65 of the Department Manual ispresent.

∗ A Complaint Application, Form 5.15, shallbe utilized when a violator is a corporationor other business entity, and should includethe following:

∗ The corporation or business shall benamed as defendant on the ComplaintApplication, and the name and

identification of the observed violatorshall be included in the narrative of thereport;

∗ When the corporation or business holdsany Police Commission permit, thenotation "Copy to Police Commission"shall be placed on the left margin; and,

∗ The complaining party shall be referredto the Department of Building andSafety, and no enforcement action shallbe taken, when the violation comesunder a section of the Noise Ordinancerequiring measurement by an electronicmeter.

216.64 ENFORCEMENT OF THE LOUDPARTY ORDINANCE. Officers respondingto a call for a loud party or gathering shall firstdetermine through Communications Divisionif the response to the party or gathering is afirst or second response. In those instanceswhere a first or second response cannot beverified through Communications Division,officers shall request that their Area watchcommander check the Watch Commander'sLoud Party Log, Form 15.81, to ascertain if afirst response was made to a specific locationfor a loud party or gathering.

Officer’s Responsibility.

First Response. In those incidences involvinga first response to a loud party or gathering,officers shall:

∗ Verify the validity of the loud partycomplaint by personal observation or if theactivity causing the disturbances has ceased,through an evaluation of the totality of theevidence;

∗ Interview the person in charge and/orresponsible for the party or gathering. If theperson in charge is a juvenile (under 18years of age), the parent or guardian shallbe contacted and advised that they may beheld financially responsible for a secondresponse. If unable to locate the person incharge of the premises, or theparent/guardian when a juvenile is incharge, the party or gathering shall bestopped and the participants dispersed;

∗ Inform the person in charge of the specificactivity that they are in violation of Section41.58 LAMC (Loud Party Ordinance).Additionally, emphasize that the activitymust cease, and, if appropriate, issue acompleted Loud Party Warning Notice -First Response to the person in charge ofthe location;

∗ Notify the Area watch commander of thefirst response to a loud party or gathering sothat the incident, as well as the issuance ofthe Loud Party Warning Notice, can befully documented on the WatchCommander's Loud Party Log; and,

∗ Record in the disposition section of theDaily Field Activities Report (DFAR),Form 15.52, and in the comments section ofthe incident history, via the Mobile DataTerminal (MDT), the name of the personwarned and that a Loud Party Warning

Notice was issued (i.e., "Warned Smith,male, white, DOB 06-08-58, WarningNotice issued due to loud stereo").

Second Response. When an officer is assigneda second response to the same location, theofficer shall evaluate the situation anddetermine whether a disturbance exists. If adisturbance exists, the officer shall:

∗ Determine if a first response was made tothe location and if a Loud Party WarningNotice was properly issued;

∗ Contact the Area watch commander toascertain if an entry was made in the WatchCommander's Loud Party Log, if it isuncertain that a first response occurred;

∗ Request that a supervisor respond to thelocation;

∗ With the approval of the supervisor,complete a Loud Party Citation, Form 5.2.4,and issue it to the person responsible for theloud party or gathering;

Note: A Loud Party Citation may be issued toan individual other than the original personwho was served the Loud Party WarningNotice, if the original contact individual is notpresent, and it can be shown that the presentindividual to be cited was aware of theissuance of the Loud Party Warning Noticeduring the first response. Additionally, theperson to be cited must currently be in chargeof the party or gathering.

∗ Advise the cited person of his or her right toan administrative hearing within 72 hours ofthe citation being issued;

∗ Stop the disturbance and disperse theparticipants;

∗ Record in the disposition section of theDFAR and in the comments section of theincident history, via the MDT, the name ofthe person listed and the citation number;and,

∗ Submit the Loud Party Citation with theDFAR at the end of the watch fortransmittal to the Support and DesignSection, Planning and Research Division.

Note: A second response must occur within 24hours of the time that the Loud Party WarningNotice was issued in order for a violation ofSection 41.58 LAMC to be cited.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Uponresponding to a call for a loud party orgathering involving a possible violation ofSection 41.58 LAMC (Loud Party Ordinance),supervisors shall:

∗ Verify that enforcement action isappropriate and necessary;

∗ Ensure the accuracy of the completed LoudParty Citation and initial the lower rightcorner; and,

∗ Summarize the facts of the incident in theSergeant's Daily Report, Form 15.48.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. TheLoud Party Ordinance provides for an appealprocess within 72 hours of the issuance of the



citation. Upon request, the watch commanderof the Area of occurrence shall arbitrate theLoud Party Ordinance appeal hearing.

Generally, the hearing should be adjudicatedby the watch commander of the watch onwhich the citation was issued. When the citedperson requests a hearing, but is unable toappear during the specified hours, the watchcommander on duty during the hours the citedperson is able to appear shall arbitrate thehearing.

For those citations for which administrativeappeal hearings are not requested, the watchcommander of the watch on which the citationwas issued shall forward the Loud PartyCitation and related incident history printout tothe Loud Party Coordinator, Support andDesign Section, Planning and ResearchDivision within two calendar days followingthe expiration of the 72-hour appeal limit.

Loud Party Appeal Process. Citizens issueda citation for violating Section 41.58 LAMC(Loud Party Ordinance) may request anadministrative hearing with the Los AngelesPolice Department to appeal the issuance of aLoud Party Citation. Area watch commandersare designated as the arbitrators of the hearingsand, when approached by a person wishing tocontest the issuance of a Loud Party Citation,shall:

∗ Confirm that the appeal request falls withinthe 72 hours of the issuance of the citationand, if appropriate, set a date for thehearing. (The 72-hour limit may beextended up to 72 additional hours bymutual consent between the appellant andthe watch commander.)

At the hearing the watch commander shall:

∗ Interview the cited person and review theLoud Party Citation, the Sergeant's DailyLog, and the incident history; and,

∗ If necessary, interview the involvedsupervisor and officers.

At the conclusion of the hearing, the watchcommander shall inform the person of his orher decision. When it is determined that theLoud Party Citation will not be pursued, thewatch commander shall:

∗ Inform the citizen that he or she will not berequired to pay the fine; and,

∗ Document the findings in the WatchCommander's Daily Report, Form 15.80.

When it is determined that the Loud PartyCitation was properly issued, the watchcommander shall:

∗ Inform the citizen that he or she will beresponsible for paying the fine;

∗ Advise the citizen to proceed through thecivil courts if he or she wishes to contest thewatch commander's decision; and,

∗ Document the findings in the WatchCommander's Daily Report.

Following any hearing, the watch commander

shall forward a copy of the WatchCommander's Daily Report, the incidenthistory printout, and the original of the LoudParty Citation within 48 hours to the LoudParty Coordinator, Support and DesignSection, Planning and Research Division.

Support and Design Section, Planning andResearch Division’s Responsibility. Supportand Design Section, Planning and ResearchDivision, is the designated Citywidecoordinator for the enforcement of the LoudParty Ordinance and will process all violationsthrough the City Clerk's Office for billing andcollection.

216.65 RELEASE FROM CUSTODY(RFC).Conditions For Release From Custody. Eachadult misdemeanor arrestee shall be releasedfrom custody unless one or more of thefollowing conditions exist:

∗ Arrestee is intoxicated to the point wherethe arrestee could be a danger to self orothers;

∗ Arrestee requires a medical examination ormedical care, or is otherwise unable to carefor own safety;

∗ Arrestee is in custody for a violation of oneor more of the circumstances listed inSections 40302 or 40303 of the VehicleCode;

∗ Arrestee has one or more outstanding arrestwarrants;

∗ Arrestee has one or more outstandingmisdemeanor arrest warrants not eligible forrelease under Section 827.1 of the PenalCode;

∗ Arrestee is unable to provide satisfactoryidentification;

∗ Immediate release of the arrestee wouldjeopardize the prosecution of the offense forwhich arrested or the prosecution for anyother offense;

∗ There is a reasonable likelihood that theoffense would continue or resume, or thatthe safety of persons or property would beimminently endangered by the release of thearrestee;

∗ Arrestee demands to be taken before amagistrate or refuses to sign the NontrafficNotice to Appear; or,

∗ There is reason to believe that the arresteewould not appear at the time/place specifiedin the notice.

When an adult misdemeanor arrestee is notreleased from custody pursuant to one of theabove listed conditions, officers shall articulatethe specific circumstances which justify thecontinued custody in the narrative of the ArrestReport, Form 5.2.

Note: Traffic-related misdemeanors, exceptthose listed in Section 40302 of the CaliforniaVehicle Code, shall be cited using a TrafficNotice to Appear, Form 4.50.0, and theContinuation of Notice to Appear, Form4.50.5, in lieu of the Arrest Report.

Procedures For Release.

∗ Infractions. An adult arrested for anyinfraction shall only be required to furnishsatisfactory evidence of identity and sign awritten promise to appear. The arrestee isnot subject to other RFC procedures. Thearresting officer shall subsequentlycomplete a Release From Custody ReportContinuation, Form 5.2.8, in accordancewith existing procedures.

∗ Misdemeanor. Prior to releasing amisdemeanor arrestee, unless otherwiserestricted by law (Sections 11357(b) and11360(b) of the Health and Safety Code), anarresting officer shall:

∗ Query CWS for outstanding warrants;∗ Obtain a State and a County Arrest

History Record (Rap Sheet) via theArea/division Network CommunicationsSystem (NECS) to determine whetherthe arrestee has a previous offense whichrenders the arrestee ineligible for RFC;

∗ Attach a copy of each of the arrestrecords to the original report;

Note: When an arrestee's "Rap Sheet"cannot be obtained within a reasonableperiod of time (not to exceed 15 minutesafter initial inquiry), the names used for theinquiry and an explanation of why therecords could not be obtained shall beincluded in the narrative portion of theArrest Report or RFC.

∗ Obtain the watch commander's approvalto release the arrestee;

∗ Obtain a booking number and ArrestReport via the Decentralized AutomatedBooking Information System (DABIS)and utilize the NECS terminal "Release"function to reflect the arrestee's status(Released) in the County Jail automatedsystem;

∗ If the NECS terminal release function isunavailable, the arresting officer shallnotify the watch commander;

Note: The watch commander shall monitorthe status of arrestees as shown by NECSto ensure that their status is accuratelyreflected.

∗ Photograph the arrestee;∗ Obtain two full sets of fingerprints using

the Fingerprint Card, Form FD249;∗ Prepare a Nontraffic Notice to Appear,

Form 5.2.2, (RFC);∗ Record the related arrest and evidence (if

applicable) Division of Records (DR)numbers, or the booking number whenthere are no DR numbers;

∗ Obtain the arrestee's signature on theNontraffic Notice to Appear;

∗ Provide the arrestee with the defendant’scopy of the Nontraffic Notice to Appear;

∗ Release the arrestee; and,∗ Complete the Arrest Report.

Exception: An adult may be released fromcustody after furnishing satisfactory



identification and signing a written promiseto appear (RFC), when arrested for amisdemeanor violation of:

∗ An offense normally investigated byCommission Investigation Division; or,

∗ An ABC violation as specified in Section24209 of the Business and ProfessionsCode when committed by licensees ortheir agents.

The arresting officer shall subsequentlycomplete a Release from Custody ReportContinuation, Form 5.2.8, in accordancewith existing procedures.

RFC Offense in Conjunction With ABooking Offense. An RFC report shall not becompleted when an arrestee is in custody fortwo or more offenses, one of which requirescontinued custody. In such cases, an ArrestReport shall be completed and the elements ofthe RFC offense included in the narrativeportion of the arrest report.

Exception: When a person arrested for aninfraction is eligible for release from custody(Manual Section 4/216.65), and is additionallycharged with a misdemeanor warrant, thearresting officer shall:

∗ Complete a Nontraffic Notice to Appear andArrest Report for the infraction;

∗ Include the warrant number, charge, andissuing court in the narrative of the ArrestReport;

∗ Write "Includes Misdemeanor Warrant for(e.g., 484 PC)" in the additional chargessection of the Arrest Report; and,

∗ Book the arrestee for the misdemeanorwarrant only.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Supervisorsapproving RFC reports for an adultmisdemeanor arrestee shall ensure thatfingerprints and photographs have been taken,a booking number has been obtained, an ArrestReport has been completed, and the conditionsfor a release from custody have been met.

Area Records Unit’s Responsibility. Arearecords units shall ensure that two completedFingerprint Cards, Form FD249, are attachedto the original Arrest Report and forwarded toRecords and Identification Division.

Operations-Central Bureau Area RecordsUnit’s Responsibility. Area records unitswithin Operations-Central Bureau shall beresponsible for duplicating and distributing allreports for arrestees who are released fromcustody.

Note: The Specialized Reports DistributionUnit (SRDU), Records and IdentificationDivision, is still responsible for duplicating anddistributing all misdemeanor and RFC relatedarrest and continuation reports when themisdemeanor arrestee is booked atMetropolitan Jail Section or Los AngelesCounty Jail. Hollywood Area records unit shallprocess Hollywood misdemeanor arrestreports.

Hollywood Area Records Unit’sResponsibility. The Hollywood Area RecordsUnit shall be responsible for duplicating anddistributing all reports for misdemeanorarrestees who are arrested within HollywoodArea and booked in the County Jail System.

City Attorney Complaint Details’Responsibility. Upon receiving a NontrafficNotice to Appear, Form 5.2.2, for selectedoffenses to be filed directly with the court bythe Department, the City Attorney ComplaintDetails shall:

∗ Separate the narrative and any relatedreports from the original Nontraffic Noticeto Appear;

∗ After a thorough review to ensurecompliance with established filing policy,file the case with the assigned court withinten court days by submitting only theoriginal copy of the Notice to Appear to thecourt clerk; and,

∗ Maintain a file of the offenses in which a"not guilty" plea was entered or a benchwarrant issued.

The narrative, any related reports, and a copyof the Nontraffic Notice to Appear, shall besubmitted to the City Attorney's Officewhenever a “not guilty” plea is entered.Whenever a bench warrant is issued, thenarrative, any related reports, and a copy of theNontraffic Notice to Appear shall bemaintained on file for a period of one year oruntil the defendant is apprehended, whicheveroccurs first.

Supervisory personnel of City AttorneyComplaint Details shall reject any case failingto meet the established filing policy.

Note: The City Attorney's Office is availableto review cases that require an expert opinion.

Booking Employee's Responsibility. Theemployee completing the booking processshall:

∗ Transmit the fingerprint card, Form FD249,and the personal data portion of the LosAngeles Booking and Identification Record,Form 5.1.1 to Records and IdentificationDivision via the Livescan Network;

∗ Document the completion of the booking bysigning and recording the date and thelocation booked on the Request to Appearfor Processing; and,

∗ Return the Request to Appear forProcessing to the arrestee and direct him toappear, with the form, in court at theappropriate time.

216.67 RELEASE FROM CUSTODY(RFC) OF MISDEMEANOR WARRANTARRESTEES. Adult misdemeanor warrantarrestees shall be cited and released on aNontraffic Notice to Appear, Form 5.2.2, inlieu of incarceration unless one or more of thefollowing conditions exist:

∗ The misdemeanor cited in the warrantinvolves violence, a firearm, resisting arrest,

or giving false information to a peaceofficer;

∗ The arrestee:

∗ Is a danger to himself/herself or othersdue to intoxication or being under theinfluence of drugs or narcotics;

∗ Requires medical examination ormedical care or is otherwise unable tocare for his or her own safety;

∗ Has other ineligible charges pendingagainst himself/herself;

∗ Demands to be taken before a magistrateor refuses to sign the Nontraffic Noticeto Appear; and/or,

∗ Cannot provide satisfactory evidence ofpersonal identification.

∗ The misdemeanor cited in the warrantinvolves a violation of one or more of thecircumstances listed in Sections 40302 or40303 of the California Vehicle Code;

∗ There is reasonable likelihood that theoffense or offenses would continue orresume, or that the safety of persons orproperty would be immediately endangeredby the release of the arrestee;

∗ The warrant of arrest indicates that thearrestee is not eligible to be released on acitation; and/or,

∗ Immediate release of the arrestee wouldjeopardize the prosecution of the offense forwhich arrested or the prosecution for anyother offense. There is reason to believe thatthe arrestee would not appear at the time orplace specified in the Nontraffic Notice toAppear.

Eligibility for release of misdemeanor warrantarrestees shall be determined by the watchcommander or investigative supervisor givingbooking advice. Release From Custodyprocedures for misdemeanor warrant arresteesare the same as those for eligible non-warrantmisdemeanor arrestees (Manual Section4/216.65).

Note: Release From Custody procedures formisdemeanor warrants do not apply to warrantsissued for failure to appear. Arrestees detainedfor misdemeanor or infraction warrantsinvolving failure to appear shall be booked andare required to post the appropriate bail prior torelease.

Arrestees with Open Charges andMisdemeanor Warrants. All charges againstan arrestee must be eligible for citation andrelease (own recognizance or Release FromCustody) before the arrestee can be issued aNontraffic Notice to Appear for an eligiblemisdemeanor warrant. When an arrestee has anopen charge and an eligible misdemeanorwarrant and is eligible for release on both theopen charge and the warrant, a separateNontraffic Notice to Appear shall be issued foreach offense. An arrestee shall not be issueda Nontraffic Notice to Appear for an eligiblemisdemeanor warrant if the open charge isnot eligible for release or if the arrestee hasother non-eligible warrants.



Exception: If the arrestee posts bail or thenon-eligible charges or warrants are otherwisecleared, a Nontraffic Notice to Appear may beissued for the eligible misdemeanor warrant.

Note: These procedures do not apply toprocessing juvenile misdemeanor warrantarrests.

216.75 DETERMINING PAROLESTATUS-ARRESTING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY. When an officer hasreason to believe (through CWS or otherwise)that an arrestee may be on parole, he/she shall:

∗ Verify the parole status through a recordcheck. The Parole Information Form, LAPDTemp 207, is retained in the CriminalInformation Unit, Records andIdentification Division; and,

∗ If the arrestee is on parole, determine ifthere is a "Parole Want" by contacting hisparole officer or, if unavailable, theCalifornia Department of Corrections.

California Youth Authority Parolees. TheCalifornia Youth Authority may be contactedby:

∗ Teletype, via CLETS (address StocktonCLETS terminal, YAS).

∗ Automatic Telephone Switching System(ATSS).

All Other Parolees.

∗ During normal business hours, theofficer using Automatic TelephoneSwitching System (ATSS) shall contact:

∗ California Department ofCorrections.

∗ California Rehabilitation Center.

∗ During other than normal business hours,the Bureau of Identification, WantedPersons Section, may be contacted by:

∗ Teletype, via CLETS.∗ Automatic Telephone Switching

System (ATSS).

∗ Notify the officer responsible for bookingapproval of the arrestee's parole status.

217. SEARCHES OF SUSPECTS ANDARRESTEES.

Cursory Searches. When an immediatecursory search for weapons is necessary, itmay be conducted by an officer of either sex.

Searches of Arrestees.

∗ When the rules of search and seizure permit,an arrestee shall be thoroughly searched assoon as practicable. Such searches shall beconducted by an employee of the arrestee'ssex. However, an immediate search may beconducted in the field by an officer of eithersex when necessitated by specificcircumstances, such as a reasonable beliefthat:

∗ The arrestee is armed with a weapon.

∗ A delay could result in the destruction orloss of evidence.

∗ Personal property shall not be taken fromarrestees in the field.

Exceptions: Evidence, items which could beused as weapons, and items which couldcontain weapons shall be taken from thearrestee. If the arrestee is in possession of anycontraband items (as defined in this section),the arrestee shall be advised that, upon entryinto the booking facility, those items will bediscarded. Officers shall advise the arrestee ofhis/her ability to either leave the property witha family member or friend, donate the item(s)to anyone of their choice at scene, or throw theitem(s) away.

Note: Officers are reminded that propertyhaving evidentiary value shall be booked inaccordance with existing Department policy.Additionally, any property which couldconstitute an environmental hazard (i.e.,hazardous liquids) shall be retained by theofficer for proper disposal in accordance withManual Section 3/712.13.

Contraband Items – Defined.

Items that pose a risk to the safety and securityof the City Jail System are consideredcontraband. Although certain items may belegally possessed by arrestees at the time ofarrest, due to safety and security concerns,these items are prohibited from the City JailSystem. The following contraband items shallnot be placed into the arrestee’s personalproperty bag or excess personal property:

∗ Edibles, including unopened candy;∗ Perishables;∗ Liquids in glass or plastic containers which

do not seal tightly; and,∗ Unlabeled medications.

Note: The Commanding Officer, Jail Division,has final authority to determine what items areclassified as contraband.

217.20 NON-PROHIBITED DRUGSRECOVERED FROM ARRESTEES. Anofficer who recovers non-prohibited drugsfrom an arrestee's possession shall:

∗ Deliver the drugs to the booking clerkseparate from the arrestee's property; and,

∗ Inform the booking clerk that the drugs havebeen verified as non-prohibited.

Note: When an arrestee is booked at LosAngeles County Jail, non-prohibited drugsshall be placed in an envelope and returned tothe arrestee's personal property. The envelopeshall be signed by the officer and shall includea description of the contents.

217.30 USE OF HANDCUFFS. Theprimary purpose in handcuffing an arrestee isto maintain control of the arrestee and tominimize the possibility of escalating thesituation to a point that would necessitate moredrastic means of restraint.

Felony arrestees shall normally be handcuffed;however, there may be circumstances whichwould make the handcuffing of an arresteeinappropriate. Such circumstances can best beperceived by the involved officer. Therefore,any decision to not handcuff an arrestee mustbe based on available facts. Factors involved inmaking this decision include, but are notlimited to:

∗ The possibility of the arrestee escaping.∗ The possibility of the incident escalating.∗ Potential threat to officers and other

persons.∗ Knowledge of the arrestee's previous

encounters with law enforcement.

An officer shall constantly monitor the actionsof an unhandcuffed arrestee. If the officerbelieves it is necessary, he/she may, at anytime, handcuff the arrestee.

217.32 HANDCUFFING OFMISDEMEANOR PRISONERS.Handcuffing of misdemeanor prisoners isdiscretionary.

Exception: (Manual Section 4/217.34)

217.34 HANDCUFFING OFBELLIGERENT ARRESTEES. If anarrestee gives any indication that he/she mightbecome belligerent, the arrestee's hands shallbe handcuffed behind him/her.

217.36 HANDCUFFING PERSONSWITH A MENTAL ILLNESS. Officers shallhandcuff a person with mental illness takeninto custody when the person is not restrainedby means of a straitjacket or leather restrainingstraps.

Exception: When a person with a mentalillness whose age or physical condition is suchthat the personal safety of the person with amental illness and the officer clearly will notbe jeopardized, the use of handcuffs shall bewithin the discretion of the officer.

When handcuffing a person with a mentalillness, officers shall use only officialhandcuffs and ensure that the handcuffs aredouble locked. Temporary plastic restrainingstraps shall not be used to restrain a personwith a mental illness, nor shall they befurnished to private persons for use inrestraining a person with a mental illness.

217.50 TRANSPORTATION OFARRESTEES. All arrestees transported in anyDepartment vehicle, regardless of age orgender, shall be secured in the rear seat. Athree-point safety belt shall be used; however,a two-point safety belt (lap belt) shall be wornwhen a three-point safety belt is not provided.Two Officers. If two officers are transportingan arrestee in a non partition-equipped vehicle,one officer shall be seated directly behind thedriver of the vehicle.

In a partition-equipped vehicle, the passengerofficer shall ride in the front seat. Officers



must remain in close proximity and visuallymonitor arrestees.

One Officer. A single officer in a non-partitioned vehicle may transport a non-belligerent arrestee. The officer must remain inclose proximity to visually monitor thearrestee.

Should the arrestee become belligerent, thetransporting unit should stop the transport andrequest a unit with a partitioned vehicle tocontinue to transport the arrestee.

Exception: Females ages five through 17 yearsof age, when transported by male officers(Manual Section 4/217.56).

Time and Mileage. When there is notransporting officer of the arrestee's sex,officers transporting an arrestee shall, at thetime of departure, notify the radio operator ofthe following:

∗ Location of departure; and,∗ Odometer reading.

Upon arrival at the destination, the radiooperator shall be informed of the:

∗ Location of arrival; and,∗ Odometer reading.

The radio operator shall be notified when anydelay or detour is necessary during thetransportation.

217.51 TRANSPORTING PERSONS"DETAINED ONLY" TO PLACE OFORIGINAL DETENTION. When a detainedperson is to be released without being bookedor cited, the detaining officer shall normallyprovide for the return of the person to the placewhere he or she was originally detained.

Exception: Under compelling circumstances,and with approval of a supervisor, thedetaining officer may elect to deny furthertransportation to a person detained and releasedwithout being booked or cited. (Examples ofcircumstances where such denial could beappropriate include return of violent suspectsto the scene of prior hostile events, return tothe scene of suspects who previouslythreatened physical violence to personsremaining at the scene, etc.)

217.52 TRANSPORTING VIOLENTPERSONS-USE OF LEG RESTRAININGDEVICES. Officers shall request anambulance to transport a violent person only:

∗ If the person is extremely violent andrequires restraint to the extent that he mustbe transported in a recumbent position; or,

∗ If the violent person is injured or physicallyill and is in need of immediate medicalattention.

Officers shall make such requests forambulance service through the MentalEvaluation Unit, Detective Support Division.When a direct request to Mental EvaluationUnit is impractical, the request may be made

through the communications control operator.Officers shall comply with directions providedby the Mental Evaluation Unit. At least oneofficer shall accompany the violent person inthe ambulance as required by DepartmentManual Section 4/648.13.

Officers may transport other violent orpotentially violent persons in a police vehicle.

Officers may use the Department approved"Hobble Restraint Device" to secure a violentor potentially violent person transported in apolice vehicle when:

∗ The person's hands are handcuffed withofficial handcuffs which are double-lockedbehind the person's back; and,

∗ The person is secured into the police vehicleseat by vehicle three-point safety belts whenprovided. Two-point safety belts (lap belts)shall be worn when three-point safety beltsare not provided.

217.53 TRANSPORTINGPHENCYCLIDINE (PCP) ARRESTEES.All persons who exhibit objective symptoms ofbeing under the influence of phencyclidine(PCP) shall be given medical treatment prior tobooking as outlined in Manual Section4/648.16. Those arrestees not exhibitingsymptoms of being in need of immediatemedical treatment will be transported by policevehicle. When in doubt, officers will request arescue ambulance to transport the suspect.

Officers shall request a rescue ambulance totransport arrestees who exhibit objectivesymptoms of being under the influence of PCPand who appear to be in need of immediatemedical treatment. PCP arrestees areconsidered to be in need of emergency medicaltreatment when they display any of thefollowing objective symptoms:

∗ Unconsciousness.∗ Muscle rigidity.∗ High temperature.∗ Are combative, argumentative, or may

become violent.

Officers shall restrain the arrestee by utilizingtwo sets of handcuffs to secure the arrestee’shands behind his/her back. One manacle of onehandcuff shall be double-locked to onemanacle of another handcuff. The remainingmanacles shall be double-locked to thearrestee’s wrists. Once the arrestee has beenhandcuffed behind his back, officers shallsecure the arrestee with the hobble restraintdevice. The officers shall place the arrestee inthe left lateral position and not allow thearrestee to roll into a “face/chest” downwardposition (prone). Officers shall continuouslymonitor the arrestee while in their custody.Once the arrestee has been restrained, officersshall assist paramedics in securing, the arresteeto the transportation equipment and loading thegurney into the ambulance.

At least one officer shall ride with theparamedics in the ambulance and maintaincustody of the arrestee during transportation.

The officer’s partner or a backup officer shallfollow the ambulance to the hospital. When thearrestee is delivered to the appropriatereceiving emergency facility, the responsibilityof the LAFD terminates.

In those instances where LAPD and LAFDfield personnel are unable to determinewhether an arrestee should be transported byambulance or by police vehicle, supervisorsfrom both agencies shall be called to thelocation. The decision by the paramedicsupervisor shall be final.

217.56 TRANSPORTATION ANDCUSTODY OF JUVENILE FEMALES.Any female over the age of five years andunder the age of eighteen years taken intocustody shall be dealt with, as far as possible,in the presence of a female police officer orother adult female. Whenever practicable, thefemale juvenile shall be transported in the careand custody of a female police officer. If nofemale police officer is available, at least twomale police officers shall be present during theentire period of transportation, and time andmileage procedures (Manual Section 4/217.50)shall apply.

218. JUVENILES INVOLVED.218.10 RESPONSIBILITY OFHANDLING JUVENILE CALLS. Theofficers assigned a call involving a juvenileshall be responsible for the disposition of thecall unless they are specifically relieved by theconcerned investigating officer.

218.15 ADVICE OR ASSISTANCE-JUVENILES. Requests for advice orassistance concerning juveniles shall bedirected to the concerned geographicinvestigating officers. When the investigatingofficers are not available, the request foradvice or assistance shall be directed toDetective Support Division.

Note: Detective Support Division is notresponsible for the rebooking of juvenilesbooked as adults in Operations-Valley BureauAreas. Requests for assistance for this purposeshall be directed to the watch commander ofthe Area responsible for the original booking.

218.20 JUVENILE TRAFFIC COURTWARRANTS. When a subject is arrested fora juvenile traffic warrant, the arresting officershall:

∗ Obtain a copy of the warrant informationsheet;

∗ Obtain booking approval (Manual Section4/218.60);

Note: The booking charge shall be 602 WIC,followed by the authority as provided in thewarrant information sheet.

∗ Complete an Arrest Report face sheet, Form5.2, and Juvenile Arrest SupplementalReport, Form 5.2.6;

∗ Obtain detention approval (Manual Sections4/218.64 and 4/218.65); and,



∗ Attach one copy of the warrant abstract tothe arrest report and process the report inthe normal manner.

Note: When the Area Juvenile Coordinatordeems continued detention to be necessary, thearresting officer shall transport the juvenile tothe designated detention facility for releaseinto the custody of the Probation Department.A copy of the warrant abstract and a copy ofthe arrest report shall accompany the juvenileto the detention facility.

218.23 JUVENILE TRAFFIC COURTWARRANT, FOLLOW-UPINVESTIGATION. Additional follow-upreports and petition requests are not requiredon juvenile traffic court warrant arrests.Therefore, the investigating officer shall beresponsible for:

∗ Indicating "Case Closed" in the dispositionportion of the Arrest Report, Form 5.2;

∗ Retaining one copy of the completed reportfor the divisional files; and,

∗ Forwarding two copies of the completedreport to the Petition Control Detail,Juvenile Division.

218.30 IMMEDIATE FOLLOW-UPINVESTIGATION OF MISSINGJUVENILES. When circumstances indicatethe need for an immediate, large-scale,organized search for a missing juvenile, thewatch supervisor of the concerned Area shallbe notified. He/she shall notify the:

∗ Area commanding officer.∗ Watch supervisor, Department Command

Post, Communications Division; and,∗ Concerned Area Detective Division.

218.33 ACTION TAKEN ON A CALLREGARDING A MISSING OR FOUNDJUVENILE. The result of the action taken ona call involving a missing or found juvenileshall be telephoned, without delay, to theconcerned Area investigating officers. Whenthe concerned investigative officers areunavailable, the Department Command Post,Communications Division shall be contacted.

218.40 ENFORCEMENT/INVESTIGATIONS ON SCHOOLCAMPUSES. This section pertains to dealingswith juvenile students on school propertyduring school hours or during school-sanctioned events. It does not pertain tojuveniles using school facilities legally afterschool hours or juveniles trespassing orcommitting offenses on school property afterschool hours.

Note: Officers serving in security and relatedcapacities for a school district while in an off-duty assignment are subject to these policiesand procedures.

Interviewing/Interrogating Juveniles. Exceptin exigent circumstances or in arrest situationsas outlined in this policy, officers who wish todetain or question juveniles on school propertyshall contact the school principal or his/her

designee and, to the degree possible, explainthe nature of their business and the need tomeet with the juvenile(s) in question.

Note: Generally, juveniles should not bepublicly contacted by officers in the schoolsetting for purposes of questioning unless anarrest is anticipated or reasonably possibly.

Officers shall not enlist school officials oremployees to conduct interviews, inquires, orsimilar fact-finding activities regardingjuveniles as part of an investigation.

School officials (excluding school police) whoact at the direction of, or on behalf of theinterests of, the police becomes “agents” of thepolice. All police and government agents mustabide by constitutional tenets. If a policeofficer instructs a school official to perform atask (e.g., ask a question to the subjectjuvenile) the officer is responsible for ensuringthat the task is within the parameters of thelaw.

Exception: Police officers are not precludedfrom questioning school officials with regardto their knowledge of juveniles in their charge,the juvenile’s activities, and similar matters.

Arrest/Removal of Juveniles. When thecircumstances warrant an arrest/removal of ajuvenile from school property, officersconducting the arrest/removal shall:

∗ Notify the principal or his/her designeebefore making an arrest of juvenile duringclass hours on school property;

Exception: When exigent circumstances existor such notification would potentiallyjeopardize the ability of officers to safely andeffectively make the arrest, officers do notneed to notify the principal or his/her designeeprior to making the arrest, but shall make thenotification after the arrest.

∗ When possible, avoid arresting juveniles onschool grounds if the use of force is areasonable possibility;

Note: Officers should use handcuffs or otherrestraining devices when making arrest inschools whenever deemed necessary to ensurethe security of juvenile arrestees and the safetyof the officers and others.

∗ To the degree possible, minimizeembarrassment to the juvenile anddisruption of school activities and functionsby having the school principal or his/herdesignee make contact with the juvenile andescort the juvenile back to his/her office;and,

∗ Ensure that the juvenile’s parent(s),guardian(s), or responsible adult is notifiedof the juvenile’s removal.

Searching Juveniles and Property. Policesearches of juveniles and their property onschool premises are subject to the same legalrequirements as any other search.

218.50 CRIME AND ARREST

REPORTS-AGE OF VICTIM, ELEMENTOF OFFENSE. When age is an element of anoffense, the following information shall beincluded in the appropriate crime or arrestreport:

∗ Full name, residence address, and telephonenumber;

∗ Birthdate and place of birth;∗ Business address (or school) and telephone

number; and,∗ Name of both parents (if known) or

guardian, residence address, and telephonenumber.

218.51 CHILD ABUSE-REQUIREDREPORTING. Cases of juveniles as victimsof possible child abuse including sexualmolestation and physical or mental abuse shallbe reported by the officer first coming incontact with the suspected victim. Officerswithin the City of Los Angeles shall:

∗ Ensure that the circumstances surroundingany injuries sustained by the child areinvestigated and that appropriate crime,arrest and/or injury reports are completed.

∗ Immediately telephone and notify the LosAngeles County Department of Children'sServices (LACDCS) Hotline that asuspected child abuse investigation is beingconducted; obtain the address of theLACDCS Regional Office that will beconducting their field investigation of theincident; and provide the Hotline with thefollowing information:

∗ Reporting officer's name and serial number;∗ Victim's name;∗ Present location of the victim;∗ Nature and extent of injury; and,∗ What led the officer to believe that the

injury was a suspected child abuse.

Note: The LACDCS Hotline can be reachedthrough the City Hall operator by asking forZenith 2-1234.

∗ Include the address of the LACDCSRegional Office that will be conducting thefield investigation of the suspected childabuse incident for LACDCS in the narrativeof the crime or injury report.

Note: In those situations where officersencounter physically and/or sexually abusedchildren along with endangered children fromthe same family, one report shall be completedwith a separate DR number for each physicallyand/or sexually abused child and one DRnumber for all remaining endangered children.

Officers who observe a possible abused childoutside the City of Los Angeles shall:

∗ Contact the local law enforcement agencyand report the incident; and,

∗ Record the date and time the lawenforcement agency was contacted and thename of the person notified, in the Officer'sNotebook, Form 15.03.

Investigating officers assigned cases ofpossible child abuse shall, in addition to their



normal investigative follow-up:

∗ Complete a Child Abuse PreliminaryInvestigation Report, Department of Justice(DOJ) Form SS 8583, and mail the form tothe District Attorney's Office, Child AbuseUnit, the LACDCS, and the DOJ within 36hours of the reported incident;

∗ Complete and forward a supplemental FormSS 8583 to DOJ when the victim dies as aresult of the abuse or neglect;

∗ Make corrections or changes, if any, on asubsequent Form SS 8583 and forward toLACDCS and the DOJ; and,

∗ Issue a Los Angeles Police Department,Notice of Report to the Child Abuse CentralIndex, Form 8.31.0, to the suspect identifiedon the Child Abuse Investigation Report,Form SS-8583. If the notification is nothanded to the suspect, it shall be mailed tothe suspect. A copy of the form and themanner in which the suspect was notifiedshall be retained in the detective’s CaseEnvelope, Form 15.15.

Note: This applies to the addition or deletionof names, pertinent investigative details, ordisposition of the investigation ("Unfounded"or "Unsubstantiated").

Licensed Foster Home or Child CareFacility Involved. Officers conducting apreliminary investigation of child abuse at alicensed foster home or child care facility shallimmediately telephone the LACDCS Hotline(Zenith 2-1234) by dialing "0" for the CityHall operator or commercial operator andrequest the number. Officers shall provide theLACDCS with the following information:

∗ Reporting officer's name and serial number;∗ Victim's name;∗ Present location of the victim;∗ Nature and extent of injury;∗ What led the officer to believe that the

injury was a suspected child abuse; and,∗ Name and address of the foster home or

child care facility.

Detectives assigned a case of suspected childabuse shall complete a Department of Justice(DOJ) Child Abuse Preliminary InvestigationReport, DOJ Form 8583. Copies shall beforwarded within 36 hours to the followingagencies:

∗ LACDCS. In all cases.

LACDCS11911 South Vermont AvenueLos Angeles, California 90044

∗ Los Angeles County District Attorney'sOffice. In all cases.

Los Angeles CountyDistrict Attorney's OfficeChild Abuse Unit (772 Hall of Records)320 West Temple AvenueLos Angeles, California 90012

∗ State of California Department of SocialServices. In those cases where the childabuse is alleged to have occurred at a daycare facility, preschool, or at any Statelicensed foster care home.

State of CaliforniaDepartment of Social ServicesCommunity Care Licensing Division107 South Broadway, Room 6016Los Angeles, California 90012

Note: In cases involving State licensedchild-care, the detective shall immediately, oras soon as practically possible, telephone theState of California Department of SocialServices and provide them with the sameinformation listed in the preliminaryinvestigation.

∗ DOJ. In those cases where the investigationhas determined that the incident did occur.

Department of JusticeBureau of Criminal Statisticsand Special ServicesP.O. Box 13417Sacramento, California 95813Attn: Child Abuse Central Registry.

218.52 INJURY REPORT - SUSPECTEDCHILD ABUSE. Cases of juveniles as victimsof possible sexual molestation, or physical ormental abuse, shall be reported on an InjuryReport, Form 3.15, where the circumstances donot appear to warrant completion of a crimereport. Officers shall follow the proceduresoutlined in Manual Section 4/218.51 incompleting the report.

218.55 ARREST OF ADULTRESULTING IN UNATTENDEDJUVENILE. If the arrest of an adult maycause a juvenile to be left without proper careand supervision, the arresting officer shalltelephone the concerned Area DetectiveDivision for advice. If geographic investigatingofficers are not available, the advice ofDetective Support Division shall be requested.

218.57 INTERROGATION OFJUVENILE GIRLS REGARDING SEXMATTERS. The interrogation of a girl underthe age of eighteen years regarding sex mattersshall be conducted by a female police officerwhenever practicable.

218.60 APPROVAL FOR JUVENILEBOOKINGS. Prior to obtaining bookingapproval, the arresting officer shall:

∗ Attach a completed Juvenile ArrestSupplemental Report, Form 5.2.6, to theArrest Report, Form 5.2, as the next to thelast numbered page of the Arrest Report;

∗ If the juvenile is to be detained, include thereason for detention on the Form 5.2.6; and,

∗ Obtain a copy of the Juvenile AutomatedIndex printout as the last numbered page ofthe Arrest Report.

Booking approval for all juvenile bookingsshall only be obtained from the Area watch

commander or the Watch Commander,Metropolitan Jail Section, Jail Division.

Advice for a juvenile booking shall be obtainedfrom the concerned Area Detective Division.When that division is closed, the concernedArea watch commander shall be contacted.

Exception: When a juvenile is arrested for anout-of-state agency and this Department doesnot have a pending investigation pertaining tothe juvenile, booking advice shall be obtainedfrom the Fugitive Warrants Section, DetectiveSupport Division (Manual Section 4/606.03).

Note: Discretion shall be exercised regardingthe necessity for booking a juvenile. The basisfor determining the advisability of booking ajuvenile shall be the factual circumstancesknown to exist at the time of booking. Abooking may be advised when thecircumstances will substantiate the fact that ajuvenile is the perpetrator of a specific crime.

When booking advice is obtained on a juvenilefor a narcotics or dangerous drug violation, apreliminary chemical test may be completedfor felony arrests, and shall be completed formisdemeanor arrests (Manual Section4/216.01).

218.61 JUVENILES NAMED ONADULT TRAFFIC WARRANTS.Warrant Only. A juvenile who is named onan adult traffic warrant shall be booked on thewarrant, and the charge shall be "602 W.I.C.(Traffic Warrant)" Booking approval shall beobtained (Manual Section 4/218.60). An ArrestReport, Form 5.2, shall be completed.

Warrant and Other Charge. When a juvenilewho is named on an adult traffic warrant is alsocharged with a separate violation of theWelfare and Institutions Code (W.I.C.), he/sheshall be booked on that W.I.C. violation.Booking approval shall be obtained (ManualSection 4/218.60). All available informationconcerning the warrant shall be included in thenarrative portion of the arrest report; and thewarrant information sheet shall be forwarded tothe Warrant Section, Records andIdentification Division.

The arresting officer shall notify theCountywide Warrant System (CWS) operatorthat the subject named on the warrant is ajuvenile. The operator shall be requested toclear the warrant information sheet,error-delete the warrant from the CWS, andforward the warrant to the Traffic CourtLiaison Officer, Traffic Violations Bureau, LosAngeles Judicial District.

Exception: When the warrant was issued by acourt outside the City of Los Angeles, notifythe CWS operator that the subject named onthe warrant is a juvenile and that the juvenile isbeing booked on another charge. The CWSoperator shall cause the concerned agency tobe notified.

Foreign Warrants. When a juvenile is namedon an adult traffic warrant that was issued by a



court outside the City of Los Angeles, thewatch commander approving the booking shallensure that an attempt is made to contact thejurisdiction of issuance to verify the status ofthe warrant prior to the booking of the juvenile.

Juvenile booked as an adult. When it islearned prior to arraignment that a juvenile hasbeen booked as an adult on an adult trafficwarrant, the concerned watch commander shallensure compliance with the procedures listed inManual Section 4/705.62. The warrant orwarrant information sheet shall be forwarded tothe concerned Area Detective Division.

218.62 JUVENILE ESCAPEES-BOOKING CHARGES, ARRESTCLASSIFICATIONS, AND ARRESTDISPOSITIONS. When a juvenile has beenarrested for escape from a juvenile justicefacility, the booking charge, arrestclassification, and arrest disposition shall berecorded as follows:

∗ When this Department has a copy of theJuvenile Court or California AdultAuthority warrant and no other offense isbeing alleged:

Classification Booking RequiredEscape from of Arrest Charge Disposition NotificationProbation Dept. 602 WICfacility (includes (Juvenile CaseJuvenile Hall) Other Court Warrant) Closed _

Youth 602WIC MissingAuthority (CYA Case Ward Unit,facility Other Warrant) Closed CYA

∗ When a warrant has not been issued, and noother offense is being alleged:

Classification Booking RequiredEscape from of Arrest Charge Disposition NotificationProbation Dept. 602WIC(871 WICDetainedfacility (includes Escape-Probation PetitionJuvenile Hall) Misdemeanor Department facility) Requested _

Deuel 602WIC(2042P.C. Detained MissingVocational Escape-Vocational Petition Ward Unit,Institution Felony Institution) Requested CYA

California 602WIC(1768.7 Detained MissingYouth Training Petition Ward Unit,School Felony Escape-Y.T.S.) Requested CYA

Any other 602WIC(1768.7 Detained Missingtype of WIC Escape- Petition Ward Unit,CYA facilityMisdemeanor C.Y.A. Facility) Requested CYA

City or 602WIC(4532P.C. DetainedCounty Escape-City Petitionjail facility Felony [County] Jail) Requested _

Note: All juvenile escapees shall be detainedin Juvenile Hall.

When a juvenile arrestee is alleged to havecommitted a criminal offense in addition toescape, the booking shall be for the criminaloffense. Warrant or escape information shall beincluded in the narrative portion of the arrestreport under a Reason for Detention heading.

218.63 JUVENILES ARRESTED ANDUNDER THE INFLUENCE OFNARCOTICS OR DRUGS-MEDICALEXAMINATION. If a juvenile is arrested andis under the influence of narcotics or drugs, thearresting officer shall:

Juvenile Detained. Have the juvenileexamined by a contract or receiving hospital

physician prior to detention. The physicianshall be requested to include on the ReceivingHospital Medical Treatment Record, FormRH-340, his/her recommendation as to whetherthe juvenile should receive additional medicalattention at a Juvenile Hall clinic or the LosAngeles County-USC Medical Center.

Juvenile to be Released to Parents orGuardian. Administer a gas chromatographintoximeter test whenever practicable. Amedical examination by a receiving hospital isnot required.

Exception: If, for any reason, the arrestingofficer or the concerned investigating officerdetermines that it would be in the best interestsof the juvenile or the Department, the arrestingor investigating officer shall have the juvenileexamined, prior to his/her release, by a contractor receiving hospital physician.

218.64 CONDITIONS FOR JUVENILEDETENTION. An officer who takes ajuvenile into custody shall release the juvenileto the custody of his/her parent, guardian, or aresponsible relative unless one or more of thefollowing conditions exist:

∗ The juvenile is in need of proper andeffective parental care or control and has noparent, guardian, or responsible relativewilling to exercise or capable of exercisingsuch care or control; or has no parent,guardian, or responsible relative actuallyexercising such care or control;

∗ The juvenile is destitute or is not providedwith the necessities of life or is not providedwith a home or suitable place of abode;

∗ The juvenile is provided with a home whichis unfit by reason of neglect, cruelty,depravity or physical abuse by either ofhis/her parent, guardian or other person(s)in whose custody he/she resides;

∗ Continued detention of the juvenile is amatter of immediate and urgent necessityfor the protection of the juvenile orreasonable necessity for the protection ofthe person or property of another;

∗ The juvenile is likely to flee the jurisdictionof the court;

∗ The juvenile has violated an Order of thejuvenile court;

∗ The juvenile is physically dangerous to thepublic because of a mental or physicaldeficiency, disorder, or abnormality; or,

∗ The juvenile is 14 years of age or older andis taken into custody for a felony or anattempted felony, and it is determined thatthe juvenile personally used a firearm in thecommission of the crime. The juvenile shallnot be released to a parent, guardian or aresponsible relative or an adult designatedby the parent. The juvenile shall be bookedand transported to a Los Angeles CountyProbation Department juvenile detentionfacility pending a court hearing.

Note: A statement of facts to support one ormore of the reasons for detention shall beincluded in the Juvenile Arrest SupplementalReport, Form 5.2.6 (Manual Section 4/218.60).

218.65 JUVENILE DETENTIONAPPROVAL. Approval for the detention of ajuvenile shall be obtained from the concernedArea Juvenile Coordinator. When the AreaJuvenile Coordinator is unavailable, approvalfor detention shall be obtained from theconcerned Juvenile Coordinator's immediatesupervisor. When neither the Area JuvenileCoordinator nor the immediate supervisor isavailable, detention approval shall be obtainedfrom the concerned Area watch commander.

After the arresting officer has obtaineddetention approval, the juvenile and a copy ofthe arrest report shall be delivered to theProbation Department.

218.66 TEMPORARY DETENTION OFJUVENILES AT DEPARTMENTFACILITIES. Juveniles shall not be held intemporary detention in a Department facilityfor more than six hours, regardless of age ortype of offense. Regardless of the nature of theoffense or status of the investigation, juvenilesshall be released to a parent, guardian,responsible relative or adult designated by theparent, or transported to a Los Angeles CountyProbation Department juvenile detentionfacility prior to the expiration of the six-hourtemporary detention time limit.

Note: Juveniles described in Section 300 WICshall be processed (complete arrest report withbooking number) prior to transfer to thecustody of the Department of Children'sServices. They may not remain in a policefacility longer than six hours.

Secure Detention of Juveniles. Under securedetention, juveniles are locked in a room,holding tank, or enclosure and/or arephysically secured to handcuffing benches,rails, chairs, or any stationary object. Ajuvenile held in secure detention shall meet allof the following criteria:

∗ The juvenile must be 14 years of age orolder; and,

∗ The juvenile must be in custody underauthority of Section 602 WIC; and,

∗ The officer has reasonable belief that thejuvenile poses a serious security risk and/orrisk of harm to self or others; and,

∗ The detention must be for the purpose ofinvestigating the crime, facilitating releaseto a parent or guardian, or arranging atransfer to an approved juvenile detentionfacility.

Note: The officer may take the followingfactors into account in determining whether ajuvenile qualifies for secure detention:

∗ Age, maturity, and delinquent history;∗ Severity of the offense(s) for which the

juvenile was taken into custody;∗ The juvenile’s behavior, including the

degree to which he/she appears cooperativeor non-cooperative;

∗ The availability of officers to provideadequate supervision, or protection for thejuvenile; and,



∗ The age, type of person, and number ofother individuals who are detained at thefacility.

Secure Detention Procedures. Departmentemployees placing juveniles in securedetention shall adhere to the followingprocedures:

Note: For the purposes of this Section,"Department employee" is defined as anysworn employee or detention officer.

∗ The approval of the concerned watchcommander shall be obtained prior toplacing a juvenile in secure detention;

Note: For the purpose of this Section, "watchcommander" is defined as the Area watchcommander, unit officer in charge, or otherconcerned supervisor who has responsibilityfor the Department facility where thejuvenile(s) is to be temporarily detained.

∗ Department employees shall immediatelyrecord the detention and the arrest charge onthe Secure Juvenile Detention Log, Form9.05, and ensure that the approvingsupervisor signs the log;

∗ Juveniles held in secure detention shall beinformed of the purpose of the detention,the expected duration, and the maximumsix-hour detention time limit; the advisingemployee shall record his/her serial numbernext to each admonition on the SecureJuvenile Detention Log, Form 9.05;

∗ Juveniles held in secure detention outside ofa locked enclosure shall not be secured to astationary object for more than thirty (30)minutes unless no other locked enclosure isavailable during the six-hour detention timelimit. Securing juveniles to a stationaryobject for longer than 30 minutes and every30 minutes thereafter, shall be approved bythe watch commander and the reasons forcontinued secure detention shall bedocumented. Juveniles who are secured toa stationary object shall be moved to alocked enclosure at such time when onebecomes available;

∗ When juveniles are handcuffed to astationary object outside of a locked roomor enclosure, a Department employee shallbe present at all times to ensure thejuveniles' safety;

∗ Juveniles securely detained in a lockedroom or enclosure shall be randomlychecked by a Department employee notmore than 30 minutes following anyprevious observation, and shall be able to beheard by a Department employee at alltimes;

Note: Observation by television monitor is notsufficient. A Department employee shall makerandom, unscheduled, in-person observations.The time of the observation and the observingemployee's initials shall be recorded on theSecure Juvenile Detention Log, Form 9.05.

∗ If male and female juveniles are placed inthe same locked room, they shall be under

constant, in-person observation by aDepartment employee;

∗ Locked rooms and enclosures wherejuveniles are securely detained shall meetall applicable health, safety, and firerequirements.

∗ Locked rooms and enclosures shall haveadequate lighting and seats in the form ofchairs or benches.

∗ Locked rooms and enclosures shall havetemperature control and ventilationadequate to maintain a comfortableenvironment.

∗ The name and relationship of the person thejuvenile is released to shall be recorded.

Non-secure Detention of Juveniles. Undernon-secure detention, a juvenile's freedom ofmovement is controlled solely by Departmentemployees, and the juvenile is under constant,in-person observation and supervision. Non-secure detention prohibits the placement ofjuveniles in locked rooms or enclosures andprohibits physically securing juveniles tochairs, benches, handcuffing rails, or otherstationary objects.

Note: Juveniles under non-secure detention,regardless of age, may be handcuffed.However, they shall not be handcuffed tochairs, benches, handcuffing rails, or otherstationary objects.

The following juveniles shall be held in non-secure detention when temporary detention ata Department facility is necessary:

∗ All juveniles under the age of 14; and,∗ Juveniles who do not meet the criteria for

secure detention.

Non-secure Detention Procedures. Juvenilesmay be held in non-secure detention only longenough for officers to investigate the crime,facilitate release of the juvenile to a parent orguardian, or arrange for transfer of the juvenileto an appropriate juvenile facility. In any case,detention shall not exceed six hours.

Department employees shall immediatelyrecord the detention and the arrest charge onthe Non-secure Juvenile Detention Log, Form9.06, and ensure that the log is signed by thesupervisor approving detention. Juveniles shallbe under the constant observation andsupervision of a Department employee.

Note: Observation by television monitor is notsufficient; constant in-person observation isrequired.

Care of Juveniles Held in Secure or Non-Secure Detention. Juveniles held in secure ornon-secure detention shall have:

∗ Reasonable access to a telephone;∗ Permission to retain their personal clothing,

unless it presents a health hazard or isrequired as evidence;

∗ Reasonable access to restroom facilities;∗ Reasonable access to drinking water and/or

other beverages;

∗ Privacy during visits with members of theirimmediate family, guardians, and/orattorneys;

∗ Blankets and clothing necessary to ensurecomfort;

∗ A snack, upon request, during the term oftemporary custody, if the juvenile has noteaten within the past four (4) hours or isotherwise in need of nourishment; and,

∗ The name and relationship of the person thejuvenile is released to shall be recorded.

Note: Department-approved snack items andblankets for use by juvenile detainees shall berequisitioned from Police Supply Section,Fiscal Operations Division, and maintained ateach Area station and Department facilitywhere juveniles are detained. Snack items shallbe discarded upon the manufacturer's labeledexpiration date.

Discipline. Discipline of any kind, includingwithholding any of the above-specifiedamenities, is not permitted.

Contact and Communication with AdultArrestees or Other Juveniles. If theapplicable contact and communicationrestriction as detailed in this section cannot beeffected or maintained at the facility of initialdetention, the juvenile detainee(s) shall betransported to the nearest Department facilitywhere the appropriate restrictions shall beobserved during all phases of detentionincluding printing, photographing, booking,and the administration of any chemical test.

Note: The officer supervising the juvenileduring a non-secure detention shall check the“Juvenile Separated From Adult Population”box on the Non-secure Juvenile Detention Log,and document his/her name and serial numberon the form.

Sight and Sound Separation. There shall beno communication between juveniles held insecure detention and adult arrestees or inmates.Sight and sound contact with adult arrestees islimited to:

∗ Booking;∗ Awaiting visitors or medical treatment;∗ Work release program participants while

they are performing work necessary for theoperation of the Department facility; and,

∗ Movement of persons who are in custodywithin the facility.

Note: Contact is defined as communications,whether verbal, visual (gang signs), or throughcontinuous immediate physical presence.

When the potential for communication or sightand sound contact with adult arrestees exists,Department employees shall maintain constantside-by-side presence with juveniles held intemporary secure detention.

When a juvenile arrestee is in the same roomor area with an adult inmate, including inmateworkers, the sworn employees of theDepartment facility must maintain a side-by-side presence with either the inmate or the



juvenile to ensure that no communication orcontact occurs.

Note: Separate booking locations for juvenilearrestees are no longer necessary.

Juveniles in custody under Section 602 WICshall not be allowed to come into sight orsound contact with juveniles in custody underSections 300 or 601 WIC.

Suicide Risk and Prevention. A juvenile whoexhibits excessive agitation, despondency, orother distressed behavior shall be underconstant direct supervision by a Departmentemployee. If the juvenile appears to bepotentially suicidal, the Mental EvaluationUnit (MEU), Detective Support Division, shallbe immediately contacted for advice. Uponevaluation and approval by MEU personnel,juveniles shall be transported to a contracthospital for medical evaluation. Authorizationmust be received from a licensed physician ata contract hospital before juveniles can betransported to any County juvenile facility.

Use of Physical Restraints on Juveniles. Theuse of physical restraints on juveniles shall belimited to handcuffs and Departmentauthorized alternative restraints. Restraintsshall be employed only as necessary to preventinjuries to juveniles and custodial personnel.

Note: A juvenile who exhibits violent behaviornecessitating the use of alternative restraintsshall be under continuous in-personobservation for evidence of breathing difficultyor other symptoms of physical distress. Ajuvenile displaying any such symptoms shallbe immediately transported to a contracthospital for medical treatment, unlessparamedics are present or there is a medicalneed to keep the juvenile at the locationpending the arrival of paramedics.

Medical Treatment Prior to Detention.Juveniles who are ill or injured shall beexamined by a paramedic or a contract hospitalphysician, as appropriate, prior totransportation to any County juvenile facility.Juveniles who receive medical treatment (MT)and are not hospitalized shall then betransported to a County juvenile detentionfacility for detention or, if detained only forSection 300 WIC, to a Department ofChildren's Services facility. Officers shalladvise intake personnel of the MT and providea copy of the MT slip for their records.

When a physician determines that a juvenilemust be hospitalized, the juvenile shall bedetained in the medical facility recommendedby the physician. This location shall be notedon the MT slip.

Juveniles who do not require MT and meet thecriteria for detention at a Status OffenderDetention Alternative (SODA) home shall betransported by officers directly to the SODAhome. However, if juveniles receive MT, theyshall be transported to a County juveniledetention facility. The transporting officersshall provide the intake personnel with a copy

of the MT slip. If, at a later time, the juveniledetention facility determines that a juvenile issuitable for placement in a SODA home, theProbation Department shall be responsible fortransporting him or her to the SODA home.

Note: SODA homes are administered by theProbation Department for non-secureplacement of juveniles detained under theauthority of 628 WIC.

When the juvenile detention facility clinicrecommends hospitalization in the USCMedical Center, transporting officers shallobtain an admittance form from the juveniledetention facility. The officers shall transportthe juvenile to the USC Medical Center andprovide admittance desk personnel with a copyof the MT slip and admittance form. Thejuvenile's property and one copy of the ArrestReport, Form 5.2, shall be retained at thejuvenile detention facility.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Watchcommanders shall verify, at the beginning ofwatch and routinely thereafter, the timely andaccurate documentation of all temporaryjuvenile detentions, including those indetective spaces. A new Secure JuvenileDetention Log, Form 9.05, and Non-secureJuvenile Detention Log, Form 9.06, shall bestarted at 0001 each day. The watchcommander shall sign and document the dateand time the inspection and interview wasconducted. (The watch commander’s signatureindicates that the inspection and interview wascompleted pursuant to Section 4/216.0 of theDepartment Manual.)

The watch commander shall documentadditional information associated with theinspection and interview (e.g., “Completed,”“No Additional Information,” “See WatchCommander’s Daily Report,” etc.), or anyother information the watch commander deemsnecessary.

All logs, including those logs which documentno detentions, and shall be forwarded to theconcerned commanding officer by the lastwatch of the 24 hour day.

Area Detectives and Specialized Division’sResponsibility. Area detectives shalldocument all juvenile detentions on theappropriate juvenile detention log (SecureJuvenile Detention Log, Form 9.05, or Non-secure Juvenile Detention Log, Form 9.06)maintained by the Area watch commander.Detective personnel shall advise the Areawatch commander of all temporary juveniledetainees in their custody.

Note: Area detectives located in off-site orsatellite facilities shall use appropriate juveniledetention logs to document juvenile detentionsin those facilities, and shall follow the sameprocedures as outlined in the WatchCommander’s Responsibility paragraph above.

Specialized divisions shall maintainappropriate juvenile detention logs as needed,or as directed by their commanding officers, to

document juvenile detentions in their facilities.Juveniles detained at Area stations shall bedocumented on the appropriate Area detentionlog.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility.Commanding officers shall ensure that alltemporary juvenile detentions are documentedon the Secure Juvenile Detention Log, Form9.05, or the Non-secure Juvenile DetentionLog, Form 9.06. Pursuant to Section2071(d)(6) WIC, entries recorded on theSecure Juvenile Detention Log, Form 9.05,shall be tallied monthly and entered on theMonthly Report on the Secure Confinement ofMinors in Jails/Lock-ups, CYA Form 10.402.Each Area and specialized divisioncommanding officer shall ensure that the CYAForm 10.402 is completed at the end of eachmonth and forwarded to the AdministrativeSection, Juvenile Division, by the fifthworking day of the following month.

218.67 JUVENILE DETAINED AT LOSANGELES COUNTY-USC MEDICALCENTER. Officers desiring continued custodyof a juvenile in need of hospitalization shall:

∗ Cause the subject to be transported to acontract or receiving hospital forexamination;

∗ When the examining physician recommendsthat the subject be hospitalized, contact theinvestigating supervisor for continuedcustody advice. When the detective divisionis closed, Detective Support Division shallbe contacted;

∗ Obtain booking approval from the Areawatch commander or the WatchCommander, Metropolitan Jail Section, JailDivision;

∗ When continued custody is approved, obtaintwo completed copies of the ReceivingHospital Record, Form RH336; and,

∗ Cause the subject to be transported to theLos Angeles County-USC Medical Center.When continued medical observation is notnecessary, transport the subject directly tothe Jail Ward.

Note: Jail Ward personnel will not receive amale under 16 or a female under 18 withoutan accompanying Juvenile Court Order.Detective Support Division personnel areresponsible for contacting Intake and DetentionControl personnel of the County ProbationDepartment, who will obtain and deliver theorder to the Jail Ward. When continuedmedical observation is necessary, officers shalltransport the subject directly to the MainAdmitting Room. Officers shall be responsiblefor ascertaining when the Juvenile Court Orderarrives. Upon delivery of the order, the subjectshall be moved as soon as possible to the JailWard. The custody of the subject shall not beentrusted to hospital personnel other than theJail Ward booking deputy.

∗ Complete a Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1. Obtain a booking numberfrom the Booking and Auxiliary ServicesUnit, Records and Identification Division.



Leave Page 3 of the Form 5.1, and one copyof the Receiving Hospital Record, with thebooking deputy. Deliver the remainingpages of the Form 5.1 to the record clerk atthe location where the reports arecompleted.

∗ Receive the subject's property and deliver itto the Intake and Detention Control Unit ofJuvenile Hall, 1605 Eastlake. One copy ofthe Arrest Report shall accompany theproperty.

∗ Complete the necessary reports at thelocation specified by Detective SupportDivision personnel. One copy of theReceiving Hospital Record shall accompanythe other reports.

218.68 NOTIFICATION TO THEDEPARTMENT OF ALCOHOLICBEVERAGE CONTROL-WHENAPPLICABLE. When a minor is taken intocustody for violation of laws normallyenforced by the Department of AlcoholicBeverage Control, the concerned investigatingofficer shall forward one copy of the ArrestReport, or "Contact Only" Report, Form 5.2, tothe Department of Alcoholic Beverage Control.This report shall contain information regardingany licensed premises probably connected withthe minor's offense.

218.69 SECURE DETENTION OFMINORS FOR 601 WELFARE ANDINSTITUTIONS CODE VIOLATIONS.Section 207 Welfare and Institutions Code(WIC) provides for the secure detention of aminor taken into custody for a violation ofSection 601 WIC in the followingcircumstances:

∗ When the arresting officer or probationofficer has cause to believe the minor hasoutstanding wants, warrants, or holds, theminor may be securely detained for up to 12hours after having been taken into custody.

∗ When necessary to locate the minor'sparents or guardian, and to arrange thereturn of the minor to his/her parent orguardian, the minor may be securelydetained for up to 24 hours after havingbeen taken into custody.

Exception: The minor may be securelydetained for no more than 72 hours afterhaving been taken into custody when the returnof the minor cannot reasonably beaccomplished within 24 hours due to thedistance of the parents or guardian from theCounty of custody, difficulty in locating theparent or guardian, or difficulty in locatingresources necessary to provide for the return ofthe minor.

After the arresting officer has obtaineddetention approval, the minor and a copy of thearrest report shall be delivered to the ProbationDepartment.

Exception: When the Area JuvenileCoordinator is unavailable, the arresting officershall be guided by the advice of DetectiveSupport Division.

When the Probation Department concurs withsecure detention, the minor shall be transportedto the designated secure facility.

Note: The Los Angeles County ProbationDepartment has designated Los PadrinosJuvenile Hall, 7285 East Quill Drive, Downey,for secure detention of 601 WIC violators.However, space allocated for 601 WICdetention is, on occasion, needed for 602 WICdetention purposes. Consequently, theProbation Department may deny 601 WICdetentions. When detention is denied at LosPadrinos because of insufficient space, minorsshall be placed in Status Offender DetentionAlternative (SODA) facilities.

When a minor is taken into custody as a persondescribed in 601 WIC and secure detention ofthe minor is not required, the minor shall beplaced in a SODA facility in conformance withexisting procedure.

218.70 RESPONSIBILITY FORARREST REPORT-JUVENILE INCUSTODY. The officer taking a juvenile intocustody shall be responsible for the juvenile'sbooking and the completion of the ArrestReport. The concerned investigating officershall be responsible for completing thedisposition portion of the arrest report.

218.71 PETITION REQUEST FORMAT.An officer completing a petition request shallcheck the Type Petition Request box on theface of the Arrest Report, and on aContinuation Sheet, Form 15.9, entitled"Detective Information,” list:

∗ Booking number and DR number;∗ Subjects' names and booking numbers (if

multiple arrestees);

AND, when applicable, list the:

∗ Charges;∗ Subjects' statements, including responses to

the Miranda Admonition;∗ Corrections to original reports; and,∗ Additional investigative information not

contained in other reports.

Reports Required. When requesting apetition, collate the reports as follows:

∗ Juvenile affidavits as required;∗ Arrest Report face sheet;∗ Preliminary Investigation Report (PIR), if

completed in conjunction with the ArrestReport;

∗ Detective Information page(s), numberedD-1, D-2, etc.;

∗ Arrest Report continuation pages;∗ Juvenile Arrest Report (Continuation), and

reverse side if used, as the next to the lastnumbered page(s) of the Arrest Report;

∗ Juvenile Automated Index printout as thelast numbered page of the Arrest Report;

∗ Other related reports, including a PIR notcompleted in conjunction with the arrest;and,

∗ District Attorney Witness List.

218.72 FILING OF DETAINEDPETITIONS IN COMPANION CASES. Aninvestigating officer handling a juvenile caseshall complete a detained petition request onjuveniles delivered to Juvenile Hall, regardlessof their subsequent release by the ProbationDepartment, when:

∗ Two or more of the subjects have beenarrested in connection with the sameincident;

∗ One or more of the subjects remain intemporary custody; and,

∗ The juveniles were originally placed incustody by members of this Department.

218.73 JUVENILE CASES-JUVENILECOURT REVIEW. When a Juvenile Courtpetition has not been returned by the ProbationDepartment within 21 days after delivery tothat agency, the Commanding Officer, JuvenileDivision, shall be responsible for contactingthe concerned division juvenile coordinator orwatch commander to determine whether thecase merits review by the Juvenile Court.

If the case is to be reviewed by the JuvenileCourt, the Commanding Officer, JuvenileDivision, shall ensure that one copy of eachpertinent report is taken to the judge of theJuvenile Court within 30 days of the originalfiling.

218.74 APPLICATION FOR PETITION-JUVENILE BOOKED AS AN ADULT.When a juvenile has been booked as an adultbecause the juvenile misrepresented his ageand this misrepresentation materially delayedthe investigation, additional time, not to exceed48 hours, is allowed to complete theinvestigation and file a petition. The additionaltime begins when the juvenile's true age hasbeen determined (Manual Section 4/705.62).

218.75 COMPLETION OF ARRESTREPORT-JUVENILE IN CUSTODY. AnArrest Report, Form 5.2, shall be madewhenever a juvenile is booked, except when:

∗ A juvenile is booked on a Juvenile CourtDetaining Order.

∗ A juvenile is booked "Enroute" to anotherjurisdiction by persons not members of theDepartment and no further investigation oraction is contemplated by the Department.

Note: An Arrest Report, Form 5.2, shall bemade when a juvenile is booked on a Warrantof Arrest and Order for Return to Custody,which is, in effect, a warrant for a juvenile'sapprehension.

A Property Disposition Request, Form 10.06,shall be attached to the Form 5.2 prior tosubmission for supervisory approval (ManualSection 4/790.12).

218.78 JUVENILE CUSTODY REPORT.An Arrest Report, Form 5.2, and an ArrestDisposition, Form 5.9, shall be completedwhen a juvenile is taken into custody underSection 300 of the Welfare and InstitutionsCode. A booking number shall be obtained for



each juvenile regardless of age. However, thejuvenile shall not be fingerprinted orphotographed as part of the booking process.Separate prints for investigative purposes onlyare permissible. A Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1, shall be completed andforwarded to Records and IdentificationDivision.

Note: Completed arrest reports of 300 WICcases shall be filed separately from other arrestreports.

218.79 NOTIFICATION TO PARENTS- JUVENILE TAKEN INTO CUSTODYUNDER SECTION 300 WELFARE ANDINSTITUTIONS CODE. If an officer takes ajuvenile into custody under 300 Welfare andInstitution Code, the officer shall takeimmediate steps to notify the juvenile's parent,guardian or a responsible relative that thejuvenile is in custody and that the juvenile hasbeen placed in a facility authorized by law tocare for the juvenile and provide the juvenile'sparent, guardian or a responsible relative withthe appropriate Department of Children andFamily Services' telephone number. Theaddress of the licensed foster family homeshall not be released to the juvenile's parent,guardian or a responsible relative.

218.80 NOTIFICATION TO PARENTS-JUVENILE ARREST. When an officer takesa juvenile arrestee to a place of confinement(i.e., Area station, juvenile detention center,etc.), the officer shall take immediate steps tonotify the juvenile’s parent, guardian orresponsible relative that the juvenile is incustody and of the location where the juvenileis being held.

Release of Juvenile. If an arrested juvenile isreleased after booking, the juvenile's parents orlegal guardian shall be requested to return withthe juvenile for a conference with theinvestigating officers. The time and place theparent, guardian or responsible relative wererequested to appear for the conference shall beindicated on the Juvenile Arrest SupplementalReport, Form 5.2.6.

In addition, the arresting officers shall preparea Juvenile Notice to Appear, Form 9.3, intriplicate, completing all applicable spaces onthe form. Upon the arrival of the person towhom the juvenile is to be released, the officerreleasing shall provide him/her with a copy ofthe form after obtaining his/her signature onthe form or a refusal to sign. In the event theperson refuses to sign, the officer shall writethe word "Refused" in the signature space(Manual Section 5/9.3).

Note: When an arrested juvenile under theinfluence of narcotics or dangerous drugs is tobe released to his/her parent, guardian orresponsible relative, the officer releasing thejuvenile shall inform the parent, guardian orresponsible relative that the juvenile is underthe influence of dangerous drugs or narcoticsand should be carefully observed. If thejuvenile does not respond satisfactorily, he/she

should be given medical attention withoutdelay.

Detention of Juvenile. If an arrested juvenileis detained after booking, the juvenile'sparents, guardian or responsible relative shallbe notified and given the location where thejuvenile is detained.

218.90 JUVENILE BOOKINGSINVESTIGATOR'S FINAL REPORT,FORM 5.10. When a juvenile is booked, thearresting officer shall remove Page 1c of theForm 5.10 from the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1, and attach it to the ArrestReport, Form 5.2.

218.95 JUVENILE BOOKINGS-TELETYPE. A juvenile booking teletypeshall be sent manually to the Juvenile RecordsUnit, Records and Identification Division, andDetective Support Division when DABISprocessing is not used to book a juvenile or aperson 18 years of age or older is arrested andbooked for a crime committed when thearrestee was a juvenile.

219. TRANSIT RELATED CRIMEREPORTING PROCEDURES.219.05 TRANSIT-CRIME DEFINED. Atransit-related incident or crime is defined asany reportable public safety incident or crimethat occurs within the City limits of LosAngeles which:

∗ Occurs on or about any public transitproperty. This includes any publictransportation bus stop, train, or subwaystation, designated transit parking lot, andtrain or subway right of way (tracks andtunnels); or,

∗ Involves any public transit vehicle. Thisincludes public trains, such as Metrolinkand Los Angles County Municipal TransitAuthority (LACMTA) Metro Red, Blue,Gold and Green Lines. This also includesLACMTA buses and other municipal buslines, such as Montebello, Santa Monica,and the Downtown Area Short Hop (DASH)traveling through the City.

Note: Los Angeles County Sheriff’sDepartment has preliminary and follow-upresponsibility for all transit-related policingwithin the City limits.

Exception: The Department shall continue tohandle major crimes (e.g., homicides, sexualassaults, etc.) that occur on transitconveyances, at bus stops, at LACMTAfacilities an/or properties.

219.10 INVESTIGATION-RESPONSIBILITY.

Officer’s Responsibility. When it isdetermined that a crime or incident is transit-related, the reporting officer shall write“Transit Incident” or ”Transit Crime” as thefirst entry in the report’s modus operandi (MO)box. If the report form does not have an MObox, the words “Transit Incident” or “Transit

Crime” shall be written in red in any availablespace near the top of the form used to reportthe incident.

When a crime occurs on a bus, the line,number and operator’s name and identificationnumber, if known, shall be listed on the relatedreports.

When the LACMTA is listed as a victim or asa premise, or is referred to in a crime report,the abbreviation “LACMTA” shall be used.

Booking Approval. Booking approval for alltransit-related arrests shall be obtained by oneof the 19 Area watch commanders, theCommanding Officer, Area Detective Division,or the watch commander of Jail Division,Metropolitan Section. Officers shall obtainbooking advice from the watch commander,Area Detective Division for all transit relatedfelony arrests during normal business hours.

Area Records Unit’s Responsibility. Uponreceiving a report indicating “Transit Incident”or “Transit Crime,” records personnel shall usethe Consolidate Crime Analysis Database(CCAD) MO Code 0910 in conjunction withthe appropriate premise code. All originalreports shall be forwarded to Records andIdentification Division.

Area Detective Division’s Responsibility.Upon receiving a felony arrest report or anytransit-related crime report, Area DetectiveDivision personnel shall notify the LosAngeles County Sheriff’s Department, TransitServices Division.

220. VEHICLE REPORTINGPROCEDURES.220.10 VEHICLE INVESTIGATIONDETERMINATION. Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180 shall be completed to report thefollowing when stolen, lost, recovered, found,or impounded:

∗ Motor vehicles (all types) including:

∗ Motorcycles, motor-driven cycles,mopeds, mini-bikes, go-carts, and motorscooters;

∗ Off-highway vehicle, includingconstruction equipment, dune buggies,and racing vehicles;

∗ Trailers (all types);∗ Separate vehicle motors;∗ Separate vehicle transmissions;∗ Major component vehicle parts;∗ License plates (Except found);∗ Campers;∗ Aircraft (all types);∗ Boats;∗ Separate boat engines; and,∗ Separate boat transmissions.

In addition, this form shall be used as an orderto release a vehicle impounded with a hold,and as a Garage Report of Release or Sale ofan impounded vehicle.



Note: Officers shall continue to report foundlicense plates on the Property Report, Form10.01.0, as delineated in Manual Section5/10.01.0.

220.15 LOST OR STOLEN VEHICLE-LICENSE OR IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER UNKNOWN. When the license oridentification number of a stolen or lost vehicleis unknown, the reporting officer shallcomplete the report, except for the missingnumbers; obtain the reporting person'ssignature; notify the Automated Vehicle andProperty Section (AVPS), Records andIdentification Division; and obtain a DRnumber.

Vehicles Registered in California. The Arearecords unit processing the report shall send ateletype to DMV, Sacramento, requesting themissing numbers and directing that the reply besent to the concerned Area records unit and theconcerned investigating officers.

The concerned division records unit shallcomplete and distribute the report when themissing information is received from DMV.

Vehicle Registered Outside California. Whenthe stolen or lost vehicle is registered outsideCalifornia, the reporting person shall berequested to obtain the unknown numbers andforward that information to the concernedinvestigating officers. Also, the Area recordsunit processing the report shall send a teletypeinquiry to the DMV in the registering staterequesting registration information. Uponreceipt of the return teletype, the informationshall be forwarded to the concernedinvestigating officers. The concernedinvestigating officers shall notify AVPS of themissing information for updating theappropriate automated system.

220.25 REPORT OF SINGLE LOST ORSTOLEN LICENSE PLATES. When asingle lost or stolen license plate is reportedmissing, the reporting person shall be advisedto immediately remove the remaining licenseplate from the vehicle, and to surrender it tothe Department of Motor Vehicles whenreplacement plates are obtained.

Note: The reporting employee shall enter thename of the person advised to remove the platefrom the vehicle in the narrative of the report.

220.26 ADVISING PERSONS AS TOMETHOD OF REPLACEMENTREGARDING LOST OR STOLENLICENSE PLATES. Persons making reportsof lost license plates and inquiring as to themethod of replacing them shall be referred tothe Department of Motor Vehicles (for releaseof found license plates, see Manual Section4/555.70).

220.35 COURTESY STOLEN VEHICLEREPORTS. When a person wishes to report avehicle stolen and the location of occurrence isoutside the City limits, “Stolen” VehicleReport, CHP Form 180 may be completed(Manual Section 5/030.05).

220.40 VEHICLE INVESTIGATIONCOMPLETED IN THE FIELD. When aVehicle Investigation is completed in the field,a DR number shall be obtained immediatelyupon completion of the report. The report shallbe retained and submitted for approval at endof watch or on the next routine trip to thestation.

220.43 VEHICLE INVESTIGATION-NOTIFICATION REQUIRED. An officerconducting a preliminary investigation of astolen or recovered truck of five-ton capacityor larger, a commercial trailer, a tractor cab, ora bulldozer shall immediately telephone allavailable information to Burglary SpecialSection, Commercial Crimes Division. WhenBurglary Special Section personnel are notavailable, such notification shall be given toDetective Support Division.

220.45 REPORTING A STOLENVEHICLE. When a person wishes to report avehicle stolen or lost, the interviewing officershall conduct a preliminary interview todetermine whether circumstances warrant areport.

Stolen Vehicle Reports. Upon determiningthat a “Stolen” Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180 should be made, the interviewing officer shall:

∗ Check with the Stolen Vehicle System(SVS) through the division record unit,when practicable, or by radio/Mobile DataTerminal (MDT) to determine if the vehiclehas been repossessed or impounded.

∗ Telephonically determine if the vehicle is atthe Official Police Garage serving the Areawhere the vehicle was parked.

∗ If the vehicle has been impounded, thereporting person shall be advised aboutobtaining the release of the vehicle (ManualSection 4/780.85).

∗ Check the Automated Property System(APS) to determine if a moped has beenreported stolen in that system.

∗ When the reporting person cannot present aregistration certificate, verify the licenseand motor or identification numbers bycalling DMV.

∗ Complete the report and obtain the reportingperson's signature thereon.

∗ Obtain a DR number.

Note: In addition to any required VehicleReport, CHP Form 180, a PreliminaryInvestigation Report, Form 3.1, shall becompleted during the initial investigation of acommercial vehicle theft or hijack when thecargo is the probable object of the theft orhijack.

220.47 REPORTING PROPERTYMISSING FROM RECOVEREDVEHICLES. Upon being informed of propertymissing from a recovered vehicle, employeesshall complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR), Form 3.01, entitled"PROPERTY MISSING FROMRECOVERED VEHICLE." The Stolen

Vehicle DR shall be used on the PIR, Form3.01.

220.50 VEHICLE TAKEN IN A CRIME.Whenever a vehicle is taken in the commissionof a crime a “Stolen” Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180, shall be completed in addition to theappropriate crime report.

Exception: When an officer conducting apreliminary investigation determines that avehicle has been obtained by use of a worthlessdocument (e.g., counterfeit checks, fraudulentuse of credit card, etc.), he/she shall:

∗ Complete only a Worthless DocumentReport, Form 3.6, and include all pertinentvehicle information in the body of thereport.

∗ Obtain a DR number for the WorthlessDocument Report.

Note: The vehicle information shall not beentered into the Stolen Vehicle System by theofficer conducting the preliminaryinvestigation.

The concerned investigating officer shalldetermine whether a Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180, is appropriate. If so, he/she shall:

∗ Complete a Vehicle Investigation, using theworthless document DR number.

∗ Notify the Automated Vehicle and PropertySection, Records and IdentificationDivision.

220.52 VEHICLES STOLEN BY MEANSOF A FRAUDULENT CREDITAPPLICATION. A vehicle stolen by meansof a fraudulent credit application must possessthe elements of identity theft to constitute acrime (i.e., using someone else’s personalidentification, including name, social securitynumber, identification number, etc.) in order toobtain credit. The mere inflation of incomeconstitutes a civil matter and does not meet theelements required for fraudulent creditapplication investigation.

Preliminary Investigating Officer’sResponsibility. When an officer conducting apreliminary investigation determines that avehicle has been obtained by use of afraudulent credit application, the officer shall:

∗ Complete a Worthless DocumentInvestigation, Form 3.06, for the creditapplication;

∗ Complete a Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180,titled “Stolen,” containing the elements ofthe crime in the narrative and attach theoriginal vehicle report to the WorthlessDocument Investigation report; and,

∗ Notify Vehicle Information Processing(VIPU) to ensure that the vehicleinformation is entered into SVS.

Note: The Division of Records (DR) numberassigned to the worthless document shall beused for both reports.

Commercial Crime Division’sResponsibility. Upon receiving a Worthless



Document Investigation report and StolenVehicle report, the detective assigned toForgery Section shall assume primary follow-up investigation responsibility.

220.55 STOLEN VEHICLE USED INTHE COMMISSION OF A CRIME. Whenit is determined that a stolen vehicle used in acrime has not been reported as stolen, a”Stolen” Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180, shallbe completed in addition to the appropriatecrime report.

220.60 LOST VEHICLE REPORTS.When it is believed by the interviewing officerthat a vehicle is missing under circumstancesthat do not warrant the taking of a "stolen"report, he or she shall direct the person to theconcerned investigating officer, who shalldetermine whether a "lost" report should betaken.

Note: Persons appearing at Areas when theinvestigating officers are not available shall beinterviewed by a supervisor responsible forapproving the taking of reports.

220.65 CHANGE OF VEHICLE LOSTREPORT TO VEHICLE STOLENREPORT. When a vehicle has been reportedlost and it is later learned to have been stolen,a Follow-up Report, Form 3.14, shall be made.The Automated Vehicle and Property Sectionshall be notified of the change in status.

220.70 CHANGE OF VEHICLESTOLEN REPORT TO UNFOUNDED.When a vehicle is reported stolen but is laterdetermined to be misplaced or legally in thepossession of someone other than the reportingperson, the officer making such determinationshall cause “Rec-Unfounded” Vehicle Report,CHP Form 180, to be completed and notify theAutomated Vehicle and Property Section(AVPS).

Note: When the vehicle is legally in thepossession of a repossessor, the officer shallensure that the repossessor immediatelynotifies the AVPS.

The investigating officer shall ensure that theowner is aware of the status and location of thevehicle.

220.75 REPOSSESSED VEHICLE. Whena repossessor notifies the Automated Vehicleand Property Section that he/she hasrepossessed a vehicle or boat, the , prior toissuing the DR number, shall verify with theStolen Vehicle System (SVS) or theAutomated Boat System (ABS) that the vehicleor boat has not been reported stolen.

When the vehicle has been reported stolen anda DR number was issued, the AVPS clerkshall:

∗ Complete a Change/Cancellation of DRNumber, Form 8.45, using the originalstolen DR number.

∗ Remove the stolen data from the SVS orABS.

∗ Enter the repossession data into the SVS orABS using a new DR number.

∗ Distribute copies of the Form 8.45 to thefollowing:

∗ Integrated Crime and Arrest System(ICARS) Unit, Records andIdentification Division.

∗ Coding Unit, Information TechnologyDivision.

∗ Concerned investigative division.∗ Concerned division record unit.∗ The concerned investigating officers

shall notify the registered owner of thecorrected status and location of thevehicle.

Note: The Form 8.45 eliminates the need fora recovery/unfounded report.

220.80 REPORTING RECOVERED ORFOUND VEHICLE. The officer recovering astolen or lost vehicle shall make telephonicnotification to the Automated Vehicle andProperty Section, Records and IdentificationDivision.

Recovered Vehicle in Possession of Owneror Owner's Agent. When an officer has asigned Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180, on arecovered vehicle which is in possession of theowner or owner's agent, he/she shall,immediately notify the CommunicationsDivision control operator of the recovery andAutomated Vehicle and Property Section, assoon as possible.

Upon receiving this notification, the controloperator shall, without delay, broadcast acancellation of the want on the vehicle.

220.85 PLACING HOLD ONIMPOUNDED VEHICLE. Whencircumstances require that a vehicle be held forinvestigation, the impounding employee shall:

∗ Caution the tow truck operator if there isdanger of destroying evidence;

∗ Place a hold for the appropriateinvestigative unit by entering information inthe proper space on the Vehicle Report,CHP Form 180;

Note: Do Not hold for Burglary Auto-TheftSection unless specifically requested. Hold forArea detectives.

∗ In the "Not Available for Release" space ofthe Vehicle Impound Notice, Form 15.23,indicate the responsible investigative unit,and the anticipated date of release (normallytwo business days);

∗ If practicable, telephonically notify theresponsible investigative unit of the hold. Iftelephonic notification cannot be made atthe time of impound, that fact shall berecorded on the Vehicle Investigation, andthe Area Vehicle Control Clerk shall makesuch notification during the next businessday; and,

∗ If a vehicle wanted for investigation cannotbe impounded under authority of the

Vehicle Code, contact the investigatingofficer of the concerned unit for advice.

220.90 MOTOR OR OTHERIDENTIFYING NUMBER. An employeeshall, at the scene examine and record onappropriate reports, the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and if possible, the motornumber, or the number stamped on the frame.Number locations may be obtained from:

∗ Area investigating officers;∗ Burglary Special Section, Commercial

Crimes Division; or,∗ Detective Support Division.

Any indication that a number has been alteredshall be reported on the Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180, the vehicle shall be impounded, anda hold shall be placed on the vehicle for theArea investigating officer, not BurglarySpecial Section, Commercial Crimes Division.During normal business hours the Areainvestigating officer shall be notifiedtelephonically (see also Conveyances Subjectto Seizure, Manual Section 4/222.16.)

Prior to impounding any vehicle, the employeeshall check the vehicle identification numberand license number through the Stolen VehicleSystem (SVS) or Automated Boat System(ABS). Prior to submitting the Vehicle Report,CHP Form 180, for approval, an SVS teletypeshall be attached for retention in the Area.

220.95 REPORTING OFPRIVATE-PERSON IMPOUNDEDVEHICLE. When a private person notifies theDepartment that he/she intends to cause theremoval of a vehicle from private propertypursuant to Section 22658 V.C., the employeereceiving the notification shall transfer the callto the Automated Vehicle and PropertySection, Records and Identification Division.Any written notices received by theDepartment shall be forwarded to theAutomated Vehicle and Property Section.

221. FIELD RELEASING VEHICLES.

221.10 RELEASING RECOVEREDSTOLEN VEHICLES. When feasible, arecovered stolen vehicle which does notrequire a hold shall be released to the owner(or the owner's agent) without impounding.

Determining Feasibility. Officers whorecover a vehicle which appears to be availablefor field release shall immediately contact asupervisor. The supervisor shall determine thefeasibility of making a field release based onthe following factors:

∗ The practicability of immediatelycontacting the owner (e.g., availability ofowner's telephone number, local dialingarea); AND,

∗ The time required for the owner to arrive atthe recovery location; AND,

∗ The owner's willingness to receive thevehicle; AND,

∗ The current unit call load and need forpolice service.



Signature on Recovery Report. Afterverification of identity, the employee shallobtain the signature of the person receiving thevehicle in the "Person Reporting" box on theRecovery Report.

Victim's Report Memo. The person receivingthe vehicle shall be given a completed Victim'sReport Memo, Form 3.17, and shall be advisedof the necessity for caution if stopped by apolice unit.

Recovered Vehicle Broadcast. The employeeshall immediately notify CommunicationsDivision of the release of the vehicle. Theoperator shall, without delay, broadcast acancellation of the want on the vehicle.

Notification to Automated Vehicle andProperty Section. The employee shalltelephonically notify the Automated Vehicleand Property Section of the recovery as soon aspracticable.

Latent Prints. When there is information orevidence regarding a possible suspect,consideration must be given to the desirabilityof attempting to lift fingerprints prior toreleasing the vehicle.

Special Instruction. The recovering employeeshall not leave the vehicle unattended exceptunder unusual or emergency conditions. Topreclude removal of the vehicle during theemployee's unanticipated absence, upon initialcontact the owner shall be instructed not toremove the vehicle if the employee is not at thescene.

221.20 FOUND VEHICLES. A foundvehicle normally shall not be impounded.

Notifications. An employee discovering avehicle which is reported lost and which doesnot appear to have been stolen or used in acrime shall:

∗ Complete a “Found” Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180;

∗ Notify the Automated Vehicle and PropertySection, Records and IdentificationDivision;

∗ If practicable, notify the reporting person ofthe vehicle's location. Indicate date, time,and person notified in the narrative portionof the "Found" Report; and,

∗ If the employee discovering a lost vehicle isunable to notify the owner or personreporting the lost vehicle, he/she shall notein the Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180, thata notification has not been made. Thenotification shall then be the responsibilityof the investigating officer.

222. IMPOUNDING VEHICLES.222.10 RESPONSIBILITY FORARRESTEE'S VEHICLE. Arresting officersshall be responsible for the reasonable care ofa vehicle in the immediate physical possessionof the arrestee.

Note: Outside agency officers shall care for thearrestee's vehicle when they are responsible forcompleting the investigation.

222.15 IMPOUNDING VEHICLEINVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT. Employeesshall impound a vehicle involved in a trafficcollision when:

∗ The vehicle is on a traffic way, cannotreadily be moved, and is obstructing traffic;and,

∗ The driver of the vehicle is injured to theextent that he/she is unable to care for thevehicle or provide for its care.

It is the responsibility of the tow truck operatorto remove all broken glass and other debrisfrom the street at the scene of the accident.

222.16 IMPOUNDING CONVEYANCESUSED IN DRUG TRAFFICKING. Officersimpounding conveyances in accordance withSection 11470 Health and Safety Code(H&S)(1) shall:

∗ Obtain impound and storage approval fromthe Forfeiture Coordinator, NarcoticsDivision, or Detective Support Division;

∗ Hold the conveyance for NarcoticsDivision;

∗ Indicate in the "Not Available for Release"space of the Vehicle Impound Notice, Form15.23, the phone number of NarcoticsDivision;

∗ Indicate in the "Vehicle Release Order"portion of the Vehicle Report, CHP Form180, "Release to Narcotics Division Only";

∗ Accurately describe in the Arrest Report,Form 5.2, the conveyance, its involvementin the case, and its disposition; and,

∗ Forward copies of all related reports to theForfeiture Coordinator, Narcotics Division.

Conveyances Subject to Seizure. Section11470 of the Health and Safety Code allowsofficers to seize certain involved conveyancespending forfeiture proceedings if theconveyances are used in the possession ortransportation of a controlled substance for saleand the owners or operators are arrested for11351, 11352, 11355, 11359, 11360, 11378,11379, or 11382 Health and Safety Code, or ifan attempt is made to arrest the owner oroperators on these charges. This option islimited to those cases involving the belowdescribed conveyances:

∗ Any two-axle vehicle;∗ Any motorcycle or motor-driven cycle;∗ Any three-axle house car;∗ A tractor trailer vehicle;∗ A heavy duty vehicle, (i.e., three-axle truck

or privately owned bus over 6,000 poundsgross weight);

∗ Any airplane; and,∗ Any boat or ship.

Note: Implements of husbandry and commoncarriers are not subject to forfeiture.

222.18 IMPOUNDING VEHICLESPURSUANT TO VEHICLE CODE

SECTION 22651(o) OR (p) - OFFICERRESPONSIBILITY. In addition tocompleting all necessary reports andnotifications, an officer who causes theimpound of a vehicle under authority ofSection 22651(o) or (p) VC shall place a"HOLD" on the vehicle for the concerned AreaVehicle Coordinator.

222.20 ILLEGALLY PARKEDVEHICLE. An employee may impound anillegally parked vehicle when it:

∗ Obstructs the normal movement of traffic;

∗ Is left standing upon a street or highway;and,

∗ Is impracticable to move the vehicle to alegal parking space in the near vicinity. Apolice vehicle shall not be used to move anillegally parked vehicle except as providedin Manual Section 4/223.40.

A citation shall be issued when an illegallyparked vehicle is impounded or moved.

222.25 SPECIAL EVENTS. Instructionsfor impounding illegally parked vehicles in thevicinity of a special event shall be given priorto the event.

222.30 VEHICLE INVOLVED INNATIONAL FIRE ARMS ACTINVESTIGATION. A vehicle in which therehas been transported, or in which there is foundan illegal weapon as defined by the NationalFirearms Act, shall be impounded inconjunction with a lawful arrest and held forDetective Support Division. A teletype shall besent to Detective Support Division containingthe following information:

∗ Reason for placing hold;∗ The name, booking number, and charge of

arrestee;∗ Year, make, model, and license number of

the impounded vehicle; and,∗ DR number of the Vehicle Report.

Detective Support Division shall coordinate therelease of the vehicle to the Bureau of Alcohol,Tobacco and Firearms (ATF), U.S. TreasuryDepartment.

222.35 ABANDONED VEHICLES. Allrequests for the removal of abandoned vehiclesshall be forwarded to the Department ofTransportation.

222.38 ABANDONED VEHICLES WITHALTERED IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERS. When the identificationnumber(s) on an impounded abandoned vehicleare missing, have been altered, or do notcorrespond with those on file with theDepartment of Motor Vehicles, VehicleReport, CHP Form 180, shall be completed anda hold placed on the vehicle.

Investigators in the Area where the vehicle hasbeen impounded shall be responsible for theinvestigation of the vehicle and its disposition.



222.40 REMOVAL OF DISMANTLEDVEHICLES. The Bureau of StreetMaintenance is responsible for removing adismantled vehicle from public property whenthe vehicle lacks evidence of registration or anidentification number. The commandingofficer of the concerned Area shall request itsremoval by forwarding a letter, in triplicate, tothe Department of Transportation.

The letter shall contain the followinginformation:

∗ Location of the vehicle;∗ Extent of dismantling;∗ Estimated length of time abandoned;∗ Names and addresses of witnesses

interviewed in attempting to locate theowner; and,

∗ Statement regarding lack of evidence ofregistration or identification.

222.42 REMOVAL OF MAJORCOMPONENT VEHICLE PARTS.

Impounding Officer’s Responsibility.Generally, officers should not remove vehicleparts in the field. When an officer determinesthat a vehicle has a part with an altered orremoved vehicle identification number, or hasstolen parts attached which require removal,the officer shall comply with Section 4/220.90of the Department Manual.

Note: If the officer recovers a majorcomponent part only (e.g., recovered engine),the officer shall obtain tow service as outlinedin Manual Section 4/223.10. When practicable,the officer may transport the major vehiclecomponent to an Official Police Garage (OPG)for storage. The impoundment of majorcomponent vehicle parts shall be reported onthe Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180.

Detective’s Responsibility. When a detectivedetermines that an impounded vehicle has avehicle part with an altered or removed vehicleidentification number, or has stolen partsattached which require removal the detectiveshall:

∗ List the parts to be removed and the reasonfor removal on the Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180;

Note: Non-matching serialized parts which arestolen or have an altered or removed vehicleidentification number require a separate reportand DR and shall be stored at an OfficialPolice Garage (OPG).

Exception: Non-matching serialized partsmay be listed on one report if recovered at thesame time and location. Employees shallobtain a general DR for the non-serialized partsand note where the property is stored in thenarrative of the report.

∗ Request that the concerned detectivecommanding officer preparecorrespondence on Department letterheadidentifying the parts to be removed and

directing the OPG storing the vehicle toremove and store the identified parts;

∗ Request that the concerned OPG forward aninvoice, listing the parts removed, to theconcerned detective commanding officer;

∗ Request that the concerned detectivecommanding officer prepare anIntradepartmental Correspondence, Form15.2, requesting Fiscal Operations Divisionto remit payment to the OPG;

∗ Forward the original OPG invoice and therequest for payment (IntradepartmentalCorrespondence, Form 15.2) to FiscalOperations Division; and,

∗ Authorize the release of the recovered partsas soon as practicable (Manual Section4/550).

Note: The detective commanding officer shallensure that the concerned Detective III auditsvehicle parts stored at OPG facilities every 30days to ensure timely disposition of such parts.

222.50 NOTIFICATION TO OWNER OFIMPOUNDED VEHICLE.Impounding Employee Responsibility. Anymember of this Department impounding avehicle shall cause notification to be made tothe registered and legal owners of recordwithin 48 hours of the impound. Notificationshall be made by mailing or personallydelivering a Notice of Stored/ImpoundedVehicle, Form 15.23, immediately followingapproval of the Vehicle Report, CHP Form180.

Exception: The new notification proceduresdo not apply to vehicles impounded forinvestigation by authority of Section 22655V.C. (Hit and Run vehicle impounded forinvestigation), vehicles removed from privateproperty by authority of 22658 V.C., orvehicles seized for forfeiture (Manual Section4/222.16). Procedures for impounding vehiclesby authority of the above sections remainunchanged.

Obtaining Information. Owner information isavailable through SVS, Department records, orrecords in the vehicle. If complete ownerinformation is unavailable from these sources,the impounding employee shall cause ateletype request to be sent to the Department ofMotor Vehicles, Sacramento, or, for a vehicleregistered out of state, a teletype requestthrough the National Law EnforcementTelecommunications System.

Upon receipt of the return teletype, thesupervisor approving the Vehicle Investigationshall ensure that the information is entered andthat any appropriate notices are mailed. If thereturn teletype is not received by the end of thebusiness day following the impound, the reportshall be forwarded to the Area Vehicle ControlClerk who shall obtain the information,complete the report processing, and makeappropriate notifications.

Notification by Mail. Notification by mailshall be accomplished as follows:

∗ Abandoned Vehicles-$200 or Less. If anabandoned vehicle is appraised at twohundred dollars or less, the impoundingemployee shall cause a Notice of StoredImpounded Vehicle, Form 15.23, and allrequired notifications related to post-storagevehicle impound hearings (Manual Section4/226.05) to be mailed to the present, legal,and registered owners.

∗ Other Impounded Vehicles. Theimpounding employee shall cause a Noticeof Impounded Vehicle, Form 15.23, and allrequired notifications related to post-storagevehicle impound hearings (Manual Section4/226.05) to be sent to the present,registered, and legal owners and, if thevehicle, was reported stolen, the personreporting.

Note: When a vehicle is impounded as a resultof the driver's arrest, "22651 (h) V.C.," (NOT"driver arrested") shall be entered as the reasonfor impound. (See also Conveyances Subject toSeizure, Manual Section 4/222.16.)

∗ Telephonic Notifications.∗ No Hold. When no hold is placed on the

vehicle, the present owner, in addition tobeing notified by mail, shall, whenpracticable within the local or ATSS dialingarea, be notified telephonically by theimpounding employee. Such notification, orthe reason for not notifying, shall bedocumented on the bottom line of the"Narrative" section of the VehicleInvestigation.

∗ Holds. When a hold is placed on animpounded vehicle, the impoundingemployee shall not telephonically notify theowner or reporting party. (In theseinstances, telephonic notification is theresponsibility of the Area Vehicle ControlClerk).

222.51 VEHICLE IMPOUND NOTICE.Officer’s Responsibility. An officerimpounding a motor vehicle pursuant toSection 22651 (o) or (p) of the CaliforniaVehicle Code shall complete and serve a copyof the Vehicle Impound Notice, Form 16.27.6,to the driver of the vehicle. Officers shallattach the original Vehicle Impound Notice tothe Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180.Additionally, the officer shall inform the driverof the vehicle that:

∗ The vehicle will only be released at thespecified police facility and will not bereleased in the field;

∗ The vehicle will be released at the specifiedpolice facility and only to the registeredowner or a notarized agent;

∗ To obtain a release for the vehicle, a validdriver license and current vehicleregistration must be produced at the time ofrelease;

∗ The registered owner or notarized agentmust appear in person with the abovedocuments at the specified police facilityindicated on the reverse side of the VehicleImpound Notice.



Note: If at the time of requesting a vehiclerelease at the specified police facility thevehicle registered owner is unlicensed but isaccompanied by a licensed driver, theregistered owner must produce a valid form ofidentification with photo to obtain the vehicle.Examples of acceptable forms of identificationinclude, but are not limited to:

∗ California Identification Card;∗ Valid out-of-state identification card with a

picture;∗ Federal immigration card (green);∗ Department of Justice identification card;

and,∗ Passport with photo.

Area Records Unit’s Responsibility. Arearecords unit personnel shall ensure that a copyof the Vehicle Impound Notice, Form 16.27.6is attached to each copy of the Vehicle Report,CHP Form 180.

222.55 FINGERPRINTS ONIMPOUNDED VEHICLE. When a vehicle isheld for prints (Manual Section 4/220.85), theimpounding officer shall:

∗ Notify by telephone the Latent PrintSection, Scientific Investigation Division,or the Valley Section, ScientificInvestigation Division, if the vehicle wasimpounded in a Valley Area; and,

∗ Place in the Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180,the name, serial number, and division ofassignment of the person notified that thevehicle is held for prints.

222.59 INVENTORY OF PROPERTYFROM VEHICLES TAKEN INTOLAWFUL POLICE CUSTODY.

Officers shall inventory the contents of allvehicles that are taken into lawful policecustody.

A vehicle inventory is not intended to be asearch for items of evidence, but is intended toidentify and list all property that is containedwithin the vehicle being taken into lawfulpolice custody.

The inventory shall include property containedwithin the vehicle’s passenger compartment,glove compartment, console, trunk, and anyother compartment or box that may containproperty. All property located in these areasshall be listed in the “Remarks” section of theCHP Form 180.

All unlocked containers found in the vehicleshall be opened and their contents listed in the“Remarks” section on the CHP Form 180.

Exception: If the glove compartment, console,trunk, or unsecured container is locked, andthere is no key or mechanical/electricalmechanism to open that area of the vehicle,officers shall not force entry into the lockedarea to inventory its contents. However,officers shall note that the particular area oritem in the vehicle was locked, with no means

to open it, in the “Remarks” section of the CHPForm 180.

Note: Items of contraband or evidence, whichare discovered during the inventory, shall beseized and booked as outlined in the Manual(4/501-590.10) and detailed in correspondingreports.

The supervisor reviewing and approving theCHP Form 180 shall ensure that officers haveinventoried and documented all propertydiscovered during the vehicle inventory search.

222.60 PROPERTY IN A VEHICLETAKEN INTO POLICE CUSTODY. Whena vehicle is taken into police custody, thefollowing items shall be removed and bookedin accordance with established procedures:

∗ All property of evidential value;∗ Property that is estimated by the employee

to have a market value of more than $50 peritem or a total value of more than $100when these items cannot be locked in thedriver's compartment, glove box, or trunk;

∗ All money; and, ∗ Any item declared to be of value by the

person in apparent lawful control of thevehicle if the person insists.

All property which is left in an impoundedvehicle shall be listed on the Vehicle Report,CHP Form 180.

Los Angeles Department of Transportation(LADOT) employees shall be permitted tobook property removed from impoundedvehicles into the Department's property systemunder the following condition:

∗ Property estimated by the employee to havea market value of more that $50 per item orto have a total value of more than $100;and,

∗ The items cannot be secured in the driver'scompartment, glove box, or trunk.

The LADOT employee shall be responsible forthe completion of the property report and theproper packaging of the item(s) to be booked.

Note: Items deemed to be of evidentiary valueshall be booked by a sworn employee.

222.61 PROPERTY IN A VEHICLE TOBE LEFT PARKED. When a vehicle is leftlegally parked at the scene of a policeinvestigation, the following items shall beremoved and booked in accordance withestablished procedures:

∗ All property of evidential value, whether inplain sight or found as a result of a legalsearch;

∗ Property that is estimated by the employeeto have a market value of more than $50 peritem or a total value of more than $100when these items cannot be locked in thedriver's compartment, glove box, or trunk;

∗ Any items of evidential value in the trunk orglove box of the vehicle that come into thesight of employees securing property fromthe driver’s compartment;

∗ All money found, whether in plain sight ora result of a legal search; and,

∗ Any item declared to be of value by theperson in apparent lawful control of thevehicle if the person insists.

All property, whether in plain sight or found asa result of a legal search, which is left in thevehicle shall be listed on the Vehicle Report,CHP Form 180.

222.62 IMPOUNDED VEHICLEREPORT - CRIME REPORTINFORMATION. The impounding employeeshall not complete items relative to witnesses,suspects, arrestees and narrative (other thanimpound remarks) until the garage copies havebeen detached.

222.65 KEYS AND REGISTRATIONCERTIFICATE IN AN IMPOUNDEDVEHICLE. Neither the ignition keys nor theregistration certificate shall be removed froman impounded vehicle unless they are to bebooked as evidence.

222.80 VEHICLE APPRAISERS. Anyregular employee may be appointed to appraisevehicles for this Department. The selection andappointment of vehicle appraisers shall beaccomplished as follows:

Selecting Appraisers. The commandingofficer of each traffic division, or Area whichregularly uses appraisers, shall selectemployees in his/her command to appraisevehicles. A sufficient number of appraisersshall be appointed to ensure availability duringnormal working hours.

Maintaining Roster of Appraisers. Thenames of all persons selected by commandingofficers as Vehicle Appraisers shall beforwarded to the Commanding Officer,Commercial Crimes Division, on anIntradepartmental Correspondence, Form 15.2.The Commanding Officer, Commercial CrimesDivision, shall be responsible for maintaininga current list of vehicle appraisers.

Note: Only employees whose names appear onthe current roster maintained by BurglarySpecial Section are authorized to appraiseabandoned vehicles.

Termination of Authority to Act as anAppraiser. When an appraiser is transferred orreassigned to a new position, his/her authorityto act as an appraiser shall be terminated. Thecommanding officer of any employeedesignated as a Vehicle Appraiser mayterminate the employee's appraiser status atany time. When a change is made to anemployee's status as an appraiser, his/hercommanding officer shall notify BurglarySpecial Section of the changes by submittingan Intradepartmental Correspondence, Form15.2, to the Commanding Officer, CommercialCrimes Division.

Vehicle Appraiser’s Responsibility. Vehicleappraisers shall be responsible for appraisingall vehicles impounded by this Department,



including vehicles stored at Official PoliceGarages (OPG). Appraisers shall also beresponsible for completing the applicableportions of the Department of Motor Vehicles(DMV) Form 4.62, Notice of Vehicle to beDismantled or Junked and Form 256,Statement of Facts. These forms are utilizedduring OPG lien sale proceedings.

Training of Appraisers. Commanding officersof employees selected as vehicle appraisersshall ensure that the appraisers have beenproperly trained. All training shall becoordinated by Training Division to ensureDepartmentwide uniformity.

223. TOW SERVICE.223.10 TOW SERVICE-OBTAINING.Prior to impounding any vehicle, an employeeshall check the identification number andlicense number through SVS. All requests fortow service shall be made through thecommunications control operator. The requestshall include the license, motor, oridentification number, when available.Additionally, moped identification numbersshall be checked through the AutomatedProperty System (APS).

Heavy-Duty Tow. An employee shall requestheavy-duty tow service when the vehicle to betowed:

∗ Has three or more axles; or,∗ Has a gross weight, laden or unladen, in

excess of 10,000 pounds; or,∗ Is a combination of commercial trailers; or,∗ Is determined by the requesting employee to

require heavy-duty equipment.

Note: To ensure the dispatch of the proper towunit, the employee should briefly explain whyheavy-duty tow is being requested, the type ofvehicle involved, and the nature of the towingrequirement (e.g., "Heavy-duty tow servicerequested for three-axle truck-tractor withthirty-five-foot, fully loaded semi-trailer, bothover-turned in roadway.")

223.20 TOW SERVICE REQUESTS FORCHP OFFICERS. An employee at the sceneof a traffic collision which is the responsibilityof the CHP shall not normally request towservice. If circumstances require an immediaterequest, the employee shall indicate that therequest is being made on behalf of the CHP.

223.30 ASSISTANCE REQUESTED BYPRIVATE PERSON. When the operator of avehicle stalled on a highway desires assistancein the servicing, repairing, or removal of hisvehicle, and no telephone facilities arereasonably available, he/she shall be informedthat a request will be relayed to an agency ofhis choosing. When the operator is unable tospecify a particular agency, employees shallnotify, through the communications controloperator, an official police garage.

The control operator shall be informed of thefollowing:

∗ That assistance is being requested for theoperator of a stalled vehicle.

∗ The name of the agency to be notified.(When the operator of a stalled vehiclerequests service from an automobile club,the employee shall determine if the operatorhas a valid membership card.)

∗ The license number of the vehicle.∗ Apparent trouble.∗ Exact location of the vehicle.

The Department assumes no responsibility forthe reliability or the cost of the servicerendered.

223.40 MOVING STALLED VEHICLESWITH POLICE AUTOMOBILES.Employees may use a police automobile topush another vehicle only when:

∗ It is necessary to clear the road; AND,∗ The circumstances indicate neither vehicle

will be damaged by such action.

In such cases, the other automobile shall bemoved no farther than the nearest place ofsafety or legal parking. No attempt shall bemade to start the vehicle during suchmovement.

Note: Care shall be used in moving vehiclesequipped with automatic transmissions. Suchvehicles may be moved short distances atspeeds less than 20 miles per hour.

225. ADVERTISING, UNLAWFUL.225.50 ADVERTISING UNLAWFULLYPOSTED, REMOVAL OF. When advertisingposters are observed posted on utility poles orpublic property, officers shall remove themexcept when posted in such manner, or theamount of postings is such, as to make theirremoval impractical. Officers removing postersshall complete and forward an Employee'sReport, Form 15.7, to the Bureau of StreetMaintenance, Department of Public Works.The form shall contain the:

∗ Manner of posting.∗ General content of the postings.∗ Location from which removed.

When it is impractical for officers to removesuch posters, the location of the posters and thereason for non-removal shall be indicated onan Employee's Report, which shall beforwarded in the same manner.

226. VEHICLE IMPOUNDHEARINGS.

226.05 TYPES OF HEARINGS.Pre-Impound Hearings. A pre-impoundhearing is held to determine if probable causeexists to remove a parked vehicle in violationof Section 80.77(a) of the Los AngelesMunicipal Code (LAMC) 72-hour parkingrestriction or 22669(a) California Vehicle Code(CVC) abandoned vehicle.

Post-Impound Hearings. Post impoundhearings are held to determine whether

probable cause existed to impound a particularvehicle and to determine who is responsible forthe payment of the impound and/or storagefees.

Note: Supervisors shall conduct hearings onlyfor those vehicles impounded by employees ofthis Department.

Time Limit. Unless mutual arrangements aremade to the contrary, all post-storage vehicleimpound hearings shall be held within 48 hoursof receipt of a written, telephonic, or personalrequest by the registered or legal owner of animpounded vehicle or their agent.

The outcome of the post-storage hearing shallnot affect any related traffic citation or othercriminal proceedings which may be broughtagainst the owner or claimant of theimpounded vehicle. The Department and/or thecitizen may present witnesses and evidence ata post-storage vehicle impound hearing.

All vehicle impound hearings shall beconducted and available to the appellant (i.e.,legal owner, registered owner, or their agent)Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.The hearing times shall be conducted duringnormal business hours as established by eachArea.

226.20 IMPOUND HEARINGS -EMPLOYEE’S RESPONSIBILITY.Pre-Impound Hearings. A Departmentemployee receiving a request for apre-impound hearing shall:

∗ Check the duplicate Warning of ParkingViolation File to determine if the request iswithin the 24-hour time limit; and,

∗ Direct the appellant to the Area VehicleImpound Hearing Coordinator to schedulea hearing and provide the Area VehicleImpound Hearing Coordinator a copy of theVehicle Report, CHP Form 180.

Post-Impound Hearings. A Departmentemployee receiving a request for apost-impound hearing shall:

∗ Determine if the vehicle was impoundedfrom within the employee's Area/division. Ifnot, direct the citizen to the appropriateArea or division, contact the appropriateArea Vehicle Impound Hearing Coordinatorand schedule a hearing for the appellant;

∗ If impounded from within the Area of therequest, obtain a copy of the VehicleReport, CHP Form 180;

∗ Confirm that the request is within the 10day time limit;

Note: The 10-day period may be extended bythe Area Vehicle Impound HearingCoordinator.

∗ Direct the appellant to the Area VehicleImpound Hearing Coordinator to schedulea hearing; and,

∗ Provide the Area Vehicle Impound HearingCoordinator with a copy of the VehicleReport, CHP Form 180.



226.25 IMPOUND HEARINGS-COMMANDING OFFICER’SRESPONSIBILITY. Area/divisioncommanding officers shall ensure that:

∗ An adequate number of supervisors withintheir command receive Probable CauseVehicle Impound Hearing Procedurestraining; and,

∗ Only those supervisors who have receivedDepartment approved training andcertification conduct vehicle impoundhearings.

226.30 IMPOUND HEARINGS – AREAVEHICLE IMPOUND HEARINGCOORDINATOR’S RESPONSIBILITY.The auto theft detective coordinator isdesignated as the Area Vehicle ImpoundHearing Coordinator and shall monitor andsupervise impound hearing procedures. Allvehicle impound hearings shall be conducted atthe Area where the impound occurred.Hearings shall only be conducted byemployees of a supervisory rank, who havereceived Probable Cause Vehicle ImpoundHearing Procedures training and are assignedto the Area Detective Section, Auto Theft Unit.

Exception: If the impounding employee isassigned to the Area Detective Section, AutoTheft Unit, a detective supervisor trained inimpound hearing procedures, other than asupervisor assigned to the Area DetectiveSection, Auto Theft Unit, shall conduct thehearing.

Impound hearings for vehicles impounded bytraffic division units or non-patrol units shallbe conducted within the Area of impoundment.

Upon receiving a request for an impoundhearing, the Area Vehicle Impound HearingCoordinator shall:

∗ Schedule an impound hearing within 48hours of the request unless mutually waivedby the requesting party and the Department;and,

∗ Notify the impounding officer(s) of thehearing date, time, and location. Inform theimpounding officer(s) that he/she shall bepresent at the impound hearing. Notificationshall be attempted first in person by servingthe officer(s) with the Impound Summonsand Notice, Form 16.27.4 (Service of theImpound Summons and Notice shall be inaccordance with Manual Section 3/210).Department procedures governing court andadministrative hearing appearances (e.g.,sick, training) shall apply to impoundhearings. Additionally, appearance by asworn employee of the rank of Lieutenantor below at an impound hearing outside ofnormal duty hours shall be in accordancewith the court time provisions of the currentMemorandum of Understanding. When in-person notification is not possible,telephonic notification shall be attempted.

Note: Telephonic notification should beaccompanied by a facsimile of the Impound

Summons and Notice form, when possible.

226.32 DOCUMENTATION OFVEHICLE IMPOUND HEARINGS. Allvehicle impound hearings shall be conducted inperson and tape-recorded to facilitate thetestimony and cross-examination of theimpounding officer(s) and witnesses.

Recordings shall be retained in accordancewith established Department proceduresoutlined in Manual Sections 3/569.20 and3/569.40.

The Area Vehicle Impound HearingCoordinator shall retain all material inaccordance with record retention guidelinesand a roster of those participating in theimpound hearing. These records shall be storedat the Area where the impound hearingoccurred for a period of three years.

227. ASSAULT WITH A MOTORVEHICLE.

Motor Vehicle Used As A Deadly Weapon.Whenever a motor vehicle is used as theweapon in an assault with a deadly weaponcrime, and the suspect’s vehicle makes contactwith the victim and/or any vehicle occupied bythe victim, the reporting officer shall:

∗ Complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR), Form 3.1 titled “ADW with aVehicle;”

∗ Complete a diagram which accuratelydepicts the assault on a blank white sheet of8 ½” X 11” paper; and,

Note: The diagram shall be page two of thePIR. The page number shall be documented inthe upper-left corner of the diagram, and thetitle of the crime report shall be placed in theupper center of the page. The Division ofRecords (DR) number shall be documented inthe upper-right corner.

∗ Complete the narrative portion of the PIRon a continuation sheet.

Note: Traffic collision investigators shall notroutinely be responsible for investigating anassault with a motor vehicle; however, theyshall provide advice to the investigating officerwhen requested.

Motor Vehicle Used As A Deadly Weapon –No Contact. Whenever a motor vehicle is usedas the weapon in an assault with a deadlyweapon, and the suspect’s vehicle does notmake contact with the victim or the vehiclethat the victim occupies, the reporting officershall complete a PIR, Form 3.1, titled “ADWwith a Vehicle.” No diagram is required.

Motor Vehicle Used As A Deadly Weapon –Third Party Contact. Whenever a motorvehicle is used as the weapon in an assault witha deadly weapon, and the suspect’s vehicledoes not make contact with the victim or thevehicle that the victim occupies, but strikesanother person, vehicle, or fixed objectresulting in a reportable traffic collision; thereporting officer is not required to complete a

diagram in conjunction with the crime report,but shall complete a PIR, Form 3.1 titled“ADW with a Vehicle” and the appropriatetraffic report.

∗ Obtain the appropriate vehicle ormiscellaneous DR number (Manual Section5/040.65).

Note: An assault with a motor vehicle does notconstitute a traffic collision.

229. VEHICULAR AIR BAGS.

229.10 DETONATION AND BOOKINGOF VEHICULAR AIR BAG MODULES.Employee’s Responsibility. Employees whocome in contact with an uninstalled air bagmodule which has been detonated (i.e., bagdeployed, preservative powder residue visible)shall recover and book the detonated air bagmodule in accordance with standard propertybooking procedures. No special handling isrequired.

Employees who come in contact with anuninstalled, undetonated air bag module shall:

∗ Secure the immediate area;∗ Request the Bomb Squad, Hazardous

Devices Section, Emergency ServicesDivision, to respond to the scene;

Note: During off-hours, the Bomb Squad maybe contacted through the DepartmentCommand Post, Communications Division.

∗ Complete a Property Report, Form 10.01,including the name of the Bomb Squadmember who detonated or took custody ofthe air bag module; and,

∗ If the module was detonated by the BombSquad, recover and book the remains of themodule in accordance with standardproperty booking procedures.

Hazardous Devices Section, EmergencyServices Division’s Responsibility. TheHazardous Devices Section shall:

∗ Respond to all requests involving air bagmodule(s);

∗ Detonate air bag modules if appropriate;and,

∗ Assume custody and storage of air bagmodules contained in the manufacturer’soriginal packaging.

232. BURGLARY.232.10 BURGLARY - SAFE INVOLVED.Officers conducting a preliminary investigationof a burglary in which a safe was attacked, inaddition to completing the required reports,shall immediately:

∗ Telephone all available information to theSafe Detail, Burglary Special Section,Commercial Crimes Division; and,

∗ Request the services of a specialist toconduct a fingerprint investigation (ManualSections 4/212.15 and 4/212.44).

Exception: When the safe is removed from the



premises or the item of attack is an insulatedfiling cabinet, telephone all availableinformation to the concerned geographicinvestigative division.

232.15 ROBBERY OR BURGLARY OFJEWELRY BUSINESS LOCATIONS -NOTIFICATIONS REQUIRED. Officersconducting preliminary investigations ofrobberies or burglaries where jewelry is theprimary object of attack (e.g., jewelry stores,department stores, jewelry counters, pawnshops, sales persons, couriers, motor vehicles,etc.) shall:

∗ Notify Robbery-Homicide Division if thecrime is a robbery;

∗ Notify Burglary Special Section,Commercial Crimes Division if the crime isa burglary (includes Burglary from MotorVehicle);

Note: During off-hours, notifications shall bemade to Detective Support Division.

∗ Document the name and serial number ofthe person notified in the appropriate box onthe preliminary investigation report; and,

∗ Ensure that the preliminary investigationreport is marked so that a copy will bedistributed to the concerned coordinatingdivision (Robbery-Homicide Division andBurglary Special Section, CommercialCrimes Division.

232.20 TELEPHONICNOTIFICATIONS. Officers conducting apreliminary investigation of an offense overwhich Burglary Special Section, CommercialCrimes Division, has jurisdiction (ManualSection 2/480.56) shall notify Burglary SpecialSection, Commercial Crimes Division, orDetective Support Division when BurglarySpecial Section, Commercial Crimes Divisionis closed.

232.40 BURGLARY TOTALING $5,000OR MORE-NOTIFICATION (ManualSection 4/248.70).232.50 BURGLARY-DAMAGE TO ABANK. Whenever an officer conducts apreliminary investigation of an attempted entryor of damage to any bank during those hourswhen the bank is closed, he shall report theincident to:

∗ Detective Support Division by telephone;or,

∗ The Communications control operator byradio.

232.60 BURGLARY-VEHICLE TAKEN(Manual Section 4/220.50).232.70 BURGLARY FROM AIRCRAFTAND RAILROAD CARS. Burglaries fromaircraft and railroad cars shall be reported on aPreliminary Investigation Report, Form 3.1,and titled Preliminary Investigation of aburglary.

236. BICYCLE, STOLEN-LOST-FOUND-RECOVERED-IMPOUNDED.236.10 BICYCLES, DEFINITION OF."Bicycle," for the purpose of licensingenforcement and reporting on a bicycle relatedreport, shall mean any device upon which aperson may ride, which is propelled by humanpower through a system of belts, chains, orgears and which has wheels at least 20 inchesin diameter and a frame size of at least 14inches.

Note: All bicycles, regardless of size, shall belicensed at the request of the owner.

236.15 BICYCLE BOOKED EXCESSPERSONAL PROPERTY-REPORTREQUIRED. When a bicycle is booked asexcess personal property of an arrestee, theExcess Personal Property Receipt, Form 10.8,is the only report required.

236.20 INVESTIGATION PRIOR TOCOMPLETION OF A BICYCLERELATED REPORT. Before completing abicycle related report, or an Excess PersonalProperty Receipt, Form 10.8, the reportingemployee shall:

∗ Contact Juvenile Division, to obtain anyavailable registration data; and,

∗ Request the record clerk in the geographicarea to query the Automated PropertySystem (APS) to determine the presentstatus of the bicycle.

236.30 NOTIFICATION BYREPORTING EMPLOYEE TO OWNEROF FOUND OR RECOVERED BICYCLE.When a bicycle is found or recovered and theowner's identity is determined at the time ofimpounding, the reporting employee shallcause a Property Owner's Notification, Form10.14, to be completed and mailed.

Note: The reporting employee shall cause to benoted on the appropriate report, whether theForm 10.14 has been mailed.

236.45 TAGS ON BICYCLES ORBICYCLE FRAMES. A No. 7, plain manilatag shall be attached to each bicycle frame orbicycle with a wheel diameter of 20 inches ormore which comes into the custody of theDepartment. The booking employee shall writethe date, frame number, and DR number oneach tag and attach it to the frame.

236.50 BICYCLES WITH FRAMENUMBERS MISSING OR ALTERED.When a bicycle is taken into custody whichdoes not have a frame number or which hashad the frame number altered or obliterated,the concerned employee shall:

∗ Book the bicycle "Found" or "Recovered,""Hold for Area Bicycle Officer;"

∗ Write the date and DR number on a No. 7,plain manila tag and attach it to the frame;and,

∗ Include in the body of the appropriatereport, a statement of the condition of theframe number.

236.55 ERROR IN REPORTINGRECOVERY. When a bicycle is erroneouslyreported as recovered, the employeediscovering the error shall complete aFollow-up Report, Form 3.14. A copy of theFollow-up Report shall be forwarded to theAutomated Vehicle and Property Section,Records and Identification Division.

236.75 REGISTRATION OF BICYCLES.When a person requests that a bicycle beregistered regardless of the size, theresponsible station personnel shall:

∗ Determine if the bicycle has a framenumber. If the bicycle does not have aframe number, obtain a Department bicycleframe number from Juvenile Division, andstamp that number into the bottom of thesprocket hanger;

∗ Complete a California Bicycle Licenseapplication and give the pink copy to theperson registering the bicycle;

∗ Collect the registration fee and deposit it inthe divisional Bicycle License FundAccount;

∗ Attach the bicycle license to the seat postmast two inches below the crossbar; and,

∗ Forward the completed Bicycle Registrationto Juvenile Division.

238. DEAD BODIES.238.10 DETERMINING DEATH. Exceptwhen a person is obviously dead, it shall be theresponsibility of the emergency ambulancecrew to determine if death has occurred.

238.15 DEATH INVESTIGATIONS ONFREEWAYS WITHIN THE CITY. TheCalifornia Highway Patrol (CHP) has theprimary responsibility for the investigation ofdeaths resulting from traffic collisions onfreeways within the City. The Department isresponsible for the investigation of all otherdeaths which occur on freeways within theCity.

Officers who are called to the scene of anincident involving a death on a freeway shallconduct a preliminary investigation and makethe required notifications when it is determinedto be the investigative responsibility of the LosAngeles Police Department. When a conflictarises between Department and CHP personnelregarding investigative responsibility for theincident, a Department supervisor shall berequested immediately. The supervisorresponding to the scene shall ensure that thecall is properly handled and the appropriatenotifications are made.

238.17 DEATH INVESTIGATIONS OFJUVENILES UNDER 11 YEARS OF AGE.Officers assigned a call involving thepreliminary investigation of the death of ajuvenile under 11 years of age, shall contactJuvenile Division, Abused Child Unit, forexpertise and advice.

Note: During non-business hours, patrolpersonnel shall contact Detective SupportDivision (DSD).



Detective Support Division, DetectiveInformation Section, is responsible forconducting preliminary investigations ofundetermined deaths of juveniles under 11years of age during non-business hours.

Exception: Area detective divisions withinOperations-Valley Bureau (OVB) areresponsible for conducting the preliminaryinvestigations of undetermined deaths ofjuveniles under 11 years of age, which occurwithin OVB, during non-business hours.

238.20 AMBULANCE REQUESTED ATSCENE OF APPARENT DEATH. Anambulance shall be requested at the scene of anapparent death when:

∗ There is no doctor in attendance; and,∗ There is a possibility, even if remote, that

the person may be alive.

If death has occurred, a Rescue Report, FormF660, shall be obtained from the ambulancecrew and attached to the Death Report, Form3.11.

238.23 DEAD BODIES EXPOSED TOPUBLIC VIEW. When a dead body whichdoes not come within the jurisdiction of theCoroner (Manual Section 4/238.46) is exposedto public view, an ambulance shall berequested. The body shall be released asdirected by the investigating officers.

When a dead body which comes within thejurisdiction of the Coroner (Manual Section4/238.46) is exposed to public view, theinvestigating officers shall notify the seniorCoroner's investigator immediately as soon aspracticable. The investigating officers shall beguided by the instructions of the Coroner'srepresentative dispatched to the scene.

When a supervisor at the scene of a deathdetermines that a dead body exposed to publicview would probably create an adverseincident, he/she shall notify the seniorCoroner's investigator, who will arrange tohave the body removed immediately byambulance. The instructions of the Coronershall be given to the ambulance crew.

238.26 TRANSPORTATION OF DEADBODIES. A dead body which comes under thejurisdiction of the Coroner (Manual Section4/238.46) shall not be removed to a funeralestablishment except on instructions of adeputy coroner.

238.30 SEARCHING DEAD BODIES.The officer in charge at the scene of a deadbody shall prevent any person, other than adeputy coroner, from searching the body.

Whenever possible, a witness, preferably arelative of the deceased or a member of thehousehold, shall be requested to remain at thescene with the officer. The name and addressof this person, and a statement verifying hispresence, shall be included in the DeathReport, Form 3.11. Whenever personal effectsand possessions of the deceased are taken bythe deputy coroner, a receipt shall be obtained

(Manual Section 4/238.48). This receipt shallbe attached to the Death Report.

238.35 NOTIFICATION TODEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE. TheCommanding Officer, Force InvestigationDivision, shall notify the Department ofJustice, Bureau of Criminal Statistics,Statistical Data Center, in writing within tendays of the occurrence, of each in-custodydeath and provide the appropriate informationrelating to the death.

238.36 NOTIFICATION TODEPARTMENT OF CORRECTIONS. TheCommanding Officer, Force InvestigationDivision, shall notify the State of CaliforniaBoard of Corrections, in writing within tencalendar days of the occurrence, of each in-custody death of a detained juvenile. Thenotification shall include the appropriateinformation relating to the death.

238.40 NOTIFICATION TOINVESTIGATING OFFICERS OFDEATH. Officers assigned a dead body callshall telephone, without delay, the concernedgeographic investigating officers and notifythem of the circumstances. They shall beinformed if there is any indication that a deathmight be suicide or homicide. DetectiveSupport Division shall be notified of thecircumstances if the concerned investigatingofficers are not available. Officers shall abideby instructions of the investigating officers.

238.43 NOTIFICATION TO NEXT OFKIN OF DECEASED PERSON. Wheneverpracticable, notification to the next of kin ofthe deceased person shall be made in person bythe investigating officers. If the next of kinlives in another Area, a police unit of that Areashall be requested to make the personalnotification. If the next of kin lives outside theCity, the Coroner shall be requested to makethe notification.

Generally, an in-person notification is thepreferred method of informing the next of kinof a death. However, circumstances mayindicate a need for an alternative method ofmaking such a notification (e.g.,telephonically). Officers should use their bestjudgement in making a determination as to themethod of notification to the next of kin of adeceased person.

238.46 NOTIFICATION TO CORONER.It shall be the responsibility of theinvestigating officers to immediately notify theCoroner of all deaths occurring: (1)

∗ When the deceased died while under arrest,while being temporarily detained or whileunder the care or control of an officer of theDepartment;

∗ When the deceased has not been attendedby a physician within twenty dayspreceding death;

∗ When the deceased committed suicide;∗ When the attending physician is unable to

state the cause of death;

∗ When the deceased died as the result of anaccident;

∗ When there is any suspicion that the deathresulted from the use of narcotics; and,

∗ Under such circumstances as to afford areasonable ground to suspect that death wascaused by the criminal act of another.

[(1)Health and Safety Code Section 10250.]

If the Coroner is not immediately needed at thescene of a death which requires notification,the investigating officer shall advise theCoroner of an approximate time when theCoroner's deputy can respond. If no time canbe estimated, the investigating officer shallarrange to make a second notification to theCoroner when response is appropriate.

Note: When circumstances indicate that theinvestigation of the death requires the expertiseof a specialized investigator (e.g., homicidedetective, traffic collision investigator),notification to the Coroner shall be made bythe concerned specialized investigator whoresponds to the scene of the incident, withinone hour of his/her arrival to an incident.Preliminary notification to the Coroner’sOffice shall include an estimated time whenthe Coroner’s investigator will be needed at thescene. The specialized investigator shall ensurethe Coroner’s investigator has access to thedecedent, in order to conduct a preliminaryexam of the body, as soon as possible.Particular consideration shall be given to thosesituations in which determining the time ofdeath is a critical issue or in which therecovery of biological evidence is crucial to theinvestigation. The Coroner’s investigator shallbe advised of the facts necessary to precludethe possible destruction of evidence. If thedeath is determined to be an obvious naturaldeath and falls within the purview of theCoroner's Office, the investigating officerinitially responding to the scene shall make theimmediate notification.

238.48 PROPERTY TO CORONER. Anofficer at the scene of a death requiring a DeathReport, Form 3.11 (Manual Section 5/3.11),shall obtain an itemized receipt from theCoroner's deputy for all property, including thecontents of wallets and purses, removed fromthe scene by such deputy. The receipt shall bestapled to the original of the Death Report.

Suicide Notes. Original suicide notes shallaccompany the body to a Coroner's mortuary.Portions of suicide notes pertaining to thesuicidal act shall be quoted in the Death Reportwhen practicable. When a copy of the originalsuicide note is desired by investigatingofficers, a photocopy may be obtained from theCoroner's Office. When the original note isneeded for crime laboratory study, it shall beobtained from the Coroner's Office by amember of Scientific Investigation Division.

Poisons and Drugs. All poisons, drugs, andtheir containers suspected of being connectedwith a suicide shall accompany the body to theCoroner's Office.



Firearms. All firearms suspected of beingsuicide weapons shall be booked as evidence toprovide the opportunity to test such firearms.The investigating officer shall be responsiblefor determining the final disposition of thefirearm (Manual Section 4/560.40).

238.55 PHOTOGRAPHING DEADBODIES AT THE CORONER'S OFFICE.Photographers from Scientific InvestigationDivision shall not photograph dead bodies atthe Coroner's Office without being requested todo so by a concerned detective, and suchrequests shall be limited to specific situations.

Department personnel, responsible forinvestigations involving dead bodies that havecome within the jurisdiction of the Coroner'sOffice, shall, in investigating routine cases, usethose photographs taken during normalCoroner Office proceedings. Coronerphotographs are taken in series which includesan identification photo and photographsappropriate to the concerned postmortemexamination.

Detectives desiring specific photographs mayrequest such photographs by consulting theconcerned Coroner's Office Senior Investigatoreither prior to or at the time of the postmortemexamination.

Detectives who need Coroner's photographs ofa dead body shall:

∗ Telephonically contact the Subpoena Deskof the Coroner's Office;

∗ Provide the Coroner's Case Number; and,∗ Request copies of the Coroner's

photographs.

Note: Photographs are taken at the time of theautopsy and are normally available withinthree working days of the date on which thephotographs were taken.

Photographers from Scientific InvestigationDivision shall be requested to photograph deadbodies at the Coroner's Office only in thefollowing cases:

∗ Law enforcement activity-related deaths;and,

∗ Unusual cases where routine Coronerphotographs have missed some item whichis vital to a successful homicide or trafficinvestigation.

Law Enforcement Activity-Related Deaths.When a Department photograph of a dead bodyat the Coroner's Office is required because ofan in-custody death, law enforcementactivity-related death, and/or officer-involvedshooting death, the concerned Detective shall:

∗ Make a telephonic request to ScientificInvestigation Division, Photo Lab;

∗ Specify exactly what is to be photographed;and,

∗ Supply the DR number and Coroner's CaseNumber.

The concerned Department photographer shall:

∗ Contact the on-duty Senior CoronerInvestigator and make arrangements for thephotographing;

∗ Attempt to schedule the photographybetween 0500 and 1300 hours; and,

∗ Be present at the scheduled time andproceed with the photography.

Unusual Cases. When a Departmentphotograph of a dead body at the Coroner'sOffice is necessary for an unusual case whereroutine Coroner photographs have missed someitem which is vital to a successful homicide ortraffic investigation, the concerned detectiveshall:

∗ Make a telephonic request to ScientificInvestigation Division, Photo Lab;

∗ Specify exactly what is to be photographed,and provide the DR number;

∗ Attempt to schedule the photographybetween 0500 and 1300 hours;

∗ Note the date and time the photographerwill arrive at the Coroner's Office;

∗ Contact the on-duty Senior CoronerInvestigator immediately thereafter, andmake arrangements for the photographing;and,

∗ Be present to direct the photography for theDepartment photographer.

238.60 UNIDENTIFIED DEAD BODIES.When the identity of a dead body is unknown,the reporting officer shall obtain the "JohnDoe" or "Jane Doe" number from the Coroner'sdeputy at the scene. Pending identification, thenumber shall be used in lieu of the decedent'sname.

238.65 DEATH OF PRISONERS INDIVISION JAILS. When a prisoner dies in adivision jail, the investigating officer, inaddition to conducting the usual investigationand completing the usual reports, shall:

∗ Cause the completion of a Jail TransferRecord, Form 6.11, transferring theprisoner's personal property to the Coroner;

∗ Send a Notification of Prisoner ReleaseTeletype to the Automated JusticeInformation System (Manual Section4/165.32); and,

∗ Ensure that the Supervisor, JailDispensaries, Medical Services Division,Personnel Department, is notified.Notification shall be routinely made as soonas possible during normal duty hours,Monday-Friday, 0730-1630 hours.

238.83 HOMICIDE. The first officer toarrive at the scene of a homicide shallimmediately isolate the vicinity where thecrime was committed, or the body was found.It shall be his or her responsibility to see thatno one be permitted to approach the scene untilinvestigating officers arrive and take charge ofthe case. Upon arrival, the investigatingofficers shall be in charge of the investigation.Officers assigned to any duty at the scene shallremain until they are relieved by theinvestigating officers.

240. DRUNK ARRESTS.

240.10 DRUNK ARREST PROCEDURE.Pre-Booking. Officers who arrest anindividual for 647(f) P.C. (Drunk) shall:

∗ Ensure that the arrestee receives a screeningby medically trained personnel to determinewhether the arrestee should be booked orhospitalized;

Note: If the arrestee is to be released to anevaluation and treatment facility(detoxification center), medical treatment shallbe obtained if the arrestee displayed symptomsof unconsciousness as described in ManualSection 4/210.23.

∗ Secure a copy of the Medical TreatmentRecord (M.T.) for submission with theArrest Report at the time the arrestee isbooked; and,

∗ Present the arrestee to the Area watchcommander or the Watch Commander,Metropolitan Jail Section, Jail Division,who shall determine whether the arresteeshould be prosecuted or released under849(b)(2) P.C.

Exception: In instances when 647(f) P.C.(Drunk) arrestees who are to be released underprovision of 849(b) (2) P.C. are transported toMetropolitan Jail Section by B-Wagon, thewatch commander assigned to MetropolitanJail Section misdemeanor intake section shall,after reviewing the circumstances of the arrestand approving detention when appropriate,assume responsibility for ensuring thatarrestees receive medical screening.

When prosecution is warranted, the arrestingofficer shall complete a long form arrest reportthoroughly documenting the circumstances ofthe arrest.

Booking. Booking personnel shall determinefrom the arresting/transporting officer whetherthe arrestee is to be prosecuted or released.Arrestees who are to be prosecuted shall befully processed. Arrestees who are to bereleased without prosecution shall not routinelybe fingerprinted on Form FD249 and shall notbe photographed.

Exception: Arresting and/or investigatingofficers may, however, request photographsand fingerprints for purposes of identificationregardless of the impending release of thearrestee.

When no prosecution is warranted and thearrestee is eligible for release, the Short ArrestReport, Form 5.2.1, shall also serve as abooking approval and booking slip.

When prosecution is requested, the bookingemployee shall record, in the charge section ofthe Form 5.1, Consolidated Booking Form, thenotation “647(f) P.C. Drunk/Filing Requested.”

240.25 RELEASE OF 647(f) P.C.ARRESTEES UNDER 849(b)(2) P.C. Anadult who is booked only for 647(f) P.C.



(Drunk) shall normally be released under849(b) (2) P.C. after a period of detoxification(minimum of 4 hours) unless one or more ofthe following reasons exist for non-release:

∗ The arrestee has a want or warrant;∗ The arrestee requests that he/she be taken

before a magistrate;∗ The safety of the arrestee or others may be

jeopardized by the release; or,∗ There are other specific articulated facts

justifying continued detention and/orprosecution.

Exception: Prior to complete detoxification,arrestees may be released to a medical facilityor to a friend or relative capable of assumingresponsibility for the care of the arrestee.

The watch commander approving the bookingof an arrestee ineligible for release under849(b)(2) P.C. shall make a notation in thenarrative portion of the Booking Approval,Form 12.31, indicating the reason(s) forineligibility. Additionally, the watchcommander shall ensure that the arrestingofficer(s) include all facts substantiating thereason(s) for non-release in a long form arrestreport (Manual Section 5/5.2).

Exception: A long form arrest report is notrequired for an arrestee who is ineligible solelybecause of a misdemeanor warrant unlesscompletion is required under Manual Section4/725.48.

Circumstances arising after booking whichnecessitate continued detention of an arresteeshall be noted on the reverse side of thedetention officer’s copy of the Form 12.31.The notation shall be initialed by a supervisor.

If, with the passage of time, the reason fornonrelease is eliminated, the arrestee shall thenbe released under 849(b)(2) P.C. Examples:

∗ The arrestee posts bail for any warrants.∗ The arrestee withdraws a request to be taken

before a magistrate.

When circumstances indicate that thecontinued detention of an arrestee is no longernecessary but prosecution is desired, thearrestee shall be considered for a release on awritten promise to appear (O.R.).

240.50 INSULIN SHOCK. When a persontaken into custody on a drunk chargecomplains or otherwise indicates that thearrestee is a diabetic suffering from insulinshock, the arrestee shall be taken immediatelyto a jail dispensary or contract hospital. Thearrestee shall be released if the examiningphysician finds that the arrestee is notintoxicated but is suffering from:

∗ Insulin shock, or the effects of some otherdrug taken under the direction of aphysician; or,

∗ An illness or injury, the symptoms of whichresemble those of intoxication.

242. FIRES.242.25 NOTIFICATIONS TO FIREDEPARTMENT. When officers at the sceneof a potential fire (e.g. unignited fire bomb), orextinguished fire (e.g. torched stolen vehicle)determine that a call has not been sent to theFire Department, they shall notify the FireDepartment of the circumstances throughCommunications Division.

242.50 ARSON SUSPECTED. Whenofficers at the scene of a potential fire, orextinguished fire have reason to suspect thatarson is involved, they shall notify DetectiveInformation Section, Detective SupportDivision, without delay. Officers shall beguided by instructions received from DetectiveSupport Division.

242.53 ARSON INVESTIGATIONS.When an arson is immediately associated withthe commission of another crime which is theinvestigative responsibility of a unit of thePolice Department, that unit shall beresponsible for conducting the investigation.The Fire Department Arson Section willprovide technical expertise regarding the originof the fire.

Note: When an arson-related fraud does notinvolve another crime other than arson itself,the Fire Department will be responsible forconducting the investigation. CommercialCrimes Division shall provide investigativeassistance to the Fire Department investigators.

Interviews of Arrestees. When an arrestee isto be interviewed regarding an arson-relatedoffense, the investigating officer shall,whenever practicable, request the presence ofa Fire Department arson investigator.

News Releases. News releases concerningarson-related crimes shall not be released torepresentatives of the news media until thecontents have been approved by theappropriate personnel of both the Fire andPolice Departments (Manual Section1/420.50).

242.55 FIRE DEPARTMENTNOTIFICATIONS OF MOLOTOVCOCKTAIL INCIDENTS. Upon receiptfrom the Los Angeles Fire Department of thefield incident investigation report, forward onecopy to the concerned Area commandingofficer; and forward one copy to theCommanding Officer, Criminal ConspiracySection, Major Crimes Division.

243. HIGH-RISK PRONE SEARCH.

Officer's Responsibility. When the high-riskprone search is used, the officer shall explainthe reason for its use to the involved parties. Ifthe officer is unsuccessful in convincing theparties that the search tactic was necessary andappropriate, the officer shall request that asupervisor respond to the scene.

Supervisor's Responsibility. When requestedto respond to an incident where the high-riskprone search has been used, a supervisor shall

determine whether use of the search tactic wasappropriate and assist the officer in making theproper explanation to the involved parties. Theincident shall then be fully documented.

244. FIREARMS, DISCHARGE OF.244.30 DISCHARGE OF FIREARMSNOTIFICATION. An officer, on or off duty,who discharges a firearm, or an officerconducting a preliminary investigation of thedischarge of any firearms, involving an officer,shall notify, or cause to be notified, as soon aspracticable, the Administrative Unit, DetectiveSupport Division, stating the facts of theoccurrence (Manual Section 4/210.28).

244.50 WRITTEN REPORTS ONDISCHARGE OF FIREARMS. Alldischarges of firearms shall be reported. Whenthe discharge of a firearm is not covered inother reports requiring a DR or bookingnumber, a Discharge of Firearms Report, Form3.20, shall be completed. A completedescription of the firearm involved shall beincluded in all reports covering the facts of ashooting. This description shall include:

∗ Make;∗ Type;∗ Caliber or gauge;∗ Finish;∗ Barrel length;∗ Serial number;∗ Frame number;∗ Type or color of grips or stock;∗ Marks or initials; and,∗ Unusual features.

When Los Angeles police officers dischargetheir firearm, neither the officer's residenceaddress nor telephone number shall be includedin the report. The description of the firearmneed only include the make, caliber, and serialnumber.

244.55 DELIVERY OF REPORT OFDISCHARGE OF FIREARM. The officercompleting the investigation of the dischargeof a firearm not resulting in a gunshot woundby a Department employee shall ensure that acopy of the report is delivered to the Office ofthe Chief of Police within ten administrativeworking days of the incident. The distributionof such reports is listed in Manual Section5/3.20-80.

244.90 FIREARMS USED FORTRAINING. Officers shall never point afirearm capable of firing live ammunition atanother person during training. Officersparticipating in any non live-fire training suchas situation/simulation scenarios where theneed to simulate the use of a firearm isnecessary, shall only utilize firearms that havebeen rendered unable to fire live ammunition.In addition, officers shall only utilize firearmsthat have been color-coded (Manual Section3/610.97), and approved as training firearms bythe Firearms Training Unit, Training Division.



245. EMPLOYEE-INVOLVED USEOF FORCE INCIDENTS.245.02 OFFICER’S PUBLIC SAFETYSTATEMENT - CATEGORICAL USE OFFORCE INCIDENTS. Employees involved ina Categorical use of force shall provide apublic safety statement to the first arrivingsupervisor. The statement shall include, butnot be limited to the following:

∗ Type of force used;∗ Direction and approximate number of any

shots fired by the involved employee(s)and/or suspect(s), if applicable;

∗ Location of injured persons, including thosein need of medical attention, if any;

∗ Description of outstanding suspect(s) andhis/her direction(s) of travel, time elapsedsince the suspect was last seen, and anysuspect weapon(s);

∗ Description and location of any knownvictims or witnesses;

∗ Description and location of any knownevidence; and,

∗ Other information as necessary to ensureofficer and public safety and assist in theapprehension of outstanding suspects(s).

After providing sufficient information, theemployee shall remain separated from otherinvolved/witness employees and shall notdiscuss the incident with anyone other than theassigned investigators and the employee’srepresentative.

245.05 REPORTABLE NON-CATEGORICAL USE OF FORCEINCIDENTS.

Defined. A reportable use of force incident isclassified, per the Consent Decree, as eitherCategorical or Non-Categorical. Categoricaluses of force are outlined in Manual Section3/794.10. All other reportable uses of force,including the discharge of a TASER or use ofa chemical irritant control device, are classifiedas Non-Categorical use of force incidents.

Exception: Under any circumstances, thedischarge of a less-lethal projectile weapon(e.g., beanbag shogun, TASER, 37mm or40mm projectile launcher, any chemicalcontrol dispenser or Compressed Air ProjectileSystem) that does not contact a person is notreportable as a Non-Categorical use of force.Instead, such incidents shall be reported on anEmployee’s Report, Form 15.7.

A reportable Non-Categorical use of force isdefined as an incident in which any on-dutyDepartment employee, or off-duty employeewhose occupation as a Department employee isa factor, uses a less-lethal control device orphysical force to:

∗ Compel a person to comply with theemployee's direction; or,

∗ Overcome resistance of a person during anarrest or a detention; or,

∗ Defend any individual from an aggressiveaction by another person;

The following incidents are not reportable as aNon-Categorical use of force:

∗ The use of a C-grip, firm grip, or joint lockto compel a person to comply with anemployee’s direction which does not resultin an injury or complained of injury;

∗ The use of force reasonable to overcomepassive resistance due to physical disability,mental illness, intoxication, or musclerigidity of a person (e.g., use of a C-grip orfirm grip, joint lock, joint lock walk downor body weight) which does not result in aninjury or complained of injury;

Example: An officer uses a firm grip toovercome a suspect’s initial resistance (i.e.,pulling away) to being handcuffed. Since thereare no injuries or complained of injuries, thisincident is not a reportable use of force.

∗ Under any circumstances, the discharge ofa less-lethal projectile weapon (e.g.,beanbag shotgun, TASER, 37mm or 40mmprojectile launcher, any chemical controldispenser or Compressed Air ProjectileSystem) that does not contact a person;

Note: Such incidents shall be reported on anEmployee’s Report, Form 15.7, and submittedto the commanding officer for review andappropriate action. After all risk management,misconduct, or policy issues are identified, theForm 15.7 shall be forwarded to TrainingGroup for review and retention.

∗ Force used by an organized squad in acrowd control situation, or a riotoussituation when the crowd exhibits hostilebehavior and does not respond to verbaldirections from Department employees.Such incidents are documented via an after-action report or Sergeant’s Daily Report,Form 15.48.0; and,

Note: Isolated incidents resulting from a crowdcontrol situation may require a use of forceinvestigation as determined by a supervisor atthe scene.

∗ Any incident investigated by ForceInvestigation Division (Manual Section3/794.10).

245.10 REPORTING A NON-CATEGORICAL USE OF FORCEINCIDENT.

Employee's Responsibility. An employee whobecomes involved in a reportable Non-Categorical use of force incident shall:

∗ Notify a supervisor without delay;∗ Report the full details of the use of force

incident in the related Department arrest orcrime report;

∗ Use an Employee's Report, Form 15.7, toreport the full details of the use of forceincident when a crime or arrest report is notrequired; and,

∗ Document the name of the investigatingsupervisor in the related arrest or crime

report, or Form 15.7, under the heading“Additional.”

Off-duty employees who become involved ina reportable use of force incident in which theemployee's occupation as a Departmentemployee is a factor shall notify theirsupervisor or watch commander withoutunnecessary delay. Notification shall be madeto the Department Command Post when theemployee's location of assignment is closed.

Note: Off-duty employees completing use offorce related reports shall submit a copy totheir supervisor no later than their nextregularly scheduled tour of duty.

Supervisor's Responsibility. When a Non-Categorical use of force incident occurs, anuninvolved supervisor from the employee'scommand or from the nearest Area when eitherthe employee’s command is closed or theemployee’s supervisor is not available torespond, shall be assigned to conduct theadministrative investigation.

Generally, a supervisor who witnessed a Non-Categorical use of force incident should notconduct a use of force investigation. However,the watch commander may make exceptions ona case-by-case basis, based on exceptionaloperational needs. The watch commandershall document the exceptional operationalneed in the Non-Categorical Use of ForceInternal Process Report (IPR). Under nocircumstances shall a supervisor involved in ause of force incident be permitted to conductthe investigation.

Note: An involved supervisor is defined as asupervisor who provided guidance or directionduring the use of force, or participated in on-scene pre-planning or directing related to theincident. A supervisor who participated in orwitnessed the use of force, planned the event,or was present at a forced blood withdrawalfrom a suspect shall not investigate theincident.

The supervisor assigned to conduct theinvestigation shall:

∗ Respond and conduct an on-sceneinvestigation;

Exception: When an on-scene investigation isimpractical due to exigent circumstances, suchas a hostile group or an off-duty employee’sdistance from the City, the supervisor shallconsult with his/her watch commander orofficer in charge and arrange for a reasonablealternative.

∗ Collect and preserve all appropriateevidence and canvas the scene to locatewitnesses, when appropriate;

∗ Conduct individual interviews with thesubject of the use of force, witnesses, andall Department employees who eitherwitnessed and/or were involved in theincident (group interviews are prohibited);



∗ Determine an initial classification of theNon-Categorical use of force as either aLevel I or Level II incident;

∗ Identify and document any inconsistenciesfrom interviews conducted;

∗ Interview all involved supervisors regardingtheir actions taken;

∗ Review any related crime and/or arrestreport or Employee’s Report, Form 15.7,after it has been approved by the watchcommander/OIC but prior to completing theuse of force investigation, to ensure that theincident as depicted in the related report(s)is consistent with the use of forceinvestigation. A Follow-up Investigation,Form 3.14, may be used to make anynecessary corrections to the related report orto provide additional information;

∗ Complete a Non-Categorical Use of ForceReport, Form 1.67.05, including an attachednarrative; and,

∗ Forward the completed Non-CategoricalUse of Force Report along with all relatedreports, to the watch commander/officer incharge. Generally, a Non-Categorical Useof Force Report should be completed beforethe investigating supervisor’s end of watch.However, complex incidents may requireadditional time not to exceed two calendardays following the incident.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Awatch commander/Officer In Charge (OIC)reviewing a Non-Categorical use of forceinvestigation shall document his/her insight ona Non-Categorical Use of Force InternalProcess Report, Form 1.67.04. As part of thisevaluation, watch commanders/OICs shall:

∗ Evaluate whether or not the amount of forceused was reasonable and consistent withactions reported by the involvedDepartment employee(s), ensuring that allrelevant tactical, use of force, and policyissues are addressed. The watchcommander/OIC shall evaluate the forcethat was used, not the force options thatcould have been considered;

∗ Ensure that all supervisors are interviewedregarding their conduct at the scene duringthe incident; and,

∗ Evaluate the actions of each of thesesupervisors.

Report Approval. Non-Categorical use offorce investigations and any related report(s)(i.e., the crime and/or arrest report or Form15.7), shall be approved by an on-dutywatch commander/OIC or designee ofsupervisory rank. The supervisor whoconducted the Non-Categorical use of forceinvestigation shall not approve the Non-Categorical Use of Force Report or the relatedreport(s).

Note: The watch commander/OIC approvingthe use of force investigation is not required tobe the same watch commander/OIC whoreviewed and approved the related report(s).Generally, the involved Department

employee’s chain of command will conductand approve the use of force investigation.

Example: Officers from Metropolitan Division(Metro) submit an arrest report to the watchcommander, Area of occurrence, while theMetro supervisor assigned to investigate therelated use of force submits the completedinvestigation to his/her Metro OIC.

245.11 NON-CATEGORICAL USE OFFORCE REPORTING LEVELS. All Non-Categorical use of force incidents shall beinitially classified by the investigatingsupervisor as either a Level I or Level IIincident.Level I Incident. A Non-Categorical use offorce shall be reported as a Level I incidentunder the following circumstances:

1. An allegation of unauthorized force ismade regarding the force used by aDepartment employee(s); or,

2. The force used results in a serious injury,such as a broken bone, dislocation, aninjury requiring sutures, etc., that does notrise to the level of a Categorical use offorce incident; or,

Note: If the investigating supervisor is unableto verify the seriousness of an injury orcomplained of injury, it shall be reported as aLevel I incident. If the injury requiresadmission to a hospital, the incident becomesa Categorical use of force and will beinvestigated by Force Investigation Division.

3. The injuries to the person upon whomforce was used are inconsistent with theamount or type of force reported byinvolved Department employee(s); or,

4. Accounts of the incident provided bywitnesses and/or the subject of the use offorce substantially conflict with theinvolved employee(s) account.

Level II Incident. All other reportable Non-Categorical uses of force that do not meetLevel I criteria shall be reported as Level IIincidents. This will include the use of animpact device or less-lethal munitions with hits(Refer to Manual Section 4/245.13 for Level IIreporting guidelines).

Note: If the use of an impact device or less-lethal munitions causes a serious injury such asa broken bone, dislocation, or an injuryrequiring sutures, etc., and does not rise to thelevel of a Categorical use of force, it shall bereported as a Level I incident. Departmentemployees are reminded that any person struckwith a baton shall be transported to aDepartment approved medical facility formedical treatment prior to booking.

245.12 COMPLETING THENARRATIVE – LEVEL I INCIDENT. Inaddition to completing pages 1, 2, and 3 of theNon-Categorical Use of Force Report, Form1.67.05, supervisors investigating a Level I

incident shall prepare and attach a narrativeusing the following headings:1. WITNESS STATEMENT(S).

Supervisors shall interview the subject offorce, witnesses, and all Departmentemployees who either witnessed and/orwere involved in the incident.

A brief written summary of the statementprovided by the subject of the use of forceand/or any witness is only required under thisheading if:

∗ The interview was not tape-recorded (notapplicable to Department employees); or,

∗ The person’s account of the use of force isin substantial conflict with the involvedemployee(s) account.

Example: “Gregory Jones. This witness statedthat he saw a female officer strike the suspectwith a closed fist. The involved officers statedthat they did not strike the suspect at anytime.”

Tape-Recording Witness Statements.Supervisors investigating a Level I incidentshall tape record statements from the subject ofthe use of force and all non-Departmentemployee witnesses. Recorded interviewsshall be conducted in accordance withDepartment guidelines established inComplaint Investigations: A Guide forSupervisors. If tape recording is not practicalor an individual refuses to be tape recorded, theperson shall be listed in the narrative under“Witnesses” along with a explanation as towhy his/her interview was not tape-recordedand a brief written summary of his/her non-taped statement.

Example: “Janet Jones. This witness agreed tobe interviewed on condition that she not betape-recorded. Jones stated that she did notobserve either of the responding officers strikethe suspect.”

Tape-recording interviews with Departmentemployees is not required. The related crimeand/or arrest report or Form 15.7, will serve asdocumentation of the involved Departmentemployee(s) statement. All tape recordings,including those from personal tape recorders,shall be booked at Scientific InvestigationDivision (SID) and have tape numbers issued.Tape numbers shall be documented in the Non-Categorical Use of Force Report.

Consistent Statements. Statements providedby witnessing Department employees that areconsistent with events as depicted in the relatedreport should be noted. Likewise, if statementsprovided by non-Department employeewitnesses are consistent, this similarly shall bedocumented.

Example: “The statements provided by thefollowing witnessing Department employees –Officers Nuno, Blake and Ramirez - wereconsistent with the incident as depicted in thearrest report.”



If a person refuses to provide a statement, thisshall be documented in this section. An attemptshall still be made to obtain the witness’sidentifying information.

2. INJURIES/MEDICALTREATMENT. Document all visibleand complained of injuries, includingany medical treatment provided. Allindividuals receiving medical treatmentshall be asked to sign an Authorizationfor Release of Medical InformationForm (Medical Information Form). Ifthey refuse, the appropriate box shall bechecked on the Non-Categorical Use ofForce Report. If an individual is unableto sign the Medical Release Form,supervisors shall explain why in thissection (e.g., “Under the influence,psychological evaluation hold,” etc.)

Medical Release Obtained. If a signedMedical Release Form is obtained, Departmentpersonnel shall collect the necessary injury andmedical information in accordance withManual Section 4/648. This includesattempting to collect and verify treatmentinformation relevant to the use of force basedon interviews with medical personnel.

Medical Release Not Obtained. Federal lawnow limits access to an individual’s medicalhistory and treatment information. Therefore,if a signed Medical Release Form is notobtained, supervisors shall not ask medicalpersonnel for injury and treatment informationpertaining to an individual upon whom forcewas used. Rather, supervisors shall attempt tocollect medical information based on personalobservations and/or statements from thesubject of the use of force, the involvedemployee(s), and non-medical witnesses.Supervisors shall only collect the medicalinformation necessary to complete the use offorce investigation.

Supervisors shall document medical treatmentinformation on the face sheet of the Non-Categorical Use of Force Report and check theappropriate box to indicate the source of theinformation (i.e., “Verified” or provided bymedical personnel; “Observed” and reportedby (non-medical) witnesses and/or Departmentemployees; or “Reported” by the subject offorce. Only one box shall be checked. Ifverified information cannot be obtained,“Observed” is the next most desirable option,followed by information reported by thesubject of the use of force.

Generally, it is permissible for Departmentemployees to obtain medical information theymay overhear or observe, as a bystander, ifthere is a legitimate law enforcement reasonfor their presence at the location (e.g., if asuspect in custody requires medical treatment,an officer may reasonably accompany him/herduring treatment.) In such cases, informationoverheard from a treating physician shall bereported as “Verified,” and an explanation as to

how the information was collected shall beprovided. In all cases, supervisors shalldocument their efforts to obtain medicalinformation in this section.

Example: “The suspect declined to sign aMedical Release Form. However, OfficerJones stated that he heard the suspect adviseFire Department personnel that he believed hisleft arm was broken. According to OfficerJones, the suspect stated to him that hebelieved he may have injured his arm in anattempt to avoid handcuffing. I arrived at thehospital and observed the suspect with a caston his left arm.” (In this case, supervisorswould list “Possible Broken Arm” on the Non-Categorical Use of Force Report face sheet andcheck off “Observed.”)

Regardless of whether a signed MedicalRelease Form is obtained, supervisors shall askthe subject of the use of force if and howhe/she was injured and document the responsein this section. Any documentation of medicaltreatment obtained by Department employeesshall be listed under “Addenda” and attachedto the Non-Categorical Use of Force Report.

Note: Due to potential criminal and civilliability issues, Department employees shallnot accept any medical documentationregarding the subject of the use of force unlessa signed Medical Release Form is obtained.

3. PHOTOGRAPHS AND OTHEREVIDENCE. Photographs should betaken and included in all Non-Categoricaluse of force investigations. If aphotograph is impractical (e.g., thesubject of the use of force refuses to bephotographed, etc.), an explanation shallbe documented in this section. Otherwise,the following photographs shall be taken:

∗ Visible injuries – or lack thereof - to thesubject of the use of force in the complainedof area. When it is necessary to photographthe breasts, buttocks, or genitalia, ScientificInvestigation Division (SID) shall take thephotographs;

∗ Visible injuries - or lack thereof - incurredby the involved Department employee(s) ifrelevant to the use of force, or when acriminal filing for a crime against a peaceofficer (e.g., 148 or 243 PC, etc.,) will besought;

Example: Taking photographs of an officer’shand when the complainant claims he waspunched by the officer numerous times todocument the absence or presence of rednessor swelling to the hand.

∗ The scene of the incident and evidencecollected if it is relevant to the use of forceand/or sustained injuries (or lack thereof);and,

∗ The vantage point of a witness when it mayprove useful in resolving conflictingstatements between witnesses as it relates tothe use of force.

Note: Photographs taken with a digital camera

by Department employees will suffice forrecording Level II investigations. Photographstaken by SID are preferred for Level Iinvestigations.

All photographs, including those taken by SID,shall be printed and attached and listedindividually under the heading, “Addenda.” Abrief description of each photograph shall beincluded in this section. Photographs taken bySID shall reference the appropriate “C”number obtained from SID. Computer disks (ofphotographs) shall be placed in an envelopeand the envelope marked with thecorresponding Addendum number. All SIDphotographs shall be attached to the Non-Categorical Use of Force Report prior to thewatch commander/OIC approving the report.

4. INVESTIGATING SUPERVISOR’SNOTES. Supervisors shall use thisheading to address substantial conflictsand/or discrepancies between statementsprovided by a witness or the subject of theuse of force and statements provided byinvolved Department employees. Toassist in the evaluation of thesedifferences, supervisors shall attempt toestablish each witness’s vantage pointwhen they observed the use of force, aswell as any other variables such as time ofday, lighting, weather conditions, noiselevel, or traffic patterns.

Requirements for Witnessing InvestigatingSupervisor. Investigating supervisors whowitnessed the incident shall summarize theirobservations in this section and list themselvesas a witness under “Witnesses/Non-InvolvedEmployee Witnesses” on the Non-CategoricalUse of Force Report.

Verbal Warning Requirements. Departmentemployees are, in certain circumstances,required to provide a verbal warning prior tothe use of less-lethal force. This section shallbe used to document the name of the employeegiving the warning and what was said.Likewise, in cases where a warning wasrequired but not given, supervisors shallprovide an explanation here. If no warning wasrequired, no documentation is necessary.

Any other information relevant to theinvestigation that does not fall under theprevious headings may be documented in thissection.

5. ADDENDA. Supervisors shallnumerically list all addenda items(attachments) to the Non-Categorical Useof Force Report (e.g., 1. Arrest Report 2.Vehicle Impound Report 3. Authorizationfor Release of Medical Information, etc.)and include a brief description of eachitem. The number that corresponds to thelisted item shall be written in red pen orpencil on the lower right corner of eachattached document.

245.13 REPORTING LEVEL IIINCIDENTS. The process for documenting/



reporting Level II incidents shall mirror that ofa Level I incident, with the followingexceptions:

∗ Tape-recording non-Department employeewitnesses is optional;

∗ The requirement for an “Incident Overview”is eliminated; and,

∗ The requirement to document any witnessstatements in the narrative of the Non-Categorical Use of Force Report iseliminated. The related crime and/or arrestreport or Form 15.7 will serve asdocumentation of statements for the subjectof the use of force, witnesses, and involvedDepartment employees. Any discrepanciesbetween statements shall still be addressedin “Investigating Supervisor’s Notes.”

Note: Discrepancies that constitute asubstantial conflict between witness or suspectaccounts and the involved employee(s) accountshall be reported as a Level I incident.

245.50 DEPLOYMENT OF THE URBANPOLICE RIFLE (UPR) AND SHOTGUNSLUG AMMUNITION (SSA). The UPRand/or SSA shall only be deployed by a UPRor SSA certified officer upon approval from asupervisor. Each deployment shall be inaccordance with Department policy, such asduring a spontaneous field incident, and onlywhen there is reason to believe a suspect is:

∗ Wearing protective body armor; or, ∗ Armed with or has immediate access to a

high-powered weapon which surpasses thecapability of the weapons normally carriedby field personnel; or,

∗ Armed and situated in a distant or fortifiedlocation which affords the suspect(s) atactically superior position, in which thedeployment of a UPR or SSA reasonablyappears necessary to neutralize the threatposed by the suspect(s).

Exception: When a UPR or SSA certifiedofficer encounters an immediate lifethreatening situation which meets thedeployment criteria and sufficient time doesnot exist to obtain supervisory approval, he/shemay deploy the UPR and SSA without priorsupervisory approval. When this occurs, theofficer deploying the UPR or SSA shall reportit to a supervisor as soon as practical. Ifcircumstances necessitating the emergencydeployment are not recorded in anotheradministrative investigation, (e.g., an officer-involved shooting report,) then the incidentshall be fully documented in the supervisor’sdaily report.

Once the threat is resolved, or when theMetropolitan Division, Special Weapons andTactics (SWAT) Team, arrives at the scene andassumes responsibility for control of theincident, the UPR and SSA shall be secured.

CODE ROBERT. When a UPR or SSA isrequired, the officer shall broadcast his/her unitdesignation, location, and “Code Robert-UPR”or “Code Robert-Slug.” Additionally, the

requesting unit shall determine the urgency ofthe situation and request either a Code 2 orCode 3 response. A supervisor shall respondto all Code Robert requests and may respondCode 3 when necessary, upon notifyingCommunications Division. If the fieldsituation changes and the UPR or SSA is nolonger needed, the requesting officer shallcancel the Code Robert.

Communications Division’s Responsibility.Upon receiving a “Code Robert” request,Communications Division personnel shall:

∗ Broadcast an all units “Code Robert-UPR”or “Code Robert-Slug” and the location ofthe request;

∗ Assign the call to a UPR or SSA equippedunit; and,

∗ Assign a supervisor to respond.

In most cases, the frequency should remain onstand-by until the incident is resolved or theunits move to a tactical frequency.

Responsibility of Personnel Equipped witha UPR or SSA. Only personnel who are UPRor SSA trained and certified are authorized todeploy the UPR or SSA in the field. Personnelwho are equipped with the UPR or SSA shall:

∗ Secure the UPR and UPR/SSA ammunitionin the trunk of their police vehicle untilsupervisory approval is obtained for itsdeployment;

∗ Ensure they have access to slugammunition, but not load it into the shotgunprior to supervisory approval;

∗ Respond to those requests for a UPR or SSAas assigned; and,

∗ Ensure that each situation meets thedeployment criteria and that supervisoryapproval is obtained prior to deploying theUPR or SSA at an incident unless exigentcircumstances exist which preclude priorsupervisory approval.

When a UPR or SSA is deployed at an incidentwithout prior supervisory approval (exigentcircumstances), the deploying officer shallreport it to a supervisor as soon as practical.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. A supervisorshall respond to each “Code Robert” requestand:

∗ Determine if deployment of the UPR orSSA is appropriate;

∗ Take charge of the tactical incident and determine if the incident is within thecapability of the unit(s) at scene or ifSWAT should be requested;

∗ Ensure that all UPR’s and SSA are re-secured once the threat is resolved;

∗ Make the necessary notifications if eitherthe UPR or SSA is discharged; and,

∗ Document the incident in the supervisor’sdaily report if no other administrative report(e.g., officer-involved shooting report) isrequired.

Generally, the supervisor’s decision to deploythe UPR or SSA must be made at scene;

however, under exigent circumstances, theauthorization may be given via telephone orradio prior to arrival.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Eachpatrol and traffic watch commander shallensure that:

∗ UPR and SSA equipment is available at alltimes for response to a field incident;

∗ UPR and SSA trained personnel aredeployed on each watch;

∗ A “UPR” or “SSA” notation is made on theDaily Work Sheet, Form 15.26, and on theArea Command Center Mobile Field Forceroster indicating the units which aredeployed with a UPR and/or SSA; and,

∗ A supervisor is dispatched to all “CodeRobert” requests.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Areaand traffic division commanding officers shall:

∗ Evaluate all UPR and SSA deploymentusage within their command to ensureconsistency with this policy includingproper at-scene supervisory oversight;

∗ Maintain a current list of officers withintheir command who are trained and certifiedto deploy the UPR and/or SSA (obtainedfrom Training Division); and,

∗ Maintain a record of all UPRs and SSAissued to their command and ensure that theweapons are properly stored and maintainedby the Area/division Armorer.

246. NONLETHAL CONTROLDEVICES.

246.10 TASER GUIDELINES."CODE TOM." When an employee needs aTASER, the employee shall broadcast the unitdesignation, location and "Code Tom."

"Code Tom" is a "Code Two" call for the unitassigned the call. If the field situation changesand the TASER is no longer needed at thescene, the requesting officer shall broadcast acancellation of the "Code Tom."

The TASER'S built-in flashlight shall be usedonly when it is anticipated that the TASER willbe used in use-of-force situations or inemergencies in which officer safety is a factoras outlined in Manual Section 1/573.

Officer’s Responsibility. Each authorizedofficer shall:

∗ Sign out a freshly charged, unloadedTASER and four dart cassettes. If a freshlycharged TASER is not available, the officershould obtain one that has been chargedwithin the past 24 hours. In no event shall aTASER that has not been charged within 24hours be signed out; and,

∗ Respond "Code Two" to "Code Tom"requests when assigned.

Note: The use of a TASER requires thecompletion of a Non-Categorical Use of ForceReport, Form 1.67.05, if it makes contact witha person. Under any circumstances, the



discharge of a less-lethal projectile weapon(e.g., beanbag shotgun, TASER, 37mm or40mm projectile launcher, any chemicalcontrol dispenser or Compressed Air ProjectileSystem) that does not contact a person is notreportable as a Non-Categorical use of force.Such incidents shall be reported on anEmployee’s Report, Form 15.7, and submittedto the commanding officer for review andappropriate action. After all risk management,misconduct, or policy issues are identified, theForm 15.7 shall be forwarded to TrainingGroup for review and retention.

The report shall be completed by a non-involved supervisor who shall:

∗ Ensure that the Use of Force box on allrelated reports is marked and the word“TASER” is written next to the box; and,

∗ Sign in the unloaded TASER, along withany unused dart cassettes, at the end of eachtour of duty.

246.15 CHEMICAL IRRITANTCONTROL DEVICE GUIDELINES.

Issue of Chemical Irritant Control Devices.Chemical irritant control devices shall beissued in accordance with the followingguidelines:

∗ Uniformed officers shall be issued a large(120 gram) chemical irritant control deviceand large holster;

∗ Case carrying detectives shall be issued asmall (22 gram) chemical irritant controldevice and small holster;

∗ Non-uniformed officers working in staffassignments may be issued a small deviceand holster at the discretion of theircommanding officer, based on anassessment of the particular officer'son-duty need for the device; and,

Note: Employees transferring betweenuniformed and non-uniformed assignmentsrequiring large and small devices shall retaintheir currently issued device until it expires, isemptied, or the employee separates from Cityemployment.

∗ Employees shall carry their currently issueddevice in the event of an unusual occurrence(UO) requiring them to be temporarilydeployed in uniform.

On-Duty Possession and Use of ChemicalIrritant Control Devices. Officers shallpossess and maintain Department-authorizedchemical irritant control devices subject to thefollowing guidelines:

∗ Prior to possessing a chemical irritantcontrol device in an on-duty capacity,personnel shall have successfully completedthe Department-sponsored course ofinstruction;

∗ Uniformed field personnel shall carry thedevice in its holster on the equipment beltbetween the ammunition case and the batonholder;

∗ Plainclothes and non-field uniformedpersonnel may carry the device consistentwith the needs of their assignment or at thedirection of their commanding officer;

∗ The use of a chemical irritant control devicethat contacts a person requires thecompletion of a Non-Categorical Use ofForce Report, Form 1.67.05. Officers shallmark the Use of Force box on all relatedreports and write the words "chemicalspray" next to the box; and,

∗ Canisters involved in any type ofmalfunction shall be replaced in accordancewith Manual Section 3/376.

Off-Duty Possession and Use of ChemicalIrritant Control Devices. Off-duty officersmay possess a chemical irritant control deviceprovided they have successfully completed theDepartment-sponsored course of instruction, orpossess a valid California State permit forpossession of a chemical irritant controldevice.

When an off-duty officer becomes involved ina situation in which a chemical irritant controldevice is used and the officer's occupation as apeace officer is a factor, the officer shall:

∗ Report the full details of the use of force ina related Department arrest or crime report;

∗ Use an Employee's Report, Form 15.7, toreport the incident when a crime or arrestreport is not required;

∗ Ensure that the Use of Force box on thearrest or crime report is marked and thewords "chemical spray control device" iswritten next to the box; and,

∗ Submit any related reports to an assignedsupervisor no later than the next regularlyscheduled tour of duty.

246.20 AREA/DIVISIONAL ARMORER(NONLETHAL CONTROL DEVICESCOORDINATOR)-RESPONSIBILITY.Each Area/division Armorer (Non-lethalControl Devices Coordinator) shall:

∗ Receive, inspect and ensure themaintenance and replacement of non-lethalcontrol devices assigned to theArea/division;

∗ Establish systems to store and issueTASERS and chemical irritant controldevices;

∗ Establish a rotation system to ensure thatTASER devices are electrically chargedbefore being issued;

∗ Return defective or damaged TASER dartcassettes to Police Supply Section, FiscalOperations Division;

∗ Obtain service and/or replacements fordefective or damaged TASERS and theircomponents from Police Supply Section,Fiscal Operations Division;

∗ Ensure that expired chemical irritant controldevice canisters are replaced; and,

∗ Maintain a file of completed Non-Categorical Use of Force Reports, Form1.67.05.

246.25 COMMANDING OFFICER’SRESPONSIBILITY.Bureau Commanding Officers. Bureaucommanding officers shall monitor the use ofnon-lethal control devices in the same manneras other use of force incidents.

Bureau commanding officers may approve useof the TASER by selected personnel assignedto specialized divisions within their commands,provided they have received the requisitetraining.

Note: Normally, personnel assigned tospecialized divisions desiring a TASER shouldcoordinate such requests with supervisorypersonnel of the Area in which use of theTASER might be necessary.

Area/division Commanding Officers. Eachcommanding officer whose employees areequipped with non-lethal control devices shall:

∗ Review each use of a non-lethal controldevice by an employee within thecommand;

∗ Designate the Area/division Armorer, inaddition to other prescribed duties, to fulfillthe duties and responsibilities of Non-lethalControl Devices Coordinator; and,

∗ Ensure roll call training on non-lethalcontrol devices is provided, as needed.

247. REPORTING INCIDENTSINVOLVING RETIRED PEACEOFFICERS. An employee who encounters aretired peace officer from this Department orany other law enforcement agency shallforward a copy of all related reports to theCommanding Officer, Personnel Division,fully describing the incident when theindividual:

∗ Is suffering from an emotional or nervousdisorder;

∗ Has been committed either voluntarily orinvoluntarily to any hospital, mentalinstitution or other facility for the use ofalcohol, drugs or narcotics; or,

∗ Has committed an act of misconduct or beenarrested for any crime involving moralturpitude, dishonesty, the use of narcotics,drugs, alcohol, or other intoxicants or forbrandishing, discharge or use of any firearmor otherwise comes under the close scrutinyof any law enforcement agency.

When a crime or arrest report is not required,the incident shall be reported on an Employee'sReport, Form 15.7.

The Commanding Officer, Personnel Division,shall review the related reports, initiate aninvestigation and, when appropriate, revoke theretired police officer's privilege to carry aconcealed firearm. He or she shall also ensurethat appropriate notification is made when anindividual retired from another agency isencountered under any of the describedconditions.

Note: Retired peace officers are required topossess an identification card bearing an



endorsement authorizing the possession of aconcealed or loaded firearm.

248. THEFT.248.10 IDENTITY THEFT. The victim ofIdentity Theft is the person whose identity hasbeen fraudulently assumed by another with theintent to obtain credit, goods, or serviceswithout the victim’s consent. No financial lossis necessary.

An Identity Theft Report should not normallybe taken when a related crime report hasalready been filed with any law enforcementagency. If a resident of Los Angeles is notsatisfied that another forgery-related report issufficient, complete an Identity Theft Report.Note in the narrative, “victim insisted onreport” and reference related reports.

Note: An Identity Theft Report should not betaken in lieu of a Worthless Document Report.Specific forgery-related crimes shall continueto be reported on a Worthless DocumentReport.

The location of occurrence for an IdentityTheft is the victim’s residence. Therefore, non-residents should be referred to the lawenforcement agency having jurisdiction overtheir residence.

Identity Theft Reports shall not normally betaken telephonically. Residents of the Citymaking telephonic inquiries should be directedto appear in person at the nearest Police Stationwith copies of supporting documentation andidentification to file a report.

Note: Courtesy Reports shall conform toManual Section 5/030.05.

Officers conducting a preliminary investigationof an Identity Theft shall include with thereport the following:

∗ Include all copies of documents supportingthe allegation (credit reports, invoices,demand letters, affidavits of forgery, etc.) aspages of the report. If these documents arenot available, explain in the narrative;

∗ Attach a copy of the victim’s identificationas a report page. If the victim is not inpossession of identification at the time ofthe report, explain in the narrative; and,

∗ Include all notifications made by the victimto any financial institutions or creditreporting agencies in the narrative portionof the report.

248.15 ATM CARD FRAUD – DEFINED.An Automated Teller Machine (ATM) cardfraud occurs when an unauthorized person usesan ATM card to fraudulently access funds fromchecking or savings accounts that belong toanother person, without their consent, throughthe use of an automated teller machine. Thevictim of an ATM card fraud is the person towhom the account belongs and not thefinancial institution.

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers conductinga preliminary investigation of an ATM card

fraud shall complete a PreliminaryInvestigation Report (PIR), Form 3.1, titled“ATM Card Theft,” and include the followinginformation:

∗ The exact location of the ATM utilized tocommit the fraud;

Note: Location of occurrence will be thelocation where the ATM was used to committhe fraud. This information may be obtainedfrom the financial institution holding theaccount. If the ATM location cannot bedetermined, then advise the victim to contacthis/her financial institution before a report canbe taken. However, if the victim insists on areport, and meets all of the criteria for thecrime of “Identity Theft,” then a PreliminaryInvestigation Report titled, “Identity Theft,”shall be completed.

∗ The amount of money taken;∗ Whether the victim is still in possession of

his/her ATM card; and,∗ Whether the victim has given his/her

Personal Identification Number (PIN) toanyone.

Commercial Crimes Division’sResponsibility. Fraud cases by means of anATM card shall be investigated by ForgerySection, Commercial Crimes Division.

Note: Burglary theft, or vandalism of an ATMwill continue to be the investigativeresponsibility of the geographic detectives.

248.20 FALSE PERSONATION. Thevictim of False Personation is the personwhose identity or personal information is usedby another person that could result in thevictim becoming liable for any suit orprosecution.

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers conductinga preliminary investigation of a falsepersonation case shall:

∗ Complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR), titled “False Personation,”unless a related crime report has beencompleted by another law enforcementagency;

∗ Include photocopies of all documentssupporting the allegation of falsepersonation as pages of the report. If thesedocuments are not available, explain thereason in the narrative of the report;

∗ Include a copy of the victim’s identificationas a page of the report. If unable to attach acopy, explain the reason in the narrative ofthe report; and,

∗ Generally not complete reportstelephonically. If the crime occurred in theCity, the victim should be directed to appearin person at the nearest Area CommunityPolice Station with copies of supportingdocumentation and identification to file areport.

Note: The elements of the crime of falsepersonation require that a suspect successfully

complete the act, which might result incriminal or civil liability for the victim. If asuspect attempts to personate another at thetime of arrest, booking, traffic citation ortraffic report, officers should handle theinvestigation via arrest for the appropriateviolation (e.g., Penal Code Section 148.9 orVehicle Code Section 31) or, if arrested for amore serious crime, include the information inthe narrative of the report and requestadditional filing.

Area Detective Division’s Responsibility.False personation cases resulting from anyarrest or any other incident, excluding a trafficcitation or traffic report, shall be investigatedby the Area Detective Division in the Area ofoccurrence.

Area Traffic Detective Section’sResponsibility. False personation casesresulting from a Traffic Notice to Appear(citation) or traffic collision report shall beinvestigated by the traffic detective sectionresponsible for the Area of occurrence.

248.30 THEFT OF BLANK CHECKS.Officers conducting a preliminary investigationof a theft where blank checks might reasonablyhave been taken shall request the victim todetermine whether any blank personalized orbusiness checks are missing. When suchchecks are missing, the following informationshall be included in the crime report:

∗ Number of checks taken;∗ Type of checks (business, payroll, or

personalized);∗ The firm's (or person's) name and address,

when printed on checks.∗ The color of the missing checks;∗ The serial numbers of the missing checks;

and,∗ The name and address of the bank on which

the checks are drawn.

248.40 STOLEN, LOST ORRECOVERED BOATS. When reporting, lostor recovered boats, reporting employees shall:

∗ Complete a separate Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180, for each boat or boatengine/transmission which is stolen, lost,recovered, found or impounded.

∗ Query the Department of Motor Vehicles'Vessel Registration File and the State'sAutomated Boat System through theArea/division records unit, prior tocontacting the Vehicle InformationProcessing Unit (VIPU), Records andIdentification Division. Reportingemployees shall mark the SVS/ABS boxupon completion.

DR Numbers.

∗ Each Vehicle Investigation requires aseparate vehicle DR number. If more thanone boat or boat engine/transmission isstolen, each requires a separate DR number.

Exception: When an outboard engine(s) is



attached to or accompanies a stolen or lostboat, a separate report and separate DR numberis not required. All information relative to theoutboard engine(s) shall be entered in thenarrative portion of the report and submitted toVIPU. When a boat is recovered and apreviously reported outboard engine(s) ismissing, a Follow-up Investigation, Form 3.14,shall be completed by the concerned detectiveusing the same DR number as the recoveredvehicle report.

∗ A recovered or found report shall bear thesame DR number as the original stolen orlost report.

Completion. Reporting employees shallcompletely describe the boat by documentingthe following information, if known, in theproper boxes on the Vehicle Report, CHPForm 180:

∗ State or country of registration, registrationnumber and year of expiration.

∗ Manufacturer or builder and the use orgeneral design (sail, cruiser, jet ski, etc.).

∗ Primary type or mode of propulsion(inboard, outboard, sail, etc.).

∗ Primary color.∗ Inboard or outboard engine number(s).∗ Builder's or State-issued hull identification

number (BHN).∗ File Control Number and the two-character

"associate record identifier", if it appears onthe Automated Boat System (ABS) teletype.

The following additional information, ifknown, shall be included in the narrativeportion of the report:

∗ Length.∗ Hull material.∗ Owner-applied name/number.

248.50 LOST OR STOLEN BOATENGINES. Boat engines shall be completelydescribed and identified. The followinginformation, if known, shall be included inreports involving boat engines or lost or stolenboats:

∗ Year.∗ Make.∗ Model.∗ Engine number.∗ Horsepower rating.∗ Inboard or outboard.∗ Number of cylinders.∗ Type (gas, diesel, or jet).∗ Shaft length.∗ Electric or manual start.

248.60 LOST OR STOLEN AIRCRAFT.When reporting lost or stolen aircraft, officersshall completely describe the aircraft bydocumenting the following information, ifknown, in the proper boxes on the VehicleReport, CHP Form 180:

∗ Present owner's name.∗ Aircraft registration number and year of

registration.

∗ Make and model.∗ Name of manufacturer.∗ Year manufactured and type of aircraft.∗ Color of aircraft.∗ Aircraft identification number.

Note: Officers shall request a Vehicle DRnumber from the Automated Vehicle andProperty Section, Records and IdentificationDivision when reporting lost or stolen aircraft.

The following additional information, ifknown, shall be included in the narrativeportion of the report:

∗ Type of propulsion and number of engines.∗ Landing gear serial number.∗ Markings.∗ Make, model, and serial number of the radio

and navigation equipment on board.∗ Number of seats (places).∗ Whether passenger, non-passenger, or

freight.∗ Whether private, commercial, or military.

248.70 THEFT TOTALING $5000 ORMORE-NOTIFICATION. Officersconducting a preliminary investigation of atheft in which property valued at $5000 ormore was taken, in addition to completing therequired reports, shall notify the concernedinvestigative unit of the theft.

Note: When the concerned investigative unitis closed and property valued at $50,000 ormore is taken, notification shall be made toDetective Support Division.

252. FORCIBLE RAPE.252.10 REPORTING A FORCIBLERAPE. A person desiring to make a forciblerape crime report shall be referred to theconcerned investigative division fordetermination as to whether a report shall betaken when the offense is alleged to haveoccurred more than thirty days prior to the datereported to the Department.

252.12 REJECTION OF FORCIBLERAPE REPORTS. When an investigatingofficer determines that a forcible rape crimereport should not be taken for an offensealleged to have occurred more than thirty daysprior, he/she shall immediately submit anIntradepartmental Correspondence, Form 15.2,to Robbery-Homicide Division. The reportshall include:

∗ Victim's name and address.∗ Date and time alleged offense was reported

to the Department.∗ Date and time alleged offense occurred.∗ Reasons for not accepting the report.

258. NARCOTICS AND DANGEROUSDRUGS.258.10 NARCOTIC OR DANGEROUSDRUG EVIDENCE ON ARRESTEE'SPREMISES. When narcotics, dangerousdrugs, or equipment employed in thepreparation or use of narcotics are found, not

on the person of an arrestee but in any room,apartment building, or other premisesoccupied, controlled, or used by him, officersshall:

∗ Determine the name and address of themanager or landlord of the premises.

∗ Gather all mail and communicationsaddressed to the arrestee at the location.Mail in a mailbox or mail receptacle shallnot be removed by officers-only by thearrestee or his/her authorized representative.

∗ Determine the location of the key to thepremises. When the key is in the possessionof the arrestee, it shall be booked asevidence.

∗ Notify the manager or landlord, if present,of the arrest and obtain a statement fromhim/her as to the arrestee's status as tenantor occupant of the premises.

∗ Book all physical evidence gathered(Manual Section 4/525.).

The results of the foregoing operations shall beindicated in the Arrest Report, Form 5.2.

258.14 RECEIVING NARCOTICINFORMATION. When officers receive orbecome aware of information concerningnarcotic activity and an arrest is not made atthe time of violation, they shall:

∗ If the condition exists in the City, completea Narcotics Report, Form 3.19. When theurgency of the situation demands, they shallalso contact their immediate supervisor forinstructions.

∗ If the condition exists outside the City,complete a Narcotics Report, Form 3.19. Inaddition, when the urgency of the situationdemands, they shall contact theCommanding Officer, Narcotics Divisionor, when that office is closed, they shallnotify the Administrative Unit, DetectiveSupport Division, which shall make theproper notifications. Upon receipt of theNarcotics Report the Commanding Officer,Narcotics Division shall forward thenarcotics information to the appropriate lawenforcement agency.

Upon receipt of the Narcotics Report,Narcotics Intelligence Network Unit, NarcoticsDivision, when practicable, shall determine ifthe reported narcotics activity is beinginvestigated by another unit.

258.17 REPORTING NARCOTICACTIVITY. The Form 3.19 shall be used toreport narcotic conditions, except when anarrest is made at the time of violation. TheForm 3.19 shall include all known informationrelative to suspects, locations, type of activity,and methods of operation.

Note: When narcotics and vice activity arecomplained of at the same location, theNarcotics Report, Form 3.19, shall becompleted and the vice activity shall beincluded in the narrative portion of the report.The narcotics activity shall be investigated bynarcotics investigating officers; if the vice



condition continues to exist at the conclusionof the narcotics investigation, the concernedinvestigating officer shall complete a ViceReport, Form 3.18, including the viceinformation. A vice DR number shall beobtained and the Form 3.18 distributed in theappropriate manner.

258.20 PHOTOGRAPHING NARCOTICMARKS. Narcotic marks on arrestees shall bephotographed at the location where the arresteeis booked, with the following exceptions:

∗ Females who are to be booked into Sheriff'scustody shall be photographed at thePhotographic Section, ScientificInvestigation Division (SID).

∗ When the marks are on the private parts orunusual portions of the body, officers shallnotify Photographic Section, ScientificInvestigation Division, who shall take thephotographs.

258.25 PRELIMINARY TESTING OFNARCOTICS AND DANGEROUS DRUGS.Suspect in Custody. The watch commander orinvestigative supervisor giving booking advicein a narcotic or dangerous drug case shall:

∗ Attempt to identify the suspected narcotic ordangerous drug visually, AND MAY,

∗ Complete a preliminary drug test on thesubstance, on felony arrests, to corroboratethe arresting officer's opinion.

∗ A preliminary drug test shall be completedfor misdemeanor arrests. When performed,these tests shall be completed in thepresence of the arresting officer, but not inthe presence of the arrestee.

Note: When multiple types of substances areinvolved, preliminary drug testing shall not beconducted after a positive result is obtained onany one substance. Dispose of the preliminarydrug test kit once the test has been completed.The test kit shall not be booked into evidence.

When two successive tests on the samesubstance prove negative, no furtherpreliminary drug tests shall be conducted onthe substance. The substance, if believed to becontraband, shall be booked for laboratoryanalysis. The determination to book or releasethe suspect shall be based on the circumstancesof the arrest.

258.30 OPIATE-URINE TEST.Admonition of Arrestee. An arrestee whodisplays objective symptoms of being underthe influence of an opiate shall be admonishedaccording to the format on the Admonishmentfor Urine Test, Form 8.40.1.

Exception: If the charge is 23152 or 23153VC, the arrestee shall be admonishedaccording to the "Drug Admonition" format onthe DUI Arrest Report, Form 5.2.5.

Obtaining Urine Sample. Urine samples shallbe obtained from male arrestees at the locationof booking in the presence of a male officer.Urine samples shall be obtained from female

arrestees in the presence of a female officer atone of the locations listed in Manual Section4/343.42.

When necessary, telephonic inquiry shall bemade to locate a female officer. When it isimpracticable for the female officer to respondto the arrestee's location, the arrestee shall betransported to the female officer's location.Urine tests shall be administered according toprocedures outlined in Manual Section4/343.42.

Exception: For opiate testing, there is norequirement that the arrestee void his/herbladder 20 minutes prior to providing thesample.

The time the sample was obtained and thename and serial number of the officerobtaining it shall be included in the arrestreport.

Booking Urine Sample. The sample shall bebooked according to procedures outlined inManual Section 4/343.42.

260. PERSONS WITH A MENTALILLNESS.

260.10 PRIVATE PERSONS' REQUESTFOR INFORMATION. Private persons whoinquire about treatment of persons with amental illness or the filing of mental petitionsshall be advised to telephone the MentalEvaluation Unit, Detective Support Division.

260.15 MENTAL EVALUATION UNITNOTIFICATIONS. Any incident commander,crisis negotiation team, or officer in charge ofan attempt suicide, barricaded suspect, orhostage incident which involves or mayinvolve an identified person with a mentalillness shall contact the Mental EvaluationUnit, Detective Support Division, forinformation regarding the involved person witha mental illness.

260.20 TAKING PERSONS WITH AMENTAL ILLNESS INTO CUSTODY. Ifpracticable, the Mental Evaluation Unit,Detective Support Division, shall be contactedprior to taking a person suspected with amental illness into custody when the onlyreason for detention is the person's mentalcondition.

The Mental Evaluation Unit shall be contactedprior to transporting a person suspected with amental illness to any mental health facility orhospital.

When a person suspected with a mental illnesshas been taken into custody for a criminaloffense, the Mental Evaluation Unit shall becontacted prior to the person being booked.

260.25 FIREARMS OR OTHERDEADLY WEAPONS IN POSSESSION OFPERSONS WITH A MENTAL ILLNESS.Officer's Responsibility. When a person istaken into custody because of his or her mentalcondition and is in possession of a firearm or

other deadly weapon, the firearm or weaponshall be seized and booked as "Evidence."

Note: For the purpose of this procedure,"deadly weapon", as used in Sections 8100,8101, 8102, and 8103 WIC, means anyweapon, the possession or concealed caring ofwhich is prohibited by Section 12020 of thePenal Code.

When the Mental Evaluation Unit (MEU),Detective Support Division has, verified that apatient with a mental illness, in possession ofa weapon, has escaped from a designatedmental hospital, the weapon shall be seized andbooked as "Evidence" and the patient with amental illness should be booked for a felonyunder authority of 8103 (2) (f) (1) WIC.

Officers having probable cause to believe thata person with a mental illness owns, possesses,or has access to a firearm or any other deadlyweapon located inside a residence or any otherpremises shall, when possible, obtain consentto search for the weapon. If consent cannot beobtained, officers shall contact MEU and beguided by the advice of the investigator onduty.

Note: If officers encounter a person with amental illness they believe to be clearlyincapable of providing an informed consent fora search, they shall contact MEU for advice.

A Weapons Confiscation Receipt, Form10.10.1, shall be completed by the officer andgiven to any person with a mental illness fromwhom a firearm or other deadly weapon hasbeen seized. Officers shall ensure that a copyof the Weapons Confiscation Receipt isforwarded to MEU to prevent persons with amental illness from recovering their firearms orweapons before they have been judgedcompetent to own a firearm or weapon.Additionally, because of the legal complexitiesof the Welfare and Institutions Code, and in theinterest of public safety, officers shall contactMEU for guidance prior to taking any personsuspected with a mental illness into custody(Manual Section 4/260.20) and prior toreleasing a confiscated firearm or weapon to aperson with a mental illness.

260.40 TRANSPORTATION OFPERSONS WITH A MENTAL ILLNESS -REQUEST FOR AMBULANCE. Officersshall request an ambulance to transport personswith a mental illness only:

∗ If the person is violent and requires restraintto the extent that he or she must betransported in a recumbent position.

∗ If the person is injured or physically ill andis in need of immediate medical attention.

Officers shall make the request for anambulance to the Mental Evaluation Unit. Therequest may be made through thecommunications control operator when a directrequest is impractical.

260.44 DISPATCHING ANAMBULANCE FOR PERSONS WITH A



MENTAL ILLNESS. Upon receipt of arequest for an ambulance (Manual Section4/260.40), personnel of the Mental EvaluationUnit, Detective Support Division, shall arrangefor an ambulance to be dispatched.

260.46 ACCOMPANYING PERSONSWITH A MENTAL ILLNESS. When aperson with a mental illness is transported byambulance, at least one officer shall ride in theambulance with the person.

260.50 ENTERING PSYCHOPATHICWARD-GUNS TO BE CHECKED. When aperson with a mental illness is taken to the LosAngeles County-USC Medical Center, thetransporting officers shall check their guns atthe Admittance Office before accompanyingthe person to the Psychopathic Ward.

260.52 PERSON CONFINED INPSYCHOPATHIC WARD, LOS ANGELESCOUNTY-USC MEDICAL CENTER-PROPERTY DISPOSITION. When a personis confined in the Psychopathic Ward, LosAngeles County-USC Medical Center, his/herpersonal property shall accompany him/her.

All firearms which are found in the possessionof such person shall be taken from him/her andbooked into the custody of the Department(Manual Section 4/260.25). Other weapons orarticles with which he/she might injurehimself/herself or others shall be taken fromhim/her and released to the deputy sheriff orhospital attendant receiving the person.

Arrestee to Psychopathic Ward. When theperson to be confined is an arrestee, the deputysheriff or the hospital attendant receiving thearrestee shall be given the arrestee's personalproperty and shall be required to sign aProperty Court Receipt, Form 10.3, therefore.

Exception: Firearms shall be booked"Evidence."

Non-arrestee to Psychopathic Ward. Whenthe person to be confined is not an arrestee,officers shall not take custody of his or herpersonal property. Upon arrival at thePsychopathic Ward, transporting officers shall:

∗ Release to the attendant any weapons orother articles that have been taken from theperson with a mental illness.

Exception: Firearms shall be booked"Evidence" (Manual Section 4/260.25).

∗ Remain in the presence of the person with amental illness while he/she is searched bythe attendant.

∗ Record in their notebooks all valuablesreleased to, or taken by, the attendant.

∗ Obtain from the attendant a copy of thereceipt made for property taken from theperson with a mental illness.

Note: The transporting officers shall forwardany receipts obtained to the Mental EvaluationUnit, Detective Support Division.

260.55 TRANSPORTATION OF AFEMALE WITH A MENTAL ILLNESSTO A STATE HOSPITAL. Whenpracticable, a female person with a mentalillness shall be transported to a State hospitalwith a relative or a female police officer inattendance.

260.60 APPREHENSION ANDTRANSPORTATION ORDER SERVICE.A State Department of Mental Hygieneapprehension and transportation order issued tothe Department shall be processed by theMental Evaluation Unit, Detective SupportDivision, and forwarded by teletype to theconcerned Area. The concerned Areacommanding officer shall ensure that officersare assigned to execute the apprehension andtransportation order.

Officers assigned to apprehend a person namedon an apprehension and transportation ordershall contact the Mental Evaluation Unit priorto discharging their duties.

Note: Section 7325 of the Welfare andInstitutions Code requires that the Department,upon receipt of an apprehension andtransportation order issued by the StateDepartment of Mental Health, shall apprehend,take into custody and deliver the person namedin the order to a place authorized by the StateDepartment of Health.

When practicable, the apprehension of a personwith a mental illness, pursuant to anapprehension and transportation order, shall bemade during daylight hours.

Juveniles. Juveniles shall be transported to alocation designated by the Mental EvaluationUnit.

Adults. Adults shall be transported to theMetropolitan State Hospital, 11400 SouthNorwalk Boulevard, Norwalk.

Note: When the apprehension andtransportation order originates from CamarilloState Hospital, officers may, with the approvalof their supervisor, and upon the advice of theMental Evaluation Unit, transport the adult toCamarillo State Hospital.

The transporting officers shall obtain acompleted Receipt for Transporting a Patient,State Form 755, from the hospital and forwardit, with the teletyped order, to the MentalEvaluation Unit, Detective Support Division.

262. ROBBERY.262.10 211 IN PROGRESS CALL. Allunits in the vicinity of a 211 in progress callshall proceed directly to the location of thecrime except:

∗ When they are engaged in other duties.∗ When a Code Four or Code Four Adam has

been broadcast.

262.15 211 JUST OCCURRED CALL. Aunit other than the assigned unit shall go CodeSix upon arrival at the scene of a 211 just

occurred call. Other units upon hearing anunassigned unit go Code Six at the scene of acall shall then concentrate their efforts onsearching the surrounding area.

262.20 DELAYED RESPONSE TO 211CALL BY ASSIGNED UNIT. Thecommunications control operator shall benotified by the officers assigned to a 211 callwhen they are engaged in duties which willdelay their arrival at the scene.

262.58 IMMEDIATE INVESTIGATION-ROBBERY. When an immediate follow-upinvestigation of a robbery should be made, theofficers assigned to the call shall notifyimmediately, by telephone, the responsibleinvestigating division. When the responsibledivision is not available, notification shall bemade to Detective Support Division.

262.70 NON-RESIDENT WITNESS TOROBBERY. When a witness is not a residentof this City, or is a transient, a temporary localaddress, as well as his or her regular homeaddress, shall be placed in the PreliminaryInvestigation Report, Form 3.1. If the witnessis intending to leave town shortly, the nameand address of a friend or relative shall beplaced in the Preliminary Investigation Report.

262.90 SUBMITTING PRELIMINARYINVESTIGATION REPORTS OFROBBERY FOR APPROVAL. An officer ora record clerk who completes a PreliminaryInvestigation Report, Form 3.1, shall deliver it,without delay, to the supervisor responsible forapproving reports.

263. POLICE ACTION ON FEDERALCOURTHOUSE PROPERTY. Personnel ofthis Department shall respond to majordisturbances at the Federal Courthouse (Title40 U.S. Code, Section 318b) after it has beenverified that one of the following has made arequest for assistance:

∗ The United States Attorney for the CentralDistrict of California.

∗ The acting United States Attorney for theCentral District of California.

When policing a disturbance on FederalCourthouse property, Los Angeles PoliceDepartment supervisors will make all decisionsnecessary to perform enforcement activitiesand will be solely responsible for thesupervision of Department personnel.

264. FEDERAL VIOLATIONS.

264.10 ADVICE BEFORE BOOKINGFEDERAL VIOLATIONS. Prior to beingbooked, an interview shall be given to anyperson arrested or detained:

∗ For the illegal wearing of service uniforms.∗ As an escaped military prisoner.∗ As a deserter.

Persons arrested or detained on the foregoingviolations shall be interviewed by thegeographic detectives or, when the detectivesare not available, by the patrol division watch



commander.

Booking preference shall be given to a state ormunicipal charge, if one exists.

264.15 COUNTERFEITINGVIOLATIONS.Definition of Counterfeit Currency.Counterfeit currency consists of any currencywhich has been fraudulently produced, printed,manufactured or forged, and which purports tobe United States Currency; or, any UnitedStates Currency which has been altered orraised so as to portray a value other than itstrue face value.

Note: Although currency is most frequentlycounterfeited, the provisions outlined in thissection apply to all forms of counterfeitingprohibited by Title 18, Section 472, of the U.S.Government Code. This includes coins,negotiable postage stamps, bonds, food stamps,etc.

Officer's Responsibility. Officersinvestigating a counterfeiting violation shall:

∗ Notify Commercial Crimes Division or,when that office is closed, DetectiveSupport Division, when any of thefollowing conditions exist:

∗ An arrest for a counterfeiting violation ismade;

Note: Booking advice shall be obtainedfrom Commercial Crimes Division or,when that office is closed, DetectiveSupport Division. Booking approval shallonly be obtained from the Area watchcommander or the Watch Commander,Metropolitan Jail Section, Jail Division.Prior to booking, the U.S. Secret Serviceshall be contacted.

∗ An investigation by the U.S. SecretService is, or appears to be warranted;

∗ Any of the following items is observedin a suspect's possession:

∗ Counterfeit currency;∗ Raised currency (currency having

the corners of larger bills illegallyaffixed to raise the face value);

∗ An unusual number of corners cutfrom currency above two dollardenominations; and,

∗ Currency of large denominationswith ends torn off.

∗ Book evidence in accordance withestablished procedures. (Manual Section4/515.20)

Note: Counterfeit currency is not legaltender and has no intrinsic value. Officersbooking counterfeit currency shall use thestandard evidence envelope rather than the"Money" envelope.

∗ Book adult suspects at the followinglocation:

∗ All Valley Bureau Areas, Pacific andWest Los Angeles-Valley JailSection.

∗ All other Areas.∗ Male Arrestees-Metropolitan Jail

Section.∗ Female Arrestees-77th Street Jail

Section or Van Nuys Jail Section.

Note: Juvenile arrestees shall be booked inaccordance with established procedures.

264.40 FEDERAL BUREAU OFINVESTIGATION APPROVAL-ILLEGALWEARING OF UNIFORM. The advice ofthe Federal Bureau of Investigation shall beobtained prior to the booking of any person onIllegal Wearing of Uniform.

The name of the Federal Bureau ofInvestigation officer advising the booking shallappear on the Arrest Report, Form 5.2.

264.50 ENFORCEMENT OF UNITEDSTATES IMMIGRATION LAWS. Officersshall not initiate police action where theobjective is to discover the alien status of aperson. Officers shall neither arrest nor bookpersons for violation of Title 8, Section 1325of the United States Immigration Code (IllegalEntry).

265. VETERANS ADMINISTRATIONFACILITIES. Officers of this Departmentsummoned to the Veterans AdministrationHospital, or the Veterans AdministrationOutpatient Clinic, shall follow normal policiesand procedures for investigating incidents andmaking arrests.

Note: The Veterans Administration Policeshall retain responsibility for federal lawenforcement activities at VeteransAdministration facilities located on federalproperty.

Private Person's Arrest. When a privateperson's arrest is made at the VeteransAdministration Hospital or the VeteransAdministration Outpatient Clinic, the arrestingperson need not accompany the officers to thestation when:

∗ The arrest is made on the concernedVeterans Administration property;

∗ The arresting person is an employee of thefacility; and,

∗ It would be impractical for the arrestingperson to accompany the officers.

(Private Person's Arrest-See Manual Section4/216.33)

266. PROWLERS.266.50 PROWLER REPORTS. APreliminary Investigation report, Form 3.1,shall be made on prowlers or "peeping toms"when:

∗ An arrest under Penal Code Section 647(h)is made, or,

∗ The victim has actually observed a prowlersuspect in the commission of an act notamounting to an attempt burglary, or,

∗ Physical evidence of prowling is found, or,∗ The victim insists that a report be made.

267. ESPIONAGE OR SABOTAGEACTIVITIES.267.50 REPORTING ESPIONAGE ORSABOTAGE ACTIVITIES. Employeesreceiving information pertaining to espionageor sabotage activities shall:

∗ Telephonically notify Criminal ConspiracySection, Major Crimes Division;

∗ Complete an Intelligence Report, Form1.89, in duplicate, forwarding the original toCriminal Conspiracy Section, Major CrimesDivision in a sealed envelope viaintra-departmental mail.

Exception: When the information is of such aconfidential nature that the integrity of anensuing investigation might be jeopardized byreducing the information to writing, the Form1.89 shall not be completed.

Note: When Criminal Conspiracy Section,Major Crimes Division is closed, the reportingemployee shall request that the WatchCommander, Detective Support Division,advise the concerned on-call personnel of theclosed unit to contact the employee.

269. CAL/GANG SYSTEM ANDGANG FILE GUIDELINES. TheCAL/GANG System shall be the Department’sonly authorized system for the collection,storage, and retrieval of gang information. TheLos Angeles County Sheriff’s Department isthe Los Angeles County CAL/GANGAdministrator. The Commanding Officer,Special Operations Support Division (SOSD),is the Department’s CAL/GANGAdministrator.

269.10 DEFINITIONS.

Gang. A group of three or more persons whohave a common identifying sign, symbol, orname, and whose members individually orcollectively engage in, or have engaged in, apattern or criminal activity creating anatmosphere of fear and intimidation within thecommunity.

Note: Any group, including outlaw motorcyclegangs, prison gangs, posses, taggers, partycrews, subversive groups and their associatedmembership that qualify under the definition ofa gang may be maintained in the CAL/GANGSystem.

Gang Member. A juvenile or adult who hasbeen positively identified and documented asa gang member under the CaliforniaDepartment of Justice’s (DOJ) approvedcriteria.

Affiliate Gang Member. A juvenile or adultwho is identified by a gang officer as one whoassociates with a gang, but it not necessarily afull member.



Gang Officer. Any officer or detectiveassigned to a Department authorized ganginvestigation unit including, but not limited to,Area Gang Impact Teams (GIT), Bureau GangCoordinator, and Special Operations SupportDivision.

Gang-Related Crime. Any crime mayconstitute a gang-related crime when thesuspect or victim is an active or affiliate gangmember, or when circumstances indicate thatthe crime is consistent with gang activity.

Note: Crime consistent with gang activity caninclude, but is not limited to, incidents when:

∗ The suspect or victim has a gang tattoo(s);∗ The suspect or victim has a gang moniker;∗ A statement indicating gang involvement

was made;∗ The suspect or victim demonstrated gang

behavior; or,∗ Multiple suspects and gang modus operandi

(MO) were involved.

Determining if a crime is gang-related issubjective in nature and is a result of a totalityof the circumstances. Classification cannot beaccomplished accurately without a high degreeof gang expertise or validation through theCAL/GANG System.

One or more of the following gang-relatedcriteria shall be used to justify that a crime isgang-related. The reference number correlatingto the applicable criteria shall be entered on theGang Tracking Information Record for eachcrime classified as gang- related and should behighlighted and/or circled on the report (e.g.Preliminary Investigation Report, ArrestReport, etc.) itself.

Reference Gang-Related NumberJustification Criteria.

1. The suspect or victim is a known gangmember previously entered into theCAL/GANG System. (Note on the reportwhen suspect is in the CAL/GANGSystem.)

2. The suspect or victim is a known gangmember or affiliate. (Validated byinformation in the Automated FieldInterview (AFI)/NECS, or witness/victimstatements.)

3. The suspect or victim has a gang tattoo(s).

4. The suspect or victim has a gang moniker.

5. A statement indicating gang involvementwas made.

6. The suspect or victim was “dressed down”or wearing gang colors or clothing.

7. The suspect or victim was demonstratinggang behavior (using gang hand signs).

8. Multiple suspects and gang ModusOperandi (MO) involved.

9. The location of the crime was withinidentified gang boundaries, or at a knowngang location or hangout.

10. Similar reports where the suspects wereidentified as gang members (SimilarMOs, suspects, times and location).

11. The type and/or MO of the crime isinherently gang-related (e.g. drive-byshootings, etc.)

The Area GIT officer in charge shall approvethe gang-related crime classification. In therare circumstance when the classificationcannot be determined at the Area level, theBureau Gang Coordinator shall make thedetermination. When the Bureau GangCoordinator cannot determine theclassification, the commanding officer, SOSD,shall make the final determination.

Gang-Related Statistical Crimes. When thefollowing violent crimes are determined to begang-related, they shall be monitoredstatistically by the Department to assess thelevel of gang crime in an Area. The statisticallymonitored gang-related crimes are:

∗ Murder;∗ Attempt Murder;∗ Felony Assault;∗ Assault on a Police Officer (Includes

Battery, Assault with a Deadly Weapon andAttempt Murder on a Police Officer);

∗ Robbery;∗ Shots Fired into an Inhabited Dwelling;∗ Kidnap;∗ Rape; ∗ Arson;∗ Witness Intimidation (Includes Terrorist

Threats);∗ Extortion; ∗ Carjacking; and,∗ Gang-related narcotics violations (Felony

Health & Safety Code sections 11350,11351, 11352, 11357(a), 11358, 11359,11360, 11370.1, 11377, 11378, and 11379).

Hard-Copy File. The CAL/GANG Card, Form12.16.9, shall be the only Departmentauthorized hard-copy file that contains detailedinformation on gang members. The hardcopies shall be maintained and secured by theoriginating gang investigation unit.

Note: All completed Gang Subject I-Card,Form 12.16.4, existing prior to the issuance ofthe CAL/GANG Card shall be retained andsecured as the source document. Updating theI-Card is no longer required.

269.20 CRITERIA FOR GANGMEMBER DOCUMENTATION. Thefollowing criteria have been established by theCAL/GANG Executive Board that oversees theoperation of the CAL/GANG SystemStatewide, for identifying individuals as gangmembers or gang affiliates:

Gang Membership Criteria. Indicators ofgang membership shall include at least two ofthe following criteria:

∗ Individual admits to being a gang member,in a non-custodial situation;

∗ Individual has been identified as a gangmember by a reliable informant or source.This includes the required registration bycourt order as described in Penal CodeSection 186.30;

∗ Individual has been identified as a gangmember by an untested informant or sourcewith corroboration;

∗ Individual is wearing gang attire;∗ Individual has been seen displaying gang

hand signs or symbols;∗ Individual has gang tattoos;∗ Individual frequents gang areas;∗ Individual openly associates with

documented gang members; or,∗ Individual has been arrested, alone or with

known gang members, for a crimeconsistent with usual gang activity.

When two or more of these criteria are met, aCAL/GANG Card shall be completed by agang officer for entry into the CAL/GANGSystem. CAL/GANG Cards shall not be madefor individuals that do not meet the criteria.

Gang Affiliate Criteria. An individual whomeets only one of the above criteria and islinked with a documented gang member, maybe designated as a gang affiliate and enteredinto the CAL/GANG System. The gang officershall document the name of the documentedgang member with whom the affiliate isassociating, the gang member’s date of birth,and his/her CAL/GANG number on theaffiliate’s CAL/GANG Card.

269.25 GANG CRIME TRACKING ANDANALYSIS. The accuracy of the CAL/GANGSystem is based entirely on the accuracy andtimeliness of the information entered into it.The Gang Crime Analysis Detail (G-CAD)shall be responsible for compiling, inputtingand interpreting gang-related information inaccordance with Manual Section 2/550.55.269.30 CONTACTS WITH GANGMEMBERS.

Investigations and Arrests. When the arrestor preliminary investigation reveals that thecrime is gang-related, the reporting officershall check the “Extra Copy” box on the frontof the arrest report or PIR indicating copies besent to the appropriate Area gang detectives.The reporting officer shall ensure that thenarrative fully explains the rationale fordetermining that the arrest or investigation isgang-related.

Note: Suspected gang membership informationmay also be further investigated by contactingthe Area Gang Impact Team or Bureau GangCoordinator.

Field Identification. Officers who contact asuspected active or affiliate gang member anddetermine that the completion of a FieldIdentification Report (FI Card), Form 15.43, isappropriate, shall document the followingadditional information on the FI Card:



∗ How gang membership was established(e.g., admits gang membership, tattoos,attire, etc.);

∗ The specific type of gang activity involved;and,

∗ The words “GANG MEMBER” or “GANGAFFILIATE” in the narrative portion of theFI Card, depending upon the criteriadocumented by the officer.

Upon supervisory review and approval of theFI Card containing gang-related information, itshall be routed to the Area GIT where the FICard was completed for review andverification. Only a GIT officer shall completea CAL/GANG Card if the criteria for a gangmember or gang affiliate has been met.

After completing the CAL/GANG Card or ifa card already exists, the Area G-CAD shallenter the new information into the CAL/GANGSystem within three working days. The FICard shall then be routed through the AreaRecords Unit for normal processing.

Note: Gang officers and other personnel whohave completed the required CAL/GANGtraining may also input and update informationinto the CAL/GANG System.

269.40 MAINTAINING DEPARTMENTGANG FILES. Any non- CAL/GANG Systemor gang database is not authorized and shall notbe maintained by any individual or Departmententity. Private or localized gang databases lacksecurity controls and audit capability requiredfor an intelligence database. As a result, theirconfidentiality and reliability is severelyjeopardized.

Hard-Copy Files. Hard-copy files refer to thecompleted CAL/GANG Cards, the GangHistory Books and the Gang PhotographBooks. These files contain information onstreet gangs, their members and affiliates whoare, have been, or are likely to be involved incriminal activity and shall only be maintainedby Department-authorized gang investigationunits.

Hard-copy files shall remain secured andlocked at all times. However, these files shallhave 24-hour accessibility through the Areawatch commander for emergency usage.

The original hard-copy CAL/GANG Cards onoutlaw motorcycle gangs and prison gangsshall only be maintained by SOSD, GangSupport Section (GSS). Hard-copy files onAsian gangs may be maintained by GangImpact Teams, Bureau Gang Coordinators orAsian Crimes Unit, SOSD.

Note: Street Terrorism Enforcement andPrevention (STEP) books are not consideredintelligence files.

CAL/Gang Card Completion. Hard-copyCAL/GANG Cards shall be completed on allgang members and gang affiliates. The purposefor completing a CAL/GANG Card is todocument the original source for entry into theCAL/GANG System.

The completed CAL/GANG Card shall containat least the following information:

∗ Complete name;∗ Moniker;∗ Date of birth;∗ Identifying number(s);∗ Juvenile/Parent notification;∗ CAL/GANG number;∗ Criteria rationale, circumstances and date

documented;∗ Name and serial number of officer obtaining

information;∗ Individual’s photograph (if available); ∗ Complete name of gang or group; and,∗ Approving Gang Impact Team supervisor

signature.

This information and all future updates shall beentered into the CAL/GANG System withinthree working days.

Note: As much information as possible shouldbe placed on the CAL/GANG Card. Once aCAL/GANG Card has been completed with atleast the above information, all future contactsor information shall be documented on an FICard and input into the CAL/GANG System.Updating the CAL/GANG Card for membersand affiliates is not required.

Hard-Copy File Organization. TheDepartment hard-copy files shall be organizedas follows:

∗ The CAL/GANG Cards may include a copyof a current photograph of the gangmember/affiliate. In addition to the existingI-Card, this file shall also be considered thesource document for the CAL/GANGSystem and be arranged by gang name. AllCAL/GANG Cards with a CAL/GANGnumber shall remain on file regardless ofstatus; and,

∗ Cards of inactive and deceased individualswithout a CAL/GANG number shall beremoved from the files and destroyed.

269.50 CAL/GANG SYSTEM ANDGANG FILE SECURITY. The purpose of theCAL/GANG System is to provide Departmentpersonnel with an investigative tool forconducting investigations which may involvegang members or affiliates.

Confidentiality. All Department personnel arereminded that it is not a crime in and of itselfto be a gang member. It is incumbent upon theDepartment to protect the confidentiality of theCAL/GANG System and the Department gangfiles, and to safeguard the Constitutional rightsof those identified. As a result, access isrestricted to gang officers or personnel whohave met the “right to know, need to know”criteria.

Retrieval of System Files and Photocopies.Authorization to print from the CAL/GANGSystem shall only be obtained from theCommanding Officer, SOSD. If approval isobtained, these printouts shall not be copied,faxed, or mailed without approval of the

Commanding Officer, SOSD. Any printouts orcopies from the CAL/GANG System or hard-copy files shall not be used as addenda forreports (e.g., search warrants, arrest warrants,or gang injunctions, etc.). They shall not beplaced in personal ready reference files,investigative notebooks, case packages, orhomicide books.

At the culmination of an investigation, theinvestigating entity shall forward anyCAL/GANG printouts to SOSD for properfiling or destruction.

Printouts from the CAL/GANG System orhard-copy file(s) photocopies, facsimiles(faxes), or any form of reproductions shall notbe taken out of the gang investigation entity’soffice without prior approval of theCommanding Officer, SOSD.

Off-Hour and Emergency Access. Murders,assaults on police officers, and high-profilecrimes may occur at anytime and may requireaccess to the CAL/GANG System to ensuretimely information is available to theinvestigating officer, (I/O).

∗ Access. Accessing the CAL/GANG Systemrequires proper training and a password.Under emergency situations, whenpersonnel trained to access the CAL/GANGSystem are not available, the I/O shalltelephonically request assistance bycontacting the person named in theSOSD/GSS notification roster. This roster ismaintained by the Department CommandPost, Communications Division.

∗ Printing. If the I/O determines thatCAL/GANG information needs to beprinted, the I/O shall follow the aboveprocedure for approval and its use.

The I/O shall be guided by the directions of theCommanding Officer, SOSD, for properdisposition of the printed information.

Discovery Motions and Court Requests forRecords. The Commanding Officer, SOSD, isthe Department Custodian of Records for theCAL/GANG System and for all hard-copygang files throughout the Department.

The Commanding Officer, SOSD, shall benotified of all legal requests pertaining toinformation or records from the CAL/GANGSystem and/or any hard-copy gang files. Ganginvestigation units shall follow the direction ofthe Commanding Officer, SOSD, in handlinglegal requests for gang information. Theseunits shall receive prior approval from theCommanding Officer, SOSD, before releasingany information.

269.60 PHOTOGRAPHING KNOWNOR SUSPECTED GANG MEMBERS. Onlygang officers and gang detectives areauthorized to take non-booking identificationphotographs of active and affiliate gangmembers.

Field Photographs of Suspected GangMembers. Gang officers and gang detectives



shall adhere to the following guidelines whenphotographing a suspected gang member organg affiliate:

∗ Officers shall not use physical force or anyother form of coercion in acquiring aphotograph;

∗ Officers shall request and receivepermission from the individual prior totaking a photograph when that person is notbeing arrested or otherwise legally detained;

∗ Officers shall not pose the individual withname or gang identification cards;

∗ Individuals photographed shall beunrestrained and on public property;

∗ Officers shall conduct the photographingprocess contemporaneously with thecompletion of the FI Card;

∗ Photographing may not extend the timenecessary to complete the interviewprocess; and,

∗ A full explanation shall be provided to thesuspect as to the purpose of the photograph.

Security of Gang Member/AffiliatePhotographs. Gang Photo Books shall only bemaintained by gang units and shall be securedat all times. Gang Photo Books are animportant tool in the investigation of gang-related crimes and differ from regular photo ormug books in that they are assembled by gangand not by criminal offense. Gang Photo Booksare considered part of the Department’s hard-copy gang files. Gang officers shall follow thesame security measures with respect toprotecting gang member and affiliate photos asexercised for the CAL/GANG System and thehard-copy files. Gang Photo Books shall onlybe taken into the field with the approval of aGIT supervisor or the Area watch commanderand the Document Sign Out Log, Form15.31.0, shall be utilized.

Note: An automated database is permitted tobe used as an index for the Gang Photo Books,consisting only of the gang member/affiliate(s)name, CAL/GANG number, moniker and GangPhoto Book page number. If an automateddatabase is used, a copy of the printed indexshall be attached to the index portion of theGang Photo Book. All prior printing conditionsapply if this index is printed out.

Photograph Line-Up Procedures. TheCAL/GANG System has the capability ofproducing a photographic line-up forinvestigative purposes. Photographs shall nothave the name of the gang member on thephoto. Photographs may be copied for photobooks.

When CAL/GANG generated photo line-upsare not available, I/O’s shall use theDepartment’s existing established photo line-up procedures when selecting photos.

269.70 NOTIFICATION TO PARENTOR GUARDIAN OF JUVENILES. Gangofficers shall attempt to notify a juvenile’sparent or guardian in person when a juvenile isto be added to the Department’s gang files.When an in-person or telephonic notification to

the parents or guardian is not possible, (e.g.,conflicting work schedules, residence outsideof the City, etc.), the investigating GIT OICshall cause a letter to be mailed to the parentsor guardian utilizing the Gang AffiliationLetter, Form 12.16.5, or the Gang AffiliationLetter (Spanish Version), Form 12.16.6. Themanner of notification (in-person, telephonic,letter, etc.), date, and officer making thenotification shall be indicated on theCAL/GANG Card.

Exception: When parental notification mayjeopardize an active criminal investigation,such notification may be delayed. However,once the investigation is no longer jeopardized,the gang investigation unit OIC shall cause theparent or guardian to be advised telephonically,by mail, or in-person of the date, time, andcircumstances under which the juvenile’s namewas entered into the Department’s gang files.

269.80 AUDITS AND PURGING OFCAL/GANG RECORDS. Routine andthorough audits and purging of outdatedCAL/GANG records enhances the credibilityand reliability of both the CAL/GANG Systemand the hard-copy files.

Audits. Audits of all gang investigation unit’shard-copy files shall be conducted everyJanuary by the gang unit’s commandingofficer. Bureau audits of Area hard-copy gangfiles shall be conducted every July by theBureau Gang Coordinator. The findings ofthese audits shall be reported in writing to theCommanding Officer, SOSD.

Purging. The CAL/GANG System willautomatically alert the Department when anindividual’s database file has had no criteriaadded for the preceding five-year period. Insuch cases, the individual’s database file shallbe purged from the CAL/GANG System. Onlytrained Department personnel assigned toSOSD/GSS, may purge those individualdatabase files from the system. TheCAL/GANG Card whose information has beenpurged from the CAL/GANG System due toinactivity shall remain in the hard-copy filesunaltered. The deceased status of gangmembers and gang affiliates shall be enteredinto the CAL/GANG System as thatinformation becomes available to the AreaGang-Crime Analysis Detail. Incarceratedgang members/affiliates shall remain in theCAL/GANG System for a maximum period offive years unless the database file is updated toextend their active status. The CAL/GANGCards shall remain on file indefinitely.

270. VICE.270.10 RECEIVING VICEINFORMATION. When an officer receives,or becomes aware of, information concerninga vice violation and an arrest is not made at thetime of the violation, he/she shall:

∗ If the condition exists in the City, completea Vice Report, Form 3.18. When theurgency of the situation demands, the

officer shall also contact his/her immediatesupervisor for instructions.

∗ If the condition exists outside the City, butwithin Los Angeles County, complete aVice Report, Form 3.18. In addition, whenthe urgency of the situation demands, theofficer shall contact Vice Division; or whenthat division is closed, he/she shall notifythe Administrative Unit, Detective SupportDivision, which shall make the propernotifications.

Upon receipt of the Vice Report, the Areacommanding officer shall cause the reportedvice activity to be investigated when thecondition exists in the City. If the conditionexists outside the City, the CommandingOfficer, Vice Division, shall forward the viceinformation to the concerned law enforcementagency.

270.20 REPORTING VICECONDITIONS. The Vice Report, Form 3.18,shall be used by officers to report known orsuspected vice activity except when an arrest ismade at the time of violation. The Vice Reportshall include all known information relative tosuspects, type of activity, and methods ofoperation.

270.35 FORTUNE TELLERS,REPORTING. If officers become aware ofcrimes associated with fortune telling, such asbunco schemes, they shall complete theappropriate crime report and notify Areadetectives.

Fortune telling is no longer considered a viceactivity and shall not be reported on the ViceReport, Form 3.18.

270.50 BARS AND LIQUORESTABLISHMENTS, REPORTINGPOLICE PROBLEMS. Officers shall reportany information concerning premises licensedby the Department of Alcoholic BeverageControl which have become a police problem,and when it is believed that the Department ofAlcoholic Beverage Control may assist throughinvestigative or enforcement action. Thisinformation shall be forwarded to ViceDivision on an Employee's Report, Form 15.7,and shall include:

∗ The name of the licensee.∗ The type of license.∗ The address of the premises.∗ The number of the license.

An officer having information indicatingorganized criminal activity or extensivecriminal association of a licensee or anapplicant for a license granted by theDepartment of Alcoholic Beverage Controlshall proceed as set forth in Manual Section4/271.20.

270.60 PROSTITUTION ARRESTS INPUBLIC DWELLINGS. The person incharge of a public dwelling where an arrest forprostitution has been made shall be:

∗ Shown the persons arrested.



∗ Informed of the arrest and any statementsmade by the arrested persons as to the useof the premises for prostitution.

The Arrest Report, Form 5.2, shall include:

∗ The name, address, and capacity of theperson so informed.

∗ The person’s statements and reaction wheninformed that prostitution was beingpracticed on the premises.

271. INTELLIGENCE.271.20 REPORTING INTELLIGENCEINFORMATION. Employees shall notify theconcerned intelligence division whenintelligence information comes to theirattention which may be of significance to theDepartment.

Major Crimes Division. Major CrimesDivision shall be notified when the informationis related to persons, organizations, oractivities connected with, or suspected of beingconnected with:

∗ Organized crime.∗ The unlawful disruption of public order

through civil disobedience.∗ The unlawful overthrow of constituted

government.∗ A threat to the safety of the President of the

United States or other persons under theprotection of the United States SecretService.

∗ A threat to the safety of any elected orappointed official or other person of publicprominence.

Notifications shall be reported on anIntelligence Report, Form 1.89, and forwardedto the watch commander of the concernedintelligence division via intradepartmentalmail. In emergencies, or when the informationis confidential, the notification shall be madeto the information control officer of theconcerned intelligence division in person or bytelephone. When the offices of the concernedintelligence division are closed and the natureof the information requires immediate action,the Watch Commander, Detective SupportDivision, shall be requested to notify theconcerned stand-by intelligence personnel tocontact the reporting employee. Whenpracticable, the report shall include names,addresses, associates of persons reported upon,and other pertinent information.

271.25 STALKING, THREATS, ANDHARASSMENT. When officers becomeaware of an individual who demonstrates anabnormal fixation and generates a long-termpattern of harassment, threats, stalking, orunsolicited acts of visitation or telephonic orwritten communication in an annoying orthreatening manner toward another person,officers shall contact the Threat ManagementUnit (TMU), Detective Support Division(DSD), for advice. The TMU, DSD, isresponsible for investigating all written and

verbal and threats of harm to public officials orprominent persons.

Note: During off hours, TMU can be reachedvia the Mental Evaluation Unit, DSD. If TMUpersonnel cannot be reached contact DSDwatch commander for advice.

Copies of any arrest or crime reports involvingcases known to be under investigation byTMU, or fitting the criteria required by TMUfor investigation, shall be forwarded to TMU.

271.30 THREATENING LETTERS.When written communications threateningharm to public officials or prominent personscome into the custody of the Department, theyshall be preserved for a fingerprintinvestigation and forwarded to:

∗ Threat Management Unit, Detective SupportDivision, for the following:

∗ Mayor;∗ City Council members;∗ City Attorney;∗ City Controller; and,∗ Persons designated by the Commanding

Officer, Detective Bureau, and theDirector, Office of Operations.

Note: Threat Management Unit shall conductan investigation prior to forwarding thecommunications to Major Crimes Division.

∗ Commanding Officer, Major CrimesDivision, for all persons not listed above.

The Commanding Officer, Detective Bureau,shall ensure that each communication receivesappropriate police action and is forwarded tothe California Department of Justice forinclusion in the Automated Threatening LetterFile.

271.35 THREATS AGAINST PUBLICOFFICIALS. Any employee who receivesinformation concerning a threat against the lifeof a California state public official shall, inaddition to completing the appropriate crimereport:

∗ Telephonically report the threat and thecircumstances surrounding the threat to theExecutive Protection Bureau, CaliforniaState Police, (213) 620-3216, available 24hours.

∗ Record the date and time of the notificationand the name of the person notified in theappropriate section of the arrest and/orcrime report.

Note: A California state public official is anelected state official, an officer or employee ofthe State of California appointed by theGovernor and exempt from civil service, or ajustice of the California Supreme Court orCourt of Appeals.

272. SPOUSE BEATING.272.20 REPORTING SPOUSE BEATINGOFFENSE. Spouse beating offenses shall be

reported on the Preliminary InvestigationReport, Form 3.1.

272.40 PHOTOGRAPHING VICTIM OFSPOUSE BEATING. The officer making aPreliminary Investigation Report, Form 3.1, ona spouse beating offense shall havephotographs taken of the victim's injury.Photographs shall be made by the PhotographicSection, Scientific Investigation Division. Ifthe Photographic Section is not open, DetectiveSupport Division shall be notified.

272.45 REMOVING CLOTHING FROMFEMALE TO PHOTOGRAPH INJURY.An adult female shall be present whenever anyclothes are removed from any other female forthe purpose of photographing an injury. Thename and address of the adult female witnessshall be placed in the crime report.

273. BATTERY.273.40 PHOTOGRAPHING VICTIM OFBATTERY. When the victim of a reportedbattery has injuries which should bephotographed, the reporting officer shall issuethe Victim's Report Memo, Form 3.17, andadvise the victim to contact the PhotographicSection, Scientific Investigation Division, tomake an appointment to have the injuriesphotographed. "Photos Advised" shall beentered in the narrative portion of the report.

274. INTERVIEWING.274.10 TAKING REPORTS AT THESTATION. When a person appears at a stationand wishes to report an incident, the deskofficer shall:

∗ Determine if a report should be taken.∗ Complete the appropriate report.∗ Cause the reporting person to sign the

report.∗ Submit the report to a supervisor for

approval.

When the taking of the report is beyond theability of the desk officer or requires expertknowledge, the desk officer shall refer thereporting person to the concerned divisioninvestigating unit. When the concerneddivision investigating unit is not available,referral shall be made to the division watchcommander. In all cases, the final interviewingofficer shall take the report.

Exception: When the person wishes to makea traffic collision report or an auto theft reportat the station, the desk officer shall follow theprocedure set forth for:

∗ Traffic collision reporting (Manual Section4/430.05).

∗ Auto theft reporting (Manual Section4/220).

274.20 TELEPHONIC REPORTS. Thefollowing crimes may be reportedtelephonically when no unusual circumstancesexist which require a field investigation.

∗ Stolen vehicle, when:



∗ The person reporting is the registeredowner or lessee of the vehicle; AND,

∗ The employee taking the report hasverified through Department of MotorVehicles files:

∗ The registration and ownership ofthe vehicle.

∗ The identity of the reporting person.

Note: Stolen vehicle reports shall notbe taken telephonically for rentedvehicles.

∗ Burglary/Theft From Vehicle, or PlainTheft, when:

∗ The property taken is valued at less than$3,000; and,

∗ The person reporting is the owner of theproperty taken.

∗ Grand Theft-Pickpocket when:

∗ The suspect is not at the scene;∗ There is no possibility of locating the

suspect through a limited follow-upinvestigation by field personnel; and,

∗ The property taken is valued at less than$3,000.

∗ Battery, when:

∗ No additional battery is likely to occur;and,

∗ The injury, if any, does not requireimmediate medical attention.

∗ Lewd/Annoying Phone Call, when thereporting person is in no immediate danger.

∗ Any misdemeanor reportable on aPreliminary Investigation Report, Form 3.1,when:

∗ The amount of damage is estimated atless than $3,000., and,

∗ The offense is not directly related to alabor dispute, and,

∗ The offense has no racial, ethnic, orreligious connotations.

Note: If the reporting person requests a receipt,he shall be advised that a Victim's ReportMemo, Form 3.17, may be obtained at thestation where the report was completed.

Automated Plain Paper Telephonic Reports.Telephonic report information may, in someinstances, be entered directly into theautomated system (CCAD) via a CRT device.The computer printout of the informationprinted on plain paper will constitute the crimereport.

∗ Processing. Plain paper reports shall beprocessed in the same manner as thePreliminary Investigation Report, Form 3.1,or the Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180; i.e.,approval, DR number, distribution, andfiling requirements are the same as for thehandwritten reports.

∗ Criteria for Use. Automated telephonicreporting may be used only by designated

employees of the Information and ReportOffice, Communications Division, and onlywhen:

∗ A suspect/suspect vehicle has not beenseen;

∗ Prints or other evidence are not present;∗ There is no distinct M.O.;∗ The property loss is less than $3,000;∗ There is no serious injury to the victim;

and,∗ There is only one victim involved.

Note: Crimes that are reportedtelephonically but do not conform toautomated telephonic criteria shall bereported on preprinted report forms.

274.30 VEHICLE LICENSE PLATEINFORMATION. Officers who receive verbalinformation about the license plate number ofa vehicle involved in a crime shall:

∗ Direct the victim or witness to write thelicense plate information on a piece ofpaper, then have the victim or witness sign,date, and record the time on the piece ofpaper.

∗ Book the piece of paper as evidence(Manual Section 4/510).

Exception: When the license plate number isthat of a vehicle involved in a traffic collision,such as a hit and run vehicle, officers shallattach the piece of paper to a separateNarrative/Supplemental, CHP Form 556, withtransparent tape, complete the first two lines ofthe CHP Form 556 and forward it with theTraffic Collision Report.

275. PIN MAPS.275.10 CRIME PIN MAPS. Thosedivisions or units maintaining crime pin mapsshall post such maps with the followingdesignated pins:

DIVISIONAL PIN MAPSWith With

Crime Pin Color Plain Bar DotBurglary Red Day Night A.M.Robbery Green “ ” “Rape and Assaults Black “ ” “Theft from Auto Yellow “ ” “Auto Theft Orange “ ” “Purse Snatching Chocolate “ ” “Recovered Auto White “ ” “Burglary from Auto Blue “ ” “

WATCH PIN MAPSCrime PinResidence Burglary Plain RedBusiness Burglary Red With BarGas Station Burglary Red With DotStreet Robbery Plain GreenBusiness Robbery Green With BarAll Other Robberies Green With DotRape Plain BlackAssaults Black With BarTheft from Auto Plain YellowTheft from Business Yellow With BarOther Thefts Yellow With DotAuto Theft (Street) Plain OrangeAuto Theft (Parking Lot) Orange With BarAuto Theft (Other) Orange With DotPurse Snatching Plain ChocolateRecovered Auto Plain WhiteBurglary from Auto Plain Blue

275.50 TRAFFIC PIN MAPINFORMATION. Traffic collision pin maps

shall be kept up to date on the basis ofinformation received from the Crime andMiscellaneous Reports Section, Records andIdentification Division.

276. TRESPASS.

276.10 ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTIONOF THE TRESPASS WARNING LETTER,FORM 3.21.

Officer's Responsibility - Whenever anofficer determines that an individual hasentered upon Housing Authority propertywithout lawful permission, the officer shallverbally advise the individual that he or she istrespassing. A check shall then be made todetermine if a Form 3.21 is on file withdivision of occurrence.

If the individual was issued a Form 3.21 withinthe preceding 30-day period, the individualshall be arrested for violation of Section 41.23LAMC. A copy of the Form 3.21 shall be madeand attached to the arrest report. The originalTrespass Warning Letters shall remain in theTrespass warning book at the division'ssubpoena control office.

If a Trespass Warning Letter is not on file, theofficer shall issue a Form 3.21. The officershall read the second paragraph of the TrespassWarning Letter to the violator, and thenrequest the violator to sign the form. If theindividual refuses to sign the form, the officershall print "Refused" on the violator's signatureline followed by his/her initials. The officershall sign and date the form prior to providingthe violator with the second copy of thedocument. The original document and onecopy shall be turned in with the officer's DailyField Activities Report, Form 15.52.

Note: An individual that was previously servedwith a Trespass Warning Letter, may bearrested only when the warning and arrest arefor the same Housing Authority - property withthe 30-day period.

Subpoena Control Officer's Responsibility -Subpoena control officers shall ensure that theoriginal Form 3.21 be retained in a notebookbinder in the Subpoena Control office. A copyshall also be placed in a three-ring notebookbinder that shall be retained at the division'sfront desk, for field personnel use.

Commanding Officer's Responsibility -Commanding officers shall ensure that a binderis maintained in the division's subpoena controloffice to retain the original Trespass WarningLetters. A Trespass Warning book shall also bemaintained at the division's front desk for useby field personnel. Commanding officers shallensure that copies of the Form 3.21 are purgedfrom the book after 30 days.

278. DEPOSITING WEAPONS ATJAIL. Officers entering any area of a jailwhere arrestees are booked or detained shalldeposit weapons in a weapons locker or otherlocation of safety prior to, or immediatelyupon, entering the jail.



Note: Weapons shall include, but are notlimited to, firearms, saps, and batons.

279. SHOTGUNS IN POLICEVEHICLES. A loaded Department shotguncarried in a police vehicle shall contain fourrounds of ammunition in the magazine, shall becocked, and the safety shall be in the "ON"position. A shotgun shall not be carried in apolice vehicle with a round of ammunition inthe chamber.

280. PRIVATE PERSONS IN POLICEVEHICLES. All requests to ride in policevehicles for the purpose of gatheringinformation for use in feature articles shall bereferred to the Commanding Officer, PublicInformation Office. All requests by privatepersons to ride in police vehicles for purposesother than feature articles shall be referred tothe concerned division commanding officer.

282. LOST OR DAMAGEDDEPARTMENT EQUIPMENT. Loss,recovery, unserviceable condition of, ordamage to, City-owned equipment shall bereported by the discovering employee (s) to asupervisor as soon as practicable. Thesupervisor shall conduct an investigation todetermine if the loss, damage or condition ofthe item was a result of negligence orcarelessness on the part of a Departmentemployee. The supervisor conducting theinvestigation shall ensure that a lost or theftreport is completed on all missing items.Should employee negligence or carelessness beindicated in the investigation, an Employee'sReport to that effect shall be initiated by theinvestigating supervisor. The commandingofficer of the unit to which the equipment isassigned, shall forward an IntradepartmentalCorrespondence, Form 15.2, explaining thecircumstances of the loss, and/or correctiveaction taken, along with a copy of any relatedreport(s) to the Commanding Officer,Administrative and Technical Services Bureau.

When employees' Department identificationcards or badges are lost or stolen, they shallobtain a replacement from Personnel Division.

When supervisors approve a crime or lostproperty report which includes a lost or stolenDepartment Badge or identification card, theyshall cause a teletype to be sent to allDepartment facilities with the heading:"ATTENTION LOST/STOLENDEPARTMENT IDENTIFICATIONCARD/BADGE."

Any lost, theft, damage or destruction ofelectronic communication equipment shall bereported as directed in Manual Section 3/579.

283. DAMAGE TO PRIVATEPROPERTY. Employees who have takenpolice action resulting in the mistaken damageof private property shall immediately notifytheir supervisor or watch commander andcomplete an Employee's Report, Form 15.7,prior to the end of his/her tour of duty, givingthe details of the occurrence. The employee'ssupervisor shall ensure that telephonic

notification is made to the Police SupplySection, Fiscal Operations Division, requestingthe repair of the property. The concernedsupervisor shall report the incident to theconcerned commanding officer. Thecommanding officer shall complete anIntradepartmental Correspondence, Form 15.2,explaining the circumstances of the incidentand ensure that the completed correspondenceis forwarded to the Commanding Officer,Fiscal Operations Division. The Form 15.7completed by the concerned officer and a copyof the commanding officer's Form 15.2 shall befiled in the officer's unit of assignment.

Note: When Fiscal Operations Division isclosed, the telephonic notification shall bemade to Detective Support Division.

284. INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS.284.10 DIPLOMATIC AND CONSULARCONTACTS.

Officer's Responsibility. When officers detainan individual suspected of committing a crimewho claims to be a diplomatic agent, a careerconsular officer, an honorary consular officer,or a family member or employee of such agent,and there is a question as to the suspect'sidentity or immunity, the officer shall:

∗ Immediately obtain the assistance of asupervisor;

∗ Immediately cause the office of the Chief ofStaff, Office of the Chief of Police, to benotified of the detention, identity, and claimof the individual; and,

∗ Be guided by the advice of the Chief ofStaff.

Note: When the office of the Chief of Staff isclosed, notification should be made to theWatch Commander, Detective SupportDivision.

If detained, the diplomatic agent, consularofficer, or honorary consular officer should notnormally be handcuffed. However, incircumstances where the safety of the public orthe police officer is in danger, or it is apparentthat a serious crime may be committed, policeofficers shall take necessary action.

In all cases where a diplomatic agent, consularofficer, honorary consular officer, or memberof the diplomatic agent's staff is detained for afelony crime or for driving under the influence,notification shall be made to the Chief of Staff,or, when that office is closed, the Chief's staffofficer, or Watch Commander, DetectiveSupport Division.

Chief of Staff’s Responsibility. When notifiedthat a foreign national has been detained by amember of this Department and claims to havediplomatic or consular immunity, the Chief ofStaff shall:

∗ Contact the Protocol Office, United StatesDepartment of State, for verification; and,

∗ Advise the requesting department personnelof the status of the foreign national and

procedures to be followed during thecontact.

Note: When the office of the Chief of Staff isclosed, Detective Support Division shall beresponsible for making the appropriateinquiries and advising the notifying officer.

284.15 DIPLOMATIC AGENTIMMUNITY. A diplomatic agent is anyperson entrusted by a foreign government andapproved by the United States government toexercise diplomatic functions in this country.This includes the Ambassador, Minister, andthe Minister Counselor, Counselor, FirstSecretary, Second Secretary, attaché, or otherdiplomatic officer. Diplomatic agents enjoy thehighest degree of privileges and immunities.

Criminal Incidents. Diplomatic Agents, theirfamilies, and members of their administrativeand technical staff are protected by unlimitedimmunity from arrest, detention, or prosecutionwith respect to any civil or criminal offense.This is known as personal inviolability.

Diplomatic agents, their family members andmembers of their administrative or technicalstaff stopped while driving under the influenceshould not be permitted to continue driving.Officers shall immediately obtain theassistance of a supervisor who shall assess thesituation and determine the appropriate actionto be taken. Field sobriety tests should beoffered, but cannot be compelled. Whenpracticable, the supervisor shall assist theindividual in securing an alternate means oftransportation (e.g., request a cab, contact aresponsible party) or when, reasonable,transport the individual to a location of theirchoice. All the facts of the incident, includingall objective signs of intoxication should bedocumented in the appropriate Departmentreport (e.g., CHP, Form 555.03, TrafficCollision Information, Form 4.37, etc.) If noother Department report is completed, the factsshall be documented in an Employee’s Report,Form 15.7, and forwarded to the Chief of Staff.

Note: Service staff of diplomatic agents areimmune from prosecution for acts committedwhile performing diplomatic functions.However, they are subject to criminal offenseunder other circumstances.

Traffic Enforcement. Officers shall notnormally issue personal service or absenteecitations to diplomatic agents, their familymembers, or members of their administrativeand technical staff. Officers shall not impoundthe vehicles of these officials. In thoseinstances when the driving of the official is adanger to others, a supervisor shall besummoned to the scene. With the supervisor'sapproval, a citation may be issued. If theindividual refuses to sign the citation, he or sheshall be permitted to leave the location. Allcopies of the unsigned citation, accompaniedby an Employee’s Report, Form 15.7,explaining circumstances of the contact, shallbe forwarded to the Chief of Staff the nextbusiness day following the incident. If the



individual signs the citation, a photocopy ofthe citation accompanied by an Employee'sReport, Form 15.7, explaining thecircumstances of the contact shall be forwardedto the Chief of Staff the next business dayfollowing the incident.

Exception: The vehicle of the diplomaticagent, their family, or member of theiradministrative or technical staff may beimpounded when it constitutes a traffic hazardor when parked on a tow-away zone. Thevehicles shall be cited when they areimpounded.

Premises and Property Immunity. Officersshall not enter the premises of the diplomaticagent or the premises of the administrative ortechnical staff. The premises can include theresidence, office or office space within theresidence, even in "hot pursuit," without theexpress consent of the head of the diplomaticpost or his or her designee. Consent may beassumed in the case of fire or other disasterrequiring prompt action.

Officers shall take all appropriate steps toprotect the diplomatic agent's premise and thepremises of their administrative and technicalstaff against any disturbance of the peace ofthe diplomat post or impairment of its dignity.No arrest or other probable cause is necessaryto remove unwanted persons from the premisesupon request of the individual.

Diplomatic agent archives, files, anddocuments, including official mail are immunefrom local jurisdiction at all times whereverthey may be. The diplomatic mailbag shall notbe opened or detained. The diplomatic courieris immune from any form of arrest or detentionduring the performance of his or her duty.

284.20 CAREER CONSULAR OFFICERIMMUNITY. A career consular officer is anyperson entrusted by a foreign government andauthorized by the United States Government toperform formal consular functions in thiscountry. This includes the Consul-General,Consuls, and Vice-Consuls. A career consularofficer is a citizen of a foreign countryempowered by its government to act in itsbehalf on trade matters and other limitedgovernmental functions. Each career consularofficer possesses State Department credentials(bearing the State Department's seal, the nameof the officer, his or her title, and the signaturesof State Department officials) and other officialidentification.

Criminal Incidents. Career consular officershave only official acts or functional immunityin respect to both criminal and civil matters.Career consular officers may only be arrestedfor a felony pursuant to a warrant and may bedetained at anytime if the offense involved isan immediate threat to public safety. A careerconsular officer is not liable to detention orarrest for a misdemeanor. The consular officershall be informed of the violation and bepermitted to continue on his or her way. This isknown as consular inviolability. A career

consular officer's family and staff have noconsular inviolability whatsoever. If the careerconsular officer commits or is in the process ofcommitting a felony, which is an immediatedanger to the public safety, the consular officershall be taken into custody and held untilbooking advice is received.

Career consular officers stopped while drivingunder the influence should not be permitted tocontinue driving. Officers shall immediatelyobtain the assistance of a supervisor who shallassess the situation and determine theappropriate action to be taken. Field sobrietytests should be offered but they cannot becompelled. When practicable, the supervisorshall assist the consular officer in securing analternate means of transportation (e.g., requesta cab; contact a responsible party) or, whenreasonable, transport the consular officer to alocation of the consular officer's choice. All thefacts of the incident, including all objectivesigns of intoxication, should be documented inthe appropriate Department report (e.g., TrafficCollision Report, CHP Form 180, MunicipalSupplement, Form 4.03.01, etc.). If no otherDepartment report is completed, the factsshould be documented in an Employee Report,Form 15.7, and forwarded to the Chief of Staff.

Traffic Enforcement. The traffic enforcementsection regarding diplomatic agents (ManualSection 4/284.15) shall apply to careerconsular officers as well.

Premises and Property Immunity. Officersshall not enter a career consular officer'sofficial office or the official office space withinthe consular officer's residence, even in "hotpursuit," without the express consent of thehead of the consular post or his or herdesignee. Consent may be assumed in the caseof fire or other disaster requiring promptaction.

Officers shall take all appropriate steps toprotect the consular officer's premises againstany disturbance of the peace of the diplomaticpost or impairment of its dignity. No arrest orother probable cause is necessary to removeunwanted persons from the premises uponrequest of the consular officer.

Career consular officer archives, files, anddocuments including official mail, are immunefrom local jurisdiction at all times whereverthey may be. The consular mailbag shall not beopened or detained. The consular courier isimmune from any form of arrest or detentionduring the performance of his or her duty.

Note: The United States may have reachedbilateral agreement with certain foreigngovernments, whereby their consular personnelin the United States (and their families) haveprivileges and immunities approximating thoseafforded diplomatic officers. Police officersshould be guided by the Chief of Staff in theseinstances.

284.25 HONORARY CONSULAROFFICER IMMUNITY. An honoraryconsular officer is a United States citizen or a

citizen of a foreign country who is a permanentresident of the United States appointed toperform the functions of a career consularofficer. They do not possess a StateDepartment identification card, but may haveother official identification.

Criminal Incidents. Honorary consularofficers may be detained and arrested forfelony or misdemeanor offenses. They may notbe prosecuted for acts committed only whenperforming consular functions. After anhonorary consular officer or employee hasbeen arrested, he or she may raise the defenseof immunity at the trial. The determinationregarding immunity will be made by the judge.Members of an honorary consular officer'sfamily and private or domestic staff have noconsular inviolability whatsoever.

Traffic Enforcement. The traffic enforcementsection regarding diplomatic agents (ManualSection 4/284.15) shall apply to honoraryconsular officers as well.

Premises and Property Immunity. Officialoffice, archives, files and documents, includingmail, are immune from local jurisdiction at alltimes wherever they may be. The consularmailbag shall not be opened or detained. Theconsular courier is immune from any form ofarrest or detention during the performance ofhis or her duty.

284.35 REQUESTS FORINFORMATION REGARDINGCONSULAR OFFICERS. Officers desiringadditional information regarding consuls andconsular relations shall contact the Chief ofStaff. Legal information regarding consularimmunity may be obtained from RiskManagement Group, during normal businesshours.

284.38 REPORT-DISTRIBUTIONWHEN CIRCUMSTANCES INVOLVECONSULAR OFFICERS. The supervisorapproving the report shall cause one copy of allcrime, arrest, traffic and other related reportsinvolving consular officers to be distributed tothe following entities: Chief of Staff;Commanding Officer, Special OperationsBureau; Commanding Officer, Major CrimesDivision; Commanding Officer, PublicInformation Office, Office of the Chief ofPolice.

284.40 NOTIFICATION PROCEDURESFOR AGGRAVATED CONTACTSINVOLVING CONSULAR OFFICERS.

Officer's Responsibility. An officer who hasobserved or who is called to the scene of anincident involving a consular officer or amember of his or her family which is, or maybecome, aggravated shall:

∗ Immediately obtain the assistance of asupervisor.

∗ As soon as practicable, notify the Chief ofStaff, or the Administrative Unit, DetectiveSupport Division, after hours.



∗ Complete an Employee's Report, Form 15.7,and any other report necessary under thecircumstances.

Note: The Form 15.7 need not be completedwhen all the information necessary for theChief of Police is included in another writtenreport.

Supervisor's Responsibility. A supervisorcalled to the scene of an aggravated incidentinvolving a consular officer or a member of hisor her family shall:

∗ Assess the situation and take anyappropriate action.

∗ Immediately notify the Chief of Staff,describing the situation and circumstancesof the aggravated incident. During thosehours when the Chief of Staff is closed, theWatch Commander, Detective SupportDivision, shall be notified and directed tocontact the concerned staff officer. Thesupervisor shall remain available for areturn call from the concerned staff officer.

∗ Contact the Protocol Officer or AssistantProtocol Officer, Office of the Mayor.During those hours when the ProtocolOffice is closed, the City Hall switchboardoperator shall be requested to transfer thecall to either of the concerned protocolofficers.

∗ Cause a copy of the concerned reports to beforwarded without delay in accordance withManual Section 5/030.66.

Watch Commander, Detective SupportDivision’s Responsibility. When requested bythe field supervisor, the Watch Commander,Detective Support Division, shall notify theChief of Staff and request him/her to call thefield supervisor.

Note: Although consular immunity does notextend to a consular officer's family, thisnotification procedure shall be observed foraggravated incidents involving a consularofficer or a member of his or her family.Aggravated incidents are not limited to drivingunder the influence or felony offenses but shallbe considered incidents of any nature whichmay tend to become aggravated due to thecircumstances or personalities involved.

284.45 REQUESTS FOR POLITICALASYLUM.Employee's Responsibility. An employeereceiving a request for political asylum from aforeign national shall immediately notify asupervisor.

∗ If the total circumstances are not recordedon another report, complete an Employee'sReport, Form 15.7, setting forth the facts ofthe situation.

Note: A foreign national, including a minor,within the United States is entitled to the sameprotections under the law guaranteed a UnitedStates citizen; therefore, officers may use thatforce necessary to protect a person requestingasylum and to ensure the safety of that person.

Supervisor's Responsibility. A supervisornotified of a request for political asylum by aforeign national shall:

∗ Cause the Watch Commander, DetectiveSupport Division (DSD), to be notified andbe guided by his or her advice; and,

∗ Cause a copy of all reports to be forwarded,without delay, in accordance with ManualSection 5/15.7-84.

DSD’s Responsibility. The WatchCommander, DSD, shall immediately notifythe Operations Center, Department of State,Washington, D.C., of a request (or imminentrequest) for political asylum which:

∗ Is politically sensitive;∗ Involves the possibility of forcible

repatriation;∗ Is determined by the DSD Watch

Commander to be of special interest to theDepartment of State;

∗ Involves a foreign national who is present inthe United States as part of an official visit,formal cultural or athletic exchange,exchange student program or state-ownedbusiness or enterprise activity, or who is intransit through the United States in suchcapacity; or,

∗ Involves any foreign diplomat, foreignconsular officer, or foreign official,regardless of the country.

Any other requests for political asylum shall bereferred to the Immigration and NaturalizationService.

The Watch Commander, DSD, shall ensurethat the Chief of Staff is notified of any requestfor political asylum as soon as practicable.

284.46 RIGHTS OF ARRESTEDFOREIGN NATIONALS.Officer’s Responsibility. Officers arresting ordetaining a foreign national shall notifyDetective Support Division (DSD) of the arrestor detention whether or not the foreign nationalwants the consulate notified.

Note: Manual Section 4/284.10 defines thosepersons protected by unlimited immunity fromarrest or detention.

DSD’s Responsibility. Detective SupportDivision shall be guided by the Department ofState Guidelines Regarding ForeignNationals Arrested or Detained in theUnited States, and make the appropriatenotifications to the concerned consularofficials.

Watch Commander's Responsibility. TheWatch Commander of the concerned custodialfacility shall ensure that the arrestee is allowedto communicate, correspond with, and bevisited by consular officials of his country.

284.47 DEATH OR GUARDIANSHIP OFA FOREIGN NATIONAL.Employee's Responsibility. An officer shallnotify DSD when investigating:

∗ The death of a foreign national; or,∗ Any situation which requires the

appointment of a guardian or trustee for aforeign national.

DSD’s Responsibility. The WatchCommander, DSD, shall ensure that theappropriate foreign consular officials arenotified of:

∗ The death of a foreign national; or,∗ The need to appoint a guardian or trustee for

a foreign national.

286. PARKER CENTER MOTORPOOL VEHICLES.

286.10 OBTAINING VEHICLES FROMTHE PARKER CENTER MOTOR POOL.When requesting a Parker Center Motor Poolvehicle, the requesting employee shall:

∗ Complete the appropriate sections of theLAPD Transportation Order, Form 11.34.0,and forward it to the appropriate supervisorfor approval;

∗ Advise the approving supervisor of thereason the pool vehicle is needed; theestimated mileage the pool vehicle will bedriven; and how long the vehicle will be inuse; and,

∗ Submit the approved LAPD TransportationOrder, Form 11.34.0, to the Parker CenterMotor Pool Dispatcher (Manual Section3/582.50).

286.20 RETURNING VEHICLES TOTHE PARKER CENTER MOTOR POOL.Once the specified use for a Parker CenterMotor Pool vehicle has been completed, returnthe vehicle immediately as follows:

∗ To the Parker Center Motor PoolDispatcher;

∗ When the Motor Pool Dispatch Office isclosed, return the vehicle to PropertyDivision; or

∗ When the Motor Pool Dispatch Office andProperty Division are closed, return thevehicle to the Parker Center Motor PoolDispatcher before 0900 hours the followingbusiness day.

287. FUEL CREDIT CARDS.287.10 CHECKING OUT FUEL CREDITCARDS. An employee shall be issued eitheran assigned or loaned fuel credit card when:

∗ Department business requires an employeeto utilize a Department vehicle to travel onan extended trip outside the City; or,

∗ Where specific circumstances mightpreempt the use of Department fuelingfacilities because of a conflict with theemployee's assignment.

Assigned fuel credit cards are used byspecialized divisions and shall be issued andcontrolled by the commanding officers of thesedivisions.

Loaned fuel credit cards are used for extendedtrips outside the City and shall be issued and



controlled by the Administrative Unit,Detective Support Division (DSD).

Note: Upon return of a loaned credit card,Detective Support Division personnel shallensure that the employee provides receipts forany gasoline obtained, and that the receiptsbear the employee's serial number and thelicense number, shop number, and mileage ofthe City vehicle.

Requests for additional or replacement fuelcredit cards shall be made by forwarding theappropriate correspondence to Motor TransportDivision.

287.50 USE OF FUEL CREDIT CARDS.Credit cards shall be used only to purchasegasoline, oil, and other automotive supplies foruse in City-owned vehicles.

Employee's Responsibility. Every employeeusing a Department fuel credit card shall:

∗ Obtain fuel from a Department facilitywhen possible, unless it would jeopardizehis/her assignment when traveling withinthe City or surrounding areas;

∗ Purchase only approved items (i.e., regulargasoline, diesel fuel, or oil). Gasoline ordiesel fuel shall be purchased fromselfservice pumps when available;

∗ Obtain a written receipt for all chargesmade on the credit card;

∗ Ensure the credit card receipt bears thecredit card number, the name and address ofthe service station from which the supplieswere purchased, an itemized list ofpurchases, quantity of fuel in whole andtenths of gallon, and a legible total cost;

∗ Place his/her serial number and the licensenumber, shop number, and mileage of theCity vehicle on the front side of the creditcard receipt; and,

∗ Submit receipts to the Administrative Unit,DSD, when a loaned fuel credit card isused; or,

∗ Submit receipts to their immediatesupervisor when an assigned fuel credit cardof a specialized division is used.

Note: Employees shall not use the Departmentfuel credit card for purchasing repairs orservicing of Department vehicles. When anemployee experiences mechanical problemsoutside the City, the employee shall contact theMotor Transport Division watch commanderfor instructions.

A fuel credit card shall only be used by theperson to whom it was issued and shall only beused at appropriate service stations. Fuel maybe purchased for more than one vehicle withthe same credit card at one time, but a separatereceipt shall be obtained for each vehicleserviced.

Exception: Prearranged group purchases offuel for solo motorcycles do not require aseparate receipt.

Supervisor's Responsibility. Each supervisorreviewing fuel credit card receipts shall:

∗ Ensure each receipt is properly completedand verify that the usage was forDepartment business in a City vehicle; and,

∗ Forward each credit card receipt to his/hercommanding officer.

Commanding Officer's Responsibility. Eachcommanding officer reviewing fuel credit cardreceipts shall :

∗ Ensure the receipts are reviewed forcompleteness and validity;

∗ Maintain a 90-day retention file for thereceipts; and,

∗ Assist Motor Transport Division inresolving errors or exceptions upon receiptof a credit card use of exception report.

Motor Transport Division's Responsibility.Motor Transport Division shall:

∗ Review monthly fuel invoices from thecredit card company for errors andexceptions;

∗ Create an exception report, listing purchasesother than approved items;

∗ Submit an exception report to theappropriate commanding officer(s); and,

∗ Forward approved invoices and a copy ofthe exception report to Fiscal OperationsDivision within 10 days.

288. "UNDERCOVER" LICENSEPLATES. "Undercover" license plates shallnot be used at any time on a Departmentvehicle equipped with a visible red light, siren,or any other visible police equipment or on avehicle which is painted or otherwise identifiedas a police vehicle, or which is operated by auniformed officer.

289. SAFETY BELTS INDEPARTMENT VEHICLES. Employee’s Responsibility. Employees andall others operating or riding in Departmentvehicles shall wear three-point safety beltswhen provided. Two-point safety belts (lapbelts) shall be worn when three-point safetybelts are not provided. Employees intending tooperate or ride in a Department vehicle shallensure that all occupants of the vehicle areusing the available safety belts before thevehicle is operated.

Child Seat Restraints. A child twelve (12)years of age and under, who is to betransported in any Department vehicle, shall besecured in the rear seat of the vehicle. A childwho is under six (6) years of age or weighingless than sixty (60) pounds shall be secured ina child passenger seat restraint (car seat).

Employees shall place the child in a car seatwhich is Federal Safety Standard approved,and employees should attempt to place thechild in a car seat which is appropriate for thechild’s weight.

Traffic Coordination Section should becontacted for clarification regarding theappropriate car seat for the child’s weight.

Note: A Department vehicle is any motorvehicle which is under the direction andcontrol of the police Department, includingprivately-owned vehicles used for Citybusiness.

Safety belts shall be adjusted so they providemaximum protection with reasonable comfort.

Safety belts shall be inspected at the start ofeach watch. Any Department vehicle equippedwith an unserviceable safety belt shall beremoved from service.

Tactical Considerations. When a potentiallydangerous tactical situation is perceived oranticipated, the safety belt may be removed toallow adequate time for safe response to thesituation. During special operations, the safetybelt may be removed when, in the beltedemployee's judgment, wearing the safety beltmight adversely affect the special operation orendanger the employee.

Examples:

∗ Officers may remove their safety beltsimmediately prior to arriving at the locationof an emergency call so they can quicklyleave their vehicles upon arrival.

∗ Officers may remove their safety beltsimmediately prior to stopping a suspect.However, officers should be careful not toremove their safety belts prematurely andthus risk being without safety beltprotection during a pursuit.

292. MOTIONPICTURE/TELEVISION FILMINGWORK PERMITS.292.05 EMPLOYEE/RETIREDOFFICER’S RESPONSIBILITY. Employeesor retired officers seeking employment atmotion picture/television filming locationsshall:

∗ Complete the Motion Picture/TelevisionFilming Work Permit Application/Renewal,Form 01.47.01;

∗ Submit the completed application to his/herimmediate supervisor for processing;

Note: Retired officers shall submit thecompleted application directly to the WorkPermit Coordinator, Personnel Group, forapproval.

∗ Prior to processing of the application byPersonnel Group, have a color photographtaken as directed by the Work PermitCoordinator, Personnel Group; and,

Note: Neither active employees nor retiredofficers shall engage in off-duty motionpicture/television filming employment untilfinal approval from Personnel Group has beenobtained.

∗ Comply with all rules and regulations asoutlined on the Motion Picture/TelevisionFilming Work Permit Application/Renewal,Form 01.47.01.

Note: Retired or off-duty officers who fail to



comply with the rules and regulations of theirMotion Picture/Television Filming WorkPermits may be subject to suspension orrevocation of their Motion Picture/TelevisionFilming Work Permits. Active officers mayalso be subject to disciplinary action by theDepartment.

Off-duty officers employed by a filmingcompany for the purpose of traffic control shallnot issue citations for moving, non-moving orparking violations. An off-duty officer whobelieves enforcement action is appropriate at afilming location may proceed by submitting aComplaint Application, Form 5.15, or shallsummon on-duty personnel who shall beresponsible for the final determinationregarding enforcement action.

Officers who are denied a MotionPicture/Television Filming Work Permit mayappeal the denial by utilizing the appealprocedure in accordance with Manual Section3/744.36.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. A supervisorreceiving a Motion Picture/Television FilmingWork Permit Application/Renewal shall:

∗ Review the application for completeness;∗ Acknowledge receipt of the application by

completing the “SUPERVISORREVIEWING APPLICATION” line;

∗ Ensure that the employment does notconflict with any duty restrictions theemployee may have;

Note: An employee’s duty restrictions shall beobtained by contacting Medical LiaisonSection, and/or the Area Sick/IODCoordinator.

∗ Document any information discovered thatmay result in a denial of the request formotion picture/television filmingemployment;

∗ Forward the original application with allassociated documents to the requestingemployee’s commanding officer;

∗ If the employee is requesting to use a two-wheeled motorcycle, ensure therequirements of Rule No. 4 on theapplication are verified; and,

∗ If the employee is requesting to use a two-wheeled motorcycle, ensure that therequesting employee has included copies ofhis/her current driver’s license endorsed formotorcycle operation, current motorcycleregistration, and proof of insurance.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. ACommanding officer receiving a request forengagement in outside employment at a motionpicture/television filming location shall:

∗ Review the application for appropriateness;∗ Ensure that the requesting employee and

reviewing supervisor have included copiesof the required documentation;

∗ Review the documents to ensure thereviewing supervisor has conducted theappropriate investigation and that it does

not conflict with any duty restrictions theemployee may have;

∗ Recommend approval or denial of theapplication by completing the“COMMANDING OFFICER, DIVISIONOF ASSIGNMENT” line; and,

Note: The commanding officer’s signaturedoes not constitute approval of the request formotion picture/television filming employment.

∗ Submit the application to Personnel Group.

If denial of the application is recommended,the reason shall be stated in anIntradepartmental Correspondence, Form 15.2,and submitted to the Commanding Officer,Personnel Group, along with the application.

Commanding Officer, Emergency ServicesDivision’s Responsibility. The CommandingOfficer, Emergency Services Division shall beresponsible for:

∗ Investigating all complaints made againstretired officers who have violated LAMCsections or Department rules andregulations covered by the MotionPicture/Television Filming Work Permit;

∗ Completing all complaint investigations andrecommending adjudication of complaintsconcerning retired officers; and,

∗ Forwarding the completed investigation andrecommended adjudication to theCommanding Officer, Personnel Group, forapproval.

Note: In cases where off-duty, activeDepartment personnel are alleged to haveviolated LAMC sections or Department rulesand regulations, the Commanding Officer,ESD, shall notify the involved officer’scommanding officer for appropriate action.

Commanding Officer, Personnel Group’sResponsibility. The Commanding Officer,Personnel Group, shall be responsible for:

∗ Reviewing, processing, and investigatingeach active and/or retired officer’s MotionPicture/Television Filming Work PermitApplication/Renewal, Form 01.47.01;

∗ Final approval or denial of each activeand/or retired officer’s application; and,

∗ Ensuring that the employment request bythe active officer does not conflict with anyduty restrictions.

294. IDENTIFICATION OFPERSONNEL REQUESTING TO CHECKDEPARTMENT RECORDS. An employeedesiring to inspect the records maintained byRecords and Identification Division shallpresent his/her identification card forinspection except when he is in uniform.

295. USE OF DEPARTMENTTELEVISION PRODUCTIONEQUIPMENT.Routine Requests. A commanding officer whodesires to utilize the Department's televisionproduction equipment shall submit an

Intradepartmental Correspondence, Form 15.2,to the Chief of Staff, at least one month prior tothe date the equipment is needed. The requestshall include a script or a description of theproposed production.

Exception: In cases of extreme urgency, atelephonic request may be made to theCommanding Officer, Training Division.

Major Police Incident Requests. During amajor police incident, requests for the use ofthe color-video van shall be made to theCommanding Officer, Training Division.When Training Division is closed, requestsshall be made to the Administrative Unit,Detective Support Division.

Note: Because the van requires a crew of sixand an hour to "set up" and an hour to "shutdown," each request for the use of thecolor-video van shall be carefully evaluated.

At the scene of a major police incident, theincident commander shall ensure that adequatesecurity is provided for the van and equipment.

Outside Requests. Requests for the use ofDepartment television production equipmentwhich originate outside the Department shallbe referred to the Office of the Chief of Police.

296. BUSINESS CARDS. Wheninvestigating officers make an official call forthe purpose of interviewing a witness orvictim, they shall leave an official PoliceDepartment business card, complete with theirname and division or detail to which they areassigned.

296.01 BUSINESS CARDS-DETAINEERELEASED WITHOUT BEING BOOKEDOR CITED. When any person detained by amember of this Department is subsequentlyreleased without being booked or cited, theresponsible officer shall explain the reason forthe detention. Prior to the person's release, theofficer shall provide the detained person withan official Department business card, completewith the officer's name and division ofassignment.

Note: Officers issuing Field Data Reports shallbe guided by business card requirements asdetailed in Manual Section 4/202.02.

During the performance of official duties,Department members shall provide a businesscard to any person upon request, providing theaction does not interfere with the officer'sperformance of his/her duty.

296.02 BUSINESS CARDS-FORMATTING AND LANUAGEGUIDELINES. The front of the Department-issued business card shall contain the followinginformation:

∗ The telephone number of the issuingemployee’s division of assignment;

∗ “Join the LAPD (866) 444-LAPD –Recruitment Hotline” at the bottom of thecard; and,



∗ The specific telephone number of theTelecommunications Device for the Deaf(TDD) machine located in the Area,division, or section in which the employeeis assigned. However if a TDD machine isnot available where the employee isassigned, the Communications DivisionTDD number, (877) 275-5273 shall be usedin its place.

The back of the Department-issued businesscard shall contain the following information:

∗ The upper portion shall containappropriately identified spaces for the date,time, incident number, and comments to becompleted by the employee at the time ofthe citizen contact;

∗ An advisement to dial 9-1-1 in the event ofan emergency; and,

∗ “Should you have information regarding acriminal investigation or activity, pleasecontact your local police station or theLAPD crime hotline at 1-877-529-3855.The Department is committed to providingquality service to the community. If youwish to comment on the level of service youreceived, please contact a Departmentsupervisor or telephone 1-800-339-6868, orTDD # (213) 485-3604.”

Non-Department-issued business cards usedwhile on duty, or for identification as aDepartment employee while off duty, shallcontain identical information provided on theDepartment-issued business cards. Thisincludes the information and phone numberson the back of the card. The City seal may bereplaced with the Department seal or an imageof the Department badge of the appropriaterank. All images, slogans, or verbiage otherthan those contained on the Department-issuedbusiness cards, shall be approved by theemployee’s commanding officer prior to use.Consideration for the cards’ content shouldinclude its format, professionalism, andappropriateness of the Department’s image toboth the public and law enforcementcommunity.

297. ACTING PRESS RELATIONSOFFICER, ASSIGNMENT OF. Pending thearrival of the Press Relations Officer, theIncident Commander at the scene of a seriouspolice incident of an emergency nature shallimmediately assign an officer of the highestsubordinate rank as the Acting Press RelationsOfficer. The appointed officer shall beresponsible for assisting press representativesin the performance of their functions until thearrival of the Department Press RelationsOfficer.

298. NEWS MEDIAIDENTIFICATION CARDS.298.40 NEWS MEDIAIDENTIFICATION CARDS AT FIRE ORDISASTER. At the scene of a fire or otherdisaster, an employee shall permit holders ofnews media identification cards to pass through

police and fire lines to obtain news orphotographs.

298.80 NEWS MEDIAIDENTIFICATION CARDS AT THESCENE OF A CRIME. The senior officerassigned to the follow-up investigation of acrime shall be responsible for determining theadvisability of permitting members of the newsmedia access to the scene.

299. USE OF DEPARTMENTAIRCRAFT. Department aircraft shall be usedas a tactical aid to regular police operations; inaddition, the aircraft may be used for specificassignments that will assist in furthering theobjectives of the Department.

Note: Pilots, observers, and those personsregularly assigned to helicopter duty shall beprovided with a custom-fitted,Department-approved helmet.

299.20 FLIGHT REQUESTPROCEDURE. The following proceduresshall be used to request aircraft flightoperations:

∗ Aircraft flights, except those initiated bypersonnel of Narcotics Division, shall berequested by a commanding officer on anIntradepartmental Correspondence, Form15.2, and upon approval by a staff officer inhis/her chain of command, forwarded to theCommanding Officer, Air Support Division.

∗ Aircraft flights initiated by personnel ofNarcotics Division shall be approved by acommand officer of Narcotics Division,who shall be responsible for notifying theCommanding Officer, Air Support Division,of the approved request.

∗ Requests for approval of aircraft flights fortransportation of personnel of other Citydepartments shall be referred to theDirector, Office of Operations.

∗ In cases when time does not permit the useof written requests, or when spontaneousactivities require air support, requests maybe made telephonically to Air SupportDivision.

Note: Field units may make requests for airsupport over Tactical Frequency I or II.

Administrative Flights - Defined.Administrative flights are transportation flightsprovided to staff officers.

Administrative Flight Request Procedures.The following procedures shall be used torequest administrative flights.

∗ Administrative flights should be requestedfor major incidents that require a staffofficer's presence, the time to respond to thelocation is of the essence, and regular use ofa City vehicle would create a problem infacilitating a timely response.

∗ Requests for the use of Department aircraftfor administrative flights shall be approvedby the Director, Office of Operations, or inhis or her absence, by the CommandingOfficer, Special Operations Bureau. If

neither is available, emergency requestsshall be referred to the watch commander ofAir Support Division.

∗ The Commanding Officer, Air SupportDivision, shall maintain a recordation of alladministrative flights.

299.40 FLIGHT OPERATIONAPPROVAL. The Commanding Officer or, inhis/her absence, the Watch Commander, AirSupport Division, shall be responsible for theoperational approval of Department aircraftflights.

299.45 HELICOPTER LANDINGS ATCOMMUNITY EVENTS. When acommanding officer, in the interests ofDepartment community relations, desires aDepartment helicopter to land at a site notpreviously approved for helicopter landings, heor she shall:

∗ Forward the following to Air SupportDivision:

∗ An Intradepartmental Correspondence,Form 15.2, requesting the helicopterlanding and an inspection of theproposed landing site; and,

Note: A helicopter is prohibited by lawfrom landing within 1,000 feet of a publicor private school consisting of any gradesfrom one through twelve.

∗ Written approval from the owner of theproperty on which the helicopter is toland.

∗ Upon approval of the landing site by AirSupport Division, obtain the detailedprocedures from Air Support Divisionnecessary for securing final approval for thelanding of a helicopter. Necessary approvalsincluded in this procedure are:

∗ Fire Department permit;∗ One-time zone variance, when required;

Note: A three-to six-week delay may beanticipated between requesting andobtaining a zone variance.

∗ Telephonic approval of the GeneralAviation District Office of the FederalAviation Administration; and,

∗ Written approval of the CaliforniaDepartment of Transportation, Divisionof Aeronautics.

∗ Forward all required approvals to AirSupport Division.

Upon receipt of a Form 15.2 requestinghelicopter landing at a community event and aletter of approval from the owner of theproperty on which the helicopter will land, theCommanding Officer, Air Support Division,shall:

∗ Cause the landing site to be inspected toensure an adequate landing area and notifythe concerned commanding officer of theresults of the inspection;



∗ Upon approval of the landing site, ensurethat the commanding officer of therequesting division receives guidance inobtaining approvals; and,

∗ Ensure that a helicopter makes anappearance at the requested time andlocation.

Note: The requesting division shall beimmediately notified when it is determined thata helicopter will not be available for theappearance.

TRAFFIC CONTROL

305. TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT.

305.10 RADAR ENFORCEMENT. Radarenforcement of speed-law violations shall berequested only on streets which are eithertopographically or operationally impracticalfor traditional enforcement methods, and,

∗ Have a history of speed-related accidents,or,

∗ Are the subject of numerous citizens'complaints regarding excessive speed.

A request for radar enforcement shall beinitiated on an Employee's Report, Form 15.7,outlining reasons for requesting radar at theparticular location. The Form 15.7 shall besubmitted to the employee's commandingofficer. The commanding officer shall causethe request to be reviewed and, if appropriate,forward the Form 15.7 to the concerned trafficdivision commanding officer for approval.

Disapproved requests shall be returned to theconcerned commanding officer on a Form 15.2delineating the reasons for disapproval.

305.60 VISIBLE PATROL. To assist in theapprehension of traffic violators, a police unitmay be parked on the street during periods oflight traffic in a position readily visible to thedriving public. However, during heavy traffic,visible patrol shall be maintained except whenthe unit is assigned other duties.

318. CITATIONS, USE OF.318.10 TRAFFIC NOTICE TO APPEAR,USE OF. A Traffic Notice to Appear, Form4.50.0, shall be used only when the citingofficer witnesses the essential elements of theviolation by the person cited.

All parking citations, other than a violation of22526 (a) CVC (Gridlock), shall be issued onan absentee citation. A Gridlock violation maybe cited either on an absentee citation or on aTraffic Notice to Appear when the citingofficer observes the driver commit theviolation.

Exception: An officer assigned to a bureautraffic division, Collision Investigation Follow-up (CIFU) Section, may issue a Traffic Noticeto Appear in absentia to a juvenile violator foran alleged traffic violation, not declared to bea felony, based on information contained in a

traffic collision report or resulting from afollow-up investigation.

318.40 ABSENTEE CITATIONS, USEOF. Absentee citations shall be used only forparking violations and violations of Sections5200 CVC (Display of License Plates), 5204CVC (Current License Plate Tab NotDisplayed), or 4000(a)(1) CVC (No Evidenceof Current Registration) and only when theciting employee did not witness the driver parkor operate the vehicle.

318.80 RETURNING COMPLETEDCITATIONS. The citing employee shallsubmit the originals of all completed TrafficNotices to Appear (with the originalContinuation of Notice to Appear stapled tothem, when appropriate) and the originals of allcompleted absentee citations to the watchcommander then on-duty:

∗ At the end of watch if the employee returnsto the station, or,

∗ No later than roll call the following day ifthe employee does not return to the stationat the end of the watch, or,

∗ By other arrangements with the concernedsupervisor if the employee will be absentthe following day and it is impracticable toreturn to the station at the end of watch.

320. CITATIONS, COMPLETION OF.320.10 COMPLETING CITATIONS.When issuing a Traffic Notice to Appear orContinuation of Notice to Appear (ManualSection 4/320.12), the citing employee shalluse a medium black ball point pen. The citingemployee shall place an aluminum plate, orsimilar hard-surfaced material, under the lastcopy of the citation before starting to completeit.

Note: Special care shall be given to the portionof the citation bearing the citation number, toprevent that portion from being marked, torn,folded, or otherwise mutilated.

The original of the Traffic Notice to Appear orthe Continuation of Notice to Appear shall notcontain any information which does not appearon the defendant’s copy (40505 VC).

320.12 CITATION CONTINUATION.The Continuation of Notice to Appear, Form4.50.5, shall be used as a continuation page forthe Traffic Notice to Appear when citing for:

∗ Complex traffic infractions;

Note: The Traffic Notice to Appear (alone)shall be used for citing simple trafficinfractions and Section 12500(a) of theCalifornia Vehicle Code.

∗ Numerous mechanical infractions; and/or,∗ Misdemeanor traffic violations which do not

require booking (Section 40302 of theVehicle Code lists violations which requiremandatory booking), or for which citing isopted (Section 40303 of the Vehicle Codelists violations which may be cited or

booked at the discretion of the arrestingofficer).

Note: The Traffic Notice to Appear andContinuation of Notice to Appear shall be usedin lieu of the Nontraffic Notice to Appear,Form 5.2.2, for citing misdemeanor trafficviolations.

Defendants of the following misdemeanortraffic sections shall normally be booked, andan Arrest Report, Form 5.2, completed, unlessa watch commander determines that citing ismore feasible due to extenuating circumstances(and all other release from custody criteria aremet):

∗ Evading or vehicle pursuit (2800.1 VC).∗ Vehicle tampering (10852 VC).∗ Vandalism to vehicle (10853 VC).∗ Hit-and-Run (20002 VC).∗ Reckless driving (23101 or 23104 VC).∗ Speed contest (23109 VC).

320.14 CORRECTABLE VIOLATIONS.An officer issuing a Traffic Notice to Appear(citation) for certain offenses and under certainconditions shall indicate that the charge will bedismissed by the court on proof of correction.Check the appropriate "yes" or "no" check boxfor each violation on the citation. Theappropriate dismissal status for commonlycited CVC violations is contained in theCitation Guide, Form 16.65.

California Vehicle Code Sections that areCorrectable (40303.5 CVC). Violations of thefollowing VC Sections will be dismissed bythe court on proof of correction. Generally, the"yes" box shall be checked if the followingapplies:

∗ Any registration infraction listed in Division3, CVC, and also listed as “correctable” inthe Citation Guide, Form 16.65;

∗ Any driver license infraction listed inDivision 6, CVC, Section 12951(a) CVC(driver license not in possession); or,

∗ Any equipment infraction listed in Divisions12, 13, 14.8, 16, 16.5 and 16.7 CVC, orSection 21201 (bicycle equipment), andalso listed as “correctable” in the CitationGuide, Form 16.65.

Conditions Required for Making aCorrectable Violations as Not Correctable(40610(b) CVC). Pursuant to 40601(b) CVC,a citing officer may mark a correctableviolation as not correctable when any of thefollowing conditions exist:

∗ Evidence of fraud or persistent neglect; or,∗ The violation presents an immediate safety

hazard; or,∗ The violator does not agree to, or cannot,

promptly correct the violation.

Certificate of Correction. The reverse of theviolator’s copy of the Traffic Notice to Appear(citation) has a section for a signaturecertifying that a violation has been corrected.Officers shall not certify violations as beingcorrected.



Exception: Officers assigned to theSpecialized Enforcement Unit, TrafficCoordination Section, may certify certainviolations as being corrected.

320.15 DATE OF VIOLATIONENTERED ON CITATIONS. The monthwritten in full, or the accepted writtenabbreviation of the month, shall be used on atraffic citation. The sequence for the date of theviolation shall be month, day, and year. If thecitation is issued on a date other than actualdate of the violation, the date shall be enteredin the space provided.

Note: The actual date of the violation shall beentered in the space provided on the topportion of the citation.

320.16 TIME ENTERED ONCITATIONS. Use non-military time andcheck the appropriate AM or PM box (i.e.,8:30 instead of 0830; 2:20 instead of 1420).

Note: If military time is used, Notice ofCorrection and Proof of Service, Form 4.07.0,shall be completed to change the time frommilitary to non-military.

320.17 MISDEMEANOR CHECK BOXON CITATIONS. Check the misdemeanorcheck box if any cited violation is amisdemeanor. The Citation Guide, Form 16.65,shows misdemeanors with an "M" andinfractions with an "I" preceding the sectionnumber.

320.20 LICENSE PLATE NUMBERSENTERED ON CITATIONSPersonalized License Plates. When thevehicle bears a personalized license plate, theletters and/or numbers shall be recorded on thecitation followed by the letters "PLP" enclosedin parentheses.

Example: LAPD 1 (PLP).

320.21 COMMERCIAL VEHICLE (C.V.)CHECK BOX ON CITATIONS. Check theC.V. box if Section 15210(b) VC applies.Section 15210(b) VC defines a commercialvehicle as a motor vehicle or combination ofmotor vehicles used to transport passengers orproperty and:

∗ Has a gross combination weight rating of26,001 or more pounds inclusive of a towedunit with a gross vehicle weight rating ofmore than 10,000 pounds; or

∗ Has a gross vehicle weight rating of 26,001or more pounds; or

∗ Is designed to transport 16 or more persons,including the driver; or

∗ Is used in the transportation of hazardousmaterials.

320.22 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS(H.M.) CHECK BOX ON CITATIONS.Check the H.M. box if a vehicle is transportinghazardous materials as defined in Sections 353and 2452 VC. Hazardous material haulers aredefined as commercial vehicles in the VC.However, the "H.M." rather than the "C.V."

check box shall be checked when hazardouscargo is being transported. Hazardous materialsinclude, but are not limited to radioactivematerial, poison, flammable gas,nonflammable gas, flammable liquid, oxidizer,flammable solid, corrosive material, irritatingmaterials, combustible liquids, explosives,blasting agents, etiologic agents, organicperoxides, hazardous wastes, and otherregulated materials of classes A, B, C, D, andE listed in the VC.

320.25 INFORMATION TO BEPRINTED ON CITATIONS. The followinginformation shall be printed on a citation:

∗ Name and address of the violator, asrequired.

∗ Location of violation.∗ Name of citing officer, as it appears on the

payroll roster.∗ Name of arresting officer, if different from

the citing officer, as it appears on thepayroll roster.

320.28 DIAGRAMS ON CITATIONS.The diagram shall be used to indicate themovement of the vehicles and pedestrians.When the violation occurs in the City and noton a freeway, a single check mark (+ ) shall beused to indicate the corner nearest to theviolation.

320.30 VIOLATIONS ENTERED ONCITATIONS. List each code and sectionnumber or separate count of the same sectionon a separate line, followed by a briefdescription of the corpus delicti and relatedinformation. Circle the “M” or “I” to denotewhether a violation is a misdemeanor or aninfraction. Enter the most serious violationfirst. A moving violation shall be consideredmore serious than a non-moving violation.

320.33 LIST PROBABLE CAUSE FORTRAFFIC STOP ON TRAFFICCITATION. When issuing a Traffic Notice toAppear (citation), the issuing officer shalleither cite for or list the probable cause for thetraffic stop in the citation narrative. When theprobable cause for the traffic stop is not beingcited, the reason shall be described withoutusing the actual numerical section and codeviolation.

320.35 FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITYREQUIREMENTS. An officer issuing aTraffic Notice to Appear for Vehicle Codeviolations other than parking shall write thefinancial responsibility information on thecitation (16028 VC).

Note: Section 16028 VC applies only tovehicles required to be registered in California,and to mopeds driven upon the highway.

Evidence of Financial Responsibility. Forpurposes of Section 16028 VC, evidence offinancial responsibility shall be in writing.

Note: Both the name of the insurance companyand the number of the policy must be provided.If either item of information is unavailable, the

citation shall be completed as if no evidence offinancial responsibility was produced.

Citing Section. Section 16028(a) VC, aninfraction, shall be used as the citing sectionfor violations of failing to provide evidence offinancial responsibility.

Citing a Foreign Vehicle.

∗ Commercial Vehicles. Certain out-of-statecommercial vehicles are required to beregistered in California. This registration,and proof of financial responsibility, isevidenced by a Uniform Identification CabCard issued by the Public UtilitiesCommission. Other out-of-state commercialvehicles are not required to be registered inCalifornia due to reciprocity agreements.Enforcement of 16028(a) VC onout-of-state commercial vehicles is limitedto officers assigned to the SpecializedEnforcement Unit, Traffic CoordinationSection.

∗ Passenger Vehicles. The owner of anout-of-state passenger vehicle is required toapply for California registration within 20days after accepting gainful employment orestablishing residence in this state,whichever occurs first.

Exception: Military personnel on active dutyin California are not required to register theirvehicle in this state, as long as the vehicle hasvalid out-of-state plates (6701 VC).

Officers familiar with the provisions of 6700VC and related VC sections may citeout-of-state passenger vehicles for a violationof 16028 (a) VC when appropriate.

Citing an Employer. If the driver of a vehicleowned, operated, or leased by the driver'semployer fails to provide evidence of financialresponsibility, officers shall use the followingciting procedure:

∗ The driver shall be cited for the originalviolation.

∗ A separate Traffic Notice to Appear shall beissued to the employer for failure to provideevidence of financial responsibility.

∗ Officers shall tell the driver that State lawrequires the driver to notify the employer ofthe citation within 5 days.

∗ The driver shall be requested to sign thecitation on behalf of the employer.

Note: The driver is not required to sign thecitation. "DRIVER REFUSED" shall beentered in the signature space if appropriate.

∗ The driver shall be requested to give theemployer the defendant’s copy of thecitation.

Note: If the driver refuses to accept theemployer's copy of the citation, it shall beinserted back into the form set and "DRIVERREFUSED TO ACCEPT COPY" shall beentered in the "Violations" space. Theemployer's copy shall be turned in with theoriginal (green) copy of this citation. The



supervisor checking citations shall forwardboth copies to the Traffic Court Liaison Unit,1945 South Hill Street. The Traffic CourtLiaison Unit shall ensure that the employer isnotified of the citation.

320.38 VIOLATIONS NOTCOMMITTED IN OFFICER'S PRESENCECHECK BOX ON CITATIONS. Do not usethis check box. At this time, the Departmentdoes not cite for violations not committed inthe officer's presence. However, this item isstill required to be included on the citations bythe Judicial Council of California.

320.40 VACATION PERIODSENTERED ON CITATIONS. The citingofficer shall enter his/her complete vacationperiod, including regular and special days off,when known, in the appropriate space. Whenthe vacation has been taken, the word "past"shall be entered on the citation.

320.45 APPEARANCE DATE ENTEREDON CITATIONS. The court date for bothadult and juvenile traffic defendants shall beassigned utilizing the Citation Guide, Form16.65.0.

Note: If persons cited to court request moretime in which to appear, they shall be advisedthat such requests must be made by them ortheir representative to the court indicated onthe citation.

The time of appearance for juvenile citationsshall be as follows:

∗ Officers issuing personal service citations tojuveniles between 0600 and 1800 hoursshall cite the juveniles to the P.M. sessionof the Juvenile Court, Traffic Division, asindicated on the citations. The time periodfor the A.M. session shall be lined out.

∗ Officers issuing personal service citations tojuveniles between 1800 hours and 0600hours shall cite the juveniles to the A.M.session of the Juvenile Court, TrafficDivision, as indicated on the citations. Thetime period for the P.M. session shall belined out.

320.46 PLACE OF APPEARANCEINDICATED ON CITATIONS. The place ofappearance on a citation shall be determined bythe location of occurrence and shall beindicated on the citation by placing an "X" inthe proper square.

Violators requesting to be cited to the “CountySeat” or an alternative court location shall becited to the requested court location when thefollowing conditions exist:

∗ The requested court location is one listed onthe Traffic Notice to Appear or is eligiblefor addition to the form; and,

∗ The violator’s place of residence or theviolator’s principal place of employment islocated closer to the requested courtlocation than to the court location normallyutilized for the Area of occurrence. (Section40502(b) CVC).

Note: All traffic court locations located withinthe City of Los Angeles which are preprintedon the traffic citation qualify as a “CountySeat.” Officer shall not cite violators to non-traffic courts nor to court locations outside theCity of Los Angeles.

If the traffic citation form is being used is outof date and there are eligible court locationsthat are not preprinted on the citation, theviolator may select one of the new courtlocations subject to the conditions above.

320.47 COURT LOCATION CHECKBOXES ON CITATIONS. Check theappropriate court location by referring to theTraffic Notice to Appear, Form 4.50.0, bookcover. Determine the violation location andthen simply check the appropriate court.

Note: Care should be taken to check thecorrect court.

320.48 TO BE NOTIFIED CHECK BOXON CITATIONS. Do not use this check box.

320.50 BAILABLE TRAFFICOFFENSES, COURT APPEARANCE.When a traffic defendant demands to be citedbefore a Municipal Court judge, he/she shall beadvised to follow the instructions on thereverse side of the defendant’s copy of thecitation.

(1)Vehicle Code Section 40502(b).

320.55 NOTES ON CITATIONS. Whenissuing a traffic citation, an officer shallinclude, in addition to any other notes, all datanecessary to establish a prime facie case foreach of the sections cited.

When the citation is issued for a speedviolation and the speedometer of the policevehicle was used as a clocking device, theofficer shall record the following informationafter the description of the violation:

∗ Police vehicle shop number.∗ Date of last calibration.∗ Speedometer reading.∗ Calibrated speed.

If a defendant’s employer is cited for noevidence of financial responsibility and theemployee refuses to accept the employer'scopy, the citing officer shall enter thefollowing on the last line of the "Violations"section: "DRIVER REFUSED TO ACCEPTCOPY."

320.57 DESCRIPTION OF DEFENDANTON CITATION. In addition to specificdescriptors required on a Traffic Notice toAppear, the officer completing the citationshall list visible, obvious tattoos, scars,birthmarks, missing extremities and/ordeformities in the "Miscellaneous DescriptiveInformation" space.

320.60 ABBREVIATIONS ONCITATIONS. Abbreviations used in trafficcitation notes shall be limited to:* I/S Intersection

*Deft Defendant*Approx Approximately*Veh Vehicle*N/B, S/B, E/B, W/B Direction*Ped Pedestrian*MPH Miles per hour*POV Passed other vehicle*ROW Right-of-way*X-ing Crossing*Mkd X-walk Marked crosswalk*Dble Line Double line*45/25 Clocked speed in zone*Driv Lic Driver's license*Exp Expired*Temp Temporary*Plts Plates*Sig Signal*M/C Motorcycle*Bus Dist Business district*Res Dist Residential district*Reg Registration*Traf Traffic*BL Stop Boulevard stop*Lt/T Left turn*Rt/T Right turn*Spd Speed*Blks Blocks*FY Freeway*Obs Observed*X-walk Crosswalk*SP-CNS Specially Constructed Vehicle*Est Estimate*FTC Following too closely*Ln Chg Lane change*Max Maximum*M/L Moving lane*Pkd Parked*War Warrant check*(PLP) Personalized License Plate

320.80 ERRORS OR OMISSIONS ONCITATIONS OR CITATIONCONTINUATIONS. When an error is madeon a Traffic Notice to Appear and thedefendant’s copy is still available, the citingemployee shall correct the error by drawing asingle line through the error and legiblyprinting the correct information as near aspossible to the error. The initials “VCC”(Violator’s {defendant} copy corrected),followed by the concerned employee’s initials,shall be written on the original citation directlybelow the citation number located at the top ofthe citation. No part of the initials shallinterfere with the citation number.

When an error or omission is noted on a trafficcitation other than in the notes or diagram andthe defendant’s copy is no longer available thecorrect information shall be entered on aNotice of Correction and Proof of Service,Form 4.07.0. In the Proof of Service section ofForm 4.07.0, the issuing officer shall providethe defendant’s name and mailing address inthe box provided. A supervisor shall review theForm 4.07.0 and provide the date the Proof ofService was placed in the Departmental mail,and the Area/division shall be indicated in thespace provided for the postal mailbox address.

Note: The “United States postal mailbox” isrequired language by the Judicial Council ofCalifornia which is standardized on formsstatewide. The Departmental mail system is theacceptable method to cause the Notice ofCorrection and Proof of Service to be sent viaUnited States Mail.

Additionally, the supervisor shall sign and datethe Proof of Service in the spaces providedand;

∗ Ensure the original (white) copy is stapledat the lower left corner on top of the



original Traffic Notice to Appear. The Proofof Service portion of the form shall befolded over to the back of the Traffic Noticeto Appear; and,

∗ Ensure the duplicate (pink) copy of the formis folded in half, placed in a Departmentenvelope with the address box showing inthe window and placed in the Departmentalmail.

When an employee becomes aware of an errorin the notes or diagram of a Traffic Notice toAppear or Continuation of Notice to Appear,and the defendant’s copy is no longeravailable, the employee shall not correct theerror. The employee shall write the correctinformation on the reverse side of the last copyof the citation in the citation book to use asreference for court proceedings.

320.85 REMOVAL OF CITATIONSFROM BOOKS. Upon completion of acitation, the appropriate page(s) (ManualSection 4/318.80) shall be immediatelyremoved from the book. Those citationsremoved from the book shall be cared for insuch a manner as to prevent them from beingtorn, folded, or otherwise mutilated.

322. CITATIONS-OFFICER -DEFENDANT CONTACTS.322.10 RECEIVING THE DRIVER'SLICENSE. A driver's license shall not beaccepted from a person when it is contained ina billfold or card case. The defendant shall berequested to remove and exhibit the licenseonly. When the driver's license is received, theperson shall be addressed by the last nameindicated on the driver's license, preceded bythe person's correct title.

322.12 CONFISCATING SUSPENDEDOR REVOKED DRIVER'S LICENSES.Officer's Responsibility. When an officerbecomes aware that an individual is inpossession of a suspended or revoked driver'slicense, the officer shall:

∗ Confiscate the driver's license pursuant toSection 4460 VC;

∗ Advise the individual of the reason for thelicense confiscation;

∗ Complete a Verbal Notice by Peace Officer,DMV or Court Employee, DMV Form DL310;

∗ Provide the pink copy to the driver;∗ Mail the original (white) copy of the DMV

Form DL310, the DMV driver’s historyprintout and the associated driver’s licensedirectly to the DMV address listed on theDMV Form DL310; and,

∗ Attach the completed yellow copy of theDMV Form DL 310 to the Daily FieldActivities Report, Form 15.52.

Supervisor's Responsibility. Supervisorsshall, after review, ensure that confiscatedsuspended or revoked driver's licenses areforwarded directly to the DMV. The licensesshall be forwarded with:

∗ Completed DMV Form DL 310;∗ DMV driver's history printout; and,∗ Citation, if any.

322.30 INSTRUCTIONS NOT TO BEGIVEN TO TRAFFIC DEFENDANTS.Officers shall not:

∗ Quote amounts of bail.∗ Suggest the defendant telephone the Traffic

Violations Bureau for information.∗ Suggest that the case may be handled by

mail.∗ Attempt to outline the policy of the court or

Traffic Violations Bureau in regard toadjustment of certain types of violations.

∗ Suggest or recommend any automobile clubor similar organization.

322.80 DEPARTING FROM TRAFFICDEFENDANT. After a Traffic Notice toAppear is completed, the defendant should beassisted into the traffic flow and unlessimpracticable, the officers shall legally changetheir patrol to a direction other than that whichthe defendant is traveling.

324. OTHER JURISDICTION-TRAFFIC OFFENSES.324.20 TRAFFIC VIOLATOR ENTERSANOTHER JURISDICTION. Whenever atraffic violation takes place within the City ofLos Angeles and the defendant, before beingapprehended, enters another jurisdiction, atraffic citation shall be issued or a physicalarrest made in accordance with thecircumstances of the violation committedwithin the City limits. When, after entering theother jurisdiction, the violator commits anoffense of greater severity than that committedwithin the City of Los Angeles, the officershall:

∗ When the offense committed requires aphysical arrest, make the arrest and thebooking in the capacity of a private personat the nearest police station of thejurisdiction of the arrest; or,

∗ When the offense is a citable violation, filean application for complaint with theprosecutor having jurisdiction of thelocation of occurrence; and,

∗ Issue a citation or complete a ComplaintApplication, Form 5.15, for the violationcommitted within the City of Los Angeles.

324.30 TAKING TRAFFICENFORCEMENT ACTION OUTSIDETHE CITY OF LOS ANGELES. Generally,Department personnel shall refrain from takingenforcement action for traffic violations whichoccur outside the City of Los Angeles. Whenthe nature and/or severity of the offenseinvolves immediate danger to persons orproperty, or of the escape of the violator,officers may detain the violator for theobserved traffic violation and the officer shall:

∗ Request the response of a member of thelaw enforcement agency having primaryjurisdiction for the location of occurrence

and request that agency complete a TrafficNotice to Appear listing the Departmentemployee as a witness on the citation; or,

∗ File an application for complaint(Complaint Application, Form 5.15) withthe prosecutor having jurisdiction of thelocation of occurrence.

Exception: When the traffic violation iscommitted on the boundary (or within 500yards) of the Los Angeles City limits,Department personnel may cite the violatorand cause them to appear at the appropriatetraffic court listed on the Traffic Notice toAppear (Penal Code Section 782).

326. CANCELLING CITATIONS.326.10 CANCELLATION OFCITATIONS-WHEN AND BY WHOMREQUESTED. A Citation CancellationRequest, Form 4.45, shall be completed for thebelow listed circumstances. Such requests maybe initiated by the bureau commanding officer,the citing employee's Area/divisioncommanding officer, or the employee indicatedin parenthesis after each circumstance below asfollows:

Note: Requests initiated by a Department staffofficer shall be submitted to the next higherlevel of review within the staff officer's chainof command for approval.

B.O. Meter. A parking meter noted on anAbsentee Citation is found to be defective(employee making on-scene determination).

Note: When a defendant has already departedthe scene and later complains that a parkingmeter was defective, the defendant shall bereferred to the Parking Violations Bureau,LADOT for adjudication.

Lost Traffic Notice to Appear (Citation)Book. When a Traffic Notice to Appear bookis lost (Manual Section 4/328.70) (employeediscovering the loss).

Stolen Vehicle. An Absentee Citation wasattached to a vehicle after it had been reportedstolen (employee recovering vehicle).

Note: If a stolen vehicle has received multipleabsentee citations during the period it wasstolen, only one Citation Cancellation Requestshall be completed. The additional citationsshall be listed in the "Explanation" section.

City Vehicle Exempt from Meters. A Cityvehicle is cited for a parking meter violation(employee who parked vehicle).

Imperfect Citation or Mutilated CitationBook. A defect is found of which might affectthe legibility, legality, or processing of thecitation (employee first observing defect).

Error in Posted Sign. A citation has beenissued as a result of an error on a traffic controlsign (employee making on-scenedetermination).



Note: When a defendant has already departedthe scene and later complains that a trafficcontrol sign was defective or illegible, thedefendant shall be referred to the ParkingViolations Bureau, LADOT, for adjudication.

Inoperative Vehicle. An Absentee Citationhas been attached to a vehicle illegally parkedbecause of mechanical failure and the operatorhas taken reasonable measures to remove thevehicle as soon as possible (employeedetermining that the vehicle is inoperative andthat reasonable measures were taken).

False Information Given to Officer. ATraffic Notice to Appear has been started orcompleted and the citing officer determinesthat false information has been given to theextent that a new citation must be completed(citing officer). If Section 31 VC is to becharged, the citing officer shall arrest and bookfor Section 31 VC under the authority of40302(a)VC (Manual Section 4/354.10).

Error in Judgment or Identity by CitingEmployee. An error in judgment or identity bythe citing employee results in the belief that thecitation is not justified-citing employee.

Department Rules Violated. The citingemployee's commanding officer determinesthat the citation was issued in violation ofDepartment rules-citing employee.

Legal Immunity. The law provides that theoperator or the vehicle cited is legally immunefrom prosecution-citing employee.

Adult Arrested or Complaint ApplicationCompleted in Lieu of Citation-CitingEmployee. (See Manual Section 4/346.40regarding juveniles.)

Driver Physically Unable to Move Vehicle.An Absentee Citation was issued to a parkedvehicle and the driver was physically unable tomove the vehicle because of his/her arrest,illness, injury, or death-citing employee.

Government Employee Executing OfficialTask. An Absentee Citation is attached to anyvehicle parked by a government employeeexecuting an official task-LAPD employeewho parked vehicle. (The Form 4.45 shall beforwarded, via the chain of command, to theParking Enforcement Bureau, LADOT.Persons requesting cancellation of citationsissued to vehicles controlled by other Citydepartments or outside agencies shall bedirected to the Parking Enforcement Bureau.)

Citation Not Completed Due to anEmergency. A citation was started but notcompleted due to an emergency-citingemployee.

Other. Circumstances not specified above inwhich a citation has been issued but obviouslyshould be canceled in the interest of justice(any employee who can verify facts.)

326.15 CANCELLATION OFCITATIONS ISSUED ON DEPARTMENTVEHICLES BY THE LOS ANGELES

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION(LADOT). Citations issued on Departmentvehicles by LADOT employees may becanceled when the vehicle was parked at anLADOT exempt location by a Departmentemployee conducting City business.

Note: Traffic Coordination Section maintainsa list of LADOT exempt locations. If thevehicle is unmarked and does not displayexempt (“E”) license plates, the vehicle musthave a Los Angeles Police Department, officialCity vehicle placard visible on the vehicle’sdashboard.

After determining that the employee wasconducting City business, the commandingofficer shall forward the citation and a letter tothe Parking Administrator, LADOT. The lettershall state that the employee was conductingCity business at the time the citation wasissued.

326.67 CITATION CANCELLATIONSRELATING TO COMPLAINTINVESTIGATIONS. Absentee Citations(parking). An Absentee Citation shall not beplaced on “hold” pending the result of acomplaint investigation. An Absentee Citationrelated to a complaint investigation shall eitherbe submitted to the Traffic Court Liaison Unit(TCLU) without delay or the supervisor shallrequest cancellation in accordance withDepartment procedure (Manual Section4/326.75).

Traffic Notice to Appear (traffic citation).During the preliminary stages of a complaintinvestigation involving a traffic citation, thesupervisor shall determine if cancellation of thecitation is appropriate.

∗ When immediate cancellation isappropriate, the supervisor shall submit aCitation Cancellation Request, Form 4.45,with the original citation attached, to theemployee’s commanding officer forapproval. The employee’s commandingofficer shall forward the cancellationrequest and original citation to the bureaucommanding officer for final approval; or,

∗ When further investigation is requireddetermining whether a cancellation isappropriate, the supervisor, after obtainingapproval from the employee’s commandingofficer, shall forward the original trafficcitation to the Officer in Charge (OIC),Traffic Court Liaison Unit with instructionsto place a "hold" on the traffic citation.

If the original traffic citation is not available,the supervisor shall contact the OIC, TCLUtelephonically and request that a “hold” beplaced on the traffic citation.

Note: The defendant’s copy of the trafficcitation, if available, shall be maintained withthe complaint investigation file until theinvestigation is completed.

∗ When a "hold" has been placed on thetraffic citation, the supervisor shall ensure

that the defendant is notified of thetemporary suspension of judicialproceedings against him/her, and that thedefendant will not have to appear in court orpay any fines in connection with the trafficcitation until he/she is notified otherwise bythe Department.

Processing a “Held” Citation UponCompletion of a Complaint Investigation.Upon completion of the complaintinvestigation, the supervisor shall determinethe proper disposition of the traffic citation andnotify the OIC, Traffic Court Liaison Unit ofthe action to be taken:

∗ If the hold is to be released, a supervisorshall ensure that the defendant’s copy isreturned to the defendant with the pink(violator’s) copy of the Notice of Correctionand Proof of Service, Form 4.07, advisingthe defendant of the new court date. Theoriginal (white) copy of the Notice ofCorrection and Proof of Service shall beforwarded to the OIC, TCLU for filing withthe original traffic citation; or,

Note: The Department has one year to file atraffic citation case (California Penal CodeSection 802). When a “hold” is released, thatdate shall be used to determine the new courtdate utilizing the Citation Guide, Form 16.65.If the date of the commission of the offense ismore than one year prior to the release date, aCitation Cancellation Request shall becompleted and the defendant notified of theaction taken.

∗ If the traffic citation is to be cancelled, thesupervisor shall ensure that a CitationCancellation Request is completed and thedefendant notified of the action taken.

326.70 LOST ORIGINAL TRAFFICNOTICE TO APPEAR. When a TrafficNotice to Appear, Form 4.50.0, has been issuedand the original (green) copy is lost or isotherwise unavailable, the citing employeeshall:

∗ Remove the citation book copy (goldenrodor yellow copy) from the book and replaceit with a photocopy;

Exception: When the original (green) copy hasbeen mistakenly given to the violator, theviolator (white) copy shall be submittedinstead of the goldenrod copy.

∗ Make the following notation on thephotocopy:

∗ “Certified to be a True Copy of theOriginal”;

∗ X_____________________________;and,

∗ Sign the photocopy certifying it to be atrue copy of the original citation.

∗ Submit to his/her supervisor, for review, thegoldenrod copy and a completedEmployee’s Report, Form 15.7, addressedto the Officer-in-Charge, Traffic Court



Liaison Unit (TCLU), advising that theoriginal traffic citation has been lost or isotherwise unavailable; and,

∗ When the assigned court date is withinthirty days, a completed Notice ofCorrection and Proof of Service, Form4.07.0, shall be attached to the Employee’sReport, Form 15.7, and the violator notifiedas required. After reviewing the Form 15.7,the supervisor shall immediately forwardthe citation and related documentation tothe TCLU.

Note: A Traffic Notice To Appear issued foran offense when the commission of the offenseis in excess of one year, shall be cancelled inaccordance with Section 4/326.10 of theDepartment Manual.

Traffic Court Liaison Unit’s Responsibility.Upon receipt of the citation and relateddocumentation, the TCLU shall file thegoldenrod, yellow, or white copy of thecitation and a photocopy with the Los AngelesSuperior Court.

If only the original Continuation of Notice toAppear, Form 4.50.5 is lost, the originalcitation shall still be processed; but the courtwill not enforce the violations listed on the lostContinuation of Notice to Appear.

326.75 NOTIFYING DEFENDANT OFCITATION CANCELLATION. Anemployee requesting a citation cancellationafter the defendant’s copy has been issued,shall complete a Citation Cancellation Request,Form 4.45, and prepare a letter and addressedenvelope notifying the defendant of thecancellation. The letter shall be signed by thecommanding officer of the requestingemployee, and forwarded with the CitationCancellation Request through channels to theTraffic Court Liaison Unit (TCLU), TrafficCoordination Section (TCS). Upon receipt of aCitation Cancellation Request, TCLU shallsubmit the citation and attached request to theappropriate court. When the court approves arequest for citation cancellation, TCLU shallmail the letter notifying the defendant of thecitation cancellation.

Note: Whenever TCLU is notified that thecourt has denied the Department's request tocancel a citation, TCLU shall process thecitation as directed by the court and notify thecommanding officer of the court's decision onthe cancellation request.

Defendant’s Copy of Citation. Whenpossible, the defendant’s copy of a citation tobe canceled shall be obtained and forwardedwith the Citation Cancellation Request, Form4.45.

When the defendant’s copy cannot be obtained,the circumstances shall be included in the"EXPLANATION" portion of the Form 4.45.

328. CITATION BOOKS.328.10 RECEIVING CITATIONBOOKS. Upon receiving a citation book, the

employee shall write, in ink, his/her name,serial number, division, and date of receipt onthe front cover of the book. No notation of anykind shall be made on any citation prior toissuance.

328.40 DISPOSITION OFTRANSFERRED OFFICERS' CITATIONBOOKS (Manual Section 3/202.26).328.60 COMPLETED CITATIONBOOKS. When a citation book is completelyused, the book shall be returned and a newbook obtained. The completed citation bookshall be retained in compliance with the LosAngeles Administrative Code, Section 12.3.

328.70 LOST CITATION BOOKS. Whena citation book is lost, a Citation CancellationRequest, Form 4.45, shall be made cancelingthe unused citations. The request shall includethe numbers of the first and last citation in thebook and shall specify numbers of the citationswhich have not been issued. When a lostcitation book is found after a CitationCancellation Request has been completed, itshall be stored (Manual Section 4/328.60) andshall not be further used by the Department.

328.80 RECALL AND REISSUANCE OFCITATION BOOKS. All traffic citationbooks that are not completed within threemonths after issuance shall be recalled andreissued to more enforcement-activeemployees (Manual Section 3/202.24).

334. REFUSAL TO SIGN CITATION.334.10 INFORMATION TO TRAFFICVIOLATOR-REFUSAL TO SIGNCITATION. When a violator refuses to sign atraffic citation, the citing officer shall refer theviolator to the printed information on the faceof the citation directly above the spaceprovided for his/her signature. He/she shall beinformed that the signing of the citation doesnot constitute an admission of guilt, but that itis merely a signed promise to appear in answerto the charge.

When the violator has been so advised andcontinues to refuse to sign the traffic citation,the citing officer shall request that a supervisorbe dispatched to the scene. The supervisorshall, whenever possible, resolve the matter atthe scene.

Note: When an officer is taking enforcementaction for a violator (employee) not havingproof of financial responsibility for anemployer’s vehicle, the violator (employee)shall not be arrested for refusing to sign thetraffic citation. Officers shall follow theprocedure delineated in Manual Section4/320.35 (Financial ResponsibilityRequirements – Citing an Employer). Asupervisor request is not required in thisinstance.

The violator shall be requested to sign theContinuation Form, in addition to the TrafficNotice to Appear. If the violator signs thecitation, but refuses to sign the Continuation,

the issuing officer shall print "REFUSED TOSIGN" in the space provided for the signature,and release the violator.

334.40 REFERRAL OF TRAFFICVIOLATOR WHO REFUSES TO SIGNCITATION. If, after the procedures outlinedin Manual Section 4/334.10 have beenfollowed, the violator still refuses to sign thecitation, he/she shall be processed as follows:

Adults. The adult violator shall be broughtbefore the watch commander, Area ofoccurrence, who, upon determining that allnecessary elements of a traffic offense arepresent and indicated on the citation, shallreemphasize to the violator the content ofManual Section 4/334.10. If the violator willthen sign the citation, he/she shall be permittedto do so and be released. If he/she refuses tosign his/her name, the violator shall be booked(Manual Section 4/334.50).

Note: When an officer is taking enforcementaction for a violator (employee) not havingproof of financial responsibility for anemployer’s vehicle, the violator (employee)shall not be arrested for refusing to sign thetraffic citation. Officers shall follow theprocedure delineated in Manual Section4/320.35 (Financial ResponsibilityRequirements – Citing an Employer). Asupervisor request is not required in thisinstance.

Juveniles. The juvenile violator shall bebrought before the appropriate Area juvenilecoordinator who, upon determining that allnecessary elements of a traffic offense arepresent and indicated on the citation, shallreemphasize to the juvenile the content ofManual Section 4/334.10. If the juvenile willthen sign the citation, he/she shall be permittedto do so and be released. If the violator refusesto sign his/her name, the juvenile coordinatorshall cause the juvenile to be processedaccording to established procedures (ManualSection 4/218).

Note: When the juvenile coordinator isunavailable, the juvenile shall be taken beforethe watch commander in the Area of arrest,who shall assume this responsibility.

334.50 BOOKING TRAFFICDEFENDANTS CHARGED WITH MORETHAN ONE OFFENSE. When a person whorefuses to sign a citation is charged with morethan one offense, he/she shall be booked on themore serious offense. The elements of all otheroffenses charged shall be included in the ArrestReport, Form 5.2. The charge shall be listed asspecified in Manual Section 4/610.55.

334.70 CANCELLATION OF CITATIONWHEN TRAFFIC DEFENDANTSBOOKED. When a defendant refuses to signa traffic citation and the defendant is booked asa result of his/her refusal to sign, the citationshall be canceled (Manual Section 4/326.10).



340. FREEWAYS.340.10 FREEWAY DIRECTIONDESIGNATIONS. The following directiondesignations shall be used when referring to afreeway location:

Artesia-Redondo Freeway East-WestCentury Freeway East-WestFoothill Freeway East-WestGlen Anderson Freeway East-WestGlendale Freeway East-WestGolden State Freeway North-SouthHarbor Freeway North-SouthHollywood Freeway North-SouthLong Beach Freeway North-SouthMarina Freeway East-WestPasadena Freeway North-SouthPomona Freeway East-WestRoute 47 Freeway North-SouthSan Bernardino Freeway East-WestSan Diego Freeway North-SouthSanta Ana Freeway North-SouthSanta Monica Freeway East-WestSimi Valley Freeway East-WestVentura Freeway East-West

340.20 FREEWAY NAMEABBREVIATIONS. When referring to afreeway name, the abbreviations used shall belimited to:

Artesia-Redondo Freeway Art Rdo FYCentury Freeway Cent FYFoothill Freeway Fhl FYGlendale Freeway Glen FYGolden State Freeway G State FYHarbor Freeway Harb FYHollywood Freeway Hwd FYLong Beach Freeway L B FYMarina Freeway Mar FYPasadena Freeway Pasa FYPomona Freeway Pom FYRoute 47 Freeway RT 47 FYSan Bernardino Freeway San Ber FYSan Diego Freeway S Diego FYSanta Ana Freeway S Ana FYSanta Monica Freeway S Mon FYSimi Valley Freeway Simi Val FYVentura Freeway Vent FY

340.30 DELINEATION OF FREEWAYRESPONSIBILITY. The California HighwayPatrol (CHP) is responsible for trafficsupervision on all freeways within the City ofLos Angeles. This responsibility includes allportions of the highway within a freewayright-of-way, in addition to otherimprovements as indicated below:

∗ Off-Ramp-The CHP's responsibility willterminate at the prolongation of the nearestcurb or edge of the roadway of the firstintersecting City street.

∗ On-Ramp-The CHP's responsibility willcommence at the prolongation of the nearestcurb or edge of roadway of the lastintersecting City street.

∗ Bus and Passenger Ramps-The CHP'sresponsibilities for those portions of thefreeway designated as bus stops, which areseparate roadways set aside from the normaltraffic lanes, will include the entire bus

ramp and the bus passenger ramps orstairways to the sidewalk, the curb, or edgeof the nearest City street, property, orfreeway perimeter fence.

Officers of this Department may cite trafficviolators and shall provide assistance tomotorists on the freeways within the City.

Diversion of Freeway Traffic to SurfaceStreets. When it is necessary to divert freewaytraffic onto surface streets, the CHP will notifythe Commanding Officer, CommunicationsDivision, who shall be responsible fornotifying the concerned field services divisioncommanding officer. The field servicesdivision commanding officer shall deploysufficient personnel to handle the increasedtraffic flow on surface streets. The CHP will beresponsible for blocking on-ramps wheretraffic is not permitted to enter the freeway.

342. REPORTING INCOMPETENTDRIVERS. When an officer has reason tobelieve that a licensed driver is not acompetent driver, he or she shall forward a Department of Motor Vehicles, Notice ofPriority Reexamination of Driver/Request forReexamination of Driver, Form DS 427, to thedetective section of the concerned trafficdivision. One copy of the form shall becompleted describing the reason for therequested re-examination. Each officercompleting the form shall:

∗ Record all observations which substantiatethe officer's opinion that the driver needs tobe re-examined for driving ability.

∗ List in the summary portion any statementsmade by the driver regarding his/her ownphysical condition or defects.

Exception: In cases involving an epilepticseizure, an Injury Report, Form 3.15, shall becompleted instead of the Department of MotorVehicles, Notice of Priority Reexamination ofDriver/Request for Reexamination of Driver,Form DS 427.

343. UNDER-THE-INFLUENCEDRIVERS.343.10 DRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE ARRESTS. An arrest fordriving under the influence shall be madewhen:

∗ An officer witnesses a person commit theelements of driving while under theinfluence; or,

∗ The under-the-influence driver was lawfullydetained by an officer of this or another lawenforcement agency; or,

∗ The under-the-influence driver was lawfullyarrested or detained by a private person whowitnessed the driving element of theoffense.

An arrest may be made for 23152(a) VC perauthority of 40300.5 VC when a trafficcollision has occurred but the arresting officerdid not witness driving, when:

∗ The arresting officer has reasonable cause tobelieve that a person involved in the trafficcollision was driving a vehicle while underthe influence of intoxicating liquor, or thecombined influence of intoxicating liquorand any drug; and,

∗ The arrest is effected as a continuousuninterrupted portion of the investigation.

Note: The arrest shall be limited to the locationof the traffic collision or the location of anytimely follow-up investigation.

The element of being under-the-influence shallbe based on the objective symptoms observedby the arresting officer. Results of otherexaminations shall be corroborative evidenceonly.

343.20 SOBRIETY EXAMINATION. Thephysical phases of the sobriety examinationshall be given when an under-the-influencedriver is able and willing to perform them and,when practicable, shall be conducted at thescene of the incident in the presence ofwitnesses.

A sobriety examination, as per Form 5.2.5,shall be completed when an officer:

∗ Arrests a person whom he/she witnessescommit the elements of driving while underthe influence; or,

∗ Arrests a driver suspected of beingintoxicated who was lawfully arrested ordetained by another peace officer or aprivate person (Manual Section 4/343.10);or,

∗ Is investigating a suspect fordriving-under-the-influence; or,

∗ Is investigating a traffic collision and aninvolved driver displays any objectivesymptoms of being under-the-influence,regardless of whether the driver is arrested.

When a suspected under-the-influence driverrefuses to submit to a field sobriety test, theinvestigating officer shall, read the FieldSobriety Test Admonition to the driver.

343.25 DRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE (DUI) DRUG ARRESTPROCEDURES.Arresting Officer's Responsibility. When anarrest is made for driving under-the-influenceof drugs or combination of drugs and alcohol,the arresting officer shall:

∗ Admonish the arrestee regarding a chemicaltest as per the Chemical Test Admonitionon the DUI Arrest Report, Form 5.2.5.

∗ Administer a chemical test to the arrestee.

Note: Whenever possible, a breath test shouldbe administered to determine alcoholintoxication.

∗ If the breath test is obtained and the resultsare .08% or higher, book the arrestee forSection 23152(a) (DUI) V.C. When theresults are below .08%, complete thefollowing:



∗ Read to the arrestee verbatim the DrugAdmonition from the DUI Arrest Report.

∗ Obtain a urine or blood sample from thearrestee.

Note: If urine is the only chemicalexamination administered, officers shallobtain the first void for possible detectionof drugs, and the second void for thepossible detection of alcohol. Both samplesshall be marked accordingly and booked asevidence.

∗ If the breath test is obtained and the resultsare .30% or higher, the arrestee shall beexamined by medical personnel pursuant toManual Section 4/648.17.

∗ Request a Drug Recognition Expert (DRE)or, if none available, a Narcotics Expert.

∗ If an on-duty DRE or Narcotics Expert isnot available within the concerned bureau,the arresting officer shall obtain an MT forthe arrestee and request the examiningphysician to include an opinion regardingobjective symptoms and possible drugingestion.

Exception: If a traffic death or traffic felonyarrest is involved and a DRE or NarcoticsExpert is not available within the concernedbureau, the arresting officer shall contactCommunications Division and request anon-duty DRE or Narcotics Expert fromanywhere in the City. If no on-duty DRE orNarcotics Expert is available, the officer shallcontact the Administrative Unit, DetectiveSupport Division, and request that an off-dutyDRE be dispatched.

∗ When applicable, include the DrugInfluence Evaluation Form (completed byan expert) as a page of the arrest report.

Drug Recognition Expert (DRE)/NarcoticsExpert’s Responsibility. A DRE or NarcoticsExpert is responsible for evaluating andrendering an opinion of the drug influence ofDUI Drug arrestees. As part of thatexamination, the expert shall:

∗ Advise the arresting officer of anyadditional tests required.

∗ Determine if an MT is needed.∗ Complete the Drug Influence Evaluation

Form.∗ Enter a brief description of the findings and

the examining officer's name and serialnumber in the Remarks Section of theBooking Approval, Form 12.31.

Note: If during a drug evaluation, the expertdetermines that he/she is not qualified to renderan opinion, the watch commander approvingthe booking shall determine if another expertshould be called.

343.28 ADMINISTRATIVE PER SEORDER OF SUSPENSION.343.30 ARRESTING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY. An officer making anarrest for driving-under-the-influence (DUI)shall complete a DUI arrest report in the usual

manner and confiscate the California driver'slicense of the arrestee when the arrestee:

∗ Refuses to submit to and complete achemical test; or

Note: The Chemical Test Admonition portionmust be read to the arrestee in its entirety, evenwhen the arrestee refuses to submit to orcomplete a chemical test.

∗ Takes a breath test which shows a bloodalcohol concentration (BAC) level of .08percent or more; or,

∗ Takes a urine or blood test and the officerbelieves that subsequent test results willshow that the driver is at or above a bloodalcohol concentration of .08 percent.

Note: Out-of-state/foreign licenses are notincluded under California law and cannot beconfiscated.

Upon completion of the DUI arrest report andconfiscation of the arrestee's California driver'slicense, the arresting officer shall complete:

∗ A Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV)Officer's Statement, Form DS367, and writethe arrestee's booking number in the upperright corner; and,

∗ A DMV Administrative Per Se Order OfSuspension/Revocation Temporary LicenseEndorsement, Form DS360.

Upon approval of the DUI arrest report andAdministrative Per Se documentation, officersshall:

∗ Attach page two of the DMV Form DS360to the DUI arrest report;

∗ Issue page three of the DMV Form DS360to the arrestee; and,

∗ Mail the original Form DS367; page one ofthe Form DS360; the arrestee's originalCalifornia Driver License; and IntoxicatorEC/IR Operator Checklist, Form 5.20.7, tothe DMV location which corresponds withthe geographic bureau of arrest.

Note: The law requires that all reports andforms be received by DMV within fiveworking days of the date of arrest.

Page two of the DMV Form DS360, issued tothe arrestee, will serve as a temporary driver'slicense for 45 days from the date of arrest foran arrestee with a valid California DriverLicense in his or her possession. Once thearrestee's driver's license has been confiscated,the arrestee will have 10 days to request aDMV hearing. Failure by the arrestee torequest a hearing will result in an automaticsuspension of the arrestee's California DriverLicense.

Exception: The arresting officer shall checkthe "No Temporary License Issued" box on theDMV Form DS360, and complete theexplanation why no temporary license wasissued, if:

∗ The arrestee has an out-of-state/foreigndriver license; or,

∗ The arrestee has not been issued a validCalifornia Driver License; or,

∗ The arrestee's California Driver License issuspended, revoked, or not in possession.

Packaging Blood or Urine Samples. If anarrestee chooses a blood or urine test, thearresting officer shall follow proceduresdescribed in Manual Sections 4/343.40 or4/343.42. Additionally, the arresting officershall complete the top half of the DMV Form,DS367A, and mail all three copies of the formto Scientific Investigation Division.

Supervisor's Responsibility. Supervisorsapproving DUI arrest reports shall ensure thatarresting officers have complied withAdministrative Per Se procedures (23158.5VC), when applicable.

343.33 INDEPENDENT TEST BYQUALIFIED PERSON. When qualifiedpersons appear at the place of confinement byrequests of the prisoner (Manual Sections4/658.12 and 4/658.17) or other person, for thepurpose of obtaining a breath, blood, or urinesample, they shall be permitted to do so uponconsent of the prisoner.

∗ Only a duly licensed doctor, laboratorytechnologist, bio-analyst, or registered nurseshall be permitted to withdraw a sample ofthe arrestee's blood. This limitation shall notapply to the taking of breath or urinespecimens;

∗ The doctor must be a physician or surgeon(M.D. or osteopath) licensed to practice inthe State of California. If there is a questionas to the identification of the doctor,Detective Support Division shall be calledto see if the doctor is listed in the Directoryof the State Board of OsteopathicExaminers;

∗ The laboratory technologists or bio-analystsmust be licensed to practice in the State ofCalifornia. If there is a question as to theiridentification, Detective Support Divisionshall be called to see if they are listed in theDepartment of Public Health directory forlicensed laboratory technologists andbioanalysts; and,

∗ The registered nurse must be licensed topractice in the State of California and mustperform the blood extraction under thesupervision or at the immediate direction, ofa doctor.

A Follow-Up Report, Form 3.14, shall be used,by the officer having custody of the prisoner,to record:

∗ The time the telephone call was made by orfor the prisoner;

∗ The time the person arrived at the place ofconfinement and requested to see theprisoner;

∗ The person's name, address, and telephonenumber, including business office addressand telephone number;

∗ The time the sample was taken;∗ The amount of blood taken as stated by the

person;



∗ The names and serial numbers of theofficers witnessing the telephone call andthe taking of the breath, blood, or urinesample;

∗ The name of the doctor employing orsupervising the registered nurse; and,

∗ Any other appropriate information.

343.36 CHEMICAL TESTADMONITIONS. Prior to administering achemical test to a driving-under-the-influencearrestee, the Chemical Test Admonition (23157VC) section of the Driving-Under-The-Influence Arrest Report, Form 5.2.5, shallbe read to the arrestee. The name and serialnumber of the admonishing officer shall beentered in the space provided in this section.

Note: The Chemical Test Admonition(23157VC) (Spanish) contained in the LosAngeles Police Department Citation Guide,Form 16.65.0, shall be read to Spanishspeaking driving-under-the-influence arrestees,by an officer fluent in, and capable of,testifying in Spanish.

After a breath test, if the arrestee is suspectedof driving under the influence of alcohol, theAdditional Chemical Test Admonition(23157.5 VC) section of theDriving-Under-The-Influence Arrest Reportshall be read to the arrestee. The name andserial number of the admonishing officer shallbe entered in the space provided in this section.If drug use is suspected, the Drug Admonitionof the Driving-Under-The-Influence ArrestReport shall be read to the arrestee instead ofthe Additional Chemical Test Admonition. Thename and serial number of the admonishingofficer shall be entered in the space provided inthis section.

343.38 BREATH TEST.Use of Equipment. Breath-testing equipmentis located at Metropolitan Jail Section (ParkerCenter), Valley Headquarters Building, 77thStreet Jail Section, and all geographic Areasexcept Central, Newton Street, Hollenbeck,and Rampart Areas. Operation of thebreath-testing equipment shall be restricted topersonnel who have been trained in its use.Arresting officers not trained in the use of thebreath-testing equipment shall ensure that theexamination is administered by an officertrained in its use.

An Intoximeter EC/IR Operator Check List,Form 5.20.7, shall be completed each time theIntoximeter EC/IR is set up for a test and foreach subject to whom a test is administered.

Note: Breath-testing equipment may be used asan investigative aid in driving-under-the-influence arrests involving narcotics,non-narcotic drugs, or dangerous drugs, or forother purposes at the discretion of theconcerned watch commander.

Watch commanders shall ensure thatbreath-testing equipment receives timelycalibration by qualified personnel.

Administering Test. Prior to administering thetest, the testing officer shall observe the subjectfor a 15-minute period, during which thesubject shall not have eaten, drunk, smoked,regurgitated, or vomited.

Note: If the subject regurgitates, vomits, eats,drinks, or smokes between samplings, the pre-testing observation shall be repeated.

At least two breath samples shall be collected.(No waiting period is required betweensamples.) If the readings of the two samplesvary more than .02 percentage points,additional samples shall be collected until theresults of any two samples are within .02percentage points. If five samples have beencollected and the test is not complete (twosamples, within .02 percentage points), theofficer shall direct the subject to submit toeither a blood or urine test. Failure to completea test shall be deemed a "refusal."

Note: Arrestees who obtain a EC/IR reading of.30 percent or higher shall be examined bymedical personnel pursuant to Manual Section4/648.17

Recording Results. The EC/IR test tape shallbe separated from the machine only when:

∗ The test is completed (two samples, within.02 percentage points); or,

∗ Five samples have been collected and thetest is not completed.

The date/time stamp shall be applied on thefront of the test tape with each sample, and thetime of each sampling shall be recorded.

Note: The date/time stamp and the requiredentries shall not cover any portion of the testresults.

The EC/IR test tape shall be stapled to theEC/IR Check List on the space provided. Thestaple shall be positioned in a manner that willnot interfere with reading the test results. Whenthe test tape is longer than the Check List, thetape shall be folded in a manner that will notinterfere with reading the test results.

The Intoximeter EC/IR Operator Check Listshall be completed by the administering officerand:

∗ Attached to the Arrest Report; or,∗ Submitted with the officer's DFAR and a

DUI Arrest Report, Form 5.2.5, when noarrest report is completed.

343.40 BLOOD TEST.Criteria for Requesting. A blood sample maybe requested in the following situations:

∗ The arrestee indicates a willingness tosubmit to a blood test incidental to thearrest; or,

∗ The arrestee is in custody for a felony andthe level of intoxication would be anessential element in the alleged violation;or,

∗ The arrestee is unconscious or is soimpaired and is unable to consent to a

chemical test. When such a condition exists,the following steps shall be taken in order todetermine if the arrestee is a hemophiliac ora heart patient possibly using anticoagulantmedication:

∗ Check for medical information on thearrestee's person such as a "Medic Alert"bracelet or necklace, or any other itemindicative of the arrestee's medicalbackground;

∗ If a relative or a friend of the arrestee ispresent who can provide informationabout the arrestee's medical condition,record the name, the relationship to thearrestee, and the statements of thatperson in the arrest report; and,

∗ Inform the attending physician of allinformation in the officer's possessionwhich may have a bearing on thearrestee's physical condition.

Requesting Forced Blood SampleWithdrawal. A forced blood sample may beobtained from an arrestee only when all of thefollowing conditions have been met:

∗ The arrestee is in custody for a felonytraffic offense where the injury occurred toa person other than the arrestee; and,

∗ Intoxication is an essential element of thealleged violation; and,

∗ The arrestee refuses to voluntarily submit toany of the available chemical tests; and,

∗ Prior approval from a traffic supervisor hasbeen obtained; and,

∗ A traffic or patrol supervisor is present atthe medical facility (e.g., jail dispensary,contract hospital, etc.) to witness thewithdrawal of blood from the suspect.

Note: The name and serial number of theapproving supervisor and the supervisorpresent during the forced blood withdrawal, ifdifferent from the approving supervisor, shallbe written in the arrest report.

Exception: An arrestee whose medicalcondition prohibits a blood sample from beingtaken shall not be forced to submit to a bloodtest.

Traffic Division Supervisor’s Responsibility.Upon being advised of a request for a forcedblood withdrawal, the concerned trafficdivision supervisor shall determine if thecriteria for forced blood withdrawal is met. The approving supervisor, if readily available,should be the supervisor present during theprocedure.

The supervisor who is present at the scene of aforced blood withdrawal where the use of forcebecomes necessary shall ensure that the use-of-force investigation is conducted by a non-involved supervisor.

Requesting Withdrawal. Whenever a bloodsample is to be obtained from an arrestee, thearresting officer shall direct a Request forWithdrawal of Blood, Form 4.35, to any of thefollowing hospital personnel:



∗ Physician.∗ Registered nurse.∗ Licensed clinical laboratory technologist.∗ Licensed clinical bio-analyst.

Physician or Hospital Employee Refusal.When a physician or hospital employeeauthorized by Vehicle Code Section 23158 VCrefuses to withdraw a blood sample, theofficers having custody of the arrestee shallrequest a supervisor to respond to theirlocation. Upon arrival, the respondingsupervisor shall:

∗ Become familiarized with the situationincluding a determination that the arrest andofficer's actions conformed withDepartment policy;

∗ Verify the refusal by the hospital employeeto withdraw blood; and,

∗ Attempt to contact an administrator of thehospital who may advise the refusingemployee as to responsibilities according tothe contract provisions of the hospital, tothe City.

When the employee still refuses to withdraw ablood sample, the supervisor shall then requestthe arrestee to submit to one of the other tworemaining chemical tests. When the arresteerefuses the other tests, the supervisor shalladvise the officers to complete the appropriatearrest report, including a notation regarding theabsence of a chemical test.

Note: If a hospital employee refuses towithdraw a blood sample and the arresteedeclines the remaining tests, the arrestee maybe transported to a Jail Division Dispensary toobtain the blood sample.

After the arrestee is booked and all appropriatereports are completed, the concernedsupervisor and officers shall each complete anEmployee's Report, Form 15.7, recording allpertinent information regarding the refusal towithdraw blood. The completed Employee'sReports shall be forwarded through channels toDetective Support Division-Attention MedicalEvaluation Unit.

Obtaining and Packaging. The withdrawal ofall blood samples shall be witnessed by therequesting officer. Officers obtaining bloodsamples for alcohol or drug analysis shall, inaddition to following the procedures outlinedon the Analyzed Evidence To Be RefrigeratedEnvelope, Form 12.51.1, place the defendant'sbooking number above the officer's serialnumber when completing the Sealed EvidenceLabel. If there is no arrestee, the DR numbershall be placed in the space above the bookingofficer's serial number. When there is morethan one suspect and a DR number is used,both the DR number and the last name of thesuspect shall be used.

Officers obtaining whole blood samples fromhospital employees for other than alcohol ordrug analysis shall:

∗ Tilt the vial slowly and gently forapproximately twenty seconds to ensure the

preservative in the vial mixes with theblood;

∗ Complete the label on the vial with thesuspect's name, the DR number, and thebooking officer's initials;

∗ Check the "Blood Grouping" box on theAnalyzed Evidence To Be RefrigeratedEnvelope, and complete all other applicablereports;

∗ Place the vial in the Analyzed EvidenceEnvelope and seal the envelope with aSealed Evidence Label bearing the date andDR number and the officer's payrollsignature and serial number signed in ink;and,

∗ Affix the Biohazard Label to the upper leftcorner of the front of the AnalyzedEvidence To Be Refrigerated Envelope.

Supervisor Approving. The supervisorapproving the booking of the sample shallinspect the sample vial or container label toensure that the required identifying informationis included.

Booking. Whole blood samples shall bebooked in the SID courier refrigeratedtemporary storage locker most convenient forthe booking employee. The SID courier shallbe responsible for transporting items to beanalyzed to SID.

343.42 URINE TEST.Location Obtained. A urine sample shall beobtained from a male arrestee at the bookinglocation, and from a female at:

∗ Female Jail Unit, Valley Section, whenarrested in West Los Angeles, Pacific, orthe Valley Areas; and,

∗ The Area of arrest, when arrested in themetropolitan area.

Administering Test. An officer or stationofficer of the same sex as the arrestee shall:

∗ Escort the arrestee to an appropriaterestroom facility;

∗ Instruct the arrestee that he/she must emptyhis/her bladder;

∗ Remain present while the arrestee emptieshis/her bladder;

∗ Wait twenty minutes, or as soon as possiblethereafter, before attempting to collect aurine sample;

∗ Provide the arrestee with a pretreated urinesample container;

∗ Ensure that the container is not rinsed priorto sample collection;

∗ Remain present while the arrestee providesa urine sample; and,

∗ Ensure that the label identifying the chemistresponsible for preparation of the containeris not removed.

Note: A protective glove shall be worn whenhandling a urine sample.

The Driving-Under-the-Influence ArrestReport (Continuation), Form 5.2.5, shallindicate:

∗ The time the bladder of the arrestee wasfirst emptied,

∗ The time the urine sample was collected,and,

∗ The name of the employee whoadministered the urine test.

Note: When an arresting officer becomesaware that an arrestee has emptied his/herbladder after coming into the custody of theofficer, the twenty-minute waiting period shallbegin at the time the bladder was first emptied.The time and circumstances of the emptyingshall be recorded on the Driving-Under-the-Influence Arrest Report(Continuation), Form 5.2.5.

Booking Sample. The officer booking a urinesample shall:

∗ Ensure that the lid is placed tightly on thecontainer;

∗ Place a completed Sealed-Evidence Labelon the side of the container, and place thedefendant's booking number above theofficer's serial number when completing theSealed-Evidence Label. If there is noarrestee, the DR number shall be placed inthe space above the booking officer's serialnumber. When there is more than onesuspect and a DR number is used, both theDR number and the last name of the suspectshall be used;

∗ Complete the Analyzed Evidence To BeRefrigerated Envelope, Form 12.51.1, andcheck the appropriate box, "AlcoholAnalysis" or "Drug Analysis;"

∗ Place the container in the AnalyzedEvidence Envelope;

∗ Seal the flap of the envelope with acompleted Sealed Evidence Label; and,

∗ Affix the Biohazard Label to the upper leftcorner of the front of the AnalyzedEvidence Envelope.

Alcohol and/or opiate urine samples shall bebooked in the SID courier refrigeratedtemporary storage locker most convenient forthe booking employee. The SID courier shallbe responsible for transporting items to beanalyzed to SID.

Supervisor Approving. The supervisorapproving the booking of the sample shallinspect the sample vial or container label toensure that the required identifying informationis included.

343.57 REFUSAL TO SUBMIT TO ORCOMPLETE CHEMICAL TEST-NOTIFICATION TO DMV. When a personwho has been arrested for operating a motorvehicle while under the influence ofintoxicating liquor and/or drugs refuses tosubmit to or complete a chemical test, thearresting officer shall mark the left margin ofthe related Driving-Under-The-InfluenceArrest Report, "Copy to Bureau TrafficDivision Auditor."

343.60 DRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE ARREST-OFFICER



REPORTING. When an arrest is made for anyoffense committed while driving a vehicleunder the influence of alcohol and/or drugs,one officer shall normally complete the reportand be prepared to testify regarding all phasesof the arrest. That officer's name shall beplaced in the upper portion of the "ReportingOfficer's" box on page 1 of the Arrest Reportand in the appropriate boxes of Form 5.2.5.

343.65 MISDEMEANOR TRAFFICCOLLISION RELATEDDRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCEBOOKINGS. When an arrestee involved in atraffic collision is booked for driving under theinfluence (23152(a) VC) the officerresponsible for completing the arrest and trafficcollision reports shall cause the arrest reportand a copy of the traffic collision report to besubmitted together at the location of bookingfor processing and distribution.

Exception: When the arrestee is booked intothe Los Angeles County-USC Medical Centerjail ward or Los Angeles County Jail, thereports shall be submitted to the approvingsupervisor at the Communications DivisionTelephonic Report Counter, Parker Center.

Note: Records unit personnel shall ensure thatone copy of the Traffic Collision Report isforwarded, with the copies of the DUI arrestreport, to the appropriate custodial detentionofficer. The original reports and subsequentcopies shall be processed and distributedaccording to current procedures.

343.70 DRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE BOOKINGS. A teletyperequest shall be sent to DMV concerning eacharrestee booked for 23152(a) VC. This requestshall be teletyped by divisional record clerksimmediately upon receipt of the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.1, from thelocation of the arrestee's detention. Requestsmay be sent using either the driver's licensenumber or the full name of the arrestee.

When using the driver's license number, theteletype shall be sent in the following form:

∗ ID.∗ (Information code, driver's license number.)

When no driver's license number is available,the teletype shall contain: (Manual Section4/155.15)

∗ STATUS AND RECORD.∗ Arrestee's full name.∗ Arrestee's address.∗ Arrestee's birthdate (if unknown, give age).

Teletype requests shall originate from thedivision at which the arrest reports arecompleted for distribution. The employee shalluse the appropriate teletype code to ensure thatthe docket number and the court of priorconviction, if applicable, appear on the replyfrom DMV. The employee making the inquiryshall attach the return teletype information tothe court copy of the arrest report and forwardthem to the detention officer having custody of

the arrestee.

344. TRAFFIC CASES INVOLVINGPHYSICIANS.344.50 ARREST OF PHYSICIANENROUTE TO TREAT EMERGENCYCASE. When a physician is taken into custodywhile enroute to treat an emergency case, thearresting officer shall immediately cause thepatient to be notified. If this is not possible, theperson who summoned the physician shall benotified.

A physician traveling in response to anemergency shall be exempt from the provisionsof Vehicle Code Section 22351 (Speed LawViolations) and 22352 (Prima Facie SpeedLimits), if the vehicle so used by the physiciandisplays an insignia approved by theDepartment of Motor Vehicles indicating thatthe vehicle is owned by a licensed physician(21058 VC).

Note: The caduceus, symbol of the AmericanMedical Association, is the approved insignia.

346. TRAFFIC CASES INVOLVINGJUVENILES.346.10 CITING PROCEDURE-TRAFFICNOTICE TO APPEAR (CITATION). Whena juvenile is issued a Traffic Notice to Appear,Form 4.50.0 for a moving or non-movingviolation, the juvenile shall be advised that aparent or guardian's presence is required whenat Juvenile Traffic Court in answer to thecitation.

346.20 REFUSAL TO SIGN CITATION-JUVENILES. When a juvenile refuses to signa citation, the juvenile shall be processedaccording to Manual Section 4/334.40.

346.40 MISDEMEANOR TRAFFICVIOLATION-JUVENILE ARRESTED.When a juvenile is booked for a misdemeanorVehicle or Municipal Code (traffic-related)violation, the arresting officer shall:

∗ Complete a Traffic Notice to Appear in thenormal manner and have the juvenile signthe citation.

∗ Cite the juvenile to the morning orafternoon session (Manual Section4/320.45) of the Juvenile Traffic Court onthe appropriate citing date.

∗ Give the juvenile the defendant’s copy.

Note: If the juvenile is to be released to aparent or guardian, the defendant’s copy of thecitation should be given to the parent orguardian at the time of release.

∗ Complete an Arrest Report, Form 5.2, andinclude the citation number and the notationthat the court copy of the citation is attachedto the investigating officer's copy of thearrest report.

∗ Attach the court copy of the citation to thearrest report.

∗ When the juvenile is to be released to aparent or guardian, provide the adult with a

copy of the Juvenile, Notice to Appear,Form 9.3.

Exception: Juveniles arrested for violation ofSection 23152 VC shall be processed in thesame manner as a non-traffic misdemeanorarrest. A Traffic Notice to Appear shall not beissued for driving under the influence.

The investigating officer shall:

∗ When the juvenile is not detained, forwardone copy of the arrest report and the courtcopy of the citation to Traffic CourtLiaison, Traffic Coordination Section.

∗ When continued detention is deemednecessary, process the detained petitionrequest, court copy of the citation, andrelated reports in the same manner as adetained petition request for any othercharge.

346.45 JUVENILE OFFENSESINVOLVING ALCOHOL. Officers citing ajuvenile for a violation of 23140(a) VC shall:

∗ Document probable cause for administeringthe Intoximeter EC/IR Test in the narrativesection of a Traffic Notice to Appear or ona Continuation of Notice to Appear, ifnecessary;

∗ Write the corresponding citation number inthe box entitled "DR NO." in the upper rightcorner of the completed Intoximeter EC/IROperator Check List, Form 5.20.7;

∗ Attach the completed Form 5.20.7 to theTraffic Notice to Appear "court copy"(green), and forward it to the appropriateJuvenile Traffic Court; and,

∗ Release the juvenile to a parent or guardian.

Note: Section 23140(a) VC does not require aField Sobriety Test (FST); however, should anofficer administer an FST, the results of theFST shall be documented on a Driving-Under-the-Influence Arrest Report (Continuation),Form 5.2.5. The completed Form 5.2.5 shallinclude the corresponding citation number inthe upper right corner in the box entitled "DR"and be attached to the Traffic Notice to Appear"court copy" (green) and forwarded to theappropriate Juvenile Traffic Court.Enforcement of Section 23140(a) VC does notpreclude the enforcement of 23152(a) VC,Driving-Under-the-Influence of Alcohol orDrugs.

347. TRAFFIC CASES INVOLVINGPUBLIC TRANSPORTATION.347.10 TRAFFIC VIOLATIONS BYPUBLIC TRANSPORTATIONVEHICLES. When an officer observes acitable traffic violation committed by theoperator of a vehicle subject to the jurisdictionof the Department of Transportation, the MTA,or any municipal bus line, the officer shall, ifappropriate, complete a Traffic Notice toAppear (Citation).

When practicable, buses should be allowed toproceed to the next regular stopping pointbefore enforcement action is taken. A bus shall



not be detained any longer than is necessary tocomplete the citation. All other publictransportation vehicles shall be stopped at thenearest available parking space.

Note: The Department of Transportation hasjurisdiction over motor buses, private schoolbuses, sightseeing buses, charter buses,taxicabs, automobiles for hire, and privateambulances.

347.30 CITING PROCEDURES-PUBLICTRANSPORTATION VEHICLES. When acitation is issued to the operator of a publictransportation vehicle or a vehicle subject tothe jurisdiction of the Department ofTransportation, it shall be completed in thenormally prescribed manner.

347.80 ARREST OF PERSONOPERATING PUBLICTRANSPORTATION VEHICLE. If a personoperating a vehicle under the jurisdiction of theDepartment of Transportation, the SCRTD, ora municipal bus line, is taken into custody andno other crew member is available, thearresting officer shall:

∗ Notify the concerned company dispatcher,if available; and,

∗ Remain at the scene until an authorizedperson takes charge of the vehicle.

349. TRAFFIC VIOLATIONSINVOLVING POST OFFICEEMPLOYEES.349.05 POST OFFICE VEHICLES-DEFINED. Post Office vehicles, as used inthis section, shall include all publicly orprivately owned vehicles operated by theUnited States Post Office for the purpose of,and while engaged in, the transportation,delivery or pick-up of United States mail.

349.20 TURNING EXEMPTIONS-POSTOFFICE EMPLOYEES. Operators of PostOffice vehicles on scheduled routes shall beexempt from the provisions of special signsregulating street turning movements. Thisexemption shall not apply when one-waystreets are affected.

349.40 CITING PROCEDURE-POSTOFFICE EMPLOYEES. When an officerobserves a citable traffic violation committedby the operator of a Post Office vehicle, theofficer shall, if appropriate, complete a TrafficNotice to Appear, Form 4.50.0 (Citation). Thedefendant shall be requested to sign thecitation. The citing officer shall complete theTraffic Notice to Appear in the normallyprescribed manner.

Note: Operators of government owned orleased mail trucks are not required to hold aState of California driver's license while soengaged. (Vehicle Code Section 12501a).

349.60 PHYSICAL ARREST OFPOSTAL, EMPLOYEES (Manual Section4/216.60).

349.80 PARKING VIOLATIONS-POSTOFFICE VEHICLES (Manual Section4/384.70).

354. TRAFFIC VIOLATIONS.354.05 TRAFFIC VIOLATIONS ONROADWAYS IN PUBLIC PARKS. Trafficviolations occurring on a roadway in a publicpark, other than Riverside Drive or thePasadena Freeway, shall be cited with theappropriate Los Angeles Municipal Codesections. Only those sections of the VehicleCode which apply to private property areapplicable to violations in public parks.

354.10 FALSE INFORMATION TOPEACE OFFICERS. An officer engaged inenforcement of the Vehicle Code (VC) whobecomes aware that a person has knowinglyprovided false information shall arrest andbook for Section 31 VC under the authority of40302(a)VC.

Note: A Nontraffic Notice to Appear may becompleted if conditions for release are met, andthe procedures for release are followed(Manual Section 4/216.65).

Officers shall cancel a citation (Traffic Noticeto Appear) on which false information wasrecorded by completing a Citation CancellationRequest, Form 4.45, and document thecanceling of the citation in the narrative of thearrest report. Any additional violations listedon the cancelled citation shall also bedocumented in the narrative of the arrest reportas additional filings. A photocopy of thecancelled citation shall be included as a pageof the arrest report.

354.24 CITATIONS ISSUED FORILLEGAL USE OF SIREN. When a citationis issued for Illegal Use of Siren, Vehicle CodeSection 27002, the citing officer shall completean Employee's Report, Form 15.7, in triplicate,containing the details of the offense. This formshall be forwarded to the Commanding Officer,Special Operations Bureau.

354.30 COURT APPEARANCE BYOFFICER IN SPEED CASES. When anofficer is subpoenaed to court in connectionwith a case involving a speed violation, he/sheshall be prepared to:

∗ Establish the speed zone qualifications atthe location in question by testimonyconcerning the legal posting on thehighway, or in the absence of such posting,by a house or business count; and,

∗ Completely describe the speed zone signs asto size, shape, and wording, when theposting is to be used as the sole means ofestablishing the speed zone.

354.35 APPREHENSION FORRECKLESS DRIVING. When a violator isapprehended for Reckless Driving, Vehicle

Code Section 23103, the essential elements andthe location of each count shall be included inthe Complaint Application, Form 5.15, orwhen an arrest is made, in the Arrest Report,Form 5.2. When a citation has been started orissued for any of the violations, a CitationCancellation Request, Form 4.45, shall becompleted.

354.38 CITATIONS ISSUED FOR NOBICYCLE LICENSE.

Citing Procedure-General. A citation forviolation of 26.01 L.A.M.C. (UnlicensedBicycle) shall not be issued if the ownerproduces a valid California Bicycle LicenseApplication (pink copy) for the bicycle.

The name and address of the Los Angelespolice station nearest the residence of theviolator where bicycle licenses may beobtained shall be included in the notes of acitation issued for failure to have a bicyclelicense.

Citing Procedure - Juvenile. An officerissuing a citation to a juvenile for violation of26.01 L.A.M.C. shall instruct the juvenile to:

∗ Have the bicycle licensed at a Los Angelespolice station or in the jurisdiction ofresidence; and,

∗ After licensing, if there are no otherviolations cited, have the bicycle inspectedat a Los Angeles police station prior to theappearance date indicated on the citation.

Processing of Citations-Juvenile. Officerslicensing or inspecting a bicycle shalldetermine whether:

∗ The only violation cited is 26.01 L.A.M.C.∗ The bicycle was properly licensed and

inspected prior to the appearance dateindicated on the citation.

If these two conditions are met, the officershall:

∗ Retain the violator's copy of the citation;∗ Inform the violator that an appearance in

Juvenile Traffic Court is not required,unless otherwise notified by the court;

∗ Record the date, the bicycle license number,the agency licensing, and name and divisionof assignment on the back of the violator'scopy of the citation; and,

∗ Forward the citation to the Juvenile TrafficCourt, 1945 South Hill Street, Los Angeles,Attention: Court Liaison Unit.

If the citation has been issued for violations inaddition to 26.01 L.A.M.C., or if the bicyclehas not been properly licensed and inspectedprior to the court appearance date, the juvenileshall be instructed to retain the copy of thecitation and appear in the Juvenile Court,Traffic Division, as specified on the citation.

Citing Procedure-Adult. An adult issued acitation for violation of 26.01 L.A.M.C. shallbe instructed to have the bicycle licensed at aLos Angeles Police station or in the



jurisdiction of residence, prior to making theappearance indicated on the citation.

354.40 TRAINS BLOCKINGMOVEMENT OF TRAFFIC. Whenever atrain blocks the movement of traffic upon astreet for more than ten minutes a ComplaintApplication, Form 5.15, may be completed.The Form 5.15 shall be submitted to asupervisor for approval.

Officer’s Responsibility. When completing aComplaint Application, Form 5.15, theComplaint Application shall include, whenpracticable:

∗ The date, time and exact location ofoccurrence (including the name of theblocked streets);

∗ The name of the railroad involved, including the numbers of the locomotiveand caboose;

∗ The name(s) of the engineer and/or theconductor and their stated reason, if any, forthe delay;

∗ The name(s) and phone number(s) ofwitness(es) and/or person(s) reporting; and,

∗ The duration of the delay during which thetrain blocked the movement of traffic.

(State Public Utilities Commission GeneralOrder No. 135).

Exception: Officers shall not submit aComplaint Application when:

∗ There are no vehicle(s) or pedestrian(s)waiting;

∗ The train is moving continuously in thesame direction; or,

∗ The train is stopped because of State and/orFederal laws, terrain and/or physicalconditions, adverse weather conditions,conditions rendering the roadbed or trackunsafe, mechanical failures, train accidents,or other occurrences over which the railroadhas no control.

Records Supervisor’s Responsibility.Records supervisors shall:

∗ Ensure that all Complaint Applications fortrains blocking movement of traffic receivea Division of Records (DR) Number; and,

∗ Forward the Complaint Application to theresponsible traffic division.

Traffic Division Collision Investigator’sResponsibility. Traffic Division, CollisionInvestigators (CI) shall:

∗ Review the Complaint Application;∗ Ensure that the Complaint Application

meets Los Angeles City Attorney’s filingrequirements; and,

∗ Present the Complaint Application to theLos Angeles City Attorney’s Office forfiling.

360. VEHICLE EQUIPMENTVIOLATIONS.360.30 CITATIONS ISSUED FORDEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT. When a Traffic

Notice to Appear (citation) is issued fordefective motor vehicle equipment, the driverof the vehicle shall be advised to secure anequipment inspection prior to appearing inanswer to the citation. Inspection services maybe obtained for:

∗ Brakes or headlights; from an official lightor brake inspection station; and,

∗ Equipment other than brakes or headlights:from a Los Angeles County Sheriff’sinspection station or a California HighwayPatrol (CHP) inspection facility.

360.35 CERTIFYING CORRECTIONS.Officers (other than those assigned to theSpecialized Enforcement Unit, TrafficCoordination Section) shall not certify (signoff) violations as being corrected. Driver'slicense and registration violations may becertified as corrected by the Department ofMotor Vehicles or any clerk of a court.Equipment violations may be certified ascorrected as noted on the reverse of the Noticeto Appear, Form 4.50, violator's (white) copy.

372. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND DEVICES.372.05 ENFORCEMENT WHENTRAFFIC SIGNS NOT LEGIBLE ANDVISIBLE. A citation shall not be issued if, atthe time of a violation, any required officialsign or marking is not in place and sufficientlylegible and visible to be seen by an ordinarilyobservant person. (Los Angeles MunicipalCode Section 80.10).

372.10 LEGALITY OF TRAFFIC SIGNSAND MARKINGS. When enforcing trafficlaws, employees shall presume that any postedofficial sign or marking has been legally placedand established.

372.20 EMERGENCY PARKINGREGULATION SIGNS. Persons ororganizations requesting emergency parkingregulation signs shall be referred to the LosAngeles Department of Transportation.

372.25 DEFECTIVE TRAFFIC SIGNSAND SIGNALS. Employees observing orreceiving information that any official trafficcontrol device is defective, damaged, ormissing shall:

∗ Immediately notify the communicationscontrol operator;

∗ When conflicting directions are displayedby the traffic signals, adjust the lights toappear flashing red or take other action toeliminate the hazard; and,

∗ When a hazard cannot be corrected, or apossibility of conflict is present, manuallydirect traffic or secure uniformed personnelto direct traffic.

When a traffic signal repair person is at thescene of a defective traffic signal, the decisionas to whether the signal is to be turned off shallbe made by the repair person.

372.28 DEFECTIVE PARKINGMETERS. Employees observing or receiving

information concerning a parking meter inneed of repair or replacement shall, withoutdelay, notify the desk officer of the geographicArea in which the meter is located. Thenotification shall include the location and theserial number of the parking meter. When aparking meter, or its parts or contents, isbooked into the custody of the Department, thenotification shall also include the classificationof property (Evidence or Non-evidence), theDR number, and the location where theproperty is held.

Parking Meter Log. The desk officer, whennotified of a parking meter in need of repair orreplacement, or that a parking meter, or itsparts or contents, has been booked, shall recordin the Parking Meter Log the time of reportingand the information given him/her by thereporting officer for later reference by TrafficDepartment repair persons.

372.35 REQUESTING INSTALLATIONOF SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND MARKINGS.An employee requesting installation of a sign,signal, or markings shall submit an Employee'sReport, Form 15.7, to his/her immediatesuperior officer. When approved, the reportshall be forwarded through channels, to TrafficCoordination Section.

372.40 USE OF FLARES. Use of flaresshall be limited to protecting the scene of atraffic collision or other emergency occurrenceon a traffic-way.

378. INTERSECTION CONTROL.378.20 EMPLOYEE'S POSITION ININTERSECTION. The following factors shallbe considered in choosing the position to betaken by an officer at an intersection:

∗ Personal safety.∗ Visibility of traffic.∗ Non-obstruction of traffic.∗ Ability to effect necessary control.∗ Accessibility to persons wishing

information.

378.40 USE OF WHISTLE FORINTERSECTION CONTROL.Signal Changes. The whistle shall be used inconjunction with electric traffic signal changesonly when necessary.

Full Manual Control. When in full manualcontrol of an intersection, an employee shalluse the whistle to supplement arm signals usedfor stopping and starting the flow of traffic.

Warning. Short, rapid whistle blasts may beused to gain attention or to prevent violations.

378.60 PERSONS REQUESTINGINFORMATION AT INTERSECTIONS.Motorists or pedestrians requesting informationshall be directed to a place of safety beforebeing given such information.

378.80 ORAL DIRECTIONS ATINTERSECTION. Employees shall not shout



directions which can be given by propermanual signals.

384. PARKING CONTROL.384.05 ISSUANCE OF PARKINGVIOLATION WARNINGS. Warning ofParking Violation, Form 4.10, shall be issuedin lieu of citations for a period of not less thanthree, nor more than, seven days:

∗ When new parking regulations becomeeffective; or,

∗ When parking regulations already in effecthave not been enforced for an appreciablelength of time and enforcement is resumed;or,

∗ When a vehicle appears to be abandoned.

Exception: This section does not pertain totemporary or emergency parking regulations.

384.15 RESTRICTED PARKINGZONES-ENFORCEMENT. When a citationis issued for parking in any of the followingtypes of zones, the citing section shall be "LosAngeles Municipal Code 80.56":

∗ White passenger loading zones stenciled"Passenger Loading Only."

∗ Yellow loading zones stenciled "LoadingOnly."

∗ Green parking zones stenciled "PassengerCars Only-15 Minute Limit."

∗ Red zones stenciled "No Standing."

Subsections of Los Angeles Municipal CodeSection 80.56 shall not be shown on thecitation, but the specific violation shall beidentified by indicating in the notes on thecitation the color of the zone.

384.20 WHITE, YELLOW, AND GREENZONES-ESTABLISHMENT ANDREPAINTING. Persons who requestinformation on the establishment or repaintingof white, yellow, or green parking zones, shallbe referred to the Department ofTransportation.

384.25 ANGLE PARKING. Citingemployees shall be alert for unnecessaryviolations of regulations requiring parallelparking. While consideration may be given tothe necessity for angle parking when loading orunloading merchandise of such size and weightthat parallel parking would unreasonablyaggravate the process, such consideration shallnot be based upon mere convenience.

384.30 COMMERCIAL VEHICLESDEFINED. For purposes of enforcing trafficregulations, the following shall be consideredcommercial vehicles:

∗ All motor vehicles bearing Californiacommercial license plates; and,

∗ All motor vehicles bearing a "CommercialVehicle Identification Permit" issued by theBoard of Traffic Commissioners, pursuantto Los Angeles Municipal Code Section80.60.1.

384.35 PARKING ON PRIVATE

PROPERTY WITHOUT PERMISSION.The name and address of the complainant shallbe included in the notes on a citation issued forillegal parking on private property.

384.45 SEARCHLIGHT, GENERATOR,AND FLOODLIGHT UNITS-PARKINGENFORCEMENT. Employees initiatingenforcement action against personsmaintaining illegally parked searchlight,generator, or floodlight units shall complete aComplaint Application, Form 5.15, which shallinclude:

∗ The name of the offender (person in chargeof, or operating, the equipment at the timethe violation occurred);

∗ The name of the owner of the equipment;and,

∗ A statement of the offender, when present,as to whether he/she was instructed to parkthe equipment in that specific place.

384.50 OPERATING SEARCHLIGHT,GENERATOR, OR FLOODLIGHTWITHOUT PERMIT. If a person operating asearchlight, generator, or floodlight unit on thestreet is unable to establish that he/she hasobtained a permit, officers shall contact theconcerned geographic uniformed division toascertain whether the person has an effectivepermit. If the person does not have an effectivepermit, a Complaint Application, Form 5.15,shall be completed and shall include:

∗ The name of the offender (person in chargeof, or operating, the equipment at the timethe violation occurred;)

∗ The name of the owner of the equipment;and,

∗ A statement of the offender as to whetherhe/she was informed that a permit for thevehicle was or was not obtained.

384.55 TIRE MARKING. When a tire ismarked with chalk or crayon, the mark shall bemade across the tread area of the tire.

384.60 COMPLETING ABSENTEEPARKING CITATION. The followingprocedures shall apply to the completion ofabsentee parking citations:

Citation Books. The completion of theabsentee parking citation shall consist ofcompleting all applicable items through theviolation section of the citation. Officers shallrefer to the Los Angeles Department ofTransportation (LADOT) citation referencecard to ensure that the proper abbreviations andcodes are entered on the citation.

Note: Officers shall enter their unit designation(e.g. 12A53, 3X62, etc.) in the space marked"Beat No."

Overtime Parking. A citation issued forovertime parking shall include the time of thestart of the check, immediately above the timeof issuance.

Return of Operator. If the operator of theconcerned vehicle is present at any time during

the issuance of an absentee parking citation,the notes of the citation shall so indicate. Thecompleted citation shall be attached to thevehicle.

Citation Corrections. Corrections on theabsentee citation may be made prior toissuance if an error is made in other than thevehicle identification or violation portions andonly by legibly writing over the error. Illegiblecorrections shall cause the citation to becanceled and a new citation issued. Strikeoversshall not be used to correct a citation andchanges shall not be made after the citation hasbeen issued.

Note: The Form 4.07.0 shall not be used tocorrect an absentee citation.

Canceling Citations. An absentee parkingcitation shall be canceled and a new citationissued when an error is made in the vehicleidentification or violation fields of the citation.When it is necessary to cancel an absenteeparking citation, employees shall be guided byManual Section 4/326.

384.65 BOARD OF EDUCATIONVEHICLES. The following describedwindshield card is used by AssistantSupervisors of Attendance, Board ofEducation, while parked in front of schools forthe purpose of delivering or picking upabsentee students. When displayed in thewindshield of a vehicle parked in front of aschool, the card shall be accepted as indicatingthat the vehicle is actually engaged in loadingor unloading. The card is white cardboard,eight by nine inches, and bears the followinginformation:

∗ Identifying code letter and number.∗ Board of Education gold seal.∗ Make of car.∗ License number of car.∗ Owner.∗ Occupation.∗ Black lettering reading "Los Angeles City

Board of Education. This is now being usedto enforce the provisions of the SchoolCode pertaining to compulsory schoolattendance."

∗ Signed by the Head Supervisor.∗ Approved by the Deputy Superintendent of

Schools.

384.70 POST OFFICE VEHICLES. PostOffice Vehicles (Manual Section 4/349.05),while delivering or picking up mail, may bepermitted to park in any of the followingplaces:

∗ In any red zone or white passenger loadingzone.

∗ In the Central Traffic District duringprohibited hours.

∗ In front of a fire hydrant, when the doors ofthe vehicle are not locked.

∗ In crosswalks, when permission has beengranted by this Department with referenceto a specific location.



∗ Double parking, when no legal parkingspace nor any of the foregoing places areavailable within 150 feet of the driver'sdestination.

385. PARKING DEPARTMENTVEHICLES.385.20 LOCKING DEPARTMENTVEHICLES. Unless it is impractical, anemployee shall securely lock a Departmentvehicle when leaving it parked on the street orother public places.

When an employee parks a Department vehicleand leaves it unlocked and unattended, he/sheshall remove all dangerous or valuableequipment that is not securely attached to thevehicle.

387. CALIBRATINGSPEEDOMETERS.387.10 SPEEDOMETERCALIBRATIONS OF DEPARTMENTVEHICLES. Speedometers of Departmentvehicles used to enforce the provisions of theVehicle Code shall be calibratedsemi-annually, and the information entered onthree copies of the Speedometer CalibrationRecord, Form 11.30. (For distribution, seeManual Section 5/11.30-80).

The location and method of the calibration ofspeedometers shall be determined by theCommanding Officer, Motor TransportDivision.

TRAFFIC COLLISIONS

405. TRAFFIC COLLISIONTERMINOLOGY.

405.10 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS. Thefollowing terms and definitions shall apply tothe investigation and reporting of trafficcollisions:

Traffic Collision. A traffic collision is anunintentional occurrence in which themovement of a conveyance causes death,injury, or property damage.

Note: Accidents involving conveyances beingused as industrial machinery or engaged inauthorized sporting events are not trafficcollisions.

Conveyance. A conveyance is any device bywhich persons or property may be propelled,moved, or drawn from place to place. Includedare motor vehicles, trains, animals underhuman control, and bicycles.

Trafficway. A trafficway is a publiclymaintained route open to the use of the publicfor the purpose of vehicular and pedestriantravel, extending from property line to propertyline, including sidewalks, parkways, androadways. Highway, street, and trafficway aresynonymous.

Note: A private road shall be considered atrafficway when it is open to through publictravel and joins at each end with a trafficway.

Roadway. A roadway is that portion of atrafficway ordinarily used for vehicular travelonly.

Non-trafficway. A non-trafficway is public orprivate property of a type neither designatednor normally used as a trafficway.

City Property Involved. A traffic collision is"City Property Involved" when one or more ofthe following is involved:

∗ A City employee acting within the scope ofhis employment.

∗ Damage to property owned, maintained, orcontracted by the City.

∗ Any possibility of City liability resultingfrom the actions of any involved partybeing influenced by City property or a Cityemployee acting within the scope of hisemployment.

∗ Water in the roadway other than fromprecipitation run off.

Note: Investigating officers shall identify thesource of the water and determine how it mayhave contributed to the collision.

Injury. Injury is any bodily harm that is inneed of first aid or the attention of a physician.It is not necessary that treatment or first aid bereceived. An injury need not be apparent, butmay be a complaint of pain without visiblesigns of injury.

Party. A party is a driver of a conveyance, thelast driver of a parked or unattended vehicle, ora pedestrian who is directly involved in atraffic collision.

Witness. A witness is any person, other than aparty, who has any pertinent informationregarding a traffic collision.

Property-Other. Property, other thanconveyances, which sustains damage as theresult of a traffic collision shall be considered"property-other."

410. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURESAT SCENE OF TRAFFIC COLLISIONS.410.05 DUTIES OF FIRST OFFICERARRIVING AT SCENE. The first officer toarrive at the scene of a traffic collision shall:

∗ If necessary, summon an ambulance.∗ If necessary, render first aid.∗ Protect involved vehicles, personal

property, and persons using the trafficway(Manual Section 4/208.10).

∗ Notify the CHP, via CommunicationsDivision, when the location is within theCHP's area of responsibility.

410.15 INVESTIGATION-RESPONSIBILITY OF ASSIGNED UNIT.A unit assigned a traffic collision call shall beresponsible for completing the investigationand the necessary reports unless advised by the

communications control operator that the callhas been reassigned or canceled.

An officer investigating a traffic collision shallensure that a supervisor is dispatched to thescene when an accident involves:

∗ On-duty Department personnel and resultsin death or serious injury to any involvedperson.

∗ An aircraft accident results in death, seriousinjury, or extensive property damage.

∗ Other circumstances which indicate theneed for immediate follow-up investigation.

412. SPECIALIZED COLLISIONINVESTIGATION DETAIL. TheSpecialized Collision Investigation Detail(SCID) is responsible for the reconstructionand analysis of contributory traffic collisionfactors. The Specialized Collision InvestigationDetail shall be requested in any of thefollowing incidents:

∗ Any City-owned or City-mileage vehicleinvolved in a fatal or "A" injury trafficcollision, including "City property involvedby influence" collisions.

∗ Any traffic collision resulting in a fatalinjury which may result in a felony criminalprosecution where the investigation isbeyond the scope of the investigatingofficer's expertise.

∗ Any major unusual traffic occurrence that isbeyond the expertise of the concernedgeographic traffic bureau.

The traffic division watch commander or on-call traffic division detective of the concernedgeographic bureau shall contact the Officer inCharge, Traffic Coordination Section, forapproval prior to requesting the SCID.

Note: When Traffic Coordination Section isclosed, the Watch Commander, DetectiveSupport Division, shall be notified and shallcontact the Officer in Charge, TrafficCoordination Section.

415. TRAFFIC COLLISIONREPORTING REQUIREMENTS.415.05 REPORTABLE TRAFFICCOLLISION. A traffic collision report shallbe completed when a traffic collision involvesone or more of the following:

∗ Death;∗ Injury;∗ Hit and Run;∗ CPI;∗ DUI; and,∗ Traffic felony.

Note: The investigation of school bus trafficcollisions by officers of this Department shallbe limited to those accidents that are within theDepartment's standard traffic collisionreporting policy when the involved school buswas not transporting students or activelyloading or unloading students at the time of theaccident. Department personnel at the scene ofa school bus traffic collision which is not the



investigative responsibility of this Departmentshall notify the CHP and stand by until CHPpersonnel arrive.

Exception: Trains, animals, and/or bicycles(Manual Section 4/430.25).

415.07 CLASSIFICATION OF TRAFFICCOLLISIONS AND FORMS REQUIRED.An officer assigned a Traffic Collision callshall conduct a preliminary investigation todetermine whether the occurrence requires aClass II (minor) or Class I (in-depth)investigation.

∗ A Class II investigation requires completionof a CHP, Form 555. If more space isrequired a CHP, Form 556 shall be used;and,

∗ A Class I investigation requires completionof CHP, Form 555, and a MunicipalSupplement, Form 4.03.1.

415.10 CLASS I TRAFFIC COLLISIONINVESTIGATION CRITERIA. A Class ITraffic Collision Investigation shall beconducted when a traffic collision investigatedat the scene involves one or more of thefollowing:

∗ Death;∗ "A" Injury;∗ Traffic felony;∗ Unbooked DUI driver;∗ All CPI vehicles and/or a possibility of City

liability;∗ H&R Misdemeanor with Follow-up

possibility (complete H&R vehicle licensenumber or distinctive vehicle description,i.e. business name;)

∗ Unusual incident as defined in ManualSection 4/214.50; and,

∗ Complex circumstances which cannot beadequately reported with a Class IIInvestigation.

415.15 CLASS II TRAFFIC COLLISIONINVESTIGATION CRITERIA. A Class IITraffic Collision Investigation shall becompleted when a Class I investigation is notrequired.

415.20 PROPERTY DAMAGE ONLY(PDO) TRAFFIC COLLISION. Officers atthe scene of a PDO traffic collision shall:

∗ Assist in clearing the scene;∗ Verify that a correct exchange of

information has taken place, or issue eachinvolved party a Traffic CollisionInformation, Form 4.37;

∗ Inform the involved parties regarding therequirement for submission of the StateForm SR-1 to the Department of MotorVehicles; and,

∗ Inform the involved parties that a trafficcollision report is neither required nor willbe taken by this Department.

Note: An officer receiving a citizen request forpolice presence at the scene of a propertydamage only traffic collision shall use the

criteria established for the reporting of trafficcollisions (Manual Section 4/415.05) todetermine if a police unit should be dispatched.

415.25 DAMAGE TO UNATTENDEDPROPERTY. When the owner or person inpossession of property damaged in a trafficcollision cannot be located, a CHP, Form555.03, shall be used to record the followinginformation only:

∗ Date and time reported;∗ Date and time of occurrence, if known;∗ Point of impact;∗ Name, address, phone number, and driver's

license number of each known party;∗ Year, make, model, color and license

number of known vehicles; and,∗ All information known concerning the

unattended property.

A copy of the original report shall be given tothe reporting party. A copy shall be left in aconspicuous place on the vehicle or otherdamaged property. No DR number shall beobtained. Field officers shall attach the reportto their log. Desk officers shall forward thereport to their watch commander. "UnattendedPDO T/C" shall be written at the top of thereport. The watch commander shall cause all"Unattended PDO T/C" reports to beforwarded to the concerned traffic division.

420. PARTIES AND WITNESSES TOTRAFFIC COLLISIONS.420.05 INFORMATION TO PARTIESINVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISIONS.An officer conducting an investigation of atraffic collision shall:

Traffic Collision Report CHP, Form 555.03.

∗ When practicable, give a copy of the CHP,Form 555.03 (complete or not) to allavailable parties.

Traffic Collision Information, Form 4.37.

∗ If no report is taken, or a copy of the CHP,Form 555 is not given, give a 4.37 to eachparty and verify that a correct exchange ofinformation has been made.

∗ Leave a 4.37 with Property-Other partieswhen no CHP, Form 555 copy is available;e.g., two vehicle or pedestrian partiesinvolved.

Advice on All Traffic Collisions.

∗ Refrain from suggesting that insurance rateswill be affected by the reporting of thetraffic collision.

∗ Refrain from indicating to the partieswhether the property damage or injuries do,or do not, necessitate a report to theDepartment of Motor Vehicles as specifiedin Vehicle Code Section 16000. (Refer theparties to their insurance agents or to thelocal DMV office.)

∗ Refer parties wishing to obtain the FinancialResponsibility Report, DMV Form SR1 toan insurance agent, automobile club, the

Department of Motor Vehicles, or anypolice station.

420.10 SOBRIETY OF PARTIES TO ATRAFFIC COLLISION. An officerinvestigating a traffic collision involving asuspected under-the-influence driver shallfollow procedures prescribed in ManualSection 4/343.

420.15 ARMED FORCES PERSONNELINVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISION.When Armed Forces personnel involved in atraffic collision are killed, or are injured to theextent that they require hospitalization, theinvestigating officer shall notify theDepartment Command Post, CommunicationsDivision. Armed Forces personnel shallinclude:

∗ Regular members of the Army, Navy, AirForce, Marine Corps, and Coast Guard, andreservists who are on active duty.

∗ Civilian employees of the Armed Forceswhile acting within the scope of theiremployment.

420.20 JUVENILES INVOLVED INTRAFFIC COLLISION. The followinginformation shall be obtained when a juvenileis a party to a reportable traffic collision, orwhen a provable traffic violation on the part ofa juvenile witness is established:

∗ Full name and address of natural mother andfather, even if divorced; or if deceased, thename only.

∗ Name and address of step-parents.∗ Name and address of legal guardian.∗ Name and address of the juvenile's spouse.∗ Name and address of a person with whom

the juvenile is presently living, if other thanany of the above.

∗ Juvenile's date of birth.

The applicable information shall be included inthe appropriate traffic collision report.

420.25 TRAFFIC COLLISIONINVESTIGATION. When an on-duty officerobserves or is notified by a citizen of areportable traffic collision, the officer shallnotify Communications Division and request atraffic unit be assigned to investigate theaccident. When the officer is assigned to atraffic division, he/she shall notifyCommunications Division and, if available,investigate the traffic collision. If no trafficcollision units are available, or when directedby Communications Division, the officer shallinvestigate the accident.

420.30 WITNESSING OFFICERSASSIGNED A TRAFFIC COLLISIONINVESTIGATION. When officers who havewitnessed a reportable traffic collision(Manual Section 4/415.05) are assigned theinvestigation they shall:

∗ Complete the investigation and reports;∗ List themselves as witnesses and include

their statements in the traffic collisionreport; and,



∗ Use the traffic collision report to requestprosecution for all violations witnessed bythem or disclosed by the investigation.

Exception: A witnessing officer shallcomplete a Narrative Supplement, Form 556when the accident involves a Departmentemployee or vehicle (direct or by influence).

Note: Officers witnessing a non-reportabletraffic collision involving a Vehicle Codeviolation may issue a traffic citation (TrafficNotice to Appear) or take other appropriateenforcement action.

420.35 ASSIGNMENT OF TRAFFICCOLLISION CALL TONON-WITNESSING OFFICER. When theinvestigation of a traffic collision witnessed byan officer is assigned to a non-witnessingofficer, the investigating officer shall completethe investigation and, if necessary, theappropriate reports. If a traffic collision reportis completed, the investigating officer shall:

∗ List the witnessing officer as a witness andinclude his/her statements in the trafficcollision report.

∗ Obtain a completed Narrative Supplemental,Form from the witnessing officer when theaccident involves a Department employeeor vehicle.

Note: If a violation was observed, thewitnessing officer may cite or take otherappropriate enforcement action, or theinvestigating officer may use the trafficcollision report to request prosecution forviolations established by the investigation.

The traffic collision report shall be used torequest prosecution of a person other than adriver arrested for misdemeanor driving underthe influence when the elements of a trafficviolation are established by either:

∗ Statements of a competent person; or∗ A combination of statements and physical

evidence, when no citation is issued.

Note: A traffic citation shall not be issued byan off-duty officer involved in or witnessing atraffic collision.

430. TRAFFIC COLLISIONINVESTIGATIVE AND REPORTINGPROCEDURES.430.05 REPORTING TRAFFICCOLLISIONS NOT INVESTIGATED ATSCENE. When a report is taken at a locationother than at the scene of a traffic collision, adesk officer or other officer assigned shallobtain the reporting person's name and the dateand location of the accident. After obtainingthis information, the officer shall telephone theCrime and Miscellaneous Reports Section,Records and Identification Division, todetermine whether the report is original orsupplemental.

Original Report. When the report is anoriginal, the report taken shall be the same aswould be taken if the accident had been

investigated at the scene (Manual Sections4/415.10 and 4/415.15).

Note: An accident investigation supervisorshall be contacted for advice prior tocompleting a Traffic Collision Report when thetraffic collision involves death, an allegedtraffic felony, a Department employee orvehicle, or any possibility of City liability.

Supplemental Report. When the report issupplemental and a statement of the reportingperson is required, the DR number shall beobtained; and the officer shall complete aNarrative Supplemental, CHP Form 556.

430.10 DANGEROUS SUBSTANCESINVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISIONS.When a traffic collision occurs involvingradioactive materials, explosives, flammablesubstances, hazardous chemicals, or otherdangerous materials, the officer at the sceneshall:

∗ Keep all persons and conveyances at a safedistance from the substance, liquid run-off,or gaseous vapor;

∗ Immediately cause Detective SupportDivision to be notified in cases involvingradioactive materials (Manual Section4/214.25); and,

∗ Request assistance from the FireDepartment in cases involving explosives,flammable substances, hazardous chemicalsor other dangerous materials. In thatrequest, officers shall provide the following:

∗ Type of substance i.e., flammable, toxic,chemical, etc.;

∗ Complete chemical name of thesubstance; and,

∗ Whether substance is spilled or leaking.

Note: Caution must be exercised in the use offlares to protect the accident scene. Officersshall evaluate the circumstances to ensure thatthe flares do not inadvertently act as a sourceof ignition.

430.25 BICYCLES, ANIMALS, ANDTRAINS INVOLVED IN TRAFFICCOLLISIONS. The following are subject totraffic collision reporting requirements in thesame manner as motor vehicles:

∗ Trains and animals, either ridden or driven,when on a trafficway.

∗ Bicycles, when on a roadway or a pavedshoulder.

Exception: A traffic collision report is notrequired in cases involving only the element ofa rider falling from a bicycle or animal.

Unattended animals injured or killed wheninvolved with a moving conveyance on atrafficway shall be classified as "property-other."

Non-trafficway Occurrence. A trafficcollision report is not required when a bicycle,animal, or train is involved in a non-trafficwayoccurrence unless one of the following is alsoinvolved;

∗ City property.∗ A moving motor vehicle and the occurrence

qualifies as a reportable traffic collision(Manual Section 4/415.05).

430.26 LOS ANGELES COUNTYMETROPOLITAN TRANSITAUTHORITY (LACMTA) BLUE, GOLDOR GREEN LINE INVOLVED INTRAFFIC COLLISION. In the event of atraffic collision (T/C) involving theLACMTA’s Metro Blue, Gold and GreenLines, a field supervisor shall respond andserve as a liaison between LASD and LAPDtraffic units. When LAPD traffic units areunavailable, or delayed, any patrol unit may beassigned to initiate the investigation of MetroBlue Line traffic collisions. Commercialfreight and passenger rail lines (such asSouthern Pacific, Union Pacific, Amtrak, etc.)also operate within the City limits. Calls forservice from theses lines will be dispatched tothe appropriate Area patrol units.

Note: The Department shall continue toinvestigate light rail and bus-involved trafficcollisions within the City. Los AngelesCounty Sheriff’s Department will investigatetraffic collisions or other accidents occurringon an LACMTA right-of-way, but not at astreet intersection.

430.30 TRAFFIC VIOLATIONINVOLVED. An officer shall complete atraffic collision report when investigation atthe scene of a traffic collision establishes aprovable traffic offense on the part of anyperson. The traffic collision report shall beused to request prosecution of a person otherthan a driver arrested for misdemeanor drivingunder the influence when the elements of atraffic violation are established by either:

∗ Statements of a competent person orpersons; or,

∗ A combination of statements and physicalevidence.

Note: No report is required when a citation isissued for a violation observed by an on-dutyofficer and the violation is the onlyrequirement for a report.

430.37 TRAFFIC VIOLATIONWITNESSED BY OFFICER AT SCENEOF TRAFFIC COLLISION. An officerissuing a citation (Traffic Notice to Appear) fora traffic violation committed by a personinvolved in a traffic collision witnessed by theofficer shall ensure that:

∗ All essential elements of the violation havebeen observed by the officer; and,

∗ No other requirement for a traffic collisionreport is present.

Note: A traffic citation shall not be issued byan off-duty officer involved in or witnessing atraffic collision. When applicable, prosecutionmay be requested by application for complaintor by use of the traffic collision report.



Reporting Procedure. A traffic collisionwitnessed by an officer does not require atraffic collision report when:

∗ A traffic violation committed by a personinvolved in the traffic collision is the onlyrequirement for a traffic collision report;and,

∗ A citation has been issued for the violation.

430.38 DEPARTMENT MOUNTEDUNIT INVOLVED IN TRAFFICCOLLISION. Horses being used as part of theDepartment's Mounted Unit shall beconsidered as a CPI traffic collision when:

∗ The horse is being ridden by an on-dutyofficer and its motion causes injury orproperty damage; or,

∗ The horse is being transported between theboarding location and the location wherethe horse is to be used for City business andit causes or sustains damage or injury.

Note: If the horse is being used in a tacticalsituation, e.g., crowd control, and it causesinjury, only an Injury Report, Form 3.15, isrequired. A deliberate act, i.e., thrown rock,resulting in movement of a horse which causesinjury or damage is not a traffic collision. Theappropriate crime report shall be completed.

430.40 ILLEGALLY PARKEDVEHICLES INVOLVED IN TRAFFICCOLLISION. An investigating officerinitiating enforcement for an illegally parked,unattended vehicle involved in a trafficcollision shall:

∗ Ensure that the violation is not a result ofthe traffic collision;

∗ Issue an absentee parking citation; and,∗ Include the information regarding the

citation in the traffic collision report.

Note: When a parking violation is the onlyrequirement for a report and a citation is issuedfor the violation, a traffic collision report is notrequired (Manual Section 4/430.37).

430.45 PHOTOGRAPHS AT SCENE OFTRAFFIC COLLISIONS. An officerinvestigating a traffic collision shall causephotographs to be taken depicting damage orlack of damage, and other pertinent detailswhen:

∗ Photographs would be of evidential value;or,

∗ Photographs would be of value in the trafficeducation program; or,

∗ City property is involved; or,∗ A fatality or near-fatality occurs.

When a unit not equipped with a camera isassigned to investigate a traffic collisionrequiring photographs, a collision investigationunit shall be requested to take the photographs.

430.50 HIT-AND-RUN TRAFFICCOLLISION. An officer shall conduct aninvestigation and complete an appropriatetraffic collision report when a traffic collision

results in property damage or personal injuryand the elements of hit-and-run are indicated.

Broadcasts. An officer at the scene of ahit-and-run traffic collision shall, withoutdelay, obtain and broadcast any availabledescription of a hit-and-run driver andconveyance when:

∗ Hit-and-run felony is indicated; or,∗ A hit-and-run misdemeanor driver is

suspected of being under the influence of anintoxicant; or,

∗ Extensive property damage has occurred.

Teletypes. A supervisor shall be contactedregarding the sending of a local teletype whenhit-and-run is involved. An investigatingofficer shall contact:

∗ A South Traffic Division supervisor whenthe accident occurred in a South BureauArea.

∗ A Central Traffic Division supervisor whenthe accident occurred in a Central BureauArea.

∗ A West Traffic Division supervisor whenthe accident occurred in a West BureauArea.

∗ A Valley Traffic Division supervisor whenthe accident occurred in a Valley BureauArea.

430.55 NON-CONTACT TRAFFICCOLLISION. An incident shall be considereda non-contact traffic collision when it isalleged that an illegal or negligent act of anyperson not directly involved is the proximatecause of a traffic collision and an independentwitness or other substantiates the involvement.

When a hit-and-run driver and/or vehicle hasbeen identified, they shall be listed as a partyon page one of the California Highway Patrol(CHP) Form 555, and the hit-and-run box shallbe checked if applicable. If the traffic collisionis reportable (Manual Section 4/415.05), thesuspected person, when known, shall be listedon the traffic collision report as a party.Statements of persons substantiating thenon-contact involvement shall be included inthe traffic collision report.

430.60 IMPOUNDING VEHICLEINVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISION. Anofficer impounding a vehicle involved in atraffic collision shall follow proceduresprescribed in Manual Section 4/220.

432. TRAFFIC COLLISION INJURYCLASSIFICATION.432.10 INJURY CLASSIFICATION-CRITERIA. Traffic collision injuries shall beclassified as follows:

∗ ‘A’ Injury. Major injury. Any serious,incapacitating injury which normallyrequires hospitalization, other than forobservation, and prevents the victim fromwalking or driving.

∗ ‘B’ Injury. Non-incapacitating injury. Anyvisible injury, other than fatal orincapacitating.

∗ ‘C’ Injury. Momentary unconsciousness orcomplaint of pain without visible signs ofinjury.

∗ ‘K’ Injury. An injury which results indeath.

432.20 INJURY CLASSIFICATION-RESPONSIBILITY FOR. Injuryclassification shall be determined by thereporting officer on the basis of informationavailable at the scene of the accident or at thetime of the initial follow-up at a medicalfacility. Injury classification shall not bechanged on any copy of the original trafficreport after the report has been distributed.

Note: A field officer who receives a deathnotification after the distribution of the TrafficCollision Report shall not change the injuryclassification.

433. COMBINED TRAFFICCOLLISION AND ARREST REPORT.433.05 TRAFFIC RELATED ARREST-DEFINED. A traffic related arrest is an arrestfor which the follow-up investigation is theresponsibility of Traffic Division CollisionInvestigation Sections (Manual Section2/535.20).

433.10 REPORTING OFFICERRESPONSIBILITY. Officers conducting aClass I Traffic Collision investigation whichresults in a traffic-related arrest shall combinethe reporting of the incident. The combinedtraffic collision and arrest report shall consistof:

∗ An Arrest Report, Form 5.2;∗ A Class I Traffic Collision Investigation,

CHP Forms 555, 556, and MunicipalSupplement 4.03.1; and, if applicable,

∗ A Driving-Under-The-Influence (DUI)Arrest Report Continuation, Form 5.2.5.

Note: Supervisors may approve completion ofthe arrest and traffic collision reportsseparately, when unusual circumstances makethe use of the combined reporting procedureimpractical. When the combined reportingprocedure is not used, the traffic collisionreport and the arrest report shall be approvedby the same supervisor.

433.15 COMPLETION OF THEREPORTArrest Report. All reports shall be completedin the usual manner except that the ArrestReport, Form 5.2, shall be modified as follows:

∗ "Combined Traffic Collision/Arrest Report"shall be written in the top right margin.

∗ The "Crime Report Box" shall be checked.∗ In the "Victim's Name Box," the name of an

injured person other than Party 1 shall beentered.

Note: If there are no injuries, the name of



Party 2 shall be entered in the "Victim's NameBox."

∗ "See Traffic Collision Report" shall bewritten in the "Involved Persons Section."

∗ The only entries in the "Combined CrimeReport Section" shall be "Traffic" in the"Type of Offense Box," and the appropriateinformation in the "Date and Time CrimeOccurred Box."

The DUI Continuation, if used, shall bear thenotation "See Traffic Collision Report" in the"Narrative Section."

Arrest Narrative. The arrest narrative shall bewritten in the "Remarks" heading of the TrafficCollision Report. The circumstances of thearrest will be recorded in the usual mannerincluding headings for:

∗ Source of activity;∗ Investigation;∗ Observations;∗ Arrest;∗ Injuries;∗ Booking;∗ Evidence;∗ Photographs; and,∗ Additional Information.

Corrections. Subsequent to the distribution ofthe report by the Area records unit, correctionsshall be made on the Narrative SupplementalCHP, Form 556.

Exception: If the "Charge" indicated on theArrest Report is to be changed, the Follow-UpInvestigation Form 3.14, shall be used.

Numbering Combined Traffic Collision andArrest Report Pages. The pages of the trafficcollision and arrest portions of the combinedtraffic collision and arrest report shall benumbered separately.

A complete Class I Traffic Collision Reportshall be completed and pages numbered in thenormal manner.

The arrest report pages shall be numbered asfollows:

∗ Arrest Report, Form 5.2 shall be numberedpage 1.

∗ When applicable, the Driving-Under-The-Influence (DUI) Arrest ReportContinuation, Form 5.2.5, shall benumbered pages 2 and 3.

Note: Any additional forms such as, the IR3000 DFC Operator Checklist, Form 5.20.7, orforms associated with Administrative Per SeOrder of Suspension shall be attached to thearrest pages and numbered consecutively.

433.20 SUPERVISOR’SRESPONSIBILITY. When the arrest is for afelony, a supervisor from the concerned trafficdivision shall approve the combined trafficcollision and arrest report and all other reportsrelated to the incident. When the arrest is for amisdemeanor, a supervisor from the Area of

occurrence may approve the report and anyrelated reports.

Note: If separate reports are completed, boththe traffic collision and the arrest report shallbe approved by the same supervisor (ManualSection 4/433.10).

Supervisors shall ensure that the combinedtraffic collision and arrest report is processedas specified in Department Manual Sections4/415, 4/420, 4/433, 4/440, 5/5.1, and 5/5.2.

435. TRAFFIC DEATHS.435.05 PROCEDURE AT SCENE OFFATAL TRAFFIC COLLISION. An officerassigned to investigate a traffic collision whichresulted in a death shall:

∗ Immediately request the communicationscontrol operator to dispatch a trafficsupervisor. If a traffic supervisor is notavailable, request a patrol supervisor.

∗ Allow no one to search the body, exceptCoroner's deputies and obtain a receipt fromthe Deputy Coroner when personal effectsare removed from the body.

∗ Contact a traffic supervisor for advicebefore releasing drivers involved in thetraffic collision.

∗ Cause photographs to be taken of the victimat the scene.

Note: If the deceased died as a result of atraffic collision, officers may search the bodyfor a universal donor's card only. That card isnormally attached to or kept with the driver'slicense.

435.10 REPORTING TRAFFICDEATHS. The officer originally charged withthe investigation of a traffic collision shall beresponsible for completing a Death Report,Form 3.11, for a death resulting from a trafficcollision when the victim is dead at the sceneor dies while the officer is on the same tour ofduty.

Investigating Officer Not Available. Whenthe officer originally charged with theinvestigation has reported end-of-watch, thedeath report for a death resulting from a trafficcollision shall be completed by the concernedbureau accident investigation follow-up unit.

435.15 NOTIFICATION TO NEXT OFKIN OF DECEASED TRAFFIC VICTIM.The officer assigned to the initial investigationof a fatal traffic collision shall cause thedeceased person's next of kin to be notified.Whenever practicable, notification shall bemade in person by the investigating officer. Ifthe next of kin lives in another Area, a policeunit of that Area shall be requested to make apersonal notification. The Coroner shall berequested to make the notification if thedeceased person's relatives live outside theCity.

Generally, an in-person notification is thepreferred method of informing the next of kinof a death. However, circumstances may

indicate a need for an alternative method ofmaking such a notification (e.g.,telephonically). Officers should use their bestjudgement in making a determination as to themethod of notification to the next of kin of adeceased person.

437. COLLISION INVESTIGATIONFOLLOW-UP.437.10 FOLLOW-UP INVESTIGATINGOFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITY. Whennotified that a traffic collision has occurred, theconcerned investigating officer shall determinewhether immediate follow-up investigation isrequired. When appropriate, he/she shallrespond and direct the investigation.

437.20 OFFICER IN CHARGE OF THECOLLISION INVESTIGATIONFOLLOW-UP UNIT-RESPONSIBILITY.The officer in charge of a collisioninvestigation follow-up unit shall forward aroster of on-call investigating officers to theAdministrative Unit, Detective SupportDivision, on a weekly basis.

440. CITY PROPERTY-INVOLVEDTRAFFIC COLLISION.440.10 DUTIES OF EMPLOYEESINVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISION.When employees, including members of thePolice Reserve Corps, becomes directlyinvolved in or participate in events leading toa traffic collision while operating or riding ina City-owned vehicle or acting within thescope of their official duties, employees shall:

∗ Immediately request a communicationscontrol operator to dispatch a collisioninvestigation unit and a supervisor to thescene (Manual Section 3/206).

∗ Cooperate with the concerned investigativeagency dispatched to the scene. Wheninvestigating officers are from an agencyother than this Department, Departmentemployee's statements concerning theirinvolvement shall only include theirpersonal identification, registrationinformation for the vehicle they are in, anda description of their direction of travel.Information relating to the conduct ofDepartment employees shall be regarded asconfidential for the use of the CityAttorney. Complete statements as to theidentity, actions, and statements of personsother than Department employees may bemade.

∗ Comply with local ordinances and VehicleCode provisions relating to trafficcollisions.

∗ Complete a Narrative Supplemental CHP,Form 556.

Note: An officer involved in a CPI trafficcollision shall use the address and telephonenumber of his/her area of assignment in thecompletion of the Traffic Collision Report.

Accident Occurring Outside the City. Whenthe accident occurred outside the City and a



Los Angeles Police Department accidentinvestigation unit is not dispatched to thescene, the involved employee shall:

∗ Complete the necessary traffic collisionreports upon his return to the City; and,

∗ Notify the Liability Section, City Attorney'sOffice, when the accident results in injury,death, or serious property damage. When itis impractical to notify the City Attorney'sOffice, the notification shall be made to theWatch Commander, Detective SupportDivision, who shall notify the watchcommander at the employee's Area ofassignment and the City Attorney's Office.

440.20 ADVISING OTHER PARTIESWHEN DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEEINVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISION.When an employee is involved in an accidentwith a person not a member of thisDepartment, the employee shall urge theperson to remain at the scene of the accidentuntil the arrival of a collision investigationunit. If the person insists upon leaving thescene, the employee shall obtain:

∗ The person's name and address.∗ The location where he/she may be

interviewed.∗ The license number of his/her vehicle.∗ The number of his/her driver's license or

other valid identification.

440.25 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'SDUTIES WHEN CITY PROPERTYINVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISION. Anofficer conducting an investigation at the sceneof a City-property-involved traffic collisionshall:

∗ Request that a supervisor be dispatched tothe scene, if none has been requested, whenthe accident involved Department-owned oroperated equipment, or a Departmentemployee (Manual Section 3/206).

∗ Notify a supervisor when the accidentinvolves on-duty Department personnel anddeath or serious injury result to anyinvolved person.

∗ Take photographs depicting the extent ofdamage or lack of damage, and otherpertinent details.

∗ Complete the necessary reports.

Note: The Traffic Collision Report, CHP,Form 555, shall be processed as an internalreport only (similar to an Employee’s Report,Form 15.7) when:

∗ There are no injuries;∗ All vehicles and "property other" parties

involved are owned by the City of LosAngeles;

∗ The accident involves minor propertydamage (small dents or paint transfer)only; and,

∗ A supervisor's approval has beenobtained.

∗ Include seat belt information.

∗ Ensure that the traffic reports are marked"CPI."

∗ Notify the Liability Section, City Attorney'sOffice, by telephone when the accidentresults in an injury, no matter how slight, toa person other than a City employee.

Exception: The City Attorney's Office neednot be contacted when property of theDepartment of Airports, Harbor Department, orDepartment of Water and Power is the onlyCity property involved in a traffic collision.

Investigation Criteria. A Class II (ManualSection 4/415.07) City-property-involvedtraffic investigation may be conducted wherethere is property damage between a Cityvehicle and a parked, unattended vehicle orany other property when the following criteriaare met.

∗ There is a minor property damage only;∗ There are no injuries;∗ A traffic supervisor has been called to the

scene and has given approval for a Class IIinvestigation;

∗ Photographs depicting the extent of damageor lack of damage and other pertinentdetails are taken; and,

∗ Party and/or witness statements are includedin the narrative.

Exception: When the party and/or witness isan on-duty employee or on-duty PoliceReserve Officer all statements shall beincluded on the Narrative Supplemental, CHPForm.

Note: The approving supervisor's name andserial number shall be included in the narrativeof the Class II report.

On-Duty Officer Involved in TrafficCollision. When an on-duty peace officer orfirefighter operating an authorized emergencyvehicle is involved in a traffic collision, theinvestigating officer shall complete the"Special Conditions" box, CHP, Form 555, byincluding the following information:

∗ The officer's or firefighter's vehicleinvolvement number, i.e., V-1 or V-2, etc.,and,

∗ The words "on-duty, emergency vehicle"(abbreviate if necessary).

Supervisor’s Responsibility: The supervisorapproving an on-duty peace officer involvedtraffic collision report shall ensure that theinformation in the Special Conditions box iscompleted prior to approving the report.

Note: For the purposes of reporting, anAuthorized Emergency Vehicle is any State ormunicipally-owned vehicle operated by anon-duty peace officer or firefighter in theperformance of his/her duty.

440.26 CORRECTIONS TO OFFICERS'DRIVING RECORDS EMPLOYEE -RESPONSIBILITY. A sworn employeewhose driving record improperly reflects anon-duty traffic collision may correct the error

by completing an Employee's Report, Form15.7, and submitting it to his/her supervisor forapproval. The form 15.7 shall contain:

∗ The sworn employee's full name, serialnumber, division of assignment andCalifornia driver's license number;

∗ The date and location of traffic collision inquestion; and,

∗ The Division of Records (DR) number forthe reported traffic collision.

Watch Commander/Supervisor’s Responsibility. The watch commander orsupervisor reviewing the Employee's Report,Form 15.7, shall review the report forcompleteness and ensure the report isforwarded to the Fleet Safety Coordinator,Traffic Coordination Section.

Fleet Safety Coordinator/TrafficCoordination Section Responsibility. TheFleet Safety Coordinator, Traffic CoordinationSection, shall verify the traffic collisionoccurred on-duty, shall assist the swornemployee with compiling any requireddocumentation and will initiate all relatedcorrespondence to DMV.

440.27 CPI TRAFFIC COLLISIONS ONCITY FREEWAYS. CommunicationsDivision will be notified by the CHP when aCPI traffic collision has occurred on a freewaywithin the City. Department personnel assignedto investigate the accident shall cooperate withthe CHP investigators at the scene but shallmaintain the confidential nature of theDepartment reports.

440.45 REPORTING DEPARTMENTEMPLOYEE TRAFFIC COLLISIONS TOTHE DEPARTMENT OF MOTORVEHICLES. When an employee, including amember of the Police Reserve Corps, becomesinvolved in a traffic collision while operatinga City-owned or mileage vehicle, the employeeshall not submit reports to DMV regardingfinancial responsibility. Employees receivingcorrespondence from DMV concerning atraffic collision shall forward thecorrespondence, without entries, to the ChiefInvestigator, Liability Section, City Attorney'sOffice.

440.50 NOTIFYING CITY ATTORNEYWHEN CITY PROPERTY INVOLVED INTRAFFIC COLLISION. Notification to theLiability Section, City Attorney's Office, shallinclude:

∗ Names of employees involved, and theirassignments;

∗ Locations at which employees can bereached;

∗ Names of other persons involved;∗ A description of the accident and the

investigation;∗ The identity of persons injured, and the

extent of injuries; and,∗ The type and extent of property damage.

When the Liability Section is closed, the City



Hall switchboard operator shall be requested totransfer the call to the home of the persondesignated by the City Attorney to receivesuch calls. The date and time that thenotification was made and the name of theperson notified shall be included in the trafficcollision report.

BOOKING, CUSTODY ANDDISPOSITION OF

PROPERTY

501. AUTOMATED PROPERTYINFORMATION MANAGEMENTSYSTEM (APIMS).

501.10 APIMS. The Automated PropertyInformation Management System (APIMS), isthe system used for the booking, tracking, anddisposal of property.

501.20 APIMS CONFIDENTIALITY. Forthose instances which require the booking ofproperty to be confidential, the booking officershall include the words, “ConfidentialBooking,” in large letters on the first line of theProperty Report, Form 10.1. Access to anyconfidential booking information is restrictedto Property Division personnel and theconcerned investigating unit’s PropertyDisposition Coordinator.

505. PROPERTYCLASSIFICATIONS.505.10 CLASSIFICATIONS OFPROPERTY. Items entered into theDepartment property system shall be classifiedas follows:

∗ Evidence-items which are or may be relatedto a crime, or which may either implicate orexonerate a person.

∗ Excess Personal Property-non-evidentiarypersonal property of an arrestee whichcannot be packaged in a prisoner's propertypackage or purse.

∗ Non-evidence-property other than evidenceor excess personal property.

505.15 CLASSIFICATIONS OFANALYZED EVIDENCE. Evidence bookedinto the Department's property system shall beclassified as follows:

∗ Analyzed Evidence-Shelf Storage-evidence, other than narcotics, that does notrequire cold storage.

∗ Analyzed Evidence-To Be Refrigerated-whole blood, urine, saliva, etc.

∗ Analyzed Evidence-To Be Frozen-biological evidence (dried blood/semen,swabs/slides/aspirates, etc.).

Exception: The Sexual Assault Evidence Kitshall be booked as one item, to be frozen.

∗ Analyzed Evidence-narcotics.

505.20 RECLASSIFICATION OF NON-EVIDENCE. Non-evidence may be

reclassified to evidence by completion of aFollow-up Report, Form 3.14.

Note: Additional property may not be bookedon a Follow-up Report, Form 3.14.

510. BOOKING PROCEDURE.510.10 BOOKING EVIDENCE ANDNON-EVIDENCE-GENERAL. Theemployee seizing or taking custody ofevidence shall ensure it is properly bookedwithout unnecessary delay.

All property which is to be booked shall beinventoried and listed on the Property Report,Form 10.1. The employee seizing or takingcustody of a closed container shall open thecontainer prior to booking and conduct aninventory search if its contents cannot bedetermined from examining its exterior.Evidence may only be booked by a swornemployee, a Police Service Representative inthe course of his/her official duties, a detentionofficer assigned to Jail Division, or a civilianemployee conducting specialized investigativework. Responsibility for booking evidencemay be assumed by the detective or the civilianinvestigative specialist at the scene.

Employees shall book only the quantities ofevidence necessary for case prosecution. Ininstances when the rightful ownership ofproperty can be readily determined, and caseprosecution will not be jeopardized, theproperty shall be returned to the owner. Whenappropriate, employees shall utilizephotographs in lieu of actual evidence.

Note: If there is a question as to whether ornot photographs will suffice in lieu of actualevidence items, the booking employee shouldseek the advice of a supervisor or theconcerned detective.

Non-evidence shall not be booked into aDepartment storage facility unlesscircumstances necessitate booking of theproperty.

The employee seizing or taking custody ofproperty shall issue a Receipt for PropertyTaken into Custody, Form 10.10 (duplicatecopy), to the person relieved of the property(Manual Sections 4/645.20 and 5/10.10). Theoriginal of the Form 10.10 shall be included asa page of the original Property Report, Form10.1; Release from Custody (RFC) ReportContinuation, Form 5.02.8; or Arrest Report,Form 5.2, when evidence to be booked islisted.

Evidence and non-evidence shall not be storedin the personal possession of any employee,except certain forgery-related evidence(Manual Section 4/570.20).

One copy of the Property Report, Form 10.1,or Release from Custody Report Continuation,Form 5.2.8; or Arrest face sheet, Form 5.2,shall accompany the property when booked.

Exception: Two copies shall accompanynarcotics or firearm bookings, or blood or urinebookings within Operations-Valley Bureau.

It is not necessary to issue the Form 10.10 forblood and urine samples or biological smearspecimens taken from an arrestee or the victimof a crime, nor is it necessary to include theseitems on a Form 10.10 used to list otherproperty taken from an arrestee or victim.

When the finding of non-evidence is reportedand the finder refuses to relinquish custody ofthe property to the Department, theinterviewing employee shall complete aProperty Report, Form 10.1, and make anotation on the report that the property is in thepossession of the finder.

Note: The assigned detectives (Manual Section4/790.) shall ensure that the finder hascomplied with laws governing found property(Civil Code 1020.1, 2080.3; Penal Code 177and 485).

The employee booking property shall, ifcircumstances permit, check identifiableproperty against the Automated PropertySystem and provide information regarding anyreported stolen property in the reports. Thebooking employee shall notify each detectivedivision handling a case involving the bookedproperty by completing the "Extra Copy To"portion of the reports to ensure notification andreport distribution to each detective division.

Note: When an employee recovers propertyfrom an area containing more than one person(i.e., cell, holding tank, etc.), the employeeshall ensure that the detective divisionresponsible for each arrestee is notified usingthe above-referenced procedure.

Investigative officers within the bookingemployee's Area should confer with any otherentity handling a case involving the bookedproperty to determine responsibility fordisposition of the property.

Note: Booking employees shall continue tocheck all firearms against the AutomatedFirearms System (Manual Section 4/540.30)and attach a copy of the printout to theappropriate report.

510.12 BOOKING ANALYZEDEVIDENCE-GENERAL. Evidence to betransported to SID for analysis shall be placedinto the SID Courier temporary storage locker.

Exceptions:

∗ Items too large for temporary storagelockers;

∗ Narcotics seizures in excess of 30 poundsnet weight (Manual Section 4/540.75);

∗ Explosives not considered safe (ManualSection 4/540.20);

∗ Hazardous chemicals or materials (ManualSection 4/212.49);

Note: Compressed gas cylinders shall bebooked at Central or Valley Property Sections.



∗ Toluene-soaked rags or other evidence opento the air requiring special handling(Manual Section 4/515.10); and,

Note: During hours when SID is closed,employees requiring evidence handling orstorage advice shall telephonically contact anSID criminalist via Detective Support Division(DSD).

∗ Any amount of PCP in a container one-halfgallon or larger or a total of one-half gallonor more of PCP (Manual Section 4/540.72).

These lockers shall not be used for temporarystorage of evidence to be booked into the Areaproperty room.

Booking Employee’s Responsibility. Anemployee booking all types of evidence to beanalyzed shall:

∗ Record appropriate information on allrequired envelopes or tags.

∗ Place the evidence in the correctclassification of Laboratory and AnalyzedEvidence Envelope, or tag correctly.

Note: Evidence requiring freezer storage shallbe placed into the SID courier temporarystorage freezer within six (6) hours after beingobtained.

∗ Seal the Analyzed Evidence Envelope witha red Analyzed Evidence Seal, Form10.12.7, over each flap of the requiredenvelope and long the center seam. If theitem to be analyzed is in a carton, box, orwrapped, the seams shall be secured withadhesive tape. Two separate continuouspieces of tape running the length and widthof the package shall be used. An AnalyzedEvidence Seal shall be placed on the topsurface where the tape ends meet (ManualSection 4/535.07). The Property BookingGuide contains additional information.

Note: The packaging of any item which onlyrequires latent print analysis shall be clearlymarked "Hold for Prints" and booked into aProperty Division facility, Area property room,or Area property room interim storage if theproperty room is closed. If an investigatingofficer determines that fingerprint analysis isrequired, a telephonic request for the analysisshall be made to SID. Scientific InvestigationDivision shall make arrangements withProperty Division for the SID courier totransport the item for analysis.

Following supervisory approval of packagingand related reports, the booking employeeshall:

∗ Place the evidence and reports into theappropriate SID courier temporary storagelocker; and,

Note: Entry into any of the SID temporarystorage lockers is restricted to an on-dutysupervisor and shall be witnessed by anothersworn employee.

∗ Complete the Analyzed Evidence ControlLog.

Note: Personnel assigned to specializeddivisions or sections shall use Area SID couriertemporary storage locker facilities. Specializeddivision personnel shall notify the Area watchcommander prior to placing any property in thestorage locker. If there is insufficient space inthe SID courier temporary storage locker, or ifdistance precludes use of Area facilities,evidence shall be taken directly to theEvidence Control Unit (ECU) for booking.When the ECU is closed, such evidence shallbe transported to Central or Valley PropertySections.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. The supervisorreviewing the evidence to be analyzed shall:

∗ Ensure the evidence is properly packagedand, if a firearm, properly cleared;

∗ Place all evidence to be analyzed into theSID courier temporary storage locker andsecure the locker;

∗ Review related reports for accuracy ofcompletion; and,

∗ Upon approval of packaging and reports,sign the Analyzed Evidence Control Logsignifying readiness of the evidence forcourier pick up and analysis.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Thewatch commander of an Area or facility withSID courier temporary storage lockers shall:

∗ At the start of each watch, inventory anyevidence in the SID courier temporarystorage locker to ensure that the contentscorrespond with the Analyzed EvidenceControl Log and immediately reconcile anydiscrepancies;

∗ Remove evidence from the SID couriertemporary storage locker as requested bythe SID courier;

∗ Ensure that any booking irregularitiesidentified by the courier are immediatelycorrected by on-duty Area personnel, andFollow-up Investigation, Form 3.14, iscompleted when appropriate;

∗ Retain a copy of the Analyzed EvidenceControl Log after it has been reviewed andsigned by the SID courier;

∗ When the Area property room is closed,accept any transferred evidence from theSID courier and place it in the Areaproperty room interim storage locker; and,

∗ Accept and appropriately store any evidencesubmitted by Property Division personnelfor transfer to SID or any other PropertyDivision facility.

Investigative Personnel’s Responsibility.Concerned investigative personnel shall makea telephonic request to SID for evidenceanalysis as soon as it becomes apparent that theevidence will be needed to further the caseinvestigation or prosecution. Items being heldonly for latent print analysis shall be bookeddirectly into a Property Division facility, Areaproperty room, or Area property room interimstorage if the property room is closed and will

only be processed upon the request of theinvestigating officer to SID.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Areacommanding officers shall ensure that secure,separate, and proper SID courier temporarystorage lockers are maintained on stationpremises to accommodate storage of evidenceto be analyzed, including evidence requiringshelf, refrigerator, or freezer storage.

Note: The Commanding Officer, PropertyDivision, shall maintain SID courier temporarystorage lockers at Central and Valley PropertySections.

Courier’s Responsibility. The SID couriershall pick up and deliver to SID evidence to beanalyzed and other items, as appropriate. Uponarriving at an Area station, the courier shall:

∗ Request that the on-duty watch commanderremove all evidence to be analyzed from theSID courier temporary storage locker;

∗ Verify evidence to be analyzed has beenproperly reported, packaged, and stored;

Note: Observed deficiencies shall be broughtimmediately to the attention of the watchcommander and corrective action taken by on-duty Area personnel.

∗ Verify two copies of the completed PropertyReport, Form 10.01, and/or Arrest Report,Form 5.2, face sheet accompany eachnarcotics, blood, urine, firearms, oranalyzed evidence booking;

∗ Provide a signed copy of the AnalyzedEvidence Control Log to the watchcommander;

∗ Deliver property and reports which arebeing transferred from SID to the Areaproperty room;

Note: The property, a copy of the PropertyReport, and the Property Transfer Record,Form 10.02, shall be placed in the Areaproperty room interim storage locker if theArea property room is closed.

∗ Promptly deliver evidence to be analyzed tothe ECU for booking into the AutomatedProperty Information Management System(APIMS); and,

∗ Deliver other items which were picked up,e.g., narcotics reports, to the appropriatelocation along the courier route.

Property Officer’s Responsibility. Centraland Valley Property Sections shall beresponsible for maintaining SID couriertemporary storage lockers for items requiringanalysis. Central and Valley Property Sections'property officers shall complete the appropriateentry on the Analyzed Evidence Control Log.

When an item is being transferred from aProperty Division facility to SID for analysis,i.e., latent prints, the property officer shallinclude with the evidence a copy of theProperty Report, along with a PropertyTransfer Record, and submit the item to thewatch commander for placement in the



appropriate SID courier temporary storagelocker. When preparing evidence for return toArea property rooms, the ECU officers shallinclude a copy of the Property Report and aProperty Transfer Record with the evidencebeing returned.

Each Area has three lockers used by officersand detectives for the temporary placement ofitems to be transported for analysis to SID bycourier unit personnel. They are thenarcotics/shelf storage locker, the refrigerator,and the freezer. The narcotics locker and theshelf storage locker are synonymous.


Following supervisory approval of packagingand related reports, the booking employeeshall:

∗ Place the evidence and reports into theappropriate SID Courier temporary storagelocker; and,

Note: Entry into any of the SID temporarystorage lockers is restricted to an on-dutysupervisor and shall be witnessed by anothersworn employee.

∗ Complete the Analyzed Evidence ControlLog.

Note: Personnel assigned to specializeddivisions or sections shall use Area SID couriertemporary storage locker facilities. Specializeddivision personnel shall notify the Area watchcommander prior to placing any property in thestorage locker. If there is insufficient space inthe SID courier temporary storage locker, or ifdistance precludes use of Area facilities,evidence shall be taken directly to theEvidence Control Unit (ECU) for booking.When the ECU is closed, such evidence shallbe transported to Central or Valley PropertySections.

510.20 BOOKING HIGH-VALUEPROPERTY. HIGH-VALUE PROPERTY- DEFINED. “High-value” property is anyindividual item (except those reported on aVehicle Report, CHP Form 180) valued at$5,000 or more. The value of the property maybe based on personal knowledge, expertiselisting the property value, or statements madeby the victim or person reporting.

Officer’s Responsibility. When an officerseizes or takes into custody high-valueproperty, the concerned officer shall:

∗ Attempt to determine the true owner of theproperty. This can be accomplished through

statements of the victim or person reporting,receipts and ownership documents or serialnumbers of other markings on the propertyitself;

Note: The owner may or may not be the sameas the victim, person reporting, person inpossession, or arrestee.

∗ Ensure the property is packaged or labeledand secured;

∗ Transport the property and all otherassociated property to Central PropertySection or Valley Property Section,Property Division, for booking;

∗ Ensure the property is booked withoutunnecessary delay;

∗ When completing a Property Report, Form10.01, place the letters “HV” under themiscellaneous column next to the itemdescription. The true owners information, ifavailable, shall be entered in the spaceprovided for owner information; and,

∗ When completing a PreliminaryInvestigation Report (PIR), Form 3.1, orArrest Report, form 5.02, the letters “HV”shall be placed under the miscellaneouscolumn next to the item description. Thetrue owner’s information, if available, shallbe listed in the “Involved Persons” sectiondenoted by the code “TO” if the true owneris different than the victim or personreporting.

Note: If the true owner of a high-value itemcannot be identified or is the same as thevictim or person reporting, a statementindicating such shall be included in thenarrative portion of the PIR, Arrest Report orProperty Report.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Uponreceiving a PIR, Arrest Report or PropertyReport listing high-value property without thetrue owner’s information, the investigatingofficer shall conduct a follow-up investigationto determine the true owner.

Upon receiving information from the PropertyDisposition Coordinator that a high-value itemis available for release, the investigating officershall:

∗ Notify the true owner telephonically;∗ Have the Property Disposition Coordinator

input complete and accurate releaseinstructions into the Automated PropertyInformation Management System (APIMS);and,

∗ Document all efforts to contact the high-value property owner on the follow-upInvestigation, Form 3.14.

Note: If the true owner of the high-value itemavailable for release cannot be determined, theinvestigating officer shall have the PropertyDisposition Coordinator input complete andaccurate disposition instructions into APIMS.

Property Officers’ Responsibility. Propertyofficers at Central Property or Valley PropertySections of Property Division who accept high-value property for booking shall:

∗ Verify the value or estimated value of theproperty being booked in the presence ofthe booking officer;

∗ Ensure the property information is inputinto APIMS as high-value;

∗ Ensure the letters “HV” have been noted onthe appropriate forms;

∗ Notify a Property Division supervisor of thehigh-value property being booked; and,

∗ Have the property booked into the propertyroom safe or other appropriate location.

510.40 PROPERTY REMOVED FROMRECOVERED VEHICLE. Property removedfrom a recovered vehicle shall be booked asevidence.

Exception: Property of no evidentiary valueknown to be the personal property of thearrestee (Manual Section 4/645.20).

510.50 BOOKING OF EXCESSPERSONAL PROPERTY OF ARRESTEE(Manual Section 4/645.20).510.60 PROPERTY IMPROPERLYPRESENTED FOR BOOKING. A propertyOfficer shall inspect all evidence andnon-evidence submitted for booking to ensurethe property is:

∗ Properly packaged;∗ Identified correctly; and,∗ Accurately described on the report.

Property will not be accepted until thedeficiencies are corrected.

Note: The watch commander shall inspect allnarcotics evidence submitted for booking andshall ensure the property is properly packaged,identified, and stored in the Area's interimstorage area. The watch commander shallcause the evidence to be transferred to Centralor Valley Property Section (Manual Section4/515.30).

515. LOCATION OF BOOKING.515.10 LOCATION BOOKED -GENERAL. Evidence and non-evidence shallbe booked in the Area of occurrence. When theArea property room is closed, the propertyshall be properly packaged and identified, andstored in an interim storage area as designatedby the Commanding Officer, PropertyDivision.

Exceptions:

∗ Employees working in, or assigned to, adivision located within Central Area maybook property directly into Central PropertySection, regardless of the Area ofoccurrence.

∗ Employees working in, or assigned to, VanNuys Area may book property directly intoValley Property Section regardless of theArea of occurrence.

∗ Narcotics and evidence to be analyzed shallbe booked into the appropriate SID couriertemporary storage locker and transported to



SID by the courier (Manual Section4/515.30).

∗ Scientific Investigation Division personnelshall book and store, in designated storageareas, explosives not considered "safe"(Manual Section 4/540.20).

∗ Evidence connected with CommercialCrimes Division investigations (ManualSection 4/515.20).

∗ Evidence connected with Burglary SpecialSection, Commercial Crimes Divisioninvestigations (Manual Section 4/515.25).

∗ Evidence related to a child abuseinvestigation that is the responsibility of theAbused Child Unit, Parker Center, shall bebooked at Property Division (ManualSection 4/604.19).

∗ Evidence related to a child abuseinvestigation that is the responsibility of theAbused Child Unit, Valley Section, shall bebooked at Valley Property Section (ManualSection 4/604.19).

∗ Property requiring analysis or comparisonby Scientific Investigation Division(Manual Section 4/515.30).

∗ Narcotics-stained currency which is held forchecking by the Narcotics Division K-9Detail shall be booked at Central or ValleyProperty Sections.

∗ Toluene-soaked rags and other evidenceopen to the air requiring special handlingshall be booked at Central or ValleyProperty Section.

515.20 LOCATION BOOKED-COMMERCIAL CRIMES DIVISIONINVESTIGATING. When evidence is seizedrelated to a Commercial Crimes Divisioninvestigation (Manual Section 2/480.05)including counterfeit or altered currency, andno arrest is made, the evidence shall bebooked in the Area where it was taken intocustody.

Note: Property Division shall transfer theevidence to Central Property Section or ValleyProperty Section within 30 calendar days of thedate the evidence was booked.

If an arrestee is in custody related to aCommercial Crimes Division investigation,and evidence is seized, the evidence shall bebooked directly into Central Property Sectionor Valley Property Section.

Exceptions:

∗ Evidence seized in West Los Angeles orPacific Areas shall be booked into West LosAngeles Property Section.

∗ Evidence seized in Harbor Area shall bebooked into Harbor Property Section.

515.25 LOCATION BOOKED -BURGLARY SPECIAL SECTIONINVESTIGATING. When an arrest is made,evidence connected with a Burglary SpecialSection, Burglary Special Unit, investigation(Manual Section 2/480.56) shall be bookeddirectly into Central Property Section or ValleyProperty Section.

Exceptions:

∗ Evidence seized in West Los Angeles orPacific Areas shall be booked as follows:Male, or combination male and femalearrestee-booked into the Area ofoccurrence. Female arrestee-booked atValley Property Section.

∗ Evidence seized in Harbor Area shall bebooked into Harbor Property Section.

Note: Evidence in a case involving onlyjuvenile arrests shall be booked in the Area ofarrest. If a case involves both adult andjuvenile arrestees, the evidence shall be bookedas though only an adult were involved.

515.30 LOCATION BOOKED-EVIDENCE TO SCIENTIFICINVESTIGATION DIVISION. Evidence tobe examined by Scientific InvestigationDivision (SID), shall be booked into the SIDcourier system at the Area location mostconvenient to the booking employee. Therequest for analysis shall be made to SID bythe investigating officer. The evidence shall beplaced in the appropriate locker: Narcotics/shelf, refrigerator, or freezer.

Exceptions:

∗ Items too large for temporary storagelockers;

∗ Narcotics seizures in excess of 30 poundsnet weight (Manual Section 4/540.75);

∗ Explosives not considered "safe" (ManualSection 4/540.20);

∗ Hazardous chemicals or materials (ManualSection 4/212.49);

Note: Compressed gas cylinders shall bebooked at Central or Valley Property Sections.

∗ Toluene-soaked rags or other evidence opento the air requiring special handling(Manual Section 4/515.10); and,

Note: During hours when SID is closed,employees requiring evidence handling orstorage advice shall telephonically contact anSID criminalist via Detective Support Division(DSD).

∗ Any amount of PCP in a container one-halfgallon or larger or a total volume of one-half gallon or more of PCP (Manual Section4/540.72).

These lockers shall not be used for temporarystorage of evidence to be booked into the Areaproperty room.

520. PROPERTY - TO WHOMBOOKED.520.10 EVIDENCE BOOKED TOARRESTEE. When evidence is known to berelated to previously booked evidence, it shallbe booked to the same person under the sameDR number as originally reported. Itemnumbers shall start with the next sequentialnumber from the original report. If not relatedto previously booked evidence, evidence shallbe booked to the arrestee whether seized at the

time of arrest or subsequent thereto. When twoor more persons are arrested at the same timeand place, all evidence shall be booked to onearrestee whose name shall appear in the spaceprovided on the Property Report, Form 10.1, orRelease from Custody (RFC) ReportContinuation, Form 5.02.8. Names andinformation regarding other arrestees andevidence shall appear in the narrative of thereport. The report shall designate from whomthe various items were seized.

If no arrest has been made, the evidence shallbe booked to the victim.

If there is neither an arrestee nor a victim,evidence shall be booked to the owner orpossessor of the evidence.

If there is neither an arrestee, victim, owner,nor possessor associated with the evidence, itshall be booked to the Department employeebooking the property.

Note: Possessor shall be defined as someoneother than an owner in possession of evidencewhich is being taken into police custody.Possessor may include the finder of evidence.

520.20 NON-EVIDENCE BOOKED TOOWNER. Non-evidence shall be booked to itsowner. If ownership cannot be determined, itshall be booked to the finder.

Exception: When non-evidence is removedfrom a vehicle, and the owner of the propertyis unknown, it shall be booked to the registeredowner of the vehicle. When neither is known,it shall be booked to the employee.

520.30 BOOKING PARKING METERS.Parking meters or their parts or contents, whichare booked as non-evidence, shall be booked tothe Department of Transportation, City of LosAngeles. (Notification to Desk Officer- ManualSection 4/372.28).

525. PRESERVING PROPERTY.525.10 PRESERVING PROPERTY-GENERAL. All property shall be protectedfrom contamination, alteration, destruction,and damage. Employees taking custody ofproperty which they do not know how topreserve shall obtain assistance from ScientificInvestigation Division.

525.20 PRESERVING WET STAINS.Items containing wet blood, semen, orchemical stains shall be permitted to dry atroom temperature before packaging. Plasticcontainers or plastic wrap shall not be used asa packaging material.

525.28 HANDLING OF WORTHLESSDOCUMENTS. When a Worthless DocumentReport, Form 3.6, is made, the DR numbershall be typed or written in ink in the upperright corner of the face of the document. Thedocument shall be reproduced upon the report.Each worthless document shall be placed intoa Department-approved check protector, andthen paper-clipped to the prescribed number ofcopies of the Worthless Document Report and



sent to Commercial Crimes Division forprocessing and redistribution.

Exception: When it is necessary for an officerto retain the document, he/she shall cause anotation to be included in the body of thereport. This notation shall state that he/she hasretained the document and the "work copies" ofthe report and the reasoning therefor. He shallsend two copies of the report to CommercialCrimes Division.

525.30 PRESERVING SPATTEREDSTAINS OR SCRAPINGS. Spattered stainsor scrapings shall be removed from an objectand packaged by, or under the direction of, aspecialist from Scientific InvestigationDivision.

530. MARKING EVIDENCE FORIDENTIFICATION.530.10 MARKING EVIDENCE-GENERAL. An item of evidence shall not bemarked for later identification when:

∗ It bears a serial number.

Note: Watches shall not be dismantled forpurposes of locating a serial number.

∗ It would alter its evidentiary value.∗ It is capable of being identified through

distinctive markings and recordedinformation.

∗ It is a flag of the United States of Americaor of the State of California (ManualSection 4/535.30).

When evidence is marked, the mark shall be:

∗ As small as practicable.∗ Distinctive.∗ Placed so as to prevent reduction of the

item's marketable value.∗ Made as soon as practicable by the finding

employee.

Evidence that cannot be marked or lateridentified by distinctive markings shall bepackaged and sealed with a completed sealedevidence label. An outline of the object shallbe traced on the package when it would be ofvalue in making identification at a later date.

530.20 MARKING EXPENDEDAMMUNITION. When its evidentiary valuewould not be affected, expended ammunitionshall be marked as follows:

∗ Cartridge case-on the inside, or if notpracticable, on the outside near the openedend.

∗ Bullet-on the base.

530.30 MARKING OF BOOKEDDOCUMENTS. The DR Number shall be theonly marking placed on a worthless documentor invoice by the reporting employee. It shallbe printed in ink or typed as near as practicableto the upper right hand corner of the facewithout interfering with markings alreadypresent. The person reporting should initial thereverse side of the document or invoice.

535. PACKAGING OF BOOKEDPROPERTY.535.05 PACKAGING PROPERTY-GENERAL. The outer package of bookedproperty shall be no smaller than a 7-1/2" x 10-1/2" manila envelope. Employees shall usepreprinted envelopes when available. Blankenvelopes shall have a completed property tagstapled to the front.

Small items shall be wrapped in a bindle and/orplaced in a coin envelope. Each coin envelopeshall bear the item number and DR number ofthe related report. Personnel shall considercardboard carton packaging when the evidenceis too large to fit into an envelope specified forstorage of that type of evidence.

Note: Carton packaging that is used to holdanalyzed evidence or other forms ofnon-analyzed evidence shall have theappropriate evidence tag completed andsecured to the outside of the carton.

535.07 PACKAGING ANALYZEDEVIDENCE-GENERAL. Evidence to beanalyzed shall be packaged in, or tagged with,appropriate Analyzed Evidence Envelopes,Laboratory Envelopes or Analyzed EvidenceTags.

Employees booking all types of evidence to beanalyzed shall place a red Analyzed EvidenceSeal, Form 10.12.7, over each flap of therequired envelope and along the center seam. Ifthe item to be analyzed is in a carton, box, orwrapped, the seams shall be secured withadhesive tape. Two separate continuous piecesof tape running the length and width of thepackage shall be used. A red AnalyzedEvidence Seal shall be placed on the topsurface where the tape ends meet. The PropertyBooking Guide contains additionalinformation.


∗ Analyzed Evidence Envelopes:

∗ Analyzed Evidence-Shelf StorageEnvelope, Form 12.51

∗ Analyzed Evidence-To Be RefrigeratedEnvelope, Form 12.51.1

∗ Analyzed Evidence-To Be FrozenEnvelope, Form 12.51.2

∗ Analyzed Evidence-Narcotics Envelope,Form 12.51.3

∗ Analyzed Evidence Tags:

∗ Analyzed Evidence-Shelf Storage Tag,Form 10.12.3

∗ Analyzed Evidence-To Be RefrigeratedTag, Form 10.12.4

∗ Analyzed Evidence-To Be Frozen Tag,Form 10.12.5

∗ Analyzed Evidence-Narcotics Tag, Form10.12.6

∗ Analyzed Evidence Seals, Form 10.12.7

535.10 PACKAGING ALCOHOLICBEVERAGES. A container of an alcoholicbeverage shall be securely capped and sealedwith a completed sealed evidence label.

If the container cannot be capped, a sampleshall be sealed in an approved evidence bottle,and booked with the original container.

535.15 PACKAGING BLOOD SAMPLES(Manual Section 4/343.42).535.20 PACKAGING AMMUNITION.Each discharged projectile, cartridge case, ormisfired cartridge which is submitted toScientific Investigation Division shall beindividually wrapped in soft tissue, sealed in acoin envelope, and packaged separately fromthe firearm.

Ammunition that is not to be submitted toScientific Investigation Division shall beplaced in a coin envelope and packaged withthe gun, if practicable.

The words "Live Ammo" shall be printed inred letters on the outside of a packagecontaining live ammunition.

535.25 PACKAGING FIREWORKS(Manual Section 4/540.20).535.30 PACKAGING FLAGS. When aflag of the United States of America or theState of California is booked, it shall beproperly folded and placed in an envelope orwrapped in paper. The envelope or packageshall be marked "U.S. Flag" or "CaliforniaFlag" as appropriate, and sealed with acompleted sealed evidence label. Anidentifying mark shall not be placed on theflag.

535.35 PACKAGING GLASSFRAGMENTS. Small pieces of glass shall beidentified by tracing their perimeters on theoutside of the coin envelope or package intowhich they are placed. Each tracing shall benumbered and initialed. The property reportshall include information which will enable theemployee to identify each tracing with thecorresponding piece of glass. Very smallpieces of glass need not be traced.

535.40 PACKAGING JEWELRY(Manual Section 4/535.85).535.45 PACKAGING KNIVES ANDSHARP INSTRUMENTS. A blade or sharppoint shall be packaged to protect a person whomay later handle it. When its evidentiary valuewould not be affected, an unprotected blade orpoint shall be packaged as follows:



∗ Pocket Knife. Folded closed or package asa fixed bladed knife.

∗ Fixed Bladed Knife. Fasten two strips ofcardboard one on each side of the blade.

∗ Razor Blades. Wrapped in paper andplaced in a coin envelope.

∗ Straight Edge Razor. Fold the blade intothe handle and secure.

∗ Ice Pick. Affix a piece of cork over thepoint or attach several pieces of paper to thepoint with cellulose tape.

∗ Syringes. Syringes, not in the originalmanufacturer's protective case, shall beplaced into a Department-approved syringetube. Officers shall affix a Biohazard Labelto the outer envelope into which the syringetube is placed.

535.50 PACKAGING MONEY (ManualSection 4/540.60).

535.55 PACKAGING NARCOTICS(Manual Section 4/540.70).

535.60 PACKAGING PAWNSHOPTICKETS (Manual Section 4/535.85).535.65 PACKAGING POISONS. Poisonsshall be placed in glass containers.

Note: Food-stuffs involved in an animalpoisoning shall not be booked unless a suspectis identified.

535.70 PACKAGING PURSES. Whenpurses are not wrapped, the valuables shall beremoved and booked separately (ManualSection 4/535.85).

535.75 PACKAGING BIOLOGICALSLIDES. Biological slides or specimens shallbe booked in an Analyzed Evidence-To BeFrozen Envelope, Form 12.51.2, and sealedwith a completed evidence label.

If slides or specimens of biological smears arereceived without a slide container or otherprotective wrapping, two strips of cardboardslightly larger than the slides shall be placed oneach side and secured at the edges with staplesor cellulose tape.

535.80 PACKAGING URINE SAMPLES(Manual Section 4/343.42).535.85 PACKAGING VALUABLES.Small valuable items shall be placed in coinenvelopes and packaged in a 7 1/2"x10 1/2"manila envelope or other suitable container.Valuables shall not be packaged with otheritems.

Exception: Jewelry in a jewelry case orappropriate container need not be removed andpackaged separately. However, each pieceshall be itemized on the related report.

535.90 PACKAGING VOLATILEFUELS (Manual Section 4/212.49).

536. INFECTIOUS MATERIALS.

536.10 CLASSIFICATION OFPOTENTIALLY INFECTIOUS

MATERIALS. Potentially infectious materialsare defined as:

∗ Human blood, human blood components,and products made of human blood.

∗ Human body fluids, including semen,vaginal secretions, cerebrospinal fluid.

∗ Any human tissue or organ.∗ Any item contaminated by the above

substances.∗ Syringes not in the manufacturer's

packaging.

536.15 PACKAGING OF POTENTIALLYINFECTIOUS PROPERTY. Any potentiallyinfectious material which is entered into theDepartment property system shall have aBiohazard Label affixed to the outer packing ina conspicuous place by the employee seizing ortaking custody of the property.

Completion of Property Report. The officerpackaging the potentially infectious material(Manual Section 4/536.10) shall write"BIOHAZARD" in the miscellaneous sectionof the item description for each potentiallyinfectious material listed on the PropertyReport, Form 10.1.

Envelope Packaging. Potentially infectiousmaterial which is packaged in any Departmentevidence envelope shall have the BiohazardLabel affixed to the upper left corner of theappropriate envelope before being booked intoproperty.

Carton Packaging. Potentially infectiousmaterial which is packaged in a cardboardcarton shall have one Biohazard Label affixedto the top of the carton in plain view, and oneBiohazard Label affixed to the upper leftcorner of the appropriate evidence envelope orevidence tag that is secured to the outside ofthe carton.

Other Packaging. Potentially infectiousmaterial which is packaged in a container otherthan an envelope or carton shall have theBiohazard Label affixed to the upper leftcorner of the appropriate evidence envelope,Personal Property Envelope, Form 10.13.1, orproperty tag.

Note: The Biohazard Label shall only beaffixed to the outer packaging of potentiallyinfectious material. For example, an officerobtaining whole blood samples for alcohol ordrug Analysis (4/343.40) would affix theBiohazard Label only to the AnalyzedEvidence To Be Refrigerated Envelope, Form12.51.1, not to the vial that contains the actualblood sample.

540. ITEMS REQUIRING SPECIALHANDLING OR PROCESSING.540.10 COIN-OPERATED MACHINES.When money can be removed from acoin-operated machine without causingdamage, it shall be removed at the location ofbooking in the presence of a supervisor andwhen practicable, the person who had controlof the machine at the time it was taken into

custody. After retrieving Secret Service funds,the remaining money shall be packaged andbooked separately.

If opening the machine would cause damage,the money shall remain in the machine. Eachcoin opening shall be sealed with a completedevidence label. The seams of the case shall alsobe sealed.

Note: At the time a machine is destroyed, theinvestigating officer shall retrieve and bookany money stored therein.

540.20 BOOKING EXPLOSIVESUBSTANCES. Explosive substances are classified as “Safe”or “Dangerous.”

BOOKING “SAFE” EXPLOSIVES. “Safe”explosive items are booked in the same manneras any other property. A package containing a“Safe” explosive item shall be marked withlarge red letters indicating the type ofexplosive material contained, for example,“Fireworks,” “Flares,” or “Live Ammo.” Thetypes of “Safe explosives are:

∗ Fireworks-“Safe and Sane” types (BearingState Fire Marshal seal) and less than 10pounds gross weight;

∗ Emergency Highway flares/fuses; and,∗ Fixed ammunition and blank or saluting

cartridges less than .50 caliber.

BOOKING “DANGEROUS”EXPLOSIVES. All other explosive substancesare classified as “Dangerous” and shall only berecovered and booked by Hazardous DevicesSection personnel. The Hazardous DevicesSection technician who assumes custody of adangerous explosive substance shall ensurethat a Property Report, Form 10.1, iscompleted and distributed as soon aspracticable. Common examples of“Dangerous” explosive substances are:

∗ Fireworks not bearing the State FireMarshal seal or with a gross weight of tenpounds or more;

∗ Firecrackers and similarly constructedexplosive devices that do not bear a StateFire Marshal seal, such as Cherry Bombs,M80’s, and M100’s;

∗ Seal Bombs and bird distracters(Agricultural/wildlife types of fireworks);

∗ Railroad Torpedoes; and,∗ Ammunition .50 caliber and larger.

Note: Officers recovering ammunition .50caliber or larger shall contact ESD, HazardousDevices Section, or the Department CommandPost during off-hours. A Hazardous DevicesSection officer will determine whether therecovered ammunition is considered “Safe”and can be booked at Property Division. Incases when an Hazardous Devices Sectionofficer advises that the ammunition isconsidered “Safe” to book, officers shall notethe name, rank, and serial number of theHazardous Devices Section officer authorizingthe booking in the Property Report, Form 10.1.



When investigating officers cannot determinethe classification of a suspected explosivesubstance as “Safe” or “Dangerous,” officersshall treat the suspected item as “Dangerous”and contact the Hazardous Devices Section ofESD or the Department Command Post duringoff-hours for advice.

540.25 BOOKING HAZARDOUSCHEMICALS (4/212.49).

540.30 BOOKING FIREARMS.General. All firearms coming into the custodyof the Department shall be classified asevidence.

Booking Firearms-Officer’s Responsibility.An officer booking a firearm into Departmentcustody shall ensure that the firearm isunloaded and safe for handling. Employeesunfamiliar with the unloading or securing of afirearm shall contact the Firearms Unit,Scientific Investigation Division (SID), foradvice. Additionally, if physical evidence suchas latent prints is of extreme importance andthere is a potential for damaging such evidenceduring the unloading process, SID shall berequested to respond for assistance.

Note: During off-hours and weekends, SIDfirearms examiners may be contacted foradvice or response through Detective SupportDivision.

In all cases, the Firearms Unit shall becontacted to examine and clear the followingtypes of hazardous weapons prior to booking:

∗ Muzzle loaders.∗ Cap-and-ball black powder weapons.∗ Jammed or inoperative weapons, including

weapons with rounds that cannot beextracted.

When possible, weapons shall be broken downor otherwise modified and packaged to alloweasy visual examination and assurance they areunloaded.

Upon ensuring the firearm is unloaded and safefor handling, the booking employee shall:

∗ Complete a Property Report, Form 10.01.0.

Note: The name and serial number of the SIDfirearms examiner, along with the date andtime a hazardous weapon was rendered safe forhandling, shall be documented in the Form10.01.0. For firearms contaminated withdiseased or infectious bodily fluids or for otherspecially packaged or sealed firearms,documentation of the clearing of weapons shallbe included in the Form 10.01.0.

∗ Complete the Firearms SupplementalProperty Report, Form 10.01.01.

Note: Officers shall complete one FirearmsSupplemental Property Report for eachfirearm booked. When more than threeassociates exist, complete another FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form 10.01.01.When more than three firearms are booked,

complete the Continuation Sheet for FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form 10.01.02.When a firearm is recovered directly from aspecific person, any other individual in thepossessor’s company will be considered anassociate and their information shall be enteredinto “Possessor’s Associate” section. TheFirearms Supplemental Property Report shallbecome a page of the Property Report, Form10.01.0, and continue the page numberingsequence and be submitted to a supervisor forapproval.

∗ When multiple firearms are booked on asingle Property Report, Form 10.01.0, andall have the same possessor, associates,recovery location and recovery date, thefirst firearm is listed on the FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form10.01.01. Additional firearms will be listedon the Continuation Sheet for FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form10.01.02. The appropriate information shallbe recorded on the Continuation Sheet forFirearms Supplemental Property Report,Form 10.01.02, by the officer booking thefirearm into a Department Property Room.

∗ The Continuation Sheet for FirearmsSupplemental Property Report shall becomea page of the Property Report, Form10.01.0, and continue the page numberingsequence and be submitted to a supervisorfor approval.

∗ Cause the Automated Firearms System(AFS) and National Crime InformationCenter (NCIC) to be queried to determinewants and registration information.

∗ Telephonically report all firearms reportedstolen, lost, recovered, located and bookedto the Automated Vehicle and PropertySection, Records and IdentificationDivision.

∗ Document the results of the AFS and NCICquery on the Form 10.01.0.

∗ Affix the AFS/NCIC print out to the Form10.01.0 with transparent tape, immediatelybelow the recorded description of thefirearm.

∗ Print the word "FIREARM" in red in the topmargin of the Form 10.01.0.

∗ When booking a firearm at a location otherthan the property unit within the geographicArea in which the firearm was seized, printin the left margin of the Form 10.01.0, astatement directing extra copy distributionto the robbery unit of the geographic Areain which the firearm was seized.

∗ Submit the completed Forms, 10.01.0 and10.01.01, to a supervisor for approval.

∗ Deposit the property and two copies each ofthe approved Forms 10.01.0, 10.01.01, and10.01.02, when applicable, with theconcerned property unit.

Note: All information relative to a firearm willbe entered into the AFS by personnel assignedto the Automated Vehicle and PropertySection, Records and Identification Division.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. The supervisorapproving the Form 10.01.0 shall:

∗ Physically inspect the firearm (unless heldfor latent prints) to verify the accuracy ofthe information contained on the Form10.01.0 and to verify that the firearm isunloaded.

Note: If the firearm is being held for latentprints or other scientific evidence, supervisorsshall visually inspect the firearm to verify asmuch information as possible is contained inthe Form 10.01.0.

∗ Ensure that a notation is made in thenarrative portion of the Form 10.01.0 whenunable to query AFS and NCIC.

The supervisor approving the FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form 10.01.01,and the Continuation Sheet for FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form 10.01.02,when applicable, shall review the form forcompleteness and accuracy, ensuring that allavailable information has been included.

Receiving Booked Firearms-PropertyOfficer’s Responsibility. The property officerreceiving a booked firearm shall:

∗ Inspect the firearm and verify allinformation contained in the Form 10.01.0.

∗ At the beginning of each work day, forwardone copy of each Form 10.01.0, theFirearms Supplemental Property Report,Form 10.01.01 and the Continuation Sheetfor Firearms Supplemental Property Report,Form 10.01.02, when applicable, and a copyof the AFS/NCIC printout directly to theGun Unit, Detective Support Division andRecords and Identification Division (R&I),via intradepartmental mail.

∗ Ensure that a completed FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form10.01.01, and the Continuation Sheet forFirearms Supplemental Property Report,Form 10.01.02, when applicable, is attachedto the Property Report for each firearmbooked.

Packaging. Long guns including sawed-offlong guns need not be packaged. An EvidenceTag, Form 10.12, shall be attached to thebarrel.

Handguns shall be packaged when practicable.

Only the weapon's clip, magazine, ammunitionor holster may be packaged with a firearm.

Note: A clip or magazine shall not be stored ina weapon, and ammunition shall not be storedin a clip or magazine.

540.31 BOOKING BODY ARMOR. Whenanti-ballistic equipment (body armor) is usedduring the commission or attemptedcommission of a crime or is illegallypossessed, it shall be booked into Departmentcustody. Training Division shall conduct ananalysis to determine if the body armorperformed according to its specifications and toidentify possible trends of armor used bysuspects. This analysis includes body armor



worn by Department personnel when impactedby a ballistic object or stabbing instrument.Note: Body armor includes vests, helmets,plates, and any related anti-ballistic product.

Officer’s Responsibility. An officerrecovering body armor used during thecommission or attempted commission of acrime, illegally possessed, or worn byDepartment personnel when impacted by aballistic object or stabbing instrument shall:

∗ Complete a Property Report, Form 10.1, andinclude the serial number, model name ormodel number, threat level, manufacturer,size, color of the carrier, and whether it is amale or female design; and,

∗ Book the body armor into Departmentcustody (4/510).

Commanding Officer, Training Division,Responsibility. The Commanding Officer,Training Division, shall establish a procedurefor the analysis and evaluation of body armor.Upon receipt of Form 10.1 documenting theseizure or recovery of body armor, thecommanding officer shall:

∗ Ensure that prior to analysis, approval isobtained from the investigating officerresponsible for the body armor to avoidcompromising its evidentiary value;

∗ Ensure that the results of each analysis arecataloged;

∗ Produce an annual report associated withthe analysis and effectiveness ofDepartment issued body armor and bodyarmor used by suspects; and,

∗ When needed, ensure that training andtactics are developed for officers whenconfronting suspects wearing body armor.

540.32 PROCESSING FIREARMSHELD FOR LATENT PRINTS OR OTHERSCIENTIFIC EVIDENCE.Employee Booking Firearm - Responsibility.Firearms to be examined for latent fingerprintsor other scientific evidence shall be unloadedsafely and in a manner consistent with thepreservation of evidence prior to booking.

Note: Employees unfamiliar with theunloading or securing of a firearm shall contactthe Firearms Unit, SID, for advice or response.Additionally, if physical evidence such aslatent prints is of extreme importance and thereis a potential for damaging such evidenceduring the unloading process, SID shall berequested to respond for assistance. TheFirearms Unit shall be contacted to examineand clear hazardous weapons (4/540.30).During off-hours and weekends, SID firearmsexaminers may be contacted for advice orresponse through the Department CommandPost.

Employees in possession of a firearm requiringexamination for latent prints or other scientificevidence shall:

∗ Place long guns in a long gun box, seal thebox with a red Analyzed Evidence Seal,

Form 10.12.7, and affix an Evidence Tag,Form 10.12, to the box;

Note: Long guns too large for an appropriatecarton shall be wrapped to protect theirevidentiary value. The wrapping shall be tapedand sealed with an Analyzed Evidence Seal asdescribed in Manual Section 4/535.07,Packaging Analyzed Evidence.

∗ Place handguns in a handgun box, seal thebox with a red Analyzed Evidence Seal,fold the Handgun Evidence Envelope, Form10.20.0, into thirds and secure it in amanner that clearly displays the bold"Handgun" label as well as the informationcompleted by the employee;

Note: All firearms which are being held forexamination of any type shall be secured in therequired manner as noted in Manual Section4/535.07, Packaging Analyzed Evidence.

∗ Complete the Property Report, recording asmuch information as possible about thefirearm without destroying any of itsevidentiary value, and indicate on theProperty Report that the firearm wasbooked at SID; and,

∗ Place the firearm in the designated SIDcourier temporary storage locker for pickup.

Note: If a firearm only requires latent printanalysis, the firearm shall be booked into aProperty Division facility and the investigatingofficer shall request analysis via SID.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Upondetermining that SID analysis is required forany item booked, the investigating officershall:

∗ Telephonically notify SID of the desiredanalysis;

∗ Ensure that a properly completed AnalyzedEvidence Report, Form 12.20, is receivedfrom SID; and,

∗ Document on a Follow-up InvestigationReport, Form 3.14, any pertinentinformation.

Scientific Investigation DivisionResponsibility. When a firearm is to beexamined for latent prints or other scientificevidence, personnel assigned to SID shall:

∗ Transport firearms to the Evidence ControlUnit (ECU), SID, via the courier unit;

∗ Book the firearm into APIMS;∗ Update the description of any firearm for

which the description is incomplete on aProperty Report by:

∗ Completing a Follow-up Report andforwarding the original to R&I Division,with copies to the Gun Unit, DSD, andthe concerned investigating officer. TheAutomated Vehicle and PropertySection, R&I Division shall enter anyupdated information into the AutomatedFirearms System and the concerned

investigating officer shall ensure this isdone; and,

∗ Entering the additional descriptiveinformation into APIMS.

∗ Forward a copy of each Property Report anda copy of the attached AFS/NCIC printoutdirectly to the Gun Unit, DSD;

∗ Process requests for analysis received frominvestigative personnel;

∗ Notify the investigating officer whenanalysis is completed; and,

∗ Return the firearm via the courier unit to theproperty room indicated by theinvestigating officer.

Property Division’s Responsibility. PropertyDivision facilities shall be responsible for thelong term storage of analyzed firearms.

540.40 PROCESSING FIREARMSSURRENDERED FOR DISPOSAL. When afirearm is voluntarily surrendered to theDepartment for disposal, the followingadditional procedures shall apply:

∗ Ammunition accepted with the firearm shallbe listed on the same report.

∗ The words "Voluntary Gun Disposal" shallbe entered on the first line of the narrativeportion of the Property Report, Form 10.1.

∗ The owner shall be required to sign thefollowing statement, which shall beincluded as the last paragraph in thenarrative portion of the report: "I herebyrelinquish to the Los Angeles PoliceDepartment any right, title, or interest in theabove-described firearm(s)."

∗ Advise the owner that the firearm will bedisposed of in accordance with theprocedures set forth in Penal Code Section12028.

∗ Issue the owner a Receipt for PropertyTaken Into Custody, Form 10.10.0.

∗ Book the firearm.

Note: The firearm shall be transferred toCentral Property Section within five days.

540.50 BOOKING FIREARMS FORRENUMBERING. Any pistol or revolverwithout a manufacturer's number or other markor identification which comes into Departmentcustody shall be processed by DetectiveSupport Division prior to release of theweapon. When the owner or person havingcustody of a pistol or revolver without anidentification number requests the renumberingof the weapon, it shall be booked and ,Detective Support Division, shall be designatedas the "Investigating Division" on the PropertyReport, Form 10.1.

Note: A complete physical description of theowner of the firearm shall be included in theproperty report.

If the investigating officer determines that thefirearm should be numbered, he or she shallcause the necessary copies of the FirearmIdentification Report, Form 12.7, to be



prepared and forwarded to ScientificInvestigation Division.

Upon receipt of a Firearm IdentificationReport, Scientific Investigation Divisionpersonnel shall process the firearm. Afterprocessing, the firearm shall be returned to theinvestigating officer, who shall ensure theweapon is returned to the location where it wasbooked.

Note: The Firearm Identification Reportregisters the firearm.

540.60 BOOKING MONEY. All moniestaken into Department custody shall becounted by the officer booking the money andthe appropriate supervisor prior to booking. Acopy of the related Property Report, Form10.1, must accompany each money booking.

Note: When an officer seizes or takes intocustody U.S. currency totaling less than$5,000, the concerned officer shall book thecurrency at the Area property room. The itemsshall be placed in the designated interimstorage locker when the Area property room isclosed. When an officer seizes or takes intocustody U.S. currency totaling $5,000 or more,the officer shall transport the currency toValley Property Section or Central PropertySection, Property Division, for recounting andbooking.

Officer’s Responsibility. When an officerseizes or takes into custody U.S. currency, theofficer shall:

∗ Count the currency, in the presence of asupervisor preferably not involved in theseizure, and place the currency into aMoney Envelope, Form 10.12.2;

∗ Obtain the signature of the supervisorverifying the money count on the MoneyEnvelope;

∗ Ensure that both the total amount and thebreakdown by denomination are accuratelyrecorded on the Money Envelope;

∗ Seal the top flap of the Money Envelopewith an Analyzed Evidence Seal (LAPDSealed Evidence-red), Form 10.12.7;

∗ Complete a Property Report listing thecurrency booked; and,

Note: Money that is of unique evidentiaryvalue, e.g., possible fingerprints, shall be listedon the Property Report as outlined in5/10.01-26.

∗ Book the items into the appropriate propertyfacility.

Note: When booked money requires checkingby a Narcotics Division K-9 unit and a unit isunavailable prior to booking, the bookingofficers shall notify the property officer thatafter counting and booking the currency toplace the Money Envelope into a Kapak bag toensure the currency is not contaminated duringstorage. Items held for checking by the K-9Detail must be booked at Central or ValleyProperty Sections.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Supervisorsresponsible for counting currency shall:

∗ Verify that both the total amount and thebreakdown by denomination are accuratelyrecorded on the Money Envelope;

∗ Sign the Money Envelope in the appropriateplace and ensure the envelope is properlysealed; and,

∗ Ensure that the items are booked into theappropriate property facility.

Note: A supervisor shall witness the recount ofall currency removed from interim storage bythe property officer for booking into the Areaproperty room. The supervisor shall sign anddate the Analyzed Evidence Seal (LAPDSealed Evidence-blue), Form 10.12.7,overlaying the Money Envelope flap next tothe signature of the property officer.

Property Officer’s Responsibility. Propertyofficers at Area property rooms who acceptcurrency for booking shall:

∗ Recount the currency in the presence of thebooking officer;

∗ If the currency is removed from interimstorage for booking into the Area propertyroom, recount the currency in the presenceof any sworn supervisor;

Note: The property officer shall be responsiblefor applying blue evidence seals to all currencypackages opened for recounting. All resealingshall be done in the presence of the swornsupervisor witnessing the recount. Theproperty officer shall sign and date the blueevidence seal overlaying the Money Envelopeflap in the presence of the sworn supervisor.

∗ Ensure the money count is properly listedon the Money Envelope;

∗ Seal the Money Envelope with a blueevidence seal and sign and date theevidence seal; and,

∗ Place the item into secure storage.

Property officers at Central Property Section orValley Property Section who accept currencyfor booking shall:

∗ Recount the currency in the presence of thebooking officers;

∗ Verify the currency count matches theMoney Envelope;

∗ Place the currency into the Money Envelopeand seal with a blue evidence seal;

∗ Sign and date the blue evidence seal; and,∗ Obtain the signature of a Property Division

supervisor on the blue evidence sealoverlying the Money Envelope flap.

Commanding Officer, Property Division’sResponsibility. The Commanding Officer,Property Division, shall, as soon as practicalupon expiration of the 60-day time limit, causeall monies eligible for deposit into the BookedMoney Account, not stored in the CentralProperty Section, Property Division, to betransferred to Central Property Section orValley Property Section for deposit.

Exception: If a release has been authorizedand is pending, the money will not betransferred and deposited until the requiredterm for claiming the money has expired.

Upon determination that money in the accountis eligible for disbursement, the commandingofficer of Property Division shall cause aBooked Money Disbursement, Form 10.26, tobe completed and forwarded to FiscalOperations Division.

Note: Monies not yet deposited into theBooked Money Account may be released inaccordance with procedures outlined in Section4/555.10.

540.62 BOOKING OF NUMISMATIC,MUTILATED, OR COUNTERFEITCURRENCY. Foreign currency, gold coins,proof sets, and coins which are obviously partof numismatic collections shall be bookedseparately and not as money. Additionally,counterfeit currency, dye-packs, and raisedbills, regardless of denomination, shall not bebooked as U.S. currency or in a MoneyEnvelope. Officers booking numismatic,mutilated, or counterfeit currency shall:

∗ If the items constitute a coin collection orcollectable items, list the total face value ofthe coin or bill collection and thebreakdown by denomination on theProperty Report; or

∗ If the item is counterfeit or a raised bill, listthe face value along with the serial numberfrom each bill on the Property Report; or

∗ If the item is a dye pack, list the visibleserial numbers and face value of anyremaining bills.

∗ In the presence of a supervisor, place theitems in a plain manila envelope stampedwith a currency denomination grid on theface of the envelope;

∗ Itemize the totals of the items on the grid,e.g., "10 pennies, 4 nickels, 2 dimes," etc.,from the Property Report;

∗ Write in large letters on the lower portion ofthe face of the envelope what is containedwithin, e.g., dye pack, coin collection, etc.;

∗ Seal the top flap of the envelope with a redevidence seal;

∗ Have the witnessing supervisor sign theevidence seal overlaying the envelope flap;and,

∗ Book the property (4/515.20).

540.64 REMOVAL OF CURRENCYFROM PROPERTY DIVISION.Withdrawal for Court Proceedings. Officersshall contact the District Attorney's Office orCity Attorney's Office, as appropriate, todetermine if currency booked in conjunctionwith the court case is needed in court. Whencurrency is required as evidence in a courtproceeding, the officer shall:

∗ Withdraw the currency from PropertyDivision and sign the PropertyCard-Envelope (Money), Form 10.07.1,upon receipt;



∗ Obtain copies of the Property CourtReceipt, Form 10.3;

∗ Transport the sealed Money Envelope to theappropriate court; and,

∗ Have the court execute the Property Receiptwith a court stamp and court clerk'ssignature when the currency is accepted asevidence and deliver the receipt to PropertyDivision not later than the close of thefollowing working day.

Note: When the currency is not accepted asevidence by the court, the concerned officershall return the currency and unexecutedreceipts to Property Division as soon aspracticable.

Release of Currency to Private Persons.When releasing currency to a private person inresponse to a Property Disposition/UpdateRequest, Form 10.06, teletype, or PropertyOwner's Notification, Form 10.14, propertyofficers shall:

∗ Verify identification of the private person;∗ Ensure that the property release

authorization is on file;∗ Ensure that a supervisor is present to

continuously observe the release of thecurrency; and,

Note: In Central or Valley Property Sections,a property supervisor shall be present. Inoutlying Area property rooms, a watchcommander or other sworn supervisor shall bepresent.

∗ Complete the necessary documentation torecord the release of the currency under theauspices of the supervisor verifying therelease and have the witnessing supervisorinitial the form.

540.66 MONEY HELD FOR SPECIFICEVIDENTIARY VALUE. When an employeetakes into custody currency that has anyspecific evidentiary value, e.g., possiblefingerprints, unique identifying characteristicsetc., the booking employee shall place thephrase "Hold Money for Evidence" above theline where the money evidence appears on theProperty Report Form 10.1. Facts supportingretention should be set forth in narrative formimmediately following the line item listing onthe Property Report and in the narrative orcorresponding reports.

Note: Money that has no hold for evidentiaryvalue will be deposited into the Booked MoneyAccount by Property Division after 60 days ofcustody.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility.Investigating officers shall review moneybooked in conjunction with cases under theirpurview and determine if a hold for evidenceplaced on the money is necessary or may benecessary.

Placing a Hold. Investigating officersrequesting a hold on money booked shallcomplete a Follow-Up Investigation, Form

3.14, and forward the form to the CommandingOfficer, Property Division.

Releasing a Hold. Investigating officersrequesting the release of a hold placed onmoney booked shall complete a Form 3.14documenting approval received from theDeputy District Attorney or Deputy CityAttorney, as appropriate, and a statement thatthe booked money is eligible for deposit intothe booked money deposit system. Uponapproval, retain a copy in the case package andforward the original to the CommandingOfficer, Property Division.

Note: Completion of the Form 3.14 stating thecurrency is eligible for deposit does not relievethe investigating officer of the responsibility tocomplete a Property Disposition Request, Form10.06, if appropriate.

540.70 PROCESSING NARCOTICS,TOLUENE AND DANGEROUS DRUGS,ETC. Narcotics, narcotic paraphernaliarequiring analysis, toluene, and dangerousdrugs shall be booked in or labeled with anAnalyzed Evidence-Narcotics Envelope, Form12.51.3 and a Narcotic Evidence BookingIdentification Card, Form 10.12.9.

Booking Employee’s Responsibility. Whenpackaging small quantities of narcotics,officers shall:

∗ Place the narcotics into a ziplock "baggie;"∗ Complete and sign a separate Narcotic

Evidence Booking Identification Card,Form 10.12.9, for each Analyzed Evidence-Narcotic Envelope;

Note: The Identification Card is not to beitemized on the report. Officers are alsoreminded that a separate AnalyzedEvidence-Narcotics Envelope shall be usedto contain the evidence obtained from eacharrestee.

∗ Place the "baggie" and the IdentificationCard into an Analyzed Evidence-Narcoticsenvelope, Form 12.51.3;

Exception: Plant material shall not be placedin a plastic bag before being placed into anAnalyzed Evidence Narcotics Envelope.

∗ Staple the flap shut as closely as possible tothe lower edge using two staples onopposite sides of the flap; and,

∗ Place Analyzed Evidence Seals, Form10.12.7, over each flap and the center seam.

Note: Narcotics evidence weighing a kilo ormore shall be placed in a plastic numberedproperty bag and placed in a cardboard boxalong with a Narcotic Evidence BookingIdentification Card. The box shall be sealedwith a high quality fiber reinforced tape. Acompleted Analyzed Evidence NarcoticsEnvelope, Form 12.51.3, shall be attached tothe outside of the cardboard box.

The package shall be sealed with a completedevidence label. A separate Analyzed EvidenceEnvelope and a Narcotic Evidence Booking

Identification Card shall be used for theevidence obtained from each arrestee. Ziplock"baggies" may be used to separate evidencewithin the Analyzed Evidence Envelope. Eachenvelope shall bear an item number and belisted on related reports. No other evidence,except narcotic paraphernalia requiringanalysis, shall be included in the sealedpackage. The Analyzed Evidence Envelopeshall not be filled above the fold of the upperflap of the package.

An officer seizing one kilogram or larger sizepackages of dangerous drugs or narcoticsevidence shall:

∗ Consecutively number the exterior of eachpackage wrapping;

∗ Complete the Narcotic Evidence BookingIdentification Card;

∗ Weigh the packages for gross weight andplace them in a cardboard box;

Note: "Gross weight" is the weight of eachindividual package of narcotics including thepackaging material. "Control weight" is theweight of a single box containing severalindividual packages. "Net weight" is theweight of the narcotics without any packagingmaterial. Refer to Manual Section 4/540.75 forhandling seizures exceeding 30 pounds netweight.

∗ Weigh the box and contents for controlweight and seal with wide, high quality tapeand a sealed evidence label;

∗ List the gross weight and control weight onthe Property Report; and,

∗ Complete an Analyzed Evidence-NarcoticsEnvelope, Form 12.51.3, and attach it to theoutside of the cardboard box, indicating thenumbered packages contained within andthe gross and control weight of the box andits contents.

Note: When booking large quantities ofnarcotics requiring numerous boxes, anAnalyzed Evidence-Narcotics Envelope shallbe attached to the outside of the first box ofeach item number on the Property Report,Form 10.01, which consists of one or moreboxes, and an Analyzed Evidence-NarcoticsTag, Form 10.26.6, shall be attached to eachremaining box. Each of the boxes shall containa Narcotic Evidence Booking IdentificationCard. The item number, box number, and totalnumber of boxes shall be documented on eachbox.

Exception: Kilogram-sized packages ofdangerous drugs or narcotics which have beenopened by Scientific Investigation Division(SID) personnel for net weighing shall beresealed, including the original packagingmaterial, inside a 33-gallon plastic bag, withhigh quality tape sealing the opening of thebag. The sealed bag containing the loose drugsor narcotics and original packaging materialshall then be placed inside a second bag of thesame type and similarly sealed. An evidenceseal shall be placed over the tape on the outsidebag.



The employee booking the evidence shall in allcases complete the upper portion of the formon the face of the envelope, including anyspecial instructions for the chemist making theanalysis.

Note: Refer to 4/540.72 for Phencyclidine,(PCP) or its analogs handling procedures.

Marijuana Cigarettes. Marijuana cigarettesshall be marked for identification. Eachcigarette and specific location from which thecigarette was taken shall be listed on relatedreports.

Paraphernalia Containing NarcoticsResidue. An officer booking paraphernaliacontaining narcotics residue shall:

∗ Place narcotics paraphernalia into a plasticziplock "baggie," size permitting, or into aplastic property bag if the residue may bedestroyed, or directly into an AnalyzedEvidence-Narcotics Envelope along with aNarcotic Evidence Booking IdentificationCard;

∗ Staple the envelope flap shut as close aspossible to the lower edge using two stapleson opposite sides; and,

∗ Place Analyzed Evidence Seals over eachflap and the center seam.

Exception: Paraphernalia containing plantmaterial residue shall be placed inside a coinenvelope, if practical, and placed directly intoan Analyzed Evidence-Narcotics Envelope.

Note: This section does not affect bookingprocedures for paraphernalia not containingnarcotics residue.

Toluene. When toluene or similar toxicsubstance is exposed to the air (e.g., glue on arag or in a paper bag), the evidence shall beplaced in a glass container.

Weights and Measures. "Substances" exceptgrowing marijuana, shall be counted and/orweighed. The actual weight in grams orpounds, specify whether net (withoutcontainer) or gross weight, shall be listed.

Note: Containers included in the gross weightshall be described in the Property Report, Form10.1 (or Arrest Report, Form 5.2, if used tobook the evidence).

Marijuana plants shall be counted. Theirnumber and net weight (minus dirt andcontainer) shall be recorded on the propertyreport. The plants shall be placed in a carton. Ifnecessary, the plants may be folded. Generally,the dirt and the container need not be booked.

Note: When practicable, the plants shall bephotographed prior to being uprooted.

Preliminary Chemical Test. A supervisor ordetective may perform a preliminary chemicaltest, on felony cases, to corroborate thearresting officer's opinion. A preliminary drugtest shall be completed for misdemeanorarrests. The officer performing the chemical

test, or, when no test is administered, asupervisor, Area of occurrence, shall:

∗ Verify the quantity of evidence listed on theProperty Report, Form 10.1, (or Releasefrom Custody (RFC) Report Continuation,Form 5.02.8; or Arrest face sheet, Form 5.2,if used to book the evidence);

∗ Witness the sealing of the evidence; and,∗ When available, approve the related

evidence report.

Note: Dispose of the Preliminary Drug TestKit once the test has been completed. The testkit shall not be booked into evidence.

The employee booking the evidence shall:

∗ Complete the Preliminary Drug Test Sectionof the Property Report, Form 10.1, (orRelease from Custody (RFC) ReportContinuation, Form 5.02.8; or Arrest facesheet, Form 5.2, if used to book theevidence);

∗ Enter the letter "P" in red on the upperright-hand corner of the Analyzed EvidenceEnvelope when the preliminary chemicaltest is positive; and,

∗ Any remaining portion of a unit of evidenceon which a preliminary drug test has beenperformed shall be placed in a separatepackage marked "Test Sample" andincluded in the Analyzed EvidenceEnvelope with other evidence.

Juvenile Arrested. When booking controlledsubstance evidence in juvenile cases indicatewhether the juvenile is "Detained" or"Released," in red on the upper left corner ofthe Analyzed Evidence-Narcotics Envelope,Form 12.51.3.

If a juvenile is detained or when narcotics or asubstance believed to be toxic for which nopreliminary chemical test is available isinvolved, complete an Analyzed EvidenceReport, Form 12.20; staple it to the AnalyzedEvidence Envelope.

Exception: The Analyzed Evidence Reportneed not be completed when a container liststoluene as one of the contents, and toluene isthe only reason for the booking.

Booking Location. Narcotics, narcoticparaphernalia requiring analysis, toluene, anddangerous drugs shall be booked into SID viathe courier unit. The item requiring analysisshall be placed into the narcotics storage lockerfor pick up by the SID courier unit.

540.71 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OFNARCOTICS WHEN NO ARRESTEE ISIN CUSTODY.Booking Officer’s Responsibility. Whenbooking a large quantity of a controlledsubstance (over 1000 grams net weight) intoevidence and no arrestee is in custody, thebooking officer shall request an extra copy ofthe Property Report, Form 10.01, to be sent toNarcotics Division. Booking officers shall alsowrite "Conduct a Chemical Analysis-Over

1000 grams" in the "Special Instructions toAnalyst" box of the Analyzed Evidence-Narcotics Envelope, Form 12.51.3.

Supervisor/Watch Commander’sResponsibility. The supervisor or watchcommander reviewing the Property Report,Form 10.01, shall verify that the "Extra CopyTo" box is checked and a copy is directed toNarcotics Division, prior to approving thereport, when a large quantity of a controlledsubstance is seized and no arrestee is incustody.

Narcotics Division’s Responsibility. Uponreceiving a Property Report indicating a largequantity of a controlled substance (over 1000grams net weight) has been booked intoevidence and no arrestee is in custody,Narcotics Division shall:

∗ Ensure that the evidence and a completedAnalyzed Evidence Report, Form 12.20, isdelivered to Scientific InvestigationDivision for analysis within 30 days ofbooking;

∗ Request Scientific Investigation Divisionforward a completed copy of the AnalyzedEvidence Report to Narcotics Division; and,

∗ Update the control file for the relatedevidence.

Scientific Investigation Division’sResponsibility. In cases when no arrestee is incustody, Scientific Investigation Division shallconduct a chemical analysis of large quantitiesof controlled substances (over 1000 grams netweight) booked into evidence within 30 daysof Scientific Investigation Division's receipt ofthe evidence. A completed copy of theAnalyzed Evidence Report, Form 12.20, shallbe forwarded to Narcotics Division.

540.72 PHENCYCLIDINE OR ITSANALOGS - HANDLING PROCEDURES.PCP shall refer to phencyclidine or any of itsanalogs.

Transporting Employee's Responsibility. Anemployee handling seized quantities ofphencyclidine (PCP) or its analogs shall:

∗ Not smoke;∗ Ensure that there are no flames in the

immediate vicinity;∗ Avoid unnecessary contact with the

container or cigarettes containing PCP;∗ Handle the container or cigarettes only

while wearing protective gloves;∗ Secure the container of PCP to avoid any

excess seepage;∗ Place the secured PCP container into a

plastic bucket containing vermiculite assoon as practicable and seal the bucket witha plastic lid; and,

∗ Place the sealed plastic bucket into the trunkof the police vehicle and transport it to theappropriate Department facility andimmediately book the PCP.

Note: The plastic bucket shall be booked onlyin those situations when the PCP spills into the



vermiculite while being transported. When thePCP spills, officers shall leave the PCP in thebucket and ensure that the bucket is sealed andbooked according to established bookingprocedures. Scientific Investigation Division(SID) can analyze the PCP even though it hasspilled into the vermiculite.

Booking Procedures. An employee bookingPCP or its analogs shall:

∗ When PCP is in a 1/2 gallon or largercontainer OR there is a total volume of 1/2gallon or more of PCP, the HazardousChemical Team (HCT), SID shall benotified. Officers shall not remove the PCPfrom the location without the approval ofthe HCT. Officers shall be guided by theHCT regarding the packaging and bookingof the PCP. During off-hours, the HCT canbe reached by contacting Detective SupportDivision;

∗ When the amount of PCP is between onepint and one-half gallon, officers shalltransport the PCP to Central or ValleyProperty Section for booking;

∗ When the amount of PCP is less than onepint, the PCP may be placed in thenarcotics/shelf storage locker for transfer toSID by the courier unit;

∗ Place the container of PCP into a numberedplastic property bag as soon as practicable;

∗ Heat seal the container and contents in atleast two unnumbered plastic property bagsafter the preliminary drug test when thesupervisor has elected to complete suchtests;

∗ Keep the container of PCP away from allwork spaces as much as practicable;

∗ Officers shall adhere to the properpackaging procedures for PCP as delineatedin the Property Booking Guide;

∗ Seek the advice of SID personnel when indoubt about the handling/packaging of PCP;

∗ Place the container of PCP in thenarcotics/shelf storage locker fortransportation to SID via the SID courierunit; and,

Note: If any amount of PCP is in a containerone-half gallon or larger, or the aggregateamount of PCP is one-half gallon or more, or ifother chemicals are present at the location ofseizure, the Hazardous Chemical Team (HCT),SID, shall be notified. Officers shall notremove the PCP from the location without theapproval of the HCT. Officers shall be guidedby the HCT regarding the packaging andbooking of the PCP. During off-hours, theHCT can be reached by contacting DetectiveSupport Division.

∗ Ensure that the PCP is placed in thenarcotics/shelf storage locker fortransportation to SID via the SID courier.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility.Commanding officers shall maintain anadequate supply of plastic gloves, buckets,vermiculite (absorbent material), and lids in asafe and accessible place as follows:

Patrol/Traffic/Metropolitan Divisions.Ensure that an adequate supply of equipment ismaintained in each patrol vehicle.

Detective/Specialized Divisions and Sections.Ensure that the equipment is available for usewhenever it is required by personnel undertheir command.

540.73 TEMPORARY STORAGE OFNARCOTICS EVIDENCE AT AREASTATIONS. Narcotics evidence may be storedat Area stations on a temporary basis when oneof the following criteria exists:

∗ No arrestee is in custody.∗ The arrestee is booked into the Area jail.∗ The arrestee is released from custody

(RFC).

Officers booking arrestees directly atMetropolitan Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Valley Jail Section, shall booknarcotics evidence directly into CentralProperty Section, 77th Street Property, orValley Property Section, Property Division,respectively.

Exception: Large quantities of narcotics inpowder, pill, plant, or liquid form (30 grams ormore of heroin, cocaine, or methamphetamine,500 or more pills, a kilogram or more of plantmaterial, or 1 pint or more of liquid PCP or itsanalogs) shall be immediately booked atCentral Property Section or Valley PropertySection by the booking employee.

When booking PCP in a one-half gallon orlarger container OR when there is a totalvolume of one-half gallon or more of PCP,officers shall comply with Manual Section4/540.72.

540.75 SEIZURES OF LARGEQUANTITIES OF CONTROLLEDSUBSTANCES IN EXCESS OF THIRTYPOUNDS.Officer’s Responsibility. Officers who seizequantities of a controlled substance in excessof thirty (30) pounds net weight, which are tobe booked into Department facilities, shallimmediately notify the Complaint Unit,Narcotics Division, and the HazardousChemical Team, SID. When SID is closed,notification shall be made to Detective SupportDivision.

Note: When booking PCP in a one-half gallonor larger container OR when there is a totalvolume of one-half gallon or more of PCP,officers shall comply with Manual Section4/540.72.

Exception: Officers assigned to, and activelyworking the Airport Detail (LAX), NarcoticsDivision, are exempted from the prescribednotification procedures and need not requestthe Complaint Unit, Narcotics Division, or theHazardous Chemical Team, SID, to respondwhen seizures of marijuana are made weighing150 pounds or less.

Scientific Investigation Division’sResponsibility. When notified of the seizure ofa controlled substance in excess of thirty (30)pounds net weight, which is going to bebooked into a Department facility, criminalistsfrom SID shall respond to the location wherethe narcotics are to be weighed and packaged.Scientific Investigation Division personnel willremove the required number of samples fortesting, and weigh and package the controlledsubstance in accordance with Departmentprocedures for packaging evidence. Theofficers responsible for the seizure shallmaintain control of the evidence and book itinto the Department property system.

Narcotics Division’s Responsibility. Whennotified of a seizure of a controlled substancein excess of thirty pounds net weight, which isgoing to be booked into a Department facility,officers from the Complaint Unit, NarcoticsDivision, shall determine if it is necessary torespond to the scene of the seizure. ComplaintUnit officers who respond to the scene of aseizure shall provide advice and guidance tothe booking officers. The Complaint Unitofficers shall ensure that the required numberof samples are removed by SID personnel andare properly identified on the Property Report.Complaint Unit officers shall also ensure thata required portion of the seizure is separatedfor possible court enhancements. Any portionof the seizure that qualifies for pre-trialdestruction shall be identified by ComplaintUnit personnel prior to booking and the propernotations made on the Property Report.

540.77 SEIZURES OF EXCESSIVEQUANTITIES OF NARCOTICS.

Excessive Quantities Defined. Excessivequantities of narcotics are those that exceed500 pounds or more of cocaine, heroin, orother narcotic substance in powder or pillform; 100 pounds or more of plant material; ormore than one-half gallon of liquidphencyclidine (PCP).

Note: If any other chemicals or narcoticcomponents are present at the location of theseizure, officers shall comply with ManualSection 4/212.49.

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers who seizeexcessive quantities of a controlled substancewhich are to be booked into Departmentfacilities shall immediately notify theComplaint Unit, Narcotics Division, and theHazardous Chemical Team, ScientificInvestigation Division (SID). When either SIDor Narcotics Division is closed, notificationsshall be made to Detective Support Division.

The officers responsible for the seizure shallmaintain control of the evidence until it iscompletely booked into existing or auxiliaryproperty storage and they have been relieved ofsecurity of the evidence by a MetropolitanDivision supervisor.

Narcotics Division’s Responsibility. Uponnotification of a seizure of an excessive



quantity of narcotics, the officer in charge ofthe Complaint Unit, Narcotics Division, shall:

∗ Contact the commanding officer or, ifunavailable, the watch commander ofProperty Division for the purpose ofdetermining if the quantity seized willexceed the storage capacity of PropertyDivision. If narcotics cannot be stored inexisting facilities, the officer in charge ofthe Complaint Unit shall proceed withbooking instructions provided by PropertyDivision;

∗ If necessary, contact Metropolitan Divisionfor personnel to provide security at theseizure location;

∗ If necessary, obtain a suitable vehicle totransport the seizure to an appropriatelocation such as a Property Division or SIDfacility or an auxiliary storage site; and,

∗ If needed, provide a driver or arrange forMetropolitan Division personnel to drivethe narcotics transportation vehicle.

Note: The Complaint Unit shall provide adviceand guidance to officers assigned to entitiesother than Narcotics Division who seizeexcessive quantities of narcotics.

Property Division’s Responsibility. When aProperty Division or SID facility receives aseizure of excessive quantities of narcoticswhich exceed normal narcotics storagecapabilities, the commanding officer or, ifunavailable, the watch commander of PropertyDivision shall:

∗ Determine if auxiliary storage must be used;∗ Contact Metropolitan Division for personnel

to provide security at the Property Divisionfacility or SID location in possession of thenarcotics and during the narcotics transfer;

∗ Contact Metropolitan Division to provide adriver for the narcotics transportationvehicle; and,

∗ Obtain a suitable vehicle to transport thenarcotics seizure to an auxiliary storage site.

Note: Property Division shall contactEmergency Services Division if a driver isneeded for a tractor-trailer type vehicle.

Scientific Investigation Division’sResponsibility. When notified of the seizure ofan excessive quantity of a controlled substancewhich is going to be booked into a Departmentor auxiliary facility, criminalists from SIDshall respond to the location where thenarcotics are to be weighed and packaged.Scientific Investigation Division personnel willremove the required number of samples fortesting, and weigh and repackage thecontrolled substance in accordance withDepartment procedures for packagingevidence.

Metropolitan Division’s Responsibility.Metropolitan Division shall develop site plansfor auxiliary storage of narcotics and select anadequate auxiliary storage location whenneeded.

When notified by Property Division that alarge seizure of narcotics will be temporarilystored in auxiliary storage the CommandingOfficer, Metropolitan Division, shall:

∗ As soon as possible, provide adequatepersonnel to secure the auxiliary storage;

∗ Provide a driver for the transportationvehicle and delivery vehicle to the seizurelocation;

∗ Transport the narcotics to auxiliary storage;and,

∗ Maintain security until the seizure can betransferred and destroyed.

540.80 BOOKING PERISHABLES.Perishables, when practicable, shall be retainedby the owner or agent (4/555.40). Price tagsand labels shall be retained.

Note: Consideration shall be given tophotographing the evidence prior to release.

When it is necessary to book perishableevidence, the Watch Commander, CentralProperty Section, shall be contacted for advice.(Ordinarily, perishables shall not be storedlonger than 48 hours).

540.90 PROCESSING EVIDENCE SEIZEDDURING SERVICE OF A SEARCHWARRANT. An employee seizing evidenceduring the service of a search warrant shall usethe Property Report, Form 10.01, as theinventory attachment to the Return to SearchWarrant (District Attorney's Office form). Theinventory shall be reported to the court within10 days after issuance of the warrant and shallinclude all property seized whether or not itwas listed on the search warrant. Items seized,which were listed on the search warrant, shallbe delineated on the Property Report(inventory attachment to the Return to searchWarrant) under the heading "Seized Pursuantto the Search Warrant-Listed."

Exceptions:

∗ If items are seized which were not listed onthe search warrant, they shall be listed onthe Property Report (inventory attachmentto the Return to Search Warrant) under theheading "Seized Pursuant to the SearchWarrant-Unlisted" and shall start with thenext sequential item number. Officers mustbe prepared to articulate probable causewhen unlisted items are seized during theservice of a search warrant.

Note: Both "listed" and "unlisted" items seizedduring the service of a search warrant requirea Court Order for Search Warrant Property,Form 10.18, authorizing disposition (4/565.10).

The current priority for listing bookedproperty, i.e., narcotics, money, firearms,should be used under each heading (5/030.40).

∗ An employee seizing copies of bank recordsor other documents obtained from a “thirdparty” source (i.e. real estate documents,telephone and Internet service providerrecords) may use the Follow-up

Investigation Report, Form 3.14, as theinventory attachment when the copies are tobe retained in the investigator’s case file.The Form 3.14 shall contain the followinginformation:

∗ Search Warrant number;∗ Date issued;∗ Name of judge issuing;∗ Court number;∗ Item seized; and,∗ The following statement:

"The copies of the records seized pursuantto this warrant and described above may beretained by the investigating officer. Theinvestigating officer may dispose of thecopies upon disposition of the case andexpiration of the time limit for notice ofappeal if no appeal is made."

543. WITHDRAWAL OF NARCOTICSEVIDENCE.543.10 WITHDRAWAL OF NARCOTICSEVIDENCE FROM PROPERTYDIVISION. Employees shall only withdrawnarcotics evidence from Property Divisionstorage when required for:

∗ Court;∗ Court-ordered destruction;∗ Administrative or other official hearing to

which the officer has been subpoenaed; or,∗ Special purposes for which the approval of

the Chief of Police has been obtained.

Department employees, including Los AngelesFire Department Investigators, who withdrawand return property, or who request the transferor release of property for any authorizedpurpose, shall provide the appropriateDepartment picture identification forverification of identity and provide a rightthumbprint and signature on the PropertyDivision Record.

543.20 WITHDRAWAL OF NARCOTICSFOR SPECIAL PURPOSES. Only narcoticswhich have been previously allocated for useby court order may be withdrawn for specialpurposes such as investigations or training.

Requesting Employee’s Responsibility. Anemployee requesting approval for thewithdrawal of narcotics for special purposesfrom Property Division storage shall:

∗ Complete an IntradepartmentalCorrespondence, Form 15.2, for thesignature of the concerned commandingofficer, with the following information:

∗ Date and time of intended use.∗ Necessity of request (training,

demonstration, etc.)∗ Identification of the narcotics source,

including DR number and item numberfrom the concerned report.

∗ Type and quantity of narcoticsnecessary.

∗ Proposed manner of use.



Note: The manner and necessity of theanticipated destruction of any narcoticsused for special purposes shall bedocumented in the request.

∗ Duration of use.∗ Benefits to the Department.∗ Employee responsible for withdrawal

and return of the narcotics.

∗ Submit the completed Form 15.2 to theconcerned commanding officer for approvaland signature;

Note: To ensure the required amount ofsecurity necessary for investigations involvingthe use of narcotics for special purposes, theForm 15.2 must be hand-carried between levelsof review and remain a confidential documentto any employee outside the review process.

∗ Upon the receipt of approval from the Chiefof Police, obtain a court order to withdrawnarcotics from the pre-allocated portionstored at Property Division;

Note: The original court order setting aside theinitial allotment of narcotics for use for specialpurposes is not generally a blanket orderauthorizing withdrawal. The requestingemployee shall obtain a court order for eachwithdrawal from the allotment. Court orderssetting aside allotments of narcotics for use intraining only may be blanket orders, andwithdrawals from this allotment do not requireseparate court orders.

∗ Set up an appointment with a Chief ForensicChemist, Scientific Investigation Division(SID), for analysis and weighing of thenarcotics;

∗ Present the approved request along with thecourt order to the Property Divisioncommanding officer or designee; and,

∗ Withdraw the requested narcotics andtransport them to SID for examination.

Return of Narcotics-Employee’sResponsibility. Upon completion of the use ofthe narcotics, the concerned employee shall:

∗ Repackage all items, including transformeditems;

∗ After making an appointment with a ChiefForensic Chemist at SID, deliver thenarcotics to SID for reanalysis andweighing;

∗ Following examination of the narcotics bySID, return the narcotics to PropertyDivision; and,

∗ Complete a Follow-Up InvestigationReport, Form 3.14, containing the followinginformation:

∗ Explanation of any transformation,adulteration, or change to the narcotics.

∗ If rebooked as evidence, the name andbooking number the narcotics werebooked to.

∗ Dates and times narcotics were checkedout, rebooked, or redeposited, and bywhom.

∗ DR number of the new evidencebooking, if rebooked as evidence.

∗ Number of narcotic packages checkedout and returned.

∗ Weight of narcotics packages,individually and en masse, checked outand returned.

∗ Forward a Form 15.2 approved by theconcerned commanding officer, thecompleted Form 3.14, and a copy of theSID Analyzed Evidence Report, Form12.20, documenting the analysis and weightof the narcotics, through channels to theChief of Staff, Office of the Chief of Police,advising of completion of the use ofnarcotics for a special purpose.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Thecommanding officer of an employee requestingnarcotics use for a special purpose shall reviewthe request and, upon approval, sign andforward the Form 15.2 requesting authorizationfor the withdrawal of narcotics to Office ofOperations, via Narcotics Division, forappropriate action.

Exception: When requesting the withdrawalof narcotics for a special purpose, theCommanding Officer, Internal Affairs Group,shall obtain approval from, and forward allrelated correspondence directly to the Chief ofStaff.

Commanding Officer, Narcotics Division’sResponsibility. The Commanding Officer,Narcotics Division, shall:

∗ Ensure that an appropriate quantity ofnarcotics is set aside, via court order, atProperty Division for use for specialpurposes;

∗ Coordinate all requests approved by theCOP with the requesting employee'scommanding officer;

∗ Forward all denied requests to therequesting employee's commanding officer;

∗ Maintain a file of all approved and deniedrequests; and,

∗ Upon approving a request for narcotics use,forward the Form 15.2 to Office ofOperations.

Exception: Requests from the CommandingOfficer, Internal Affairs Group, shall besubmitted to and handled by the Chief of Staff.

Office of Operations’ Responsibility. Uponapproving a request for approval of narcoticsuse, the Director, Office of Operations, shallforward the Form 15.2 with the Office'srecommendation to the Office of the Chief ofPolice.

Chief of Staff’s Responsibility. The Chief ofStaff shall:

∗ Review all requests for narcotics usesubmitted by Internal Affairs Group;

∗ Upon approving a request for the use ofapportioned narcotics, forward the approvedForm 15.2 to the Office of the Chief ofPolice; and,

∗ Forward all requests approved or denied bythe Chief of Police for Internal AffairsGroup to the Commanding Officer, InternalAffairs Group.

Office of the Chief of Police’s Responsibility.Upon receipt of a request to withdraw narcoticsfrom Property Division, the Chief of Staff,Office of the Chief of Police, shall:

∗ Review and submit the request to the Chiefof Police;

∗ Upon approval, return the original Form15.2 to the Commanding Officer, NarcoticsDivision.

∗ Maintain a file of all requests; and,∗ If the request is denied, forward the Form

15.2 along with the denial to theCommanding Officer, Narcotics Division.

Exception: Requests from Internal AffairsGroup shall be forwarded to the CommandingOfficer, Internal Affairs Group.

Property Division’s Responsibility. PropertyDivision personnel involved in the withdrawaland return of narcotics evidence shall:

∗ Verify the Department picture identificationof the employee withdrawing the narcoticsand obtain their right thumbprint andsignature on the appropriate PropertyDivision record;

∗ Upon receipt of the original Form 15.2bearing the signature of the Chief of Policeand the original court order authorizingwithdrawal of the specified amount ofnarcotics, release the specified amount ofnarcotics to the employee; and,

∗ Maintain a file of the requests forwithdrawal of narcotics authorized by theChief of Police.

Scientific Investigation Division’sResponsibility. Scientific InvestigationDivision personnel involved in examination ofnarcotics to be used for a special purpose shall:

∗ Verify the identification of the employeerequesting examination of narcotics;

∗ Analyze, package, seal, and weigh allnarcotics packages individually and enmasse upon checkout and return in thepresence of the requesting employee;

∗ Complete an Analyzed Evidence Report,Form 12.20, documenting the results of thetesting and weighing of the narcotics; and,

∗ Forward a copy of the analyzed evidencereport to the Commanding Officer,Narcotics Division, and the requestingemployee's commanding officer.

543.25 WITHDRAWAL OF NARCOTICSFOR CONTROLLED DELIVERY. Officersrequesting withdrawal of narcotics for use incontrolled deliveries shall follow proceduresdelineated in Manual Section 4/543.20.

Requesting Employee’s Responsibility. Anemployee receiving approval for thewithdrawal of narcotics for use in a controlleddelivery shall:



∗ Present the approved Form 15.2 along withthe approved court order to PropertyDivision;

∗ Complete a Property Disposition/UpdateRequest, Form 10.06;

∗ Obtain a signature on a Property CourtReceipt, Form 10.03, from the officer orcase agent assuming responsibility forbooking the narcotics in the jurisdictiondelivered; and,

∗ Return the Form 10.03 to Property Divisionas soon as possible.

Property Division’s Responsibility. PropertyDivision employees involved in the withdrawalof narcotics for use in a controlled deliveryshall:

∗ Verify the Department picture identificationof the employee requesting the narcoticsand obtain their right thumbprint andsignature on the appropriate PropertyDivision record;

∗ Ensure the employee requesting thenarcotics completes a Form 10.03;

∗ Provide a Form 10.10 to the employeerequesting the withdrawal of narcotics; and,

∗ Upon receipt of the original Form 15.2bearing the signature of the Chief of Policeand the original court order authorizingwithdrawal of the specified amount ofnarcotics, release the specified amount ofnarcotics to the employee requesting.

543.30 EXIGENT CIRCUMSTANCES-APPROVAL. Narcotics may be removed fromProperty Division in exigent circumstanceswhen needed for an ongoing investigationwhich requires the immediate use of narcotics.The concerned employee shall complete aForm 15.2, with all required information,requesting the immediate withdrawal of thenarcotics and submit the Form 15.2 for theapproval and signature of the concernedcommanding officer. Upon review, thecommanding officer shall obtain telephonicapproval from the Commanding Officer,Narcotics Division. Upon approval, theconcerned commanding officer shall obtainapproval from the Director, Office ofOperations. Final approval shall be obtainedfrom the Office of the Chief of Police or Chiefof Staff if the Chief of Police is unavailable.

The approved Form 15.2, bearing signaturesobtained telephonically from the CommandingOfficer, Narcotics Division; Director, Office ofOperations; and the Chief of Police or Chief ofStaff, shall be presented to Property Divisionalong with the court order to obtain theevidence. A copy of the telephonicallycompleted Form 15.2 shall be forwarded by therequesting commanding officer to the office ofthe Chief of Police via the commandingofficers of Narcotics Division and Office ofOperations, the next administrative workingday. If Property Division is closed, theconcerned commanding officer shall contactDetective Support Division to dispatch anauthorized Property Division employee to openthe narcotics storage area.

Note: Officers assigned to Internal AffairsGroup requesting narcotics to be removed inexigent circumstances shall, upon approvalfrom the Commanding Officer, Internal AffairsGroup, obtain approval from the Chief of Staff.Final approval shall be obtained from the Chiefof Police.

544. PROPERTY SIGN-OUT.544.10 LONG-TERM PROPERTY SIGN-OUT. When necessary, property is eligible forlong-term sign-out for such reasons as alengthy analysis, investigative needs, etc. Along-term sign-out may be obtained at the timeof the initial sign-out or anytime thereafter.

With a long-term sign-out, property may besigned out for 60 days before a Notice ofOverdue Signed-Out Property, Form 10.05.1,will be sent. A Notice will be sent every 30days thereafter until the property has beenreturned to Property Division or a completedProperty Court Receipt has been received byProperty Division.

545. EVIDENCE TO COURT.545.05 OBTAINING EVIDENCE FROM APROPERTY DIVISION FACILITY FORTRANSPORTATION TO COURT.Department employees, including Los AngelesFire Department Investigators, who withdrawand return property, or who request the transferor release of property for any authorizedpurpose shall:

∗ Furnish the Property Officer with the DRnumber under which the property wasbooked;

∗ Provide the appropriate Department pictureidentification for verification of identity andprovide a right thumbprint and signature onthe Property Division Record;

∗ Present the subpoena or notice, covering allproperty requested for court or otheradministrative proceedings such as a paroleor probation hearing;

∗ Complete a transfer and release transactionon the appropriate property division record;and,

∗ Be responsible for safeguarding suchevidence until it has been received by thecourt or returned to storage.

Note: The Property Officer shall include theappropriate number of Property Court Receiptsto the employee at the time the evidence iswithdrawn.

Booking Employee. The employee who booksevidence shall be responsible for transportingthat evidence to court as follows:

∗ In misdemeanor cases, including thosewhere the defendant was originally bookedon a felony charge and only a misdemeanorcomplaint was filed.

∗ In juvenile cases.∗ In narcotic and dangerous drug cases.

Investigating Officer. The investigatingofficer shall be responsible for transporting

evidence (except dangerous drugs andnarcotics) in adult felony cases.

Expert Witness: The employee who is to offerexpert testimony regarding an analysis shalltransport evidence requiring special handling.The expert witnesses shall inform theinvestigating officer or booking officer of theirintention to transport the evidence.

Note: No volatile or dangerous materialswhich include, but are not limited to, objects orsubstances found to contain Phencyclidine(PCP), any of its analogs, or either in any formshall be brought into any courtroom unlessspecifically requested by the court

545.10 OBTAINING ANALYZEDEVIDENCE FROM THE EVIDENCECONTROL UNIT, SCIENTIFICINVESTIGATION DIVISION. An employeerequesting analyzed evidence from theEvidence Control Unit (ECU), ScientificInvestigation Division (SID), for courtpurposes shall:

∗ Complete an entry on the SID CourtEvidence Request Log maintained at allSID courier temporary storage lockers, andCentral and Valley Property Sections, atleast three court days prior to the scheduledcourt date;

Exception: An employee receiving a subpoenaless than three court days prior to a scheduledcourt date may contact the ECU telephonicallyduring business hours and request that theevidence be delivered by the SID courier to theSID courier temporary storage locker mostconvenient for pick up. Employees shall notsign out evidence at the ECU.

∗ Request that the evidence be delivered toany SID courier temporary storage lockermost convenient to the employee for pickup;

∗ Prior to withdrawing the evidence from theSID courier temporary storage locker,notify the on-duty watch commander of thepresence of the evidence and request thelocker to be opened and the evidence to beremoved;

Note: Any evidence which does not qualify forplacement into temporary storage, e.g., PCP,explosives, etc., shall not be delivered to anSID courier temporary storage locker for courtpurposes.

∗ Sign the Court Evidence Request Logaccompanying the evidence, ensure thatfour copies of the Property Court Receiptare attached, and transport the evidence tocourt;

Note: If four copies of the Property CourtReceipts are not attached, the employee canphotocopy the additional number needed.

∗ Following its presentation in court, returnevidence on (the same day) to the SIDcourier temporary storage locker fromwhich it was removed;



∗ Request the on-duty watch commander toverify the packaging is intact and documentthe return on the Court Evidence ControlLog;

∗ If the item is needed in court the nextcalendar day, mark the Court EvidenceControl Log and attach a note to theevidence indicating the evidence is neededfor another day in court; and,

∗ If an evidence package is opened in court,the court will order the employee to resealthe package "on the record." If an employeebelieves a sealed evidence package may beopened in court, the employee shall have inhis or her possession extra evidence sealswith which to reseal the package. In theevent that the resealing is not entered "onthe record," the employee shall reseal thepackage in the presence of an on-dutysupervisor or the property officer receivingthe item back into evidence at the locationfrom which it was signed out.

Exception: If narcotics evidence is not orderedresealed by the court "on the record," theemployee shall request to be allowed to resealthe evidence "on the record" prior to beingreleased from the witness stand. PropertyDivision facilities will not accept openednarcotics packages that have not been resealed"on the record."

Note: The Los Angeles County Municipal andSuperior Courts have adopted a policy whichstates that all controlled substances as definedin 11007 H&S, which includes Schedule 1-4narcotics as defined in 11054-11057 H&S, arehazardous materials. As such, they shall onlybe taken into a court in a sealed package. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, cocaine andmarijuana. Manual Section 4/545.05 prohibitsPCP, any of its analogs, or ether in any formfrom being brought into any courtroom unlessspecifically requested by the court.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Supervisorswitnessing the removal of evidence from SIDcourier temporary storage lockers for courtshall:

∗ Upon request, remove the evidence for courtfrom the SID courier temporary storagelocker;

∗ Have the employee sign the Court EvidenceControl Log and retain the log in the storagelocker;

∗ Deliver the evidence to the requestingemployee;

∗ Sign the Court Evidence Control Log in the"Supervisor Witness" box;

∗ Upon return of the court evidence, verifythe packaging is intact;

∗ If the packaging has been opened, verify thepackage has been resealed;

∗ Ensure the employee signs the CourtEvidence Control Log in the appropriatespace; and,

∗ Sign the Court Evidence Control Log in the"Supervisor Witness" box.

Courier’s Responsibility. The SID courier

transporting evidence to SID courier temporarystorage lockers for court shall:

∗ Place the requested item into the SIDcourier temporary storage locker with fourcopies of the Property Court Receipt;

∗ Return to the ECU any evidence no longerneeded for court, or any Property CourtReceipts indicating the evidence has beenretained by the court; and,

∗ Document and notify the ECU if evidenceis needed for subsequent days in court.

Scientific Investigation Division’sResponsibility. Upon being notified thatevidence stored at SID is needed for court,concerned ECU personnel shall:

∗ Ensure four copies of the Property CourtReceipt are prepared and accompany theevidence requested;

∗ Instruct the courier to transport the evidenceto the requested SID courier temporarystorage locker;

∗ Maintain a control file of all evidence whichis left in SID courier temporary storagelockers for subsequent days in court;

∗ Maintain a control file of all requests andProperty Court Receipts; and,

∗ Forward the original copy of the PropertyCourt Receipt to Records and IdentificationDivision (R&I).

545.11 PHOTOGRAPHS OF VOLATILEOR DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES TOCOURT. An employee, receiving a subpoenain a case for which volatile or dangerousevidence was booked (4/545.10), shall:

∗ Telephonically notify Photographic Section,Scientific Investigation Division, andrequest the photographs of the substance;

Note: If the request is made less than five (5)court days prior to the scheduled court date, therequesting employee shall pick up thephotographs at Scientific InvestigationDivision.

∗ Obtain a copy of the Analyzed EvidenceReport, Form 12.20, of the evidence fromProperty Division.

∗ Take the photographs and the AnalyzedEvidence Report, Form 12.20, to court.

∗ Retain the photographs and the AnalyzedEvidence Report, Form 12.20, for futurecourt use when not received into evidence.

545.13 PHOTOGRAPHS OF NARCOTICSEVIDENCE FOR COURT.

Officer’s Responsibility. An employeehaving been subpoenaed for a narcotics courthearing shall:

∗ Retrieve the photograph(s) of the narcoticsfrom his/her Subpoena Control Officer(SCO) and take only the photographs tocourt; and,

∗ Upon the completion of the court hearing,notify the SCO that the photograph(s) wasadmitted into court or return any

photograph(s) to the SCO if they were notadmitted or the case was continued.

Scientific Investigation Division’sResponsibility. Scientific InvestigationDivision (SID) shall:

∗ Photograph all narcotic evidence andmaintain liaison with the Superior andMunicipal courts to ensure theDepartment’s procedure for photographingnarcotics evidence continues to be incompliance with the courts’ standards.

Subpoena Control Officer’s Responsibility. The Subpoena Control Officer receiving thephotographs from SID shall:

∗ Maintain a file of the photographs by DRnumber and available for use by the servedemployee.

Property Disposition Coordinator’sResponsibility. The Property DispositionCoordinator (PDC), upon receiving instructionfor the disposition of all narcotics booked inrelation to a case shall notify the SCO that therelated photograph(s) can be destroyed.

545.20 EVIDENCE RECEIVED BYCOURT. When evidence is received by thecourt, the employee shall:

∗ Have the court clerk sign and affix the courtstamp to the Property Court Receipt. Onecopy of the Property Court Receipt may beretained by the court.

∗ Two copies of the completed Property CourtReceipt shall be returned to the locationfrom which the evidence was signed out, nolater than the next working day.

∗ If the evidence was signed out from the SIDcourier temporary storage locker, theemployee shall close out the entry on theCourt Evidence Control Log and retain acopy of the completed Property CourtReceipt if desired. The completed PropertyCourt Receipt must be returned the sameday the evidence was signed out.

Note: The courts have indicated they will nolonger take physical custody of any hazardousmaterial after it is admitted into evidence. Theofficer shall return the evidence to the sign outlocation.

∗ If some evidence items are retained by thecourt and others are returned to the SIDcourier temporary storage locker or aProperty Division facility, the employeeshall have the court clerk sign the PropertyCourt Receipt for the items retained.Indicate on the receipt which items wereretained and which items were returned tostorage.

Note: In the event that the court refuses to signfor any property retained in its possession, theemployee shall telephonically notify theProperty Division or SID facility from whichthe property was issued to enter a long-termcourt sign out status in APIMS. The name ofthe person notified shall be noted on the Court



Evidence Control Log.

545.25 EVIDENCE PACKAGES OPENEDIN COURT. If an evidence package is openedin court, the court will order the employee toreseal the package "on the record." If anemployee believes a sealed evidence packagemay be opened in court, the employee shallhave in his or her possession extra evidenceseals with which to reseal the package. In theevent that the resealing is not entered "on therecord," the employee shall reseal the packagein the presence of an on-duty supervisor or theproperty officer receiving the item back intoevidence at the location from which it wassigned out. The supervisor or property officershall sign the receipt and include his or herserial number. The Property Court Receiptshall indicate which items were returned.

Exception: If narcotics evidence is not orderedresealed by the court "on the record," theemployee shall request to be allowed to resealthe evidence "on the record" prior to beingreleased from the witness stand. PropertyDivision facilities will not accept openednarcotics packages that have not been resealed"on the record".

545.30 EVIDENCE RELEASED INCOURT. If property transported to court is notreceived into evidence, and is no longer neededfor court proceedings, and the investigatingofficer (I/O) intends to release any or all of theitems to an owner or agent, the I/O and theowner/agent shall return to the sign-outlocation to complete the necessary releaseprocedures. Property is not eligible forrelease at court if it was signed out for courtpurposes. If the owner/agent is not able toreturn with the officer, he/she shall beinstructed to return to the original propertysign-out location during operating hours. TheI/O shall ensure that disposition instructionsare entered into APIMS by the PropertyDisposition Coordinator (PDC), as soon aspossible.

Exception: Money booked as evidence inconnection with a gambling arrest (4/565.30)or property booked as contraband, shall not bereleased to a claimant unless so ordered by thecourt.

Note: If the court has received the evidenceinto its custody and chooses to release it to aconcerned party while at court, it is allowed todo so. The investigating officer shall returneach signed Property Court Receipt, Form10.03, to the property sign-out location.

An employee shall not solicit or receive anyfirearm or other property from a criminal court,unless the employee was the legal owner of theproperty at the time of its seizure.

545.40 PROPERTY RETURNED FROMCOURT. Immediately following a courtappearance, property which is not accepted bythe court shall be returned to the property roomfrom which it was withdrawn. If the propertyroom is closed, the transporting officer shallplace the property in the approved interim

storage container and document the return ofthe property on the Property Division BookingRecord, Form 10.04. The date and time theproperty was returned shall be noted in the"Court Return" column.

If evidence was signed out from the ECU viathe SID courier unit, the evidence shall bereturned to the appropriate SID couriertemporary storage locker from which it wasremoved on the same day. The "Package orReceipt Returned By" box on the CourtEvidence Control Log shall be appropriatelycompleted.

When disposition instructions can bedetermined, a completed PropertyDisposition/Update Request, Form 10.6, shallaccompany the returned property.

Note: When property is to be placed in interimstorage, the concerned watch commander orofficer in charge shall verify the accuracy ofeach entry on the Form 10.04 by initialing the"W/C" column.

550. DISPOSITION OF PROPERTY.

550.05 DISPOSITION OF PROPERTY-RESPONSIBILITY.Area/Specialized Division, CommandingOfficer. Area/specialized division,commanding officers shall designate anemployee under their command as the PropertyDisposition Coordinator (PDC). The PDC shallbe responsible and accountable for eachProperty Disposition Request, Form 10.06, andProperty Disposition Request Summary, Form10.06.1, received.

Note: The PDC shall be assigned as a memberof the Area/specialized division commandingofficer's staff and, within Areas, this positionshall not be delegated to patrol or detectivedivisions.

Property Disposition Coordinator’sResponsibility. The duties of the PropertyDisposition Coordinator (PDC), shall include,but are not limited to:

∗ Obtaining the monthly DispositionSummary Report, Form 10.06.1, by theseventh day of each month;

Exception: Previously identified specializedunits that do not have full-time PDCs will besent the Disposition Summary Report byProperty Division. The Report must becompleted and returned to Property Divisionby the 25th day of the month.

∗ Conducting all preliminary case research;∗ Accessing the appropriate automated court

systems and Department records, in thefurtherance of case research;

Note: The system to be accessed include, butare not limited to, the NetworkCommunications System (NECS), theConsolidated Crime Analysis Database(CCAD), the Prosecutor’s ManagementInformation System (PROMIS), the Municipal

Court Information Management System(MCIS), and the Expanded Traffic RecordSystem (ETRS).

∗ Providing disposition instructions for allnarcotics booked in relation to a case andshall notify the Subpoena Control Officer(SCO) that the related photograph(s) can bedestroyed;

∗ Providing disposition instructions for allnon-firearm-related misdemeanor cases andproperty booked as non-evidence;

∗ Forwarding the Item Detail Summary, Form10.06.2, with the preliminary case researchinformation for all felonies, andmisdemeanors involving firearms, to thedetective commanding officer fordistribution to the appropriate investigatingofficer (I/O);

Note: If case research indicates that an“Investigative Hold” is appropriate for anycase, the PDC may place a hold without theI/O’s approval.

∗ Updating the Primary Investigative Unit(PIU) responsibility section wheninvestigative responsibility for bookedproperty has been transferred to anotherentity. The DR number shall be “Rerouted”to the assuming I/O’s division and the“Related Employee” section updated withthe I/O information. Once the PIUresponsibility has been transferred, an“Investigative Hold” should be placed onthe property;

Note: Responsibility for the disposition ofbooked property shall not be rerouted to otherAreas/divisions as a result of personneltransfers. The PDC shall telephonically contactthe transferred employee(s) if needed.

∗ Updating APIMS by the last day of themonth;

∗ Retaining all signed Item Detail Summariesin accordance with records retentionrequirements for original documents;

∗ Ensuring that co-defendants are listed asadditional suspects or arrestees in APIMS;

∗ Performing ad-hoc queries in APIMS asrequested; and,

∗ Updating APIMS when a completed Form10.06.0, with disposition instructions isreceived prior to the DR number appearingon a Disposition Summary Report.

Detective Commanding Officer’sResponsibility. Upon receipt of an Item DetailSummary, the detective commanding officershall:

∗ Distribute the Item Detail Summary to theI/O responsible for the dispositioninstructions;

∗ Ensure that each completed Item DetailSummary contains all required information;and,

∗ Ensure that each completed Item DetailSummary is returned to the PDC by the20th day of each month.



Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Uponreceipt of an Item Detail Summary,investigating officers shall:

∗ Ascertain the correct dispositioninstructions for each Item Detail Summary;

∗ Ensure that co-defendants are listed asadditional suspects or arrestees in APIMS;

∗ Complete the Item Detail Summary byentering the appropriate dispositioninstruction(s) such as: Investigative Hold,Authorized for Release, Authorized forDisposal, or Reroute;

Note: Holds on property shall not exceed six-month increments with the exception ofproperty booked in connection with homicide,rape, or officer-involved shootinginvestigations. Such holds may be placed inone-year increments.

∗ Include the designated recipient’s full nameand address, and item numbers whenproperty is to be released;

Note: Investigating officers are required tosign the Item Detail Summary for itemsauthorized for disposal or release.

∗ Complete a Property Disposition/UpdateRequest, Form 10.06, and forward it to thePDC for input into APIMS if an Item DetailSummary has not been generated andproperty is available for release ordisposition; and,

∗ Present a completed PropertyDisposition/Update Request to a propertyofficer if property must be immediatelyreleased to a waiting individual and thePDC is not available. The property officershall input the release instructions intoAPIMS and release the property.

Note: If property is booked at another PropertyDivision facility, a property officer shall inputthe release instructions into APIMS and referthe person to whom the property is beingreleased to the appropriate property room.

A teletype to a Property Division facility inorder to release property is appropriate onlywhen a PDC or Area property officer is notavailable and an immediate release isnecessary.

550.10 DISPOSITIONAUTHORIZATION. Authorization forproperty disposition (Investigative Hold,Authorized for Release, Authorized forDisposal, or Reroute) may be given only by theinvestigating officer, booking officer, orProperty Disposition Coordinator.Authorization shall be effected by:

∗ Completing a Property Disposition/UpdateRequest and forwarding it to the PDC forinput into APIMS; or,

∗ Presenting a completed PropertyDisposition/Update Request to a propertyofficer if property must be immediatelyreleased to a waiting individual and thePDC is not available.

Note: If property is booked at another PropertyDivision facility, a property officer shall inputthe release instructions into APIMS and referthe person to whom the property is beingreleased to the appropriate property room.

A teletype to a Property Division facility inorder to release property is appropriate onlywhen a PDC or Area property officer is notavailable and an immediate release isnecessary.

Exception: Property Division employees mayauthorize the disposition of unclaimedproperty.

Employees responsible for authorizing thedisposition of property shall cause theimmediate release of an arrestee's propertywhen the employees become aware that:

∗ The arrestee is released from custody andno charges are filed; or,

∗ The property is no longer required forinvestigation or prosecution; or,

∗ There is no legal basis to justify holding theproperty.

Note: When the property is not released, thearrestee should be advised of the reason forretention and, if appropriate, the proceduresrequired to obtain the property. Property shallbe released only to the person authorized on aProperty Disposition Request or propertyrelease teletype.

550.12 CHARGE-BASED EVIDENCEDISPOSITION. The investigative unit havingresponsibility for the filing of a booking chargeshall also be responsible for filing anyadditional charges for which prima facieevidence exists in the arrest report. However,if another Department entity is better suited tohandle the follow-up investigation andsubsequent disposition of property, thatresponsibility may be transferred after mutualagreement. The following procedures shall beadhered to when conducting follow-upinvestigations and determining disposition ofevidence booked in connection withinvestigations and arrests.

Investigations and Arrests by InvestigativePersonnel. Investigating officers who bookevidence as a result of an arrest, investigation,or for any other reason shall be responsible forthe follow-up investigation and disposition ofthat evidence.

The investigative officer shall confer with anyother Department entity handling a caseinvolving the booked property to determineresponsibility for disposition of the property. Ifno other entity is handling a case involving thebooked property, the investigative officer shallconfer with the Department entity havingsufficient expertise to determine if that entitywill assume the responsibility for the follow-upinvestigation and disposition of property.

Note: The concerned investigative officershall continue to be responsible for obtainingan approved Court Order for Search Warrant

Property, Form 10.18, prior to authorizingdisposition of evidence seized pursuant to asearch warrant (4/565.10).

Felony Investigations and Arrests byUniformed or Non-Investigative Personnel.The responsibility for the follow-upinvestigation and authorization of evidencedisposition is determined by the bookingcharge. Reports shall be distributed to anydivision handling a case which involves thebooked evidence.

Follow-up investigation and evidencedisposition responsibilities for felony cases areas follows:

∗ Adults or Juveniles Booked on a FelonyNon-Narcotics Charge: The follow-upinvestigation and disposition of all evidencein all cases for which an adult or juvenilearrestee was booked on a felonynon-narcotics charge (except those caseshandled by traffic or specialized detectivedivisions or any other Department entityresponsible for follow-up investigation offelony crimes) shall be the responsibility ofthe concerned operations support division.If the arrest involves additional narcoticscharges, the concerned operations supportdivision shall also file related narcoticscharges and perform related investigationand disposition of evidence.

∗ Adults Booked on a Felony NarcoticsCharge: The follow-up investigation anddisposition of all evidence for which anadult arrestee was booked on a felonynarcotics charge shall be the responsibilityof Narcotics Division. Narcotics Divisionshall also file non-narcotics charges forwhich prima facie evidence exists in thearrest report and perform relatedinvestigation and disposition of evidence.

Note: Prior to filing non-narcotics charges,Narcotics Division detectives shall contacteach detective division which is currentlyhandling a case involving the booked propertyor which may be interested in developing acase involving the property. If no other entityis handling a case involving the bookedproperty, the investigative officer shall conferwith the Department entity having sufficientexpertise to determine if that entity will assumethe responsibility for the follow-upinvestigation and disposition of property.

∗ Juveniles Booked on a Felony NarcoticsCharge: The follow-up investigation anddisposition of all evidence for which ajuvenile arrestee was booked on a felonynarcotics charge shall be the responsibilityof Juvenile Division. Juvenile Division shallalso file non-narcotics charges for whichprima facie evidence exists in the arrestreport.

Note: Prior to filing non-narcotics charges,Juvenile Division detectives shall liaise withthe concerned detective division.



∗ Adults and Juveniles Booked Together ona Felony Narcotics Charge: The follow-upinvestigation and disposition of all evidencein cases involving adults and juvenilesarrested together shall be handled permutual agreement between NarcoticsDivision and Juvenile Division.

Misdemeanor Investigations and Arrests byUniformed or Non-Investigative Personnel.Authorization for the disposition of evidencefor misdemeanor cases, including felony casesfiled as misdemeanors, shall be theresponsibility of the concerned PDC.

Note: The Narcotics Division PDC shall beresponsible for 11550 H&S (Being Under-the-Influence of Controlled Substances)misdemeanor evidence. The Juvenile DivisionPDC shall be responsible for juvenilemisdemeanor narcotics arrests and childabuse-related evidence for assigned cases.

Transfer of Investigative Responsibility.When the follow-up investigation is outside theinvestigative officer's area of expertise, theresponsibility for the follow-up investigationmay be transferred. The commanding officer ofthe original investigative officer shall conferwith the commanding officer of the entityhaving expertise regarding the transfer ofresponsibility for follow-up investigation andsubsequent property disposition.

When the responsibility for the follow-upinvestigation and disposition of property istransferred from one division to another, thecommanding officer of the transferringdivision shall ensure that a Follow-upInvestigation, Form 3.14, is completed. Onecopy of the Form 3.14 shall be kept in theconcerned case package at the originaldivision, one copy shall be forwarded to thereceiving division, and one copy shall beforwarded to the property room where theevidence is stored.

When an investigating officer assumesinvestigative responsibility for a case in whichproperty has been booked under anotherdivision's DR number, the investigatingofficer shall ensure that the PrimaryInvestigative Unit (PIU) responsibility in theAutomated Property Information ManagementSystem is transferred to the investigatingofficer's division. The investigating officershall notify his/her Property DispositionCoordinator (PDC) who shall "Reroute" theconcerned DR number to the investigatingofficer's division. The PDC shall also updatethe "Related Employee" section with theconcerned investigating officer's information.Once the PIU responsibility has beentransferred, the PDC should place an"Investigative Hold" on the property.

If the entity with expertise elects not toconduct the follow-up investigation, theoriginator shall complete an Investigator's CaseProgress Log, Form 1.44, documenting such,including the declining officer's name, serialnumber, and unit of assignment. The original

entity shall then maintain responsibility for thefollow-up investigation and propertydisposition.

550.20 RELEASE NOTIFICATIONS. Whena PDC enters release instructions into APIMS,a Property Owners Notification, Form 10.14,will automatically be generated. PropertyDivision personnel are responsible for mailingthe notice.

Note: When evidence is to be released to anarrestee who is in custody, the investigator orarresting officer shall inform the arrestee toobtain the evidence at the location where it isbeing stored.

The property shall be held in the Area ofbooking for a minimum of ten days followingnotification, at which time it may betransferred to Central Property Section orValley Property Section.

550.25 DISPOSITION OF COUNTERFEITCURRENCY. Counterfeit currency shall be“Authorized for Release” to the United StatesSecret Service under the “Government Agent”code.

Property Division shall transfer counterfeitcurrency to Central or Valley Property Sectionpending relinquishment to the United StatesSecret Service.

550.30 DISPOSITION OF LICENSEPLATES. When license plates are no longerneeded as evidence, they shall be “Authorizedfor Disposal” by the concerned employee.

Property Division shall transfer the licenseplates to Central or Valley Property Sectionpending relinquishment to the CaliforniaDepartment of Motor Vehicles (DMV).License plates shall not be released toindividuals. Persons requesting the release oflicense plates shall be referred to the DMV.

Exception: Personalized license plates areeligible for release to the owner or agent. If theowner or agent cannot be located, the licenseplate shall be “Authorized for Disposal.”

552. DESTRUCTION OF EVIDENCE.

552.02 PRE-TRIAL AUTHORIZATIONFOR THE DESTRUCTION OF LARGEQUANTITIES OF CONTROLLEDSUBSTANCES.Responsibility of Commanding Officer,Property Division. Upon determining that aquantity of a booked controlled substance, exceeding the limits defined in Health andSafety Code Section 11479 et seq., poses asecurity or storage problem, the CommandingOfficer, Property Division, shall direct aPre-Trial Narcotics Destruction Authorization,Form 10.11, to the Commanding Officer,Narcotics Division, via the CommandingOfficer, Administrative and Technical ServicesBureau.

Responsibility of Commanding Officer,Narcotics Division. The Commanding Officer,

Narcotics Division, shall review and coordinateall requests for the pre-trial destruction ofexcessive quantities of controlled substances.

Upon receiving a Pre-Trial NarcoticsDestruction Authorization, the CommandingOfficer, Narcotics Division, shall direct amember of Narcotics Division to investigatethe controlled substance for pre-trialdestruction.

Upon determining the narcotics can bedestroyed, the Commanding Officer, NarcoticsDivision, shall forward the Pre-Trial NarcoticsDestruction Authorization, through channels,to the Chief of Police, requesting thedestruction of the controlled substance.

When circumstances indicate that pre-trialdestruction of narcotics would beinappropriate, the Commanding Officer,Narcotics Division, shall explain the reason fornon-destruction in the narrative portion of thePre-Trial Narcotics Destruction Authorizationand return the signed form to the CommandingOfficer, Property Division.

Note: Appeals to the decision of theCommanding Officer, Narcotics Division, maybe made telephonically to the CommandingOfficer, Narcotics Division, and the Assistantto the Director, Office of Operations, if criticalto storage or security.

Responsibility of the Assistant to theDirector, Office of Operations. The Assistantto the Director, Office of Operations, shallreview the Pre-Trial Narcotics DestructionAuthorization and upon approval ordisapproval, shall forward the form to theCommanding Officer, Property Division.

552.05 DESTRUCTION OFNARCOTICS.

Commanding Officer, Property Division.The Commanding Officer, Property Division,shall be responsible for the following:

∗ Completing all budget requests andmaintaining contractual agreements withnarcotics disposal sites;

∗ Forwarding an InterdepartmentalCorrespondence, Form 15.2, to the Assistantto the Director of the Office of Operations(OO) thirty days prior to the destruction thatdescribes the narcotics to be destroyed; and,

Note: The 15.2 shall be marked“CONFIDENTIAL” and shall be handdelivered to the Assistant to the Director of OO in a sealed envelope.

∗ At the direction of the Assistant to theDirector of OO, make sufficient PropertyDivision personnel available to assist in thedestruction.

Commanding Officer, ScientificInvestigation Division (SID). TheCommanding Officer, SID, shall be responsiblefor the following:



∗ At the direction of the Assistant to theDirector of OO, make sufficient SIDpersonnel available to assist in thedestruction;

∗ Determining whether of not the narcoticsdestruction necessitates the assignment ofthe Hazardous Chemicals Team to thenarcotics destruction site; and,

∗ Upon completion of the analysis of thenarcotics random samples, direct anIntradepartmental Correspondence to theAssistant to the Director of OO detailing theresults of the analysis.

Commanding Officer, Narcotics Division.The Commanding Officer, Narcotics Division(ND), shall be responsible for the following:

∗ Ensuring that all narcotics scheduled fordestruction will not jeopardize a criminalinvestigation or court case;

∗ Preparing and providing any pre or post-destruction documents to the court(s) orprosecutor(s) and to the Assistant to theDirector of OO;

∗ At the direction of the Assistant to theDirector of OO, make sufficient personnelavailable for monitoring the examination,weighing and testing of those randomlyselected items scheduled for destruction,and for the actual destruction of narcotics.

Commanding Officer, MetropolitanDivision. The Commanding Officer,Metropolitan Division shall be responsible forthe following:

∗ Providing adequate security for thedestruction of narcotics;

Note: This includes developing a security planfor each destruction and submitting it to theAssistant to the Director of OO for approvalprior to the destruction date.

∗ Making sufficient personnel available to theAssistant to the Director of OO for thedestruction.

Assistant to the Director of the Office ofOperations. The Assistant to the Director ofOO is in charge of each narcotics destruction.This includes:

∗ Developing a written plan for eachdestruction;

∗ Inventorying the narcotics;∗ Identifying the narcotics to be re-tested and

the manner in which the re-testing is tooccur; and,

∗ Overseeing the work of all commandsinvolved in the destruction.

Note: The Assistant to the Director of theOffice of Operations may delegate his/herauthority regarding the destruction of evidenceto an appropriate staff officer.

The Assistant to the Director of OO also hasthe authority to require the temporaryreassignment of personnel throughout theDepartment to assist in the narcoticsdestruction. Generally, those personnel should

be from non-operational commands and shallnot have been involved in any investigationresulting in the seizure of the narcotics to bedestroyed.

Exception: Audit Division should not beinvolved in the destruction of narcotics, thoughthey may provide their random samplingexpertise to the Assistant to the Director ofOO.

The Assistant to the Director of OO shallcomplete and maintain a full report for eachdestruction and review those reports prior toeach destruction to prevent the development ofa predictable pattern.

Note: Depending upon the amount of narcoticsto be destroyed, each destruction usuallyrequires the assignment of four to ten peoplefor about two weeks.

552.07 DESTRUCTION OF HAZARDOUSMATERIAL CONTROLLED SUBSTANCEMIXTURES.Scientific Investigation Division’sResponsibility. When in a field situation, uponidentifying the presence of methamphetaminereaction mixtures, the Scientific InvestigationDivision Hazardous Chemicals Teampersonnel shall, in full compliance withSection 11479 H&S and sound investigativepractice:

∗ Take samples from all containers to bedestroyed;

∗ Cause photographs to be taken which depictthe total amount of the substances, or thecontainers of the sampled substances, to bedestroyed;

∗ Obtain gross weights and volumes by directmeasurement, or by an estimate based upondimensional measurement;

∗ If it can be accomplished safely, cause thosecontainers which are to be destroyed to beprocessed for latent fingerprints;

∗ Cause samples of the reaction mixtures tobe booked. The gross amounts seized, anddispositions of bulk materials, shall be listedon the property report;

∗ Provide a copy of the property report toAudit Division; and,

∗ Cause the bulk of the material to bedestroyed following the procedure for aregular authorized destruction.

Upon making the determination that ahazardous chemical/controlled substancemixture cannot be safely stored in availableScientific Investigation Division facilities,Scientific Investigation Division shall:

∗ Notify the contract hazardous waste haulerof the need for a pickup;

∗ Pack the substances to be destroyed in themanner required for shipment. (This is doneby the hauler in the presence of ScientificInvestigation Division personnel who placetamperproof numbered metal seals on thedrums;)

∗ Initiate a California Uniform HazardousWaste Manifest, noting the numbers of themetal seals applied to the drums. Themixture shall be listed on the manifest andthe containers labeled as: "HazardousMaterial NOS. Drug laboratory waste withpoisonous and corrosive properties. Do notopen. Wear gloves and respiratoryprotection;"

∗ Ensure that a copy of the CaliforniaUniform Hazardous Waste Manifest andCertificate of Destruction is received fromthe destruction facility in a timely manner;

∗ Ensure that the numbered seals cut off thecontainers by the destruction vendor arereturned with a certificate that thecontainers were received with the sealsintact;

∗ Complete an affidavit certifying destructionand present it to the court of jurisdiction;

∗ Forward copies of both the Certificate ofDestruction and the affidavit to the AuditDivision for audit and control purposes;and,

∗ Forward copies of both the Certificate ofDestruction and the affidavit to PropertyDivision to complete the destruction processby entering the destruction information inDepartment records.

Upon being notified of pretrial destructionauthorization for a hazardouschemical/controlled substance mixture,Scientific Investigation Division shall:

∗ Cause the required samples, photographsand measurements, in compliance with11479 H&S, to be taken.

∗ Follow the same procedures as fornotification of a regular authorizeddestruction.

Property Division’s Responsibility. Uponreceipt of the Certificate of Destruction and theaffidavit certifying destruction, PropertyDivision shall complete the destruction processby entering the destruction information intoDepartment records.

552.10 DESTRUCTION OF FIREARMS.Property Division’s Responsibility. Upondetermining that a firearms destruction shouldbe scheduled, the Commanding Officer,Property Division, shall make all necessaryarrangements. The Commanding Officer,Property Division shall be responsible for:

∗ Determining the number of firearms to bedestroyed;

∗ Complying with 12028(d)P.C.;∗ Determining the date, time and location of

the destruction;∗ Arranging transportation; and,∗ Obtaining security for the firearms

destruction from another Department entity.

Prior to any firearms destruction, theCommanding Officer, Property Division shallnotify the commanding officers of ScientificInvestigation Division, Training Division, andMetropolitan Division of firearms available for



training and/or tactical purposes. Requests forthe retention of firearms scheduled fordestruction shall be made through therequesting entity's chain of command to theCommanding Officer, Administrative andTechnical Services Bureau.

555. RELEASE OF PROPERTY.555.10 RELEASE OF PROPERTY-GENERAL. Property may only be released to:

∗ A law enforcement agency or court.∗ The owner, or owner's agent.∗ A qualified finder.

When evidence or non-evidence is released,the person receiving the property shall berequired to sign a Property Court Receipt,Form 10.3.

Any other person seeking the release of suchproperty, and all persons seeking the release ofcontraband (or property that could beconsidered as such), shall be advised that theproperty can be released only as a result ofeither:

∗ A written opinion of the City Attorney, OR,∗ A valid court order.

555.20 RELEASE TO AGENT. Wheneverproperty belonging to an organization orcompany is to be released to an agent, theinvestigating officer completing the PropertyDisposition/Update Request, Form 10.06, shallindicate the name of the individual/agent in theorganization or company to whom the propertyshould be released on the "Name" line of theForm 10.06. If the organization is agovernment agency, no name is necessary. Ifno name is indicated on the Form 10.06, theproperty shall be released in accordance withprocedures for designating agents establishedby the Commanding Officer, PropertyDivision.

Note: Property belonging to the Los AngelesCity School System shall be released to Boardof Education Security Section personnel only.

Property Division personnel and personnelassigned to Area/division property rooms shallrelease property to the agents of individuals inaccordance with identification and agentdesignation criteria established by theCommanding Officer, Property Division.

Exception: Arrestee's personal property(4/645.23).

555.30 RELEASE OF EVIDENCERETAINED BY COURT. Persons inquiringabout the release of property which has beenreceived and retained in evidence by a courtshall be referred to:

∗ The clerk of the court in which the trial washeld, in a misdemeanor case.

∗ The County Clerk, 210 West Temple Street,in a felony case, if the defendant was heldto answer.

∗ The clerk of the court in which thepreliminary hearing was held, if thedefendant was not held to answer.

Note: An employee shall not solicit or receiveany firearm or other property from a criminalcourt, unless the employee was the legal ownerof the property at the time of its seizure.

If property transported to court is not receivedinto evidence; is no longer needed for courtproceedings, and the investigating officer (I/O)intends to release any or all of the items to anowner or agent, refer to Manual Section4/545.30 for the release procedures.

555.40 PRETRIAL RELEASE OFEVIDENCE. When the investigating officerdetermines that the release of evidence wouldnot jeopardize a prosecution, it may bereleased to the owner or person in lawfulpossession of the property who shall beadvised to retain it until the case reaches a finaldisposition.

Note: Photographs of such evidence shall beretained in the Investigator's Case Envelope,Form 15.15, or, if no arrestee, booked asevidence.

555.50 RELEASE OF NON-EVIDENCE.Property Disposition CoordinatorResponsibility. The PDC shall authorize therelease of non-evidence to the owner or afinder who submits a claim under the followingconditions:

∗ If the owner waives title to the property inwriting; or,

∗ If the property has remained unclaimed for97 calendar days following notification tothe owner of its availability; or,

∗ If ownership is not established within 97calendar days of the date booked.

Exception: Such property shall not be releasedto employees of the City or of another publicservice agency who found the property whileacting within the scope of their employment.

Property Officer’s Responsibility. PropertyOfficers shall complete a Form 10.06 fornon-evidence and forward it to the PDC fordisposition instructions under the followingconditions:

∗ If ownership can be determined at the timeof booking or at any time subsequent tobooking; or,

∗ If a finder submits a claim for the property.

As required by law, non-evidence shall bedisposed of after it has been in Departmentcustody for 97 calendar days and has not beenclaimed.

Exception: Unclaimed bicycles shall bedisposed of in accordance with current LosAngeles Municipal Code provisions.

555.60 RELEASE OF DISPUTEDPROPERTY. An employee who becomes

aware of a disputed ownership claim forbooked property shall not authorize its release.

Note: The claimants shall be supplied with theDR number, the name of the person to whomthe property is booked, and the date of bookingwhen known, and shall be referred to theProperty Claims Officer (2/345.20).

555.70 RELEASE OF LICENSEPLATES. License plates shall not be releasedto individuals. Persons requesting the releaseof license plates shall be referred to the DMV.

Exception: Personalized license plates areeligible for release to the owner or agent. If anowner or agent cannot be located, the licenseplates shall be “Authorized for Disposal.”

560. LEGAL PROCESS FORRELEASE OF PROPERTY (3/425.15,3/425.30, 4/565.20).560.05 COURT ORDERED NARCOTICEVIDENCE SPLITS. An authorizedrepresentative from a private laboratory, inpossession of a court order requesting anarcotics sample from this Department, shallnormally present the court order to theProperty Claims Officer, Property Division,during the hours of 0830 to 1200 (3/425.10).

Property Claims Officer’s Responsibility.When presented with a court order requestingthe release of a sample of a controlledsubstance which is of evidentiary value, theProperty Claims Officer shall inspect it todetermine that:

∗ The court order is stamped with an officialseal and filed with the concerned court, and,

∗ The court order bears the signature of theissuing judge, and,

∗ The court order describes the case by LAPDDR number, date of arrest, booking number,name of defendant and the name andbusiness address of the defendant's attorney.

If the court order appears valid, the PropertyClaims Officer shall:

∗ Immediately forward the court order toAdministrative and Technical ServicesBureau (3/425.15).

∗ Notify Litigation Processing Section bytelephone and provide the necessaryinformation for Legal Process Log(3/425.20).

∗ Advise the private laboratory representativeof the anticipated date and time thenarcotics sample will be available.

Note: When the validity of the court orderappears questionable, the process server shallbe referred to the Commanding Officer,Administrative and Technical Services Bureau,who will make the determination to accept orrefuse the court order.

Administrative and Technical ServicesBureau, Commanding Officer'sResponsibility. Upon receiving a valid courtorder from the Property Claims Officer, the



Commanding Officer, Administrative andTechnical Services Bureau shall:

∗ Authorize the release by notifying theLaboratory Liaison Detective, NarcoticsDivision, of the impending release of anarcotic controlled substance (3/425.15).

∗ Cause the court order to be delivered to theCommanding Officer, ScientificInvestigation Division.

Narcotics Division-Laboratory LiaisonDetective's Responsibility. When authorizedto release a sample of a narcotic controlledsubstance, the Laboratory Liaison Detectiveshall:

∗ Remove the evidence package fromProperty Division and deliver it to anarcotics analysis chemist at ScientificInvestigation Division; and,

∗ After completion of the split, deliver thenarcotic split container back to the PropertyClaims Officer, who will release it to theprivate laboratory representative.

∗ Replace the evidence package into PropertyDivision.

Scientific Investigation Division-NarcoticsAnalysis Chemist's Responsibility. Uponreceiving a Narcotic Evidence Package fromthe Laboratory Liaison Detective, the chemistshall:

∗ Make the evidence split; and,∗ Record the following information on the

court order:

∗ Type of narcotics split.∗ Amount and weight of sample.

∗ Sign and date the court order and place itinside the evidence package.

∗ Reseal the evidence package.∗ Give the split and the evidence package to

the Laboratory Liaison Detective.

Note: When the Scientific InvestigationDivision chemist determines that the concernednarcotic has not previously been analyzed,he/she shall, in all cases, conduct his/herroutine analysis prior to any narcotic splitting.If, after the standard analysis, there is notsufficient narcotics remaining to provide asample, the concerned private laboratory willbe so notified by the Property Claims Officer.

560.10 RELEASE OF CREDIT CARDS.Credit cards which are no longer of evidentiaryvalue shall only be released to an agent of theissuing company.

In all other instances, credit cards shall bedestroyed, unless otherwise ordered by a court.

560.30 RELEASE WHEN IDENTIFYINGMARK HAS BEEN ALTERED ORDESTROYED.Release. When property other than a firearm orbicycle has had the serial number removed,defaced, covered, altered, or destroyed, and theproperty is to be released, the employeeauthorizing release shall:

∗ Inform the claimant of the provisions ofPenal Code Section 537(e).

∗ Obtain the claimant's consent to renumberthe item.

∗ Cause the property to be transferred toCentral Property Section or Valley PropertySection for renumbering.

Note: When permission to have the itemrenumbered is refused, the claimant shall beadvised that the item cannot be released.

New Identifying Number. The newidentifying number shall consist of the letters"LA" followed by the DR number. Whenmultiple items are booked under the same DRnumber, a letter, commencing with the letter"A" and continuing alphabetically with eachadditional item, shall be etched following theDR number.

Property Officer's Responsibility. A PropertyOfficer shall inspect all property comingwithin the purview of Penal Code Section537(e). When a Property Officer determinesthat an item of property requires renumbering,he/she shall notify the investigating officer.When authorized by the investigating officer,the Property Officer shall transfer the propertyto Central Property Section or Valley PropertySection for numbering.

Property Division's Responsibility. To avoidduplication of identification numbers, aProperty Officer shall:

∗ Check the file of renumbered property priorto etching a new identification number.

∗ Update the file with a detailed descriptionof the renumbered property, including thenew identification number.

560.35 SEIZURE OF FIREARMS. When anofficer seizes a firearm involving a threat tohuman life or a physical assault, the officershall seize the firearm in accordance with thisSection and if Domestic Violence is involved,Penal Code Section 12028.5, officers shall:

∗ Determine if a court order exists or iswarranted.

Note: If at the time a firearm is seized, anofficer becomes aware of a court order, (e.g.Emergency Protective Order, DomesticViolence Restraining Order), which is not inthe Domestic Violence Restraining OrderSystem (ROS), the officer shall ensure thecourt order and accompanying Departmentreport(s) are immediately submitted to a watchcommander for approval.

∗ Issue the owner or person in custody of thefirearm a Receipt for Property Taken IntoCustody, Form 10.10.

∗ Record in the "Property Taken" portion ofthe Form 10.10 the following information:

∗ A description of the weapon, includingthe serial number, the location where thefirearm can be recovered, and thetelephone number of the Area Detective

Division responsible for releasing thefirearm; and,

∗ The dates and times during which thefirearm can be claimed.

∗ Book the firearm in accordance with theprocedures set forth in Section 4/540.30 ofthe Department Manual.

Note: When a booking officer has reasonablecause to believe that the release of a firearmcould likely result in endangering the victim,reporting party or other party, the officer shallinclude information in the related report(s)describing “clear and convincing” evidencethat will support a court petition to determineif a firearm should be returned.

Seizure of Firearms at Domestic ViolenceIncidents. Penal Code Section 12028.5provides that firearms seized at the scene of adomestic dispute shall be made available to theowner or possessor in no less than 48 hours,but no longer than 72 hours, after the seizure.If the 48 to 72 hour release time occurs on aweekend or holiday, the officer shall indicatethat the firearm will be available to the owneror possessor on the next administrativeworking day.

When an investigating officer releases afirearm seized at a domestic violence incident,the investigating officer shall, after complyingwith the procedures in Manual Section4/560.40, make the firearm available forrelease no fewer than 48 hours nor more than72 hours after the seizure.

Exception: If the 48 to 72 hour release timeoccurs on a weekend or holiday, the firearmshall be made available for release on the nextadministrative working day.

A firearm in Department custody longer than12 months and not claimed by the owner orperson who had lawful possession at the timethe firearm was taken into custody, shall beconsidered a nuisance and be disposed of asprovided in Penal Code Section 12028(c).

Court Orders not in the Restraining OrderSystem. If at the time a firearm is seized anofficer becomes aware of a court order, (e.g.Emergency Protective Order, DomesticViolence Restraining Order), which is not inthe Domestic Violence Restraining System(ROS), the officer shall ensure the court orderand accompanying Department report(s) areimmediately submitted to a watch commanderfor approval.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Watchcommanders are reminded of the criticalimportance of immediate and accurate entry ofcourt orders into the ROS. Watch commandersshall ensure that all reports involving courtorders not already entered in the ROS areimmediately delivered to the Area Record’sUnit and entered into the ROS. If the AreaRecord’s Unit is not staffed, watchcommanders shall cause the order to beimmediately delivered to a Record’s Unit or toRecords and Identification Division for



immediate entry into the Domestic ViolenceRestraining Order System.

560.40 RELEASE OF FIREARMS.Only sworn detective personnel shall approvethe release of firearms. Any person appearingbefore an Area desk requesting the release of afirearm shall be referred to the Area DetectiveDivision detectives during their normaloperating hours.

Proof of Ownership. The Department mustaccept any reasonable proof of ownership.Registration in the name of the lawful ownershall constitute proof of ownership. However,a lack of registration does not constitute a lackof proof of ownership unless registration isrequired by law for possession and/orownership of the gun. Unless there isarticulable probable cause to disbelieve asworn declaration from the claimant/owner, asales receipt, or other proof of ownership fromthe claimant, shall constitute proof ofownership.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility.Investigating officers or their immediatesupervisor, shall ensure that all firearms arereturned to the lawful owner after determiningwhether the individual is lawfully entitled topossess the firearm. The investigating officerauthorizing disposition or release of a firearmshall:

∗ Determine whether the individual islawfully entitled to possess the firearm to bereleased, in accordance with federal andstate laws.

∗ Query the Automated Firearm System(AFS) and the National Crime InformationCenter (NCIC) to determine current "want"and registration information.

∗ Ensure that the appropriate "Evidence"entry appears in the AFS.

∗ Check the owner/possessor’s criminalhistory, the Domestic Violence RestrainingOrder System (ROS), the Mental HealthFirearms Prohibition System (MHFPS) andthe Consolidated Criminal HistoryReporting System (CCHRS) to verify thereare no legal restrictions to theowner/possessor possessing the firearm;and,

∗ Inquire of the victim, suspect, and personreporting, if any restraining order(s) exist.

Note: If the firearm is an LAPD stolen/lost andan "Evidence" entry does not appear in theAFS, the concerned investigative officer shallnotify a supervisor in the Automated Vehicleand Property Section, to ensure that thisomission is corrected.

∗ Attach a printout of the AFS, ROS,MHFPS, CCHRS, and NCIC query andowner’s response to inquiry, to the workfolder copy of the concerned report. If thefirearm "Evidence" entry does not appear inthe AFS, indicate that fact on theInvestigator's Case Progress Log, Form1.44, and include the name of the Records

and Identification Division employeecontacted.

∗ If the firearm is to be released or disposedof within 90 days from the date of originalbooking, contact the Gun Unit, DetectiveSupport Division (DSD), to determinewhether the firearm is wanted for test-firing,recording on the Form 1.44 the name andserial number of the Gun Unit employeecontacted.

∗ If the firearm was booked as a result of amisdemeanor, contact the City Attorney,Misdemeanor Disposition Section, to ensurethat the weapon no longer has anyevidentiary value.

∗ Upon completion of the aboverequirements:

∗ Complete a Property Disposition/UpdateRequest and forward it to the PropertyDisposition Coordinator (PDC) for inputinto Automated Property InformationManagement System if an Item DetailSummary has not been generated; or

∗ Present a completed PropertyDisposition/Update Request to aproperty officer if property must beimmediately released to a waitingindividual and the PDC is not available.

A teletype to a Property Division facility inorder to release property is appropriateonly when a PDC or Area property officeris not available and an immediate release isnecessary.

When authorization to release is a teletype,the investigating officer shall include astatement that the firearm shows listed as"Evidence" in the AFS/NCIC system.

Firearms Declared Nuisances. A firearmcoming within the purview of the DangerousWeapons' Control Law and which is declaredto be a nuisance (12028 P.C.) shall not bereleased except at the direction of:

∗ A written opinion of the City Attorney, OR∗ A valid court order.

Release of Firearms or Other DeadlyWeapons to Persons with a Mental Illness.Before releasing a firearm or other deadlyweapon (4/260.25) to any person who has beenpreviously detained due to a mental illness, theconcerned investigating officer shall contactMEU for advice in determining the conditionsfor release of the firearm or weapon.

Firearms Seized at Domestic ViolenceIncidents.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Aninvestigating officer releasing a firearm seizedat a domestic violence incident shall, aftercomplying with the procedures in ManualSection 4/560.40, make the firearm availablefor release no fewer than 48 hours nor morethan 72 hours after the seizure.

Exception: If the 48 to 72 hour release timeoccurs on a weekend or holiday, the firearm

shall be made available for release on the nextadministrative working day.

A firearm in Department custody longer than12 months and not claimed by the owner orperson who had lawful possession at the timethe firearm was taken into custody shall beconsidered a nuisance and be disposed of asprovided in Penal Code Section 12028(c).

Release of Firearms to Licensed FirearmsDealers. If a firearm was seized pursuant to12028.5 PC and the owner/possessor disposesof the firearm by selling it to a licensedfirearms dealer, the Department must releasethe firearm(s), except contraband, to theproperly licensed firearms dealer authorized totake possession of and dispose of the firearmson behalf of the owner. This process onlyapplies to firearms seized pursuant to 12028.5PC and is authorized by Section 6380.5 of theFamily Code.

Firearms Used in Suicide. All firearmssuspected of being suicide weapons shall bebooked as evidence to provide the opportunityto test such firearms. The investigating officershall be responsible for determining the finaldisposition of the firearm.

When it is necessary to retain the firearm, theinvestigator shall, within five (5) daysfollowing booking, notify the Coroner's Officeof the reason for the hold.

Property Officer’s Responsibility. Propertyofficers may dispose of or release a firearmfrom custody when disposition instructionshave been received by one of the followingmeans:

∗ Disposition instructions have been inputinto APIMS;

∗ A release authorization teletype has beenreceived; or,

∗ A completed Form 10.6 has been received.

The Form 10.6 or teletype authorization shallbe retained by the concerned property unit fora period of one year.

561. WITHHOLDING OF FIREARMS. Ifan investigating officer has reasonable cause tobelieve that the release of a firearm wouldlikely result in endangering the victim,reporting party or other party, the investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Complete a Property Disposition/UpdateRequest, Form 10.06.0, and forward it to theProperty Disposition Coordinator to placean investigative hold on the firearm in theAutomated Property InformationManagement System (APIMS), to preventthe unintentional release or destruction ofthe weapon prior to the Court’s decision;

∗ Ensure all reasonable efforts are made tolocate the owner/possessor of the firearm;

∗ Prepare a Follow-up Investigation, Form3.14, describing the “clear and convincing”evidence in support of a petition todetermine if a firearm should be returned,



and obtain approval of a Detective III orabove;

∗ Complete a City Attorney Request forPetition (CARP);

∗ Ensure notification is made to theowner/possessor of the intent to file thepetition;

∗ Deliver the original City Attorney Requestfor Petition, a copy of all related policereports, a copy of the owner/possessor’scriminal history, ROS, MHFPS and CCHRSprintouts, to Detective Support Division(DSD) within four calendar days from thedate of seizure or upon determining thefirearm should not be returned;

Note: In cases where the investigating officeris unable to deliver the material to DSD, theinvestigating officer shall cause an employeewho is familiar with the case to deliver thematerial to DSD.

∗ Assist the CA’s Office with the preparationof a declaration for the petition;

∗ Appear at Superior Court hearings, asrequested by the CA’s Office, to offerinformation concerning the potential dangerto a victim, reporting party, or other party;and,

∗ Dispose of the firearm only as directed bythe Superior Court.

Note: Penal Code Section 12028.5 providesthat firearms seized at the scene of a domesticdispute shall be made available to theowner/possessor in no less than 48 hours butno longer than 72 hours after the seizure. If the48 to 72 hour release time occurs on a weekendor holiday, the officer shall indicate that thefirearm will be made available to theowner/possessor, by the investigating officer,on the next administrative working day.

Detective Support Division’s Responsibility.The Commanding Officer, Detective SupportDivision, shall provide liaison between theDepartment and the City Attorney’s Office inprocessing and coordinating the City AttorneyRequest for Petition (CARP) to determine if afirearm should be withheld from the owner orotherwise disposed of as directed by the court.Detective Support Division personnel withintwo calendar days of receiving a CARP fromdetective personnel, shall:

∗ Verify that the legal owner is not otherwiseprohibited from possessing the firearm;

Note: If ownership of the firearm is prohibitedby law, inform the investigating officer that thepetition is unnecessary and that the firearmmay be held or disposed of pursuant to theappropriate Penal Code section.

∗ Ensure the City Attorney Request forPetition has been completed correctly; and,

∗ Forward the City Attorney Request forPetition to the CA’s Officer, Police GeneralCounsel Section for submission to theSuperior Court.

DSD shall also be responsible for ongoingliaison with the CA’s Office and shall:

∗ Create and maintain a control log fortracking all requests for petitions until theirdisposition;

∗ Upon receipt of any response to a petition,make telephonic notification to, andforward a copy of the response to the CA’sOffice, Police and Fire Services Division;

∗ Notify the investigating officer of the resultsof the petition and the appropriatedisposition of the firearm as directed by thecourt;

∗ Contact Police and Fire Services Division toverify that the owner/possessor of the seizedfirearm has been notified by registered mailof the court’s order regarding disposition ofthe firearm; and,

∗ Provide blank petition forms to all detectivecommands.

565. SPECIAL DISPOSITIONS.565.10 DISPOSITION OF EVIDENCESEIZED PURSUANT TO SEARCHWARRANT. Evidence seized during theservice of a search warrant, whether listed orunlisted, shall be disposed of ONLY by theorder of a court having jurisdiction over theproperty (1536 P.C.). A court order may berequested for the disposition of property whichwas seized during the service of a searchwarrant but which was not introduced intoevidence, when:

∗ The prosecution has reached a finalconclusion,

∗ The statutory period for filing an appeal hasexpired,

∗ The property is no longer of evidentiaryvalue.

Exception: Removal of a hold place for 11470H&S shall be the responsibility of the AssetForfeiture and Support Section, NarcoticsDivision.

When circumstances are such that a court orderfor disposition is needed, the investigatingofficer shall prepare an original and two copiesof a Court Order for Search Warrant Property,Form 10.18, and present them for signature tothe magistrate who issued the warrant, or to thepresiding judge when the magistrate isunavailable.

When the Forms 10.18 are signed, forward theoriginal to Records and Identification Division,forward a copy and a completed PropertyDisposition/Update Request, Form 10.6, to theconcerned Property Disposition Coordinatorand place the remaining copy in theinvestigator's case file.

Exception: When evidence consists only ofcopies of bank records, the investigatingofficer may request disposition instructions atthe time he/she completes the original return tothe search warrant. (See also 4/540.90).

565.20 COURT DISPOSITION OFPETITION. If it is determined by the courtthat a firearm should be returned to theowner/possessor, the investigating officershall:

∗ Complete a Follow-Up Investigation, Form3.14, detailing the court case number, thedate the hearing was held, the date the courtorder was made if different from the date ofhearing, and the name and department ofthe judge who ordered the return of thefirearm; and,

∗ Cause the firearm to be released to theowner as ordered by the court.

Court Ordered Destruction. If the courtdetermines that a firearm should be destroyed,the investigating officer shall complete aProperty Disposition/Update Request, Form10.6, detailing the court case number, the datethe hearing was held, the date the court orderwas made if different from the date of hearing,and the name and department of the judgeauthorizing the destruction of the firearm.Attach a copy of the court order to the Form10.6.

565.30 DISPOSITION OF GAMBLINGMONEY. Authorization for the disposition ofmoney booked as evidence in connection witha gambling arrest shall only be made by theProperty Claims Detail, Property Division, orby the court.

Claimants shall be advised to address a writtenrequest for the return of such evidence to theCommanding Officer, Property Division.

After such evidence has remained inDepartment custody for three years, it shall betransferred to the L. A. City General Fund.

570. PROPERTY TRANSFERS.570.10 TRANSFER-GENERAL. Propertywhich has been authorized for destruction orsale by auction shall be transferred to CentralProperty Section or Valley Property Section onthe first regularly scheduled property transferfollowing the receipt of dispositioninstructions. Property which is authorized forrelease may be transferred ten days after theclaimant is notified (4/550.20).

When an investigating officer assumesinvestigative responsibility for a case in whichproperty has been booked under anotherdivision’s DR number, the investigatingofficer shall ensure that the PrimaryInvestigative Unit (PIU) responsibility inAPIMS is transferred to the investigatingofficer’s division. The investigating officershall notify his/her Property DispositionCoordinator (PDC) who shall “Reroute” theconcerned DR number to the investigatingofficer’s division. The PDC shall also updatedthe “Related Employee” section with theconcerned investigating officer’s information.Once the PIU responsibility has beentransferred, the PDC should place an“Investigative Hold” on the property.

When property is transferred and investigativeresponsibility is assumed by another entity, theinvestigating officer shall ensure that the"Primary Investigative Unit (PIU)"responsibility is updated in the AutomatedProperty Management System.



All personal property which has beenauthorized for retention and use by theDepartment shall be transferred to CentralProperty Section.

570.15 PROPERTY TRANSFERREQUEST BY OFFICERS. If aninvestigating officer determines that evidencebooked at a storage facility other than theEvidence Control Unit, Scientific InvestigationDivision, needs to be transferred to a differentstorage facility, the evidence must betransported by the requesting investigatingofficer.

570.20 TRANSFER OF FORGERYEVIDENCE TO CASE FILES. Credit cards,items of an unusual nature such as legaldocuments, and obviously valuable papers,shall not be retained in case files.

The following documents may be transferred toand retained in an investigator's case file:

∗ Bankbooks.∗ Checkbooks.∗ Credit card invoices.∗ Identification Papers (including fraudulent

driver's licenses).∗ Checks.∗ Copies of bank records obtained pursuant to

search warrants.∗ Miscellaneous documents bearing

handwritten, typewritten, or printednotations.

Note: The investigator's commandingofficer shall establish procedures to ensure thesecurity of such evidence.

570.25 TRANSFER OF PHOTOGRAPHS,DOCUMENTS, OR OTHERMISCELLANEOUS PAPERS TO CASEFILES. Once a case is closed, an investigatingofficer (I/O) may retain certain items ofbooked evidence. Those items includephotographs, documents, or othermiscellaneous papers relevant to the current orany future case. The items shall be released (inthe Automated Property InformationManagement System) to the I/O and retained inone of the following packages, listed in priorityorder:

∗ The murder book;∗ Detective’s Case Envelope, Form 15.15; or∗ The detective work folder.

In order to obtain the items, the I/O shall:

∗ Request the approval of the I/O’scommanding officer;

∗ If approved, complete dispositioninstructions on a PropertyDisposition/Update Request authorizingrelease to the I/O; and,

∗ Maintain the items in the appropriatepackage.

Exception: Videotapes or contraband may notbe retained in the murder book, Detective CaseEnvelope, or detective work folder.

Note: The release instructions shall contain theI/O’s name and division of assignment. “Unk”shall be entered in the address field so aProperty Owner’s Notification, Form 10.14.1,will not be generated.

575. PROPERTY RECOVERED INOR REQUESTED BY AN OUTSIDEJURISDICTION.575.10 PROPERTY RECOVERED INANOTHER JURISDICTION. Wheninformed that property which was reported lostor stolen by this Department is recovered byanother jurisdiction, the investigating officershall:

Property Required for Evidence

∗ When necessary, request the recoveringagency to ship the property directly toCentral Property Section, attention to theinvestigating officer.

Note: Central Property Section shall becontacted for shipping instructions.

∗ Forward a copy of any applicablecorrespondence to Records andIdentification Division for filing.

Property Not Required for Evidence

∗ Supply the recovering agency with the nameand address of the owner and authorize therelease of the property to the owner.

∗ Notify the owner of the location of theproperty.

∗ Instruct the owner to make arrangementswith the recovering agency for return of theproperty.

575.20 SHIPPING BOOKEDPROPERTY. Booked property shall beshipped or mailed only to a person or anagency making a written or teletyped request tothe Department. Small items of property shallbe mailed prepaid, and certified if applicable,through the U.S. Postal Service. Large itemsshall be shipped via the City-contracted parceldelivery service.

Exception: At the discretion of theCommanding Officer, Property Division,recipients of booked evidence may be requiredto make their own shipping arrangements.

Firearms shall not be shipped to an individual.The owner shall be instructed to:

∗ Contact a local law enforcement agencywilling to accept delivery of the firearm;and,

∗ Request the agency to telephonicallycontact the shipping officer, CentralProperty Section, for further information.

The property officer finalizing shippingarrangements shall update APIMS with therelease information provided by the outsideagency.

575.30 VIEWING OF PROPERTY BYUNAUTHORIZED PERSONS. Prior toallowing a victim or witness to view evidence

booked at Property Division, the concernedProperty Division employee shall ensure thatthe victim or witness is accompanied by adetective from the Area/division assignedinvestigative responsibility.

580. DEPARTMENT RETENTION ANDUSE OF CONVERTIBLE PROPERTY.580.10 CONVERTIBLE PROPERTY-DEFINED. Convertible property is propertythat comes into the custody of the Departmentfor which title, after satisfaction of specifiedlegal requirement, may pass to the Departmentfor use in an official capacity.

Note: Items of contraband shall never beconverted to Department use.

The following are categories of convertibleproperty:

Unclaimed Property-Defined. Unclaimedproperty is any and all property booked intothe custody of the Department and held for aspecified period of time during which no claimor demand has been made nor owner located.Unclaimed items must no longer be requiredfor use as evidence and shall have beenauthorized for disposition.

As required by law, unclaimed property shallbe held for a minimum of 97 days, with theexception of unclaimed bicycles which may beheld for a minimum of two months whentransferred to designated youth servicesorganizations.

Forfeited Property-Defined. Forfeitedproperty is property seized in connection witha narcotics-related arrest or investigation forwhich ownership has been transferred to theDepartment by appropriate State or Federalauthorities. Included are products involved inthe manufacturing, transportation, storage, andmarketing of controlled substances. All seizedmonies intended to be provided in exchangefor a controlled substance, or proceedstraceable to such an exchange, may also beforfeited.

Judicially Awarded Property-Defined.Judicially awarded property is property otherthan that seized pursuant to asset forfeitureproceedings for which ownership has beentransferred to the Department upon court order.

Note: Employees aware of the possibleavailability of property which is in the custodyof a court and which is suitable for conversionfor Department use may inform the concernedmagistrate of the Department's propertyconversion program. If the magistrate choosesto award the property to the Department, theemployee accepting the item shall return it tothe property room from which it waswithdrawn and notify Administrative andTechnical Services Bureau. If subsequentlydeemed suitable for retention, the ConvertibleProperty Committee will include the item in itspublished list of items available for retention.

580.20 REQUESTING RETENTION OFCONVERTIBLE PROPERTY. The



following procedure shall apply whenrequesting retention of convertible property forofficial Department use. Administrative andTechnical Services Bureau will publishannually a list of standard convertible propertywhich will be updated on an as-needed basis atthe discretion of the Commanding Officer,Administrative and Technical Services Bureau.Requests for items not appearing on thestandard convertible property list shall bespecifically identified by DR number, itemnumber, and description from a relatedproperty report. Such requests will beconsidered by the Convertible PropertyCommittee on a priority need basis.

Note: Property Division employees will bewatchful for unique items of convertibleproperty and advise the appropriate entity oftheir availability.

580.21 EXAMINATION OFCONVERTIBLE PROPERTY. An employeeassigned to Administrative and TechnicalServices Bureau will be responsible for liaisingwith Property Division, Narcotics Division,and other Department entities as required forthe purpose of examining convertible propertyavailable for retention by the Department.When appropriate, the Commanding Officer,Administrative and Technical Services Bureau,shall cause convertible property available forretention by the Department to be inspected bysubject matter experts (e.g., cellular telephonesby Communications Division, or computers byInformation Technology Division). Suchinspections should determine serviceability,compatibility with existing equipment orsystems, and the ability of the Department tomaintain the items.

580.22 COMMANDING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY. Commanding officers,upon determining that employees in theircommand will materially benefit in the courseof their duties by acquisition of an item ofconverted property, may submit a ConvertibleProperty Request, Form 10.09, to their bureaucommanding officer. The Convertible PropertyRequest, Form 10.09, shall be submittedwithout exception when requesting any type ofconverted property item and shall include adescription of each item, its intendedapplication, and the benefits to be derived fromits use.

580.24 BUREAU COMMANDINGOFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITY. A bureaucommanding officer receiving a request forretention and issuance of specified convertedproperty shall:

∗ Review the request to ensure that it is in thebest interests of the Department.

∗ Forward approved requests to theCommanding Officer, Administrative andTechnical Services Bureau.

∗ Return denied requests to the requester.

580.26 COMMANDING OFFICER,ADMINISTRATIVE AND TECHNICALSERVICES BUREAU’S

RESPONSIBILITY. The CommandingOfficer, Administrative and Technical ServicesBureau, as Chairperson of the ConvertibleProperty Committee, shall:

∗ Retain each Convertible Property Requestthat is received.

∗ Cause necessary research to be conductedfor requests received.

∗ Convene and chair meetings of theConvertible Property Committee, asappropriate.

∗ In concert with other Convertible PropertyCommittee members, determine bycomparative need which requestingDepartment entity should receive requestedproperty items.

∗ Effect the issuance of converted property tothe appropriate entity.

∗ Publish at least annually the list of propertyavailable for conversion.

∗ Prepare annually, and retain, a listing ofproperty converted and the entities to whichthe items have been assigned.

580.30 ISSUING CONVERTIBLEPROPERTY. Upon approval of theCommanding Officer, Administrative andTechnical Services Bureau, converted propertymay be issued using the following guidelines.

Property Division's Responsibility. Uponreceipt of distribution instructions for propertybeing held by Property Division, theCommanding Officer, Property Division, shallrelease converted property to Fiscal OperationsDivision following standard procedures.

Exception: For those items issued foroperations which require no Departmentidentifying marks ("sting" operations, etc.), theCommanding Officer, Property Division, shallcause the items and a receipt to be delivered tothe concerned bureau commanding officer.Accountability for inventory and tracking ofitems not entered into the ComputerizedEquipment Inventory (CEI) System is assignedto the concerned bureau commanding officerupon receipt of the items. The original propertyreceipt shall be retained at the bureau office,and a copy shall be retained by PropertyDivision. The bureau commanding officer shallnotify, via Intradepartmental Correspondence,Form 15.2, the Commanding Officer, PropertyDivision, in the event of property disposition.

Fiscal Operation Division’s Responsibility.Upon receipt of the property and the propertyreceipts from Property Division, theCommanding Officer, Fiscal OperationsDivision, shall:

∗ Cause the receiving employee toacknowledge receipt of the property byappropriate signature.

∗ Forward the original signed receipt toRecords and Identification Division forfiling.

∗ Enter the item into the CEI System.∗ Issue the item to the requesting division.∗ Maintain accurate issuance and control

documents.

Motor Transport Division's Responsibility.Upon receipt of an approved request and acopy of the pertinent court order, City Councilfile (if applicable), or other appropriatecorrespondence certifying a vehicle for use bythe Department, the Commanding Officer,Motor Transport Division, shall:

∗ Inspect the vehicle for serviceability.∗ Issue the vehicle a shop number.∗ Service the vehicle as required.∗ Send correspondence to the Salvage

Division, Department of General Services,advising that the vehicle has been assigneda shop number and explaining thecircumstances under which the vehiclecame to the Department.

∗ Maintain the vehicle in accordance withestablished procedures.

580.40 CONVERTIBLE PROPERTY NOLONGER NEEDED FOR POLICE USE.When items of converted property are nolonger needed by the requester, they shall bereturned to Fiscal Operations Division orMotor Transport Division for reissue, salvage,or destruction in accordance with establishedprocedures for categories of convertedproperty.

Note: Proceeds from items seized pursuant toasset forfeiture procedures shall be depositedinto the Forfeited Assets Trust Fund.

585. DEPARTMENT RETENTIONAND USE OF CONTRABAND.585.10 CONTRABAND-DEFINED.Contraband items consist of goods ormerchandise, possession of which is prohibitedby law. Generally, items of contraband shallnot be converted to Department use.

Note: Penal Code Section 12030(b) enableslaw enforcement agencies to retain confiscatedfirearms, normally subject to destruction, foruse in carrying out the official duties of theagency. Therefore, firearms are not consideredcontraband subject to retention procedures.

585.15 CONVERSION OFCONTRABAND ITEMS TODEPARTMENT USE. Retention ofcontraband occurs rarely. Retention requiresboth the approval of the requesting employee'sbureau commanding officer and a court orderauthorizing retention of the items.

Requesting Employee's Responsibility.Employees seeking retention of seizedcontraband items other than narcotics whichwould be of value to the Department fortraining or operational purposes shall contacttheir commanding officer for retentionapproval.

Upon approval by the appropriate bureaucommanding officer, the employee requestingthe contraband items shall obtain a court orderauthorizing retention through the Police andFire Services Division, City Attorney's Office.Both the approved Form 15.2 and court order



shall be provided to Property Division toobtain the items requested.

Commanding Officer's Responsibility.Commanding officers requesting retention of acontraband item shall submit a written requestfor retention on a Form 15.2 to their bureaucommanding officer. The Form 15.2 shallinclude a description of each item; DRNumber; corresponding item number from theproperty report, if any; the intendedapplication; and the benefits from its retentionand use.

Bureau Commanding Officer’sResponsibility. The bureau commandingofficer reviewing a request to convert an itemof contraband to Department use shall:

∗ Review the request to ensure it is in the bestinterest of the Department.

∗ Return approved or denied requests to theoriginating commanding officer.

Property Division's Responsibility. Uponreceipt of the approved Form 15.2 with anattached court order authorizing retention, theCommanding Officer, Property Division shall:

∗ Verify the Form 15.2 is accompanied by acompleted court order.

∗ Cause a Property Court Receipt, Form10.03, to be completed transferring control

of the item to the requesting employee'sdivision or Area.

∗ Ensure that copies of the Form 15.2, courtorder, and Form 10.03 are forwarded to theCommanding Officer, Administrative andTechnical Services Bureau.

Note: The Commanding Officer, PropertyDivision, shall follow procedures set forth inManual Section 4/580.30 for items of propertythat qualify for entry into the Department'sinventory system.

590. USE OF FIREARMS IN STINGOPERATIONS OR OTHERINVESTIGATIVE PURPOSES.590.10 REQUESTING FIREARMS FORUSE IN STING OPERATIONS OROTHER INVESTIGATIVE PURPOSES.When firearms are needed for use in stingoperations or other special investigativepurposes, the following procedures shall befollowed.

Requesting Entity’s Responsibility. Thecommanding officer of the requesting entityshall submit an IntradepartmentalCorrespondence, From 15.2, to thecommanding officer of Property Division,containing the following information:

∗ Reason for the request, such as a stingoperation or other specific investigativepurpose;

Note: If the firearm is to be used for a stingoperation, include a general description of theoperation.

∗ Specific type, make, and caliber needed;

∗ Number of firearms; and,∗ Anticipated duration of use.

Property Division’s Responsibility. Uponreceipt of a Form 15.2 requesting firearms foruse as listed above, the Commanding Officer,Property Division shall:

∗ Review and approve or disapprove therequest;

∗ If the request is approved, locate firearmseligible for the requested use;

Note: Firearms are eligible for use in stingoperations, etc., when they no longer haveevidentiary value, an owner cannot be locatedor is otherwise ineligible to retrieve thatparticular firearm, and the firearm has beenauthorized for disposal.

∗ Contact the commanding officer of therequesting entity and arrange for thewithdrawal and return of the requestedfirearm(s); and,

∗ If the request is denied, a Form 15.2 shall besent to the commanding officer of therequesting entity explaining the reason(s)for the denial.

BOOKING AND CUSTODYOF PRISONERS

601. PRISONER RELATIONS.601.10 RELATIONSHIPS BETWEENDEPARTMENT EMPLOYEES ANDPRISONERS. Department employees shallnot engage in any of the following activitieswith arrestees or prisoners without the expresspermission of the concerned commandingofficer:

∗ Borrow money or articles;∗ Loan money or articles; or,∗ Purchase, sell, accept, or offer any gift or

article.

602. POLICE CUSTODY OFHOSPITALIZED ARRESTEES.602.10 ARREST AND CUSTODY FORSERIOUSLY ILL OR INJURED FELONYSUSPECTS WHO ARE HOSPITALIZEDAT A LOCATION OTHER THAN THEJAIL WARD OF LAC-USC MEDICALCENTER. When it is determined that policecustody of a hospitalized suspect is necessary,the concerned investigative watch commandershall request the uniformed division in whichthe hospital is located to provide such custody.In the event the hospital is located outside theCity, the nearest uniformed division shall berequested to provide this custody. Two officersfrom each watch shall be assigned, in plainclothes, to maintain custody of the arrestee.

Note: When the hospital is not in the City, theconcerned uniformed division watchcommander shall cause the chief of police ofthe city in which the hospital is located to benotified that plainclothes Los Angeles policeofficers are working in that particular

jurisdiction (e.g., Daniel Freeman Hospital-Inglewood Chief of Police).

The concerned investigating officer shallensure that the appropriate reports arecompleted and a booking number obtained atthe time the suspect is placed in police custody.The concerned investigating officer shall beresponsible for the transportation of the suspectto the Jail Ward at the LAC-USC MedicalCenter as soon as practicable.

When the arrestee is transferred to the JailWard of LAC-USC Medical Center, or when itis determined that police custody is no longernecessary, concerned investigativecommanding officers shall complete a Form15.2 to their bureau commanding officerdescribing the reasons for the police custody,the time and personnel resources involved, andbooking information, or other reasons forterminating such custody.

604. BOOKING, GENERAL.604.05 OBTAINING BOOKINGNUMBERS. Department employees shallobtain booking numbers directly from theAutomated Jail Information System (AJIS) viathe Network Communications System (NECS)by completing the Decentralized AutomatedBooking Information System (DABIS)procedure.

Exception: When AJIS or NECS isunavailable and a DABIS booking cannot becompleted, booking numbers shall betelephonically obtained from the BookingRecords Update Unit, Records andIdentification Division.

604.08 BOOKING-LOCATION OF. The"location of booking" shall be the LAPD orLASD facility where the booked person isdetained.

Exception: When the person will not beincarcerated, the "location of booking" shall bethe geographic Area where the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1 or5.1.1, is completed.

604.10 PRISONER REFUSING ORUNABLE TO GIVE INFORMATIONREQUIRED FOR COMPLETION OFBOOKING PROCEDURE. When a personbeing booked refuses, or is unable, to answerquestions necessary for the completion of thebooking procedure, the booking employee shallindicate in the proper spaces:

∗ Refused to state; or,∗ Unable to state.

"John or Jane Doe" Numbers. When thearrestee's name cannot be determined at thetime of booking, a "John or Jane Doe" number,in addition to a regular booking number, shallbe obtained from the Booking Records UpdateUnit, Records and Identification Division. The"John or Jane Doe" number shall be placed inthe space provided on the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1, for the



arrestee's name.

604.11 FEDERAL PRIVACY ACT-SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERDISCLOSURE STATEMENT DURINGBOOKING PROCESS. When a SocialSecurity number is requested during thebooking process, persons in custody shall beprovided with the following information:

Federal law requires that you be informed,when asked for your Social Security number,that it must be provided for use in processingand identification. Authority for requiringthis information is based upon the LosAngeles Police Department's booking andidentification processing system operationalprior to January 1, 1975.

This information may be provided orally or bya sign conspicuously posted in the bookingfacility.

Note: It is the booking employee'sresponsibility to make an oral statement if theperson in custody is incapable of reading thesign.

604.12 IDENTIFICATION OFEMPLOYEES AT JAIL. An employee whois required to identify himself/herself inconnection with any jail procedure shall do soby presenting his/her identification card.

604.15 RESPONSIBILITY FORCUSTODY OF ARRESTEES. Until thearrestee is delivered to the detention officer asa booked person, his/her care and custody shallbe the responsibility of the arresting officer. Ifthe arresting officer does not deliver thearrestee to the detention officer, such care andcustody shall be the responsibility of thetransporting officer.

After being booked, the care and custody of thearrestee shall be the responsibility of thedetention officer, pending transfer of his or hercustody to another proper authority.

604.16 BOOKING FEMALEARRESTEE-RESPONSIBILITY. Theofficers delivering a female arrestee to afemale jail facility shall maintain custody ofthe arrestee until relieved by the personconducting the booking.

604.17 BOOKING ANDCONFINEMENT OF FEMALEARRESTEE-LOCATION. Female arresteesare normally booked at the jail facility inwhich they will be confined. Generally, femalearrestees shall be confined in the followinglocations:

∗ Operations Central and South Bureaus-77th

Street Jail Section.∗ Operations West and Valley Bureaus-Valley

Jail Section.∗ At either of the above facilities upon the

direction of the concerned investigatingofficer or the Commanding Officer, JailDivision.

Exceptions:

∗ Females arrested for the murder orattempted murder of their infant childrenshall be confined in 77th Street Jail Sectionor Van Nuys Jail Section.

∗ All female suspects arrested for forgery inor by Wilshire Area, Hollywood Area, andCommercial Crimes Division, shall beconfined at 77th Street Jail Section.

∗ All adult female suspects arrested for childabuse, whether related to the victim or not,shall be confined as follows:

∗ Valley Areas and Pacific and West LosAngeles Areas, at Valley Jail Section.

∗ Metropolitan Area (includes Central,Southwest, Southeast, Hollenbeck,Hollywood, Wilshire, Northeast, 77thStreet, Newton, Rampart, and Harbor), at77th Street Jail Section.

∗ When a physician advises that a femalearrestee requires medication and/orobservation or the supervision of competentmedical personnel, but not hospitalization,the arrestee shall be confined at 77th Streetor Valley Jail Section.

∗ Female out-of-state fugitive arrestees shallbe confined at Valley Jail Section.

∗ A female arrestee may be booked in the areaof arrest, or nearest City jail facility, when:

∗ The arrestee is to be immediatelyarraigned; or,

∗ The arrestee indicates a desire to bail outimmediately and has sufficient funds; or,

∗ The arrest is for a traffic warrant and thearrestee lacks sufficient funds for bail,but indicates that arrangements can bemade to have bail posted within areasonable time. The arresting officer,with the approval of the watchcommander, may allow the arrestee tomake the necessary notifications andcause the arrestee to be detained in thearea of booking pending receipt of thebail; or,

∗ The watch commander or other officerdesignated to make O.R. determinationhas determined, after conducting thenecessary preliminary investigation andtelephone record check of the arrestee'scriminal record, that the arrestee iseligible for O.R. release (4/681.) uponcompletion of the booking process.

Note: An arrestee booked on amisdemeanor warrant, or havingoutstanding warrants, shall not be releasedO.R.

Arresting or transporting officers processingfemale arrestees at Metropolitan Jail Sectionshall maintain custody of the arrestee at alltimes while inside Metropolitan Jail Section.

Arrestees Requiring Medication, MedicalAttention, or Hospitalization. (4/648.10 and4/648.20).

604.18 BOOKING MALE ARRESTEES-LOCATION. Male arrestees shall be bookedat the following locations:

Felony Arrestees. Felony arrestees shall bebooked in the Area of arrest, except:

∗ When the officer in charge, DetectiveSupport Division, or the concernedinvestigating officers direct otherwise.

∗ Adult male suspects arrested for child abusein the following Areas and identified asbeing the parent, stepparent, common-lawspouse of the child's parent, or legalguardian of the child shall be booked at thefollowing locations:

∗ Valley Areas and Pacific and West LosAngeles Areas, at Valley Jail Section.

∗ Metropolitan Area (includes Central,Southwest, Southeast, Hollenbeck,Hollywood, Wilshire, Northeast, 77thStreet, Newton, Rampart, and Harbor), atMetropolitan Jail Section, Parker Center.

∗ When the Area of arrest has no availabledetention facilities for felony prisoners.

∗ Narcotic arrestees arrested withinOperations-Central Bureau, HollywoodArea and Wilshire Area shall be booked atMetropolitan Jail Section. All other narcoticarrestees arrested in the metropolitan areashall be booked at the appropriate divisionaljails.

∗ Arrestees charged with an offense overwhich Commercial Crimes Division hasjurisdiction shall be booked at MetropolitanJail Section. The arrest and related reportsshall be made at the Headquarters RecordSection.

∗ All felony narcotic violators arrested in theValley area shall be booked at Valley JailSection.

∗ Arrestees charged with an offense overwhich the Forgery Section,Operations-Valley Bureau, has jurisdiction(2/415.70) shall be booked at Valley JailSection. The arrest and related reports shallbe made at Van Nuys Area.

∗ Arrestees charged with an offense overwhich West Los Angeles Forgery Unit hasjurisdiction shall be booked at Pacific AreaJail. The arrest and related reports shall bemade at West Los Angeles Area.

∗ Arrestees charged with an offense overwhich Harbor Forgery Unit has jurisdictionshall be booked at Harbor Area Jail. Thearrest and related reports shall be made atHarbor Area.

∗ Persons arrested for counterfeit moneyviolations shall be booked at the followinglocations:

∗ All Valley Bureau Areas, Pacific andWest Los Angeles-Valley Jail Section.

∗ All others.∗ Male arrestees-Metropolitan Jail

Section.∗ Female arrestees-77th Street Jail

Section.

Note: Juvenile arrestees shall be booked inaccordance with established procedures.

∗ Felony traffic arrestees, when arrested in:



∗ Valley Bureau, shall be booked at ValleyJail Section.

∗ West Bureau, shall be booked atWilshire Area Jail.

∗ Harbor Area, shall be booked at HarborJail.

∗ The Metropolitan area, shall be bookedat Metropolitan Jail Section.

Exception: Southwest, 77th Street andSoutheast Areas shall be booked at 77thStreet Jail Section.

Misdemeanor Arrestees. Misdemeanorarrestees shall be booked in the Area of arrest,or at Metropolitan Jail Section with theMetropolitan Jail Section watch commander'sapproval, except:

∗ Misdemeanants arrested in Hollenbeck,Newton Street, and Rampart Areas shall bebooked at Metropolitan Jail Section.

∗ When a male misdemeanant is arrested witha female arrestee who is to be booked at LosAngeles County Jail, the malemisdemeanant shall be booked atMetropolitan Jail Section.

∗ Male 647(f) PC (Drunk) arrestees.

647(f) PC (DRUNK) ARRESTEES. 647(f)PC (Drunk) arrestees shall be booked atMetropolitan Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Valley Jail Section.

∗ Arrestees shall be examined by a doctor ora nurse at the jail facility prior to bookingwhen booked at Metropolitan Jail Section,77th Street Jail Section, or Valley JailSection.

Note: Officers booking a 647(f) PC (Drunk)arrestee requiring special or extensive medicaltreatment shall comply with Section 4/648.10.

Arrestees Requiring Medication, MedicalAttention, or Hospitalization. (4/648.10 and4/648.20).

604.19 CHILD-ABUSE BOOKINGS.

Juvenile suspects arrested for child abuse shallbe detained at Juvenile Hall. Detentionapproval shall be obtained from JuvenileDivision during normal working hours. WhenJuvenile Division is closed, the detentionapproval shall be obtained from DetectiveSupport Division.

Adult suspects arrested for child abuse shallbe booked at the following locations:

Male Arrestees-related to victim

∗ Valley Areas and Pacific and West LosAngeles Area-Valley Jail Section.

∗ Metropolitan Area (includes Central,Southwest, Southeast, Hollenbeck,Hollywood, Wilshire, Northeast, 77thStreet, Newton, Rampart, and Harbor), atMetropolitan Jail Section, Parker Center.

Male Arrestees-not related to victim

∗ Valley Areas-at respective Area Jail.

∗ Metropolitan Area-at respective Area Jail orMetropolitan Jail Section, Parker Center, ifno divisional jail exists.

Female Arrestees

∗ Valley Areas and Pacific and West LosAngeles Area-Valley Jail Section.

∗ Metropolitan Area (includes Central,Southwest, Southeast, Hollenbeck,Hollywood, Wilshire, Northeast, 77thStreet, Newton, Rampart, and Harbor), at77th Street Jail Section.

604.30 BOOKING ARRESTEE TOARRESTING PERSON. An arrestee shall bebooked only to the person or persons effectingthe arrest (4/604.15 and 4/606.15).

604.35 RECORDING BOOKINGINFORMATION-DETENTIONOFFICER’S RESPONSIBILITY. When aperson is booked into a Department jailfacility, the concerned detention officer shallrecord the arrested person's name, bookingnumber, and other information required on theJail Intake Log, Form 6.13.

604.40 COMPLETION OF LOSANGELES CONSOLIDATED BOOKINGFORM-GENERAL. The Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form (5/5.1-01, 5/5.1.1-01) shall be typewritten by the bookingemployee.

Exception: When a typewriter is unavailable,the booking employee shall print the requiredinformation with a ballpoint pen, usingsufficient pressure to assure the legibility of allcopies.

ID Numbers. The employee completing theBooking Form shall not enter any identifyingnumbers such as the State Identifying Number(SID#), Main Number (MN#) or Los AngelesNumber (LA#).

604.41 ARRESTEE BIRTHPLACEINFORMATION. When an arrestee is bookedinto Department custody and the city, county,state, and country of the arrestee's birthplace isknown or can be obtained, that informationshall be entered in the birthplace (BP) field ofthe Decentralized Automated BookingInformation System (DABIS) "DBK 1" screenat the time of booking.

Note: When the arrestee is foreign born, thebooking employee shall ensure that an "X" isentered as the first character in the birthplacefield.

604.42 COMPLETION OF LOSANGELES CONSOLIDATED BOOKINGFORM, FORM 5.1. Completion of aLos Angeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.1, is required for a juvenile bookingonly when the subject is:

∗ Twelve years of age or older booked for anyoffense under Sections 601 or 602 WIC(4/625.10).

∗ Male juvenile, age 16 or 17, detained at theLos Angeles County-USC Medical Center(4/218.67).

Note: Juveniles taken into custody for a 300WIC violation shall be issued a bookingnumber regardless of age; however, the LosAngeles Consolidated Booking Form, Form5.1, for 300 WIC violations shall be forwardedto Records and Identification Division.

604.43 COMPLETION OF LOS ANGELESCONSOLIDATED BOOKING FORM-MISDEMEANOR BOOKING APPROVAL.The name and serial number of the watchcommander giving a misdemeanor bookingapproval shall be placed in the lower leftportion of the "Property" box on the LosAngeles Consolidated Booking Form and inthe narrative portion of the arrest report, whenone is completed.

604.45 BOOKING AT LOS ANGELESCOUNTY JAIL. Officers booking a femalearrestee at Los Angeles County Jail shallperform the following duties prior totransporting the female arrestee.

∗ Transport the arrestee to the appropriateArea station;

∗ Complete a Los Angeles ConsolidatedBooking Form, Form 5.1.2;

Note: When completing the Form 5.1.2, the"location of booking" shall be the Departmentfacility where the form is obtained.

If the Decentralized Automated BookingInformation System (DABIS) is unavailable,complete a Los Angeles Consolidated BookingForm, Form 5.1, and obtain a booking numbertelephonically from Records and IdentificationDivision.

∗ Inventory the arrestee's personal propertyand list the property in the "Property" Boxof the Consolidated Booking Form;

∗ Place the arrestee's property in a plasticprisoner property bag. The Property RecordPage of the Consolidated Booking Formshall be placed in the bag in such a mannerthat the identification information is visible;

Note: The arrestee may retain a plainwedding band, dentures, and prescription eyeglasses.

∗ Ensure the Prisoner's Receipt page of theconsolidated booking form is retained bythe arrestee;

∗ Allow the arrestee to retain up to $40.00 inU.S. currency on her person;

∗ Have a supervisor verify the amount ofcurrency retained by the arrestee and theamount packaged in the plastic propertybag, and initial the "retained" and"deposited" boxes on the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1.2;

∗ Place the currency to be deposited in a coinenvelope and seal it in the upper portion ofthe plastic property bag;

Note: The property bag shall be sealed in the



presence of the supervisor verifying theamount and, whenever practicable, in thearrestee's presence.

∗ Obtain a booking photograph of the arresteeas required in Department Manual Section4/635.10;

∗ Complete three Fingerprint Cards, FormFD249. Attach the completed FingerprintCards to the Booking and IdentificationRecord page of the Consolidated BookingForm;

∗ Complete one Palm Print, Form 5.6.1, andone Handwriting Exemplar, Form 5.7, asrequired by Department Manual Sections4/625.25 and 4/625.30; and,

∗ Distribute completed reports in accordancewith established procedures. (DepartmentManual Section 5/5.2).

The arrestee, plastic prisoner property bag, andthe Jail Custody Record page of theConsolidated Booking Form shall betransported to Los Angeles County Jail. Upondelivering the female arrestee to the LosAngeles County Jail, the arrestee's personalproperty shall be presented to the receptionemployee, who will remove the coin envelope(containing the arrestee's currency) from theplastic property bag and instruct the officer todeliver the envelope to the Los AngelesCounty Jail cashier. The cashier will verify theamount of currency to be deposited and issue a"deposit ticket" (LASD FORM SH-J-251A).The officer shall give the arrestee the prisoner'scopy (green) of the "deposit ticket," and submitthe depositor's copy (white) with the Bookingand Identification Record page of the Form5.1.2 or 5.1.0. The plastic prisoner propertybag and the Jail Custody Record page will beretained by the reception clerk at the LosAngeles County Jail.

604.50 BOOKING CHARGES. When aperson is arrested without a warrant for thecommission of more than one offense, he orshe shall be booked on the charge carrying thegreatest penalty, or on the charge for which theevidence is most conclusive.

A person arrested for an offense punishable asa felony shall be booked on the felony chargeregardless of whether the case could beprosecuted as a misdemeanor under authorityof 17(b)4 P.C.

Exception: A juvenile may be handled as a"contact only" in compliance with existingprocedures (4/218.68).

When a misdemeanor warrant is issued for afelony crime (e.g., 459 P.C.-Misdemeanor) thebooking charge shall be as specified on thewarrant.

When a felony narcotics arrestee is alsosuspected of committing any other felony, therecommended booking charge shall be for thenon-narcotic crime. In the event that thearrestee is released from the original charge,the investigating unit having responsibility for

the original charge shall be responsible forfiling the narcotics charge(s).

The Arrest Report, Form 5.2, shall includeprima facie evidence of all violationscommitted by the arrestee.

Note: When a person is arrested on a localcharge or warrant and a fugitive charge, he/sheshall be booked on the local charge or warrant.The fugitive charge shall be placedsupplementary (4/646.10).

Investigations and Arrests by InvestigativePersonnel. Investigative officers havingresponsibility for the filing of a booking chargeshall be responsible for filing any additionalcharges for which prima facie evidence existsin the arrest report.

Felony Investigations and Arrests byUniformed or Non-Investigative Personnel.

∗ Adults or Juveniles Booked on a FelonyNon-Narcotics Charge. If the arrestinvolves additional narcotics charges, theconcerned operations support division shallalso file related narcotics charges.

∗ Adults Booked on a Felony NarcoticsCharge. The follow-up investigation forwhich an adult arrestee was booked on afelony narcotics charge shall be theresponsibility of Narcotics Division.Narcotics Division shall also filenon-narcotics charges for which prima facieevidence exists in the arrest report.

∗ Juveniles Booked on a Felony NarcoticsCharge. The follow-up investigation forwhich a juvenile arrestee was booked on afelony narcotics charge shall be theresponsibility of Juvenile Division. JuvenileDivision shall also file non-narcoticscharges for which prima facie evidenceexists in the arrest report.

∗ Adults and Juveniles Booked Together ona Felony Narcotics Charge. The follow-upinvestigation in which adults and juvenileswere arrested together shall be handled permutual agreement between NarcoticsDivision and Juvenile Division.

Note: If another Department entity is bettersuited to file charges, that responsibility maybe transferred after mutual agreement(4/550.12).

606. TYPES OF BOOKINGS.606.02 COURT BOOKINGS. When aperson is booked on a court commitment, theconcerned court (e.g., Division 50) shall benoted on the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1, in the boxes titled "DIVN.& DETL. ARR.," "LOCATION OF ARREST,"and "ARRESTING OFFICER(S)."

606.03 ENROUTE BOOKING-OUTSIDEAGENCY. Whenever jail personnel receiveoutside agency arrestees for temporarydetention, they shall not be booked or

processed. The Short Arrest Report, Form5.2.1, shall be utilized to record the jail'sacceptance of temporary outside agencydetainees. The checkboxes marked,"Temporary Detention For" and "Charge" shallbe marked whenever the concerned jailreceives temporary detainees.

Note: Identification Thumb and four fingersflat prints shall be obtained on the reverse sideof the Short Arrest Report's Custody Record atthe time of intake and when released to outsideagency authorities. An arrestee identificationband shall be completed and attached to theleft wrist of the arrestee, as soon as practicalafter the arrestee is received. The band shallinclude the arrestee's name, right thumb print,and property bag number (if appropriate).

Temporary outside agency detainees shall nototherwise be photographed, fingerprinted, orissued booking numbers.

When it is ascertained that a person booked onan enroute booking has a local want or warrant,notification shall be made to the FugitiveWarrants Section, Detective Support Division,by the custodial detention officer.

Note: When Fugitive Warrants Section isclosed notification shall be made to DetectiveInformation Desk, Detective Support Division.

606.07 FUGITIVE WARRANTBOOKINGS.In-State Fugitive Warrants. When a person isarrested for another agency within the Stateand this Department does not have a pendinginvestigation pertaining to the person, theBooking and Identification Record, Form 5.1,shall be completed as follows: Enter thecriminal charge, followed by the word "FOR,"and the name and complete designation of thewanting agency.

Example: 211 P.C. (Robbery) for Fresno P.D.459 P.C. (Burglary) for San DiegoSheriff

Out-of-State Fugitive Warrants. Officersobtaining a return on a want and warrant checkindicating that an individual has an out-of-statefugitive warrant shall check to determine if thereturn contains the “Limited” extraditiondesignator. This includes extradition warrantsthat do not list California as a state from whichthe issuing agency is willing to extradite.

Note: For “Limited” extradition cases, officersmay lawfully arrest and book a suspect namedon an out-of-state warrant even if California isnot listed on the warrant as a state from whichthe suspect will be extradited. However,officers shall not contact the issuing agency forwarrant or stolen vehicle information withoutprior approval from Fugitive Warrant Section(FWS), Detective Support Division (DSD), orwhen closed, DSD Administrative Desk.

Multiple Charges. If a suspect, who has beenarrested on a local or in-state charge, is alsowanted on an out-of-state fugitive warrant, or



is an occupant in an out-of-state stolen vehicle,the local or in-state charge shall takeprecedence. The fugitive charge shall be placedsupplementary.

Note: A Probable Cause Determination shallbe completed whether California Penal Code(PC) Section 1551.1 is the primary orsupplemental charge.

Exception: If the local charge is a ReleaseFrom Custody (RFC) offense, an RFC shall notbe issued. Instead, the suspect shall be bookedfor Section 1551.1 PC (Fugitive) and theelements of the RFC offense shall be includedin the narrative portion of the arrest report.

Booking Advice. Booking advice for out-of-state fugitive arrests shall be obtained from theinvestigative supervisor, FWS, or when closed,DSD Administrative Desk. Sworn personnelshall provide the FWS supervisor with thename of the fugitive, the identity of therequesting entity, the charge against thefugitive, any stolen vehicle information and thejurisdiction reporting the vehicle stolen.

No Extradition Out-of-State Warrants.Officers obtaining a return on a want andwarrant check indicating that an individual hasan out-of-state fugitive warrant shall check todetermine if the return contains the “NOEX”(No Extradition) designator. If so, personnelshall not arrest the person based on the hitwithout independent probable cause. Bookingadvice and approval for out-of-state fugitivearrests shall be obtained from the investigativesupervisor, FWS, or when closed, DSDAdministrative Desk. Fugitive Warrant Sectionhas the final authority on booking charges forout-of-state issues.

Out-of-State Stolen Vehicles. All occupantsin an out-of-state stolen vehicle should bedetained pending an investigation. Eachoccupant should be interviewed separately todetermine whether he/she was directly orindirectly involved in the theft of the vehicle.When an occupant of an out-of-state stolenvehicle is unable to satisfactorily demonstratelegitimate cause for being in the vehicle,he/she (except for young children unable tooperate a motor vehicle) shall be booked underSection 1551.1 PC. Occupants shall not bebooked for California Vehicle Code Section10851 or 487(D) PC.

Example: 1551.1 PC Fugitive Arizona-GTA.

Out-of-Country Warrants. Officers receivinginformation that a suspect may be wanted inanother country shall not arrest the suspectwithout independent probable cause. Officersreceiving this information should avoid contactwith the suspect and obtain as muchinformation as possible from the source. Thisinformation shall be given as soon as possibleto the Foreign Prosecution Liaison Unit, FWSor when closed, the Department CommandPost.

When a person is arrested for an out-of-stateagency and this Department does not have a

pending investigation pertaining to the person,the Booking and Identification Record, Form5.1, shall be completed as follows: Enter1551.1 P.C., the designation "FUGITIVE," thename of the wanting state or country, followedby the criminal charge.

Example: 1551.1 P.C. Fugitive New York-Robbery.1551.1 P.C. Fugitive Idaho-Burglary.

Note: When the person arrested is a juvenile,insert the proper Welfare and Institutions Codesection prior to the charge.

Example: 602 WIC-Fugitive New York-Robbery.

606.09 BOOKING OF ARMED FORCESPERSONNEL. When a member of the UnitedStates Armed Forces is booked, the followinginformation shall be included on the Bookingand Identification Record:

∗ In the box entitled "PROPERTY," insert thearrestee's branch of service, rank, serialnumber, location of ship or station, whetherin or out of uniform, and duty status; alsothe rank, name, and serial number of theLiaison Officer, and the name and serialnumber of the officer who reported theinformation to the Liaison Officer.

Note: The following information shall bereported to the Department Command Post,Communications Division, by telephone:

∗ The arrestee's name, serial number, rank,ship or station, duty status, whether inuniform or civilian clothes, bookingnumber, and the names of the arrestingofficers.

606.14 BOND SURRENDERBOOKINGS. A bond surrender booking shallbe made only when:

∗ A bondsman who posted an arrestee's bail orthe bondsman’s lawful designee (e.g.,“bounty hunter”) desires to return thearrestee to custody of this Department,AND

∗ The arrestee was released from custody ofthis Department by the posting of a bailbond, AND

∗ The arrestee's bail has not been forfeited(bondsman's signed statement ofnon-forfeiture may be accepted asverification).

Note: If bail has been forfeited and no warranthas been issued, the bondsman must surrenderthe prisoner directly to the court declaring theforfeiture.

When the above conditions exist, the bookingemployee shall obtain one of the following:

∗ A certified copy of the undertaking of thebail;

∗ A certified copy of the certificate of deposit;or,

∗ An affidavit given by the bail licensee orsurety company listing all the specificinformation that would be included on acertified copy of an undertaking of bail.

Note: Penal Code Section 1300 (a)(3) alsoprovides that the accepting agency must,within 48 hours of the surrender, bring thedefendant before the court in which thedefendant is next to appear on the case forwhich he/she has been surrendered.

In addition, the booking employee shall:

∗ Use the SI01 (Booking Number Inquiry,AJIS) function or the SI02 (Name Inquiry,AJIS) function on a NECS terminal.

∗ Give the bondsman a Certificate of BailSurrender, Form 6.40.

Note: A bondsman's prisoner shall not bereceived into any City jail facility when theprisoner was not originally detained by thisDepartment.

Arrest Status Unchanged. If the arrest statusof the arrestee has not changed since theissuance of the bond, the following informationshall be included on the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.01.2:

∗ In the box entitled BKG# on the DTL2DABIS screen enter the original bookingnumber. In the space following"SUPPLEMENTAL" on the DTL2 DABISscreen, enter "Y."

∗ In the box entitled Charge; insert the chargefollowed by "Bond Surrender."

∗ In the box entitled Div. & Detl. Arr., insert"Bondsman."

∗ In the box entitled Location of Arrest, insertthe location of apprehension by thebondsman.

∗ In the box entitled Property, insert thefollowing information:

∗ "Bond Surrender on Bail Bond No."(number).

∗ Name and address of the bondingcompany and the name of the suretycompany.

∗ Court information (the date and time ofthe next session of the appropriate courtto which the arrestee can be routinelytransported).

∗ "Bail" followed by the amount of bail.∗ "Arrestee and Bondsman Declare Bail

Has Not Been Forfeited."

∗ In the box entitled Arresting Officer(s),insert the typed name of the bondsman, theword "Bondsman" in parentheses, andobtain the bondsman's signature.

Arrest Status Changed, No New Charge. Ifthe arrest status of the arrestee has changedsince the issuance of the bond and no newcharges have been filed, the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.01.2 shall becompleted as above, with the followingexception:



∗ In the box entitled Property, in place of"Court Information," insert the notation"Released From Custody," followed by thename and serial number of the investigatingofficer who authorized the release of thecharge shown on the bond. No bail amountshall be shown.

Arrest Status Changed, New Charge. If thearrest status of the arrestee has changed sincethe issuance of the bond and a new charge hasbeen filed, the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1.2, shall be completed asabove with the following exceptions:

∗ In the box entitled Charge, insert thecurrent charge.

∗ In the box entitled Property, in addition tothe information-called for above, on aseparate line, insert "City Attorney'sComplaint Number (number)."

Note: Bail amount shown shall be the amountof bail for which the arrestee may be released(misdemeanor bail schedule).

606.15 PRIVATE PERSON'S ARRESTBOOKING. When an arrestee is booked as theresult of a private person's arrest the followinginformation shall be included on the Bookingand Identification Record, Form 5.1:

∗ In the box entitled Div. & Detl. Arr., insertthe private person's arrest symbol, "(CZN),"followed by the division transporting.

∗ In the box entitled Arresting Officer(s),insert the name of the arresting privateperson(s), followed by the symbol "(CZN)."

606.16 MEDICAL TREATMENTBOOKINGS. When an arrestee receivesmedical treatment after arrest and prior tobooking (4/648.10), the booking employeeshall insert an "X" in the box entitled MT onthe Booking and Identification Record.

Note: The copy of the medical treatment slipshall accompany the Custody Record page ofthe booking form.

610. BOOKING CHARGES.610.05 LISTING CHARGES -GENERAL. When the booking is for violationof a California law or a Los Angeles municipalordinance, including warrant bookings andsupplemental bookings, the booking section, aslisted in the Automated Justice InformationSystem (AJIS) Booking Charge Table, shall beentered exactly as depicted in the appropriatecharge table, followed by a parenthesizedabbreviation of the crime.

610.10 BOOKING OF JUVENILES.Juveniles shall be booked on the chargerecommended by the concerned detectivedivision investigative supervisor or theconcerned Area watch commander.

Exception: The watch commander approvingthe booking has the final authority as to thebooking charge. In the event the investigativesupervisor’s advice differs from that of thewatch commander, the watch commander shall

ensure his/her rationale is properly documentedin the Watch Commander’s Daily Report,Form 15.80.

610.12 ATTEMPTED CRIMES. When abooking is made for an attempt to commit anycrime, the booking shall be completed asfollows: Enter 664/followed by the Penal Codesection number for the crime that wasattempted.

Example: 664/459 P.C Attempt Burglary.

610.20 DANGEROUS WEAPONSBOOKINGS. When a booking is made forviolation of the Dangerous Weapons' ControlLaw, the charge shall be (section number) P.C.(DWCL).

610.25 FORGERY BOOKINGS.

Prescriptions. When a booking is made for aforgery involving prescriptions, the bookingshall be 4390 B.P. (Forg-Presc).

Personal and Business Checks. When abooking is made for a forgery involvingpersonal or business checks, the bookingcharge shall be 470 P.C. (Forg-Chks).

Government Checks. When a booking ismade for a forgery involving governmentchecks, the booking shall be 470 P.C.(Forg-Gov't Chks).

Credit Cards. When a booking is made for aforgery involving a credit card, the charge shallbe 470 P.C. (Forg-Cr Crd).

Airline Tickets. When a booking is made fora forgery involving airline tickets, the bookingcharge shall be 470 P.C. (Forg-A/L Tkts).

Other Documents. When a booking is madefor forgeries other than those listed in thissection, the booking charge shall be 470 P.C.(Forg-Other).

610.30 AUTO BURGLARY BOOKINGS.When a booking is made for auto burglary, thecharge shall be 459 P.C. (Auto Burglary).

610.35 LOTTERY BOOKINGS. When abooking is made for lottery violation thenumber of tickets, if any shall be listedfollowing the charge as "Three or less" or"More than three."

610.40 DESERTER BOOKINGS. When abooking is made for desertion from the ArmedForces, the charge shall read "Desertion, to bereleased to (particular agency)."

610.50 GRAND THEFT BOOKINGS.Pickpocket. When a booking is made forgrand theft accomplished by picking a pocket,the charge shall be 487.2 P.C. (G.T.-Pickpocket).

Purse Snatching. When a booking is made forgrand theft accomplished by means of pursesnatching, the charge shall be 487.2 (G.T.-Purse Snatching).

Theft From Person. When a booking is madefor grand theft from person accomplished bymeans other than picking pockets, pursesnatching, or bunco, the charge shall be 487.2P.C. (G.T.-Person).

Grand Theft Bunco. When a booking is madefor grand theft from person accomplished bymeans of a bunco, the charge shall be 487.1P.C. (G.T.-Bunco).

610.52 DISORDERLY CONDUCTBOOKINGS.Lewd or Dissolute Conduct. When a bookingis made for lewd or dissolute conduct, thecharge shall be 647(a) P.C. (Lewd Conduct).

Prostitution. When a booking is made forprostitution, the charge shall be 647(b) P.C.(Prostitution).

Begging. When a booking is made for begging,the charge shall be 647(c) P.C. (Begging).

Loitering About Public Toilets. When abooking is made for loitering in a toilet, thecharge shall be 647(d) P.C. (Lewd Loiterer).

Loiterer Who Refuses to ProvideIdentification. When a booking is made forloitering on a street, the charge shall be 647(e)P.C. (Loiter Street).

Prowler. When a booking is made forprowling the charge shall be 647(g) P.C.(Prowler).

Peeping Tom. When a booking is made forpeeping tom, the charge shall be 647(h) P.C.(Peeping Tom).

Lodger. When a booking is made for lodgingwithout permission of the owner, the chargeshall be 647(i) P.C. (Lodger).

610.53 UNDER-THE-INFLUENCEBOOKINGS-647(f) P.C. When an arrest ismade for violation of 647(f) P.C. for beingunder-the-influence of an intoxicating agent ina public place, the appropriate booking chargeindicated below shall be used:INTOXICATING AGENT(S) BOOKING CHARGE

Adult Arrestees

Liquor, OR liquor 647(f) P.C. (DRUNK)combined with drugs,toluene (glue sniffing), orsimilar toxic substances.

Drugs, OR drugs combined 647(f) P.C. (DRUGS)with toluene (glue sniffing)or similar toxic substances.

Toluene (glue sniffing) or 647(f) P.C. (TOXICsimilar toxic substances. SUBSTANCE)

Juvenile Arrestees

Liquor. 602 W.I.C. (647[f]P.C.-DRUNK)

Drugs, OR drugs combined 602 W.I.C. (647[f]with liquor, toluene (glue P.C.-DRUGS)sniffing) or other toxicsubstances.

Toluene (glue sniffing) or 602 W.I.C. (647[f]similar toxic substances, OR P.C.-TOXICsuch toxic substances, SUBSTANCE)combined with liquor.

Note: A public place for the purpose of 647(f)P.C. includes, but is not limited to, a publicstreet, sidewalk, alley, park, or publicly owned



building. A public place also includes privateproperty to which the public commonly hasaccess, either free or by payment of a fee.

610.55 TRAFFIC VIOLATIONBOOKINGS. When a booking is made for atraffic violation under the authority of VehicleCode Section 40302 or 40303, the charge shallbe the most serious violation cited, followed bythe notation "By the Authority of (specifysection and subsection of 40302 or 40303)."

When the violation charged is Vehicle CodeSection 22350, the specific speed charged shallbe included and written as "22350 V.C.(45/25)."

610.60 MANSLAUGHTER IN DRIVINGMOTOR VEHICLE BOOKINGS. When abooking is made for manslaughter in thedriving of a motor vehicle, the charge shall be192(c) P.C. (Manslaughter) (Felony).

610.62 BATTERY AND A.D.W.AGAINST PEACE OFFICER BOOKINGS.Battery. When a booking is made for batteryupon the person of a peace officer, the chargeshall be 243 P.C. (Battery/Peace Officer).

ADW. When a booking is made for ADWupon the person of a peace officer, the chargeshall be 245(b) P.C. (ADW/Peace Officer).

610.65 DRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE BOOKINGS. The bookingcharge shall be 23152a, b or c. V.C. (DUI)when:

∗ The arresting officer witnesses the arresteecommit the elements of driving on ahighway while under the influence ofintoxicating liquor, or the combinedinfluence of intoxicating liquor and anydrug; OR,

∗ The arrestee was lawfully arrested ordetained by another peace officer; OR,

∗ The arrestee was lawfully arrested ordetained by a private person who witnessedthe driving element of the offense.

Note: Driving-under-the-influence arrestseffected as the result of a traffic collisioninvestigation shall have the letter "T" includedin the booking charge (Example: 23152a V.C.-T(DUI).

610.74 CALIFORNIA YOUTHAUTHORITY WARRANT BOOKINGS.When an arrest is made on a C.Y.A. warrant,the charge shall be followed by "Enroute-CYA" in the box titled "Charge" on theBooking and Identification Record, Form 5.1.

If the arrestee is an adult, the arresting officershall make a telephonic notification of thebooking to the C.Y.A. Missing Ward Unit,Parole Headquarters-South.

Note: When an individual is arrested on aC.Y.A. warrant and there is also a local charge,the local charge shall take precedence; and thecustodial detention officer shall make theappropriate notifications to the C.Y.A. Missing

Ward Unit, Parole Headquarters-South(teletype code "LOS"). Any other change ofcustody or arrest status affecting the arrestee'savailability for release shall also be teletypedto C.Y.A. (4/165.35).

When the arrestee is a juvenile, the arresteeshall be detained at an appropriate juveniledetention facility.

610.75 FIREWORKS VIOLATIONBOOKINGS. Unlawful use, possession, sale,or discharge of fireworks shall be chargedunder Section 57.55.01 L.A.M.C.

When unusual circumstances or elements ofcommercialism exist, the Los Angeles FireDepartment, Fire Prevention Section, shall becontacted for investigative assistance andexpert testimony.

611. COUNTYWIDE WARRANT SYSTEM(CWS) BOOKINGS.

611.05 ACCESSING CWS-OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY.Accessing CWS via NECS Terminal.Officers shall, whenever practicable, accessCWS via an Area NECS computer terminal. Inaddition to data pertaining to suspects, officersinitiating CWS inquiries via a NECS terminalshall enter, or cause entry of, the followinginformation:

∗ Requesting officer's last name or assignedunit radio designation.

∗ Requesting officer's serial number.∗ Requesting officer's date of appointment.

Accessing CWS via Radio. Officersrequesting CWS information via radio shall:

∗ Upon receiving a clear radio frequency,begin transmission by stating the requestingofficer's assigned unit radio designation,followed by all available suspectdescriptors. The descriptor shall include thepaternal and maternal last name of aSpanish surnamed suspect, unless it isdetermined that only one name is used.

Note: This data shall be entered into theappropriate CWS format field by the receivingcontrol operator. If a positive response isreceived, the suspect descriptors from thewarrant shall be relayed to the requestingemployee.

∗ If applicable, designate the Area NECScomputer terminal to which a warrantinformation sheet is to be forwarded.

Note: Unless otherwise directed, officers shalldesignate the concerned Area jail for receipt ofCWS warrant information sheets. Watchcommanders may direct officers to designatethe concerned Area records unit for receipt ofCWS information (4/611.35).

Exception: An officer arresting an adult malein Central, Hollenbeck, Newton, Northeast orRampart Areas on a misdemeanor warrant mayrequest that the warrant information sheet be

teletyped to Metropolitan Jail Section. When awarrant information sheet is teletyped toMetropolitan Jail Section, approval for bookingshall be obtained from a Metropolitan JailSection supervisor.

611.10 POSITIVE RESPONSE TO CWSINQUIRY-EMPLOYEE'SRESPONSIBILITY. When a positiveresponse is indicated for a CWS inquiry therequesting employee shall:

∗ Pre-Arrest Procedures:

∗ Prior to arresting or transporting thesuspect, compare the descriptors on thewarrant to the suspect's physicalcharacteristics to determine if the suspectis the person described on the warrant.

∗ Officers presented with a Los AngelesPolice Department (LAPD) ClearanceDocument, Form 8.20, or other similarlyreliable document issued by another LosAngeles County law enforcement agencyor court by the suspect shall:

∗ Review the number and issue date ofthe CWS warrant response via theMobile Digital Terminal or radio;and,

∗ Compare that information to thewarrant number and issue date onthe LAPD or other Los AngelesCounty law enforcement agency orcourt clearance document.

Note: The suspect shall not be arrestedfor the CWS warrant if the issuancedate of the CWS warrant is more than30 days prior to that of the LAPD orother Los Angeles County lawenforcement agency or court clearancedocument.

∗ Once a determination has been made,either release or transport the suspect forbooking.

Note: Officers obtaining a return on awant and warrant check indicating thatan individual has an out of state felonywarrant shall check to determine if thereturn contains “NOEX” (noextradition) designator. If so, officersshall not arrest the person based on the“hit” without independent probablecause. Booking advice and approvalfor out-of-state fugitive arrests shall beobtained from the investigativesupervisor, FWS, or when closed, DSDAdministrative Desk. Fugitive WarrantSection has the final authority onbooking charges for out-of-state issues.

Pre-Booking Procedures:

∗ Immediately take the arrestee before thewatch commander for an inspection andinterview.

∗ Immediately conduct a search of allreasonably available records relating to



the suspect or wanted person whenever asuspect claims not to be the personnamed on a CWS warrant.

∗ Obtain booking advice from aninvestigative supervisor.

Note: Booking advice is not required ifthe investigative entity responsible forthe follow-up investigation is off-duty.

∗ Allow the suspect to review a copy ofeach warrant information sheet for whichbooking is to take place.

∗ Write the name of the arresting officer,the date, and the time the suspectreviewed the warrant(s) on the copy(ies)of the warrant information sheet(s).

∗ Record the following information, withrespect to each warrant, in the ArrestReport, Form 5.2, when the arresteeclaiming not to be suspect of a CWSwarrant is booked pursuant to thewarrant:

∗ List each of the specified recordschecked and list those records whichwere not checked, and the reasonstherefore. The arresting officer maydiscontinue the record search ifpositive identification of the suspectis established;

∗ State that there are no otherreasonably available records that areknown to the officer that could havebeen reviewed which might identifyor assist in identifying either thesuspect or wanted persons; and,

∗ Articulate the specific facts whichgive probable cause to believe thearrestee is the wanted person.

∗ Obtain booking approval from the Areawatch commander or the WatchCommander, Metropolitan Jail Section,Jail Division. Booking advice andapproval for out-of-state fugitive arrestsshall be obtained from the investigativesupervisor, FWS, or when closed, DSDAdministrative Desk. Fugitive WarrantSection has the final authority onbooking charges for out-of-state issues.

∗ Post-Booking Procedures:

∗ Write the booking number on the frontupper right hand corner of one copy ofthe abstract.

Note: In the case of an immediate cashbailout on a misdemeanor traffic warrant,a DR number is used in place of thebooking number (4/682.15).

∗ Return the abstract to the Unit to whichthe abstract was teletyped and cause theappropriate booking information to beentered into the CWS.

Note: When a CWS warrant arrestee isbooked into a jail facility other than thegeographic Area where the warrantinformation sheet was received, officersresponsible for the booking shall, without

delay, telephonically advise the unit wherethe warrant information sheet wasoriginally received and return the abstractto that unit when practicable.

When an Arrest Report, Form 5.2, is requiredfor an arrestee who is also the subject of aCWS warrant information sheet, or when aCWS abstract is an element of the probablecause that brought about the arrest of a suspectfor an offense other than that listed on thewarrant information sheet, a copy of the CWSwarrant information sheet shall be attached toa Continuation Sheet, Form 15.9, which shallbe incorporated into the arrest report.

Jail personnel discovering a CWS warrant(s)on a booked suspect shall compare the physicaldescriptors of the warrant(s) with those of thesuspect and allow the suspect to review theabstract(s) prior to including the warrant(s) asan additional change.

When a warrant information sheet does notarrive at the designated terminal within 15minutes, the requesting officer shalltelephonically notify the AutomatedWant/Warrant Unit, Records and IdentificationDivision.

611.15 CWS ARRESTEE ALLEGES TOHAVE BEEN PREVIOUSLY BOOKED ORCLAIMS NOT TO BE THE SUBJECT OFA WARRANT.

CWS Arrestee Alleges to Have BeenPreviously Booked. If an arrestee alleges tohave been previously booked by authority of awarrant obtained through the CWS, thearresting officer shall ascertain the validity ofthe warrant in question. To resolve the status ofthe warrant, the arresting officer shall:

∗ Contact the court of issuance, whenpossible, and inquire as to the status of thewarrant, or

∗ Contact Criminal Records Section, Recordsand Identification Division, and request acheck of arrest package for a relatedbooking document, or

∗ When applicable, contact law enforcementagency where booking allegedly occurredand request search of arrest package forbooking document.

Note: Booking documents must be checkedbecause often warrant arrests are not recordedon Criminal Identification and InvestigationRecords (rap sheets).

CWS Suspect Claims Not To Be The SubjectOf A Warrant. When a suspect claims not tobe the person named on the warrant or when asuspect voluntarily submits to a warrant checkat an Area/division, officers shall, prior tobooking, attempt to identify the suspect byaccessing the following:

∗ Local Warrants:

∗ Los Angeles Police Department Records.∗ Personal History Index.∗ Department of Motor Vehicles.

∗ Suspect's fingerprint comparison.

For Foreign Warrants, add:

∗ Originating Agency.∗ State Criminal History.

If during the records search the suspect ispositively identified as the subject of thewarrant, the record search may be terminated.When a record check does not eliminate thesuspect and the concerned Departmentemployee believes the suspect is the person onthe warrant, the suspect may be booked. Whena record check is made and the suspect isbooked, the procedure shall be outlined in anArrest Report, Form 5.2 (4/611.10). When arecord check is made and the suspect isdetermined not to be the subject of a warrant aLos Angeles Police Department ClearanceDocument, Form 8.20, shall be issued.

Note: Jail personnel completing a record checkon a booked arrestee shall document the resultson the Supplemental Charge Record, Form5.08, when the arrestee is determined to be thesubject of the warrant.

611.20 CWS ARRESTEE PREVIOUSLYBOOKED FOR WARRANT CURRENTLYIN CWS. When it is determined that anarrestee has been previously booked for awarrant currently in the CWS the arrestingofficer shall:

∗ Cause immediate release of the arrestee.∗ Obtain, if possible, the original booking

number, date of booking, and bookingagency.

∗ Telephonically notify the Warrant Unit,Records and Identification Division, of theprevious booking and related bookinginformation.

Note: Warrant Unit personnel shall causeremoval of the warrant from the CWS.

∗ Mark the original and all copies of thewarrant information sheet "Delete fromCWS," followed by the date, time, reasonfor deletion, and the arresting officer's nameand serial number.

∗ Forward, via Department mail, the originaland all copies of the warrant informationsheet to the Warrant Unit, Records andIdentification Division.

611.25 CWS WARRANTINFORMATION SHEET NOT USED FORBOOKING. When it is not to be used forbooking, the requesting officer shall:

∗ Mark the original and all copies of theabstract "Reactivate," followed by the date,time, reason for reactivation, and theofficer's name and serial number.

∗ Return the original and all copies to the unitwhere the abstract was received and causethe appropriate reactivation information tobe entered into the CWS.

611.27 WARRANT CLEARANCEPROCEDURES-INVESTIGATINGOFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITY. Whenever



an individual voluntarily submits to a CWSwarrant check at an Area or division, aninvestigating officer shall conduct a recordssearch to determine if the individual has anyoutstanding warrants. If there are nooutstanding warrants for the individual, theinvestigating officer shall issue the LAPDClearance Document, Form 8.20, to theindividual.

Note: The Form 8.20 shall be issued withintwo hours of the individual's warrant check orsent by registered mail within 10 days if it isunfeasible to complete the warrant check at thetime of request.

If the investigating officer finds that theindividual is wanted on an outstanding warrant,the investigating officer shall comply withestablished pre-booking procedures.

Note: The above procedures apply only toCWS warrants. No clearance document shallbe issued for or apply to National CrimeInformation Center (NCIC) warrants.

611.30 JAIL UNIT’S RESPONSIBILITY.Personnel of the jail unit where a warrantinformation sheet is received shall:

∗ As soon as practicable, deliver the warrantinformation sheet to the watch commanderof the concerned Area/division.

∗ Enter the appropriate booking informationinto the CWS when an arrestee is booked orposts immediate cash bail.

∗ Enter the appropriate reactivationinformation into the CWS when a warrantinformation sheet is not used to book anarrestee.

Personnel of the jail unit where a warrantarrestee is booked shall:

∗ Allow misdemeanor arrestees bookedpursuant to a warrant immediate access totheir property if the arrestees claim that theproperty contains evidence that they are notthe suspect listed on the warrant.

Note: If the misdemeanor arrestee authorizes,the property shall be released to any third partydesignated by the arrestee.


Note: When a booked prisoner is found to havean additional misdemeanor warrant, theabstract will be forwarded to the facility wherethe arrestee was booked. Upon receipt of theabstract, the concerned custodial detentionofficer shall verify the arrestee's identification,complete a Supplemental Charge Record, Form5.8, and enter the appropriate booking orreactivation information into the CWS. Whena records unit receives such an abstract, theconcerned records supervisor shall cause theabstract to be immediately delivered to thecustodial detention officer and the appropriatebooking or reactivation information to beentered into the CWS.

∗ Upon receiving an Overtime Response toAbstract Teletype, an employee assigned ordetailed to a jail facility shall, as soon aspracticable, deliver such notification to theconcerned watch commander.

∗ When an arrestee is booked on a want orwarrant obtained from the CWS computer,place the system identification number inthe appropriate box on the Booking andIdentification Record.

∗ Place want and warrant numbers in theWarrant Number box. Want numbers shallbe preceded by the letters "WNT." Theoriginal of the arrest warrant informationsheet shall be stapled to the back side ofpage 1 of the Booking and IdentificationRecord.

∗ When an arrestee has been arrested on awant obtained from CWS and it isdetermined prior to booking that a warranthas been issued for the same offense, thewarrant number shall be placed in theAdditional Charges box.

∗ When an arrestee has additional warrantshaving the same system identificationnumber as the original, the warrant numbersand courts shall be placed in the AdditionalCharges box. When the additional warrantshave different system identificationnumbers, the additional systemidentification numbers shall be placed in theAdditional Charges box preceding thewarrant number.

Exception: When an arrestee is booked on anoriginal warrant and a CWS systemidentification number is not available, the word"Hardcopy" shall be placed in the system IDNumber space of the Booking andIdentification Record.

Note: When an arrestee is booked on a want orwarrant which requires an Arrest Report, Form.5.2; a Disposition of Arrest and Court ActionReport, Form 5.9; or an Investigator’s FinalReport, Form 5.10, the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.1, shall be used.

∗ Ensure that both the system identificationand warrant numbers from all abstracts areentered into the computer.

611.35 RECORDS UNIT’SRESPONSIBILITY. When the concernedArea jail unit is unable to receive warrantinformation sheets and/or update CWSinformation, the records unit shall bedesignated, by the concerned patrol divisionwatch commander, to perform the appropriatefunction. Personnel of the records unit shall:


∗ Enter the appropriate reactivationinformation into the CWS when no arresteeis booked on the abstract.

∗ Deliver to the concerned watch commander,as soon as practicable, any OvertimeResponse to Abstract Teletypes.

611.45 PATROL DIVISION, WATCH

COMMANDER’S RESPONSIBILITY.Patrol division watch commanders shall beresponsible for:

∗ Advising patrol division personnel torequest transmission of warrant informationsheets to the Area records unit when theconcerned jail unit is unable to receiveand/or update CWS information.

∗ Directing appropriate corrective action to betaken in the case of overdue status warrants.

Note: A warrant shall not be reactivated unlesspositively ascertained, by contacting thearresting officer, that an arrestee has not beenbooked pursuant to the authority of the warrantin question.

Upon receipt of a CWS warrant informationsheet, the concerned Area/division watchcommander shall:

∗ Cause the warrant number and suspect'sname to be entered upon the WarrantAbstract Log, Form 08.12.

∗ Maintain custody of the warrant informationsheet until release to the Departmentemployee requesting the CWS inquiry.

∗ Prior to releasing the warrant informationsheet, cause the requesting employee to signtheir name and serial number on theWarrant Abstract Log, Form 08.12,acknowledging receipt of the warrantinformation sheet.

∗ Ensure the appropriate disposition of thewarrant information sheet.

∗ Cause an entry to be made on the WarrantAbstract Log, Form 08.12, indicating thedisposition of the warrant information sheet.

∗ Sign their name and serial number on theWarrant Abstract Log, Form 08.12,verifying the receipt and disposition of thewarrant information sheet.

611.50 JAIL DIVISION SUPERVISOR’SRESPONSIBILITY. Jail Division supervisorsshall be responsible for:

∗ Ensuring proper disposition of warrantsteletyped to Jail Division.

∗ Directing appropriate corrective action inthe case of overdue status for warrantsteletyped to Jail Division.

Note: Warrants shall not be reactivated unlesspositively ascertained, by contacting thearresting officer, that an arrestee has not beenbooked pursuant to the authority of the warrantin question.

611.55 RECORDS ANDIDENTIFICATION DIVISIONRESPONSIBILITY. A CWS warrant thatcaused the wrong suspect to be booked shall bepurged from CWS. Purged warrants shall notbe reactivated or re-entered into the CWS database, unless:

∗ The purged warrant is a felony warrant,felony want, or felony commitment; and,

∗ The Commanding Officer, Records andIdentification Division, determines that thepurged warrant, on its face or as



supplemented by data obtained throughadditional investigation, contains sufficientreliable, descriptive information about thewanted person to justify re-entry.

Note: A warrant that has been purged from theCWS data base and is subsequently recalled bythe court and reissued after the addition of newdescriptor information may be re-entered intothe CWS data base if the warrant meets theminimum input requirements.

The arrest disposition of an arrestee booked onthe wrong warrant shall not be communicated(as part of the criminal arrest history of thearrestee) to the:

∗ California Department of Justice;∗ Federal Bureau of Investigation; or∗ Any local, state, or national organization,

agency, or data collection service.

If an arrest record is communicated to an abovelisted entity and it is subsequently determinedthat the arrestee is not the suspect listed on thewarrant, a copy of the arrest and dispositionrecords shall be forwarded within 30 days ofthe determination to the concerned agency andthe last known address of the arresteeindicating that the person was arrested on awarrant issued for another person. "Purge therecords of the arrest" shall be noted in red atthe top of the form.

615. BOOKING MILITARYPERSONNEL.615.10 NOTIFICATION TO LIAISONOFFICER. When booking a member of theArmed Forces (1), the booking employee shallnotify the Liaison Officer, Detective SupportDivision, by telephone, of the arrestee's:

∗ Name, rank, and serial number.∗ Branch of service.∗ Organizational unit and its location.∗ Dress (uniform or civilian clothes).∗ Duty status (on liberty, on orders, AWOL,

deserter).

The name, rank, and serial number of theLiaison Officer shall be obtained and placed onthe booking slip (4/606.09).

[(1) Armed Forces personnel include: membersof the Navy Marine Corps, Air Force, Army,Coast Guard, and National Guard on activeduty.]

615.20 MILITARY SERVICE GROUPSTO BE BOOKED AS CIVILIANS. Theregular booking procedure shall apply when anarrestee is a member of the:

∗ United States Maritime Service.∗ California State National Guard (inactive

duty).∗ United States Maritime Training Service.∗ California State Naval Guard.

615.30 ARMED FORCES INDUCTEES.When an arrestee has received orders to reportto an induction center but has not beeninducted, he/she shall be handled as a civilian.

If the detention results in his/her being unableto report to the induction center at the specifiedtime, the Federal Bureau of Investigation shallbe notified.

615.40 HIGH-GRADEMISDEMEANORS AND FELONIES BYARMED FORCES PERSONNEL. When amember of the Armed Forces is arrested for afelony or a high-grade misdemeanor (2), he/sheshall be booked on the offense indicated andnot released to the military authorities.

[(2) "High-grade" misdemeanors include:Petty Theft, Dangerous Weapons' Control Law,Traffic Manslaughter, Indecent Exposure,Child Molesting, Contributing, Lewd Conduct,Lewd Loiterer, and all other misdemeanor sexcrimes.]

617. BOOKING ON A “FOREIGN”CALIFORNIA ADULT MISDEMEANORWARRANT.617.10 NOTIFICATION TODEMANDING JURISDICTION. When anarrestee is booked on a foreign California adultmisdemeanor warrant and is not wanted on alocal charge, the custodial detention officershall cause a Notification of Availability forRelease Teletype (4/165.34) to be sent to thedemanding jurisdiction. The foreignjurisdiction shall also be notified by thecustodial detention officer of any change ofcustody or arrest status affecting the arrestee'savailability for release.

Exception: When an adult is booked on a LosAngeles County Sheriff's Departmentmisdemeanor warrant, the detention officershall cause a teletype notification to be sent tothe Sheriff's Department Transportation Bureau(4/660.20).

617.15 JUVENILE NAMED ON AFOREIGN CALIFORNIA ADULTTRAFFIC WARRANT. When a juvenile isnamed on an adult traffic warrant that wasissued by a court outside the City of LosAngeles, the watch commander approving thebooking shall ensure that an attempt is made tocontact the jurisdiction of issuance to verify thestatus of the warrant prior to the booking of thejuvenile (4/218.60 and 4/218.61).

617.20 BOOKED MISDEMEANANTWANTED ON A LOCAL CHARGE. Whenan arrestee is booked on a foreign Californiaadult misdemeanor warrant and is subsequentlydetermined to have local wants or warrants, thecustodial detention officer shall complete aSupplemental Charge Record, Form 5.8, andcause teletype notification of the change inarrest status to be made to the foreignjurisdiction. When the arrestee remains inDepartment custody after disposition of thelocal charge, the custodial detention officershall cause the Notification of Availability forRelease Teletype (4/165.34) to be sent. Whencustody of the arrestee is transferred to anagency other than the wanting agency, thecustodial detention officer shall cause a

Notification of Forwarded Warrant Teletype(4/165.35) to be sent.

618. ARREST OF FOREIGN NATIONALS.

618.20 NOTIFICATION OF ARREST.When an arrestee claims to be a foreignnational, the detention officer shall notify theDepartment Command Post, CommunicationsDivision of the arrestee's name, the bookingnumber, and the charge.

618.40 COMMUNICATIONS WITHPRISONERS BY FOREIGN CONSUL.Upon presentation of his credentials, a foreignConsular Officer shall be permitted to visitwith any foreign national in custody and toarrange for legal representation. Anycommunication directed to the foreign Consulby a foreign national in custody shall beforwarded without delay.

620. SEARCHING ARRESTEES ATBOOKING OFFICE.620.10 REMOVAL OF PROPERTY OFARRESTEES-CITY JAIL SYSTEM.Arrestees shall be searched at the booking deskin accordance with legal standards andDepartment policy.

Permissible Items Retained by the Arrestee.Arrestees may only retain the below listeditems on his/her person:

∗ Clothing being worn (except as listed inManual Section 4/645.20;

∗ Los Angeles Police Department trafficcitations (Traffic Notices to Appear), whenthe arrestee is to appear in a traffic court.Such citations shall be stapled to thearrestee’s copy of the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.1;

∗ Prescription glasses; and,∗ Hearing aid with battery.

Note: Juveniles shall be allowed to keep basicclothing only.

All other property that the arrestee is notallowed to retain, with the exception ofcontraband, shall be packaged in an unused,number-imprinted, polyethylene prisonerproperty bag (excluding excess personalproperty). The imprinted number on theprisoner property bag shall be recorded in theProperty section of the Booking andIdentification Record.

620.11 CARE AND CUSTODY OFPERSONAL PROPERTY OF JUVENILEARRESTEES. Employees arresting orprocessing juvenile arrestees shall remove allof the juvenile's personal property. Theproperty shall be itemized in the Propertysection of the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1, and packaged in an unusedpolyethylene prisoner property bag. Theproperty bag shall be sealed and theprepunched number on the bag recorded in theProperty section of the Form 5.1.



Note: Money shall be placed in a separate coinenvelope before being placed in the propertybag.

When booking or processing juvenile arresteeswho will not be detained, the employees shallverify the contents of the property bag with thejuvenile prior to his/her release. When thejuvenile arrestee is to be booked into a LosAngeles County Probation facility, he/she shallbe turned over to Intake and Detention Control,Juvenile Hall with a copy of the arrest reportand the sealed property bag.

620.12 ADDITIONS TO, ORREMOVALS FROM, THE PRISONERPROPERTY BAG. When a prisoner'spersonal property is added to, or a portion isremoved from, a sealed prisoner property bag,a new bag shall be utilized. The prepunchednumber on the prisoner property bag shall berecorded in the Property section of Page 3(Property Record) of the Booking andIdentification Record, followed by the lastname and serial number of the officer addingto, or removing a portion from, the personalproperty. In addition, when investigations,additions, or removals are made to a prisoner'spersonal property bag, the custodial detentionofficer shall record the correct transaction onthe back of Page 3 (Record of PropertyTransaction) of the Booking and IdentificationRecord.

620.15 REMOVAL OF PROPERTY OFARRESTEES-LOS ANGELES COUNTYJAIL. An officer booking a female arrestee atLos Angeles County Jail shall conduct a searchof the arrestee's purse. All property shall bepackaged in a prisoner's property packageexcept that the arrestee may return the itemsallowed under existing Los Angeles CountyJail regulations.

620.20 RESPONSIBILITY FORSEARCH OF ARRESTEE. Searches ofprisoners booked in the City Jail System shallbe conducted by the arresting or transportingofficer, unless specifically relieved of thesearching responsibility by an officer assignedto that duty.

With the approval of the commanding officerof the place of booking, an officer may bespecifically assigned to searching duties andmay assume responsibility for the search of anarrestee from the arresting or transportingofficer.

Note: A police officer or station officerconducting the search shall be of the same sexas the arrestee.

620.22 BOOKING SEARCHES.

DEFINITIONS:Strip Search. A strip search shall beconsidered to be any search wherein anarrestee is required to remove all of his or herclothing, or to remove or arrange some of hisor her clothing, so as to permit a visual

inspection of the underclothing, breasts,buttocks, or genitalia of that arrestee.

Visual Body Cavity Search. A visual bodycavity search shall be considered any searchwherein an unclothed arrestee is required tobend at the waist, squat, or to lift or spread thebreasts, buttocks, or genitalia to allow visualinspection of the body cavities.

Physical Body Cavity Search. A physicalbody cavity search shall be considered anysearch requiring any physical intrusion into abody cavity (private parts) by either thearrestee or another person.

Note: Arrestees in Department custody shallnot be given a physical body cavity search,except pursuant to a valid search warrant.

Body Cavity. A body cavity is the stomachand rectal cavity of any male or female, or thevaginal cavity of a female. The mouth is notconsidered a body cavity for the purpose ofthese procedures.

The three types of searches defined above arerestricted to only those arrestees for whombooking approval has been obtained. Neitherarrestees nor any other detainees are to besubjected to a strip search, visual body cavitysearch, or physical body cavity search untilafter booking approval has been obtained andthe appropriate search has been authorized bythe supervisor.

Strip searches of arrestees booked intoDepartment facilities shall be conducted asfollows:

Misdemeanor/Infraction Arrestees. Arresteesin custody for a misdemeanor or infractionoffense shall not be given a strip or visualbody cavity search unless:

∗ The offense involved a controlledsubstance; or,

∗ The offense involved a weapon or violenceand there is a reasonable suspicion that thearrestee is concealing a weapon; or,

∗ There is an articulable and reasonablesuspicion that the arrestee is concealingcontraband or a weapon regardless of theoffense.

The In-Custody Authorization for Strip Search,Visual Body Cavity Search, Physical BodyCavity Search, Form 5.30, shall be used onlyby jail personnel to request a search of anarrestee when the necessity to search arisesafter the arrestee has been booked and therelated reports completed.

Officer’s Responsibility. When an officer hasa reasonable suspicion that an arrestee incustody for a misdemeanor or infractionoffense is concealing a weapon or contraband,the officer shall:

∗ Complete a Booking Approval, Form 12.31;∗ Submit the Form 12.31 to the Area watch

commander or the Watch Commander,Metropolitan Jail Section, Jail Division;and,

∗ Upon supervisory approval, conduct thestrip search or visual body cavity search.

Note: The search shall be conducted in an areaof privacy so that persons not of the same sexas the arrestee or not required for the search areexcluded from the immediate area and areunable to observe the arrestee.

∗ Upon completion of the search, completethe "Results of Search" portion of the Form12.31 and include the information in thearrest report narrative.

Note: Any object observed during a visualbody cavity search may be recovered by thesearching officer (e.g., taped under breast orscrotum) provided it is not inside or partiallyinside a body cavity, i.e., vagina or anus. Inthese cases, the arrestee shall be isolated andkept under observation until a body cavitysearch warrant has been obtained. A physicalbody cavity search requires a search warrant(4/620.25).

Exception: In any case where the objectobserved is a weapon and there is animmediate present danger of it being usedagainst an officer, the object may be recoveredwithout a search warrant.

Jail Personnel Responsibility. When itbecomes necessary to search an arrestee bymeans of a strip search, a visual body cavitysearch, or a physical body cavity search afterthe arrestee has been booked into theDepartment jail system and the related arrestreports have been completed, jail personnelshall use the Form 5.30 to request authorizationto conduct the necessary search. Custodialsearches shall be conducted in the samemanner as described for booking searches ofmisdemeanor or felony arrestees as describedherein.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Upon receipt ofa Booking Approval, Form 12.31, or anIn-Custody Authorization for Strip Search,Visual Body Cavity Search, Physical BodyCavity Search, Form 5.30, the supervisor shall:

∗ Confirm the validity of the booking charge;∗ Review the form for completeness and

accuracy;∗ Determine if the specific facts and

circumstances justify the type of searchrequested;

∗ Approve or disapprove the strip search,visual body cavity search, or physical bodycavity search; and,

∗ Ensure any search approved is conducted asset forth in this Manual.

Felony Arrestees. Arrestees in custody for afelony offense shall be given a strip search.Arrestees in custody for a felony offense shallnot be given a visual body cavity searchunless:

∗ The offense involved a controlledsubstance; or,



∗ The offense involved a weapon or violenceand there is a reasonable suspicion that thearrestee is concealing a weapon; or,

∗ There is an articulable and reasonablesuspicion that the arrestee is concealingcontraband or a weapon regardless of theoffense.

Note: A visual body cavity search or physicalbody cavity search requires a Form 12.31 or aForm 5.30. Additionally, a search warrant isrequired for a physical body cavity search(4/620.25).

The term "contraband" as it applies to visualbody cavity searches is restricted to controlledsubstances or other items that pose a threat tothe security of the jail facility. Visual bodycavity searches shall not be conducted, withouta search warrant, solely to recover evidence ofa crime.

Officers not of the same sex as the arresteeshall be excluded from the immediate areaduring a strip search or visual body cavitysearch.

Note: Employees conducting a strip search orvisual body cavity search shall not touch thebreasts, buttocks, or genitalia of the arrestee.

Arrestee Refusal. If an arrestee refuses tosubmit to a strip search or visual body cavitysearch the officer conducting the search shall:

∗ Advise the arrestee that he or she will besearched.

∗ Notify a supervisor of the arrestee's refusalto be searched.

∗ Place the arrestee in an isolation cell underobservation until sufficient officers of thesame sex as the arrestee are available toconduct the search.

∗ Search the arrestee.

A supervisor of the same sex as the arresteeshall be present during the search of combativeand uncooperative arrestees.

620.25 PHYSICAL BODY CAVITYSEARCHES. Arrestees in custody shall not begiven a physical body cavity search exceptunder the authority of a search warrant andunder the following conditions:

∗ A physical body cavity search shall beconducted under sanitary conditions byeither a physician, registered or licensedvocational nurse, or Emergency MedicalTechnician Level II licensed to practice inCalifornia.

∗ The search shall be conducted in an area ofprivacy so that persons not of the same sexas the arrestee or not required for the searchare excluded from the immediate area andare unable to observe the arrestee.

Exception: Licensed medical personnel are notrequired to be of the same sex as the arrestee.

When a physical body cavity search of anyarrestee is conducted, the concerned employeeshall complete the required portion of the Form12.31 or Form 5.30. A copy of the search

warrant shall be distributed with the ArrestReport, Form 5.01.2.

In the event a physical body cavity search ofan arrestee is conducted after the arrestee hasbeen booked and the related reports have beencompleted, jail personnel shall use the Form5.30. A copy of the search warrant shall bedistributed with the Form 5.30.

620.30 CONFINEMENT OFMISDEMEANOR/INFRACTIONARRESTEES. The concerned custodialdetention officer shall ensure that arrestees incustody for a misdemeanor offense involvinga weapon, controlled substances, or violence,or arrestees subject to a strip search, visualbody cavity search, or physical body cavitysearch, upon booking, are confined in aseparate holding area from other misdemeanorand infraction arrestees.

Exceptions:

∗ Three hours after the time of arrest,misdemeanor and infraction arrestees incustody for an offense not involving aweapon, controlled substance, or violence,or not otherwise subject to a strip search orvisual body cavity search or physical bodycavity search, may be confined with thosemisdemeanor and infraction arrestees thatare in custody for a charge involving aweapon, controlled substance, or violence,or who have otherwise been subjected to astrip search or visual body cavity search orphysical body cavity search, in accordancewith Title 15 of the CaliforniaAdministrative Code.

∗ Misdemeanor and infraction arrestees incustody for other than an offense involvinga weapon, controlled substance, or violence,or who have not been the subject of a visualbody cavity search or physical body cavitysearch, may be confined with thosemisdemeanor and infraction arrestees thatare in custody for a charge involving aweapon, controlled substance, or violence,or who have otherwise been subjected to astrip search or a visual body cavity searchor physical body cavity search, prior tothree hours from the time of arrest when anemergency exists and written supervisoryapproval is documented in the WatchCommander's Daily Report, Form 15.80, orthe Daily Deployment Sheet, TemporaryForm 108.

Note: An "emergency" is defined as anycondition which poses a risk to the safety andwelfare of the prisoners or Departmentpersonnel. Overcrowding is not an emergency,except in a mass arrest situation.

625. IDENTIFICATION OFARRESTEES.625.10 BOOKING AND IDENTIFICATIONRECORD. Rolled right thumbprints shall beplaced on the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Bureau of Identification ArrestNotification, and Jail Custody Record pages of

the Los Angeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.1 and Form 5.1.1, for;

∗ All booked adults.∗ Juveniles age twelve or older booked for

any offense under Section 602 WIC.

Note: Situations may arise when a juvenile,regardless of age, is arrested for a 601 WIC(gang member) violation or a juvenile under 12years of age is arrested for a 602 WIC (seriouscrime, multiple offender) violation and shouldbe fingerprinted and/or palm-printed. Suchadditional fingerprinting shall be at thediscretion of the Area juvenile coordinatorafter appropriate review. During off-hours, thewatch commander shall make thisdetermination.

Additionally, the flat fingerprints of the fourfingers of the right hand shall be placed in thespace provided on the reverse side of the JailCustody Record, Page 5.

When the arrestee is released, the process shallbe repeated and the two sets of prints comparedfor the purpose of identification.

Note: When the right thumb or fingers cannotbe printed, the left thumb and fingers shall beused and a notation to that effect shall beindicated next to the prints.

Juveniles taken into custody for a 300 WICviolation shall be issued a booking numberregardless of age; however, the juvenile shallnot be fingerprinted as part of the bookingprocess. Manually inked fingerprints forinvestigative purposes only are permissible. AllLos Angeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.1, including those for 300 WICviolations shall be forwarded to Records andIdentification Division.

625.20 FINGERPRINTING ARRESTEES.When an arrestee is booked at a Departmentfacility, the booking employee shall fingerprintand photograph the arrestee using the LivescanTenprinter, for electronic transmission toRecords and Identification Division. When anarrestee is booked at a non-Department facility,other than Los Angeles County Jail, andpersonnel of that facility are not available tofingerprint an arrestee, it shall be the arrestingofficer's responsibility to print the arrestee. Thearresting officer shall print the arrestee,completing the number of Fingerprint Cards,Form FD249, required by Records andIdentification Division.

After obtaining the prisoner's fingerprints andsignature on the required cards, thefingerprinting employee shall affix his/hersignature, serial number, and date. Theapproving supervisor shall sign his/her lastname and serial number in the lower left corneron the back of the card, under the formnumber. All other necessary information shallbe added by Records and IdentificationDivision.

Booking Areas/divisions with LivescanNetwork capabilities shall send the fingerprints



of adult and juvenile arrestees to R&I Divisionvia the Livescan within a maximum of sixtyminutes after the arrestee is booked. Detentionofficers unable to FIN an arrestee within amaximum of sixty minutes shall notify theCriminal Identification Section, Records andIdentification Division.

When notified that a detention officer has beenunable to Livescan an arrestee within amaximum of sixty minutes, the Area watchcommander shall record on the WatchCommanders Daily Report, Form 15.80, thereason for not being able to Livescan thearrestee.

The completed Fingerprint Cards shall beattached to the Booking and IdentificationRecord portion of the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1, andforwarded to Records and IdentificationDivision.

Requesting Fingerprints for Arrestees atLAC-USC Medical Center. When an arresteeis booked at Los Angeles County-USCMedical Center and the arrestee's injuriespreclude fingerprinting, the arresting officershall notify Detective Support Division andrequest a "photograph and print call."

Prior to arraigning or releasing a felonyarrestee in custody at LAC-USC MedicalCenter, the investigating officer shall verifythat fingerprints and photographs have beentaken.

Note: Records and Identification Division shallprovide updated processing requirements to allconcerned jail facilities on a periodic basis.

Supplemental Charge FingerprintingProcedure. Employees completing aSupplemental Charge Record, Form 5.8, shallprint flat impressions of both thumbs on pages1 and 2 of the Supplemental Charge Record.

If a thumb is missing, "missing thumb" shall beentered in the appropriate space. If boththumbs are missing, one additional FingerprintCard, Form FD 249, shall be completed andattached to the Records and IdentificationDivision copies (pages 1 and 2) of theSupplemental Charge Record.

Supplemental Felony Charge. When a felonycharge is added against an arrestee who hasalready been booked, the arrestee shall beLivescanned selecting the “Criminal PrintOnly” capture choice. Print three cards andforward with the supplemental booking form toRecords and Identification Division.

Note: If the arrestee is not fingerprinted via aLivescan Tenprinter, complete three (3)fingerprint cards using black fingerprint ink.

625.25 PALMPRINTING OF ARRESTEES.The Palm Print, Form 5.6.1, shall be completedwhen a suspect is booked for the followingoffenses:

∗ Adults.

∗ Auto Theft.∗ All Burglaries.∗ Forgery.∗ Robbery.∗ All Thefts.∗ Kidnapping.∗ Murder.∗ Rape.∗ Possession of Destructive Devices or

Explosives.∗ Narcotics.∗ Child Molesting.∗ Indecent Exposure.∗ Disorderly Conduct.∗ Loitering Around Schools.∗ Sex Crimes-The Form 5.6.1 may be

omitted in sex crimes where all personsinvolved are adult, voluntaryparticipants.

∗ Juveniles, 12 or Older.

∗ A Felony.∗ Possession of Loaded or Concealable

Firearms.∗ Escape.∗ Interstate Fugitive.

Note: Situations may arise when a juvenile,regardless of age, is arrested for a 601 WIC(gang member) violation or a juvenile under 12years of age is arrested for a 602 WIC (seriouscrime, multiple offender) violation and shouldbe palmprinted. Such additional palm printingshall be at the discretion of the Area juvenilecoordinator after appropriate review. Duringoff-hours, the watch commander shall makethis determination.

Juveniles taken into custody for a 300 WICviolation shall not be fingerprinted as part ofthe booking process. Separate prints forinvestigative purposes only are permissible.

Note: This form shall be used for any otheroffense when specifically requested by theconcerned investigating officer.

Records and Identification Division. Recordsand Identification Division shall write allidentifying numbers (Booking #, SID #, Main#, LA#) on the Palm Print Card and forwardthe Palm Print Card to the Latent Print Section,Scientific Investigation Division.

625.26 FORGERY ARRESTEES-SPECIALFINGERPRINTING. During the bookingprocess, fingertip and side palm prints shall beobtained from all forgery arrestees, using aPalm Print, Form 5.6.1, in addition to all otherrequired fingerprint cards.

Note: Officers booking a female forgeryarrestee at Los Angeles County Jail shallobtain the arrestee's fingertip and side palmprints, at Records and Identification Division,prior to booking the arrestee. The completedForm 5.6.1 shall be given to the bookingemployee at Los Angeles County Jail duringthe booking process to be included with theregular fingerprint cards.

625.30 HANDWRITING EXEMPLARS OFPRISONERS. The completion of allhandwriting cards by prisoners shall bewitnessed by a detention officer. AHandwriting Exemplar, Form 5.7, shall becompleted by each person booked as an adultfor:

∗ 470, 470a, 470b P.C. (Forgery);∗ 475, 475a P.C. (Possession of Fraudulent

Checks);∗ 476a(a), 476a(b) P.C. (Insufficient Funds –

Checks);∗ 484e, 484f(1), 484f(2), 484g, 484i P.C.

(Forgeries and other misuses involvingcredit cards);

∗ 532, 532a P.C. (Procuring False CreditReport or Financial Statement);

∗ 211 P.C. (Robberies where ransom notes areinvolved); and,

∗ Other crimes where handwritten notes areused in the elements of a crime.

Note: When a Supplemental Charge Record,Form 5.8, involves a charge not listed above, aHandwriting Exemplar, Form 5.7, shall becompleted if one has not already been made.

Handwriting Exemplars-Juveniles. AHandwriting Exemplar, Form 5.7, shall becompleted by each juvenile arrested for:

∗ Penal Code Section 470 (Forgery-General).∗ Penal Code Section 476 (Forgery-Checks,

etc.).∗ Penal Code Section 476(a) (Checks-Not

Sufficient Funds).

Note: A Handwriting Exemplar, Form 5.7,may be taken, on the advice of the WatchCommander, Juvenile Division, of juvenilesarrested for other offenses.

625.35 MISDEMEANOR WARRANTARRESTS-HANDWRITING EXEMPLARSREQUIRED. Officers who take an arresteeinto custody on a misdemeanor warrant for aviolation of:

∗ 470, 470a, 470b P.C. (Forgery).∗ 475, 475a P.C. (Possession of Fraudulent

Checks).∗ 476a(a), 476a(b) P.C. (Insufficient Funds-

Checks).∗ 484e, 484f(1), 484f(2), 484g, 484i P.C.

(Forgeries and other misuses involvingcredit cards).

∗ 532, 532a P.C. (Procuring False CreditReport or Financial Statement).

shall:

∗ Complete an Arrest Report, Form 5.2.∗ Obtain a handwriting exemplar from the

arrestee prior to booking. The exemplarshall consist of a minimum of thirtyhandwritten signatures in black, ball-pointpen.

∗ Witness the handwriting exemplar.Make the following notations on the reverse

side of the exemplar:

∗ Name of arrestee.



∗ DR number, located on the warrantinformation sheet. If the DR number isunavailable, then list the warrantnumber.

∗ Date, time, and location the exemplarwas made.

∗ Witnessing officer's name, serial number,and location of assignment.

∗ Book the exemplar as evidence in a manilaenvelope. Include on the envelope thenotations listed above.

Note: When the arrest occurs in a metropolitanArea, the exemplar shall be booked at PropertyDivision. When the arrest occurs in Pacific orWest Los Angeles Areas, the exemplar shall bebooked at West Los Angeles Property Section.When the arrest occurs in Harbor Area, theexemplar shall be booked at Harbor PropertySection. When the arrest occurs in a ValleyArea, the arrestee shall be booked at ValleyJail Section and the exemplar shall be bookedat Valley Property Section.

∗ Include a statement in the arrest reportindicating that the exemplar has beenobtained and the location where it wasbooked as evidence.

Note: Exemplars obtained by the arrestingofficer shall be in addition to the handwritingexemplars obtained by the detention officerduring the booking process.

625.40 ARRESTEE IDENTIFICATIONBAND. An arrestee identification band shall becompleted and attached to the adult arrestee'sleft wrist as soon as practicable after obtaininga booking number. The identification bandshall include only the arrestee's name andbooking number.

The band shall be completed and attached toall outside agency arrestees received fortemporary detention. The band shall containthe name and booking number of the arrestee.

635. PHOTOGRAPHINGARRESTEES AND SUSPECTS.635.05 LIVESCAN DIGITAL CAMERAUSE. The digital camera used in conjunctionwith the Livescan Tenprinter shall be used onlyfor photographing persons:

∗ Who are booked on formal charges; OR,∗ For whom an elimination is being

conducted to positively identify a person byprints who is not being booked at the time,but who may be booked after a positiveidentification is made.

Note: Instructions for the operation of thedigital camera shall be established andpublished by Records and IdentificationDivision.

635.10 PHOTOGRAPHINGPRISONERS. The following persons who arebooked shall be photographed using the digitalcamera used in conjunction with the LivescanTenprinter:

∗ All adults; and,∗ All juveniles, 12 years of age or older, taken

into custody pursuant to Section 602 WIC.

All arrestees fingerprinted on the LivescanTenprinter shall be photographed following theprocedure established by Records andIdentification Division.

∗ Room light shall be turned off, cameralights shall be turned on. All three cameralights shall be lit during the photographysession. Jail Division personnel shall notadjust or change camera light bulbs oradjust camera lights.

∗ Arrestee should be positioned standing onfootprints on floor, with head straight, eyesopen, but not exaggerated, and withoutshadows appearing in the background.

∗ A minimum of one frontal and one obliquedigital mugshot image shall be captured.

∗ If an arrestee is wearing glasses, a minimumof one frontal, with and without glasses,plus one oblique, with and without glasses,digital mugshot images shall be captured.

∗ If an arrestee has scars, marks or tattoos inthe publicly visible areas of the body, amaximum of three digital mugshot imagesshall be captured.

Note: No photographs shall be taken showingthe private parts of any prisoner for the solepurpose of proving the sex of the individual.

∗ “P” photographs can not be taken with theLivescan digital mugshot camera. Checkwith Photography Section, ScientificInvestigation Division, for procedure andcamera to be used for taking “P”photographs.

Note: Situations may arise when a juvenile,regardless of age, is arrested for a 601 WIC(gang member) violation or a juvenile under 12years of age is arrested for a 602 WIC (seriouscrime, multiple offender) violation and shouldbe photographed. Such additionalphotographing shall be at the discretion of theArea juvenile coordinator after appropriatereview. During off-hours, the watchcommander shall make this determination.

Juveniles taken into custody for a 300 WICviolation shall be issued a booking numberregardless of age; however, the juvenile shallnot be photographed as part of the bookingprocess. Separate photographs for investigativepurposes only are permissible.

Exceptions: Persons booked for 647(f) PC(Drunk), 23152 VC (DUI), misdemeanortraffic warrants, or non-criminal detention neednot be photographed unless there exists anindependent necessity for photographs (e.g.,indications of possible involvement in othercriminal activities).

Females who are to be booked at the LosAngeles County Jail shall be photographed atthe closest LAPD jail facility prior totransporting to the Los Angeles County Jail.Officers shall obtain a booking number prior totaking photographs.

When the digital mugshot camera used inconjunction with the Livescan Tenprinter isinoperative, arrestees shall be transported tothe nearest Department booking facility withan operational Livescan Tenprinter/digitalmugshot camera for fingerprinting andphotographing.

Note: The Los Angeles County Booking andProperty Record is generated at time ofbooking on Livescan Tenprinter.

635.15 PHOTOGRAPHING PRISONERSIN A COUNTY FACILITY. Uponnotification from Detective Support Division,the Photographic Section ScientificInvestigation Division shall photograph anyLAPD arrestee confined in a Los AngelesCounty facility.

635.20 VERIFICATION OFPHOTOGRAPHS PRIOR TO RELEASE.Releasing Employee’s Responsibility. Priorto releasing a prisoner, the releasing employeeshall:

∗ Ensure that the necessary photographs ofthe prisoner have been taken (Thisinformation is contained in the CustodyRecord page of the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1.);and,

∗ When it is necessary to transport a prisonerto have photographs taken, notify the watchcommander of the jail facility havingcustody of the prisoner.

Supervisor/Watch Commander’sResponsibility. When notified that it isnecessary to transport a prisoner forphotographing, the supervisor/watchcommander shall arrange transportation to thenearest Department facility having anIdentification Camera.

Transporting Officer’s Responsibility.Officers transporting a prisoner for the purposeof photographing prior to release shall:

∗ Ensure that the release forms have beencompleted,

∗ Release the prisoner immediately afterphotographing.

635.25 PHOTOGRAPHINGPROCEDURE.Prisoners. The employee photographing aprisoner shall follow the procedure as outlinedin Manual Section 4/635.10.

Photographing Procedure-IdentificationPurposes. When a person other than aprisoner is to be photographed for immediateidentification purposes, the employee takingthe photographs shall:

∗ Use a self-developing camera and black andwhite film;

Exception: The Identification Camera shall beused when a photographic negative isnecessary or a self-developing camera is not



available.

∗ Use a Photo ("P") number instead of abooking number;

Note: Obtain the "P" number fromPhotographic Section, Scientific InvestigationDivision. If SID is closed, obtain the "P"number from Detective Support Division.

∗ Place a "P" cover on the mug boardcovering the letters "BK" and the first twoadjacent booking numerals, set number tabsto show the five digits of the "P" number;

∗ Take one front view photograph;∗ Enter the name of the person photographed

and the "P" number on the Record ofPrisoner Photographs, Form 12.6;

∗ Complete one copy of the PhotographicServices Request, Form 15.44, in itsentirety, including the requesting officer'sArea and watch, and forward it to thePhotographic Section, ScientificInvestigation Division.

645. CUSTODY AND RELEASE OFARRESTEE'S PERSONAL PROPERTY.645.05 LOCATION OF ARRESTEES'VEHICLES. When an arrestee's vehicle is notimpounded or otherwise disposed of, officersshall indicate on the Booking andIdentification Record and on the appropriatearrest report the exact location where thevehicle was parked.

645.10 RESPONSIBILITY FORCUSTODY OF ARRESTEE'S PROPERTY.The searching officer (arresting officer,transporting officer, or division searchingofficer) shall be responsible for the care andcustody of an arrestee's personal property untilthe searching officer's name is entered on theBooking and Identification Record. After thesearching officer's name has been entered onthe Booking and Identification Record, thebooking employee shall be responsible for thecare and custody of the property until it istransferred or released.

Note: At the time of booking, the completedPage 3 of the Booking and IdentificationRecord shall be placed in a new polyethyleneprisoner property bag, with the prisoner'spersonal property, in such a manner that theidentification information is visible.

645.11 RESPONSIBILITY FORCUSTODY OF ARRESTEE'S PROPERTYRECEIVED FROM OUTSIDE AGENCIES.Prior to accepting custody of an arrestee froman outside agency, officers shall ensure that thearrestee's property is properly inventoried.Officers accepting custody of an arrestee withpersonal property from an outside agencyshall:

∗ Ensure that the arrestee inventories allpersonal property and notifies the outsideagency detention officer of any discrepancyprior to the arrestee signing for theproperty;

∗ Request that the arrestee's property beplaced in a sealed bag or container; and,

∗ Whenever practicable, ensure that thearrestee and the property are not separatedprior to booking into Department facilities.

When a discrepancy is disclosed as a result ofthe arrestee's inventory of the personalproperty, the transporting officers shall:

∗ Ensure that a supervisor of the agencyhaving custody of the arrestee has beennotified of the discrepancy; and,

∗ Telephonically notify their Area watchcommander of any discrepancy not resolvedby the outside agency supervisor and thearrestee.

645.12 DISPOSITION OFMISDEMEANOR ARRESTEE'SPERSONAL PROPERTY ATARRAIGNMENT. The concerned officerhaving custody of a misdemeanor arrestee attime of arraignment shall maintain custody ofthe arrestee's personal property until after thearraignment. The property shall be released tothe arrestee when he is released from custody,or to the Sheriff's Court Detail whentransferred to the custody of the Sheriff.

645.16 ARRESTS OF POLICERESERVE CORPS MEMBERS. When apolice reserve officer is arrested, the watchcommander from the area of arrest shall:

∗ Immediately notify the police reserveofficer's commanding officer of the arrest.

Note: When the concerned police reserveofficer's commanding officer is not available,the watch commander in the police reserveofficer's Area of assignment shall be notified.

∗ Notify the police reserve officer's bureaucommanding officer and request bookingadvice.

Note: When the concerned bureaucommanding officer is unavailable, thenotification and request for booking adviceshall be made to a commander in that bureau.These notifications may be made through theDepartment Command Post, CommunicationsDivision, when the concerned bureau office isclosed.

∗ Immediately notify the Department PoliceReserve Corps Coordinator.

∗ Immediately forward any Department-issued equipment in the officer's possessionalong with one copy of the related arrestreport, to the Officer in Charge, ReserveCoordination Division, Personnel Group.

645.18 SPECIAL OFFICERIDENTIFICATION. When an arrestee has inhis/her possession Special OfficerIdentification issued by the Board of PoliceCommissioners, such identification shall betaken from the arrestee and forwardedimmediately, with one copy of the arrestreport, to the Commanding Officer,Commission Investigation Division.

645.20 PROPERTY TAKEN FROM ANARRESTEE. Property which has been takenfrom the possession of an arrestee shall beaccounted for as follows:

Evidence. Property taken from an arresteewhich has, or may have, evidential value shallbe booked as Evidence. A Receipt for PropertyTaken into Custody, Form 10.10, shall beissued to the arrestee at the time that theproperty is removed from his/her person orcontrol. When circumstances make theimmediate completion of the Form 10.10impractical, it shall be issued as soon aspossible after the property is taken intoDepartment custody. The original of the Form10.10 shall be included as a page of theoriginal Property Report, Form 10.1; Releasefrom Custody Report Continuation, Form5.2.8; or Arrest Report, Form 5.2, whenevidence to be booked is listed.

It is not necessary to issue Form 10.10 forblood and urine samples and biological smearspecimens taken from an arrestee or the victimof a crime, nor is it necessary to include theseitems on a Form 10.10 used to list otherproperty taken from an arrestee or victim.

Personal Property. An arrestee's personalproperty which can be contained in a propertypackage or a purse shall be delivered to thecustodial detention officer at the time ofbooking (4/620.10). When booking an arresteeinto the City jail system, items which can becontained in a property package or a purseshall be listed on the Booking andIdentification Record. If there is insufficientspace, a Continuation Sheet, Form 15.9, shallbe used. One copy of the Continuation Sheetshall be attached to each copy of the Bookingand Identification Record. When an arrestee istransferred to the Los Angeles Sheriff'sDepartment, the custodial detention officershall ensure the arrestee's personal propertytransferred intact to the transporting deputy.

Money. When booking money in the amountof $500.00 or more, the amount of moneybeing booked shall be verified by a Jaildivision supervisor or a sworn supervisor priorto the arresting officer booking the money atJail Division, Property Section. The approvingsupervisor shall indicate verification by placinghis/her initials and serial number on the moneyenvelope.

Prescription Medication. Prescriptionmedications shall not be booked as excesspersonal property at any Department facility.The detention officer shall take custody ofprescription medication which was in thearrestee's possession and retain it in thearrestee's personal property. Prescriptionmedication shall accompany an arrestee whenthe arrestee is transferred to another location ofconfinement.

Arrestees with Orthopedic or ProstheticDevices. Orthopedic or prosthetic devicesshall include, but are not limited to:



∗ Canes.∗ Crutches.∗ Removable metal braces.∗ Plastic braces.∗ Neck braces.∗ Artificial limbs.∗ Wheelchairs.

Department personnel and officers of outsideagencies booking male arrestees with anorthopedic or prosthetic device necessary forthe arrestee's mobility shall book sucharrestees at either Metropolitan Jail Section,77th Street Jail Section, or Valley Jail Section.Female arrestees shall be booked at Valley JailSection or 77th Street Jail Section.

Removing Orthopedic or Prosthetic Devices.When Department personnel responsible for aDepartment jail facility have reasonable causeto believe that possession of an orthopedic orprosthetic device by an arrestee poses a safetyor security risk, such device may be removedfrom the arrestee with the approval of the jailfacility watch commander. If removal of thedevice becomes necessary, the arrestee shall beexamined by the on-duty physician at therespective jail facility.

Note: The arrestee shall be deprived of thedevice only during the time that the conditionswhich necessitated its removal continue toexist.

Storage of Orthopedic and ProstheticDevices. Orthopedic and prosthetic devicesshall not be booked as excess property, andshall be returned to the arrestee upon transferto the Los Angeles Sheriff's Department orwhen conditions permit.

The arrestee's name and booking number shallbe affixed to the devices, and the devices are tobe stored in a secure location within the jail.Additionally, the booking employee shallannotate the Jail Custody Record of the LosAngeles Consolidated Booking Form, Form5.1.2, indicating the temporary removal andstorage of the devices.

Watch Commander's Responsibility. TheWatch Commanders, Jail Division and ValleyJail Section, shall ensure that the provisions ofPenal Code Section 2656 are adhered torelative to the medical examination of arresteesfrom whom orthopedic or prosthetic deviceshave been removed. They shall also ensure thatthe examining physician indicates, in writing,on the Medical Record for Persons in Custody,Form General PHSOHD 15, whether or not thecontinued deprivation of the device would beinjurious to the health or safety of the arrestee.

CHP Arrestees. Excess personal propertybelonging to an arrestee booked by a CHPofficer on a charge within the responsibility ofthe CHP (24-2409 V.C.) shall be retained bythe CHP officer.

Excess Personal Property. When an arrestee’spersonal property cannot be contained in thearrestee’s property bag, it shall be packaged

separately as excess personal property. Additionally, the following clothing items shallbe classified and handled as excess personalproperty:

∗ Hats and any other non-essential clothingitems;

∗ Baggy pants which are unable to be held upwithout the use of the arrestee’s hands orother device; and,

∗ Jackets or T-shirts which, due to theirconstruction or design, may be construed asa possible security threat (i.e., cords,strings, metal parts, gang logos, racially orethnically offending material, etc.).

Note: In such cases where basic clothing is tobe removed, the arrestee shall be issuedDepartment supplied jail clothing, perDepartment Jail Operations Manual Section2/213.03.

Department personnel booking an arrestee’sexcess personal property shall:

∗ Complete the Excess Personal PropertyReceipt, Form 10.08.0, itemizing theproperty;

Note: Department personnel shall issue theoriginal copy of the Excess Personal PropertyReceipt, Form 10.08.0, to the arrestee.

∗ Staple a copy of the Excess PersonalProperty Receipt, Form 10.08.0, to thearrestee’s copy of the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.1;

∗ Complete the personal Property Envelope,Form 10.13.1;

∗ Gather all excess personal property into asingle bundle and ensure it is securelyfastened;

∗ Attach the completed Excess PersonalProperty Receipt, Form 10.08.0, and thePersonal Property Envelope, Form 10.13.1,to the outside portion of the bundle; and,

∗ Deposit the excess personal property withthe detention officer receiving the arrestee.

Exception: Excess personal property of anarrestee booked directly into a County jailfacility shall be deposited at the centralproperty room of Property Division.

The receiving jail shall retain unclaimed excesspersonal property for a minimum of 24 hoursafter the arrestee has been released ortransferred. After the 24-hour minimum,unclaimed property shall be transferred to:

∗ Area property room from an Area jail.∗ Valley Property Section, Property Division,

from Valley Jail Section.∗ The central property room of Property

Division from Jail Division.

Unless released to the arrestee or his/her agentwithin 30 days, the property shall betransferred as indicated below:

∗ All metropolitan area divisions and HarborArea-to the central property room ofProperty Division.

∗ All Valley Areas, Pacific Area, and WestLos Angeles Area-to Valley PropertySection, Property Division.

Unclaimed excess personal property shall beheld for 60 days from the date the Departmenttook possession of the property beforedisposal. However, if the arrestee is to remainin custody, he/she may request, in writing, forthe Department to hold the property for up to10 months from the date the Departmentinitially took possession of the property.

Excess personal property shall not beforwarded with an arrestee to another place ofconfinement within the City jail system norshall it accompany an arrestee transferred intoCounty custody.

Intra-Department Transfer of PersonalProperty. When a prisoner is transferred fromone place of custody within the Department toanother, all his/her property shall be transferredwith him/her, accompanied by the Jail TransferRecord, Form 6.11. However, when a prisoneris taken temporarily from a place ofconfinement by officers of the Department andwill be returned to the same place, his/herproperty need not be so transferred.

CHP Arrestees. Excess personal propertybelonging to an arrestee booked by a CHPofficer on a charge within the responsibility ofthe CHP (242409 V.C.) shall be retained by theCHP officer.

Inscribed or Numbered Property. Anarrestee's personal property which bears aninscription or number shall be reported on theBooking and Identification Record.

Animal. When an arrestee's animal has beenplaced in the care of an animal shelter, anotation indicating the type of animal and theaddress of the shelter shall be made on theBooking and Identification Record.

645.22 RETURNING EXCESS PERSONALPROPERTY TO ARRESTEE. When anarrestee is released from custody, the releasingdetention officer shall:

∗ If the excess personal property is beingstored in the jail releasing the arrestee,cause the excess personal property to bereleased to the arrestee.

∗ If the excess personal property is stored at alocation other than the jail releasing thearrestee, direct the arrestee to appear at thelocation at which his/her excess personalproperty is being stored with the originalcopy of the excess personal property receiptto claim the property.

645.23 RECEIPT FOR PROPERTYRELEASED. When an arrestee's property isreleased, receipts shall be obtained as follows:

Jail Custody Record, Form 5.1. When aprisoner is released, the employee releasing theprisoner's personal property shall:

∗ Establish positive identification and requirethe prisoner to sign the Jail Custody Record,



Page 5 of the Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1;

∗ Staple the Property Record, Page 3 of theForm 5.1, to the Jail Custody Record, Page5, and,

∗ Allow the prisoner to retain the Prisoner'sReceipt, Page 4 of the Form 5.1.

Excess Personal Property Receipt, Form10.8. When excess personal property isreleased to an arrestee or the arrestee's agent,the employee releasing shall establish positiveidentification and require the receiving personto sign the copy (manila) of the ExcessPersonal Property Receipt in the spaceprovided. Property shall be released to thearrestee's agent when the agent's name appearsin the box titled "Name of Arrestee's Agent"and the arrestee has signed and dated theadjoining box titled "Authorization forRelease" at the bottom of the arrestee's copy ofthe Excess Personal Property Receipt.

Release of an Arrestee's Animal. Thearrestee's copy of the Animal Relinquishmentand Impound Record will be authorization forrelease of the animal when presented to theconcerned animal shelter.

Exception: Animals which are being held asevidence will not be released except upontelephonic authorization from the PoliceDepartment.

Property Release, Form 6.8. When all or partof an arrestee's property booked personal isreleased during his/her confinement, thearrestee, or other person receiving the property,shall be required to sign the Form 6.8 in thespace provided. The prepunched number on theprisoner property bag shall be recorded on theForm 6.8. Property booked personal may bereleased to a person other than the arresteeprovided the arrestee signs a Property Release,Form 6.8. The person receiving the propertyshall also be required to sign the Form 6.8.

A felony arrestee's personal property shall notbe released without the approval of theconcerned investigating officer.

Exception: When Jail personnel are requestedto release items of a felony narcotics arrestee'spersonal property, but the request has not beenapproved by the concerned investigatingofficer, Jail personnel shall:

∗ Contact the arrestee and obtain his/herauthorization to release the property;

∗ Attempt to obtain telephonic approval forrelease or direction to retain the propertyfrom the assigned detective or his/hersupervisor;

∗ Contact a Jail supervisor for authorization torelease personal property when the assigneddetective or his/her supervisor cannot becontacted.

When it is determined that personal propertyshould be retained for additional investigation,the detective or supervisor making thedetermination shall cause the property to beimmediately removed from the arrestee's

personal property and booked as evidence.

Note: Approval is not required when amisdemeanor or felony arrestee authorizes therelease of money from his personal property.

645.25 PROPERTY DEPOSITED FOR APRISONER. When a person wishes to depositproperty for a prisoner:

∗ The property shall be accepted only at thejail where the prisoner is confined. Theacceptability of such property shall bedetermined by the watch commander.

∗ Only money and physical aids, such aseyeglasses or crutches, shall be accepted.

∗ A Form General 30 receipt shall becompleted. The original copy shall be givento the depositor and the second copyretained in the book to be placed in divisionfiles.

∗ The property shall be entered on theCustody Record page of the Booking andIdentification Record, along with the lastname and serial number of the personreceiving it.

∗ When the property is to be deposited in theprisoner property bag, a new bag shall beutilized. The prepunched number of theprisoner property bag shall be recorded onPage 3 (Property Record) of the Bookingand Identification Record, followed by thelast name and serial number of the officeradding the personal property.

645.30 DISPUTES OR DISCREPANCIESINVOLVING PERSONAL PROPERTY OFAN ARRESTEE. When there is a dispute ordiscrepancy concerning an arrestee's personalproperty, the watch commander shall benotified. If two prisoners booked in companyof each other disagree as to which one ownsany personal property found in the possessionof one of them, the property shall be booked tothe person in whose possession it was found.

646. SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGE -BOOKED PRISONER.

646.05 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGE-DEFINED. A Supplemental Charge is acharge which is placed against a person whohas previously been booked and is still in thecustody of the Department.

646.10 RECORDING SUPPLEMENTALCHARGES. Supplemental charges placedagainst a prisoner shall be recorded on theSupplemental Charge Record, Form 5.8, andshall be entered additionally on the CustodyRecord page of the Booking and IdentificationRecord. A Disposition of Arrest and CourtAction Report, Form 5.9, shall be completedwhen required (5/5.9).

Exception: When it is learned that a personunder the age of eighteen years has beenbooked as an adult or that a person booked asa juvenile was eighteen years of age or over atthe time of the commission of the crime, theconcerned investigating officer shall follow theprocedures provided by 4/705.62 or 4/705.63.

646.12 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGETELETYPES-WHEN REQUIRED. When aSupplemental Charge Record, Form 5.8, iscompleted, the detention officer completing theform shall cause a Supplemental ChargeTeletype to be sent to Los Angeles County Jailwhen the arrestee is an adult female (4/165.04).

646.14 MISDEMEANOR FILING ON AFELONY ARRESTEE. Detention officerswho are notified of a misdemeanor filing on afelony arrestee shall:

∗ Complete a Supplemental Charge Record,Form 05.08 (5/5.8-12).

∗ Notify the arrestee of any change in status,bail amount, and O.R. release eligibility.

∗ When the arrestee is not released on bail orown recognizance, cause the arrestee to bearraigned at the next available court session.

646.15 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGEAUTHORIZATION FOR PAROLE ORPROBATION VIOLATORS. When a paroleor probation officer requests a supplementalcharge be placed against a person believed tobe in the custody of the Department, the officershall be referred to any geographic Area watchcommander or the watch commander of JailDivision.

Watch Commander's Duties. A watchcommander, when requested by a parole orprobation officer, shall determine if the paroleeor probationer is in the custody of theDepartment. When the person is confined atanother Department facility, the watchcommander shall:

∗ Place a telephonic "hold" on the person withthe division of confinement.

∗ Cause a Supplemental Charge AuthorizationTeletype (4/165.06) to be sent to thedivision of confinement.

When the person is no longer in the custody ofthe Department, the watch commander shallfurnish the parole or probation officer with thefollowing information, when available:

∗ The reason for release.∗ The date, time, and court in which the

person is to appear, when applicable.

The watch commander of a Department jailfacility receiving a telephonic request for aparole or probation "hold" on a personconfined at the facility shall verify that aSupplemental Charge Authorization Teletypehas been received by the custodial detentionofficer within one (1) hour of the hold. If theteletype has not been received, the watchcommander shall contact the person makingthe original notification and determine thestatus of the teletype or if the hold is to becanceled.

Note: The watch commander approving thebooking for a parole or probation violationshall record the following information on theBooking Approval, Form 12.31:



∗ The name and telephone number of theparole or probation agent approving thehold; and,

∗ The time the telephonic hold was placed.

Upon receipt of the Supplemental ChargeAuthorization Teletype, the concerned watchcommander of the jail facility shall:

∗ Cause a Supplemental Charge Record, Form5.8, to be completed for the parole orprobation hold; and,

∗ Ensure that an additional Disposition ofArrest and Court Action, Form 5.9, iscompleted and attached to the custodyRecord.

Note: The Form 5.9 shall follow the arrestee tocourt.

Transfer to Los Angeles County Sheriff'sDepartment. When an arrestee who has aviolation of probation or parole charge pendingis transferred to the custody of the Sheriff'sDepartment, a copy of the SupplementalCharge Authorization Teletype shall be givento the deputy accepting custody of the arrestee.

648. MEDICAL TREATMENT OFPRISONERS.648.03 PRE-BOOKING MEDICALSCREENING OF ARRESTEES. Arrestingofficers shall complete an Arrestee MedicalScreening Form, Form 5.35, for each arresteewho is booked and detained in a Departmentjail facility or a County jail facility. Officersshall have arrestees acknowledge questions 1through 8 contained on the top portion of theform by requesting arrestees to sign in the boxprovided below the questions.

Note: Completion of the form is not necessaryif an arrestee is released on his or her ownrecognizance, released on a Nontraffic Noticeto Appear, Form 5.2.2, or immediately postscash bail.

When an arrestee receives medical treatmentfor any illness or injury prior to booking,officers shall complete an Arrestee MedicalScreening Form, Form 5.35, at the time of themedical treatment and have any additionalexamination required by answers to questionson the form done at the time of the medicaltreatment. Additionally, officers shall completean Inmate Classification Questionnaire andRecord of Medical Screening, Form 5.36.0, todetail information related to the housing ofarrestees and their medical needs.

Detention Officer’s Responsibility. Detentionofficers shall review each Arrestee MedicalScreening Form, Form 5.35, and InmateClassification Questionnaire and Record ofMedical Screening, Form 5.36.0. If the answerto any questions on the form is "yes," detentionofficers shall determine if the arrestee can beproperly detained in the booking facility. If theword "REFUSED" is written across thearrestee signature box, the detention officershall verify the refusal to sign with the arrestee.If an arrestee continues to refuse to sign the

form, the detention officer shall initial thearrestee signature box next to the officer'sinitials. Detention officers shall ensure that anynecessary special confinement or in-custodycare is provided.

648.05 MEDICAL TREATMENT -GENERAL. Booked and unbooked prisonersrequiring mental or physical examination ortreatment shall be cared for as outlined in4/648.10 through 4/648.30. No prisoner shallbe taken for any form of treatment orexamination to facilities or personnel otherthan those outlined in these sections, except inextreme emergency.

If the prisoner is in custody for an allegedviolation of California State Law and medicaltreatment is actually given, the officer havingcustody of the prisoner shall, followingtreatment, complete in duplicate an In-CustodyMedical Treatment, Form 761472. Both copiesof the Form 761472 shall be left with thetreatment records at the medical facility.

Note: In the event the Form 761472 is notavailable at the medical facility wheretreatment is given, officers shall, as soon aspracticable after processing the prisoner,ensure that the forms are obtained, completed,and forwarded to the medical facility where thearrestee was treated.

648.07 MEDICAL TREATMENTREQUIRED WHEN A CAROTID UPPERBODY CONTROL HOLD IS USED.Whenever a modified carotid, full carotid, orlocked carotid upper body control hold is used,the suspect shall be immediately examined bya physician at a contract hospital or jaildispensary.

Note: If the suspect is rendered unconsciousand fails to regain consciousness immediately,officers shall request an ambulance.

648.10 MEDICAL TREATMENT OFUNBOOKED ARRESTEES. An officerhaving custody of an unbooked arrestee who is,or complains of being, ill, injured or in need ofmedication shall:

∗ Cause the arrestee to be examined at aDepartment Jail Dispensary, a Los AngelesCounty Medical Center, or a Departmentcontract hospital;

Note: When emergency medical attention isnecessary, officers shall be guided by 4/210.75.

∗ When an arrestee is transported to a privatehospital by a City Rescue Ambulance,necessary treatment may be performed atthat hospital;

∗ Obtain a copy of the facility's medicaltreatment record completed by theexamining physician, including a statementof the circumstances which will be used asa medical authorization to book;

∗ When the examining physician recommendscontinued medical attention or scheduleddispensing of prescribed medication, but nothospitalization, book the arrestee at a

facility where such attention may beobtained;

∗ Include a detailed statement of the medicalattention received and/or prescribed in thearrest report; and,

∗ Give the medical treatment record to thebooking employee.

Arrestees Who Have Ingested Narcotics.When an employee believes that an arresteehas ingested narcotics or any other substancewhich could present a health hazard to thearrestee, the employee shall:

∗ Immediately transport the arrestee to theLAC-USCMC Jail Ward or, if more than 20minutes travel time from LAC-USCMC, tothe nearest available contract hospital formedical examination;

Exception: If circumstances dictate, thearrestee shall be transported by a Cityambulance as outlined in Department ManualSection 4/210.22, 4/210.23, 4/210.75, and4/648.13.

Note: Arrestees may be detained inMetropolitan Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Valley Jail Section facilities onlywith approval of the LAC-USCMC or contracthospital physician.

∗ Advise the attending physician of thesituation, including an estimate of theamount of time elapsed since the drugs wereingested, and, if possible, the type, quantity,and packaging of the drugs ingested;

∗ Obtain a copy of the medical treatmentrecord completed by the examiningphysician;

∗ Book any evidence obtained as a result ofthe medical treatment in accordance withestablished procedures; and,

∗ Include in the arrest report, as detailedstatement of the medical treatment receivedand/or prescribed.

Arrestees in Possession of PrescriptionMedication. When persons to be booked anddetained in Department custody haveprescription medication in their possession,officers shall transport them to theMetropolitan Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Valley Jail Section dispensary formedical evaluation prior to completing thebooking process.

Exception: When persons in Departmentcustody are to be booked and immediatelyreleased, a medical evaluation is not necessary.

Arrestees in Custody of an Outside PoliceAgency. An ill or injured person, or anindividual complaining of illness or injury, inthe custody of officers of an outside policeagency (4/850) and presented for booking at aDepartment jail facility, shall not be bookedwithout written medical authorization.

Arrestees to be Hospitalized. When theexamining physician recommendshospitalization, an officer having custody ofthe arrestee shall:



∗ Obtain a copy of the facility's medicaltreatment record.

∗ Cause the arrestee to be transported toLAC-USCMC Jail Ward and give themedical treatment record to the bookingdeputy.

Note: When transportation by ambulance isrequired and the City Ambulance is unable totransport, request transportation through theCounty Ambulance Department,LAC-USCMC.

∗ Complete a Booking and IdentificationRecord, Form 5.1 (5/5.1).

∗ Telephonically notify Records andIdentification Division, Criminal RecordsSection, and report the arrestee informationon the first nine lines of the Booking andIdentification Record.

∗ Telephonically notify Detective SupportDivision that fingerprints and photographsare needed.

∗ Package the arrestee's personal property(4/604.45).

∗ Deposit excess personal property atProperty Division (4/645.20).

∗ Submit the necessary reports at the Areawhere the reports will be processed (5/5.2-10).

Arrestees Refused Hospitalization atLAC-USCMC Jail Ward. When thephysician refuses to admit the arrestee to theJail Ward, an officer shall:

∗ Obtain a Medical Record, County Form260, containing the reason for referral.

∗ Book the arrestee at the appropriate Countyjail facility.

∗ Give the County Form 260 and the medicaltreatment record to the booking deputy.

∗ Submit the necessary reports at the Areawhere the reports will be processed (5/5.2-10).

Arrestees who Refuse or Deny MedicalTreatment. When an arrestee who is orappears to be ill, injured, in need ofmedication, or in need of medical attentionrefuses medical treatment, officers shall ensurethe arrestee is examined by medical personnelin accordance with established procedures. Ifthe arrestee continues to refuse treatment afterbeing examined by medical personnel,arresting officers shall obtain two copies of theexamining facility's medical treatment record.One copy shall be submitted to the detentionofficer at the time of booking and one copyshall be attached to the arrest report. Thearrestee's refusal shall be thoroughlydocumented in the narrative of the arrestreport.

648.11 MEDICAL TREATMENTREQUIRED WHEN TASER CONTROLDEVICE IS USED. Whenever the TASERcontrol device is used to control a suspect incustody, or being taken into custody, and theTASER darts make contact with that suspect'sclothing or skin, the suspect shall beimmediately examined by medical personnel.

If the suspect loses consciousness, officersshall immediately request an ambulance.

Note: Medical personnel shall include a doctoror a nurse at a contract hospital or jaildispensary, or a paramedic.

648.12 EMERGENCY MEDICALATTENTION OF BOOKED PRISONERS.When it is first apparent that a booked prisoneris in need of emergency medical attention, theemployee observing such a prisoner or madeaware of such a situation shall immediatelynotify a jail supervisor. The jail supervisorshall:

∗ Cause an examination to be made by a jaildispensary employee; and,

Note: In facilities without a jail dispensary, thejail supervisor shall immediately notifyCommunications Division requesting that aRescue Ambulance (R/A) and a patrol unitrespond to the jail Code 3.

∗ Immediately notify CommunicationsDivision requesting that an R/A and a patrolunit respond to the jail Code 3 if it isdetermined that further emergency medicalattention is required.

If any Area watch commander or the JailDivision Watch Commander identifies anavailable patrol unit at a jail facility where aprisoner needs emergency medical attention,he/she may assign that unit to accompany thetransporting R/A. Once a unit has beendesignated to accompany the R/A, the watchcommander may cancel the Code 3 call.

A prisoner shall be considered to be in need ofemergency medical attention when:

∗ The prisoner is intoxicated when arrestedand does not react in a normal manner aftertwo hours; or,

∗ The prisoner is unconscious; or,∗ Any delay in medical treatment might result

in further complications.

For additional responsibilities including thosefor non-emergencies refer to Section 4/648.20.

Communications Division’s Responsibility.

Emergency Medical Attention. Whennotified of a booked prisoner requiringemergency medical attention, CommunicationsDivision shall contact the Los Angeles FireDepartment to request an R/A, and dispatch apatrol unit to the jail Code 3 utilizing thestandard call selection sequence.

648.13 TRANSPORTING INJUREDSUSPECTS/ARRESTEES. Suspects orarrestees that require routine medical treatmentmay be transported in a police vehicle to aDepartment Jail Dispensary, a Los AngelesCounty Medical Center, or a contract hospital.When arrestees, suspects, or others requireemergency medical attention, they shall onlybe transported via Rescue Ambulance(4/210.75). When it is necessary to transport a suspect or arrestee by ambulance, at least one

officer shall accompany the suspect or arresteein the ambulance.

648.14 NOTIFICATIONS WHENPRISONER DIES IN A DIVISION JAIL. Adetention officer, upon learning of the death ofa prisoner in a Department Jail Facility, shallnotify the on-duty watch commander who shallthen notify:

∗ The Officer in Charge, Jail OperationsSection, Jail Division.

∗ The Department Command Post,Communications Division.

∗ A supervisor of the concerned agency, whenthe arrestee is booked by an agency otherthan this Department.

Note: During off-hours, notification shall bemade to the Watch Commander, MetropolitanJail Section, Jail Division.

The Commanding Officer, Force InvestigationDivision, Investigative Support Section, (FID),is responsible for ensuring that the Supervisor,Jail Dispensaries, Medical Services Division,Personnel Department, is notified. Notificationshall be routinely made as soon as practicableduring normal duty hours, Monday-Friday,0730-1630 hours.

Note: The FID investigating officers shall beresponsible for advising personnel ofinformation to be included in reports requiredas a result of the death of a prisoner held in aDepartment jail facility.

Procedures for transferring a prisoner'spersonal property to the Coroner and makingthe appropriate prisoner release notificationwhen a prisoner dies in a division jail shall beperformed in accordance with Section4/238.65.

648.15 NOTIFICATIONS WHEN APRISONER IS INJURED IN AN AREA ORDIVISION JAIL. A detention officer, uponlearning of a prisoner receiving an injury whilein an Area or division jail, shall:

∗ Notify the Officer in Charge, JailOperations Section.

∗ Notify the watch commander.∗ Notify the Department Command Post,

Communications Division.

Note: When the injury received is such thatmedical treatment appears necessary, theprocedures set forth in 4/648.20 shall apply.During off-hours, notifications shall be madeto the Watch Commander, Metropolitan JailSection.

648.16 MEDICAL TREATMENT FORARRESTEES UNDER THE INFLUENCEOF PHENCYCLIDINE (PCP). All arresteeswho exhibit objective symptoms of beingunder the influence of phencyclidine (PCP)shall receive medical treatment prior tobooking as outlined in 4/648.10.

648.17 PRE-BOOKING MEDICALTREATMENT OFDRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE



ARRESTEES-GCI READING OF .30 ORHIGHER. When an arrestee detained forsuspicion of DUI elects to take a breath test,and the GCI reading is .30 percent or higher,arresting officers shall:

∗ Record the test result on the GCI usage log;∗ Ensure the arrestee is physically examined

by medical personnel as outlined in4/240.10;

∗ Record the GCI reading on the BookingApproval, Form 12.31; and,

∗ Notify a supervisor prior to booking.

Note: If the examining physician recommendshospitalization of the arrestee, the arrestingofficers shall be guided by the advice of thephysician relative to transporting the arresteeto the location of booking.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Upon beingnotified by arresting officers that an arresteehas a .30 percent or higher GCI reading, theconcerned supervisor shall ensure:

∗ The arrestee has been physically examinedby medical personnel;

∗ The results of the GCI are noted on theBooking Approval, Form 12.31; and,

∗ The booking/custody location of thearrestee is in accord with therecommendations of the examiningphysician.

648.18 NON-ARRESTEES WHO REFUSE,DENY, OR REQUEST MEDICALTREATMENT. If a non-arrestee, such as avictim or witness, requests medical treatment,officers shall determine whether the request isan emergency. If it is an emergency, officersshall summon an ambulance. If it is not anemergency, officers shall advise the non-arrestee to seek private medical treatment.

If a non-arrestee appears to need emergencymedical treatment, but refuses and/or deniesthe need for such treatment, officers shallrequest an ambulance and allow ambulancepersonnel to document the non-arrestee'srefusal and/or denial.

Note: Non-arrestees who refuse and/or denyemergency medical treatment shall beencouraged to stay at the location to awaitambulance personnel. However, if non-arrestees insist on leaving the location, officershave no authority to stop them. An effortshould be made to document a non-arrestee'srefusal and/or denial with the non-arrestee'ssignature on the appropriate crime report or inthe Field Officer's Notebook before the non-arrestee leaves the location.

Non-Custodial Individuals Claiming InjuryDue to Department Employee Actions. Whencircumstances indicate that a non-custodialindividual may have been, or claims to havebeen, injured by a Department employee, theinvestigating supervisor shall ensure that theindividual receives a medical examination orevaluation (4/210.34).

648.20 MEDICAL TREATMENT OFBOOKED ARRESTEES. The responsibilityfor obtaining medical treatment for a prisonershall rest with the employee who then hascustody of the prisoner. When any employeebecomes aware that a prisoner confined in anyplace of detention is, or complains of being, inneed of medical treatment, the employee shallimmediately notify a jail supervisor. The jailsupervisor shall cause an examination to bemade by a jail dispensary employee.

If it is determined that a prisoner needs furthermedical attention, or the facility does not havea jail dispensary, the jail supervisor shallcontact Communications Division and requesta police unit from the arresting officer’sArea/division of assignment Code 2 totransport the prisoner to a medical facility.

Note: For emergencies, in addition to theresponsibilities listed below, refer to Section4/648.12.

Employee’s Responsibilities. An employeeresponsible for obtaining medical treatment(non-emergency/emergency) for a prisonershall:

∗ Cause the prisoner to be delivered to acontract hospital or to a receiving clinicemployee for advice and/or treatment(4/210.75).

∗ Obtain a copy of either the MedicalTreatment Record, Form PDMSD 7, or theLos Angeles Fire Department RescueReport, Form 660. Two copies are requiredwhen the arrestee is to be hospitalized at theLos Angeles County-USC Medical CenterJail Ward.

Exception: These forms are not required whena prisoner at Metropolitan Jail Section, 77thStreet Jail Section, or Valley Jail Sectionattends a regular sick call, and no outsidetreatment is needed, and the visit is recorded ina log book.

∗ Complete a Prisoner Injury or IllnessReport, Form 6.34, in cases involving injuryof any degree, hospitalization at the LosAngeles County-USC Medical Center, orepileptic seizure. A copy of either theMedical Treatment Record, or the RescueReport, shall be attached to the copies of thePrisoner Injury or Illness Report forwardedto the Commanding Officer, Jail Division.When a Prisoner Injury or Illness Report isnot required and medical treatment is given,a copy of either the Medical TreatmentRecord, or the Rescue Report, shall beattached to the Prisoner's Custody RecordCard.

Exception: The Form 6.34 is not required incases of epileptic seizures when a previousseizure has been reported within the pasttwelve months.

∗ Complete a crime report in addition to theIllness or Injury Report when required bycircumstances of the prisoner's illness orinjury.

Medication.

∗ At no time shall detention officers dispenseor allow arrestees to administer tothemselves, any prescription medicationwhich was in their possession at the time ofthe arrest.

∗ Arrestees that require periodic dispensing ofmedication shall be booked at MetropolitanJail Section, 77th Street Jail Section, orValley Jail Section.

∗ Prescription medication may only beadministered by medical personnel atMetropolitan Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Valley Jail Section as directedby the evaluating physician.

∗ Medication dispensed by detention officersor medical personnel at Jail Division shallbe recorded on the back of Page 5 (JailCustody Record) of the Booking andIdentification Record. The information shallbe listed under the heading Remarks andshall include:

∗ Date, time, and type of medicationdispensed.

∗ Officer dispensing medication.

∗ A prisoner may be administerednon-prescription medication (such asaspirin) only upon the prisoner's request.Department employees shall not suggestany form of medication.

Note: Detention officers, at end of watch, shallensure that the succeeding watch is madeaware of those prisoners requiring medicationand the time intervals at which it is to beadministered.

Medical Attention. When the medicalauthorization indicates the need for constantmedical supervision but not hospitalization, thearresting officers shall transport the arrestee tothe nearest jail facility capable ofadministering to the arrestee's medical needs.

Transferring Arrestee to LAC-USC MedicalCenter. When the examining receiving clinicphysician recommends hospitalization of anarrestee, the procedure as set forth in 4/648.10,"Arrestee to be Hospitalized," shall befollowed except the Booking and IdentificationRecord and its included reports shall not becompleted.

Communications Division’s Responsibility.

Non-Emergency Medical Attention.

When notified of a booked prisoner requiringnon-emergency medical attention,Communications Division shall attempt toassign the Code 2 non-emergency medicaltransfer call to the Area/division that initiallyarrested the prisoner. However, the WatchCommander, Communications Division, shallhave the final authority in determining whichArea/division is ultimately assigned a Code 2non-emergency medical transfer call.

Emergency Medical Attention.



When notified of a booked prisoner requiringemergency medical attention, CommunicationsDivision shall contact the Los Angeles FireDepartment to request an R/A, and dispatch apatrol unit to the jail Code 3 utilizing thestandard call selection sequence.

Outside Agency Arrestees. When a prisonerbooked into a Department jail facility byofficers of an outside police agency (4/850)complains of illness or injury, the watchcommander shall:

∗ Make an immediate telephonic notificationto a supervisor of the concerned outsideagency.

∗ Cause one copy of the completed PrisonerInjury or Illness Report, Form 6.34, whenapplicable, to be forwarded by the UnitedStates Mail to that agency.

648.25 ARRESTEES WITH CONTAGIOUSDISEASES.Screening and Booking Arrestees WithContagious Diseases. When booking anarrestee into a Department jail facility, thebooking employee shall, in addition to askingif he/she is ill or injured, ask the arrestee ifhe/she:

∗ Has, or has had, tuberculosis.∗ Has hepatitis or venereal disease.∗ Has AIDS or is HIV positive.∗ Has any other contagious disease.

If the arrestee states, or otherwise evidences,that he has such a condition or has hadtuberculosis, a medical evaluation shall beobtained prior to booking. Any statement madeby the arrestee regarding his condition shall benoted in the "Special Medical Problem" sectionof the Los Angeles Consolidated BookingForm, Form 5.1. The arrestee shall be bookedat the facility recommended on the MedicalRecord for Persons in Custody, Form PDMSD15 (M.T. Record).

Note: When an arrestee is booked into aCounty facility other than Los AngelesCounty Jail , a copy of the M.T. Record shallbe given to the Sheriff's booking employee.The Los Angeles County Jail Facilitypersonnel will screen arrestees for contagiousdiseases and obtain any necessary medicalevaluations.

Contagious Arrestees Discovered inDepartment Jail Facilities. When it isdetermined after booking that an arrestee has acontagious disease and is to be transferred toanother facility, the arresting officer, whenavailable, shall transport the arrestee. (Thisprecludes unnecessary exposure to additionalofficers.)

When other transportation is provided, the jailsupervisor shall promptly notify the arrestingofficers' watch commander, who shallpromptly alert the arresting officers so thatthey may document the contact and takeappropriate hygienic measures.

648.30 VERMINOUS PRISONERS.Verminous prisoners shall be given immediatetreatment and isolated until disinfected. Thewatch commander shall be notified andarrangements shall be made for disinfectingpremises and sterilizing bedding and clothing.

649. PRISONER HYGIENE ANDRECREATION.649.10 PRISONER HYGIENE. TheCommanding Officer, Jail Division, shallensure that prisoners who remain inDepartment custody longer than the morningfollowing arrest are given an opportunity toshower, shave, and brush their teeth. Hygienesupplies are available through Supply Section,Fiscal Operations Division; however, in case ofemergency, Jail Division maintains additionalhygiene supplies.

∗ Hygiene periods shall be scheduled duringthe day as directed by the CommandingOfficer, Jail Division.

Exceptions:

∗ Prisoners who demonstrate a propensitytoward violence or who pose a risk to thereasonable security of the jail or to thesafety of themselves or other persons shallnot be allowed to shower or shave until theapparent risk subsides.

∗ Prisoners who have distinctive facial hairwhich may be a factor in a follow-upinvestigation may be restricted fromshaving by the concerned investigatingofficer or watch commander of the jailfacility by noting the shaving restriction onthe booking approval. If the bookingapproval is no longer available, the watchcommander or concerned investigatingofficer shall contact and notify the custodialdetention officer of the shaving restriction.

∗ Hygiene periods may be temporarilysuspended when detention officers cannotsupervise prisoner showers withoutcompromising jail security or safety.Personal hygiene periods shall be resumedas soon as practicable.

649.20 PRISONER RECREATION. TheDepartment will provide newspapers, includinga Spanish language publication, andrecreational material (e.g., checkers, dominoes,etc.) in sufficient quantities to ensurereasonable access to such materials by allinterested prisoners. Recreational supplies areavailable through Jail Division.

650. PRISONERS' BAIL BONDSMENAND ATTORNEYS.650.10 ARRESTEE'S RIGHT TO ANATTORNEY PRIOR TO BOOKING. Whenan attorney appears at a police facility desiringto see an unbooked arrestee in response to adirect call from the arrestee or the arrestee'ssponsor, the concerned officer shall:

∗ Identify the attorney by means ofreasonable identification;

∗ Promptly tell the arrestee that the attorneydesires to speak to him or her; and,

∗ If the arrestee wishes to see the attorney,allow him or her to do so.

650.40 IDENTIFYING ATTORNEY ORBAIL BONDSMAN. When a person desiringto see a prisoner states that he/she is anattorney or bail bondsman responding to adirect call from the prisoner or the prisoner'ssponsor, (4/658.10) the interviewing officershall:

∗ Identify the attorney or bail bondsman bymeans of reasonable identification.

∗ Determine by interviewing the prisoner thatthis is the particular attorney or bailbondsman he/she requested.

∗ If the prisoner in fact requested the servicesof the individual, allow such person to seethe prisoner, utilizing the procedure in4/650.50.

650.50 BAIL BONDSMAN ORATTORNEY REQUESTING TO SEEPRISONER. When an attorney or bailbondsman, requested by a prisoner, friend orrelative of a prisoner, desires to see theprisoner, the detention officer shall:

∗ Enter the name of the attorney or bailbondsman, the appropriate code, the word"interview," and the date and time on thereverse side of the Custody Record page ofthe Booking and Identification Record,Form 5.1.

∗ When the prisoner wishes to see theattorney or bail bondsman, allow theinterview. The detention officer shall thencheck the "completed" column and enterhis/her serial number on the CustodyRecord.

∗ When the prisoner does not wish to see theattorney or bail bondsman, inform theattorney or bail bondsman of the prisoner'swishes. The detention officer shall thenenter "W" (waived) in the "completed"column.

Note: A bail bondsman responding to a requestmade by a relative or friend of a prisoner mustbe accompanied by such person except whenthe relative or friend has been contacteddirectly by the prisoner with a request to obtainthe services of a bondsman.

650.60 RECOMMENDING ATTORNEYSAND BAIL BONDSMEN. An employee shallnot recommend or suggest an attorney or bailbondsman under circumstances arising out ofthe performance of his/her official duties or onbehalf of any person with whom contact hasbeen established in the performance of officialduties.

650.65 PRISONER REQUESTS FORATTORNEY AND BAIL BONDSMANINFORMATION. Prisoners requestinginformation concerning the services of anattorney or bail bondsman shall be referred tothe referral agency telephone numbers



conspicuously posted in each jail facility or tothe applicable pages of a telephone directory.

650.70 PRISONERS COMMUNICATINGWITH ATTORNEYS AND BAILBONDSMEN. If a prisoner contacts anattorney or bail bondsman prior to booking,while out of jail during an investigation, orwhile being transported, the employee havingcustody of the prisoner shall inform thereceiving booking officer or detention officer.That booking officer or detention officer shallrecord the contact on the reverse side of theCustody Record page of the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.1.

652. JAIL INSPECTIONS.652.10 PRISONER COUNT. InformationTechnology Division shall compile custodydisposition data from the Consolidated CrimeAnalysis Database (CCAD) and forward it tothe Commanding Officer, Jail Division, at theend of each deployment period.

Custody disposition data compiled shallinclude the period from 0001 hours eachSunday through 2359 hours the followingSaturday.

652.20 INSPECTION OF POST BYDETENTION OFFICER. A detention officerreporting on-duty shall inspect the detentionfacilities, accompanied by the detention officerbeing relieved, and note:

∗ The general appearance and condition of allprisoners.

∗ The security of the cells and doors.∗ The sanitation of the premises.

A count of prisoners shall be made at thebeginning of each watch and compared withthe roster. A check of all cells and prisonersshall be made on a half-hour basis.

652.30 REPORTING JAIL INSPECTIONS.The Commanding Officer, Jail Division, shallmaintain a file of chronological records ofinspections of jail facilities by a governmentagency, board, Grand Jury, or officialinspections by members of the Department. Itshall be the responsibility of the CommandingOfficer, Jail Division, of the premisesinspected, or his/her delegate, to report anyorder, recommendation, or suggestion made toany person of his/her command as the result ofsuch inspection. One copy of the report shallbe forwarded to each of the following:

∗ Assistant Commanding Officer,Administrative and Technical ServicesBureau.

∗ Commanding officer, concerned geographicoperations bureau.

∗ Jail Section watch commander divisionfiles.

653. SPECIAL CONFINEMENT ANDOBSERVATION OF PRISONERS.

653.10 PLACING A PRISONER INSPECIAL CONFINEMENT. Specialconfinement of prisoners may be required

when they exhibit characteristics or behaviorwhich present a clear danger to the safety ofthemselves or others or pose a threat to thesecurity of the jail facility. Specialconfinement shall only be authorized by a JailDivision supervisor where the prisoner isincarcerated. When a prisoner is placed inspecial confinement, the detention officer shallremove any of the prisoner's possessions orclothing which could be used to injure theprisoner or damage the cell, such as shoes. Thedetention officer shall initiate a SpecialConfinement and Observation Record, Form6.51, and obtain approval for specialconfinement from a Jail Division supervisor.

A prisoner shall not be routinely deprived ofall clothing when being placed in specialconfinement. Should it become necessary toremove more of a prisoner's clothing, approvalshall be obtained from a sworn supervisor. Thesupervisor shall record the reason for removalof the additional items on the SpecialConfinement and Observation Record.

653.20 INSPECTION OF PRISONERS INSPECIAL CONFINEMENT. When aprisoner is placed in special confinement, thedetention officer shall inspect the prisoner atleast once every fifteen minutes , or morefrequently if circumstances require, and recordsuch inspection on the Special Confinementand Observation Record, Form 6.51.

The watch commander of Metropolitan JailSection, Valley Jail Section, 77th Street JailSection, or Operational Jail Section supervisorof at least the rank of Principal DetentionOfficer shall be notified when:

∗ A prisoner requires special confinement.∗ A prisoner has been initially placed in a

special confinement for four hours withouta medical evaluation.

∗ A prisoner has been held in specialconfinement for a twelve-hour period afterthe initial medical evaluation.

The watch commander shall:

∗ Document the circumstances and anymedical evaluation given to the prisoner inthe Special Confinement and ObservationRecord, Form 6.51.

Note: Notification regarding the necessity ofspecial confinement shall be made to the watchcommander who gave booking approval.

∗ Ensure that a medical evaluation from eithera contract hospital or a jail dispensary iscompleted within four hours of the initialspecial confinement and every subsequenttwelve hours of special confinement.

∗ Contact the Watch Commander,Metropolitan Jail Section, prior to transferof the prisoner to Metropolitan Jail Section,if continued special confinement isnecessary in other than an outlying Areajail.

Exception: Geographic Areas with jailfacilities within Operation-Valley Bureau shall

contact the Watch Commander, Valley JailSection.

657. SERVING LEGAL PROCESSESON PRISONERS.657.50 CIVIL PROCESS SERVICE. Aperson presenting a civil process for service ona prisoner shall be referred to the watchcommander of the division in which theprisoner is detained. The watch commandershall have the prisoner brought to the office;and both shall sign the process, including thedate and time.

When the prisoner is not available, the watchcommander shall place the date, time, and hisor her signature on the process and shall havea 3x5-inch card receipt prepared stating thetype of process and its requirements, if any.

When the prisoner is available, the watchcommander shall serve the process and havethe prisoner sign the receipt, including the dateand the time. The signed receipt shall beforwarded to the Commanding Officer,Records and Identification Division, who shallcause it to be filed for a period of three years.

658. MESSAGES BY PERSONS INCUSTODY.658.10 TELEPHONE CALLS - GENERALGUIDELINES. The following guidelinesapply to all telephone calls completed byin-custody adults and juveniles:

∗ Adults shall be allowed to make telephonecalls before and after booking; juveniles,immediately upon being taken to a place ofconfinement.

∗ A prisoner's refusal to cooperate in thebooking process shall not affect his or herright to complete calls. In any event, anadult arrestee's request to make phone callsshall be granted within three hoursfollowing arrest, except where physicallyimpossible. A juvenile, upon being taken toa place of confinement, shall immediatelybe allowed the right to complete the phonecalls, except when physically impossible.

∗ Calls made to a prisoner's attorney, religiousadvisor, or licensed physician shall not bemonitored, eavesdropped upon, or recorded(636 P.C.).

Note: The Penal Code specifically prohibitsthe monitoring, eavesdropping upon, orrecording of calls made to an attorney,religious advisor, or licensed physician. Inother situations, an officer must act reasonablywithin the limits of his authority as defined bystatute and judicial interpretation, therebyensuring that the rights of both the individualand the public are protected (1/508).

∗ Normally, calls completed at City expenseshall be limited to those which can be madeon a City telephone by dialing "9."

∗ Arresting and custodial officers shalldocument calls made at City expense, foradult and juvenile arrestees, when directedby the concerned investigating officer or a



supervisor. The notation shall include thedate and time, and the name and telephonenumber of the person-called.

∗ Adults. The notation shall be made onthe Custody Record page of the LosAngeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.1.

∗ Juveniles. The notation shall be made onthe related report and, if the minor isdetained in a facility of anotherdepartment, on the required entranceform. If no other reports are made, theinformation shall be recorded on a FieldInterview Report, Form 15.43.

∗ If City-expense calls are waived in favor ofcoin operated or calling collect, a notationshall reflect that fact to avoid theappearance that the prisoner's telephonerights have been denied. The notation shallbe made on the custody record page of theLos Angeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.1, for adults and on the applicablerelated form for juveniles.

∗ The commanding officer of any locationwithin a Department facility where anarrestee may be detained shall ensure that asign is posted in a conspicuous placecontaining the following information inbold block type:

Arrestees have the right to three free telephonecalls within the local dialing area, or at theirown expense if outside the local area. Arresteesmay make calls to the following persons:

(1) An attorney of their choice or, if theyhave no funds, the public defender orother attorney assigned by the court at(213) 974-2811. This telephone call shallnot be monitored, eavesdropped upon, orrecorded; or

(2) A bail bondsman; or,

(3) A relative or other person.

658.12 TELEPHONE CALLS-ADULTPRISONERS.

∗ The concerned arresting officer/custodialdetention officer shall be responsible foradvising an adult arrestee of the right tocomplete three telephone calls within threehours from the time of arrest. The calls, if inthe local dialing area, shall be made at Cityexpense. If City-expense calls are waived,the arrestee may utilize other availablemeans (calling collect, coin operated,charge card) to complete the calls.

∗ When a prisoner is to be transferred from aDepartment jail for arraignment, and thearraignment will be in a court other thanwhere the accusatory pleading (complaint)was filed, he/she shall be allowed three callsin addition to those listed above.

∗ A prisoner shall be permitted to completeone call, at his/her expense, to a magistratefor the purpose of obtaining release on bail.

∗ When intoxication is an element of thecharge, the arrestee shall be permitted to

call a qualified person of his or her choice,at his or her own expense, for the purposeof taking a breath, blood, or urine samplefor analysis by an independent laboratory.

658.17 TELEPHONE CALLS-JUVENILEIN CUSTODY. When a juvenile arrestee istaken to a place of confinement, the arrestingofficer shall immediately, except whenphysically impossible, and no later than onehour after the juvenile was taken into custody,advise the juvenile that he/she has the right tomake at least three telephone calls from thelocation where he/she is being held. Officersshall ensure that two telephone calls (one to aparent, guardian, responsible relative orattorney) are completed as soon as possible,but no later than one hour from the time thejuvenile was taken into custody.

Calls made within the local dialing areas shallbe made at City expense.

Additionally, when intoxication is an elementof the charge, the juvenile shall be permitted tocall a qualified person of his or her choice, athis or her own expense, for the purpose oftaking a breath, blood, or urine sample foranalysis by an independent laboratory. Callsshall be made in the presence of an officerexcept when the call is made to an attorney,religious advisor, or licensed physician.

When a juvenile arrestee requests to make aphone call outside of the local dialing areas byusing a calling card or payphone, he/she shouldbe allowed to do so. If the juvenile is withoutsufficient funds or is unable to completetelephone calls on a collect basis, telephonecalls outside the local dialing areas may bemade at City expense at the discretion of asupervisor.

659. VISITING OF PRISONERS.659.10 PRISONER VISITATION. TheCommanding Officer, Jail Division, shallensure that prisoners who are authorized tohave visitors are allowed one visit per day.Each visit is limited to one visitor; however,one minor child may accompany eachresponsible adult visitor. Every effort shall bemade to accommodate visitors of both felonyand misdemeanor arrestees.

Visitation periods shall cause minimalinterference with jail and detective operations.

Posting of Visitation Policy. Commandingofficers of Department jails shall ensure thatthe visitation policy, printed in both Englishand Spanish, is posted at locations within eachfacility where it is visible from all detentionand booking areas.

Visitation Restriction/Denial. Generally,prisoner visitation rights are subject to denialor restriction if:

∗ Admittance of a particular visitor wouldthreaten or compromise the security of thejail facility; or,

∗ Facts surrounding an investigationreasonably indicate that visitation by certainindividuals will compromise theinvestigation.

The concerned investigating officer shalldetermine when visitation of a felony prisoneris to be restricted. When there is noinvestigating officer, or the investigatingofficer is unavailable, the patrol watchcommander where the jail facility is locatedshall determine if visitation should berestricted.

Concerned Investigating Officer or PatrolWatch Commander of the Jail Facility-Responsibility. When the concernedinvestigating officer or watch commander ofthe jail facility determines that certain personsshall not be allowed to visit a prisoner, theinvestigating officer or watch commandershall:

∗ If the restriction is requested prior tobooking, note the visitor restriction and thename of the restricted visitors on theBooking Approval, Form 12.31.0

∗ If the restriction is requested followingbooking, contact and notify the custodialdetention officer of the restriction, the nameof restricted visitors, and the name andserial number of the officer restricting theprisoner's visitation.

Custodial Detention Officer’sResponsibility. When the custodial detentionofficer is notified that a visitor restriction isrequired, either via the Booking Approval,Form 12.31.0, or by the concernedinvestigating officer or watch commander ofthe jail facility, the custodial detention officershall:

∗ Print in red letters, "VR" on the JailCustody Record of the restricted prisoner'sLos Angeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.01.2, on the upper right handcorner; and,

∗ Print in red letters, on the restrictedprisoner's Los Angeles ConsolidatedBooking Form, Form 5.01.2, on the reverseside of the Jail Custody Record in the"Remarks" box and on the front of theDivision Booking Record in the blank spacebeneath the box for identification numbers,the following:

∗ VISITOR RESTRICTION;∗ The date and time the restriction was

initiated;∗ Any other comments that may be

applicable to the restriction; and,∗ The name and serial number of the

officer who restricted visitation.

Visitation Requests. When notified that anindividual requests to visit a prisoner, thecustodial detention officer shall:

∗ Require the visitor to complete the PrisonerVisitation and Temporary Sign-out Record,Form 6.31.



∗ Review the Prisoner's Division BookingRecord and the Jail Custody Record of theLos Angeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.01.2, for any visitor restriction.

∗ If visitation restriction is not indicated,visitation shall be allowed pursuant to theposted visitation policy.

∗ If visitor restriction is indicated, thecustodial detention officer shall:

∗ Verify the identity of all personsrequesting permission to visit a prisoner.

∗ Determine if the visitor has beenrestricted from visiting the prisoner.

∗ If the visitor is not restricted, and nogeneral visitation restriction is indicated,allow visitation pursuant to the postedvisitation policy.

∗ If visitation is restricted for that visitor,advise the visitor only that visitation for thatprisoner has been restricted and thevisitation will not be allowed. Visitors shallbe referred to the officer placing therestriction for any further information orexplanation.

659.15 NEWS MEDIA INTERVIEWS ANDPHOTOGRAPHS. When an accredited newsmedia representative requests to interview orphotograph a prisoner, the officer havingcustody of a prisoner shall comply with thefollowing procedures:

Unarraigned Prisoners.

∗ Unarraigned prisoners shall not beinterviewed by members of news mediaexcept in exceptional cases with theapproval of the Chief of Police.

Note: Representatives shall be informed thatinterviews are not permitted until a prisonerhas been arraigned.

∗ Approval to photograph unarraignedprisoners by news media representativesshall be granted only if it does not interferewith the investigation. Granting of approvalto photograph unarraigned prisoners shallbe the responsibility of:

∗ Detective Support Division, if theprisoner is confined in Metropolitan JailSection.

∗ Concerned investigating officers if theprisoner is confined in a geographic jail.

∗ The Visitor's Pass, Form 6.21, shall be usedto provide approval for news mediarepresentatives to photograph unarraignedprisoners. The words "Photos Only" shall beprinted in large letters across the face of theform.

Arraigned Prisoners.

∗ Interviews or photographs of arraignedprisoners by news media representativesmay be granted without prior approval.

∗ Prisoners shall not be compelled to bephotographed or interviewed by news mediarepresentatives. An officer shall remain

present when a prisoner is beinginterviewed or photographed.

Prisoner's Consent to be Interviewed.

∗ The prisoner shall be asked if he/she desiresto be interviewed by the representatives ofthe news media.

∗ If the prisoner refuses to consent to theinterview, the requesting representativesshall be informed of such refusal.

∗ If the prisoner consents to the interview, theofficer having custody shall:

∗ Complete the back of the CustodyRecord of the Los Angeles ConsolidatedBooking Form, Form 5.1.

∗ Complete the following statement on theback of the Custody Record of the LosAngeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.1: "I understand that (name ofreporter; if two or more, the word"reporters" shall suffice) representing(name of news media) desires to talk tome and I hereby certify that I voluntarilyconsent to the interview(s)." Theprisoner shall be requested to sign theform. This form shall be completed bythe officer having custody of the prisonerat the time the interview is requested.

∗ Remain in the presence of the prisonerand the interviewers during the entirecourse of the interview.

659.40 CONDUCTING VISITORSTHROUGH THE JAIL. Visitors may beconducted through the jail only when thedetention officer has secured permission froma Jail Division watch commander orOperational Section supervisor.

660. TRANSFERRING ANDTRANSPORTING BOOKED PRISONERS.660.10 TRANSFERRING BOOKEDPRISONERS. When a booked prisoner is tobe transferred to another Department jail, or toarraignment court, the transferring officer shallprepare or have available for the transfer:

∗ The Jail Transfer Record, Form 6.11.∗ The Custody Record page of the Los

Angeles Consolidated Booking Form, Form5.1.

Note: The Custody Record (Page 5) of the LosAngeles Consolidated Booking Form, Form5.1, shall be arranged in the same order aslisted on the jail transfer record. Any wants,warrants, or abstracts of wants or warrants forthe prisoner shall be attached to the CustodyRecord.

∗ The prisoner's personal property packageand the Prisoner's Property Identificationpage of the Los Angeles ConsolidatedBooking Form, Form 5.1.

∗ The City Attorney copy and the court copyof the Short Arrest Report, Form 5.2.1, ifthis form was used as an arrest report of aperson booked on 647(c) P.C. (Begging).

∗ Three copies of the Arrest Report, Form 5.2,if this form was used.

∗ The complaint copy, in addition to the CityAttorney copy and the court copy, of theShort Arrest Report, if this form was usedas an arrest report, of a person booked on647(f) P.C. (Drunk).

660.15 TRANSFERRING BOOKEDPRISONERS TO LOS ANGELESSHERIFF'S DEPARTMENT'S CUSTODY.The custodial detention officer shall have allforms, prisoner's personal property, andprisoners ready for pick-up prior to thescheduled arrival of the Sheriff's transportationdetail.

660.20 TELETYPES OF PRISONERS TOBE TRANSPORTED TO ARRAIGNMENTCOURTS BY THE LOS ANGELESSHERIFF'S DEPARTMENT. An "Order toTransport" teletype shall be sent, on courtdays, to the Los Angeles County Sheriff'sDepartment, Bureau of Transportation, by thecustodial detention officers of each Departmentdetention facility having prisoners to bearraigned. The teletypes shall contain thenumber of prisoners by sex and their courtdestinations. The order shall be sent not laterthan:

∗ 0430 hours for morning arraignment.∗ 0900 hours for afternoon arraignment.

660.30 AUTHORIZATION REQUIREDFOR TRANSFER OF FELONS.Authorization from the concerned investigatingofficer shall be secured by a division detentionofficer before transferring a felony prisonerfrom one division to another.

Note: When a felony prisoner is transferredfrom one division to another because of theneed to provide medical attention to theprisoner, the concerned investigating officershall be notified as soon as possible of the newlocation of detention.

660.40 OFFICERS TRANSPORTINGTRANSFERRED PRISONERS. When anofficer transports a booked prisoner from onedivision to another, he shall:

∗ Sign the Jail Transfer Record, Form 6.11.∗ Secure the prisoner's property and the

reports prepared for transfer by thetransferring officer (4/660.10).

660.45 ADULT MALE NARCOTICARRESTEES-JAIL TRANSFER. Adultmale narcotic felony and 11550 H&S arresteeswho have been booked at 77th Street JailSection, Southwest jail facility, and adult male11550 H&S arrestees booked at Southeast jailfacility shall be transferred to Jail Divisioneach court day no later than 0430 hours.

Note: Watch commanders shall ensure thatnarcotic violation arrestees are transferred byArea personnel utilizing B-wagons or othersuitable vehicles.

660.50 DETENTION OFFICERRECEIVING TRANSFERRED



PRISONER. A detention officer receiving atransferred prisoner shall:

∗ Sign the Jail Transfer Record, Form 6.11.∗ Retain one copy of the form and return the

other copy to the transporting officer for hisrecords.

∗ Accept the prisoner's property and thereports obtained by the transporting officerfrom the division from which the prisonerwas taken (4/660.10).

670. ESCAPEES.Booked Prisoners. When a prisoner has beenbooked and thereafter escapes the officerhaving custody of the prisoner at the time ofescape shall immediately:

∗ Notify a supervisor.∗ Notify Communications Division.∗ Complete an Escape Report, Form 6.6.∗ Cause an escape teletype to be sent

(4/165.60).

Unbooked Arrestees. When an arresteeescapes prior to being booked, the officerhaving custody of the arrestee at the time ofescape shall complete a PreliminaryInvestigation Report, Form 3.1, for the crimefor which the person had been arrested andinclude the facts describing the escape.

670.05 ESCAPES FROM JUVENILEDETENTION FACILITIES - REPORTINGOFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITY. When anescape from a juvenile facility located withinthe City of Los Angeles is reported to thisDepartment, the geographic patrol divisionwhere the facility is located has preliminaryinvestigative responsibility. The reportingofficer shall complete a PreliminaryInvestigation Report (PIR), Form 3.1, title"Escape" and shall:

∗ Complete a local broadcast in accordancewith Manual Section 4/165.60. Thebroadcast shall include information on anyknown accomplices and the escapee'sresidence address and division, if within theCity of Los Angeles.

∗ Notify the division or outside agencyresponsible for investigating the crime forwhich the juvenile was originally detained.

Note: The reporting officer shall place thisdivision or outside agency in the appropriatebox on the "Escape" PIR as the investigatingentity.

∗ Notify any member of the concerned court,District Attorney's Office, or a victim orwitness when there is a high probability thatthe juvenile may retaliate against any ofthese individuals.

Note: The detective handling the follow-upinvestigation shall ensure this notification wasmade.

∗ Upon the arrest of a juvenile escapee, notifythe detective division responsible for theinvestigation of the escape.

Follow-up Investigation-Detective’sResponsibility. The Area Detective Divisionor outside agency responsible for investigatingthe crime for which the juvenile was originallydetained shall be responsible for the follow-upinvestigation for the crime of escape. However,when the original outside arresting agencydeclines to assume responsibility, or has nojurisdiction in Los Angeles County, i.e.,out-of-state or another country, the operationssupport division where the facility is locatedshall investigate the crime of escape. Thedetective assigned the follow-up investigationshall:

∗ When it is determined there is a highprobability of the juvenile retaliatingagainst any member of the concerned court,District Attorney's Office, or a victim orwitness, ensure the individuals werenotified.

∗ Prepare a petition for the crime of escapeand ensure that the District Attorney'sOffice adds a charge of escape to theoriginal charge.

670.10 JUVENILE ESCAPEES. When ajuvenile escapee is apprehended, the WatchCommander, Detective Support Division, shallbe notified by telephone. The juvenile shall bebooked and detained as advised by the WatchCommander, Detective Support Division.

670.15 CANCELLATION OF "WANTS"ON ESCAPED JUVENILES. When anescaped juvenile is apprehended, the WatchCommander, Detective Support Division, shallprovide the necessary information to theagency which originally requested theapprehension of the juvenile in order thatcancellation may be made.

670.20 APPREHENSION OFMISDEMEANOR ADULT ESCAPEE.When an adult misdemeanant who has escapedfrom the custody of the Department isapprehended, the concerned investigativedivision shall be notified immediately bytelephone. If the concerned investigativedivision cannot be contacted, the WatchCommander, Detective Support Division, shallbe notified.

674. RELEASE CONTROL FILES.Each jail facility shall maintain control files asfollows:

∗ "Prisoners Released-Not Verified by AJIS."Retain Page 6 of the Booking andIdentification Record in this file until averification teletype is received from AJISacknowledging the prisoner's release.

∗ "Prisoners Released-Verified by AJIS."Retain the verification teletype and Page 6of the Booking and Identification Record,Form 5.1 or 5.1.1, for a period of 30 days.

675. RELEASES, DETENTIONOFFICER’S DUTIES.

675.10 DETENTION OFFICERRECEIVING INVESTIGATOR'S FINALREPORTPrisoner in Detention Officer's Custody.When a detention officer having custody of aprisoner receives the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10, directly from theinvestigating officer, the detention officershall:

∗ Release the prisoner.

Note: A juvenile prisoner shall be released tothe custody of his/her parents, guardian,responsible relative, or other person or agencydesignated on the Investigator's Final Report.When the juvenile is not released within twohours, the detention officer shall notify theconcerned investigating officer, his/hersupervisor, or the Watch Commander,Detective Support Division, when the abovepersonnel are not available.

∗ Cause a Notification of Prisoner ReleaseTeletype to be sent within one hour to:

∗ The Automated Justice InformationSystem (4/165.32).

∗ Detective Support Division, when thearrestee is a juvenile or is an adultbooked on a felony charge.

A copy of the teletype shall be attached to theForm 5.10.

Marijuana Complaints. When notified that allother charges against an arrestee have beenrejected and only a marijuana possessioncharge (11357b H&S) has been filed, thecustodial detention officer shall, as soon aspracticable, advise the arrestee of the status ofthe charges and release him on his ownrecognizance.

Note: In the event an arrestee in custody is tobe released, but refuses to sign the promise toappear portion of the release form, he or sheshall be arraigned on the marijuana possessionoffense within 48 hours, exclusive ofSaturdays, Sundays and Holidays, followingthe time of arrest.

675.12 DETENTION OFFICERRELEASING A MISDEMEANORPRISONER TO ANOTHERJURISDICTION. When a detention officerreleases a misdemeanor prisoner to anotherjurisdiction, he/she shall:

∗ Forward with the prisoner all outstandingwarrants or warrant information teletypesplaced by other agencies (4/165.35).

∗ Send a Notification of Prisoner ReleaseTeletype to the Automated JusticeInformation System (4/165.32).

Note: See Section 4/775.13 for Certificate ofRelease requirements.



675.15 DETENTION OFFICERORDERING RELEASE OF A PRISONERNOT IN HIS CUSTODY. When a detentionofficer ordering the release of an arrestee bymeans of an Order to Release Teletype has notreceived a Notification of Release Teletype inone hour, he/she shall determine the reason forthe delay.

675.20 DETENTION OFFICERRECEIVING ORDER TO RELEASETELETYPE. The detention officer receivingan Order to Release Teletype from anotherdivision or from a Los Angeles CountySheriff's facility for the release of an arresteeshall:

∗ When bail has been posted, issue a BailReceipt and/or Notice to Appear, Form6.15, to the arrestee and orally instruct himwhen and where to appear in court.

Note: The Form 6.15 shall be reviewed andapproved by the issuing officer's supervisor.

∗ Release the arrestee.

Note: A juvenile prisoner shall be released tothe custody of his/her parents, guardian,responsible relative, or other person or agencydesignated on the Investigator's Final Report.When the juvenile is not released within twohours, the detention officer shall notify theconcerned investigating officer; his or hersupervisor; or the Watch Commander,Detective Support Division, when the abovepersonnel are not available.

∗ Send a Notification of Prisoner ReleaseTeletype within one hour to:

∗ The Automated Justice InformationSystem (4/165.32).

∗ Detective Support Division and theconcerned investigating officer when anadult arrestee was booked on a felonycharge or the arrestee is a juvenile.

∗ The division or Sheriff's facility orderingthe release.

∗ Forward concerned teletypes; warrants; andBail Receipt and/or Notice to Appear, Form6.15, to the division bail auditor.

Note: When the arrestee was released otherthan on bail, one copy of the Notification ofPrisoner Release Teletype shall be attached tothe Order to Release Prisoner Teletype. Bothteletypes shall be maintained at the division fora period of one month, after which time theyshall be destroyed.

675.22 NOTIFICATION OF PRISONERRELEASE TELETYPES-PROCESSING.Upon releasing a booked person from custody,the officer releasing the prisoner shall:

∗ Enter the disposition information and thedate and time of release on the lineimmediately following the charge on Page3 (Property Record) and Page 6 (DivisionBooking Record).

∗ Retain Page 6 in a temporary file of"Prisoners Released-Not Verified by AJIS."

∗ Forward Page 3 to the concerned teletypeoperator.

∗ Ensure that a Prisoner Release Teletype issent to the AJIS System as indicated in theLAPD Automated Justice InformationSystem Teletype Operator's Manual.

∗ Metropolitan Jail Section and the HarborArea Jail Section are responsible forsending the release teletypes.

∗ Divisional record clerks of othergeographic areas shall be responsible forsending the release teletype.

Note: When the AJIS System rejects therelease notification, the information shall beperiodically teletyped until release verificationis received.

∗ The verification teletype shall be returned tothe detention officer, who shall attach it toPage 6 and place it in the "PrisonersReleased-Verified by AJIS" file. Page 3 canbe discarded.

675.23 IMPERATIVE RELEASE (IR)MESSAGES-REVIEW. The detention officerof the on-coming watch shall:

∗ Review the IR teletype.∗ Indicate thereon each arrestee's detention

status.∗ Forward the teletype to his/her watch

commander.

Note: The watch commander shall review andinitial the teletype.

∗ After the watch commander reviews theteletype, file under "Prisoners Released-Verified by AJIS."

675.25 RELEASE ON ORDER FIXINGBAIL. When a prisoner confined on a felonycharge without a warrant, or a person acting ashis or her representative, requests an OrderFixing Bail pursuant to Section 1276 of thePenal Code, the following procedures shallapply:

∗ When a prisoner acts on his or her ownbehalf, the Request and Order for FixingBail, County Form 76R381 V, shall becompleted and sent without unnecessarydelay to the District Attorney via the MailUnit, Records and Identification Division.

∗ When a person acting in behalf of a prisonerpresents a Request and Order for FixingBail to the detention officer at the place ofdetention, the detention officer, whenrequired by the instructions on the form,shall deliver the form to the prisoner for hisor her signature. The person acting in theprisoner's behalf shall then be directed tosubmit the form to the District Attorney'sOffice.

Detention officers shall cause the release ofprisoners confined in the City Jail System forwhom fixed bail release orders have beensigned by:

∗ Judges or commissioners of the Los AngelesMunicipal Court ONLY when a person is

arrested or booked within the boundaries ofthe City of Los Angeles.

∗ Judges or commissioners of the SuperiorCourt of Los Angeles County when theoffense was committed in the County of LosAngeles.

∗ Judges or commissioners of the SupremeCourt and the Courts of Appeal in anybailable case.

When a prisoner is released as a result of anOrder Fixing Bail, in addition to any othernotification, the custodial detention officershall cause a Notification of Prisoner ReleaseTeletype to be sent to the concernedinvestigating officer.

675.30 ARRAIGNMENT OR RELEASEOF ADULT PRISONERS WHEN NOINVESTIGATING OFFICER ASSIGNED.The detention officer having custody of aprisoner, to whose case no investigating officerhas been assigned shall ensure that all adultarrestees are arraigned or released as soon aspossible, without unnecessary delay, and in noevent beyond two court days following the dayof arrest.

Exception: During a state of emergency apresiding judge may request that the "Chair ofthe Judicial Council" extend the time limit forprisoner arraignment from the current two daysto a period not to exceed seven days.

Note: See Section 4/775.13 for Certificate ofRelease requirements.

675.35 PLACEMENT ANDDISPOSITION OF ILLEGAL ENTRYHOLDS. Supplemental holds charging illegalentry against persons in the custody of thisDepartment for an unrelated criminal offenseshall only be authorized by officers of theUnited States Immigration and NaturalizationService (INS). Arrestees against whom the INShas placed a hold shall be released to thecustody of INS within 24 hours after:

∗ All local charges are dismissed; or,∗ Bail is deposited on the local charges; or,∗ The arrestee is determined to be eligible for

release on his/her own recognizance on thelocal charges.

Note: Under no circumstances shall any personbe held longer than 24 hours when an illegalentry hold is the only remaining charge. Thereis no extension of the 24 hour detention limitbecause of an intervening holiday or weekendperiod. Procedures governing the booking anddetention of prisoners held enroute areunaffected by this section.

675.40 NOTIFICATION TO AGENCYPLACING SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGE,WHEN PRISONER AVAILABLE FORRELEASE. When a prisoner against whom asupplemental charge has been placed by aparole or probation officer (4/646.15) isavailable for release, the custodial detentionofficer shall make a telephonic notification tothe concerned agency. Releases of prisoners socharged may be made at Metropolitan Jail



Section, 77th Street Jail Section, Valley JailSection, or any Operations Jail Section, JailDivision.

675.45 NOTIFICATION TO AGENCYPLACING SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGE,WHEN PRISONER REMANDED TOCUSTODY OF SHERIFF. When a prisoneragainst whom a supplemental charge has beenplaced by a parole or probation officer(4/646.15) is remanded to the custody of theSheriff, the officer releasing the prisoner fromthe City Jail system shall make a telephonicnotification to the concerned agency.

675.50 NOTIFICATION TO AGENCIESHAVING MISDEMEANOR WARRANTSON MISDEMEANOR PRISONERRELEASED TO ANOTHERJURISDICTION. When a prisoner is releasedfrom Department custody to another agencyand warrants or warrant information teletypesreceived from other agencies have beenforwarded with him/her, the detention officerreleasing the prisoner shall cause a Notificationof Forwarded Warrants Teletype to be sent tothe concerned agencies.

680. RELEASE ON BAIL.680.02 RESPONSIBILITY TO ACCEPTBAIL. An employee shall accept bail in theform of cash, valid surety bonds, or verifiednegotiable paper in the form of cashier'schecks, bank money orders, United StatesPostal Service money orders, and WesternUnion money orders, for a prisoner confined inany Los Angeles City or County jail facility onany charge or warrant for which bail has beenset.

680.05 SEIZURE OF CASH BAIL INNARCOTICS RELATED CASES.Employee’s Responsibility. Upon thepresentation of cash bail on behalf of arresteesdetained for cases involving Sections 11351,11351.5, 11352, 11353, 11353.5, 11353.7,11354, 11359, 11360, 11361, 11378, 11378.5,11379, 11379.5, 11379.6, 11380, 11383(a), and11383(b) H&S, or other related felonies wherethe presumptive bail is $10,000 or more andthere exists probable cause to believe that thecurrency represents proceeds from the sale ofillegal drugs, the employee presented with thebail shall notify the on-duty uniformed patroldivision or Watch Commander, MetropolitanJail Section.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Uponnotification, the on-duty uniformed patroldivision or Watch Commander, MetropolitanJail Section shall:

∗ Ensure that a sworn officer is assigned toconduct a preliminary investigation whichexamines the source of the currency that hasbeen presented for bail; and,

∗ Ensure that the Financial Unit, NarcoticsDivision, has been notified to respond to thelocation and that all directions from the

Financial Unit are received and compliedwith.

Note: During off-hours, the on-duty detectiveat Narcotics Information Network (NIN),Narcotics Division, shall be notified. The on-duty NIN detective will notify the on-callFinancial Unit detective who will respond tothe location, warranted.

Officer’s Responsibility. An officer assignedto begin an investigation as to the source ofcurrency presented for bail shall initiate a"preliminary investigation." The officer shallcomplete the following functions in this exactorder until the arrival of personnel from theFinancial Unit, Narcotics Division:

∗ Notify the Financial Unit or, when closed,the NIN unit;

∗ Count the currency in the presence of theperson offering the bail (presenter) and asupervisor;

∗ Place the currency into a Money Envelope,Form 10.12.2;

Note: If a Canine Unit will be responding, donot place the currency into money envelopesuntil the Canine Unit's investigation iscomplete.

∗ Complete the currency count registerlocated on the back of the money envelope;

∗ Properly identify the presenter throughDepartment sources; and,

Note: The officer may ask additional questionsrelated to the money in order to form anopinion as to it's origin.

∗ Instruct the presenter to be seated until thearrival of detectives from the FinancialUnit, Narcotics Division, who will thencomplete the investigation and, ifappropriate, seize and book the currency perDepartment Manual Section 4/540.60.

Note: Only personnel from the Financial Unit,Narcotics Division, are authorized to seize andbook currency pursuant to the provisions of11470 H&S.

Upon the seizure of bail, the arrestee shallremain in custody until non-illicit cash or a bailbond is presented, or until the time ofarraignment.

680.12 ACCEPTANCE OF BAIL ATCUSTODIAL DIVISION. When a request ismade to deposit bail for the release of anarrestee, the custodial detention officer shall:

∗ Accept and process the bail (4/680.20,4/680.21).

∗ Determine from the Court Schedule forBail-Outs when and where the arrestee is toappear in court.

Note: If the arrestee was booked on amisdemeanor warrant and the warrantinformation sheet contains citing instructionsin the information portion of the teletype,detention officers shall ensure that theinstructions are included on the arrestee's Bail

Receipt and/or Notice to Appear, Form 6.15.

∗ Orally instruct him/her when and where toappear in court.

∗ Release the arrestee.∗ Cause a Notification of Prisoner Release

Teletype to be sent to the Automated JusticeInformation System (4/165.32).

680.14 ACCEPTANCE OF BAIL-ARRESTEE IN CUSTODY ATDIFFERENT LOCATION. When a requestis made to deposit bail for the release of aprisoner in custody at a different location, theemployee accepting bail shall:

∗ Telephone the Arrestee Information Section,Inmate Reception Center, County CentralJail, when the arrestee is a male, or theArrestee Information Section, Los AngelesCounty Jail, when the arrestee is female, toverify that the person is in custody on abailable offense, and to determine thelocation of custody.

∗ Make a telephonic request to the custodialdivision for a Bail Information Teletype.

Exception: When the arrestee is in Countycustody a Request for Bail InformationTeletype shall be sent to the concernedSheriff's facility.

∗ Upon receipt of the Bail InformationTeletype, accept and process the bail(4/680.20).

Note: The Bail Information Teletype is thelegal authorization to accept bail. When theBail Information Teletype is incomplete, atelephonic request shall be made to thecustodial detention officer to have a correctedBail Information Teletype sent.

∗ Send an Order to Release Prisoner Teletypeto the custodial detention officer.

Note: When a Notification of Release Teletypeis not received within an hour, the custodialdetention officer shall be contacted todetermine the reason for the delay.

680.15 SURETY BOND OFFERED BYARRESTEE'S AGENT. The detention officeroffered a Surety Bond by an arrestee's agentshall check the validity of the bond. The bondshall not be accepted when:

∗ The bond does not conform to the correctarrestee "Bail Information."

∗ The bond is for more than one warrant orone open charge.

∗ Alterations or erasures are made on thebond.

∗ Bail is in excess of the bond limit.∗ The bond has expired.∗ The bond is not executed by an insurer

certified to transact surety insurance in thisState.

∗ The bond has not been notarized.

When the validity of the bond is in doubt, theconcerned detention officer or jail watchcommander, shall be consulted.



After verification, the detention officer shallprocess the bond in the same manner as cashbail (4/680.12).

680.16 PARTIAL CASH BAILOFFERED BY ARRESTEE'S AGENT. Thedetention officer offered partial cash bail by anarrestee's agent shall:

∗ Determine the amount of bail from the bailschedule or, if the arrestee was arrested ona warrant, from the warrant.

∗ Determine whether the arrestee hassufficient money in his/her property tocomplete the balance of the bail andwhether the arrestee desires his/her moneyto be used for that purpose.

Sufficient Funds. If the arrestee has sufficientfunds and desires that they be used for bail,secure their release to the arrestee's agent byhaving the arrestee complete a PropertyRelease, Form 6.8. Complete the releaseprocedure (4/680.12).

Insufficient Funds. If the arrestee hasinsufficient funds or if he/she is unwilling thathis/her funds be used for bail, the detentionofficer shall decline to accept the partialpayment offered by the arrestee's agent.

680.20 BAIL ACCEPTANCEPROCEDURES. An employee receiving bailshall:

∗ Complete a Bail Receipt and/or Notice toAppear, Form 6.15.

∗ Accept the proper amount of bail asindicated on the Bail Schedule, BailInformation Teletype, or warrant.

∗ Submit the Bail Receipt and/or Notice toAppear or the Release Agreement, to asupervisor for verification of bail amountand form approval.

Exception: At Metropolitan Jail Section,verification and approval may be made by theRelease Desk Officer in Charge when the baildoes not exceed $100.00.

∗ Issue a Bail Receipt and/or Notice toAppear to the depositor and whenapplicable, to the arrestee (5/6.15).

∗ Ensure that the bail, the remaining copies ofthe Form 6.15, and, when applicable, thewarrant or Bail Information Teletype aredelivered to the Division Bail Auditor assoon as practicable.

Employees accepting bail in the form ofcashier's checks, bank money orders, andWestern Union money orders shall ensure that:

∗ The depositor presents two forms of valididentification at the time the negotiablepaper is offered. The identification shallinclude:

∗ A valid driver's license or identificationcard issued by a state of this country;and,

∗ A current employee identification withphotograph or a current credit card.

∗ The negotiable paper is drawn on aCalifornia bank;

∗ There is no evidence of alterations orerasures to the negotiable paper;

∗ The value equals, or is greater than, thecorrect bail amount;

∗ The negotiable paper is made payable to the"Los Angeles Police Department BailAccount;"

∗ The prisoner's name and booking numberare recorded on the right front corner of thenegotiable paper;

∗ The depositor's driver's license number oridentification card number is recorded onthe back of the negotiable paper;

∗ The negotiable paper is recorded as cash onthe Bail Receipt and/or Notice to Appear,Form 6.15, by placing a check in the "cash"box; and,

∗ The following information is recorded in the"Depositor's" section of the Form 6.15:

∗ The depositor's name and address;∗ The depositor's state driver's license

number or state identification cardnumber; and,

∗ The bank identification number printedon the cashier's check, bank moneyorder, or Western Union money order.

∗ The completed Form 6.15 is submitted to asupervisor for approval and verification ofbail amount.

Note: When the negotiable paper value isgreater than the correct bail amount, theoverage shall be sent to the appropriate court.The employee accepting the bail shalldocument the overage on the Form 6.15 bywriting the word "OVERAGE" on the last linein the box titled "Warrant Number and/orCharge."

680.30 DETERMINING FELONY BAIL.When a watch commander approves thebooking of a person arrested for a bailablefelony offense, he or she shall:

∗ Determine the appropriate bail by applyingthe circumstances of the case to the currentfelony bail schedule for Los AngelesCounty.

∗ Record the appropriate bail and arraignmentcourt in the lower right-hand corner of theBooking Approval, Form 12.31.

Note: When a watch commander orinvestigating supervisor advising bookingdetermines that an increased bail should besought, he/she shall, in addition, record thenotation "Hold Pending Bail Increase" in thelower right-hand corner of the BookingApproval, Form 12.31.

∗ Direct the arresting officer to present theoriginal Booking Approval, Form 12.31, tothe booking employee, who shall enter theamount of bail in the appropriate space onthe booking slip. The Booking Approval,Form 12.31, shall be attached to the divisioncopy of the arrest report.

Exception: When an arrestee is to be bookeddirectly into a Los Angeles County Jail facility,the transporting officer shall ensure that theappropriate bail and arraignment courtinformation is entered on the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1.

680.35 BAIL REDUCTIONPROCEDURES. When notified by DetectiveSupport Division that a prisoner is seeking abail reduction, the Area watch commander orconcerned investigation officer shall:

∗ Conduct a prompt inquiry into thecircumstances of the arrest to determine ifthe Department is opposed to a bailreduction or own recognizance (OR)release; and,

∗ Notify the Pretrial Services Division,Superior Court, of the Department'sposition.

680.40 DECREASED FELONY BAILAND FELONY O.R. RELEASES. Detentionofficers shall permit a felony arrestee, orhis/her representative, to contact a judge orcommissioner to request a bail reduction orfelony own recognizance release. When adetention officer receives a teletypenotification of a felony bail decrease, he/sheshall accept a cashier's check, bank moneyorder, Western Union money order drawn on aCalifornia bank, cash or a valid surety bond inthe specified amount, then release the arrestee.The teletype shall be attached to the divisionfile copy of the Bail Receipt and/or Notice toAppear, Form 6.15.

Note: Felony bail reductions or OwnRecognizance releases are not authorized forcrimes delineated in 1270.1 P.C. and 667.5P.C. These arrestees can not have their bailreduced, nor be released on their OwnRecognizance, until after their first courtappearance. Any change, or pending change, toan arrestee's bail shall be recorded on theBooking and Identification Record, Form5.01.2, under the additional charges section ofthe Jail Custody page and the DivisionBooking page.

When a detention officer receives a teletypenotification of a felony "own recognizancerelease" authorization, he/she shall:

∗ Complete, and obtain the arrestee'ssignature on, the Felony Own RecognizanceRelease and Agreement to Appear, Form6.3.1.

∗ Contact the concerned investigating officeror watch commander to ensure that theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10, iscompleted.

∗ Release the arrestee.∗ Attach the O.R. release teletype to the

division file copy of the Form 6.3.1.

680.45 REQUESTING AN INCREASEIN FELONY BAIL. Prior to arraignment, an officer shall request abail deviation when an arrestee was arrestedwithout a warrant and,



∗ The defendant was arrested for a bailablefelony offense or misdemeanor offense ofviolating a domestic violence restrainingorder; and,

∗ The officer has reasonable cause to believethat the scheduled bail amount isinsufficient to assure the defendant’sappearance or to assure the protection of avictim, or family member(s) of a victim, ofdomestic violence.

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers seeking abail deviation on an arrestee shall:

∗ Book the suspect and obtain a bookingnumber;

∗ Advise the detective supervisor/watchcommander of the circumstances of the casewhich necessitates a bail deviation;

∗ Obtain approval from the detectivesupervisor/watch commander to request abail deviation;

∗ Contact the Los Angeles County BailDeviation Program and provide the contactindividual with the following:

∗ Bail amount requested;∗ Circumstances which led to the arrest;∗ Reason(s) for the bail deviation request;∗ Aggravating circumstances which

support the bail increase request;∗ Information on whether or not the

arrestee is considered a flight risk;∗ Information on whether or not the

arrestee can bail out on the currentstandard bail;

∗ Information on whether or not thearrestee is considered a threat to thecommunity and/or victim(s);

∗ Prior criminal history;∗ Arrestee’s identification numbers (e.g.,

CII, FBI, Social Security Number,Driver’s License, etc.); and,

∗ Requesting officer’s name and call-backnumber.

Note: Currently, the Los Angeles County BailDeviation Program may be contacted sevendays a week, including holidays, between 0630and 0130 hours. Officers wishing to contact theprogram during off-hours shall wait until 0630hours. Per Penal Code Section 1259(c),pending the issuance of a court order to changethe bail amount, an arrestee may be preventedfrom posting bail for a maximum of eighthours from the time of booking.

∗ After initial contact, send a facsimile copyof the arrestee’s Probable Cause Declarationto the Los Angeles County Bail DeviationProgram;

The information provided to the contactindividual at the Los Angeles County BailDeviation Program will be immediatelyreviewed by the on-duty Bail Commissioner.Once the commissioner makes a decision, therequesting employee will be contacted andadvised of the commissioner’s decision. If abail deviation is granted, the jail facility wherethe arrestee is in custody will receive a teletype

of the court order from the Los AngelesCounty Bail Deviation Program informingthem of the bail deviation.

∗ Upon approval of the request, document inthe narrative portion of the arrest report thedetermined bail amount with the name ofthe concerned Bail Commissioner;

∗ Notify the watch commander of the jailfacility of the revised bail amount; and,

∗ Obtain a copy of the teletype from the jailfacility and attach it to the arrest report.

Detective Supervisor/Watch Commander’sResponsibility. The detective supervisor/watchcommander shall:

∗ Review the arrest report which documentsthe facts and circumstances which establishthe reasonable cause to believe that thescheduled bail amount is insufficient;

∗ Determine if the bail deviation request isjustified; and,

∗ If approved by a Bail Commissioner, ensurethe required information is documented inthe arrest report and a copy of the jailteletype is attached.

Jail Watch Commander/Supervisor’sResponsibility. Upon notification by theDepartment employee of an approved baildeviation, the jail watch commander/supervisorshall ensure that the arrestee’s bail deviation isupdated on all booking/jail forms and thatRecords and Identification Division, Bookingand Records Update Unit, is contacted.

Records and Identification (R&I) Division,Booking and Records Update Unit’sResponsibility. Upon contact of a baildeviation by jail personnel, R&I Divisionpersonnel shall update the bail in theAutomated Justice Information System (AJIS).

680.50 HOLD PENDING BAILINCREASE-DETENTION OFFICER’SRESPONSIBILITY. When a prisoner hasbeen booked on a "hold pending bail increase"and a bail increase notification has not beenreceived within eight hours of booking, thedetention officer shall contact the detectivesupervisor/watch commander to verify that abail increase has not been authorized. If a bailincrease has not been authorized, the detentionofficer shall accept the amount of bailindicated on the Booking Approval, Form12.31.

Note: Any change, or pending change, to anarrestee's bail shall be recorded on allbooking/jail forms.

680.80 PROCESSING ANDFORWARDING BAIL. Commanding officersof Areas or divisions which have bailresponsibilities shall designate an employee asthe division or Area bail auditor.

Each court day, the Area or division bailauditor shall:

∗ Verify all bail accepted at the division andresolve discrepancies.

∗ Deposit bail monies into the Los AngelesPolice Department Bail Account at the bankdesignated to receive the funds.

∗ Complete and authorize a separate bankcheck payable to each separate court group(e.g., one check for Division 50-51, onecheck for Division 72-75).

∗ Forward check surety bonds, necessarycopies of the Form 6.15, and any warrantsto the appropriate court group.

∗ Forward one copy of each Bail Receiptand/or Notice to Appear, Form 6.15, onecopy of the Division Bail Log, Form 6.16;and bail bank deposit receipt to theAdministrative Section, Jail Division.

∗ Maintain the division bail file.∗ Maintain the bail schedules and the Bail

Instruction Booklet.∗ Maintain the Daily Bail Accounts Receipts

and Disbursements Report, Form 15.47.1.

680.95 FORWARDING ARRESTREPORTS ON BAIL-OUTS. When amisdemeanor prisoner bails out of a divisionjail, except in an outlying Operational JailSection jail (0/030.), the detention officer shallnotify Metropolitan Jail Section on the regularwagon pick-up. The detention officer shallprocess the arrest reports and have them readyfor the wagon pick-up.

681. POSTBOOKING RELEASE.681.05 RESPONSIBILITY FORMAKING POST-BOOKING RELEASEDETERMINATIONS. The responsibility formaking postbooking release determinations isas follows:

∗ For all misdemeanor arrestees detained inMetropolitan Jail Section, Release DeskPersonnel.

∗ For all misdemeanor arrestees booked intoValley Jail Section, the watch supervisor orother designated employee.

∗ For all misdemeanor arrestees booked into77th Street Jail Section, the watch supervisoror other designated employee.

∗ For all misdemeanor arrestees booked intothe count jail system, the concerned LosAngeles County Sheriff’s Departmentdesignee.

∗ For all misdemeanor arrestees booked intoa geographic jail facility, the senior jail staffmember on duty at the facility.

681.10 PROCEDURE FORDETERMINING POST-BOOKINGRELEASE ELIGIBILITY. Watchcommanders and the Operational Jail Sectionsupervisor of Department jails shall review thestatus of each adult misdemeanor arrestee incustody during required jail inspections andprior to the arrestee's transfer to LASDcustody. Misdemeanor adult arrestees shall beimmediately released from custody on theirown recognizance (O.R.) unless one or more ofthe following conditions exist:



∗ Arrestee is intoxicated to the point wherethe arrestee could be a danger to self orothers.

∗ Arrestee requires a medical examination ormedical care, or is otherwise unable to carefor own safety.

∗ Arrestee is in custody for a violation of oneor more of the circumstances listed inSections 40302 or 40303 of the VehicleCode.

∗ Arrestee has one or more outstanding felonyarrest warrants.

∗ Arrestee has one or more outstandingmisdemeanor arrest warrants not eligible forrelease under Section 827.1 of the PenalCode (4/216.67).

∗ Arrestee is unable to provide satisfactoryidentification.

∗ Immediate release of the arrestee wouldjeopardize the prosecution of the offense forwhich arrested or the prosecution for anyother offense.

∗ There is a reasonable likelihood that theoffense would continue or resume, or thatthe safety of persons or property would beimminently endangered by the release of thearrestee.

∗ Arrestee demands to be taken before amagistrate or refuses to sign the Notice toAppear.

∗ There is reason to believe that the arresteewould not appear at the time/place specifiedin the notice.

Note: This includes those adult misdemeanorarrestees who cannot present satisfactoryidentification at the time of arrest, but whoseidentity is subsequently established.

681.15 POSTBOOKING RELEASEPROCEDURES. When a misdemeanorarrestee is apparently eligible for apostbooking release, the releasing officer shall,prior to releasing him/her, ensure that:

∗ A want and warrant check based on positiveidentification has been conducted.

∗ The arrestee's criminal record has beenreviewed for convictions that would affectthe original booking charge (e.g.,484, 12025P.C.).

Exception: The supervisor responsible for theO.R. determination may, when records are notavailable after a reasonable length of time,evaluate the circumstances and release thearrestee.

∗ The "O.R. Determination" portion of theBooking Approval, Form 12.31, indicateseligibility for postbooking release.

∗ A sworn supervisor has approved thepostbooking release and signed the JailCustody Record of the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1.

681.20 REPORTING POSTBOOKINGINELIGIBILITY. When a determination ismade that a misdemeanor arrestee is noteligible for a postbooking release, the reasonfor the nonrelease and the name and serialnumber of the officer making the determination

shall be entered on the Jail Custody Recordpage of the Form 5.1 by the custodial detentionofficer.

682. EXCEPTIONAL RELEASES.682.15 IMMEDIATE CASH BAIL-OUT.Officers shall comply with the provisions ofVehicle Code Section 40304.5.

Note: Vehicle Code Section 40304.5 requiresthat any person who is taken into custody fortwo or fewer outstanding misdemeanor trafficwarrants for failure to appear on a citation fora parking offense or a traffic infraction beprovided the opportunity to immediately postbail. Additionally, if the arrestee does not havesufficient cash to post bail, the arrestee shall beallowed to make three completed telephonecalls and have at least three hours to obtainsufficient bail. The arrestee shall not bebooked, photographed, or fingerprinted, norshall an arrest record be made, unless the threehours have elapsed or the arrestee declines toimmediately post bail.

Local telephone calls shall be made at Cityexpense utilizing the centrex system. Longdistance calls shall be made collect by utilizingCity Hall Operators and following theirdirections.

Adult arrestees taken into custody under theauthority of 40302 V.C. through 40305 V.C.,shall also be provided the opportunity toimmediately post bail, without being booked,photographed, fingerprinted or having an arrestrecord made if they have sufficient cash intheir possession.

It is the responsibility of the arresting officer toensure that the arrestees have been informed oftheir rights concerning immediate cashbail-out. The detention officer, or an officerdesignated by the watch commander, shallaccept the bail and immediately release thearrestee.

Note: Searches of arrestees deemed necessaryto ensure officer safety and station securitymay be conducted on arrestees arranging forimmediate cash bailout. This does not normallyinclude strip searches.

Exceptions:

∗ When there is a question regarding thearrestee's identity, and the arrestee wasarrested for a Vehicle Code violation, whileoperating a motor vehicle, the arrestee maybe detained for a reasonable time, not toexceed two hours, so that his/her identitycan be verified. In "immediate cashbail-out" situations, misdemeanor trafficwarrant arrestees shall not be detained forpurposes of identification.

∗ If the arrestees are intoxicated, the arresteesshall not be allowed to post immediate bailunless a responsible adult is present andwilling to assume responsibility for them.

In lieu of a booking number, a DR numbershall be used on the Bail Receipt and/or Notice

to Appear, Form 6.15.

Exception: When there is a related report, theDR number of that report shall be used.

When immediate cash bail is posted for amisdemeanor traffic warrant, the Area jail unitshall enter the appropriate information into theCWS computer (4/611.30). Immediate cashbail-outs are cleared from the CWS System inthe same manner as bookings (with theexception that the DR number is entered inplace of the booking number). Jail Divisionpersonnel shall forward all copies of theabstract to Records and Identification Division.

682.20 CANCELLED WARRANTINFORMATION SHEET RELEASE. Whenan arrest warrant information sheet has beenteletyped to a division for booking purposesand the Department is subsequently directed torecall the warrant, a Cancel WarrantInformation Sheet teletype will be directed tothe division watch commander. When no othercharges are pending, the concerned watchcommander shall:

∗ Cause the immediate release of the arrestee.

Note: When a question arises concerning thevalidity of a Cancel Warrant Information Sheetteletype, the concerned watch commander shallimmediately telephone the Supervisor,Automated Want/Warrant Unit, Records andIdentification Division, to determine the statusof the warrant.

∗ When the booking has been completed,cause the completion of an Investigator'sFinal Report, Form 5.10, authorizing therelease. The notation "Warrant InformationSheet Canceled" shall precede all otherinformation in the space provided for"Reason for Release."

Note: When the arrestee is detained at anotherfacility, an Order to Release teletype shall beimmediately transmitted to that facility.

690. JUVENILE RELEASES.690.05 RELEASE OF JUVENILEDETAINED AT A JUVENILE HALL. Toeffect the release of a juvenile who is detainedin a juvenile hall, the investigating officershall:

∗ Present one copy of the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10, authorizing the release,to the Watch Commander, DetectiveSupport Division; or,

∗ Present one copy of the Investigator's FinalReport to the concerned record clerk andcause the transmittal of an "Order toRelease Juvenile" teletype to the WatchCommander, Detective Support Division.

690.10 DETECTIVE SUPPORTDIVISION-WATCH COMMANDER'SDUTIES. Upon receiving the teletype orInvestigator's Final Report directing the releaseof a detained juvenile, the watch commandershall:



∗ Telephonically notify the probation officerat Intake Detention Control at the concernedjuvenile hall to release the juvenile.

∗ Upon the notification of the release of thejuvenile, cause the transmittal of a"Notification of Prisoner Release" teletypeto the concerned investigating officer.

Note: When the concerned detective divisionis located in Parker Center, a telephonicnotification may be made.

690.20 RELEASE AUTHORIZED BY APROBATION OFFICER. When a probationofficer from the Probation Department's IntakeDetention Control contacts the Departmentregarding the release of a juvenile detained ina juvenile hall, the probation officer shall bedirected to contact the Watch Commander,Detective Support Division. The WatchCommander, Detective Support Division, shall:

∗ Determine whether the subject shall be citedto return for further investigation anddisposition.

∗ Cause the transmittal of a "Notification ofPrisoner Release" teletype to the concernedinvestigating officer when detained in ajuvenile hall.

695. REGISTRATION OFCONVICTED PERSONS.695.10 LOCATION FORREGISTRATION OF CONVICTEDPERSONS. Officers having a person in theircustody whom they wish to register under theconvicted person's registration laws shall takethe person to the Criminal Records Section,Records and Identification Division, forprocessing. Persons wishing to register undersuch laws shall be directed to Records andIdentification Division.

FOLLOW-UPINVESTIGATION

702. DETECTIVE'S CASEENVELOPE-FELONY ARRESTEES. Theassigned investigator shall ensure that:

∗ A separate Detective's Case Envelope, Form15.15 is utilized for each adult felonyarrestee.

Exceptions: Investigations requiring use of acase package larger than the 15.15, or aMurder Book (4/710.30).

∗ A copy of all related reports is filed in thepackage.

∗ Applicable information is entered on theface of the envelope as it becomesavailable.

∗ The completed case package is submitted toa supervisor for approval as soon aspracticable after the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10, is approved and returnedto the investigator.

After approval, completed case packages are to

be filed as directed by the divisioncommanding officer.

705. SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGES-BOOKED PRISONERS (4/646).

705.05 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARGE-DEFINED (4/646.05).

705.10 PLACING SUPPLEMENTALCHARGES OR RECORDING AREDUCTION IN CHARGES (4/646.10).705.22 BOOKED MISDEMEANANTWANTED ON A FELONY. An officer whodiscovers that a person booked on amisdemeanor charge is wanted on a felonycharge shall notify by telephone:

∗ The division requesting the arrestee, whenthe want is local.

∗ The division that regularly investigatescases similar to the felony charge, when thewant is foreign.

When the concerned division is closed, thenotification shall be made to Detective SupportDivision. The officer receiving thenotifications shall:

∗ Determine whether the felony want is valid.∗ If the felony want is valid, cause the

supplemental charge to be placed(4/646.10).

705.42 WARRANT BOOKINGS-ADDITIONAL OFFENSES. When anofficer, while serving a warrant, either felonyor misdemeanor, encounters circumstanceswhich justify an arrest for an additionaloffense, he/she shall book the suspect on boththe warrant and the additional offense.

705.62 JUVENILE BOOKED AS ANADULT. When it is learned that a personunder the age of eighteen years has beenbooked as an adult by members of thisDepartment or an outside police agency(4/805) and no adult complaint has beenissued, the concerned watch commander shall,without unnecessary delay, cause the juvenileto be segregated from adult prisoners andnotify the concerned investigating officer and,if applicable, the involved outside policeagency. The concerned investigating officershall:

∗ Release the adult charge by completing anInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10.

Note: A teletype abstract of the Form 5.10shall be sent to the concerned investigativedivision when the release is accomplished byan officer of another division.

∗ Obtain a new booking number and rebookthe subject as a juvenile.

∗ Obtain a new booking number, a new set offingerprints via the Livescan Tenprinter,and complete a new set of the Los AnglesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1Enter the notation "Juvenile Rebooking"and the new booking number in the top left

corner of the face sheet of a copy of theoriginal adult arrest report. Forward boththe cancelled and new Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1, toRecords and Identification Division.

Note: When the original arrest report is a ShortArrest Report, Form 5.2.1, an Arrest Report,Form 5.2, shall be completed. The old bookingnumber shall be placed in the CourtInformation space with the notation"Rebooking-Subject Originally Booked as anAdult (original booking number)." The courtcopy of the short form arrest report shall beattached to the investigating officer's copy ofthe arrest report.

∗ Indicate in the narrative portion of the arrestreport the following:

∗ The date and time the juvenile's true agebecame known.

∗ The facts regarding the misrepresentationof age and how the juvenile's true agebecame known.

∗ The juvenile's true name if different thanthe name he/she was booked under.

∗ Cause the revised arrest report to bedistributed as indicated in Manual Section5/5.2-88.

∗ Complete a Detention Petition Requestwhen the juvenile is detained.

Note: When a juvenile has been booked as anadult because the juvenile misrepresentedhis/her age and this misrepresentationmaterially delayed the investigation, amaximum of 48 hours additional time isallowed to complete the investigation and filea petition. The additional time begins when thejuvenile's true age has been determined.

When the juvenile is rebooked and detained byother than the investigative division, the relatedreports shall be promptly delivered to thedivision responsible for the investigation.When the juvenile is released after rebooking,the related reports may be forwarded byDepartment mail to the concerned division.

Exception: When the juvenile has beenbooked as an adult by the CHP, the watchcommander shall telephonically request thatthe concerned CHP supervisor promptlydispatch a CHP officer to accept custody of thejuvenile and that a teletype be sent authorizingthe release.

705.63 ADULT BOOKED AS AJUVENILE. When investigation reveals thata person booked as a juvenile was eighteenyears of age or over at the time of thecommission of the offense, the concernedinvestigating officer shall:

∗ Release the juvenile charge and complete anInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10, ifthe person is in custody.

∗ Complete the disposition portion of theArrest Report, Form 5.2.

∗ If the person is to be rebooked as an adultthe investigating officer shall obtain a new



booking number and complete a new ArrestReport, Form 5.2.

∗ If the person is rebooked as an adult, thebackground of the arrestee shall beinvestigated for possible O.R.considerations, in accordance with existingprocedures (4/681.).

705.64 JUVENILE NAMED ON ADULTTRAFFIC WARRANT. The investigatingofficer assigned a case in which a juvenile wasbooked on a Los Angeles City adult trafficwarrant shall dispose of the warrant as follows:

∗ Complete an original and three copies of aRequest for Certification to Juvenile Court,Form 9.2.

∗ Forward the original and two copies of theForm 9.2 with the warrant or warrantinformation sheet to the Traffic CourtLiaison Detail, Traffic CoordinationSection.

∗ Retain one copy of the Form 9.2 pendingreceipt of a completed copy of the Form 9.2from the court that issued the warrant.Receipt of this copy indicates that thecertification has been completed.

∗ Upon receipt of the completed Form 9.2from the court, place the notation "Referredto Juvenile Traffic" in the dispositionportion of the related arrest report. Forwardthe completed arrest report to the JuvenileRecords Unit, Records and IdentificationDivision.

Note: If the juvenile was not booked on thetraffic warrant but on another charge, the sameprocedure shall apply except that arrestdisposition shall be made only for the bookingoffense.

709. DEATHS.

709.10 DEATH INVESTIGATION-FOLLOW-UP PROCEDURES.Natural, Accidental, and Suicide Deaths.Death investigations which reflect a supportedclassification of "natural," "accidental," or"suicide" shall not routinely require aFollow-up Report, Form 3.14.

Exception: A Follow-up Report shall becompleted as soon as practical when:

∗ The facts articulated in the initial DeathInvestigation Report, Form 3.11, do notsupport the classification; or,

∗ Subsequent information significantly altersthe original classification; or,

∗ The postmortem examination contradictsthe classification and cause of deathreported on the Death Investigation Report.

Traffic Related Deaths. When a death resultsfrom a traffic collision, the investigatingofficer shall complete a Traffic Collision StatusReport, Form 4.16, within 60 days followingthe initial Death Investigation Report. Thereport shall indicate:

∗ The postmortem examination results, andfinal classification of death; or,

∗ That the investigation is continuing and thereason for its continuance.

Undetermined Deaths. The detectiveresponsible for the follow-up investigation ofa death classified as "undetermined" shall, assoon as possible but no later than 60 days afterthe initial Death Investigation Report,complete a Follow-up Report indicating:

∗ The postmortem examination results, andthe final classification and cause of death;or,

∗ That the postmortem examination iscontinuing and a statement as to why theexamination and/or the investigation has notbeen concluded.

Note: When the postmortem examinationresults cannot be obtained, the detective shallcomplete an additional Follow-up Reportduring each subsequent 90 day period, until thefinal classification or cause of death can beestablished. If either the classification or causeof death cannot be determined, the detectiveshall complete a Follow-up Report indicatingthe available results and the reason why a finaldetermination by the Coroner is not possible.

710. HOMICIDES.

710.10 TELEPHONICNOTIFICATIONS. A telephonic notificationreporting the occurrence of a homicide shall bemade by the homicide investigating officer assoon as practical after his/her preliminaryinvestigation to the concerned operationsbureau office and the Administrative Unit,Detective Support Division. The followinginformation shall be included:

∗ Name of victim.∗ Date and time of occurrence.∗ Location of occurrence.∗ Suspect in custody/outstanding.∗ Cause of death.∗ Motive for homicide (if known).∗ Area of occurrence.∗ Potential for additional problems.∗ Name of reporting officer.

710.11 AUTOPSY NOTIFICATIONS.Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Theinvestigating officer responsible for a homicideor death investigation shall ensure that thecoroner’s office is provided with a validcontact number(s) for autopsy notification.

Responsibility to Attend an Autopsy. The I/Oshall attend a scheduled autopsy whennecessary to continue a thorough investigation.When notification is made to someone in theI/O’s chain of command, that person shallensure that the I/O, or an available alternate(when the I/O is unavailable), attends theautopsy.

710.20 HOMICIDE STATUS REPORTS.Unsolved Homicides. A progress report on anunsolved homicide shall be submitted bydetectives to their commanding officer, within

60 days of case assignment. The report is inlieu of a Follow-up Report, Form 3.14. It shallbe on plain white paper and distributed asfollows:

∗ Original and addenda to the assigneddetective.

∗ One copy to the detective supervisor.∗ One copy and addenda to the concerned

operations bureau.∗ One copy to Robbery-Homicide Division.

A follow-up report shall be completed:

∗ As soon as possible, when additionalinformation consists of new evidenceaffecting the cause of death or when thestatus of the Death Investigation Report,Form 3.11, is changed.

∗ When any significant subsequentinformation is reported during the unsolvedstatus of the homicide after an initialhomicide progress report has beensubmitted.

∗ At the end of six months and at the end ofone year from the date of the crime on allunsolved homicides.

∗ After the first year as additional informationbecomes available.

Solved Homicides. When a homicide case issolved, the investigating officer shall submit aFollow-up Report, Form 3.14, containing thefollowing information:

∗ Synopsis of the occurrence (who, what,when, where, how).

∗ Suspect(s)-Defendant(s).∗ Investigative information positively

identifying the suspect(s).∗ M.O. used by the suspect(s).∗ Criminal charges filed and/or warrant

information.∗ Postmortem examination information-cause

of death.

Crimes or Incidents Reclassified as CriminalHomicides. When a reported crime or incidentis reclassified as a criminal homicide, theassigned detective shall:

∗ Complete a Preliminary InvestigationReport (PIR), Form 3.1, for "Murder" whenthe incident was originally reported on aDeath Investigation Report, Form 3.11;Injury Report, Form 3.15; or MissingPersons Investigation Report, Form 3.16;OR,

∗ Submit a Follow-up Report, Form 3.14,reclassifying the original PIR to "Murder"along with the face sheet of the originalPIR; AND,

∗ Prepare a Death Investigation Report, if notpreviously completed.

∗ If the original report was a DeathInvestigation Report, the classification shallbe changed to "homicide."

All reports shall contain the DR number of theoriginal crime or incident.



Exception: If the original crime has beencleared before the death of the victim occurs,or if the death occurred in a calendar year otherthan that in which the original report wascompleted, the subsequent Death InvestigationReport, Follow-up Report, and/or PreliminaryInvestigation Report shall be assigned a newDR number.

710.30 MURDER BOOK. Murder Booksshall be used exclusively for homicideinvestigations.

The Forms 3.11.1 through 3.11.7 (5/3.11.1) areto be maintained in the Murder Book whenused in a homicide investigation. When theforms are used in other than a homicideinvestigation, they are to be maintained in theappropriate case folder.

711. FAMILY VIOLENCE.711.05 INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVINGFAMILY VIOLENCE. Operations SupportDivision detectives shall conduct follow-upinvestigations of all crimes of violenceoccurring within the family (e.g., domesticviolence crime and incident, an assault with adeadly weapon, a battery, etc.).

Exception: Cases of physical or sexual childabuse where the suspect is the parent,stepparent, guardian, or a live-inboyfriend/girlfriend of the child’s parent shallbe assigned to the Child Protection Section,Juvenile Division.

Operations Support Division detectives shallconduct investigations to determine if childabuse issues also exist in current cases. If childabuse is discovered, investigators shall takeaction and follow established reportingprocedures. The follow-up investigation shallbe conducted according to existing Departmentprocedures.

712. MISSING/FOUND PERSONS.712.05 INVESTIGATION PRIOR TOREPORTING A MISSING ADULT. Beforecompleting any report regarding a missingadult, the interviewing officer shall attempt tolocate the person by telephoning the following:

∗ Missing Persons Detail or, when the detailis closed, Detective Support Division.

∗ Mental Evaluation Detail personnel locatedat Parker Center.

∗ Los Angeles County-USC Medical Center.∗ Divisional Records Clerk for traffic

collision information.∗ Inmate Reception Center, LA County Jail.∗ County Coroner's Office.

712.10 MISSING/FOUND PERSONS.Employee’s Responsibility. When any person,resident or non-resident of Los Angeles, isreported missing, the employee conducting thepreliminary investigation shall:

∗ Request advice from the Missing PersonsDetail, Detective Support Division:

∗ Complete a Missing/Found PersonsInvestigation, Form 3.16, without delay;and,

Note: Parental abductions shall be accepted asmissing persons cases.

∗ Provide the person reporting a Departmentof Justice (DOJ) Dental/Skeletal ReleaseForm, SS-8567; or in the case of a missingjuvenile, a DOJ Dental/Skeletal Photographand Description Release Form (reverse sideof SS-8567); and comply with proceduresA-C.

Note: The California Penal Code requires lawenforcement agencies to take missing personsreports (Form 3.16) telephonically. However,this should not be done routinely. Thereporting person should be requested to makethe report at the nearest law enforcementfacility unless the reporting person is unable,i.e., disabled.

Exception: With the approval of the AreaJuvenile Coordinator, a missing persons reportmay be taken telephonically when it involvesa chronic juvenile runaway or extenuatingcircumstances are present which would createa severe hardship for the parent or guardianattempting to complete the report. When theArea Juvenile Coordinator is unavailable,approval for completion of the telephonicreport shall be obtained from the concernedJuvenile Coordinator's immediate supervisor.When neither the Area Juvenile Coordinatornor the immediate supervisor is available,approval to complete the telephonic reportshall be obtained from the concerned Areapatrol division watch commander.

The Missing/Found Person Telephone Report,Form 3.16.2, shall only be used byinvestigative personnel as an interim reportwhile the Missing/Found Persons Investigation,Form 3.16, is being processed.

Resident of Los Angeles. If the missingperson (juvenile or adult) is a City of LosAngeles resident and was last seen outside theCity, the employee completing theMissing/Found Persons Investigation, Form3.16, shall immediately notify the outsideagency having jurisdiction of the locationwhere the person was last seen and record thename of the person and agency notified in thenarrative portion of the report.

Notwithstanding other provisions the employeeentering any missing person information intoNCIC shall record the NCIC nine digit entryverification number in the "NCIC #" box onthe revised Form 3.16.

Non-Resident of Los Angeles. When anynon-resident of the City of Los Angeles isreported missing, the employee conducting thepreliminary investigation shall complete aMissing/Found Persons Investigation, Form3.16, without delay and immediately notify andforward a copy of the report to the outsideagency having jurisdiction over the person'sresidence address and, if applicable, the

jurisdiction where the missing person was lastseen. The employee shall record the name ofeach person and agency notified in thenarrative portion of the report.

Juvenile or ‘At Risk’ Missing Person. Whenthe missing person is a juvenile under 16 yearsof age or any person, regardless of age, who isconsidered "At Risk," the employee receivingthe report shall:

∗ Cause a police unit to be dispatched;∗ Cause a Citywide crime broadcast to be

made;∗ Complete a Missing/Found Person

Investigation, Form 3.16, without delay;∗ Secure recent photo of missing person;∗ Obtain a DR number from the Area Records

Unit; and,∗ Request a supervisor.

Note: "At Risk" includes but is not limited toa missing person regardless of age that is thevictim of foul play or a crime; is in need ofmedical attention; has not demonstrated apattern of running away; is the victim ofparental abduction; or is mentally impaired.

The employee conducting the preliminaryinvestigation shall be responsible for thedisposition of the call unless specificallyrelieved by his/her watch commander.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. Supervisorsassigned to a Missing Juvenile incident shallconsider the following:

∗ Immediate Search. Supervisors shallensure an immediate search of the premisesand surrounding neighborhood is madewhen a missing juvenile is under the age of12 years or when other circumstancesindicate the necessity of a search.Supervisors shall determine the necessity ofa search when a juvenile is at least 12 yearsold, but under the age of 16.

∗ Large Scale Search. When circumstancesindicate the need for an immediate, largescale, organized search for a missingjuvenile, the supervisor shall ensure thewatch commander of the responsible Areais notified.

∗ Detailed Log. Supervisors shall ensure adetailed log of police activities bemaintained by the field unit assigned thecall whenever the juvenile is under the ageof 16 years, or when other circumstancesindicate the necessity for its completion.

Watch Commander’s Responsibility. Thewatch commander, Area of occurrence, shalldecide how often missing juvenile broadcastsshall be made over police radios and shallcause Communications Division to be notified.

When notified by a supervisor of the need fora large-scale search, the watch commandershall notify the:

∗ Area Commanding Officer;∗ Watch supervisor, Department Command

Post, Communications Division; and,



∗ Concerned geographic investigativedivision.

The watch commander, Area of occurrence,shall ensure that the reported information istransmitted, by Area records personnel, to theNational Crime Information Center (NCIC)Missing Person System and the CaliforniaDepartment of Justice (DOJ) within four hoursof the initial report.

The Specialized Report Distribution Unit,Records and Identification Division, shall,following the acceptance of the report, transmitthe report information to NCIC on juvenilesunder 16 years of age and persons "At Risk"when Area computer facilities are not inoperation.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility.Officers conducting a missing personinvestigation shall:

∗ Upon receipt of a Missing/Found PersonsInvestigation, Form 3.16, contact thereporting party to determine if furtherinvestigation is warranted;

∗ Contact the involved outside agencies, ifany, to determine investigativeresponsibility; and,

∗ Ensure that the missing person informationis removed from NCIC when a dispositionis made on the missing person investigation,and in those cases where DOJ has beennotified, advise DOJ of the dispositionwithin 24 hours.

NCIC Entry-Juvenile. When a missingjuvenile is 16 years of age or older, theinvestigating officer shall ensure that the reportinformation is transmitted to NCIC withinseven days after the report was completed andnote on the report the date of NCIC entry.

Dental/Skeletal Records-Juvenile Under 16.When an officer assigned a missing juvenileinvestigation determines that the juvenile ismissing under suspicious circumstances, orwhen a juvenile under 16 years of age ismissing at least l4 days, the officer shall:

∗ Instruct the concerned family member toobtain the dental/skeletal records and arecent photograph of the missing juvenileand return them immediately to the officer;and,

∗ Immediately confer with the coroner andsubmit the report, along with thedental/skeletal x-rays, photograph, and thesigned DOJ release form to DOJ within 24hours.

Dental/Skeletal Records-Adults andJuveniles 16 or Older. When an adult orjuvenile 16 years of age or older is still missingafter 30 days, the concerned officer shallinstruct the reporting party to obtain theskeletal/dental records and return them to theofficer within 10 days. If the person is stillmissing after 45 days, the records shall beforwarded to DOJ.

Forwarding of Dental/Skeletal Records.When the missing person's dental/skeletalrecords and photograph have been obtained,the investigating officer shall so indicate on theMissing/Found Persons Investigation, Form3.16, and forward a copy of the Form 3.16 andthe original of the dental/skeletal records andthe photograph within 24 hours to:

Department of JusticeBureau of Criminal Statistics and SpecialServicesMissing/Unidentified Persons SystemPost Office Box 903417Sacramento, CA 94203-4170

The concerned officer shall also maintain thefollowing forms in the detective's casepackage:

∗ Declaration for Release of Dental Records,Temporary No. 209, if completed; and,

∗ Department of Justice Dental/skeletalRelease Form, SS-8567; or

In the case of a missing juvenile:

∗ Department of Justice Dental/SkeletalPhotograph and Description Release Form(reverse side of SS-8567).

Detective Support Division’s Responsibility.Detective Support Division shall beresponsible for completing the appropriatenotifications when advised by an outsideagency that a resident of the City of LosAngeles has been reported missing.

712.30 FOUND/UNIDENTIFIEDPERSONS.Employee’s Responsibility. Any Departmentemployee receiving information concerning afound/unidentified person who cannot bereunited with family or friends during thepreliminary investigation, shall:

∗ Request advice from the Missing PersonsUnit, Detective Support Division;

∗ Complete a Found/Missing PersonsInvestigation, Form 3.16: and,

∗ Ensure that the disposition of the individualis noted in the narrative of the report.

Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Anofficer receiving a Found/Unidentified PersonsReport shall, in addition to establishedProcedures, ensure that the appropriateinformation is entered into the UnidentifiedPersons File, NCIC.

Note: NCIC routinely completes a cross-searchbetween the Unidentified Persons File and theMissing Persons File in an effort to locatemissing persons.

712.35 FOUND ADULTS-SHELTER.When a lost adult is taken into protectivecustody and a release to a relative or otherresponsible person cannot be effectedimmediately, Detective Support Divisionpersonnel located at the Mental EvaluationDetail shall attempt to identify and place thelost adult. If such attempt is unsuccessful and

the lost adult qualifies under Section 5150W.I.C., Detective Support Division personnelshall complete five copies of the Request forPsychopathic Examination, Form 5.4, and fourcopies of the County form, Application forEmergency Admission. The lost adult shallthen be transported to Los AngelesCounty-USC Medical Center with the secondand third copies of the Form 5.4 and all copiesof the County form.

715. FUGITIVES.

715.05 FUGITIVE-DEFINED. A fugitiveis a person wanted by a jurisdiction other thanthis Department.

715.10 FUGITIVE ARRESTED ON ALOCAL CHARGE. When a fugitive is incustody on a local felony or misdemeanorcharge or warrant, the fugitive charge shall beplaced supplementary (4/646.10).

715.40 BOOKING ON FUGITIVE"WANT" - NOTIFICATION. (4/606.07).715.70 HANDLING OF LOCAL ANDFUGITIVE CHARGES. When it isascertained that a person booked on a fugitivecharge has a local felony or misdemeanor wantor warrant, the local charge shall be placedsupplementary.

Notification shall be made to the FugitiveWarrants Section, Detective Support Division,by:

∗ The Criminal Records Unit, Records andIdentification Division, when thesupplemental booking is on a warrant.

∗ The concerned investigating officer, whenthe supplemental booking is on a felonywant.

Local charges against a fugitive shall bedisposed of prior to releasing a fugitive to ademanding jurisdiction.

Exception: When it appears that separateprosecutions of a local and a fugitive chargemay be prohibited by Section 654 P.C.(Multiple Prosecutions), all charges shall bepresented to the local prosecutor, who willdetermine jurisdictional responsibility.

716. NOTIFICATIONS.716.10 EXTRADITION ORINVESTIGATION. Prior to leaving LosAngeles County on an extradition or aninvestigation, notification shall be made toDetective Support Division giving the:

∗ Name and division of the officer leaving theCounty.

∗ Nature of the trip.∗ Destination.∗ Intended date of departure from Los

Angeles.∗ Departing officer's supervisor approving the

trip.

716.11 VICE OR NARCOTICSINVESTIGATIONS ON STATE



UNIVERSITY CAMPUSES. Investigatingofficers shall, as soon as practicable, notifytheir Area/division commanding officers whena narcotics or vice investigation occurs or isanticipated on a state university campus. Whennotified of narcotics or vice investigations ona state university campus, Area/divisioncommanding officers shall review thecircumstances and, if appropriate, notify theconcerned university of the investigation.

716.60 CONTACTING THEDEPARTMENT, WHILE ABSENT FROMTHE COUNTY. When necessary, an officerout of the County on an extradition or aninvestigation may contact this Department by:

∗ Placing a telephone call to the officer'sdivision of assignment.

∗ Directing a teletype or a collect wire to theOffice of the Chief of Police, Attention:(officer's division of assignment).

An officer out of the County for an extendedperiod of time shall contact the division ofassignment at least once a week or as theofficer's commanding officer directs.

720. COMPLAINTS.720.10 ARRESTEE CHARGED WITHBOTH MISDEMEANOR AND FELONY.When the arrestee is charged with both afelony and misdemeanor offense, the arresteeshall not be arraigned on the misdemeanorcharge prior to the completion of the felonyinvestigation by the concerned investigatingofficer.

720.20 REPORTS NECESSARY FORFELONY COMPLAINT. When requesting afelony filing with the District Attorney'sOffice, the following number of copies of allconcerned police reports shall be presented:

In-Custody Filings. Three copies of allconcerned police reports.

Not-in-Custody Filings. Four copies of allconcerned police reports, plus one additionalcopy for each co-defendant.

720.25 REPORTS NECESSARY FORMISDEMEANOR COMPLAINT. Whenrequesting a misdemeanor complaint, the CityAttorney's Office shall be presented with threecopies of all police reports concerning the casein question.

720.30 SECURING COMPLAINT FROMA FELONY BOOKING.Prima Facie Evidence of Felony. When anArrest Report, Form 5.2, of an adult felonyarrestee contains prima facie evidence of afelony, the results of the investigation willnormally be presented to the District Attorney'sOffice.

Incomplete Prima Facie Evidence of Felony.When an arrest report of a felony arresteecontains a portion of the element of a felony,but investigation indicates that the remaining

elements can be established, the investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Prepare a Follow-Up Report, Form 3.14,containing the necessary elements of thefelony if requested by the DistrictAttorney's Office.

∗ Apply to the District Attorney's Office for afelony complaint.

Prima Facie Evidence of Misdemeanor.When investigation fails to establish primafacie evidence of the commission of a felonyby a felony arrestee but does establish primafacie evidence of the commission of amisdemeanor, the investigating officer shall:

∗ Obtain a felony complaint rejectionapproval from his/her watch commander orSection OIC.

∗ Apply to the City Attorney for amisdemeanor complaint.

∗ Complete the "Additional Action" portionof the Form 5.10, indicating approval for abypass referral to the City Attorney. Delivera copy of the Form 5.10 to the CityAttorney, along with the related reports.

Rejection Of Complaint. If the DistrictAttorney's Office does not issue a complaint,the investigating officer shall secure a written"Rejection of Complaint" signed by the DistrictAttorney or one of his/her deputies. If theinvestigation indicates that a misdemeanorcomplaint should be applied for, theinvestigating officer shall submit a copy of the"Rejection of Complaint" to the City Attorneytogether with the other reports necessary toobtain the complaint.

Note: The investigating officer shall affixhis/her signature to the original of thecompleted "Rejection of Complaint" in thespace provided.

An officer shall not affix his/her signature toany other statement, written or printed, whichpurports to validate the rejection of a complaintor concurs with the reasons for non-issuance ofa complaint.

Prior to forwarding the "Rejection ofComplaint" to Records and IdentificationDivision, the investigating officer shall causeto be entered in the upper right-hand corner ofall copies:

∗ The LA number, in the case of anARRESTEE or a SUSPECT WITH ANARREST RECORD IN RECORDS ANDIDENTIFICATION DIVISION; AND,

∗ Forward the original copy of the "Rejectionof Complaint" to Criminal Records Section,Records and Identification Division; OR,

∗ The related DR number of earliest issuance,in the case of a SUSPECT WHO HASNEVER BEEN BOOKED BY THISDEPARTMENT; AND,

∗ When appropriate, attach the original of thecompleted Follow-up Report, Form 3.14, tothe original of the "Rejection of Complaint"and forward to the Crime and

Miscellaneous Report Section, Records andIdentification Division.

720.32 FELONY ARREST REPORTUSED FOR MISDEMEANORCOMPLAINT. When the felony arrest reportis used to obtain a misdemeanor complaint, theinvestigating officer shall include, with thereport, information of the prior record of thearrestee or a notation, "No prior record."

720.35 INCOMPLETE PRIMA FACIEEVIDENCE OF A CRIME. When an ArrestReport, Form 5.2, contains the elements of acrime but the investigating officer is unable tofully substantiate these elements, theinvestigating officer shall:

∗ Obtain a felony complaint rejectionapproval from his/her watch commander.

∗ Release the arrestee.

Note: In cases where the victim refuses toprosecute and his/her testimony is essential insubstantiating the elements of the crime, adefendant may be released from custody andthe case closed without a complaint beingsought, unless:

∗ The injury to the victim is of a seriousnature and is likely to result in death ordisablement; or,

∗ A firearm was used in the commission ofthe crime; or,

∗ There is a strong likelihood of future crimesbeing committed by the defendant againstthe victim; or,

∗ The defendant is on probation or parole; or,∗ There are other crimes for which the

defendant could be prosecuted without thetestimony of the victim.

720.36 17(b)4 P.C. REFERRALS TOTHE CITY ATTORNEY'S OFFICE. Wheninvestigating officers believe, because ofDistrict Attorney policy or from pastexperience, that a particular felony case wouldbe rejected if submitted to the DistrictAttorney's Office, the investigating officersshall:

∗ Obtain, in writing, from their watchcommander or Section OIC, on theInvestigator’s Final Report, Form 5.10,approval for a 17(b)4 P.C. referral to theCity Attorney's Office.

∗ Seek a misdemeanor complaint from theCity Attorney's Office.

∗ Complete the "Additional Action" portionof the Form 5.10, indicating approval forthe 17(b)4 P.C. referral. Deliver a copy ofthe Form 5.10 to the City Attorney, alongwith the related police reports.

Exception: Arrests for 459 PC (ResidentialBurglary) shall not be referred to the CityAttorney under l7(b)4PC.

Note: The above referral policy does not affectthe investigating officer's option to attempt toobtain a complaint from the District Attorney'sOffice for any felony case.



720.37 MODIFIED 17(b)4 P.C. REFERRALPROCEDURES. Modified referral proceduresmay be used for selected booking chargesunder specified conditions. Refer to theDetective Operations Manual for guidelines onuse of modified referral procedures.

720.38 ARRAIGNING FELONYARRESTEE ON A MISDEMEANOR. Whena misdemeanor complaint is issued against anin custody arrestee booked on a related felonycharge, the investigating officer shall:

∗ If the arrestee is in custody, have thearrestee immediately rebooked on themisdemeanor complaint, and have him/herarraigned without delay;

∗ If not immediately arraigned, instruct thedetention officer to transfer the arrestee forarraignment on the reduced charge at thenext transportation session;

Note: The prisoner may only be transferred bythe Los Angeles Sheriff’s Departmenttransportation if it will enable arraignmentwithin the lawfully prescribed time period.

∗ If the arrestee is a female, cause a Changeof Arrest Status notification to be directedto Records and Identification Division, andalso to Valley Jail Section, 77th StreetRegional Jail or Twin Towers, whicheverpertains to her custody;

∗ Provide to the detention officer theInvestigator’s Final Report, Form 5.10,indicating that a misdemeanor filing has infact been accepted by the court and instructthe detention officer to rebook per 17B4P.C.; and,

∗ Absent the actual filing of a misdemeanorcomplaint on the arrestee, deliver theInvestigator’s Final Report, Form 5.10, tothe detention officer who will handle therequest as “Transportation Request” only.

720.40 RELEASING OR ARRAIGNINGFELONY ARRESTEE ON A MARIJUANAPOSSESSION CHARGE. If, after normalcomplaint filing procedures have beenfollowed, the booking offense is rejected bothas a felony and as a misdemeanor, but thecharge of marijuana possession (11357b H&S)is filed, the concerned detective shall releasethe prisoner on his/her own recognizance orcause the O.R. Release to be accomplished bythe detention officer in the confinementfacility.

Note: In the event an arrestee in custody is tobe released, but refuses to sign the promise toappear portion of the release form, he/she shallbe arraigned on the marijuana possessionoffense within 48 hours, exclusive ofSaturdays, Sundays and Holidays, followingthe time of arrest.

720.50 ARRESTEE ARMED. Whenobtaining a felony complaint, the DistrictAttorney shall be notified if:

∗ The arrestee was armed at the time of thecommission of the offense.

∗ The arrestee was armed at the time ofhis/her arrest.

720.55 OBTAINING COMPLAINTS-CHARGE BASED ON PRIOR FELONYCONVICTION. When a complaint isrequested and a prior felony conviction isalleged, the investigating officer shall delivera copy of the arrestee's Bureau of Identificationarrest record to the Prior Unit, DistrictAttorney's Office.

At the arraignment, the arraigning officer shallrequest the full-time interval before thepreliminary hearing in order that proof of theprior conviction may be obtained.

720.60 OBTAINING COMPLAINTS-CHARGE BASED ON PRIORMISDEMEANOR CONVICTION. When acomplaint is to be requested and a priormisdemeanor conviction is to be alleged, theinvestigating officer shall:

∗ Ascertain where the arrestee served thesentence for the prior conviction.

∗ Request certified copies of both theconcerned court docket and the order ofcommitment from the court havingjurisdiction for the prior trial.

Prior Served at City Jail. When a complaintis requested alleging a prior conviction, and thesentence for the prior conviction was served atthe Los Angeles City Jail, the investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Ascertain whether the arrestee's fingerprintsare on the Records and IdentificationDivision copy of the certification ofcommitment for the alleged prior. When thearrestee's fingerprints are on thecertification, the investigating officer shallrequest a certified copy of the commitmentrecord.

∗ When the arrestee's fingerprints are not onthe certification of commitment, theinvestigating officer shall request fromRecords and Identification Division acertified copy of the Booking Identificationpage of the Form 5.1 completed for thearrest which resulted in the prior convictionand shall cause the officer whofingerprinted the arrestee at the time ofbooking to be subpoenaed.

Prior Served at County Jail. When acomplaint is requested alleging a priorconviction, and the sentence for the priorconviction was served at the County Jailsubsequent to July, 1964, the investigatingofficer shall notify the Commander, Sheriff'sFingerprint Section, by telephone. Thenotification shall include:

∗ The arrestee's name, LASD number, and CIInumber;

∗ The location of the arrestee, if in custody;and,

∗ The approximate date the arrestee wassentenced for the prior conviction.

If the release for the prior conviction occurred

before July, 1964, the investigating officershall teletype the Bureau of Identification andrequest a certified copy of the LASDfingerprint card taken at the time ofcommitment for the prior conviction(4/170.55).

Prior Served in Other Than Los AngelesCity or County Jail. At the arraignment, if thesentence for the prior conviction was servedoutside of Los Angeles County, the arraigningofficer shall request the full-time intervalbefore the preliminary hearing in order thatproof of the prior conviction may be obtained.

Notification to Latent Print Section. When acomplaint is being requested and a priorconviction is alleged, the investigating officershall notify the Latent Print Section, ScientificInvestigation Division. When practical, thearrestee shall be brought to the Latent PrintSection for fingerprint comparisons.

720.70 FELONY VICE COMPLAINTS.Felony vice complaints, except for forcible 286and 288a P.C., shall be obtained as follows:

Metropolitan Area. Vice Division shall beresponsible for obtaining felony vicecomplaints in the metropolitan area (2/490.45).

Exception: The vice unit of the Area makingthe arrest shall be responsible for obtaining thecomplaint for violations of 266 through 266iP.C.

Outlying Area. The vice unit of the Areamaking the arrest shall be responsible forobtaining felony vice complaints.

Forcible 286 and 288a P.C. In cases offorcible 286 and 288(a) P.C., the detectivedivision in the Area of occurrence shall beresponsible for obtaining the complaint.

720.75 MISDEMEANOR VICECOMPLAINTS. Misdemeanor vicecomplaints against arrestees shall be obtainedas follows:

Metropolitan Area. Los Angeles CityAttorney’s Liaison Unit, Detective SupportDivision, shall be responsible for obtainingmisdemeanor vice complaints against arresteesbooked in the metropolitan area, includingfemale arrestees booked at Los AngelesCounty Jail.

Valley Area. The Complaint Detail, ValleyCourt Liaison Section, shall be responsible forobtaining misdemeanor vice complaints againstall arrestees booked within Operations-ValleyBureau (2/530.05).

West Los Angeles and Pacific Areas. WestLos Angeles Court Liaison Section shall beresponsible for obtaining misdemeanor vicecomplaints against arrestees booked at ValleyJail Section but arrested in Pacific or West LosAngeles Areas.

Harbor Area. Harbor Area shall beresponsible for obtaining misdemeanor vicecomplaints against all arrestees booked in



Harbor Area, including females arrested in77th Street Area and booked at HarborDivision Jail.

Complaint Against Person Not in Custody.The vice unit of the Area of occurrence shallbe responsible for obtaining the misdemeanorvice complaint against a suspect, not incustody, who is named in a misdemeanor vicecrime report or application for a complaint.

720.78 VICE COMPLAINTS-INVESTIGATIONS CONDUCTED BYVICE DIVISION. Vice Division shall beresponsible for the follow-up investigation,including obtaining the complaint, regardlessof geographic Area boundaries, when theyinitiate a crime report, initiate an investigation,or conduct the follow-up investigation at therequest of another Area.

720.79 ABATEMENT ANDCONDITIONAL USE PERMIT REVIEWPROCESS.

Abatement Process. Abatement is a generalterm used to describe an action(s) taken by theOffice of the City Attorney to control acommercial or non-commercial location whichis a public nuisance. In that process, generalnuisance is defined as a significant problemwhich adversely affects the quality of life for aneighborhood(s) within the City of LosAngeles. Generally, the purpose of anabatement is to correct the problem causing thenuisance through a variety of means such asobtaining voluntary compliance, obtaining aninjunction which prohibits the nuisance activityfrom occurring, or as a last resort, seizing alocation.

Conditional Use Permit Process. TheDepartment of City Planning initially issues aConditional Use Permit (CUP) to a business orcommercial location specified under Section12.24 of the Los Angeles Municipal Code(LAMC) to prevent any public nuisance fromoccurring. Generally, businesses required toobtain a CUP include pawn shops, motels,recycling centers, certain adult entertainmentlocations, and businesses which sell alcoholicbeverages.

When a CUP is being initiated, the Departmentof City Planning advises the concerned Areacommanding officer that a CUP hearing will beconducted. The Area commanding officer shalldetermine if the business in question mayadversely affect the community and ifDepartment attendance at the hearing isrequired. If attendance is required at thehearing, the Area commanding officer shallensure the appropriate personnel appear andprovide testimony to assist the Department ofCity Planning in its decision to issue or denythe permit. Information such as a ConsolidatedCrime Analysis Database (CCAD) report withsupporting documentation, crime statistics,Vice investigations, calls for services at thelocation, and/or community concerns may besubmitted to support his/her testimony.

In providing a Department response, acommanding officer may also suggestconditions for the initial CUP. Generally, thesesuggested conditions shall conform withconditions established by the CommandingOfficer, Vice Division, who is theDepartment’s CUP Coordinator. Should aparticular location require an extraordinarycondition(s), prior approval shall be obtainedfrom the Commanding Officer, Vice Division.

Conditional Use Permit Review AndNuisance Abatement Revocation Action. TheDepartment of City Planning, through itsOffice of Zoning Administration, has theauthority to review an existing CUP containingpreventative “conditions” on a regulatedbusiness. The Department of City Planningmay also revoke an existing CUP, require aformerly unregulated business to obtain a CUP,or impose corrective conditions on an existingCUP when a business is causing an ongoingpublic nuisance. The primary purpose of aCUP review is to prevent or eradicateactivity from creating a nuisance, ratherthan closing the subject location. In theinstance where a nuisance location does notfall under Section 12.24 of the LAMC, theDepartment of City Planning, Office of ZoningAdministration, may initiate a nuisanceabatement revocation action against theproperty.

Note: When a modification or revocation isrequired for a preexisting CUP or when a CUPdoes not exist, but a nuisance abatementrevocation action is appropriate, employeesshall follow the approval process andprocedure delineated in the remainder of thisSection. However, the procedure delineated inthe remainder of this Section does not apply tothe initial CUP issuance process.

Initial/Preliminary Public NuisanceDetermination. Department personnel whobecome aware of a public nuisance locationshall bring it to the attention of an immediatesupervisor. That supervisor shall ensure that aCitywide Nuisance Abatement ProblemProperty Referral, Form 3.19.1, is completedand forwarded to the Area commanding officerresponsible for the location. The Areacommanding officer shall evaluate the situationand determine if the location requires theinitiation of a preliminary investigation basedupon the following criteria:

∗ The location is an ongoing problem;∗ The owner/lessee is aware of the problem

and is unable or unwilling to cooperate insolving the problem; and,

∗ Standard law enforcement efforts haveproven to be unsuccessful in solving theproblem.

Preliminary Investigative Entity. When theArea commanding officer determines that alocation meets the criteria for a preliminaryinvestigation, the investigating officer shallcomplete an Abatement Package consisting ofthe original Form 3.19.1, and a historicalprofile of the nuisance location. The historical

profile shall include:

∗ Written documentation such as complaintsfrom the community, elected officials, orother enforcement agencies, and anyprevious correspondence with theowner/lessee of the nuisance location;

∗ Consolidated Crime Analysis Database(CCAD) Report for the preceding twoyears;

Note: The investigating officers shall workwith Narcotics Division for abatements or ViceDivision for CUPs or nuisance abatementrevocations to determine the scope of theCCAD run. In most cases, it must be limited tothe exact location. However, in somecircumstances, a larger area such as the wholeblock may be more appropriate.

∗ A copy of any crime, arrest, or other policereports within a minimum of the twopreceding years that reflect the relationshipbetween the location and the ongoingnuisance activity;

∗ A report from the Project Unit,Communications Division, documenting thenumber and type of calls for service thathave occurred at the location for the pasttwo years. The request for this report shallbe made on an IntradepartmentalCorrespondence, Form 15.2;

∗ Any additional pertinent documentationsuch as a Sergeant’s Daily Report, Form15.48, which will assist in the reviewprocess; and,

Note: Any information on a Sergeant’sDaily Report, Form 15.48, which isunrelated to the location, shall be redactedfrom the copy placed in the package.

If the location is a business or commerciallocation, also obtain the following:

∗ Certificate of Occupancy for thelocation; and,

∗ Conditional Use Permit/variance, if oneexists;

∗ Submit the Citywide Nuisance AbatementProgram Property Referral with supportingdocumentation via the chain of command tothe Commanding Officer, Area DetectiveDivision, for review, completeness, andaccuracy.

Area Commanding Officer Responsibility.

Preliminary Investigation. Upon receivingthe preliminary investigation, the concernedArea commanding officer shall review thepackage for completeness and accuracy. If it isdetermined that the matter should be pursuedfurther, the Area commanding officer shall:

∗ Include any additional pertinentdocumentation such as a Sergeant’s DailyReport, Form 15.48, which will assist in thereview process.

∗ Retain a copy of the Form 3.19.1, and thehistorical package at the Area vice unit.

Approved Abatement Package. After



receiving the approved abatement packagefrom the Bureau Abatement Coordinator(BAC), the Area commanding officer shall:

∗ Ensure that the investigating officerconducts a thorough investigation into theabatement, Conditional Use Permit review,or nuisance abatement revocation reviewprocess;

∗ Ensure that the investigating officercompletes a 90-day follow-up and closeoutusing Form 3.19.1, and that copies areforwarded to the BAC; and,

∗ Ensure that a Department representativeattends all relevant hearing(s).

Bureau Abatement CoordinatorResponsibility. Upon receipt of the abatementpackage from the Area commanding officer,the BAC shall review the package for accuracyand content ensuring that the requireddocuments are included and the elementsnecessary to initiate an abatement have beencompleted. If the package is complete and therequired elements have been met, the BACshall forward the abatement package to thefollowing entities in the following sequence:

∗ The Citywide Nuisance Abatement Program(CNAP) Administrative Coordinator toobtain a CNAP Control Number;

∗ The Commanding Officer, Vice Division ,for abatements involving vice nuisances, orthe Commanding Officer, FieldEnforcement Section (FES), NarcoticsDivision (ND), for abatements involvingnarcotic nuisances; and,

∗ The Director of the Citywide NuisanceAbatement Program (CNAP), who willmake the final recommendation whether toapprove, reject or refer the package toanother agency for further investigation.

After approval or denial of the request, theBAC shall return the package to the Areacommanding officer.

Additionally, the BAC shall:

∗ Forward a copy of the Form 3.19.1, to theDepartment Abatement Coordinator,Commanding Officer, Vice Division ; and,

∗ Maintain a file of all ongoing abatementsaffecting the bureau.

Nuisance Abatement and Conditional UsePermit Coordinator Responsibility. TheCommanding Officer, Vice Division, is theDepartment Nuisance Abatement/CUPCoordinator and shall:

∗ Monitor all requests for nuisance or narcoticabatements; and,

Note: This is accomplished when BACsforward copies of Forms 3.19.1, with CNAPControl Numbers to the Commanding Officer,Vice Division.

∗ Maintain copies of Forms 3.19.1, with aCNAP Control Number for abatementsinitiated by the Narcotics Abatement Unitand Vice Division.

Citywide Nuisance Abatement Program,Narcotic Division’s Responsibility. TheCitywide Nuisance Abatement Unit, NarcoticDivision, shall:

∗ Advise and train Department employees onnarcotics abatements;

∗ When specific expertise is required for anabatement, assume responsibility for theinvestigation; and,

∗ Forward copies of all Forms 3.19.1, initiatedby Narcotics Division to the CommandingOfficer, Vice Division and a copy to theapplicable BAC.

Commanding Officer, Field EnforcementSection, Narcotics Division Responsibility.The Commanding Officer, FES, ND, isresponsible for approving and disapprovingrequests for a formal narcotic abatement andshall:

∗ For a disapproval, sign and return theabatement package to the Area commandingofficer via the BAC, indicating the reason(s)for the disapproval; or,

∗ For an approval, sign and return theabatement package to the Area commandingofficer via the BAC.

Commanding Officer, Vice Division’s,Responsibility. The Commanding Officer,Vice Division, is responsible for approving anddisapproving requests for a formal abatementor Conditional Use Permit review process andshall:

∗ For a disapproval, sign and return theabatement package to the Area commandingofficer via the BAC, indicating the reason(s)for the disapproval; or,

∗ For an approval, sign and return theabatement package to the Area commandingofficer via the BAC.

Vice Division Responsibility. The CommunityProblems Unit, Vice Division, shall:

∗ Advise and train Department employees andbusiness groups on CUP reviews andnuisance abatements;

∗ When specific expertise is required for anabatement, assume responsibility for theinvestigation; and,

∗ Forward copies of all Forms 3.19.1, initiatedby Vice Division to the CommandingOfficer, Department Abatement andConditional Use Permit Coordinator, and acopy to the applicable BAC.

Note: Vice Division shall be exempt fromforwarding abatement packages initiated by theunit to the BAC.

Vice Investigations that Result in AbatementAction. When a vice condition reported on aVice Report, Form 3.18, results in the initiationof an abatement proceeding, the investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Using the follow-up format (Form 3.18),close the case using the “Other”justification category, and ensure the

“Reason for Continuance” heading indicatesthe case is “Closed Pending Abatement”;

∗ Complete a follow-up Form 3.18 eachquarter (from the date of the initialproceeding) and summarize the status of theabatement proceedings for that period untilthe case has concluded; and,

∗ Upon the conclusion of the abatementproceedings, complete a closeout 3.18report (follow-up), summarizing the finalresults of the abatement.

720.80 COMPLAINT ISSUED AGAINSTARMED FORCES PERSONNEL-NOTIFICATION. When a complaint hasbeen issued against a member of the ArmedForces, the concerned investigating officershall make a telephonic notification to theDepartment Command Post, CommunicationsDivision. This notification shall include thecharge, date of trial, and the court divisionwhere the trial or hearing is to be held.

722. COMPLAINT OFFICER-CITYATTORNEY'S OFFICE.722.10 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'SDUTIES-GENERAL PROVISIONS.Investigating officers assigned to divisions inthe metropolitan area may use the services ofthe complaint officer for processingmisdemeanor complaints, obtaining warrants,and directing detention officers to record therelease felony charges and the placing ofmisdemeanor charges. Investigating officersshall:

∗ Present the case to the City Attorney in theusual manner; and,

∗ After the City Attorney indicates that acomplaint will be issued, complete theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10,releasing the felony charge and placing themisdemeanor charge (4/646.10). Leave onecopy of the Form 5.10 with the ChiefComplaint Deputy for use by the complaintofficer.

Suspect in Custody Not Due for Release.Investigating officers shall use the services ofthe complaint officer when the suspect is notdue for release at a time when court is insession on the day the complaint is sought.

Suspect in Custody Due for Release.Investigating officers shall not use the servicesof the complaint officer when the suspect isdue for release at a time when court is insession on the day the complaint is sought.Investigating officers shall be responsible forobtaining the complaint, the warrant andarraigning the suspect.

Suspect Free on Fixed Bail Release. When aninvestigating officer seeks a misdemeanorcomplaint against a suspect who is free on afixed bail release, he/she shall:

∗ Present the case to the City Attorney in theusual manner;

∗ After determining that a complaint will beissued, leave the Arraignment Information,Form 5.17, with the complaint officer; and,



∗ If the suspect has been directed to appear ata branch court, the investigating officershall deliver the arraignment informationform to the concerned court.

Misdemeanor Complaint and WarrantSought on a Suspect Not in Custody. Whenan investigating officer seeks a misdemeanorcomplaint and warrant on a suspect who is notin custody, he/she shall present the case to theCity Attorney in the usual manner. If thecomplaint is issued, leave the complaint withthe complaint officer for further processing.

Note: When an investigating officerdetermines that the misdemeanor warrantshould be certified for service between 2200hours and 0600 hours, a statement requestingthe certification and a statement which showsgood cause for the certification shall beincluded in the reports presented to the CityAttorney.

722.20 COMPLAINT OFFICER - DUTIES.The complaint officer shall deliver thecomplaints signed by the City Attorney to thewarrant clerk in Division 80 of the MunicipalCourt, sign and swear to the complaints as thecomplaining officer, and, if necessary, obtainwarrants.

Suspect in Custody at Jail Division. If thesuspect is in custody, the complaint officershall deliver the Investigator's Final Report,Form 5.10, and/or the warrant to MetropolitanJail Section, 77th Street Jail Section, ValleyJail Section, or Operational Jail Section forcompletion of the Supplemental ChargeRecord, Form 5.8, by the custodial detentionofficer.

Suspect in Custody in Division Jail orCounty Jail System. If the suspect is incustody in a divisional jail or the County JailSystem, the complaint officer shall:

∗ Deliver the Investigator's Final Report,Form 5.10, and/or the warrant, to the releasedesk at Metropolitan Jail Section; and,

∗ Cause a Felony Release and SupplementalCharge Teletype (4/165.26) to be sent to thecustodial detention officer.

Misdemeanor Complaint Sought on aFelony Suspect Free on Fixed Bail Release.The complaint officer shall:

∗ Deliver the complaint and the Arraignmentinformation, Form 5.17, to the clerk inDivision 80.

Exception: If the suspect has been directed toappear at a branch court, it shall be theinvestigating officer's responsibility to deliverthe Arraignment Information, Form 5.17, to theconcerned court.

Misdemeanor Complaint and WarrantSought on a Suspect Not in Custody. Whena misdemeanor complaint or warrant is soughton a suspect not in custody, the complaintofficer shall deliver the complaint to theappropriate filing deputy from the CityAttorney's Office.

725. ARREST WARRANTS.725.04 LOCAL WARRANT-DEFINED.A local warrant is a warrant issued by a courthaving jurisdiction of criminal matters arisingwithin the City of Los Angeles.

725.05 IN-COUNTY WARRANT-DEFINED. An in-county warrant is a warrantissued by a court having jurisdiction overmatters arising within the County of LosAngeles.

725.06 FOREIGN WARRANT-DEFINED. A foreign-warrant is a warrantobtained by an agency other than thisDepartment.

725.07 RETAINABLE OFFENSE-DEFINED. A retainable offense is an offenserecordable on the arrestee's criminal historyrecord (rap sheet) by the Department ofJustice.

725.08 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY. An investigating officersecuring any type of warrant on a suspect shallindicate on the face of the warrant "PossiblyArmed" or "Combative" when the suspect hasa prior history of being armed or combativetoward the police.

Investigating officers who become aware thata person against whom a criminal complainthas been filed or an indictment returned is incustody outside of Los Angeles County, or infederal custody, shall:

∗ Obtain a certified copy of the arrestwarrants from the Watch Commander,Records and Identification Division;

∗ Mail the certified copy of the arrest warrantto the person in charge of the detentionfacility where the defendant is in custody;and,

∗ If no warrant is on file, attempt to obtain awarrant through established procedures and,if issued, mail a certified copy to theappropriate detention facility.

Questions regarding extradition ofout-of-county or federal prisoners shall beresolved by the Office of the District Attorney,Extradition Services Section.

725.09 DUE DILIGENCE-INVESTIGATIVE RESPONSIBILITY.When a felony arrest warrant is obtained,Fugitive Warrant Section (FWS), DetectiveSupport Division, shall be responsible formaking a systematic, continuing effort toapprehend the suspect. Fugitive WarrantSection shall be responsible for the duediligence of narcotic warrants and thosewarrants obtained by area detective divisioninvestigators, with the exception of homicideand juvenile warrants. If area detective divisioninvestigators or investigating officers assignedto other Department entities wish to maintainresponsibility for a warrant, they shall contactthe Officer in Charge, FWS, and advise ofsuch. This will prevent duplication of effortsand ensure officer safety. The officer

attempting service of the warrant shall beresponsible for updating CWS on those duediligence efforts.

Note: The following Department entities areresponsible for the due diligence and service ofthe warrants they generate:

∗ Traffic divisions;∗ Detective Support Division;∗ Commercial Crimes Division;∗ Robbery-Homicide Division;∗ Special Operations Support Division;∗ Juvenile Division;∗ Internal Affairs Group;∗ Vice Division;∗ Major Crimes Division; and,∗ Arson Unit of the Los Angeles Fire

Department.

Investigating officers assigned theresponsibility of a particular case shall notrelinquish responsibility for the investigationof that case. However, such investigatingofficers will not have the primaryresponsibility for the service of the warrant.The investigating officer who obtains a felonywarrant shall be responsible for generating thefelony warrant package.

Exception: Fugitive Warrant Section shall beresponsible for generating warrant packagesand maintaining a felony warrant package filefor all adult felony narcotic warrant suspects.

Note: The fact that FWS is responsible for theprimary exercise of due diligence efforts doesnot relieve other Department officers fromtheir duty to arrest warrant suspects as soon aspossible.

Due Diligence Coordinator. Due Diligencecoordinators shall ensure that 980 PC isadhered to (4/728.16).

725.10 REGISTERING WARRANTS. Forthe purpose of this section, "registeringwarrants" is defined as the forwarding ofwarrant information to the Warrant Section,Records and Identification Division, for inputinto the Countywide Warrant System,regardless of the method of transmittal.

Exception: Probable Cause Arrest Warrantsshall not be registered with Records andIdentification Division (4/725.12).

Registering Felony Warrants. When asuspect is not in custody at the time a felonywarrant is issued for his/her arrest, the warrantshall be registered with the Warrant Section,Records and Identification Division, no laterthan the end of the working day during whichthe warrant was issued. When registeringwarrants and the method of transmittal is otherthan delivery of the original warrant itself, theconcerned officer shall ensure that the originalwarrant is delivered to the Warrant Section,Records and Identification Division, as soon aspracticable, but no later than eight hours fromthe time the warrant was registered. Thewarrant shall be registered by:



∗ The concerned investigating officer, when:

∗ He/she processes the warrant through theDistrict Attorney's Office;

∗ He/she receives a felony bench warrantdirectly from a Los Angeles JudicialDistrict preliminary court; and,

∗ A felony warrant is issued and noLiaison Officer is assigned to the issuingcourt.

∗ The Liaison Officer, Detective SupportDivision assigned to the District Attorney'sOffice, when the Liaison Officer processesa felony warrant through the DistrictAttorney's Office;

∗ The Liaison Officer, Detective SupportDivision assigned to Division 30, when afelony bench warrant is issued by a LosAngeles Judicial District preliminary courtin the metropolitan area and the benchwarrant is delivered to the Liaison Officer;and,

Note: The Liaison Officer in Division 30 shallnotify the investigating officer of the issuanceof a felony bench warrant by ensuring that aWarrant Notice-Suspect Description, Form8.48, is prepared and forwarded to theinvestigating officer.

∗ The Vice Division Liaison Officer assignedto the District Attorney's Office, when theLiaison Officer processes a felony warrantthrough the District Attorney's Office.

Additional Information Needed WhenRegistering Felony Warrants. When a felonywarrant is registered, the Warrant Section,Records and Identification Division, shall befurnished with the following information:

∗ All available pertinent identificationnumbers, such as the Department's LAnumber, Criminal Information andIdentification number, Federal Bureau ofInvestigation number, and the subject'ssocial security number;

∗ DR number of the crime report;∗ Concerned investigating officer's name,

serial number, and unit of assignment;∗ Physical description of the subject,

including his/her date of birth, or, operator'slicense number; and,

Note: The computer will only accept thewarrant information if all the following data isprovided:

∗ Name.∗ Sex.∗ Descent.∗ Date of birth or operator's license

number.

∗ AKA of subject, if available.

Registering Misdemeanor Warrants.Misdemeanor warrants are automaticallyregistered with the Warrant Section, Recordsand Identification Division, by the clerk of theconcerned misdemeanor court. Investigatingofficers who wish to be notified of the service

of a misdemeanor warrant shall request thecourt clerk to include on the warrant theirname, serial number, unit of assignment, and arequest to be notified.

725.12 PROBABLE CAUSE ARRESTWARRANT (see also Section 4/742.10).Obtaining. In the absence of exigentcircumstances, an officer desiring to enter aresidence to arrest an adult felony suspect or ajuvenile for either a felony or misdemeanoroffense, shall check the Countywide WarrantSystem (CWS) to determine if an existingwarrant may be used. If no such warrant exists,he shall contact the concerned investigatingofficer, or investigative supervisor. Whenconcerned investigative personnel areunavailable, the officer shall contact his/herimmediate supervisor for direction.

If circumstances necessitate obtaining aProbable Cause Arrest Warrant, the concernedinvestigating officer or an officer designatedby a supervisor, shall:

∗ If the suspect is an adult, complete one copyof the Probable Cause Arrest Warrant andAffidavit (Adult), Form 8.96;

∗ If the suspect is a juvenile, complete onecopy of the Probable Cause Arrest Warrantand Affidavit (Juvenile), Form 8.97;

∗ Attach a copy of each related report; e.g.crime report, property report, narcotics buynote. Specify the total number of pagesattached in the space provided on theaffidavit;

Note: Additional probable cause, expertise,and/or confidential information notdocumented in crime and follow-up reportsmay be stated on a Continuation Sheet, Form15.9, or a Search Warrant AffidavitContinuation Sheet, District Attorney FormDA 394A.

∗ During other than normal working hours,obtain the name and telephone number ofthe on-call magistrate from the on-calldeputy district attorney; and,

Note: Although the deputy is available foradvice, it is not necessary to obtain thedeputy's approval.

∗ Sign the affidavit in the presence of themagistrate who issues the warrant.

Arresting officers need NOT have a warrant intheir possession at the time of arrest (842 PC).

If an arrest is made pursuant to a ProbableCause Arrest Warrant by an officer, theoriginal warrant and affidavit shall beforwarded to the concerned investigatingofficer with copies of the arrest report. Theconcerned investigating officer shall retain theoriginal warrant and affidavit form in theDetective's Case Envelope, Form 15.15, orMurder Book.

If no arrest is made pursuant to the warrant, theoriginal warrant and affidavit shall beforwarded to the concerned investigating

officer with copies of the crime report. Theconcerned investigating officer shall retain theoriginal warrant and affidavit forms in thework folder or Murder Book for reference.

Booking and Arraignment.

∗ The words "P/C WARR" shall be entered inthe Warrant No. portion of the booking slipor on the arrest report in the case of ajuvenile who is not booked;

∗ The procedure for filing formal charges, andthe time limit for arraignment, is the sameas for felons arrested without a warrant;and,

Note: If a formal charge is not sought orobtained, a person arrested on a ProbableCause Arrest Warrant may be releasedpursuant to the authority-to-release clause ofthe warrant.

∗ Adult arrestees shall be transported forarraignment only at the direction of theconcerned investigating officer.

Warrant Not Served. A Probable CauseArrest Warrant shall not be registered withRecords and Identification Division.

If the suspect is not apprehended prior to endof watch, the officer who obtained the warrantshall telephonically register the warrant withthe Administrative Unit, Detective SupportDivision (DSD), and shall forward a copy ofthe warrant to DSD.

Exception. An investigative supervisor maydirect that the warrant not be registered orforwarded to DSD. DSD shall retain a copy ofany registered Probable Cause Arrest Warrantuntil expiration.

An officer desiring to serve a warrant whichhas been registered with DSD shall firstcontact DSD to ensure that it is still valid. Ifthe warrant is served, the officer shall promptlynotify DSD.

Posting Bail. If an adult arrestee posts the bailprovided for on the warrant, the releasingemployee shall cite the arrestee to appear incourt as determined from the Court Schedulefor Bail-Outs.

Action Taken on Warrant. The concernedinvestigating officer shall retain the warrantand affidavit, and shall promptly notify DSDof any change in status of the warrant. Thenotification may include specific informationor instructions; e.g., "suspect armed anddangerous" or "contact investigator prior toserving."

Detention of Juveniles. Juveniles arrestedpursuant to a probable cause arrest warrantshall be detained under the same criteria asestablished in Manual Section 4/218.64.

Case Disposition-Juveniles. In processingjuveniles arrested pursuant to a probable causearrest warrant, investigating officers shall makea final case disposition in accordance withChapter Seven of the Manual of Juvenile



Procedures, e.g., petition request, counselrelease (C/R), action suspended, referral,exonerated, insufficient evidence.

725.20 RESPONSIBILITY FORSERVICE OF WARRANTS.California Adult Misdemeanor Warrants.Fugitive Warrant Section (FWS), DetectiveSupport Division, shall be responsible forensuring that a systematic continuing effort isexpended to apprehend California adulthigh-grade misdemeanor warrant suspects.

Local Felony Warrants. Fugitive WarrantSection shall have primary responsibility forthe service of adult felony warrants (4/725.09).

Felony Bench Warrants. Fugitive WarrantSection shall have primary responsibility forthe service of felony bench warrants issued ina superior court as a result of an LAPD case.

The following Department entities areresponsible for the due diligence and service ofthe warrants they generate:

∗ Traffic divisions;∗ Detective Support Division;∗ Commercial Crimes Division;∗ Robbery – Homicide Division;∗ Special Operations Support Division;∗ Juvenile Division;∗ Internal Affairs Group;∗ Vice Division;∗ Major Crimes Division; and,∗ Arson Unit of the Los Angeles Fire

Department.

Foreign Felony and Out-of-StateMisdemeanor Warrants. Fugitive WarrantSection shall have primary responsibility forthe service of foreign adult felony andout-of-state adult misdemeanor warrants.

Note: Fugitive Warrant Section shallacknowledge receipt of a warrant to therequesting agency within 10 days of receipt ofcorrespondence regarding wanted persons.

725.30 SIGNING OUT WARRANTS. Anofficer shall not sign out a warrant unlesshe/she has the suspect in custody and intendsto book the person on the warrant.

725.40 ARREST ON WARRANTS-SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS. When an arrestis made on a foreign felony want or warrant, oron an out-of-state misdemeanor warrant, theFugitive Warrants Section, Detective SupportDivision, shall be responsible for completingthe Form 5.10.

Exception: The arresting officer shall beresponsible for completing the ReleaseInformation section of the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10, when an arrest made onany of the following constitutes a felonycharge:

∗ Violation of California State parole underauthority of 3056 P.C. or 3151 WIC;

∗ Violation of probation bench warrant heldby the Los Angeles County Sheriff'sDepartment; and,

∗ "Failure to Appear" bench warrant held bythe Los Angeles County Sheriff'sDepartment.

Upon completion, the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10 shall be delivered to therecord clerk, Area of booking.

Note: If any of the above violations constitutea misdemeanor charge only, the Form 5.10 isunnecessary.

The original of the Form 5.10 shall be given tothe record clerk, Area of booking, who shallimmediately forward it to the Data Control andCoding Section, Information TechnologyDivision. One copy of the Form 5.10 shall beattached to the prisoner's custody record; andthe other copy shall be forwarded to theFugitive Warrants Section, Detective SupportDivision.

725.48 ARREST REPORTS-ARRESTSON WARRANTS.Felony Warrants and Felony Wants. Anarrest made on a felony warrant, or oninformation that a suspect is wanted for afelony by a foreign jurisdiction shall bereported on the Arrest Report, Form 5.2.

Exception: When a person booked on amisdemeanor or felony charge is additionallycharged with a felony warrant, no additionalArrest Report, Form 5.2, shall be completed.

Misdemeanor Warrants. Misdemeanorwarrant arrests shall be reported on an ArrestReport, Form 5.2, or an RFC Report, Form5.2.2, when:

∗ The warrant is an out-of-state misdemeanorwarrant and a local warrant has beenobtained authorizing the arrest for theout-of-state warrant;

∗ The charge is 314(1) P.C. (IndecentExposure), 647(a) P.C. (Annoying orMolesting Children), or 653(g) P.C.(Loitering About Schools or Other PlacesAttended by Children);

∗ The charge is 272 P.C. (Contributing to theDelinquency of a Minor);

∗ 470, 470(a), 470(b) P.C. (Forgery);∗ 475, 475(a) P.C. (Possession of Fraudulent

Checks);∗ 476a(a), 476(a)(b) P.C. (Insufficient Funds-

Checks);∗ 484(e), 484(f)(1), 484(f)(2), 484(g), 484(i)

P.C. (Forgeries and other misuses involvingcredit cards);

∗ 532, 532(a) P.C. (Procuring False CreditReport or Financial Statement);

∗ There are unusual or aggravatedcircumstances;

∗ It is not obvious that the arrestee is thesuspect identified on the warrant;

∗ The arrestee sustains an injury at the time ofarrest or subsequent to the arrest and priorto acceptance by the detention officer;

∗ The arrestee receives medical treatment foran old injury or for injuries sustained priorto and not incidental to the arrest; and,

∗ The arrestee is a member of the ArmedForces.

Exception: When a person, arrested for amarijuana offense, is eligible for release fromcustody (4/216.65), and is additionally chargedwith a misdemeanor warrant charging one ofthe above crimes, the arresting officer shall, inlieu of completing an Arrest Report, Form 5.2:

∗ Complete a Nontraffic Notice to Appear,Form 5.02.2, for the marijuana offense(4/216.65);

∗ Include the warrant number, charge, andissuing court in the narrative of the RFCReport;

∗ Write "Includes Misdemeanor Warrant for(e.g., 470 P.C.)" in the upper right marginof the RFC Report; and,

∗ Book the arrestee for the misdemeanorwarrant only.

When none of the above conditions apply,neither the Arrest Report, Form 5.2, nor theShort Arrest Report, Form 5.2.1, is required ona misdemeanor warrant arrest.

725.49 SERVICE OF FELONY ANDCALIFORNIA MISDEMEANOR ARRESTWARRANTS-PERSON IN-CUSTODY.Felony or Misdemeanor Arrestee-Prior toBooking. When a person arrested on amisdemeanor or felony charge is found, priorto booking, to be the subject of a felony orCalifornia misdemeanor warrant, the arrestingofficer shall book the person on both theoriginal charge and the warrant. The originalarrest and necessary information related to thewarrant shall be reported on the Arrest Report,Form 5.2.

The custodial detention officer shall initiate anArrest Disposition Report, Form 5.9, for eachin-county arrest warrant issued for a retainableoffense.

Note: Each Form 5.9 for an in-county warrantshall be attached to the Jail Custody Record,page 5 of the Los Angeles ConsolidatedBooking Form, Form 5.1, and shall accompanythe arrestee to court.

Exception: A Form 5.9 initiated for an arrestunder the authority of a Ramey Warrant shallbe processed with the Arrest Report.

Felony or Misdemeanor Arrestee-Booked.When a person already booked on amisdemeanor or felony charge is found to bethe subject of a felony or Californiamisdemeanor warrant, the Criminal RecordsSection, Records and Identification (R&I)Division, shall:

∗ Make a telephonic notification to thecustodial detention officer; and,

∗ Cause a warrant information teletype orteletype abstract of the warrant to be sent tothe detention officer.



The custodial detention officer, afterestablishing the arrestee's identification, shall:

∗ Complete a Supplemental Charge Record,Form 5.8, and include the System IDnumber in the "Additional Information"box; and,

∗ Initiate a Form 5.9 for each in-county arrestwarrant issued for a retainable offense. AForm 5.9 is not required for anout-of-county warrant arrest unless it is theprimary charge.

Note: Each Form 5.9 for an in-county warrantshall be attached to the Jail Custody Recordand shall accompany the arrestee to court.

Exception: A Form 5.9 initiated for an arrestunder the authority of a Ramey Warrant shallbe processed with the Arrest Report.

When the arrestee is the subject of a felonywarrant, the custodial detention officer shallalso:

∗ Cause a Supplemental Charge Teletype tobe sent to the Criminal Records Section,Records and Identification Division,without delay; and,

∗ Attach the warrant information teletype topage 5 (Jail Custody Record) of the originalLos Angeles Consolidated Booking Form,Form 5.1.

The arrestee shall not be arraigned on themisdemeanor charge prior to the completion ofthe felony investigation by the concernedinvestigating officer.

Note: When a felony charge against an arresteeis released and normal misdemeanortransportation cannot provide for arraignmentwithin the 48-hour time limit, the investigatingofficer responsible for the originalinvestigation shall ensure that the arrestee istransported for arraignment. The 48-hour timelimit shall begin at the time of the originalarrest.

725.50 SERVICE OF WANTS ANDWARRANTS - PERSON IN LOSANGELES COUNTY CUSTODY.Investigating Officer’s Responsibility. Whena prisoner in a Los Angeles County jail facilityis wanted by this Department on a felonywarrant, or is the subject of an additional filedor open charge, the concerned investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Determine the location and bookingnumber, then confirm the identity of theprisoner from the Warrants and DetainersSection, County Central Jail;

∗ Using the original booking number, ensurethe investigating (INV) format on theNetwork Communications System (NECS)is completed, including a WarrantInformation Sheet (WIS) is sent to theWarrants and Detainers Section, CountyCentral Jail;

Exception: If an investigating officer wishes toserve a prisoner on an open charge, the

investigating officer must physically respondto County Central Jail or the Twin TowersFacility.

Note: Investigating officers assigned toFugitive Warrant Section, Detective SupportDivision, need not respond physically to LosAngeles County Central Jail or the TwinTowers Facility to rebook prisoners in Countycustody for California Penal Code Section1551.1, Fugitive Arrest Without a Warrant.This booking may be accomplishedelectronically for this charge only.

∗ Ensure a teletype is sent to the Warrants andDetainers Section, County Central Jail,including all booking information;

∗ Via telephone, ensure the Warrants andDetainers Section received the teletype andWIS and that the prisoner was served withthe warrant or informed of the additionalcharges;

Note: When a prisoner is confined at a locationother than County Central Jail or the TwinTowers Facility, and the investigating officerwishes to physically serve the warrant(s) oropen charge, the investigating officer shallsend a teletype to the Watch Commander,Inmate Reception Center, requesting that theprisoner be immediately transferred to CountyCentral Jail or the Twin Towers Facility.Felony warrants and open charges shall beserved only at County Central Jail or TwinTowers Facility.

∗ Ensure that three Fingerprint Cards, FormFD 249, were completed on the newcharges and forwarded to Records andIdentification Division (R&I);

∗ Complete the Arrest Report, Form 5.02, andnarrative; and,

∗ Complete and deliver the following pages ofthe Consolidated Booking Form, Form 5.1to a clerk in the Records Unit of the Areawhere the reports are to be reproduced:

∗ Booking and Identification Record, Form5.01.2;

∗ Disposition of Arrest and Court Action,Form 5.09;

∗ Investigator's Final Report, Form 5.10;and,

∗ CII Arrest Notification, Form 5.01.2.

Note: If an arrest warrant is served orpreviously filed charges are being added,forward the Disposition of Arrest and CourtAction, Form 5.9, to the appropriatearraignment court through the Department mailsystem.

Investigating officers serving felony warrantsor preferring additional charges on a femaleprisoner in custody at the Twin Towers Facilityshall comply with the procedure applicable atCounty Central system.

Local Misdemeanor Warrants. Whennotified that there are outstanding localmisdemeanor warrants for a prisoner in theCounty Jail, the Warrant Section, Records andIdentification Division, shall:

∗ Obtain the prisoner’s booking number; and,∗ Forward a teletype of the Warrant

Information Sheet (WIS) of the warrant,including the prisoner’s booking number, tothe Warrants and Detainers Section, InmateReception Center, County Central Jail.

Foreign California Misdemeanor Warrant.When notified that there are outstandingforeign California misdemeanor warrants in thepossession of this Department for a person inthe County Jail System, the Warrant Section,Records and Identification Division, shall:

∗ Obtain the person's booking number;∗ Record the booking number on the top front

of the warrant and forward it to the WarrantDetainer Section, Inmate Reception Center,County Central Jail; and,

Note: If the person is due to be released, ateletype abstract of the warrant shall be sentimmediately to the same location, prior toforwarding the warrant.

∗ Immediately notify the agency from whichthe warrant was received that the person isin the County Jail and that the warrant hasbeen forwarded to the Sheriff's Departmentfor service.

Foreign Felony and Out-of-StateMisdemeanor Warrants. When it isascertained that a person arrested by thisDepartment has a foreign felony want orwarrant, or an out-of-state misdemeanorwarrant, notification shall be made to theFugitive Warrants Section, Detective SupportDivision, without delay (4/201.30).

Note: When the Fugitive Warrants Section isclosed, Detective Information Section,Detective Support Division shall be notified.

Suspect Released to LAPD-Not Booked.When an arrestee booked by another agency isreleased to LAPD custody and the arrestee isnot subsequently booked by this Department,the concerned investigating officer shall:

∗ Complete the left portion of Section A ofthe Form 5.9;

∗ Insert the original arresting agency'sbooking number and the CII, FBI, and LAnumber, if available, in the appropriatespaces; and,

∗ Insert "BOOKED BY (agency - agencytype) - RELEASED TO, NOT BOOKED,LAPD" in the remarks section.

The investigating officer shall forward theForm 5.9 to the Records Services Section,Records and Identification Division.

725.51 SERVICE OF CALIFORNIAMISDEMEANOR WARRANTS-PERSONREMANDED TO THE CUSTODY OF THESHERIFF.Felony Prisoners. When an investigatingofficer transports a felony prisoner to court forarraignment, he or she shall furnish the officerof this Department assigned to the arraigningcourt with the outstanding warrants or a



teletype abstract of each outstanding warrantagainst the prisoner. When such prisoner isremanded to the custody of the Sheriff, theofficer assigned to the arraigning court shalldeliver the warrants of the prisoner.

Note: When no officer of this Department isassigned to the arraigning court, the concernedinvestigating officer shall be responsible fordelivering the warrants or teletype abstracts tothe deputy sheriff taking custody of theprisoner.

Misdemeanor Prisoners. When a prisoner forwhom there are additional misdemeanorwarrant charges is remanded to the custody ofthe Sheriff, the officer of this Departmentassigned to the arraigning court shall presentthe warrants or teletype abstracts of thewarrants to the deputy sheriff taking custody ofthe prisoner.

Note: Jail Division records relating to theadditional misdemeanor charges shall becleared by indicating that such charges havebeen forwarded to the Sheriff's Department.

725.52 BOOKING OF PRISONERSRELEASED BY THE SHERIFF. When aSheriff's prisoner wanted by this Department isavailable for release to this Department, theofficer responsible for investigation of the caseshall, without delay, obtain custody of theprisoner and book him or her in a jail of theCity Jail System.

725.54 SERVICE OF LOCALMISDEMEANOR WARRANT-PERSON INCUSTODY IN ANOTHER CITY. The watchcommander of the concerned patrol divisionshall arrange transportation and bookingaccording to the following assignments, whenpersons arrested are at the County Jail or innearby cities on Los Angeles warrants and areto be released to this Department:

Central Area-County Jail.

Foothill Area-San Fernando.

Harbor Area-Long Beach, Palos Verdes, SignalHill and Torrance.

Hollenbeck Area-Alhambra, El Monte,Montebello, Monterey Park, San Gabriel, SanMarino and Whittier.

Newton Street Area-Maywood and Vernon.

Northeast Area-Arcadia, Glendale, Pasadena,Sierra Madre and South Pasadena.

North Hollywood Area-Burbank.

Pacific Area-El Segundo, Hawthorne, HermosaBeach, Manhattan Beach and Redondo Beach.

77th Street Area-Bell, Bell Gardens, Downey,Huntington Park, South Gate and Inglewood.

Southeast Area-Compton and Gardena.

West Los Angeles Area-Beverly Hills, CulverCity and Santa Monica.

Officers shall obtain either the warrant orwarrant information teletype upon arrival at theother city.

Arranging transportation and booking from allother cities in California shall be theresponsibility of Fugitive Warrants Section,Detective Support Division.

725.55 SERVICE OF OUT-OF-STATEMISDEMEANOR WARRANTS ANDFOREIGN FELONY WARRANTS. Whenpersons are arrested on foreign felony wants orwarrants and out-of-state misdemeanorwarrants, the arresting officer shall, prior toobtaining booking advice, notify the FugitiveWarrants Section, Detective Support Division,which shall handle notifications andcorrespondence and obtain necessary courtorders and complaints.

Note: When the Fugitive Warrants Section isclosed, Detective Information Section,Detective Support Division shall be notified.

725.56 WARRANT ARRESTS ONMILITARY PREMISES. Permission shall beobtained from the commanding officer of theconcerned ship or station before making awarrant arrest on a member of the ArmedForces while on military premises.

The commanding officer may require a signedagreement from the arresting officers that theservice person will be returned to militaryjurisdiction in the event he is acquitted orotherwise released. When such an agreement issigned, the officers shall deliver a copy to theLiaison Officer, Detective Support Division. Ifthe service person is subsequently released oracquitted, the commanding officer of thedivision serving the warrant shall carry out theterms of the agreement.

725.57 FELONY WARRANT ARRESTMADE OUTSIDE THE COUNTY OFISSUANCE.

Officer’s Responsibility. Officers who arresta bailable felony warrant defendant outside thecounty of issuance, but within the State ofCalifornia, shall complete a Compliance withSection 821 of the California Penal Code,Form 8.48.01. The arresting officer shallinform the defendant of his option to have abail hearing in the county of arrest or in thecounty the warrant was issued. After obtainingthe defendant’s signature, the officer shall signand date the form. If the defendant refuses tosign, the word “refused” shall be written in thespace provided for the defendant’s signature.The form shall be included as a page in theArrest Report.

Note: This procedure does not apply to no-bailwarrants, and shall apply to an arrestee who isbooked on a felony warrant only, with no opencharges.

Jail Division-Employee’s Responsibility. Thefollowing procedures shall only apply toarrestees booked for warrants that were issuedwithin the State of California, but outside the

County of Los Angeles. When a Jail Divisionemployee receives an arrestee to be booked foran out-of-county felony warrant, with theexception of no-bail warrants, the Jail Divisionemployee shall follow normal bookingprocedures, and:

∗ Ensure the Form 8.48.01 is complete;∗ Ensure a transfer to the appropriate court is

completed should the arrestee desire to gobefore a magistrate within Los AngelesCounty; and,

∗ Notify the county that issued the warrant topick up the arrestee, if the arrestee waivesthe right to go before a magistrate in LosAngeles County.

Note: If the agency holding the warrantcontracts with the Los Angeles Sheriff’sDepartment for transportation, the arresteeshall be transferred to Sheriff’s custody andtransported by the Sheriff’s Department. Allother agencies shall take custody of thearrestee within five days, or five court days ifthe law enforcement agency requesting arrestis more than 400 miles away, otherwise theagency shall be notified and the arrestee shallbe released.

725.70 REQUESTING WARRANT FORPERSON RELEASED ON WRIT OFHABEAS CORPUS.Outlying Divisions. Officers in the outlyingdivisions who request a warrant on an arresteereleased on a Writ of Habeas Corpus shallrequest an original and two copies of thewarrant from the court clerk. The two copies ofthe warrant shall be sent, without delay, to theCity Attorney's Writs Department, viaDepartment mail.

725.72 WARRANT OBTAINED FORPERSON RELEASED ON WRIT OFHABEAS CORPUS. When a warrant has beenobtained for an arrestee released on a Writ ofHabeas Corpus, the officer responsible forinvestigation of the case shall:

∗ Cause the warrant to be delivered to theChief Investigator, City Attorney's Office,not later than 1630 hours on the dayprevious to the date upon which the Writ isreturnable; and,

∗ Appear in court where the Writ isreturnable, at least fifteen minutes prior tothe time set for the hearing.

Upon arrival in court, he/she shall:

∗ Contact the City Attorney's investigators;∗ Properly identify himself/herself;∗ Obtain the warrant; and,∗ Remain in court to take the defendant into

custody, if so ordered by the court.

725.90 RECALLS ON WARRANTS.Warrants which are assigned to a division forservice and are later recalled by the court shallbe forwarded to the Criminal Records Section,Records and Identification Division.



725.95 WARRANT RECALL LISTS-OUTLYING DIVISIONS. Watchcommanders in outlying divisions in whichcourts are located shall:

∗ Obtain a warrant recall list from the courtclerk at the end of the clerk's daily tour ofduty;

∗ Cause the warrant recall list to be teletypedimmediately to the Criminal RecordsSection, Records and IdentificationDivision; and,

∗ Send the warrant recall list to the CriminalRecords Section, Records and IdentificationDivision, by Department mail.

728. NATIONAL CRIMEINFORMATION CENTER (N.C.I.C.).728.10 WANTED PERSON FILE-ENTRY OF FELONY WARRANTINFORMATION. Concerned investigatingofficers may request felony warrantinformation to be entered in the Wanted PersonFile, N.C.I.C., by completing a WarrantInformation, Form 8.48, when:

∗ The suspect is not in custody; and,∗ There is cause to believe that the suspect

may leave the jurisdiction.

728.15 WANTED PERSON FILE-ENTRY OF TEMPORARY FELONYWANT. An investigating officer may entertemporary felony want information into theN.C.I.C. Wanted Person File when:

∗ There is probable cause to believe a suspecthas committed a felony,

∗ There is cause to believe the suspect mayleave the jurisdiction, and,

∗ Circumstances preclude the immediateprocurement of a felony warrant.

Note: A temporary felony want is subject toverification and support by a proper warrantand is automatically purged from the file after48 hours.

When temporary felony want information is tobe entered into the N.C.I.C. Wanted PersonFile, the "Temporary Felony Want" box shallbe checked on a copy of the Form 8.48 andforwarded to Records and IdentificationDivision for entry. When the warrant isobtained, the warrant information shall beentered on the original Form 8.48, the "FelonyWarrant" box shall be checked, and theoriginal and two copies of the form forwarded(4/728.18) to Records and IdentificationDivision for entry.

728.16 FELONY WARRANT DUEDILIGENCE COORDINATOR. Uponreceiving a felony warrant, the Felony WarrantDue Diligence Coordinator shall cause theinvestigating officer to:

∗ Determine if NCIC entry is required by 980PC;

∗ Determine if the wanted person will beextradited; and,

∗ Determine if the wanted person, based onavailable information, poses an officer-safety risk.

If any of these conditions exist, theinvestigating officer shall complete a WarrantInformation Form, Form 8.48, and forward theform to Records and Identification Division,Warrant Teletype Unit. The Coordinator shallalso ensure that the Due DiligenceInvestigative Responsibility procedure outlinedin Department Manual Section 4/725.09 iscomplied with.

728.18 WANTED PERSON FILE-MODIFICATION OF EXTRADITIONINFORMATION. All Felony Warrants areprogrammatically rolled over into the NCICWanted Person File with a “NOEX OUTSIDECA” designation in the miscellaneous field. Inorder to modify the warrant to reflectExtraditable (EX), or to add or changeidentifying information, the concerneddetective shall:

∗ Complete a Warrant Information Form,Form 8.48, containing the suspect’s fullname, date of birth, and other identifyinginformation;

∗ Obtain the signature of the concernedArea’s detective commanding officerapproving the Form 8.48, and cause thecompleted Form 8.48 to be forwarded to theWarrant Teletype Unit (WTU), Records andIdentification Division. Upon receiving theWarrant Information Form, Form 8.48, theWTU personnel shall make the appropriatemodification reflecting extradition approval;and,

∗ To re-modify the warrant back to Non-Extraditable (NOEX), the concerneddetective shall follow the steps above andsubmit a completed Warrant InformationForm, 8.48, to the WTU, Records andIdentification Division. The completed formshall include a “NOEX” designation writtenat the top to alert WTU personnel of theproper modification.

Note: A “NOEX” warrant remains in the NCICWanted Person File until the concerneddetective requests its removal.

Exception: When the felony warrant ortemporary felony want is for a traffic offenseand the concerned division commandingofficer is not available, the Form 8.48 shall besubmitted to the officer in charge, concernedaccident investigation follow-up unit (5/095),for approval.

728.20 WARRANT REMOVAL. When itis learned that a suspect listed on a warrant inthe N.C.I.C. Wanted Person File will definitelyNOT be extradited for that warrant, the relatedwarrant shall be modified in the WantedPerson File to reflect Non-Extraditable(NOEX). When a felony warrant is to beremoved from the NCIC Wanted Person Filefor reasons other than the warrant beingNOEX, the concerned investigating officershall:

∗ Complete a Warrant Information, Form8.48, containing the suspect's full name,date of birth (if available), all knownidentifying information (hair color, scars,marks, tattoos, etc.), and warrant number;

∗ Place a check mark in the "WarrantRemoval" box at the bottom of the Form8.48;

∗ Explain the reason for warrant removalunder the "Additional Information" sectionof the Form 8.48;

∗ Obtain the signature of the concerneddetective commanding officer approving theForm 8.48, and cause the completed Form8.48 to be forwarded to Records andIdentification Division; and,

∗ To have the extradition informationmodified to reflect Non-Extraditable(NOEX), indicate NOEX at the top of theForm 8.48 and forward the completed formto the WTU, Records and IdentificationDivision.

728.23 WARRANT AMENDMENT. Whenadditional information that will significantlyassist in identifying or eliminating a warrantsuspect is gained subsequent to initial warrantentry, the concerned investigating officer shallcomplete a Warrant Information, Form 8.48.,in the same manner delineated in warrantremoval procedures. The "WarrantAmendment" box at the bottom of the form8.48 shall be checked, and new descriptive orexplanatory information should be entered inthe "Additional Information" section of theForm 8.48.

730. INTERVIEWING.

730.10 SUSPECTS, ADMONITION OFMIRANDA RIGHTS. (4/202.10).730.20 SUBJECTS DETAINED ATJUVENILE HALL. Prior to proceeding toJuvenile Hall to interview a detained juvenile,an investigating officer shall telephonicallycontact the Juvenile Hall Intake and DetentionControl (IDC) Officer to determine whether thejuvenile has requested to have an attorney andto determine when the juvenile may beinterviewed.

The investigating officer may proceed toJuvenile Hall and request an interview with thejuvenile only after it has been determined thatan attorney has not been requested.

Note: If the juvenile has requested an attorneyand the investigating officer deems it necessaryto interview the juvenile, the investigatingofficer shall request a member of the IDC staffto contact the concerned private attorney orpublic defender to determine if and when theinvestigating officer may interview thejuvenile.

When an interview is scheduled, the IDCOfficer will remain present only during thetime that the investigating officer advises ajuvenile of his or her Miranda rights. The IDCOfficer will determine if the juvenileunderstands and properly waives his or her



Miranda rights. If, in the opinion of the IDCOfficer, the juvenile does not understand orwaive his or her Miranda rights, the IDCOfficer will not permit any interview to takeplace.

Reporting Problems with Personnel orProcedures at Juvenile Hall. Wheninvestigating officers, while at Juvenile Hall,experience an immediate problem withpersonnel or procedures of that facility, theDetention Control Officer should be sought forassistance. If a concerned investigating officeris of the opinion that a problem was notproperly resolved or that some further actionshould be taken, the circumstances may besubsequently reported to the Juvenile HallLiaison Officer, Juvenile Division, for possibleremedial action.

730.50 INTERVIEWS/PHOTOGRAPHSAT LOS ANGELES COUNTY-USCMEDICAL CENTER.Patient Not a Prisoner. An officer desiring tointerview or photograph a patient at the LosAngeles County-USC Medical Center who isnot a prisoner shall:

∗ Contact the Hospital Security Office toobtain a "Special Pass and Consent ofPatient," LAC-USCMC Form 664, prior toentering into any patient care area;

Exception: The LAC-USCMC Form 664 isnot required and officers do not have to reportto the Security Office when they wish tointerview a patient in the emergency room.However, consider the welfare and care of thepatient as a primary concern when conductingemergency room interviews.

∗ Submit the LAC-USCMC Form 664 to theattending physician or Charge Nurse, andbriefly explain the purpose of the visit;

∗ Ascertain through the attending physician orCharge Nurse if the patient's health statuswould be jeopardized by the interviewand/or photographing; and,

Note: When the patient's health status prohibitsinterviewing or photographing obtain anestimated time when interviewing orphotographing may be accomplished.

∗ Contact the Watch Commander, DetectiveSupport Division, to mediate any conflicts.

Patient is a Prisoner. When an interview of aprisoner is to be conducted at the Los AngelesCounty-USC Medical Center, the interviewingofficers may go directly to the hospital andpresent their identification card at the JailWard for admittance. Section 4/635 outlinesprocedures on photographing prisoners.

733. INFORMANTS.733.10 INFORMANTS-OFFICER’SRESPONSIBILITY. Department policy limitsthe use of informants to officers who are ininvestigative assignments. Consequently,uniformed officers are not allowed to use or

maintain informants. A uniformed officer whocomes in contact with a potential informantshall refer that person to the appropriateinvestigative entity. Officers shall refer to thecurrent Informant Manual for direction.

733.20 UNDESIRABLE INFORMANTFILE. Refer to current Department InformantManual for information regarding theUndesirable Informant File.

734. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMANTTRACKING SYSTEM DATABASE. TheConfidential Informant Tracking SystemDatabase (CITSD) has been created tocentralize and better manage informationregarding Department informants.Officer’s Responsibility. Prior to utilizing aconfidential informant, an officer shall hand-carry (forms shall not be mailed) a copy of theInformant Information Form(s), signed by hisor her commanding officer to the CommandingOfficer, Narcotics Division (ND). InformantInformation Forms shall only be delivered toND during normal business hours (non-holidayweekdays, (0800-1700 hours).

Exception: Under exigent circumstances, aconfidential informant may be utilized prior todelivering the form to ND but, only with theapproval of a staff or command officer. In suchcases, the form shall be hand-carried to ND onthe next business day.

Narcotics Division, Commanding Officer’sResponsibility. The Commanding Officer,ND, shall be responsible for coordinating theCITSD program. He or she shall ensure that:

∗ All Informant Information Form data isaccurately entered into the CITSD; and,

∗ Assigned Confidential Informant (CI)numbers are conveyed to the appropriatecommanding officers as soon as practicable.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Uponreceiving a CI number from ND, theoriginating commanding officer of each Areashall ensure that the CI number is written on alloriginal Informant Information Forms and onthe file folder tab of the Informant ControlPackage. The Informant Control Package,which includes a record of all contacts with aninformant, is confidential and shall bemaintained in a secure location by thecommanding office of the Area or specializeddivision utilizing the informant.

Informants Used In Conjunction withAnother Agency. Informants used inconjunction with another agency arespecifically excluded from entry into CITSD.Each commanding officer having aninformant(s) falling under this exception shallreview the Informant Control Package, verifythat the informant is exempted, and write thewords “shared with another agency” in red inkon the front of the package. The commandingofficer shall include a notation of this reviewand determination in the informant’s package.

735. DIVISIONAL AND FORMALSHOW-UPS.735.05 SCHEDULING AND LOCATIONOF FORMAL SHOW-UPS FOR ADULTSUSPECTS. Formal show-ups for adultsuspects shall be conducted in:

∗ The Auditorium, Room 100, Parker Center;∗ The Auditorium of the Los Angeles County

Central Jail; or,∗ The designated facilities at Los Angeles

County Jail.

An investigating officer who desires to have anarrestee shown in a formal show-up shallnotify Robbery Special Section,Robbery-Homicide Division, by telephone,24-hours prior to the desired time of theshow-up. The notification shall include:

∗ The arrestee's name, booking number,charge, and physical description;

∗ The location where the arrestee is beingheld;

∗ The division conducting the investigation;and,

∗ A statement regarding the willingness of thearrestee to stand in a show-up.

Exception: In unusual circumstances, theinvestigating officer may request an immediateshow-up by contacting Robbery SpecialSection, Robbery-Homicide Division.

735.10 SCHEDULING AND LOCATIONOF FORMAL SHOW-UPS FORJUVENILE SUSPECTS. Formal show-upsfor juvenile suspects shall be conducted at:

∗ Central Juvenile Hall (Eastlake);∗ San Fernando Valley Juvenile Hall; or,∗ Los Padrinos Juvenile Hall.

An investigating officer desiring to schedule ajuvenile show-up shall contact the liaisonofficer at the concerned juvenile facility.Liaison officers are available on court daysbetween 0730 and 1600 hours.

735.15 OFFICERS' DUTIES PRIOR TOPRE-ARRAIGNMENT SHOW-UPS.Officers who intend to place an arrestee in ashow-up prior to the arrestee's arraignmentshall inform the arrestee that he has the right tohave an attorney present during the show-up.

Note: Arraignments shall not be delayed inorder to conduct a show-up.

735.20 OFFICER'S DUTIES PRIOR TOPOST-ARRAIGNMENT SHOW-UP. Anofficer who intends to show an arrestee in aformal show-up shall inform the arrestee that:

∗ The arrestee has the right to have anattorney present during the show-up; and,

∗ If the arrestee so desires and cannot affordone, an attorney will be appointed withoutcharge.

After the admonition has been given, theofficer shall:



∗ Determine whether the arrestee understandsthe right to an attorney; and,

∗ Determine whether the arrestee wishes tohave an attorney present during theshow-up.

Note: If the arrestee desires an attorney, theinvestigating officer shall include the attorney'sname on the Follow-up Investigation, Form3.14, (4/735.30).

735.25 ARRESTEE WAIVESATTORNEY. When an arrestee waives theright to have an attorney present at theshow-up, the concerned investigating officershall cause the arrestee to read a waiver form,provided by Robbery-Homicide Division, and,if appropriate, to sign the waiver. Theinvestigating officer shall retain the followingin the Case Investigation Envelope, Form15.15, when appropriate:

∗ Statements indicating the arrestee'sunderstanding of his/her right to have anattorney present at the show-up;

∗ Statements indicating the arrestee's waiverof his/her right to the presence of anattorney during the show-up; and,

∗ The waiver form, signed by the arrestee.

Note: If the arrestee waives his/her right to thepresence of an attorney but refuses to sign thewaiver form, a statement indicating thearrestee's refusal to sign shall be documentedon the waiver form and on a Follow-UpInvestigation, Form 3.14.

735.30 ARRESTEE REQUESTSATTORNEY. When an arrestee has retainedan attorney or has one appointed to be presentat the show-up, the investigating officer shall:

∗ Notify both the prosecuting and defenseattorneys as to the date, time and location ofthe show-up immediately after the show-upis scheduled by Robbery Special Section,Robbery-Homicide Division; and,

∗ Include the name of the attorney, the date,and the time of the notification on theFollow-up Investigation, Form 3.14.

In the case of a pre-arraignment show-up, if thearrestee requests a private attorney, thatattorney must be able to appear within 12-24hours of being notified. If the private attorneycannot appear within that time period, thearrestee shall be advised that:

∗ The arrestee does not have the right to havethat particular attorney present at theshow-up;

∗ The arrestee may request a public defenderat the show-up or the arrestee may appearwithout counsel; and,

∗ If the arrestee refuses to appear in theshow-up, it will be commented on in a courtof law.

Note: Formal pre-arraignment show-upswithout counsel are permitted only underexigent circumstances unless the arresteewaives the right to counsel.

735.35 ATTORNEY PRESENT ATSHOW-UP. Upon request by an attorneyrepresenting an arrestee in a show-up, theinvestigating officer shall ensure that theattorney is:

∗ Given an opportunity to confer with his/herclient before the show-up;

∗ Allowed to observe the entire line-up priorto the show-up;

∗ Allowed to attend the show-up session inthe capacity of an observer only; and,

∗ Allowed to attend the identification processwhich follows the show-up, in the capacityof an observer only.

Note: The investigating officer shall make anote on the Follow-up Investigation, Form3.14, of any objection made by the arrestee'sattorney. A copy of the Follow-UpInvestigation, Form 3.14, shall be retained inthe respective case folder.

735.40 DEFENSE ATTORNEYNOTIFIED BUT FAILS TO ATTEND.When an attorney who has been notified thatan arrestee requested his/her presence at ashow-up and the attorney fails to appear, theinvestigating officer shall delay the show-upand attempt to contact the attorneyrepresenting the arrestee.

Note: If unable to contact the attorney, beguided by the advice of the prosecutingattorney.

735.45 ARRESTEE REFUSES TOPARTICIPATE IN SHOW-UP. Theinvestigating officer shall advise an arresteewho refuses to participate in a pre or postarraignment show-up, or an attorney whoadvises the arrestee not to participate in a preor post-arraignment show-up that:

∗ The show-up is for elimination oridentification purposes only;

∗ The arrestee does not have a right to refuseto participate in any phase of the show-up;and,

∗ The refusal of an arrestee to participate in ashow-up may be introduced in a court oflaw.

The investigating officer shall ensure that:

∗ Circumstances of a refusal are documentedon the Line-Up Refusal, Form 12.02;

∗ Circumstances of the refusal aredocumented on the Follow-UpInvestigation, Form 3.14; and,

∗ The arrestee has signed the Line-UpRefusal, Form 12.02, if possible.

Note: Force shall not be used to compel anarrestee to participate in a show-up. If anarrestee refuses to participate, the investigatingofficer shall follow the procedure foridentifying the arrestee through the use ofphotographs (4/738.05).

735.55 ATTENDANCE OF VICTIMS ORWITNESS AT SHOW-UP. Each victim orwitness who might identify an arrestee as the

perpetrator of a crime shall be informed of thedate, time, and location of the show-up atwhich the arrestee is to be shown.

735.70 TRANSPORTATION OF ADULTARRESTEE FOR FORMAL SHOW-UP. Ifan adult arrestee in custody is to appear in aformal show-up, the concerned investigatorshall transport the arrestee to the location ofthe scheduled show-up in accordance with thefollowing procedure:

∗ Metropolitan Jail Section. Two hours priorto the scheduled show-up;

∗ Los Angeles County Central Jail (InmateReception Center). As directed byRobbery Special Section,Robbery-Homicide Division; and,

∗ Los Angeles County Jail. As directed byRobbery Special Section,Robbery-Homicide Division.

735.80 ARRESTEE POSSIBLYINVOLVED IN OTHER JURISDICTIONS.The investigating officer shall send a teletypenotification (4/170.04) to all detective divisioncommanding officers and concerned outsideinvestigating agencies when an arresteeappearing in a formal show-up is believed to beinvolved in crimes committed in the concernedjurisdiction.

735.90 RESULTS OF FORMALSHOW-UPS TELETYPED. At theconclusion of a formal show-up, the officer incharge shall send a teletype of the results(4/170.08) to all detective divisioncommanding officers and the Sheriff'sDepartment.

738. PHOTOGRAPHICIDENTIFICATIONS.738.05 PHOTOGRAPHICIDENTIFICATION OF A SUSPECT. Aninvestigating officer who intends to show asuspect's photograph to a victim or witness forthe purpose of identification shall:

∗ Obtain the suspect's photograph and at leastfive additional photographs depictingpersons of similar appearance;

∗ Obliterate, or otherwise remove, allmarkings such as dates, L.A. numbers, andbooking numbers from the photographs orplace the photographs in the appropriatePhoto Display Folder, Form 15.50.1 or15.50.2; or Police Bulletin Folder, Form15.50.3;

∗ Make a photocopy of the front and back ofthe Photo Display Folder or Police BulletinFolder;

Note: A separate photocopy of the PhotoDisplay Folder or Police Bulletin Folder shouldbe made for each victim or witness identifyingthe suspect.

∗ Read the photographic line-up admonitionprinted on the back of the folder to thevictim or witness;



∗ Have the victim or witness sign theadmonition acknowledgment on the PhotoIdentification Report, Form 15.50.4;

∗ Show the entire set of photographs to thevictim or witness; and,

∗ If the victim or witness makes anidentification, the investigating officer shalldirect the victim or witness to circle thespecific photograph identified on thephotocopy of the Photo Display Folder orPolice Bulletin Folder. The victim orwitness should then initial and record thedate and time of the identification on thephotocopy of the Photo Display Folder orPolice Bulletin Folder.

Note: The investigating officer shall attempt toobtain facts to corroborate the identification bya single victim or witness.

The investigating officer shall causeappropriate comments to be written on thePhoto Identification Report when the victim orwitness is shown photographs from the PhotoDisplay Folder or Police Bulletin Folder. Thevictim or witness should sign, initial, andrecord the date and time that the commentswere made in the space provided at the bottomof the form. If an identification is made, theinvestigating officer should ask each victim orwitness if there is anything significant thatcaused them to select a particular photograph,i.e., how they recognized the person, if thephoto is different in any way from theirrecollection of the suspect, etc. Victims orwitnesses should not be told that they havepicked the “right” or “wrong” photo.

740. VOICE IDENTIFICATIONS. Anofficer desiring comparisons of tape-recordedvoices shall:

∗ Place his name, division of assignment, thedate, and DR number on each taperecording;

∗ Label the tape recording of the known voicewith the name of the suspect whose voice isrecorded;

∗ Label the tape recording of the unknownvoice with the words "Unknown Suspect;"

∗ Cause the tape recordings to be personallydelivered to the Criminalistics Section,Scientific Investigation Division; and,

∗ Notify the Criminalistics Section, ScientificInvestigation Division, of the desiredanalysis.

742. SEARCH WARRANTS.742.10 SEARCH WARRANT ANDPROBABLE CAUSE ARREST WARRANTPROCEDURES (see also Section 4/725.12).All Department personnel involved in theservice (including the planning and debriefing)of a search or Ramey warrant shall complywith the instructions setforth in the SearchWarrant Service Procedures Guide, preparedby Investigative Analysis Unit, DetectiveBureau. Each commanding officer shall beresponsible for maintaining the SearchWarrant Service Procedures Guide and ensurethat such procedures are made available to

Department personnel. Department personnelshall follow these guidelines when preparing,obtaining, serving, and returning a searchwarrant.

Officer’s Responsibility. An officer obtaininga search or Ramey warrant shall;

∗ Review the investigation with his/herimmediate supervisor; and,

∗ Consult with an on-duty investigativesupervisor from the investigative entityresponsible for the follow-up investigation.

When the officer’s supervisor agrees that asearch or Ramey warrant is the nextappropriate step, the officer shall complete thewarrant affidavit and supportingdocumentation, and submit these documents tohis/her supervisor for review and approval.

Upon obtaining a search or Ramey warrantissued by a magistrate, the officer obtaining thewarrant shall;

∗ Complete all the required information onthe Warrant Tracking Log;

Note: In the event an officer’s work location isdifferent from his/her commanding officer’slocation, the officer shall cause all requiredinformation to be entered on his/her division’sWarrant Tracking Log.

∗ Complete pages 1-6 of the Tactical PlanReport, Form 12.25, and submit forapproval; and,

Exception: For search warrants targeting onlythird party records (e.g., telephone, bankrecords, etc.), no Tactical Plan Report isrequired. An entry in the Warrant TrackingLog shall be completed specifically stating“records warrant only” in the comments box asdescribed below.

∗ Maintain (in the Detective Case Package,Control Folder, or Murder Book, asapplicable) the search or Ramey warrantand other related documents to include thecompleted Tactical Plan Report, propertyreport(s), receipt(s) for property taken intocustody, and return of service.

Note: When information such as the Divisionof Records number, case number, searchwarrant number, or booking number is notavailable, that information shall be entered onthe Log as soon as it becomes available.

After the warrant information has beenrecorded on the Log, the officer may submitthe affidavit and supporting documentation forissuance of a warrant.

Note: When a Ramey warrant is not served,the officer who obtained the warrant shallcomply with Manual Section 4/725.12regarding Probable Cause Arrest Warrants.

Supervisor’s Responsibility. A supervisorshall review each request for a search orRamey warrant and all reports prepared insupport of the warrant application. Suchreview shall include:

∗ A review for completeness of theinformation contained within the documentsand for authenticity to ensure the warrantdoes not fail to articulate a legal basis forthe warrant, or contain any “canned”language or inconsistent information;

∗ A review of the information on theapplication and affidavit, where applicable,to determine whether the warrant isappropriate, legal, and in conformance withDepartment procedure;

∗ The supervisor’s initials at the bottom ofeach page of the warrant affidavit;

∗ Ensuring that the warrant was entered on theWarrant Tracking Log and properlyupdated, and the return box completed: and,

∗ A review and evaluation of the WarrantService/Tactical Plan Report.

Warrant Service/Tactical Plan Report. Thedesignated supervisor shall complete thefollowing on the Warrant Service/Tactical PlanReport:

∗ Documented confirmation that a debriefingwith involved personnel was conducted nolater than the next working day afterwarrant service; and,

∗ A summary of the debriefing no later thanthe next working day after warrant service.The “Debriefing Summary” section on pageseven of the Tactical Plan Report shall, at aminimum, address the following issues:

∗ Pre/post search conditions;∗ Presence/absence of photos, audio and/or

video tapes;∗ Supervisory oversight before, during,

and after service of the warrant; and,∗ Date/time/location of the debriefing and

the issues discussed.

Notifications. The designated supervisor shallensure that the following notifications aremade prior to the service of the warrant:

∗ Any outside law enforcement agencyhaving jurisdiction over the location wherethe warrant is being served;

∗ The on-duty watch commander; and,∗ The Area/divisional commanding officer.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility. Thecommanding officer of each Area division andspecialized operational division shall:

∗ Maintain a single location of WarrantTracking Logs for their command in theArea or specialized division office;

∗ Ensure the presence of a supervisor(Sergeant I, Detective II, or higher), duringthe execution of a search or Ramey warrant.For Gang Enforcement Details, the presenceof a lieutenant or higher ranking officershall be required at the service of warrants;and,

∗ Ensure that the warrant number and returndate are entered on the Warrant TrackingLog no later than ten working days from thedate of service.

Tactical Plan Report. Commanding officers



shall document on the Tactical Plan Report anevaluation of the warrant service operationwithin seven working days of the warrant’sexecution, ensuring that the following issuesare addressed:

∗ The circumstances surrounding the presenceof a supervisor during the service of thewarrant; and,

∗ Whether a supervisor’s actions during theservice of the warrant were appropriate.

Note: The commanding officer shall completea detailed analysis of the performance of thesupervisor at each scene of the service of thesearch or Ramey warrant on a Comment Sheet,Form 1.77.

Upon completion, the commanding officershall sign and date the Tactical Plan Report.

742.20 SERVICE OF HIGH-RISKWARRANTS. When it is determined that,during the service of a warrant, there may be aconfrontation involving a suspect possessingexceptional weaponry or who has adocumented violent history, or involving afortified structure, or other situation exist thatmay require specialized personnel, training,and/or equipment, the entity responsible forserving the warrant shall contact theCommanding Officer, Metropolitan Divisionfor advice. The Commanding Officer,Metropolitan Division, shall provide theappropriate advice and determine whetherSWAT shall be deployed in the service of thewarrant.

742.30 SUPERVISION AT SEARCHWARRANT LOCATIONS. Supervisor’s Responsibility. A supervisor(Sergeant I, Detective II, or higher) shall bepresent during the execution of the warrant andshall remain throughout the entire search. Thesupervisor shall immediately make a personalwritten record of pre-search and post-searchconditions of locations searched. Thesupervisor coordinating the warrant servicewill be held accountable to exercise controlduring warrant service. An Employee's Report,Form 15.7, shall be used by the responsiblesupervisor, to document conditions of thelocations searched. Upon completion, the Form15.7 shall be included and maintained in theresponsible detective's case folder.

Search Warrants involving GangEnforcement Detail (GED)/CLEARpersonnel. A lieutenant or above shall bepresent at the execution of all search warrantswhere GED/CLEAR personnel are involved inthe service of the warrant. When multiplelocations are involved, a lieutenant shallcoordinate the service of the warrant, andensure that a supervisor is present at eachsearch warrant location where GED/CLEARpersonnel are present.

Note: At the discretion of the coordinatingsupervisor, photographs of the pre-search andpost-search locations may be taken by

personnel from the Area or by ScientificInvestigation Division photographers,depending upon availability.

Photographs taken are official Departmentphotographs and shall be retained in thedetective's case folder at the division havinginvestigative responsibility for the case,together with all other investigative reportsconnected to the search warrant.

Commanding Officer’s Responsibility.Commanding officers shall ensure that asupervisor (Sergeant I, Detective II, or higher)shall be present during the execution of thewarrant and remain throughout the entiresearch. Further, commanding officers shallensure that appropriate notes, and inexceptional cases photographs, are used todocument pre-search and post-searchconditions of locations where search warrantsare served.

Exception: Commanding officers have theauthority to exempt personnel from compliancewith provisions of Manual Section 4/742.30,when a search warrant is to be served foradministrative records, such as telephonerecords, bank records, or utility informationand no physical search will be conducted byDepartment personnel.

742.40 SERVING SEARCH WARRANTSFOR TOLL-BILL INFORMATION.Investigators shall, prior to serving a searchwarrant for telephone toll-bill information,contact Vice Division. Vice Division personnelshall ensure that the investigator is aware ofmeasures to safeguard against prematurenotification to the subscriber, and shall recordappropriate information from the searchwarrant.

742.50 REQUESTING APPROVAL TOSEARCH NEWS MEDIA FACILITIES.Approval to conduct a search of a news mediafacility shall be requested, with the approval ofthe concerned commanding officer, in thefollowing manner:

∗ Requests shall be submitted on anIntradepartmental Correspondence Form15.2, signed by the concerned commandingofficer, to the concerned bureau and Office.Requests shall be hand carried through theapproval chain to the Chief of Police; and,

∗ When the Office of the Chief of Police isclosed, emergency requests may be madethrough the Watch Commander, DetectiveSupport Division (DSD), with the approvalof a staff officer from the concerned bureau.The concerned Office shall be notified onthe next working day. The watchCommander, DSD, shall secure an approvalor denial of the request from the Chief ofPolice, or Acting Chief of Police. The watchcommander, DSD, shall then advise therequesting employee of the denial orapproval.

742.60 TELEPHONIC SEARCHWARRANTS. An officer may request atelephonic search warrant if there is probable

cause to justify the issuance of a searchwarrant and a genuine emergency exists thatwill justify the issuance of a telephonic, ratherthan a written, search warrant.

Note: A police officer assigned to a non-investigative position shall obtain the approvalof the immediate supervisor to initiate arequest for a telephonic or facsimile searchwarrant. If the supervisor concurs, the officershall contact the concerned detective divisionor, if the concerned detective division isclosed, Detective Support Division for adviceprior to initiating a request for a telephonicsearch warrant.

In requesting the telephonic search warrant,officer's shall adhere to the followingprocedures:

∗ During normal business hours, theinvestigating officer requesting a telephonicsearch warrant shall contact the DistrictAttorney's Office where the case will befiled. During non-business hours, theinvestigating officer shall contact theDistrict Attorney's Office Command Postfor the name and telephone number of thedeputy district attorney on-duty. Theinvestigating officer shall have ready ablank search warrant formset. Theinvestigating officer shall relate to thedeputy district attorney all of the elementswhich substantiate the need for a telephonicsearch warrant. If he/she concurs, thedeputy district attorney will arrange aconference call between a magistrate, thedeputy district attorney, the investigatingofficer, and a recording device located inthe District Attorney's Office;

∗ When the conference call has beenestablished the investigating officer shallrelate to the magistrate all the facts whichsubstantiate the need for a telephonic searchwarrant. The investigating officer shall thenanswer any additional questions asked bythe magistrate or the deputy districtattorney;

∗ If, upon conclusion of the investigatingofficer's statement, the magistrate feels atelephonic search warrant is justified, themagistrate will complete the copy of thesearch warrant and sign it. The magistratewill then dictate verbatim the contents ofthe warrant to the investigating officer sothat the investigating officer may completethe copy of the warrant. The magistrate willthen authorize the investigating officer tosign the date, time, and the magistrate'sname to the search warrant;

Note: The investigating officer's copy of thesearch warrant is a duplicate original warrantand must be completed exactly as directed bythe magistrate.

∗ The investigating officer, assisted by thefield officer or other concerned personnel,may then conduct the authorized searchusing the duplicate original search warrant.The investigating officer shall enter thewarrant. The investigating officer shall



enter the exact time of execution on thewarrant. The investigating officer shallissue a receipt for any and all propertyseized during the course of the search;

∗ The District Attorney's Office will thentranscribe the tape recording of theconference call and notify the investigatingofficer when it has been completed; and,

Note: When the original request for thetelephonic search warrant was made pursuantto a misdemeanor case, the investigatingofficer shall be responsible for obtaining thetape recording of the conference call from theDistrict Attorney's Office and delivering it tothe City Attorney's Office, where the case, ifany, arising from the search will be filed. TheCity Attorney's Office will transcribe the tapeand notify the investigating officer when it hasbeen completed.

∗ The investigating officer shall then, andunder no circumstances more than fivedays from the date of issuance, obtain thetranscript and the tape recording from theDistrict Attorney's Office or City Attorney'sOffice and deliver these, with the duplicateoriginal search warrant, to the issuingmagistrate. The investigating officer shallalso prepare a Return to a Search Warrantand deliver it to the issuing magistrate(4/540.90).

As an alternative to obtaining a search warrantsolely by telephonic means, an officer mayobtain a search warrant by use of a telephoneand facsimile machine. The Los AngelesCounty District Attorney's "By Facsimile"search warrant form shall be used when thefacsimile search warrant procedure isemployed. An officer requesting a facsimilesearch warrant shall contact a magistrate byusing a standard telephonic search warrantguidelines and shall adhere to the followingprocedures:

∗ Upon instruction from the magistrate, theinvestigating officers shall transmit byfacsimile machine the search warrant andall supporting documents, including theofficer's sworn affidavit in support of thesearch warrant, to the magistrate;

∗ The officer shall confirm receipt of thedocuments by the magistrate;

∗ Upon administration of the oath, the officershall relate to the magistrate all the factswhich substantiate the need for a facsimilesearch warrant. The officer shall thenanswer any additional questions asked bythe magistrate;

∗ Upon receipt of the signed warrant facsimileand authorization from the magistrate, theofficer shall write "duplicate original" onthe signed facsimile;

∗ The investigating officer shall obliterate themagistrate's facsimile number from alldocuments prior to serving the warrant;

∗ The duplicate original warrant and theoriginal warrant with all supportingdocuments shall be returned by personalservice to the issuing magistrate within the

statutory time limit. The investigatingofficer shall also prepare a Return to aSearch Warrant and deliver it to the issuingmagistrate (4/540.90); and,

Note: A telephonic or facsimile search warrantrequested by an officer assigned to a non-investigative position shall be reviewed by theofficer's immediate supervisor for accuracy,legibility, and compliance with all mandatedprocedures and guidelines. The supervisor shallalso verify that the issuing magistrate'sfacsimile number has been obliterated from alldocuments received by the officer prior toservice of the warrant.

∗ Should a telephonic or facsimile searchwarrant not be executed after it has beenissued, it shall be so marked and returned tothe clerk of the issuing magistrate's court.

745. SUBPOENAS-INVESTIGATINGOFFICERS' DUTIES.745.10 SERVICE OF SUBPOENAS TOPRIVATE PERSONS. When a subpoena fora private person is secured by an investigatingofficer, the officer shall promptly serve thesubpoena. When this is impracticable, theofficer may request the field services divisionwatch commander of the Area in which thewitness resides to cause the service to be made.When served by an investigating officer,subpoenas shall be taken directly to court onthe day of the hearing.

745.11 SUBPOENA SERVICE BY MAIL.Subpoena service by mail procedures shallonly be used by investigative personnel. Whena subpoena for a preliminary hearing is to beserved by mail on a private person witness, theconcerned detective shall:

∗ Determine if the witness is willing to acceptthe subpoena by mail and is willing toappear in court;

∗ Determine if the witness has a permanent orvalid mailing address; and,

∗ Instruct the witness to acknowledge receiptof the subpoena by telephone, by mail, or inperson, and to verify his or her identity byproviding date of birth AND driver's licensenumber, or Department of Motor VehiclesIdentification Card number.

Note: Subpoena service is not complete untilthe above criteria are met.

Subpoenas shall be mailed using a plain whiteenvelope. The envelope shall be markedlegibly with the address of the witness and acomplete return address. Subpoenas shall bemailed through United States mail viaintradepartmental mail.

A detective or other employee receiving anacknowledgment for receipt of a subpoenashall record the witness's identificationinformation on the original (sender's) copy ofthe subpoena and process the original inaccordance with the procedures set forth inSection 4/745.10.

If a Department employee who has mailed asubpoena does not receive timely verificationthat the witness has received the subpoena, theemployee shall make a reasonable effort tocontact the witness to ensure proper service ofthe subpoena.

745.12 SERVICE OF SUBPOENAS ONMILITARY PREMISES. Permission shall besecured from the commanding officer of amilitary base or ship before serving a subpoenaon a member of the Armed Forces while on thebase or ship.

745.15 SERVICE OF SUBPOENAS TOOFFICERS. When investigating officerssecure a subpoena which contains only theirnames, they shall:

∗ Enter the subpoena information on thedivision's Officer Subpoena Record, Form15.29;

∗ Sign the subpoena; and,∗ Return the subpoena to court on the day of

the hearing.

When the subpoena contains the names ofofficers assigned to the same area as theinvestigating officer who secured thesubpoena, the investigating officer shall:

∗ Cause a Court Notice, Form 15.57, to becompleted immediately for each officernamed on the subpoena;

∗ Place investigating officer's name, serialnumber, and division of assignment on eachCourt Notice, Form 15.57, completed;

∗ Deliver, for service, the completed CourtNotices to the watch commander on-duty atthe subpoenaed officers' division ofassignment; and,

∗ Return the subpoena to court on the day ofthe hearing.

When the subpoena contains the names ofofficers, other than those assigned in the samearea as the investigating officers, theinvestigating officers shall:

∗ Cause a subpoena teletype to be promptlysent to the watch commanders where theseofficers are assigned; and,

∗ Return the subpoena to court on the day ofthe hearing.

745.20 EXPERT TESTIMONYREQUIRED. When the testimony of an experton the Department is desired or required in atrial, the investigating officer shall notify theconcerned expert not less than five workingdays prior to the date of the trial. Thenotification shall include:

∗ The time, date, and place of the trial;∗ Name of the defendant;∗ DR number of the case; and,∗ A description of the evidence about which

the expert will be required to testify.

745.25 EXPERT TESTIMONY-CHPARRESTS. Experts of this Department shallprovide expert testimony relative to chemicaltests and other investigations performed by



them incidental to CHP arrests. Personsrequesting such testimony shall be encouragedto give five working days' advance notice.

745.50 INFORMATION TO BE PLACEDON SUBPOENAS. Investigating officers whosecure a subpoena shall:

∗ Place their names and detail across theupper left corner of the subpoena, on theside containing the names and addresses ofthe witnesses;

∗ Check the names and addresses of thewitnesses; and correct any errors; and,

∗ Enter, below the witnesses' names andaddresses, any business addresses,telephone numbers, and other informationwhich may aid in the service of thesubpoena.

In addition to the foregoing, the followinginformation shall be placed on the subpoenabelow the name and address of the witnesswhen the witness is:

A Doctor. The name of the patient and the dateand time of treatment, if the subpoena resultedfrom a service performed by the doctor.

A Bank or Firm Representative. A statementof what the witness is expected to testify to andany records required, if the subpoena resultedfrom a service performed by the witness'organization. A subpoena duces tecum may berequired to obtain the required records.

An Autopsy Surgeon. The name of thedeceased, if the subpoena resulted from anautopsy performed by the surgeon.

A Member of the Armed Services. Astatement of why appearance of the witness isnecessary, and the name and address of thewitness' commanding officer.

745.90 SUBPOENA OF COURT RECORDSFROM THE COUNTY CLERK. Officersdesiring to have court records or exhibits fromthe County Clerk's Office available forpresentation in court, shall:

∗ Prior to obtaining a complaint, obtain thecase number, exhibit number, name of thedefendant, and the description of the recordsdesired, from the County Clerk's Office;and,

∗ When requesting the complaint from theDistrict Attorney, list and describe thoserecords desired in court on the back of thecomplaint form, under "Witnesses." Therecords will be subpoenaed into court by theDistrict Attorney's Office.

When a complaint has already been filed, andan officer desires that court records beavailable for presentation in court, he/she shall:

∗ Obtain two blank subpoenas from Division30 of the Municipal Court;

∗ Obtain the case number, exhibit number,name of the defendant, and description ofthe records desired, from the County Clerk'sOffice;

∗ Complete the subpoenas and leave a copywith the County Clerk's Office; and,

∗ Return the original of the subpoena toDivision 30 of the Municipal Court.

Note: Officers shall present a subpoena forcourt records to the County Clerk's Office atleast one day prior to the date of trial.

750. TAKING PRISONERS TOCOURT.750.10 ARRAIGNMENTS. When a felonyarrestee is to be taken to his/her arraignment,the investigating officer shall:

∗ Obtain the arrestee's personal property andCustody Record.

∗ Retain personal property in the sealedplastic envelope.

∗ Cause the detention officer to complete aJail Transfer Record, Form 6.11.

∗ Obtain the arrestee and transport him to theappropriate court lock-up.

∗ Cause a copy of the Jail Transfer Record,Form 6.11, to be signed by the deputysheriff accepting custody of the arrestee.

∗ If the complaint has been obtained, ensurethat the complaint is presented to the clerkof the court.

∗ If the complaint has not been obtained, theinvestigating officer shall:

∗ Obtain a complaint from the DistrictAttorney's Office.

∗ Ensure that the complaint is filed in thecourt which will consider thearraignment.

∗ Return the signed copy of the Jail TransferRecord, Form 6.11, to the division files.

750.12 USE OF LOS ANGELESSHERIFF'S DEPARTMENTTRANSPORTATION OF FELONYARRESTEES TO ARRAIGNMENTCOURT. Investigating officers desiring to usethe Sheriff's transportation for arraignment offelony prisoners shall:

∗ Obtain a complaint and file it in theappropriate court;

∗ Ensure that use of transportation will causethe prisoner to appear in court withoutunnecessary delay; and,

∗ Direct the custodial detention officer totransfer the arrestee on the next availabletransportation to the specific arraignmentcourt by:

∗ Sending a teletype ordering transfer ofthe arrestee, or,

∗ Signing a Jail Transfer Record orderingthe transfer of the arrestee.

750.18 ARRAIGNMENT-ARRESTEE INCOUNTY JAIL SYSTEM. When a non-warrant felony arrestee in custody in theCounty Jail System is to be arraigned, theinvestigating officer shall:

∗ Obtain a complaint from the DistrictAttorney's Office; and,

∗ Cause a teletype to be sent to the custodialdetention officer indicating the date andtime that arraignment is requested, and thearraignment court.

Note: If the arrestee is to be arraigned in amorning court session, notification shall bemade the day before. If the arrestee is to bearraigned in an afternoon session, notificationshall be made not later than 0900 hours of thearraignment date.

750.20 FELONY ARRAIGNMENT DELAYBY COURT ORDER. When a felony arresteeconfined in the Los Angeles County-USCMedical Center Jail Ward is in such medicalcondition that he/she cannot be taken to courtfor arraignment within forty-eight hours fromthe time of his/her arrest, the investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Request a Los Angeles County-USCMedical Center physician to complete aDeclaration of Physician, County FormSh-Cr-409; and,

∗ Present two copies of the form, along withthe warrant, to the concerned court.

Note: When the arrestee has been bookedoriginally on a warrant, the investigatingofficer shall present only the two copies of theDeclaration of Physician, County FormSh-Cr-409, to the concerned court.

The Court Order. The court will issue anorder to the Sheriff directing the arrestee to beheld upon the warrant and arraigned when hisor her condition permits.

Release or Change of Status. When thearrestee is to be released or the charge isreduced from a felony to a misdemeanor priorto arraignment, the concerned investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Notify the Criminal Records Section,Records and Identification Division.

∗ Cause a notification teletype to be sent tothe Sheriff's Warrant Detainer Section.

When the charge is reduced from a felony to amisdemeanor, the concerned investigatingofficer shall attach two copies of theDeclaration of Physician, County FormSh-Cr-409, to the misdemeanor complaint.

750.30 ARRAIGNMENT INFORMATION.When an investigating officer has a felonyprisoner to be arraigned in Division 30 of theMunicipal Court but does not remain in courtfor the arraignment, he/she shall deliver onecopy of the arraignment information report tothe court officer.

755. UNFOUNDING OF REPORTS.755.10 TELEPHONE REQUESTS FORUNFOUNDING OF REPORTS. An officeror record unit clerk receiving a telephone callfrom a private person requesting unfounding ofa crime, lost, or stolen property report shalltransfer the call to the concerned investigativedivision.



Exception: Persons telephoning a vehiclerecovery report shall be told to make a signedreport at the nearest police station.

755.20 LETTER RECEIVEDREQUESTING UNFOUNDING OF AREPORT. A letter received from a privateperson requesting unfounding of a crime, lost,or stolen property report shall be forwarded tothe commanding officer of the concernedinvestigative division.

755.80 UNFOUNDING OF REPORTS.Reports shall be unfounded on a Follow-upReport, Form 3.14, except when the followingare involved:

Vehicles. Unfounding of reports of lost orstolen vehicles shall be reported on a VehicleReport, CHP Form 180.

760. BULLETINS AND WANTS.760.10 LOS ANGELES POLICEBULLETINS. The Los Angeles PoliceBulletin shall be used to disseminateinformation on the following:

∗ Wanted or missing persons;∗ Items involved in an investigation;∗ Crimes having distinctive modus operandi;∗ Subject matter so unique or extensive that

special attention is desirable; and,∗ Cancellation of any of the above

information.

760.12 SUBMITTING INFORMATIONTO BE INCLUDED IN A LOS ANGELESPOLICE BULLETIN. An officer submittinginformation to be included in a Los AngelesPolice Bulletin shall:

∗ Complete an original and two copies of aPolice Bulletin Request/Cancellation, Form15.32;

∗ Upon the approval of officer's divisioncommanding officer, submit the originaland one copy of the Form 15.32,photographs of wanted or missing person(s)or other items, a copy of the suspect's CIIand LA rap sheets, and a copy of anyrelated warrant teletypes, to theInvestigative Analysis Unit, DetectiveBureau; and,

∗ Retain one copy of the Form 15.32 for unitfiles.

760.14 PROCESSING REQUESTS FORINFORMATION.Investigative Analysis Unit. Upon receivinga request to include information in a LosAngeles Police Bulletin, Investigative AnalysisUnit shall:

∗ Verify that the criminal informationincluded on the Form 15.32 corresponds tothe information on the suspect's LAPD rapsheets and related warrant teletypes;

∗ Obtain suspect's fingerprints from Recordsand Identification Division; and,

∗ Coordinate bulletin printing anddistribution.

Note: Investigative Analysis Unit shallmaintain a file of Forms 15.32 received and afile of published bulletins.

760.16 SUBMITTING CANCELLATIONINFORMATION. When the objective of theLos Angeles Police Bulletin has been met, theconcerned investigating officer shall, whenappropriate:

∗ Complete an original and three copies of aPolice Bulletin Request/Cancellation, Form15.32;

∗ Upon the approval of his or her divisioncommanding officer, submit the originaland two copies of the Form 15.32 to theInvestigative Analysis Unit; and,

∗ Retain one copy of the Form 15.32 for unitfiles.

760.18 PROCESSING REQUESTS FORCANCELLATION OF INFORMATION.Investigative Analysis Unit. Upon receivinga request to cancel information included in aLos Angeles Police Bulletin, InvestigativeAnalysis Unit shall:

∗ Verify that the information on the Form15.32 cancellation request correctlycorresponds with the information on thePolice Bulletin to be canceled, and that thecancellation has been approved by theconcerned detective commanding officer;and,

∗ Include the cancellation information in thenext appropriate Los Angeles PoliceBulletin with a distribution equal to, orgreater than, the bulletin to be canceled.

760.80 FELONY WANTS IN STOLENVEHICLE SYSTEM. When the follow-upinvestigator determines that a vehicleconnected with a felony, other than the theft ofthe vehicle, should be entered into the StolenVehicle System, he/she shall direct a FelonyWant teletype to the Vehicle InformationProcessing Unit, Records and IdentificationDivision.

Note: The information will remain in theStolen Vehicle System for ninety days beforeit is automatically purged.

When the follow-up investigator determinesthat a vehicle should be removed from theStolen Vehicle System, or remain in the StolenVehicle System beyond the 90-day period,he/she shall submit a request via teletype to theVehicle Information Processing Unit, Recordsand Identification Division.

760.85 CANCELLATION OF FELONYWANTS OTHER THAN GTA ON THEHOT SHEET. When an officer determinesthat a vehicle license number should beremoved from the Stolen Vehicle System,he/she shall cancel the vehicle portion of theAll Points Bulletin or the want broadcastthrough Communications Division.

762. REQUESTS FOR STATISTICALSERVICES.762.30 REQUESTS ORIGINATINGWITHIN THE DEPARTMENT. Statisticalinformation shall be requested in the followingmanner:

∗ Requests of an emergency nature forsuspect or modus operandi "runs" may bemade directly to the Automated InformationSection, Information Technology Division;

Note: Routine requests for M.O. runs are madethrough Investigative Analysis Unit.

∗ Requests for statistical informationroutinely compiled or published may bemade directly to the Automated InformationSection, Information Technology Division;and,

∗ Requests for information not routinelycompiled or available in existing files shallbe forwarded to the Commanding Officer,Information Technology Division. Eachrequest shall include the specificinformation required, with a statementshowing the need, purpose, urgency, anddeadline, and the name and unit of theemployee requesting the information.

762.60 REQUESTS ORIGINATINGOUTSIDE THE DEPARTMENT. Requestsfor statistical information by individuals oragencies, outside the Department shall bereferred to Community Relations Section.

762.70 REQUESTING A FIELDINTERVIEW CHECK. Officers desiring acheck of the Automated Field InterviewSystem shall make a telephonic request to theAutomated Field Interview Unit. The requestshall include as much information as possibleto facilitate a search of the files.

When an immediate file check is necessary andthis office is closed, requests shall be madetelephonically to Detective Support Division.

765. LIAISON WITH OTHERAGENCIES.765.10 REQUESTING INFORMATIONFROM A CORPORATION OR AUTILITY. A request to a corporation or apublic utility for information shall be made tothe office of the Chief Special Agent of theconcerned corporation or utility.

765.30 REQUESTING INFORMATIONFROM THE POST OFFICE. Wheninformation regarding an arrestee or suspect isdesired from the United States Post Office, theinvestigating officer shall:

∗ Complete, as far as possible, a Post OfficeInformation Request or Want Notice, Form12.23; and,

∗ Forward the completed Form 12.23 to theCommanding Officer, Detective SupportDivision.



765.50 ARRESTEE SUSPECTED OFCRIMES IN THIS AND OTHERJURISDICTIONS-NOTIFICATIONS.Jurisdiction Within the State. When anarrestee is believed to have committed crimesin this jurisdiction and in another jurisdictionwithin the State, the investigating officer shall:

∗ Notify the Fugitive Warrants Section,Detective Support Division; and,

∗ Notify the other jurisdiction.

Notifications shall include the information thata case is pending against the arrestee.

Jurisdiction Outside the State. When anarrestee is believed to have committed crimesin this jurisdiction and in another jurisdictionoutside the State, the investigating officer shallnotify the Fugitive Warrants Section, DetectiveSupport Division. (4/201.30)

765.52 SUSPECT ARRESTED INPOSSESSION OF PROPERTY STOLENOUTSIDE OF THE CITY.Within the State. When a suspect is arrestedfor, or in, possession of property reportedstolen outside the City, but within the State, theconcerned investigating officer shall, inaddition to other appropriate Departmentprocedures:

∗ Notify and furnish a copy of the arrestreport to the appropriate police agency inthe jurisdiction of the theft;

∗ Attempt to confer with the concernedinvestigating officer of the outside policeagency in order to evaluate whichjurisdiction, if any, appears to have thestronger prosecutorial case;

∗ Make a recommendation to the respectiveprosecutors based upon the results of theevaluation of the case;

∗ Contact Fugitive Warrants Section,Detective Support Division, if the arrestee isto be extradited to another county; and,

∗ Contact the District Attorney's Office foradvice if difficulties are encountered withany outside agency.

Outside the State. When a suspect is arrestedwithin the City for, or in, possession ofproperty stolen outside the State, theinvestigating officer shall notify FugitiveWarrants Section, Detective Support Division,for advice.

765.54 OUTSIDE AGENCYARRESTING SUSPECT IN POSSESSIONOF PROPERTY STOLEN WITHIN THECITY.Outside Agency Within the State. Whennotified that an outside police agency withinthe State has arrested a suspect for, or in,possession of property reported stolen withinthe City of Los Angeles, the concernedinvestigating officer of this Department shall:

∗ Request a copy of the outside agency'sarrest report of the suspect(s);

∗ Attempt to confer with the concernedinvestigating officer of the outside policeagency in order to evaluate whichjurisdiction, if any, appears to have thestronger prosecutorial case;

∗ Make a recommendation to the respectiveprosecutors based upon the results of theevaluation of the case;

∗ Contact Fugitive Warrants Section,Detective Support Division, if extradition ofthe arrestee appears appropriate;

∗ Contact the District Attorney's Office foradvice if difficulties are encountered withany outside agency; and,

∗ When the stolen property is a vehicle, notifythe victim within 48 hours, excludingweekends and holidays, and inform thevictim of the location and condition of thevehicle; and notify the registered and legalowners, in writing, concerning the status ofthe vehicle.

Out of State Agency. When notified that apolice agency outside the State has arrested asuspect for, or in, possession of propertyreported stolen within the City of Los Angeles,the concerned investigating officer of thisDepartment shall notify Fugitive WarrantsSection, Detective Support Division, foradvice.

Additionally, when the outside agency'srecovered property is an LAPD reported stolenvehicle the concerned investigating officer ofthis Department shall, after verifying therecovery and location of the vehicle:

∗ Notify the victim within 48 hours,excluding weekends and holidays, andinform the victim of the location andcondition of the vehicle;

∗ Notify the registered and legal owners, inwriting, concerning the status of the vehicle;

∗ When a Subrogated Property Notification,Form 10.17, is on file, notify the subrogatorthat the vehicle has been recovered; and,

∗ Document the notification information onthe vehicle report work copy.

765.56 SUSPECT ARRESTED INPOSSESSION OF PROPERTY STOLENWITHIN THE CITY BUT OUTSIDE THEAREA OF ARREST. When a suspect isarrested for, or in, possession of propertyreported stolen in an Area other than the Areaof arrest, the investigators from the concernedAreas shall evaluate the merits of the case priorto making a decision on whether to request thata complaint be filed.

765.60 REQUESTS FOR LETTERS OFRECOMMENDATION FORINDEMNIFICATION OF PRIVATECITIZENS. When a request for a letter ofrecommendation for a private citizen isreceived from the State Board of Control, thecommanding officer or officer in charge of thedivision or section responsible for thefollow-up investigation of the initial incidentfrom which the claim for indemnificationresulted shall cause the letter of

recommendation to be prepared. The lettershall be forwarded to the concerned bureaucommanding officer for review and approval.The content of the letter shall be limited to:

∗ The DR number of the concerned report(s),∗ A statement that the incident from which the

claim has resulted did occur, and,∗ The recommendation that indemnification

be made based on a review by the StateBoard of Control of the facts of the case.

A recommendation that a claim be consideredinvalid shall apply only in cases where:

∗ The incident did not occur, or aninvolvement of the person making the claimcannot be substantiated; or,

∗ The victim of a crime has not cooperated ina subsequent prosecution of personsresponsible for the commission of theoffense.

No attempt shall be made to ascertain theextent of an injury or the monetary lossesresulting from the involvement of a claimant asthe California Government Code provides thatthis determination be made by another agency.Legible copies of reports relating to theincident shall accompany the letter asenclosures.

765.70 INFORMATION REQUESTEDBY PROBATION DEPARTMENT. Anofficer receiving a reference letter, Form 1.14,from the Adult Division, Los Angeles CountyProbation Department, regarding an arresteeshall, without delay, complete the form andreturn it to the originating office viaDepartment mail.

765.75 REQUESTING INFORMATIONFROM PROBATION DEPARTMENT.When information is desired from the LosAngeles County Probation Department's Index,the investigating officer shall use the 194County tie-line. The officer shall give theoperator the last name of the subject afterrequesting to be connected with the ProbationDepartment Index. The investigating officershall furnish:

∗ The name of the arrestee or subject;∗ Any aliases he/she has used; and,∗ His prior record.

If the information concerns a juvenile or theinformation is needed but cannot be obtainedfrom the Probation Department Index, theofficer shall request to be connected with theInter-Agency Contact Officer of the ProbationDepartment.

765.80 ARRESTS OF FOREIGNNATIONALS-NOTIFICATIONS. Uponreceiving notification from a detention officerthat a foreign national is in custody, the WatchCommander, Department Command Post,Communications Division, shall be responsiblefor notifying the appropriate Consulate of theprisoner's:

∗ Name;



∗ Nationality; and,∗ Booking number and charge.

765.85 RECEIPT OF INTERPOLREQUESTS. Any Department entity receivingan INTERPOL request for investigativeassistance shall forward the request toDetective Support Division. Detective SupportDivision shall coordinate all suchcorrespondence and, when necessary, assignthe investigation to the appropriate Departmententity.

767. LICENSE TO CARRYCONCEALED FIREARMS.767.05 REQUESTS FOR LICENSE. Allrequests for licenses to carry a concealedfirearm shall be acted upon, by the Chief ofPolice.

Employee’s Responsibility. When any personrequests to apply for a concealed weaponlicense, a Department employee shall:

∗ Provide the applicant with a Department ofJustice, Form BCIA 4012;

∗ Provide the applicant with a copy of theDepartment’s Concealed Weapon LicenseOperational Policy; and,

∗ Advise the applicant that upon completionof the application, he/she shall schedule anappointment with the Gun Unit, DSD, asinstructed in the Department’s ConcealedWeapon License Operational Policy.

Questions concerning concealed firearmslicenses or requests for applications shall bereferred to the Gun Unit, Detective SupportDivision.

767.10 INVESTIGATING REQUESTS.Upon receiving a request for the investigationof an application for a license to carry aconcealed firearm the Gun Unit, DetectiveSupport Division, shall:

∗ Investigate all applications for concealedweapon licenses; and,

∗ Forward the application withrecommendations via his/her chain ofcommand to the Office of the Chief ofPolice for approval/denial.

770. PAWNSHOP PROCEDURE.770.05 PAWNSHOP-DEFINED. For thepurposes of this section, "pawnshops" shall bedefined as any pawnshop, junk yard, or storedealing in used or secondhand merchandise.

770.10 HOLD-DEFINED. A hold or holdorder is an order by an officer directing apawnshop or secondhand dealer permittee(2/480.59) to maintain custody and controlover specified property until the hold or holdorder is removed.

770.20 STOLEN PROPERTY. A holdshall be placed on stolen property when it isidentified in a place of business which isrequired to possess a pawn shop or secondhanddealer permit (2/480.59).

770.30 HOW TO PLACE A HOLD ONPAWNED PROPERTY. When an officerdesires to place a hold on property in abusiness required to possess a pawn shop orsecondhand dealer permit (2/480.59), he shall:

∗ Place his/her signature, serial number,division of assignment, date, related DRnumber (if known), and the word "hold" inthe permittee's pawn or buy book;

∗ Immediately notify the Pawnshop Section,Burglary Special Section, CommercialCrimes Division;

∗ Immediately notify the operations supportdivision in which the crime occurred whenthe officer placing the hold is not assignedto that division; and,

∗ When the crime occurred outside the City,notify the concerned jurisdiction.

770.40 WHEN TO RELEASE A HOLDON PROPERTY. A hold placed on propertyat a place of business which is required topossess a pawnshop or secondhand dealerpermit (2/480.59) shall be released:

∗ Immediately, upon the discovery that theproperty is not lost, stolen, or evidence;and,

∗ After ninety days, when extensive efforts tolocate and identify the legal owner havefailed.

Exception: When the legal owner has beenidentified, but is not available to receive theproperty, the hold may continue for a longerperiod of time to allow the owner to claim theproperty.

770.50 HOW TO RELEASE HOLDS ONPROPERTY. When a hold is to be released onproperty, the concerned officer shall notify thePawnshop Section, Burglary Special Section,listing the following information, if known:

∗ Victim's name and address;∗ Suspect's name;∗ Description of property to be released;∗ Permittee's business name and address;∗ Permittee's loan or buy number;∗ DR number; and,∗ Authorizing officer's name, serial number,

and division of assignment.

An assigned pawnshop investigating officer,upon receiving the above information, shall:

∗ Personally notify the permittee of thereleased hold; and,

∗ Place in the pawn or buy book the words"Hold Released," his/her signature, serialnumber, date, and division of assignment.

770.60 REQUESTS FOR HOLDS-OUTSIDE AGENCIES. When an agent froman outside law enforcement agency requests ahold to be placed on property in a businesswithin the City which is required to possess apawn shop or secondhand dealer permit, theconcerned officer shall:

∗ Prepare a letter in duplicate to therequesting agent informing him/her that the

hold will be placed for a maximum periodof ninety days, and that a written or teletyperequest for the placing of the hold isrequired from his/her department;

∗ Send the original letter to the requestingagent and file the copy in the "Hold" file;and,

∗ Place a hold on the article (4/770.30).

Note: The hold shall be released (4/770.50) ifno communication concerning retaining orreleasing a hold is received from the requestingagent within ninety days.

770.70 RELEASING PROPERTY TOTHE LEGAL OWNER. When held propertyis available for release to the legal owner, orhis/her agent, the concerned officer shall:

∗ Release the hold on the property (4/770.50);∗ Complete, in triplicate, a Legal Aspects of

Reclaiming Property, Form 12.43;∗ Send the first page of the form to the legal

owner or his or her agent;∗ Direct the legal owner, or his or her agent,

to present the Form 12.43 to the permitteein order to claim his or her property;

∗ Place the second page of the Form 12.43 inthe Pawnshop Hold package; and,

∗ Cause the third page of the Form 12.43 tobe delivered to the pawnshop holding theproperty.

772. SUBROGATED PROPERTY -INVESTIGATING OFFICER’SRESPONSIBILITY.772.10 NOTICE OF SUBROGATION. Acopy of a notice of subrogation received fromRecords and Identification Division by aninvestigating officer shall be attached to theinvestigating officer's copy of the related crimereport.

772.20 PROPERTY RECOVEREDSUBSEQUENT TO THE RECEIPT OF ANOTICE OF SUBROGATION. Whenproperty is recovered subsequent to the receiptof a notice of subrogation, or is in Departmentcustody when a notice of subrogation isreceived, the concerned investigating officershall:

∗ Complete a Subrogated PropertyNotification, Form 10.17;

∗ Ensure that the Subrogated PropertyNotification is properly distributed; and,

∗ Ensure that the property is not released untilthe current legal owner has beendetermined.

772.50 AREA AUTO COORDINATORS’-RESPONSIBILITY. When notice of asubrogated vehicle has been initially receivedat an Area station instead of Records andIdentification Division, the Area AutoCoordinator shall cause the Stolen VehicleSystem (SVS) to be queried. If the listed owneris not the insurance carrier, as reflected on theNotice of Subrogation, he/she shall cause atelephonic notification to be made to theVehicle Information Processing Unit (VIPU),Records and Identification Division, and



request the VIPU clerk to update the SVS toreflect that the insurance carrier is the currentowner.

775. ARRESTEES' RELEASES -INVESTIGATING OFFICERS' DUTIES.775.10 RELEASE WITHOUTPROSECUTION. Investigating officers shallcause the release of an arrestee (4/775.30),without unnecessary delay, when a complaintor indictment is not obtainable.

775.13 CERTIFICATE OF RELEASE.The Certificate of Release, Form 8.16, shall beissued to:

∗ An arrestee who has been booked pursuantto a CWS warrant and thereafter cleared;

∗ An adult arrestee who, at the time of releasefrom custody, is not scheduled for a courtappearance as a result of the arrest (A CityAttorney hearing is not a court appearance);

Exception: The Certificate shall not be issuedto a person arrested for 647(f) P.C. who isreleased under 849(b) (2) P.C. because nofurther proceedings are desirable.

∗ The Certificate shall be issued at the time ofrelease from custody; and,

Note: A supplemental booking on any warrantresults in the scheduling of a court appearance,and precludes the need for a Certificate.

∗ An adult arrestee who was scheduled forcourt appearance at the time of release fromcustody (bail, own recognizance,release-from-custody citation, court order)but a formal complaint was notsubsequently filed. The Certificate shall beissued upon establishing that a formalcomplaint will not be filed.

When it is not practicable to present thearrestee's copy of the Certificate to him/herpersonally, it shall be mailed to the arrestee'slast known address.

Responsibility for Issuance. The Certificateshall be issued as follows:

∗ Concerned Investigating Officer. When aninvestigating officer is responsible forfollow-up on the arrest, he/she shall issuethe Certificate, if practicable. One copyshall be given to the arrestee. The originalcopy shall be attached to the DispositionReport, Form 5.9, and presented with theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10, forsupervisory review prior to disposition.

Exception: When an investigating officer hasteletyped the authorization for release of aprisoner, the Certificate issuance anddistribution is done by the releasing employee.The investigating officer shall include a copyof the Notification of Prisoner ReleaseTeletype with the Form 5.9 and Form 5.10 inlieu of the Certificate.

∗ Releasing Employee. If the investigatingofficer is not available at the time of the

arrestee's release, the releasing employeeshall issue the Certificate. One copy shall begiven to the arrestee. The original copyshall be attached to the Jail Custody Record,page 5 of the Los Angeles ConsolidatedBooking Form, Form 5.1.

∗ Court Liaison Officer. When noinvestigating officer is responsible forfollow-up on the arrest, the concerned courtliaison officer shall issue the Certificateupon learning that a filing has been rejected.One copy shall be given to the arrestee. Theoriginal copy shall be attached to the ArrestDisposition Report, Form 5.9.

∗ Arresting Officer. When an arrestee isreleased prior to booking, and an RFCcitation is not issued, the arresting officershall issue the Certificate only upon requestof the arrestee. When the arresting officerissues the Certificate, he/she shall alsocomplete a Field Interview Report, Form15.43, and place the notation, "Certificate ofRelease Issued," in the space provided for"Circumstance of Interview." (The originalof the Certificate shall be given to thearrestee. No copies are required.)

∗ Supervisor in Charge of Jail Facility.When it is established by the supervisor incharge of a jail facility that a bookedarrestee is to be released (except onauthority of 849[b] [2] P.C.) and notrequired to appear in court, the supervisorshall ensure that the Certificate is issued.One copy shall be given to the arrestee. Theoriginal copy shall be attached to the JailCustody Record, Page 5 of the Los AngelesConsolidated Booking Form. Form 5.1.

775.14 RELEASE FROM COUNTY JAILFACILITY. When an arrestee detained at aCounty jail facility is released pursuant to849(b) 1 P.C. and the investigating officerauthorizing the release is present, theinvestigating officer shall complete a CountyPrisoner Release Order, County Form SHJ 70.

775.15 ARRAIGNMENT OR RELEASEOF ADULT PRISONERS. The assignedinvestigating officer shall ensure that all adultarrestees are arraigned or released as soon aspossible, without unnecessary delay, and in noevent beyond two court days following the dayof arrest.

Exception: During a state of emergency apresiding judge may request that the "Chair ofthe Judicial Council" extend the time limit forprisoner arraignment from the current two daysto a period not to exceed seven days.

If the investigating officer is not available atthe time a prisoner is due to be arraigned orreleased, the watch commander of theinvestigating division shall be responsible forthe arraignment or release.

775.20 INVESTIGATOR'S FINALREPORT-COMPLETIONRESPONSIBILITY. Officers assigned to the

follow-up investigation of a felony shallimmediately complete both sides (Pages 1 and2) of an Investigator's Final Report, Form 5.10,when a complaint is obtained or refused, thecharge is released, or the arrestee is released toanother law enforcement agency.

The arresting officer shall complete theRelease Information section of theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10, whenan arrest made on any of the followingconstitutes a felony charge:

∗ Violation of California State parole underauthority of 3056 P.C. or 3151 W.I.C;

∗ violation of probation bench warrant heldby the Los Angeles County Sheriff'sDepartment; and,

∗ "Failure to Appear" bench warrant held bythe Los Angeles County Sheriff'sDepartment.

A Property Disposition Request, Form 10.06,shall be attached to the Form 5.10 prior tosubmission for supervisory approval.

Upon completion, the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10, shall be delivered to therecord clerk, division of booking.

Note: If any of the above violations constitutesa misdemeanor charge only, the Form 5.10 isunnecessary.

When the arrestee for whom the Form 5.10 iscompleted has an M.O. that is distinct andconsistent, the officer shall so indicate bychecking the Yes box after the words M.O.Sheet on Page 2 of the Form 5.10 and shallthen complete a connecting M.0. Sheet, Form5.14 (5/5.10, 5/5.14).

Exception: Regardless of the charge, anInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.1 0, and anM.O. Sheet, Form 5.14, shall be completed ona juvenile whose M.O. is unusual, distinctive,or characteristic of that particular subject.

Fugitive Warrants Section Arrestees.Officers assigned to Fugitive Warrants Section(FWS), Detective Support Division, shallcomplete the Investigator's Final Report upontaking warrant suspects into custody. If thearrest occurs during normal duty hours, anattempt shall be made to contact the concerneddetective(s) for interviewing and Form 5.10completion.

Fugitive Warrants Section officers may, inappropriate circumstances, admonish arresteesand attempt to obtain statements at the time ofarrest unless the assigned detectives haveindicated otherwise. Additionally, FWSofficers shall perform appropriate follow-upinvestigations, within a reasonable distance andtime frame, when circumstances demandimmediate action.

Felony Bail-Out Procedures. A detentionofficer or desk officer who becomes aware ofa forthcoming Order Fixing Bail, or anticipatesthe posting of bail for a felony prisoner who isconfined in a Department jail facility, shall:



∗ Immediately notify the concerned detectivedivision watch commander of theanticipated release of the felony prisoner onbail; and,

∗ When the concerned Area DetectiveDivision is closed, notify the detentionofficer watch commander of the anticipatedrelease of the felony prisoner on bail.

Note: Metropolitan Jail Section shall notify theWatch Commander, Detective SupportDivision, who shall be responsible for ensuringthe completion of the Form 5.10. Valley JailSection shall notify the Van Nuys Area watchcommander, who shall be responsible for thecompletion of the Form 5.10 for femalesbooked at Valley Jail Section.

When a watch commander (detective or fieldservices) is notified of the anticipated releaseof a felony arrestee in Department custody,he/she shall immediately dispatch an officer tointerview the arrestee and complete thepersonal data/background information andM.O. section of the Form 5.10. Theinterviewing officer shall ensure that thecompleted Form 5.10 is forwarded to theconcerned detective division.

Note: A prisoner shall not be detained solelyfor the purpose of completing the Form 5.10 ifthe Order Fixing Bail or bail has beendelivered to the jailer.

775.24 INVESTIGATOR'S FINALREPORT-RESPONSIBILITY OF WATCHCOMMANDERS AND OFFICERS INCHARGE. Watch commanders and officers incharge in divisions, sections, or units whichprocess the Investigator's Final Report, Form5.10, shall inspect daily the active arresteeindex card file (or control book) and check forthose arrests over 48 hours old for which noForm 5.10 has been submitted.

Watch commanders and officers in charge shallensure that a Form 5.10 is completed anddistributed without delay for each arrestexceeding the maximum in-custody dead line.

775.27 APPROVAL OFINVESTIGATOR'S FINAL REPORT. Aninvestigating officer completing anInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10,authorizing the release of a prisoner, shallsubmit the completed Form 5.10 to his/herwatch commander or officer in charge forapproval. Approval of the watch commander orofficer in charge is not necessary prior to therelease of an arrestee but may be obtained if itsprocurement causes no delay in the release. Ifthe division commanding officer does notapprove the release, the division commandingofficer shall refer the Form 5.10 to thecommanding officer of the concerned bureaufor his/her review, together with his reason fornot approving the release.

775.30 ACCOMPLISHING RELEASEOF ARRESTEE. To effect the release of anarrestee who is in custody, the investigatingofficer shall:

∗ Present one copy of the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10, authorizing the release,to the jailer having custody of the arrestee;or,

∗ Present one copy of the Form 5.10 to ateletype operator. The operator shall berequested to send an Order to ReleaseTeletype to the custodial detention officer.If a Notification of Release Teletype is notreceived from the custodial detention officerwithin one hour, the investigating officershall determine the reason for delay.

The detention officer or the teletype operatorreceiving the Form 5.10 authorizing the releaseof an arrestee shall be requested to sign theinvestigating officer's copy as a receipt.

775.31 RELEASE OF CHP ARRESTEES.A CHP officer requesting the release of aprisoner booked by the CHP shall normallymake the request by teletype. When a CHPofficer arrives at a jail facility and requests therelease of such a prisoner and no teletype hasbeen sent, the CHP officer shall be referred tothe divisional investigating officers orDetective Support Division. When theinvestigating officer determines that the releaseshould be authorized, he/she shall complete anInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10.

775.32 RELEASE PROCEDURE - WHENPRISONER DIES IN A DIVISION JAIL.When a prisoner dies in a division jail, theinvestigating officer shall follow the procedureset forth in 4/238.65.

775.50 RELEASES TO OTHERAGENCIES. Investigating officers shallimmediately notify the Fugitive WarrantsSection, Detective Support Division, byteletype or telephone, when:

∗ It is learned that an arrestee is wanted byanother agency on a felony charge; and,

∗ A local charge is to be dismissed and thearrestee is wanted by another agency on afelony charge.

Approval to release an individual who isarrested by this Department on a foreign felonywant or warrant directly to the wanting agency,without being formally booked by thisDepartment, shall be obtained from theFugitive Warrants Section.

Note: If the arrestee is wanted by more thanone agency, the Fugitive Warrants Sectionshall determine the agency to which he/sheshall be released.

The name of the advising officer shall be notedin the Investigator's Final Report, Form 5.10.

Note: When the Fugitive Warrants Section isclosed, Detective Support Division shallfurnish advice on release procedures.

775.54 PLACING FELONY CHARGEPRIOR TO RELEASE TO WANTINGAGENCY. Authorization to supplementarycharge an arrestee with a felony for anotheragency (4/775.50) shall be indicated on theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10. All

copies of the Form 5.10 shall be delivered tothe Fugitive Warrants Section, DetectiveSupport Division. The Fugitive WarrantsSection shall:

∗ Effect the release of the original charge;∗ Cause the charge of the wanting agency to

be placed against the prisoner;∗ Record on the Form 5.10 that the felony

charge has been placed;∗ Complete a new Arrest Report, Form 5.2;

and,∗ Provide for the distribution of the Form 5.10

and the Form 5.2.

775.58 RELEASE TO WANTINGAGENCY WITHOUT PLACING FELONYCHARGE. Upon authorization to release anarrestee to another agency without placing afelony charge (4/775.50), the investigatingofficer shall include in the Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10:

∗ A full explanation of the circumstances ofthe release;

∗ The names of the officers, if known, and thejurisdiction to which the arrestee wasreleased; and,

∗ The charge upon which the arrestee waswanted.

Two copies of the original Arrest Report, Form5.2; and one copy of the Form 5.10 shall besent to the Fugitive Warrants Section,Detective Support Division.

775.60 CRIME COMMITTED BYJUVENILE-ARRESTED WHEN ADULT.When it is discovered that a person overeighteen years of age, in custody on a felonycharge, was less than eighteen years of age atthe time of the commission of the crime, theinvestigating officer shall inform his/her watchcommander of the status of the case. The watchcommander shall determine whether the case isto be reassigned.

The investigating officer given responsibilityfor the investigation of the crime anddisposition of the case shall:

∗ Obtain advice from the Watch Commander,Detective Support Division; and,

∗ Complete an Investigator's Final Report,Form 5.10, to release the adult charge.

775.70 RELEASE OF ARMED FORCESPERSONNEL-NOTIFICATION. Prior to therelease of a member of the Armed Forces, thewatch commander shall notify the DepartmentCommand Post, Communications Division,and shall be guided by the instructions of thewatch commander.

Exception: This provision does not applywhen Armed Forces personnel are fieldreleased.

Note: Armed Forces arrestees who areotherwise legally entitled to immediate releasemay be detained for a reasonable time up toforty-eight hours from time of arrest, excluding



Sundays and holidays, if there has been a holdplaced on the arrestee by military authorities.

778. NOTIFICATION OF FELONYBOOKING DISPOSITION.778.10 REQUIRED NOTIFICATION TORECORDS AND IDENTIFICATIONDIVISION. The Criminal Records Section,Records and Identification Division, shall benotified of all adult male and female felonybooking dispositions as indicated on theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10.

778.20 PROCEDURE FOR NOTIFYINGRECORDS AND IDENTIFICATIONDIVISION. Upon disposition of a felonyarrest, the concerned investigating officer shallimmediately complete an Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10. The original copy of theForm 5.10 shall be forwarded to the Data EntrySection, Information Technology Division,without delay. Following key punching offelony disposition information, theInvestigator's Final Report, Form 5.10, shall beforwarded to Records and IdentificationDivision.

780.VEHICLES-INVESTIGATION ANDRELEASE.780.10 AREA OF IMPOUNDMENT-DEFINED. The area of impoundment isdefined as the area in which the vehicle isactually stored.

780.15 PRESENT OWNER-DEFINED.The present owner of a vehicle is defined asthe registered owner on the records of theDepartment of Motor Vehicles.

Exception: When the registered owner onrecord has transferred his/her ownership rights,the present owner is the last person to whomequity or ownership of the vehicle has beentransferred.

780.17 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY-LOST VEHICLES.Lost vehicle information is automaticallypurged from the Stolen Vehicle System (SVS)thirty days from the date entered. When a lostvehicle has not been found or reported stolenbefore the SVS purge date, the follow-upinvestigator shall:

∗ Contact the present owner or reportingperson and, when appropriate, reclassify thereport to "Stolen" by completing aFollow-up Report, Form 3.14, and notifyingthe Vehicle Information Processing Unit,Records and Identification Division; and,

∗ When reclassification is not appropriate,cause the "Lost" information to be reenteredinto the SVS.

Note: There is no limit on the number of timeslost vehicle information may be reentered intothe SVS. However, each reentry requiresfollow-up prior to the thirty-day automaticpurge.

780.18 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY-FOUND VEHICLE.

When a vehicle which was reported as lost hasbeen found, has not been impounded, and nonotification has been made to the registeredowner or person reporting the lost vehicle(4/221.20), it shall be the responsibility of theArea investigating officer to contact the owneror person who made the lost report. Theinvestigating officer shall notify the victimwithin 48 hours, excluding weekends andholidays. The victim must be advised of thelocation and condition of the vehicle.

780.19 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY-DISPOSAL OFUNIDENTIFIABLE VEHICLES ANDVEHICLE PARTS. Upon determining that anunidentifiable vehicle or normally serializedvehicle part is of no value in a criminalproceeding, or when the court havingjurisdiction does not order disposition of theunidentifiable vehicle or normally serializedpart, the investigating officer shall:

∗ Immediately notify Commercial Auto TheftSection, Commercial Crimes Division todetermine if disposal by civil court action isappropriate;

∗ If directed by Commercial Auto TheftSection, complete and distribute the Noticeof Impoundment of Vehicle and/orComponent Part, L.A.P.D. Form 15.23.1;and,

∗ Record the action taken as a result ofCommercial Auto Theft Section’s advice,and include the disposition of the item on aFollow-Up Report, Form 3.14.

780.20 INQUIRIES CONCERNING THESTATUS OF STOLEN, LOST, ORIMPOUNDED VEHICLES.

Employee Receiving Inquiry-Responsibility.When a person who has a legitimate interest ina vehicle makes an inquiry concerning itsstatus, the employee receiving the inquiry shallcheck the Stolen Vehicle System (SVS).

If the vehicle is impounded, determine theArea of impoundment from the SVS and:

∗ If stored only, refer the person to the towgarage. The person shall be advised that, tosecure the release of the vehicle, from thegarage, he/she must present proof ofownership or written authorization from thepresent owner to receive the vehicle. If theowner is in custody of the Department, theauthorization may be on a Property ReleaseAuthorization, Form 6.8; and,

∗ If held, refer the person to the appropriateArea Vehicle Control Clerk.

780.24 INSPECTION OF VEHICLES -VEHICLE THEFT INVESTIGATIONS.Pursuant to Section 2805 VC, member of a citypolice department whose primaryresponsibility is to conduct vehicle theftinvestigations (auto detective) may inspectvehicles required to be registered under theVehicle Code, or any identifiable vehiclecomponent part thereof, for the purpose oflocating stolen vehicles. These inspectionsshall be conducted only when the vehicle or

component part thereof is in on one of thelocations outlined in Section 2805 VC. Theofficer may inspect the title or registration ofthose vehicles in order to establish rightfulownership or possession of the vehicle oridentifiable vehicle component. Detectivecommanding officers shall:

∗ Ensure vehicle inspections pursuant toSection 2805 VC are conducted regularly;

∗ Ensure Detectives III report the results ofeach inspection conducted during theprevious month; and,

∗ Approve the wearing of the officialDepartment jumpsuit in accordance withManual Section 3/619.20.

Exception: Officers are cautioned that Section2805 VC shall only be used by personnelwhose primary assignment is the investigationof vehicle theft crimes. Under no circumstanceshall Section 2805 VC be used to circumvent asearch warrant or to search for non-vehicletheft-related evidence. Whenever sufficientprobable cause exists, a search warrant shall beobtained.

780.30 AUDIT OF IMPOUNDREPORTS.Area Detectives. The concerned detectives inthe Area of impoundment are responsible forensuring the accuracy and completeness ofreports pertaining to vehicles impounded fromtheir Area.

Area Vehicle Coordinator. The Area VehicleCoordinator shall cause a weekly audit to bemade of Vehicle Impound Reports. Reportsthat indicate a vehicle has been impounded andstored in excess of five days shall be reviewed.The review shall include, but not be limited to:

∗ Verification that the person reporting, andthe present, registered, and legal owners ofthe impounded vehicle were notified. Ifprior notifications were incorrect,appropriate notifications shall be made inwriting and, if practicable, telephonically;

∗ Verification of the status of any holdsplaced on a vehicle as the result of aSubrogated Property Notification, Form10.17. (When a claim has been paid to theowner of a stolen vehicle, the insurancecompany becomes the legal owner); and,

∗ Verification that all notifications andvehicle status information have beendocumented on the Area Vehicle ControlClerk's copy of the Impound Report.

Note: If a DR number from a related report isto be as signed to a Vehicle Report, CHP Form180, VIPU shall be apprised of all pertinentinformation regarding the impound.

780.35 VEHICLE REPORTED STOLENOUTSIDE CITY.(4/765.52) When a vehiclewhich has been reported stolen outside the Cityis recovered in Los Angeles, an investigatingofficer of the Area in which the vehicle wasimpounded shall notify the law enforcementagency which reported the theft.



780.40 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'SRESPONSIBILITY-VEHICLESRECOVERED OUTSIDE THECITY.(4/765.54) When an investigatingofficer responsible for the investigation of avehicle stolen inside the City receivesinformation from another agency that thevehicle has been recovered outside the City,the officer shall:

∗ Notify the victim within 48 hours,excluding weekends and holidays, andinform the victim of the location andcondition of the vehicle;

∗ Notify the registered and legal owners, inwriting, concerning the status of the vehicle;

∗ When a Subrogated Property Notification,Form 10.17, is on file, notify the subrogatorthat the vehicle has been recovered; and,

∗ Document the notification information onthe vehicle report work copy.

780.45 VEHICLE RECOVERED BYOWNER. When a person requests thecancellation of a Vehicle "Stolen" Report, CHPForm 180, by telephone, he or she shall beadvised to make a written report at the nearestpolice station.

780.50 RELEASING VEHICLE HELDFOR INVESTIGATION. (A vehicleimpounded and stored only shall be released bythe tow garage storing the vehicle.)

The assigned detective of the division forwhich the vehicle was held shall be responsiblefor releasing the hold. When the vehicle is nolonger needed, the detective shall ensure thatthe following information is blocked out on therelease copy of the Vehicle Investigation at theArea of Impoundment:

∗ Juvenile suspect/arrestee names andaddresses;

∗ Items which would endanger the safety of awitness or other person; and,

∗ Items which would interfere with thesuccess of the investigation or any otherinvestigation.

The detective shall then complete the releaseauthorization portion on the release copy of theVehicle Investigation at the Area ofImpoundment. (Indicate "OK to Release.")

Exception: If the vehicle is impounded in anArea other than the investigator's Area ofassignment, an "O.K. to Release" teletype maybe sent to the Area Vehicle Control Clerk inthe Area of impoundment. The Area VehicleControl Clerk may accept a telephonic releasefrom an investigator when there is no doubtconcerning its authenticity. In these cases, itshall be the responsibility of the Area VehicleControl Clerk to block out the above listeditems (Name of juvenile arrestee, etc.)

The Area Vehicle Control Clerk shall completeall required notices of impounded vehicle andtelephonically contact the person to whom thevehicle is to be released, unless notified by theinvestigator that such notification has alreadybeen made.

780.60 RELEASE OF VEHICLESIMPOUNDED PURSUANT TO VEHICLECODE SECTION 22651 (O) OR (P).Area Vehicle Coordinator or ReleasingOfficer’s Responsibility. An employeereleasing a vehicle shall determine if thevehicle was impounded from within his or herArea/division. If not, the employee shall referthe citizen to the appropriate Area, division, orgovernmental agency.

An employee authorizing the release of avehicle which has been impounded pursuant toSection 22651 (o) (p) VC shall:

∗ Refer the person requesting the release tothe Department of Motor Vehicles whenreasons exist which preclude a vehicle frombeing released (i.e., owner or agent does notposses a valid driver's license or the vehicleis not currently registered);

∗ Verify proof of registration for subsection(o) impounds, or possession of a validdriver's license of subsection (p) impoundsprior, to releasing the vehicle; photocopythe bona fide identification and registrationprovided by the citizen and attach the copyto the Vehicle Report, CHP Form 180;

∗ Complete all of the information in the"Vehicle Release Order" box on theimpound/hold copy of CHP Form 180; and,

∗ Ensure a copy of the properly completedvehicle release order is forwarded to theArea Vehicle Coordination, Area ofimpound.

Documenting Release when Vehicle ReportUnavailable. When an employee is requestedto release an impounded vehicle and theoriginal "impound" Vehicle Report, CHP Form180, is unavailable, the employee shall querythe Stolen Vehicle System to determine the DRnumber assigned to the impounded vehicle andensure the citizen requesting the release iseither the registered or legal owner. Using ablank CHP Form 180, the employee shall:

∗ Record the citizen's personal information(i.e., name, residence and business address,etc.) in the appropriate boxes on the CHPForm 180;

∗ Photocopy the bona fide identificationprovided by the citizen and attach the copyto the CHP Form 180;

∗ Check the "OK REL" box and complete theappropriate vehicle description boxes on theCHP Form 180;

∗ Complete the Vehicle Release Order portionof the CHP Form 180;

∗ Ensure the person requesting the releasesigns the release order (CHP Form 180) inthe space provided;

∗ Release the vehicle and provide a copy ofthe CHP Form 180 to the registered ownerfor presentation to the Official PoliceGarage; and,

∗ Forward the CHP Form 180, withattachments, to the Area VehicleCoordinator, Area of impound.

Release of Impounded Vehicles During Non-

Business Hours. During non-business hours,when the Area Vehicle Coordinator is notavailable, document verification and releaseauthorization shall be completed by the patroldivision watch commander.

Exception: Bureau commanding officers mayexercise the option to centralize the documentverification and release procedures for theentire bureau. However, document verificationand release procedures for 22651(o) and (p)VC impounds shall be available 24 hours perday.

780.70 RELEASE TO PRESENT OWNER.An impounded vehicle which is available forrelease (4/780.50) shall be released to thepresent owner or the owner's representative:

∗ Upon presentation of proof of ownership;and,

∗ Upon presentation of satisfactory personalidentification and written authorizationfrom the present owner to receive theimpounded vehicle.

780.72 RELEASE OF IMPOUNDEDVEHICLE-OWNER IN CUSTODY. Whenthe present owner of an impounded vehicle isin custody of the Department, the vehicle shallbe released to another person only when it isavailable for release and:

∗ The person presents a properly completedProperty Release Authorization, Form 6.8,authorizing that person to receive thevehicle; and,

∗ The person presents satisfactory personalidentification to show that the individual isthe person authorized to receive theimpounded vehicle.

780.75 RELEASE OF IMPOUNDEDVEHICLE TO INDIVIDUAL ORCORPORATE LEGAL OWNER. Animpounded vehicle which is available forrelease shall be released to the individual orcorporate legal owner only when:

∗ A reasonable search by the concernedinvestigating officers has failed to locate thepresent owner;

∗ The individual or corporate legal owner orthe owner's representative presentssatisfactory personal identification andproof of ownership;

∗ The legal owner or owner's representativehas been provided with, and advised tocomplete, a Legal Owner's Release andIndemnification Agreement, Form 15.17;and,

∗ The legal owner or the owner'srepresentative presents a completed copy ofa Legal Owner's Release andIndemnification Agreement, Form 15.17.

Note: Patrol and detective divisions shallmaintain an adequate supply of the LegalOwner's Release and IndemnificationAgreement, Form 15.17, for public use.

780.77 HOLD ON VEHICLE-TWO-DAYLIMIT. An impounded vehicle shall not be



held for investigation longer than two businessdays, unless the vehicle has been impoundedfor a violation of Section 22651 (o) or (p) VC.

Exception: The supervisor (Detective III orhigher) of the detective responsible for therelease of a vehicle which has been impoundedas a result of an investigation not related toSection 22651 (o) or (p) VC may authorize anextension when specific circumstance warrant.When an extension is warranted, the supervisorshall ensure the Area Vehicle Coordinator andthe Official Police Garage (OPG) are notifiedof the extension and that the justification forthe extension is recorded on the Investigator'sCase Progress Log, Form 1.44.

Note: The release of a hold for a vehicleimpounded pursuant to Section 22651 (o) or(p) VC is not triggered by time, but actiontaken by the vehicle owner, the vehicle shall beheld until disposed of by the storing OPG.However, for OPG lien processing purposesonly, the hold will lift six calendar days afterthe vehicle has been impounded.

780.80 AREA VEHICLE CONTROLCLERK. (See also "Impounding ConveyancesUsed in Drug Trafficking," 4/222.16). EachArea Vehicle Control Clerk (day watch SeniorClerk Typist position) shall:

∗ Maintain a Vehicle Impound Control Log,Form 12.39, for all vehicles impoundedwithin the Area, including vehicles withholds;

∗ Notify appropriate supervisors when avehicle has been held for two business days;

∗ Notify the victim within 48 hours,excluding weekends and holidays, andinform the victim of the location andcondition of the vehicle when suchnotification has not been made by theimpounding employee;

∗ Notify the registered and legal owners, inwriting, concerning the status of therecovered or impounded vehicle when suchnotification has not been made by theimpounding employee;

∗ Send teletype notification to lawenforcement agencies regarding recovery ofvehicles reported stolen or lost in theirjurisdiction;

∗ Monitor distribution of the VehicleImpound Notice;

∗ Attach teletyped releases to the originalsand Area file copies of the VehicleInvestigation;

∗ Fulfill all assigned duties andresponsibilities pursuant to vehicle impoundhearings (4/226.05);

∗ Teletype vehicle information and inquiriesto Areas, divisions, and outside agencies asnecessary;

∗ Following an investigator's release of ahold, cause a telephonic notification to bemade to the person to whom the vehicle isto be released. The notification informationshall be documented on the original andArea copies of the Vehicle Investigation;

∗ Complete and send an additional Notice ofImpounded Vehicle to the person to whoma held vehicle is to be released; and,

∗ Upon release of a Hold, forward two copiesof the Vehicle Release Order to theimpound garage. Retain the subsequentlyreceived Garage Report of Release or Salein the divisional file.

Note: When a hold has been placed on avehicle at any OPG, the Area Vehicle ControlClerk shall forward a copy of the report to theDepartment entity for which the hold has beenplaced.

Stored Vehicle-Notification to State. TheArea Vehicle Control Clerk shall forward aNotice of Stored/Abandoned Vehicle, Form15.23, to the Department of Justice,Sacramento, when:

∗ It cannot be verified that the owner of animpounded vehicle has been notified;

∗ The vehicle is unregistered or registered outof State; and,

∗ The vehicle has not been claimed withinfive days after its availability for release.

Note: Vehicles registered in California requireonly an entry into the Stolen Vehicle System(SVS).

If the vehicle is registered out of State, ateletype from the registering state, indicatingthe registered owner's address, shall beattached. Names and addresses of all persons towhom a Notice of Impounded Vehicle was sentshall also be forwarded.

780.85 ANSWERING INQUIRIESCONCERNING THE STATUS OFSTOLEN, LOST, OR IMPOUNDEDVEHICLES. An Area Vehicle Control Clerkreceiving an inquiry concerning the status of avehicle shall verify the status of the vehicle bychecking the SVS.

Vehicle Impounded for Investigation.

∗ Determine the release status of the vehicleby contacting the concerned investigatingofficer, and apprise the person inquiring;and,

∗ If the vehicle is not available for release andthe reason cannot be determined, refer theperson to the division for which the holdwas placed. Vehicle Impounded andStored Only. Refer the person to the towgarage storing the vehicle.

782. NOTIFICATION TO INSURERSON SUSPECTED FRAUD CASES. When aninvestigating officer initiates or conducts afollow-up investigation of a fraudulent actrelating to a motor vehicle theft or motorvehicle insurance claim, the investigatingofficer shall cause the concerned insurancecompany to be notified in writing within thirtydays of becoming aware of the suspectedfraudulent act. The correspondence shall besigned by the investigating officer'scommanding officer, and should be directed tothe nearest corporate office location of the

insurance company. The information containedin the notification should be limited to thatnecessary to inform the insurance company ofthe occurrence, and shall not include anycriminal history information.

Note: Vehicle Code Sections 10903 and 10904may be used as guidelines in preparing thewritten notification.

790. PROPERTY-INVESTIGATIONAND DISPOSITION.790.05 CHARGE-BASED PROPERTYDISPOSITION. The investigation anddisposition of property shall be performed inaccordance with charge-based evidencedisposition procedures (4/550.12).

790.10 INVESTIGATION OFPROPERTY REPORTS-GENERAL. It shallbe the responsibility of the concerned detectivecommanding officer to determine theguidelines for the viewing of property asnecessary to maintain the quality ofinvestigations.

When detectives are assigned the responsibilityfor conducting the investigation of a casewhich involves booked property, they shall:

∗ Upon viewing booked property, cause theirname to be entered on the Property Card,Form 10.07.2, maintained by the concernedproperty officer; and,

∗ Complete a Follow-up Report, Form 3.14,when an item has a serial number,monogram, or other identifiablecharacteristic which was not described onthe related property report.

790.12 COMPLETION OF PROPERTYDISPOSITION REQUEST. Prior tosubmitting the Investigator's Final Report,Form 5.10, to the concerned detectivesupervisor for adult arrestees, or the ArrestReport, Form 5.2, for juvenile arrestees, aForm 10.06 containing all appropriateinformation known by the detective, includingdisposition instructions, i.e., "Dispose,""Release," or "Hold Until," shall be attached tothe Form 5.10 or the Form 5.2.

Note: In the event of multiple arrests,evidence shall be held until it is no longerneeded for prosecution in a related case.

When the Form 5.10 or the Form 5.2 has beenapproved by the concerned detectivesupervisor, the Form 10.06 shall be forwardedto the Area/specialized division PropertyDisposition Coordinator who shall forward it tothe appropriate property room.

In instances when the completion of a Form5.10 or Form 5.2 is inappropriate, a Form10.06 will be issued to the employeeresponsible for the disposition of the propertyby Property Division.

790.15 PROPERTY DETERMINED TOBE LOST OR STOLEN-NOTIFICATIONS.When an investigating officer identifies anitem listed on a Property Report as having been



reported on a crime or lost report assigned toanother investigating officer of thisDepartment, and no suspect is in custody, he orshe shall notify the concerned investigatingofficer who shall assume the responsibility forthe investigation and release of the bookedproperty.

When an investigating officer identifies anitem listed on a Property Report as having beenreported on a crime or lost report in anotherjurisdiction, he or she shall:

∗ Notify the outside agency of thecircumstances surrounding the booking ofthe property;

∗ Obtain the name and address of the victim;∗ Record on the reverse side of the Property

Disposition Card the name and address ofthe victim and the item numbers as listed onthe Property Report;

∗ When the item has no evidentiary value tothis Department and upon authorizationfrom the outside jurisdiction, indicatedisposition instructions for the property;and,

Exception: Credit cards shall be released tothe concerned credit card company, and checksshall be destroyed.

∗ Forward the Property Disposition Card tothe custodial property room.

790.20 SPECIALIZED INVESTIGATIVEUNITS. When property is taken into custodyand booked by an officer of a specializedinvestigative unit, he or she shall assume theresponsibility for the investigation anddisposition of the property.

Note: The investigating officer shall forwardtwo copies of the Property Report to thedetective division in the geographic Areawhere the property was booked.

790.22 INVESTIGATIONS ANDNOTIFICATIONS REQUIRED WHENFIREARMS BOOKED.Investigation of Booked Firearms. Therobbery unit coordinator of Area detectivesshall review and cause an investigation to bemade of all Property Reports, Form 10.01.0,listing firearms booked in their divisionrelative to a misdemeanor crime or anynon-criminal incident for which noinvestigative officer or specialized detectivedivision has been assigned follow-upinvestigation responsibility.

Investigative personnel assigned to follow-upinvestigation responsibility for a reportinvolving a firearm booked in or by theirArea/division shall:

∗ Cause the detective's name and division ofassignment to be entered across the top ofthe appropriate Property Card, Form 10.7.2;

∗ Upon being assigned the report, query AFSand NCIC and record the finding on aFollow-up Investigation Report, Form 3.14,if the booking employee was unable to

ascertain the current status of the firearm atthe time the firearm was originally booked.If the firearm has been reported stolen/lost,complete a Form 3.14 to include:

∗ A complete description of the firearm;∗ A narrative statement indicating that the

stolen/lost entries are to be removedfrom the AFS; and,

∗ If the firearm is an LAPD stolen/lostprint the word "FIREARM" in red in thetop margin of the report.

∗ If the firearm has been reported stolen/lost,notify the investigating officer responsiblefor investigating the original stolen/lostreport via telephone or teletype, recordingthe date, time, and name of the investigatingofficer notified on the Form 3.14. If thefirearm is not an LAPD stolen/lost, requestthe outside agency to enter the appropriateevidence information in AFS and NCIC;

∗ Upon receipt of the Firearms SupplementalProperty Report, Form 10.01.01, and theContinuation Sheet for FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form10.01.02, when applicable, the Gun Unit,Detective Support Division, shall continueto forward copies directly to ATF’sNational Tracing Center; and,

∗ Recheck the AFS and NCIC within fivedays to ensure that the evidence informationhas been entered.

Firearm Notification-The Gun Unit,Detective Support Division’s Responsibility.Personnel assigned to the Gun Unit, DetectiveSupport Division, shall complete a FirearmNotification, LAPD Temp. Form 67.0, andforward it to the concerned detective divisionwhen:

∗ An outside agency is in possession of afirearm wanted by the Department; or,

∗ A firearm in Department custody is wantedby an outside agency or a Departmentdivision other than the division responsiblefor booking the firearm.

Firearm Notification-Assigned Detective-Responsibility. When a LAPD Temp. Form67.0, is received from the Gun Unit, DetectiveSupport Division, concerning a recovered,stolen/lost or wanted firearm, the assigneddetective supervisor shall assign it to aninvestigative officer as a Category I follow-upinvestigation. When a Form 3.14 is completed,the investigative supervisor shall cause onecopy of the Form 3.14 and the FirearmNotification to be forwarded to the Gun Unit,Detective Support Division.

790.24 SCREENING IN-CUSTODYFIREARMS. Personnel assigned to the GunUnit, Detective Support Division (DSD), shall:

∗ Maintain a list identifying firearms wantedin connection with unsolved homicides andother serious crimes;

∗ Update the open-homicide list of wantedfirearms when notified by ScientificInvestigation Division (SID) of an

additional firearm sought for comparisonpurposes;

∗ Review all received Property Reports, Form10.01.0, Firearms Supplemental PropertyReport, Form 10.01.01, and theContinuation Sheet for FirearmsSupplemental Property Report, Form10.01.02, when applicable, and determine ifany firearms listed on a report should be testfired. If a firearm is to be test fired, the GunUnit, DSD, shall:

∗ Arrange for the transfer of the firearm toCentral Property Section; and,

∗ Enter on the concerned Form 10.01.0,the name of the officer reviewing theForm 10.01.0;

∗ If no SID testing is required, enter on theconcerned Form 10.01.0 the name of thereviewing officer, date reviewed, and astatement that no SID testing is required;

∗ Maintain a 30-day rotating suspense file ofall Forms 10.01.0 received and reviewed;

∗ When notified by SID of an additionalfirearm being sought, review the 30-dayrotating suspense file to determine if adescribed weapon is currently inDepartment custody. If such a firearm wasbooked into custody on or after the date ofthe crime in which SID is interested, followthe prescribed procedure for transfer of thefirearm to SID for testing;

∗ Retain copies of the Forms 10.01.0,Firearms Supplemental Property Report,Form 10.01.01, and the Continuation Sheetfor Firearms Supplemental Property Report,Form 10.01.02, on file for a period of oneyear; and,

∗ When telephonically contacted forauthorization to release a firearm within 90days of the date on which the firearm wasbooked, determine if the firearm in questionis wanted for SID testing. If the firearm isnot wanted, so advise the inquiringinvestigating officer and authorize releaseof the firearm. If the firearm is wanted,deny release of the firearm and ensureinitiation of the procedure for firearmtesting by SID.

790.25 PROPERTY BOOKED-NARCOTICS ARRESTS.Narcotics Arrests by InvestigativePersonnel. The investigation and dispositionof property booked as a result of a narcoticsarrest made by an investigating officerassigned to an area or specialized investigativedivision or unit shall be the responsibility ofthe arresting officer.

Narcotics Arrests by Uniformed or OtherNon-investigative Personnel. The follow-upinvestigation and disposition of all evidence forwhich an adult arrestee was booked on a felonynarcotics charge shall be the responsibility ofNarcotics Division. When a juvenile arrestee isbooked on a felony narcotics charge, thefollow-up investigation and disposition of allevidence shall be the responsibility of JuvenileDivision. The follow-up investigation and



disposition of evidence in cases involvingadults and juveniles arrested together shall behandled per mutual agreement betweenNarcotics Division and Juvenile Division(4/550.12).

Note: In determining the appropriatedisposition of property, the investigatingofficer shall coordinate his/her investigationwith other potentially concerned investigatingofficers.

Narcotic Evidence Returned from Court.Disposition instructions for narcotic evidencenot received into evidence by the court and nolonger needed by the Department shall beindicated by the employee returning suchevidence to the property room. The returningemployee shall complete a PropertyDisposition/Request for Evidence, Form 10.6,indicating the reason the property was notreceived into evidence by the court and thedisposition instructions for the property(4/540.40).

Note: The employee returning the narcoticevidence shall contact the concerned deputydistrict attorney or city attorney in determiningthe proper disposition of the evidence prior toreturning the evidence to the property room.

790.27 PROPERTY BOOKED-JUVENILE NARCOTICS. When ScientificInvestigation Division receives an AnalyzedEvidence Report in juvenile narcotic cases, theconcerned analyst shall:

∗ Complete the analysis of the evidence assoon as possible.

∗ Complete appropriate portions of theAnalyzed Evidence Report and forward twocopies to the Juvenile Justice SystemMonitoring Unit, Juvenile Division.

Note: Investigating officers normally have tofile the petition on "detained" juvenile caseswithin 24 hours and, on "released" juvenilecases, within seven calendar days.

∗ Ensure that he/she is available on an on-callstatus for court appearances.

Note: Investigating officers requestingpetitions in juvenile narcotic cases whereanalysis of evidence is required shall includethe notation "S.I.D. Representative On Call-DR Number" in the subpoena list on theappropriate reports and make a request foranalysis to SID.

790.30 CHECKS, CHECKPARAPHERNALIA, AND CREDITCARDS. An investigating officer assigned theresponsibility for conducting the investigationof a Property Report, wherein the principalitems booked are checks, check paraphernalia,or credit cards, shall:

∗ Metropolitan Areas. Forward two copiesof the Property Report to CommercialCrimes Division, which shall assumeresponsibility for the investigation anddisposition of the property.

∗ Valley Areas. Forward one copy of theProperty Report to Commercial CrimesDivision and forward two copies to ValleyForgery Section, which shall assumeresponsibility for the investigation anddisposition of the property.

∗ Harbor, Pacific, or West Los AngelesArea. Assume the responsibility for theinvestigation and disposition of the propertyand forward one copy of the PropertyReport to Commercial Crimes Division.

790.35 COMPLETION OF PROPERTYDISPOSITION. An investigating officer whoreceives a Property Disposition Request, Form10.06, from the Property DispositionCoordinator shall indicate the dispositioninstructions for the property on the form andreturn it to the concerned Property DispositionCoordinator by the 20th day of each month.

Note: When the owner of the property isunknown and the item has a serial number, theinvestigating officer shall request a want on theitem through the Automated Property System,Department of Justice. If no identification ismade, he/she shall attach a copy of the teletypereply to the Form 10.6, prior to submission tothe Property Disposition Coordinator.

Whenever property belonging to anorganization or company is to be released, theinvestigating officer shall indicate the name ofthe individual or agent in the organization orcompany to whom the property should bereleased on the "Name" line of the Form 10.06.

792. DISCOVERY PROCEDURES.

792.10 DISCOVERY OF MATERIALOBTAINED IN A CRIMINALINVESTIGATION. An investigating officerreceiving a request from a deputy districtattorney to discover materials obtained in acriminal investigation shall:

∗ Consult with the deputy district attorneyfrom whom the request was received, ifnecessary, to interpret unclear requests, toascertain the scope of discovery requests; orto determine the propriety of releasingspecific requested items such as the namesof confidential informants, personnel files,etc. When an officer receives a requestwhich appears to be unreasonable, he or shemay request that the deputy district attorneychallenge it by filing a notice ofnoncompliance.

∗ Obtain copies of all written materials to befurnished.

∗ Prepare a brief description of the contents ofany requested video or audio taperecordings, photographs, motion pictures, orother requested physical evidence held bythe Department (e.g., "One audio tape, 25minutes in length, containing conversationbetween John Doe and Officer R. Smith,recorded on October 2, 1975"). Include thetime and place these items will be availablefor inspection and propose a procedure

which the defense attorney should follow inarranging for inspection.

∗ Prepare a separate list of any additionalrelated items held by the Department whichmay be subject to a discovery request.

∗ Sign a statement if so requested by thedeputy district attorney. The statement,which will become part of the deputydistrict attorney's statement of compliance,shall be in the following form:

"I am the investigating officer in People v. case number . All information and/orevidence known to the investigating agency asto those matters requested and/or ordereddiscovered is attached to this statement.

Signature

∗ Forward the statement, copies of writtenmaterials, list of related materials, anddescriptions of items available forinspection to the concerned deputy districtattorney within 10 days of the date of therequest made by the defense.

792.20 NEW EVIDENCE OBTAINEDAFTER DISCOVERY COMPLIANCE. If,after having complied with a discovery request,investigating officers acquire new evidencewhich may be the subject of discovery in thesame case, they shall:

∗ Immediately notify the concerned deputydistrict attorney; and,

∗ Upon instructions from the deputy districtattorney follow the procedures outlinedabove regarding response to discoveryrequests.

OUTSIDE POLICEAGENCIES

801. OUTSIDE AGENCIES. "OutsideAgencies" refers to those organizations withwhich the Department has established formalprocedures:

∗ California Highway Patrol;∗ California State University Police;∗ Los Angeles Community College Police;∗ Los Angeles County Office of Public

Safety;∗ Los Angeles Department of Airports Police

Bureau (LADAPB) (Formal procedureswith LADAPB are restricted to the bookingof evidence and property into Departmentcustody, Manual Section 4/840);

∗ Los Angeles Department of Transportation,Transportation Investigators;

∗ Los Angeles Department of GeneralServices Security Division;

∗ Los Angeles Harbor Department PortWarden;

∗ Los Angeles Housing Authority PoliceDepartment;.

∗ Los Angeles Unified School District PoliceDepartment; and,



∗ University of Southern CaliforniaDepartment of Public Safety.

Peace Officers' Powers. Officers of outsideagencies are police officers while on-duty andmay make arrests, conduct investigations, andcomplete reports involving routine criminalmatters as necessary to protect propertydesignated as the concerned agency'sresponsibility. The Los Angeles PoliceDepartment shall retain final responsibility inall police matters occurring on school district,community college, park, or HousingAuthority property within the City.

810. INVESTIGATIVERESPONSIBILITY OF OUTSIDE POLICEAGENCY OFFICERS. Outside police agencyofficers will normally conduct routinepreliminary investigations of crimes occurringon property designated as the concernedagency's responsibility. The responsibility forconducting follow-up investigations shallremain with the LAPD.

Note: This Department shall conduct both thepreliminary and the follow-up investigations ofany complex felony crimes and crimes ofviolence involving the use of any weapon.

811. RESPONSIBILITY OF THEDEPARTMENT ON STATE UNIVERSITYPROPERTY. Officers of the Los AngelesPolice Department shall retain the preliminaryand follow-up investigative responsibility forthe following situations occurring on UCLA orstate university property:

∗ Homicide and death investigations;∗ Crimes involving critical injuries;∗ Any situation requiring the Los Angeles

Police Department Special Weapons andTactics Team;

∗ Bomb threats requiring the Los AngelesPolice Department; and,

∗ Other major crimes beyond the resources ofrespective campus police departments.

In cases involving crimes on the respectivecampuses, persons arrested and propertybooked by members of this Department shallbe handled according to current procedures.

815. FINGERPRINT INVESTIGATIONS.The Department will provide requiredfingerprint investigations within the City whenrequested by the:

∗ California Highway Patrol;∗ Los Angeles Community Colleges Police;∗ Los Angeles County Office of Public

Safety;∗ Los Angeles Department of General

Services Security Division;∗ Los Angeles Harbor Department Port

Warden;∗ Los Angeles Housing Authority Police

Department;∗ Los Angeles Unified School District Police

Department; and,∗ University of Southern California

Department of Public Safety. Qualified

officers of these outside agencies mayconduct their own latent printinvestigations.

820. OUTSIDE POLICE AGENCYREPORTS. Crimes investigated by outsidepolice agencies will be reported to thisDepartment on the concerned agency's reportforms. The original of each outside agencyreport will be delivered to the concernedgeographic field services division watchcommander within 24 hours of completion.

Exception: Crime and vehicle reportsrequiring immediate teletype transmission willbe delivered to the concerned field servicesdivision watch commander immediately uponcompletion.

DR Number Issuance and Report Approval.All outside agency reports shall be approvedby a supervisor of this Department prior toacceptance. The approving supervisor shallensure that appropriate DR numbers areobtained from the Area Records unit by theconcerned agency officers after reportapproval.

830. CHEMICAL TEST REQUESTEDBY OUTSIDE POLICE AGENCYOFFICER.

Gas Chromatograph Intoximeter Tests. GasChromatograph Intoximeter tests required foran officer of an outside police agencyinvestigation shall be provided by a qualifiedofficer of the outside agency or an officer ofthis Department. When an outside agencyofficer is not qualified to administer the GasChromatograph Intoximeter Test, and the testis administered by a Department employee, thetests shall be witnessed by the concernedagency officer. Expert testimony in courtrelative to the Gas Chromatograph Intoximetershall be provided by this Department.

Blood and Urine Samples. Blood and urinesamples will be booked at the same location asthe arrestee or at Property Division. Only LosAngeles Police Department blood and urinecontainers shall be accepted.

Note: A CHP officer desiring to administer achemical test to an arrestee in their custodyshall be accommodated in the same manner asan officer of this Department.

840. EVIDENCE BOOKED BYOUTSIDE POLICE AGENCIES. Officers ofan outside police agency shall be permitted tobook evidence and property into the custody ofthis Department. Department officers acceptingcustody of an outside agency's arrestee shallassume responsibility for all evidence andproperty associated with the arrest, and theconcerned agency officer Taken Into Custody,Form 10.10.

Officers of outside agencies removingevidence from Property Division shall complywith procedures applicable to Departmentpersonnel.

When property is booked at an LAPD facilityby officers of the Office of Public Safety(OPS) as a routine preliminary investigation,OPS is responsible for determining thedisposition instructions for that property if thatproperty does not result in an LAPD follow-upinvestigation.

841. EVIDENCE BOOKED BY CHPOFFICERS. The CHP may book evidencewhen it is:

∗ To be analyzed by Scientific InvestigationDivision; and,

∗ A firearm.

The CHP employee shall complete a PropertyReport, Form 10.01.0 (when a firearm isinvolved, a Firearms Supplemental PropertyReport, Form 10.01.01, and the ContinuationSheet for Firearms Supplemental PropertyReport, Form 10.01.02, when applicable, shallalso be completed. A DR number shall beobtained and entered on the report by theLAPD supervisor who approves the report.

850. ARRESTS BY OUTSIDE POLICEAGENCY OFFICERS.Arrests-LAPD’s Responsibility. Outsidepolice agency officers initiating an arrest willcomplete the arrest, booking, and other relatedreports. Department personnel shall assume theinvestigative responsibility for the follow-upinvestigation of the crime.

Officers of this Department shall remainavailable to assist the outside police agencyofficers with the booking and processing oftheir adult and juvenile arrestees, as well asevidence and property procedures.

Note: Outside agency initiated arrests whichrequire transportation to an outside custodialfacility, other than Los Angeles Unified SchoolDistrict arrests, shall be the responsibility ofthe officer initiating the arrest.

The concerned agency officers shall care forthe arrestee's vehicle when they are responsiblefor completing the investigation.

Improper Arrests. When a supervisor of thisDepartment becomes aware that an arresteffected by an outside agency officer isimproper, a supervisor from the concernedagency shall immediately be requested toreview the matter. It shall be the responsibilityof a supervisor of this Department to make thefinal determination on accepting custody of anarrestee.

851. CALIFORNIA HIGHWAYPATROL ARRESTS.CHP’s Responsibility. The CHP shall beresponsible for booking and follow-upinvestigation of persons arrested by CHPofficers within the City when:

∗ The arrest is for an offense which is withinthe purview of the CHP (2400-2409 V.C.),except:



∗ When the offense is related to a non-freeway reportable traffic collision; and,

∗ When the offense is within Division 4,Chapter 4, of the California VehicleCode (Theft and Injury to Vehicles), andthe Los Angeles Police Department hasinvestigative responsibility.

∗ The arrest is for possession of a controlledsubstance, except:

∗ When a juvenile is involved as a suspector victim;

∗ When the quantity of the controlledsubstance could result in a booking for"possession for sale;" and,

∗ When the circumstances of the arrestindicate the need for an on-the-sceneinvestigation by the Department.

∗ The arrest is for 148 P.C. (Resisting); and,∗ The arrest is based on a California

misdemeanor warrant.

Note: When the wanting agency is other thanthe City of Los Angeles, the custodialdetention officer shall ensure that the CHPofficer has notified the wanting agency prior tobooking the arrestee.

LAPD’s Responsibility. When an arrest ismade by a California Highway Patrol officerfor a crime committed in the City and theinvestigation does not ordinarily fall within theresponsibility of the Highway Patrol, a LosAngeles Police Department unit will berequested to meet the California HighwayPatrol unit and accept custody of the arrestee,property, and vehicle.

Note: When an LAPD unit is dispatched andan uncertainty regarding the responsibleagency cannot be resolved in the field, theLAPD officers shall assist the CaliforniaHighway Patrol officers until the responsibilityis later determined by the LAPD watchcommander giving booking approval.

When officers of this Department acceptcustody of a California Highway Patrolarrestee, they shall also assume responsibilityfor the custody of all evidence and propertyassociated with the arrest, and complete thebooking and related reports.

Exception: When the evidence or property isof substantial value, the California HighwayPatrol officers will remain present until theproperty is booked into Department custody.

The concerned Department investigatingofficers shall assume responsibility for thebooking advice and investigation of the crime.Booking approval for any arrest, shall only beobtained from an Area watch commander orthe Watch Commander, Metropolitan JailSection, Jail Division. When the arrest is for amisdemeanor offense, or when the concernedDepartment investigating officers are notavailable, the uniformed watch commander ofthe division of booking shall cause the bookingand related reports to be completed.

Arrest Report Information. When an officerof this Department accepts custody of anarrestee from the CHP and completes thebooking and related reports, the officer shall:

∗ Ensure that all pertinent information isreceived from the CHP officer (e.g., name,serial number, observations, probable cause,violations committed, arrestee's statements,etc.) and is included in the arrest reports;and,

Note: On all misdemeanor arrests, the CHPofficer initiating the arrest shall appear as thearresting officer on the arrest report. Thenames of the LAPD officers accepting custodyof a CHP misdemeanor arrestee shall appear inthe narrative portion of the arrest report.

∗ When the initial arrest is for driving underthe influence (23152 V.C.), attach one copyof the Intoxication Report, CHP Form 218,and both the court and violator copies of theNotice to Appear (traffic citation), CHPForm 215, to the investigating officer'scopies of the LAPD arrest reports. The CHPofficer will administer the related sobrietytests at the appropriate Department facilityand remain present until all related reportsare approved and duplicated. Afterduplication, the original CHP IntoxicationReport shall be returned to the CHP officer.

Note: Information Only-The CHP Notice toAppear will not be signed by the arrestee. Theword "IN CUSTODY" will be placed by theCHP officer in the signature box. The Dateand Time for Appearance box will be leftblank.

Firearms Investigation. When a CHP officerconducting an investigation within the Citydetermines that a person is illegally inpossession of a firearm in violation of Sections12021 through 12031 P.C., the followingprocedures shall apply:

∗ If the arrestee is also in custody for anoffense which is within the purview of theCHP, the uniformed watch commander ofthe Area of arrest or the concernedDepartment investigative supervisor shallprovide booking advice. When booking ona felony charge not within the CHP's scopeof responsibility is advised, the concernedwatch commander or investigativesupervisor shall be advised to book thefirearm into Department custody accordingto the procedure of this Department;

∗ When a CHP officer does not intend to bookthe person, an officer of this Departmentwill be requested to meet the CHP officer. Ifthe responding LAPD officer determinesthat the person should be arrested, he or sheshall transport the person to the concerneddivision for booking advice; and,

∗ Assigned LAPD investigating officers shallbe responsible for the investigation anddisposition of all firearms booked intoDepartment custody by CHP officers.

Controlled Substance Investigation. When aCalifornia Highway Patrol officer conducting

an investigation within the City determines thata person is illegally in possession of acontrolled substance and the arrest is within theresponsibility of the California HighwayPatrol, the following procedures shall apply:

∗ The LAPD watch commander givingbooking approval may conduct apreliminary drug test, on felony arrests, tocorroborate the arresting officer's opinion.A preliminary drug test shall be completedfor misdemeanor arrests. Booking adviceshall be provided on a Booking Approval,Form 12.31;

∗ California Highway Patrol officers shallcomplete all related reports prior to leavingthe booking facility. DR numbers shall beobtained by the supervisor approving thereports (4/841);

Exception: When a female is to be booked atLos Angeles County Jail, all reports will becompleted and approved at Metropolitan JailSection after the arrestee is booked. When afemale is arrested in West Los Angeles orPacific Areas, all reports shall be completedand approved in the Area of arrest after thearrestee is booked at Valley Jail Section.

∗ California Highway Patrol officers shallbook the evidence as advised by thenarcotics investigator or watch commander;and,

∗ California Highway Patrol officers shall usethe CHP Supplemental Report, Form 556, inlieu of the Continuation Sheet, Form 15.9,and the CHP Felony Report format in lieuof the LAPD Arrest Report format.

Note: When necessary, a California HighwayPatrol supervisor shall be contacted to assist inresolving any problem in processing a CHParrestee.

860. BOOKING OUTSIDE POLICEAGENCY ARRESTEES.Bookings-General. The Los Angeles PoliceDepartment shall furnish jail facilities for adultprisoners arrested within the City by officers ofan outside police agency or Los AngelesDepartment of Transportation (LADOT)Investigators.

The Area Detective Division watchcommanders shall be responsible for bookingand arrest report approval during DetectiveDivision operational hours of 0600 to 0200 hrs.Bookings made by officers of an outside policeagency or LADOT Investigators outside thesehours shall be approved by an Area or JailDivision watch commander. The watchcommander providing that booking approvalshall ensure that the arresting outside agencyofficer furnishes juvenile arrest and bookinginformation to the Area/division teletypeoperator within 30 minutes of obtaining thebooking number.

Transportation of adult and juvenile arresteesto an outside custodial facility shall be theresponsibility of the arresting officers.



Excess personal property of such arresteesshall be accepted by this Department.

Exception: When an arrest is made by theCHP for an offense over which the CHP retainsinvestigative responsibility (4/851), no priorbooking approval from a member of thisDepartment shall be required. In such cases,the Arrest Disposition Report, Form 5.9 (pagelb of the Booking and Identification Record,Form 5.1), shall be given to the arrestingofficer.

When an arrest is made by the CHP for 10851V.C. (Driving Without Owner's Consent), thedetention officer shall ensure that the arrestingofficer has made telephonic notification to theconcerned detective division or, when thatdivision is closed, Detective Support Division.When a person wanted by this Department hasbeen arrested by the CHP outside of this Cityand subsequently transported to a Departmentfacility for booking, the concerned divisionalinvestigating officers shall be responsible forthe booking and related reports. When theinvestigating officers are not available, theconcerned watch commander shall cause anemployee of this Department to complete thebooking and necessary reports.

Evidence of Medical Treatment. Prior tobooking a sick or injured person at any LosAngeles Police Department (LAPD) facility,the arresting outside police agency or LADOTInvestigator shall provide evidence of medicaltreatment and medical authority to book, froma City approved contract hospital, to theapproving LAPD Watch Commander.

Complaints of Misconduct. In any case of acomplaint of misconduct against an officer ofan outside agency, the concerned Departmentsupervisor shall notify the supervisor in chargefrom that agency. When misconductconstituting a crime is alleged against theofficer, the concerned supervisor of thisDepartment shall ensure that the appropriatecrime report is taken and complete anEmployee's Report, Form 15.7, describing theallegation. The Employee's Report and a copyof the crime report shall be forwarded to theCommanding Officer, Internal Affairs Group(IAG). The Commanding Officer, IAG, shallforward copies of both reports to the seniorexecutive of the involved outside agency. Theoriginal crime report shall be processed in thenormal manner.

865. BOOKINGS BY OUTSIDEPOLICE AGENCIES. When an arrestee isbooked by an outside police agency, theDepartment detention officer shall include thefollowing information on the Booking andIdentification Record, Form 5.1:

∗ In the box entitled "DIV & DETAILARRESTING," insert the concernedagency's initials;

∗ In the box entitled "CHARGE," followingthe inserted charge, add the arraignmentcourt; and,

∗ In the box entitled "ARRESTINGOFFICER," insert the name and identifyingnumber of the arresting officer, followed bythe concerned agency's initials.

The following agency initials shall be used:

California Highway Patrol "CHP"Los Angeles Community Colleges

Police Department "LCPD"Los Angeles County Office of

Public Safety “OPS”Los Angeles Department of

General ServicesSecurity Division "GSSD"Transportation “LADOT”

Los Angeles Harbor DepartmentPort Warden "LHPW"

Los Angeles Unified SchoolPolice Department "LAUS"

Southern California Rapid TransitDistrict Police "SCRTD"

University of Southern CaliforniaDepartment of Public Safety "USCOPS"

870. ARRAIGNMENT OFPRISONERS BOOKED BY AN OUTSIDEPOLICE AGENCY. The detention officerhaving custody of a prisoner booked by anoutside police agency shall cause the prisonerto be transported to, and arraigned at, theproper court as an "LAPD case."

871. ARRAIGNMENT OR RELEASEOF PRISONERS OF CHPRESPONSIBILITY. The detention officerhaving custody of a misdemeanor prisonerbooked by the CHP shall cause the prisoner tobe transported to the proper arraignment court.Felony prisoners booked by the CHP will bereleased upon the receipt of a teletype from theCHP authorizing the release.

When it appears that a prisoner will not bearraigned on or before the second court dayfollowing the calendar day of arrest, thedetention officer shall notify the watchcommander at least two hours prior to theexpiration of the time limit. The watchcommander shall make a telephone notificationto the concerned CHP Area commander. Theprisoner shall not be detained past the timelimit. When a CHP officer has requested therelease of a prisoner and no teletypeauthorizing the release has been received, theCHP officer shall be referred to the concernedinvestigating officers or Detective SupportDivision. When the investigating officerdetermines that a release should be authorized,he/she shall complete an Investigator's FinalReport, Form 5.10.

Volume 4 - LINE PROCEDURESassets.lapdonline.org/assets/pdf/volume4.pdf · Volume 4 - LINE...

Documents

Transcript of Volume 4 - LINE PROCEDURESassets.lapdonline.org/assets/pdf/volume4.pdf · Volume 4 - LINE...